L-force catalogue

Automation systems
Drive solutions
Controls
Inverter
Motors
Gearboxes
Engineering Tools

Inverter: Servo Drives 9400 HighLine, Inverter Drives

8400 TopLine, Servo-Inverter i700
Contents of the L-force catalogue

About Lenze Lenze makes many things easy for you.

A matter of principle: the right products for every application.
L-force product portfolio

Automation systems Controller-based Automation 1.1

Drive-based automation 1.2

Drive solutions HighLine tasks 2.1

StateLine tasks 2.2
BaseLine tasks 2.3

Controls Visualisation Panel PC v800 3.1

Monitor v200 3.2
Cabinet Controllers Controller 3200 C 3.3
Controller c300 3.4
Panel Controllers Controller p500 3.5
Controller p300 3.6
' I/O System 1000 3.7

Inverter Decentralised Inverter Drives 8400 protec 4.1

Inverter Drives 8400 motec 4.2
Cabinet Servo Drives 9400 HighLine 4.3
Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine 4.4
Servo-Inverter i700 4.5
Inverter Drives 8400 HighLine 4.6
Inverter Drives 8400 StateLine 4.7

Motors Servo motors MCS synchronous servo motors 5.1

MCM synchronous servo motors 5.2
MD☐KS synchronous servo motors 5.3
MQA asynchronous servo motors 5.4
MCA asynchronous servo motors 5.5
Three-phase AC motors IE3 three-phase AC motors m540/m550-P 5.6
Inverter opt. three-phase AC motors MF 5.7
IE2 MH three-phase AC motors 5.8
IE1 MD three-phase AC motors 5.9
Lenze Smart Motor m300 5.10
IE3 three-phase AC motors m240-P 5.11
IE1/2 three-phase AC motors Basic MD/MH 5.12

Gearboxes Axial gearboxes g700-P planetary gearbox 6.1

MPR/MPG planetary gearboxes 6.2
g500-H helical gearboxes 6.3
g500-S shaft-mounted helical gearbox 6.4
Right-angle gearboxes g500-B bevel gearbox 6.5
Motor data Assignment see above 6.6

Engineering Tools Navigator 7.1

Drive Solution Designer 7.2
Drive Solution Catalogue 7.3
Engineer 7.4
PLC Designer 7.5
VisiWinNET® 7.6
EASY Starter 7.7

Selected portfolio

Additional portfolio
Lenze makes many
things easy for you.
With our motivated and committed approach, we work
together with you to create the best possible solution
and set your ideas in motion - whether you are looking
to optimise an existing machine or develop a new one.
We always strive to make things easy and seek perfec-
tion therein. This is anchored in our thinking, in our
services and in every detail of our products. It's as easy
as that!

1 2 3
Developing ideas Drafting concepts Implementing solutions

Are you looking to build the best machine We see welcome challenges in your machine Our easy formula for satisfied customers is
possible and already have some initial ideas? tasks, supporting you with our comprehens- to establish an active partnership with fast
Then get these down on paper together with ive expertise and providing valuable impetus decision making processes and an individu-
us, starting with small innovative details and for your innovations. We take a holistic view ally tailored offer. We have been using this
stretching all the way to completely new of the individual motion and control func- principle to meet the ever more specialised
machines. Working together, we will develop tions here and draw up consistent, end-to- customer requirements in the field of ma-
an intelligent and sustainable concept that end drive and automation solutions for you chine engineering for many years.
is perfectly aligned with your specific require- - keeping everything as easy as possible and
ments. as extensive as necessary.

4 5
Manufacturing machines Ensuring productivity

Functional diversity in perfect harmony: as Productivity, reliability and new performance

one of the few full-range providers in the peaks on a daily basis – these are our key
market, we can provide you with precisely success factors for your machine. After deliv-
those products that you actually need for any ery, we offer you cleverly devised service
machine task – no more and no less. Our L- concepts to ensure continued safe operation.
force product portfolio, a consistent platform The primary focus here is on technical sup-
for implementing drive and automation port, based on the excellent application ex-
tasks, is invaluable in this regard. pertise of our highly-skilled and knowledge-
able after-sales team.
A matter of prin-
ciple:
the right products
for every application.

Lenze's extensive L-force product portfolio follows a

very simple principle. The functions of our finely scaled
products are assigned to the three lines Base-Line, State-
Line or High-Line.

But what does this mean for you? It allows you to

quickly recognise which products represent the best
solution for your own specific requirements.

Powerful products with a major impact:

• Easy handling
• High quality and durability
• Reliable technologies in tune with the latest develop-
ments

Lenze products undergo the most stringent testing in

our own laboratory. This allows us to ensure that you
will receive consistently high quality and a long service
life. In addition to this, five logistics centres ensure that
the Lenze products you select are available for quick
delivery anywhere across the globe. It's as easy as that!
L-force product portfolio

Controls

Engineering Tools
L-force product portfolio

Inverter
L-force product portfolio

Motors
L-force product portfolio

Gearboxes
Inverter

Servo Drives 9400

HighLine
0.37 ... 240 kW
Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Contents

General information Product key 4.3 - 4

Product key for power supply modules and regenerative 4.3 - 6
power supply modules
List of abbreviations 4.3 - 7
Servo Drives 9400 Single Drive and Multi Drive 4.3 - 8
Functions and features 4.3 - 9
Basic dimensioning of axis modules 4.3 - 10
Dimensioning for DC-bus operation 4.3 - 11

Technical data Standards and operating conditions 4.3 - 13

Rated data for Single Drive 4.3 - 14
Rated data for Multi Drive 4.3 - 28

Interfaces Mains connection 4.3 - 36

Motor connection 4.3 - 38
Connection diagrams 4.3 - 39
Control connections 4.3 - 40
Overview of modules 4.3 - 42
Memory module 4.3 - 46
Safety modules 4.3 - 48
Extension module: digital frequency 4.3 - 50
Communication module: CANopen 4.3 - 52
DeviceNet communication module 4.3 - 54 4.3
EtherCAT® communication module 4.3 - 56
EtherNet communication module 4.3 - 58
EtherNet/IP communication module 4.3 - 60
PROFIBUS communication module 4.3 - 62
PROFINET communication module 4.3 - 64

Accessories Installation backplane 4.3 - 66

Brake modules 4.3 - 68
Brake resistors 4.3 - 70
Mains chokes 4.3 - 72
RFI and mains filters 4.3 - 73
Sinusoidal filters 4.3 - 75
Regenerative power supply modulesRated data for power supply modules 4.3 - 76
Rated data for regenerative power supply modules 4.3 - 78
Control connections 4.3 - 80
Brake resistors of the regenerative power supply modules 4.3 - 81
Mains chokes of the power supply modules 4.3 - 82
Interference suppression of the regenerative power supply 4.3 - 83
modules
' DC input module 4.3 - 86
DC-bus connection 4.3 - 87
24 V power supply unit 4.3 - 90
CAN bus connector 4.3 - 90
USB diagnostic adapter 4.3 - 91
X400 keypad 4.3 - 92
X400 diagnosis terminal 4.3 - 92
Shield connection kits for motor cable 4.3 - 92
Other accessories 4.3 - 92
 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Product key

4.3

4.3 - 4 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

4.3

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 5

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Product key for power supply modules and regenerative

power supply modules

4.3

4.3 - 6 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

List of abbreviations

b [mm] Dimensions DIAG Slot for diagnostic adapter

Cth [KWs] Thermal capacity DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.
fch [kHz] Rated switching frequency EN European standard
h [mm] Dimensions EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
i Ratio code)
IN, out [A] Rated output current EN 60721-3 Classification of environmental conditions; Part 3:
IN, AC [A] Rated mains current Classes of environmental parameters and their
limit values
IN, DC [A] Rated DC-bus current
EN 61800-3 Electrical variable speed drives Part 3: EMC require-
Ired, [A] Reduced output current
ments including special test methods
out
IEC 61131-2 Programmable logic controllers Part 2: Equipment
Ired, DC [A] Reduced DC-bus current
and tests
m [kg] Mass
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
nmax [r/min] Max. speed
IEC 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/program-
P [kW] Typical motor power mable electronic safety-related systems
PN [kW] Rated power IM International Mounting Code
Pmax, 1 [kW] Max. output power IP International Protection Code
Pmax, 2 [kW] Max. short-time output MMI Modular memory interface (memory module)
power
MSI Modular safety interface (safety module)
PV [kW] Power loss
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
RN [Ω] Rated resistance
UL Underwriters Laboratory Listed Product 4.3
Rmin [Ω] Min. brake resistance
UR Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Product
t [mm] Dimensions
VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association
U [V] Voltage drop of German Electrical Engineers)
UAC [V] Mains voltage
UDC [V] DC supply
UN, AC [V] Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] Rated voltage
Uout [V] Output voltage

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 7

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Servo Drives 9400 Single Drive and Multi Drive

Many technical advances make our day-to-day life easier. HighLine - for decentralised control concepts
A simply click is all that is needed and The Servo Drives 9400 HighLine feature intelligence in the drive and
• the lights come on are therefore designed for decentralised motion control applications
• a safety belt is engaged as well as for centralised control topologies.
• you can surf the Internet Lenze provides pre-programmed technology applications, e.g. table
• you can take a snapshot of your family. positioning, electronic gearbox and synchronism with mark registra-
tion for solving various applications simply by parameter setting. The
The Servo Drives 9400 will revolutionise your servo technology – with function block editor integrated into the L-force Engineer HighLevel
simple clicks. (PC setup tool) enables you to adapt the functions in an easy and
flexible manner.
Single drive The HighLine Servo Drive comes with the CANopen fieldbus, conven-
Our single-axis devices combine mains supply, DC bus and inverter tional I/Os, diagnostic LEDs, a diagnostic interface, a resolver and a
in a single unit. The filter elements and the brake chopper are integ- universal encoder input on board.
rated in the servo inverter and allow autonomous use in distributed In addition, the HighLine is equipped with two extension slots for
control cabinet installations. By using corresponding footprint filters communication or extension modules as well as one slot each for a
(up to 55 kW), greater interference suppression can be achieved memory module and a safety module, so that the drive can be optim-
without additional mounting area. ally adapted to your requirements.

Multi Drive
Our multi-axis drives are particularly suitable for centralised, compact
multi-axis installations. The energy exchange via the DC bus reduces
the power requirement on the mains side. The axes share the same
mains supply, brake chopper and EMC filter. The parts requirements
4.3 and installation work are thus significantly reduced. The integrated
DC busbar system provides for compact installations for drives rated
up to 15 kW.

Servo Drives 9400 Single Drive and Servo Drives 9400 Multi Drive

4.3 - 8 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Functions and features

Mode
Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Conrol types, motor control
Field-oriented servo control (SC) For synchronous servo motors, asynchronous servo motors and three-phase
asynchronous motors
Sensorless control (SLPSM) For synchronous servo motors
V/f control (VFCplus) For three-phase AC motors and asynchronous servo motor (linear or square-law)
Basic functions
Freely assignable user menu
Free function block interconnection with extensive function library
Parameter change-over
DC brake function
Brake management for brake control with low rate of wear
Flying restart circuit
S-shaped ramps for smooth acceleration
PID controller
Operating modes to CiA 402 - Homing mode
Interpolated position mode
Cyclic synchronous position (csp) - cyclic position setpoint
Cyclic synchronous velocity (csv) - cyclic velocity setpoint
Cyclic synchronous torque (cst) - cyclic torque setpoint 4.3
Evaluation of ENP (ETS) For Lenze servo motors
Technology applications
Speed actuating drive
Torque actuating drive
Electronic gearbox
Synchronism with mark registration
Table positioning
Positioning sequence control
Advanced functions Function blocks for cam function
Monitoring and protective measures
Short circuit
Earth fault
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Motor phase failure
Overcurrent
I² x t-Motor monitoring
Overtemperature
Motor overtemperature
Brake chopper, brake resistance
Fan
Motor stalling
Diagnostics
Data logger, logbook, oscilloscope functions
Status display 6 LEDs
Diagnostic interface Integrated
For USB diagnostic adapter or keypad (diagnosis terminal)
Braking operation
Brake chopper Integrated in Single Drives
Brake resistor External

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 9

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Basic dimensioning of axis modules

The most important steps for dimensioning Single Drive and Multi • Selecting the axis module
Drive axis modules are listed here: The axis modules are selected on the basis of the maximum cur-
rents and power required.
• Motor power required Depending on the drive, the 9400 Servo Drives and the power
First, the maximum torque required Mmax, the maximum speed supply modules can be operated for overload time tol with maxim-
nmax, the effective torque Meff and - for geared motors - the um output current Imax, provided that the drive is then operated
transmission ratio i are determined from the system data. for recovery time tre with a reduced output current.
The switching frequency is automatically adapted to the rate of
• Motor selection utilisation.
Based on these values, the appropriate servo motor can be selected
from the MCS (synchronous motors), MCA, MQA or MDFQA (asyn-
chronous motors) ranges.

Imax

IN
4.3

Ired

0 t
tol tre
Maximum output current cycle

• Braking operation
If high moments of inertia are to be braked or if extended operation
in generator mode is to be executed, braking energy can be transferred
to an external brake resistor or converted into heat with Single Drive
axis modules or with power supply modules via the integrated brake
chopper.
The brake chopper can dissipate the continuous braking power PN on
a continual basis (case A) or the peak braking power Pmax for the
running time ton followed by the recovery time tre (case B).

P
0 1
Pmax

PN

0 t
tre ton tre ton tre
Brake chopper output power

4.3 - 10 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

Dimensioning for DC-bus operation

Dimensioning of DC-bus operation for axis modules

The most effective way of determining the correct power supply

module for a multi-axis application is if the time/power diagrams for
the complete machine cycle are available for all axis modules. Adding
together the simultaneous individual power levels gives the required
overall power and thereby the minimum power of the power supply
module. The necessary braking power or regenerative power can be
determined in the same way.

ƒ The axis modules in the interconnection can be easily implemen-

ted using DSD. Including an energy analysis and Energy Perform-
ance Certificate.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
P res

P res
0 t 4.3

P1

P2

P3

P4

0 t

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Time/power diagram of a multi-axis servo system

P 1…P4 = individual power of axis 1…axis 4
Pres = addition of individual powers
Pres 1-4 = mean value of individual powers

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 11

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
General information

4.3

4.3 - 12 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Standards and operating conditions

Conformity
CE Low-Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU [UKCA: S.I. 2016/1101]
EAC TP TC 004/2011 (TR CU 004/2011)
TP TC 020/2011 (TR CU 020/2011)
Approval
UL 61800-5-1 Power Conversion Equipment (file no. E132659)
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20 1)
NEMA 250 Type 1
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C … +55°C)
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Current derating at over 1000 m [%/1000 5
m]
Vibration resistance 4.3
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2M2
Operation (Germanischer Lloyd) 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 13.2 Hz: ± 1 mm amplitude
13.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 100 Hz: 0.7 g
1) Not in the wire range of the on the motor-side terminals

Supply form
Systems with earthed star point (TN and TT systems)
Systems with high-resistance or isolated star point (IT systems) 2)
Discharge current to PE
EN 61800-5-1 l [mA] > 3.5 mA, fixed installation required, PE must be reinforced
Noise emission
EN 61800-3 Cable-guided disturbance:
Max. shielded motor cable lengths for compliance with EMC protection
requirement C2 without external filters
E94AS☐E0024 to E94AS☐E0244: 10 m
E94AS☐E0324 to E94AS☐E1044: 50 m
Max. shielded motor cable lengths for compliance with EMC protection
requirement C3 without external filters
E94BS☐E1454 up to E94BS☐E4604: 150 m
Noise immunity
EN 61800-3 Category C3
Insulation resistance
EN 61800-5-1 Overvoltage category III
Above 2000 m amsl overvoltage category II
Degree of pollution
EN 61800-5-1 2
Protective insulation of control circuits
EN 61800-5-1 for digital inputs and outputs
Safe mains isolation: double/reinforced insulation
2) For the device sizes 366 A and 460 A on request

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 13

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.50 3.00
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0024 E94AS☐E0034 E94AS☐E0044 E94AS☐E0074
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 1.5 2.5 3.9 7.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 2.1 3.5 5.5 9.9
Rated output current
4.3 IN, out [A] 1.5 2.5 4.0 7.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 1.9 3) 3.1 3) 5.0 3) 8.8 3)
4 kHz Iout [A] 1.9 3) 3.1 3) 5.0 3) 8.8 3)
8 kHz Iout [A] 1.5 2.5 4.0 7.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 1.1 1.9 3.0 5.3

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 1, 4)

Imax, out [A] 2.8 4.7 7.5 13.1
Reduced output current 1, 4)
Ired, out [A] 1.40 2.30 3.80 6.60
Overload time 1, 4)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 1, 4)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 1, 4)

Imax, out [A] 6.0 10.0 16.0 21.0
Reduced output current 1, 4)
Ired, out [A] 1.40 2.30 3.80 6.60
Overload time 1, 4)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 1, 4)
tre [s] 4.5
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

3) Operation only permitted with mains choke or mains filter

4) Mains filter necessary. Without a mains filter, the indicated values for Imax
and Ired decrease

4.3 - 14 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.50 3.00
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0024 E94AS☐E0034 E94AS☐E0044 E94AS☐E0074
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 2.6 4.3 6.7 12.1
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.110 0.130 0.160 0.210 4.3
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 60 90
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 4.0 5.3
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 25
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 10
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 50 100

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 1.3 1.9 2.6
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 6.4 11.2
Running time 1)
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 4.3 4.4 4.2
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 82.0 47.0
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 15

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 5.50 7.50 11.0
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0134 E94AS☐E0174 E94AS☐E0244
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 11.8 15.0 20.5
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 16.8 21.0 29.0
Rated output current
4.3 IN, out [A] 13.0 16.5 23.5
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 16.3 3) 20.6 3) 29.4 3)
4 kHz Iout [A] 16.3 3) 20.6 3) 29.4 3)
8 kHz Iout [A] 13.0 16.5 23.5
16 kHz Iout [A] 9.8 12.4 17.6

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2, 4)

Imax, out [A] 24.4 30.9 44.1
Reduced output current 2, 4)
Ired, out [A] 12.2 15.5 22.1
Overload time 2, 4)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2, 4)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2, 4)

Imax, out [A] 39.0 49.5 58.8
Reduced output current 2, 4)
Ired, out [A] 12.2 15.5 22.1
Overload time 2, 4)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2, 4)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

3) Operation only permitted with mains choke or mains filter

4) Mains filter necessary. Without a mains filter, the indicated values for Imax
and Ired decrease

4.3 - 16 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 5.50 7.50 11.0
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0134 E94AS☐E0174 E94AS☐E0244
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 20.6 25.7 35.5
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.320 0.380 0.500 4.3
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 120
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 8.1
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 25
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 10
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 4.7 6.4 9.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 29.2
Running time 1)
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 4.2 4.3 3.9
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 18.0
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 17

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 15.0 22.0 30.0
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0324 E94AS☐E0474 E94AS☐E0594
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 29.0 43.0 54.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 29.0 43.0 54.0
4.3 Rated output current
IN, out [A] 32.0 47.0 59.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8 4
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 38.4 47.0 59.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 38.4 47.0 59.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 32.0 41.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 16.8 21.5

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 57.6 70.5 88.5
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 28.8 35.3 44.3
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 76.8 94.0 118.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 28.8 35.3 44.3
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 18 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 15.0 22.0 30.0
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0324 E94AS☐E0474 E94AS☐E0594
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 36.0 53.0 66.0
Power loss
4.3
PV [kW] 0.700 1.050 1.122
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 556
Height, including fastening h [mm] 606
Width b [mm] 206
Depth t [mm] 294
Mass
m [kg] 26.5
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 50
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 50
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 12.6 18.6 25.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 29.2 35.0
Running time 1)
ton [s] 260.0 320.0 430.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 340.0 280.0 170.0
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 18.0 15.0
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 19

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 45.0 55.0
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0864 E94AS☐E1044
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 79.0 95.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 79.0 95.0
4.3 Rated output current
IN, out [A] 86.0 104.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 86.0 104.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 86.0 104.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 73.0 78.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 38.3 41.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 129.0 156.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 64.5 78.0
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 172.0 208.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 64.5 78.0
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 20 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 45.0 55.0
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94AS☐E0864 E94AS☐E1044
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 96.8 116.4
Power loss
PV [kW] 1.500 1.800
Dimensions
4.3
Height h [mm] 655
Height, including fastening h [mm] 706
Width b [mm] 266
Depth t [mm] 370
Mass
m [kg] 42.0
Max. cable length
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 50
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 37.9 46.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 70.1
Running time 1)
ton [s] 320.0 400.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 280.0 200.0
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 7.5
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 21

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 75.0 85.0 3) 95.0 4) 90.0 105 3) 110 4) 105 125 3) 135 4)
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94BS☐E1454 E94BS☐E1724 E94BS☐E2024
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 138.0 164.0 192.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 145.0 172.0 202.0
4.3
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 145.0 160.0 177.0 172.0 195.0 212.0 202.0 240.0 260.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 145.0 172.0 202.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 102.0 120.0 131.0
16 kHz Iout [A]

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 218.0 195.0 258.0 233.0 303.0 286.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 109 145 168 129 180 201 152 226 247
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 10 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 261.0 218.0 195.0 310.0 258.0 233.0 364.0 303.0 286.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 109 145 168 129 180 201 152 226 247
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

3) This column applies to an ambient temperature of 40 °C and a fixed switching

frequency of 2 kHz.
4) The column is valid at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius, with a
fixed switching frequency of 2 kHz and a max. mains voltage of AC 440 V.

4.3 - 22 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 75.0 85.0 95.0 90.0 105 110 105 125 135
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94BS☐E1454 E94BS☐E1724 E94BS☐E2024
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 171.0 203.0 239.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 2.100 2.200 2.600
Dimensions
4.3
Height h [mm] 923
Height, including fastening h [mm] 950
Width b [mm] 285 345
Depth t [mm] 395
Mass
m [kg] 64.0 77.0
Max. cable length
shielded C3 without external measures lmax [m] 150
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 150

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 31.5 36.7 45.1
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 105.1 122.2 150.2
Running time 1)
ton [s] 60.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 540.0
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 5.0 4.3 3.5
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 23

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 130 160 3) 165 4) 150 190 3) 210 4)
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94BS☐E2454 E94BS☐E2924
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 236.0 285.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 245.0 292.0
4.3
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 2
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 245.0 302.0 315.0 292.0 361.0 395.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 209.0 251.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 160.0 191.0
16 kHz Iout [A]

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 368.0 347.0 438.0 435.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 184 275 299 219 330 375
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 10 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 441.0 368.0 347.0 526.0 438.0 435.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 184 275 299 219 330 375
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

3) This column applies to an ambient temperature of 40 °C and a fixed switching

frequency of 2 kHz.
4) The column is valid at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius, with a
fixed switching frequency of 2 kHz and a max. mains voltage of AC 440 V.

4.3 - 24 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 130 160 165 150 190 210
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94BS☐E2454 E94BS☐E2924
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 290.0 343.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 3.300 4.100
Dimensions
4.3
Height h [mm] 923 1063
Height, including fastening h [mm] 950 1090
Width b [mm] 345
Depth t [mm] 395
Mass
m [kg] 77.0 80.0
Max. cable length
shielded C3 without external measures lmax [m] 150
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 150

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 56.3 68.6
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 187.7 228.5
Running time 1)
ton [s] 60.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 540.0
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 2.8 2.3
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 25

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 190 235 3) 250 4) 240 290 3) 315 4)
Product key 1)
Single Drive E94BS☐E3664 E94BS☐E4604
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 349.0 436.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 366.0 460.0
4.3
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 2
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 366.0 443.0 480.0 460.0 550.0 600.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 313.0 368.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 240.0 260.0
16 kHz Iout [A]

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 549.0 528.0 690.0 660.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 275 415 456 345 522 570
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 10 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 659.0 549.0 528.0 828.0 690.0 660.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 275 415 456 345 522 570
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

3) This column applies to an ambient temperature of 40 °C and a fixed switching

frequency of 2 kHz.
4) The column is valid at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius, with a
fixed switching frequency of 2 kHz and a max. mains voltage of AC 440 V.

4.3 - 26 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Single Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V or DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 190 235 250 240 290 315
Product key 2)
Single Drive E94BS☐E3664 E94BS☐E4604
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 434.0 544.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 4.900 6.200
Dimensions
4.3
Height h [mm] 1522
Height, including fastening h [mm] 1522
Width b [mm] 500
Depth t [mm] 544
Mass
m [kg] 189.0
Max. cable length
shielded C3 without external measures lmax [m] 150
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 150

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper 1)

PN [kW] 90.1 99.0
Max. output power, Brake chopper 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 300.4 375.0
Running time 1)
ton [s] 60.0 30.0
Recovery time 1)
tre [s] 540.0 270.0
Min. brake resistance 1)
Rmin [Ω] 1.8 1.4
2) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

1) 10 - See diagram

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 27

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.50
Product key -1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0024 E94AM☐E0034 E94AM☐E0044
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 1.5 2.5 4.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8
4.3 Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 1.9 3.1 5.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 1.9 3.1 5.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 1.5 2.5 4.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 1.1 1.9 3.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 2.8 4.7 7.5
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 1.40 2.30 3.80
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 6.0 10.0 16.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 1.40 2.30 3.80
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 28 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.75 1.50
Product key 1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0024 E94AM☐E0034 E94AM☐E0044
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 2.6 4.3 6.7
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.100 0.120 0.150
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 4.3
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 60
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 4.0
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 25
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 10
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 50
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 29

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 3.00 4.00 5.50
Product key -1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0074 E94AM☐E0094 E94AM☐E0134
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 7.0 9.3 13.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8
4.3 Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 8.8 11.7 16.3
4 kHz Iout [A] 8.8 11.7 16.3
8 kHz Iout [A] 7.0 9.3 13.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 5.3 7.0 9.8

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 13.1 17.5 24.4
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 6.60 8.80 12.2
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 21.0 28.0 39.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 6.60 8.80 12.2
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 30 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 3.00 4.00 5.50
Product key -1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0074 E94AM☐E0094 E94AM☐E0134
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 12.1 15.4 20.6
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.190 0.230 0.280
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 4.3
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 90 120
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 5.3 8.1
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 25
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 10
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 31

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 7.50 11.0 15.0
Product key -1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0174 E94AM☐E0244 E94AM☐E0324
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 16.5 23.5 32.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 8
4.3 Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 20.6 29.4 40.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 20.6 29.4 40.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 16.5 23.5 32.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 12.4 17.6 24.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 30.9 44.1 60.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 15.5 22.1 30.0
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 49.5 70.5 76.8
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 15.5 22.1 30.0
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 32 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 7.50 11.0 15.0
Product key 1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0174 E94AM☐E0244 E94AM☐E0324
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 25.7 35.5 48.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.320 0.420 0.490
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 4.3
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 120
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 8.1
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 25
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 10
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 33

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 22.0 30.0
Product key -1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0474 E94AM☐E0594
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 460 -0% ... 740 V +0%
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 47.0 59.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
4.3
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 47.0 59.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 47.0 59.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 41.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 21.5

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 70.5 88.5
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 35.3 44.3
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time output current 2)

Imax, out [A] 94.0 118.0
Reduced output current 2)
Ired, out [A] 35.3 44.3
Overload time 2)
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time 2)
tre [s] 4.5
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

2) 10 - See diagram

4.3 - 34 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Technical data

Rated data for Multi Drive

ƒ The data is valid for operation at DC 565 V.

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.
ƒ IN, DC: R.m.s. value, consisting of DC current and harmonic current.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 22.0 30.0
Product key 1)
Multi Drive E94AM☐E0474 E94AM☐E0594
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 53.0 66.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 1.050 1.122
Dimensions
4.3
Height h [mm] 556
Height, including fastening h [mm] 606
Width b [mm] 206
Depth t [mm] 294
Mass
m [kg] 26.5
Max. cable length
shielded C1 with external measures lmax [m] 50
shielded C2 without external measures lmax [m] 50
shielded C2 with external measures lmax [m] 100
1) 1 - Please refer to the Product key section

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 35

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Mains connection

ƒ The mains fuse and cable cross-section specifications are for a

mains connection of 1 x 230V or 3 x 400V.
ƒ Class gG/gl fuses or class gRL semiconductor fuses.
ƒ The cable cross-sections apply to PVC-insulated copper cables.
ƒ Use for installation with UL-approved cables, fuses and brackets.

Operation with mains choke

Typical mo- Mains Product key Circuit breaker Fuse Mains connection
tor power voltage
4-pole Single Drive EN 60204-1 UL Cross-section (with
asynchron- mains choke)
ous motor
P UAC I I I q
[kW] [V] [A] [A] [A] [mm2]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
0.75 E94AS☐E0034 C10 10 10 1.5
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
3 AC 340 …
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 C16 16 15
528 2.5
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 C20 20 20
4.3
7.50 E94AS☐E0174 C25 25 4.0
32
11.0 E94AS☐E0244 C32 30 10.0

4.3 - 36 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Mains connection

ƒ The mains fuse and cable cross-section specifications are for a

mains connection of 1 x 230V or 3 x 400V.
ƒ Class gG/gl fuses or class gRL semiconductor fuses.
ƒ The cable cross-sections apply to PVC-insulated copper cables.
ƒ Use for installation with UL-approved cables, fuses and brackets.

Operation without mains choke

Typical mo- Mains Product key Circuit breaker Fuse Mains connection
tor power voltage
4-pole Single Drive EN 60204-1 UL Cross-section
asynchron- (without mains
ous motor choke)
P UAC I I I q
[kW] [V] [A] [A] [A] [mm2]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
0.75 E94AS☐E0034 C10 10 10 1.5
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 C16 16 15
2.5
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 C20 20 20 4.3
7.50 E94AS☐E0174 C25 32 25 4.0
11.0 E94AS☐E0244 C40
50 40 10.0
15.0 E94AS☐E0324
22.0 E94AS☐E0474 63 60 16.0
3 AC 340 …
30.0 E94AS☐E0594 80 80 25.0
528
45.0 E94AS☐E0864 100 100 50.0
55.0 E94AS☐E1044 125 125
70.0
75.0 E94BS☐E1454 200
90.0 E94BS☐E1724 250 95.0
105 E94BS☐E2024 315
150.0
130 E94BS☐E2454 350
150 E94BS☐E2924 400 185.0
190 E94BS☐E3664 240.0
500
240 E94BS☐E4604 150.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 37

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Motor connection

ƒ Keep motor cables as short as possible, as this has a positive effect

on the drive behaviour.
ƒ With group drives (multiple motors on one inverter), the resulting
cable length is the key factor. This can be calculated using the
hardware manual.
ƒ Electric strength of the motor cable: 1 kV as per VDE 250-1.

Typical mo- Mains Product key Max. cable length

tor power voltage
4-pole Single Drive shielded C1 with ex- shielded C2 without shielded C2 with ex- shielded C3 without
asynchron- ternal measures external measures ternal measures external measures
ous motor
P UAC lmax lmax lmax lmax
[kW] [V] [m] [m] [m] [m]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
50
0.75 E94AS☐E0034
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 25 10
5.50 E94AS☐E0134

4.3 7.50 E94AS☐E0174

11.0 E94AS☐E0244
100
15.0 E94AS☐E0324
22.0 E94AS☐E0474
3 AC 340 …
30.0 E94AS☐E0594 50 50
528
45.0 E94AS☐E0864
55.0 E94AS☐E1044
75.0 E94BS☐E1454
90.0 E94BS☐E1724
105 E94BS☐E2024
130 E94BS☐E2454 150 150
150 E94BS☐E2924
190 E94BS☐E3664
240 E94BS☐E4604

4.3 - 38 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Connection diagrams

Wiring example for connecting Servo Drives 9400 HighLine to 3 x 400V

4.3

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 39

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Control connections

Mode
Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Analog inputs
Number 2
Resolution 11 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
1 x switchable 20mA
Analog outputs
Number 2
Resolution 10 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
max. 2 mA
Digital inputs
Number 8
Touch-probe-capable 8
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. input current 8mA
Digital outputs
4.3 Number 4
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. output current 50mA
Load capacity >480 Ω at 24 V
External DC supply
Rated voltage 24 V in accordance with IEC 61131-2
Voltage range 19.2 … 28.8 V, max. residual ripple ± 5%
Current Single Drive: approx. 1.2 A during operation, max. 3 A starting current for 100 ms
1)

Multi Drive: approx. 2.4 A during operation, max. 4 A starting current for 100 ms
Interfaces
CANopen Integrated
Extensions Via slot MXI 2: extension 2
Via slot MXI 1: extension 1
State bus Integrated
Memory Slot MMI
Safety engineering Slot MSI
Drive interface
Resolver input Integrated
Sub-D, 9-pin
Encoder input Sub-D, 15-pin
Multiple encoder input for: SinCos/TTL incremental encoder, SinCos absolute value
encoder single-turn/multi-turn (HIPERFACE® / Endat V2.1)
SSI encoder with Stegmann SSI protocol as position encoder or master encoder
with minimum cycle time of 1 ms
Motor temperature Input on the device: PTC evaluation
Via feedback: KTY evaluation
Motor brake Optional, in installation backplane up to 32 A or in axis module from 32 A
1) The supply voltage for the control electronics comes from the mains voltage.
Alternatively, it can be provided by a 24 V supply that is independent of the
mains (available as an option).

4.3 - 40 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Control connections

Connection of analog inputs and outputs

Connection of digital inputs and outputs Connection of digital inputs and outputs

4.3

Resolver connection Encoder connection

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 41

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Overview of modules

For adaptation to the machine requirements, up to four different

modules can be used to adjust the Servo Drives 9400 and regenerative
power supply modules. The following slots are available:
• memory modules:
(slot MMI) required for operation,
• safety modules:
(slot MSI) required for operation
• extension modules:
(slot MXI 1 and/or MXI 2)

The tables below show the modules available for Servo Drive 9400
and the regenerative power supply modules.
Axis module with module slots MXI, MMI and MSI

Memory module

Slot Mode Product key Mode

Memory module HighLine Regen. module

Motion control
4.3 MMI HighLevel E94AYM22 Standard Standard
MM220

Motion control
MMI TopLevel E94AYM33 Option
MM330

Motion control
MMI TopLevel E94AYM43 Option
MM430

4.3 - 42 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Overview of modules

Safety modules

Slot Mode Product key Mode

Safety module HighLine Regen. module

MSI SM0 E94AYAA Standard Standard

MSI SM100 E94AYAB Option

MSI SM301 E94AYAE Option

4.3

MSI SM302 E94AYAF Option

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 43

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Overview of modules

Extension modules

Slot Mode Product key Mode

Extension module HighLine Regen. module

MXI1
Digital frequency E94AYFLF Option
MXI2

Communication modules

Slot Mode Product key Mode

Communication module HighLine Regen. module

MXI1
CANopen E94AYCCA Option Option
MXI2

4.3
MXI1
DeviceNet E94AYCDN Option Option
MXI2

MXI1
EtherCAT E94AYCET Option Option
MXI2

MXI1
Ethernet E94AYCEN Option Option
MXI2

MXI1
EtherNet/IP E94AYCEO Option Option
MXI2

MXI1
PROFIBUS E94AYCPM Option Option
MXI2

MXI1
PROFINET E94AYCER Option Option
MXI2

4.3 - 44 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Overview of modules

Assignment of extension modules and module slots (HighLine)

Two module slots on the Servo Drives 9400 are intended for exten-
sions. The following table lists the possible combinations.

MXI 1
E94AYFLF E94AYCCA E94AYCDN E94AYCET E94AYCEN E94AYCEO E94AYCPM E94AYCER
MXI 2
E94AYFLF ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCCA ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCDN ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCET ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCEN ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCEO ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCPM 1) ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCER 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1) Module slot MXI 1 must be used for PROFIsafe.

4.3
Assignment of extension modules and the module slot for the regen-
erative power supply module

Two module slots on the regenerative power supply modules are in-
tended for extensions. The following table lists the possible combin-
ations.

MXI 1
E94AYCCA E94AYCDN E94AYCET E94AYCEN E94AYCEO E94AYCPM E94AYCER
MXI 2
E94AYCCA ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCDN ● ● ● ●
E94AYCET ● ● ● ●
E94AYCEN ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCEO ● ● ● ● ● ●
E94AYCPM ● ● ● ●
E94AYCER ● ● ● ● ●

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 45

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Memory module

Various memory modules are available for the Servo Drives 9400:
• Motion Control HighLevel (MM220)
• Motion Control TopLevel (MM330 and MM430)
With these modules, the functions described below are activated.
The functions can be loaded into the drive using L-force Engineer.
In addition to the different functions of the Runtime software ver-
sions, different memory sizes or a real-time clock function (battery-
backed) are available, depending on which memory module is used.

MM330 memory module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Memory module

• Application and parameter storage

Motion control
• -
HighLevel MMI E94AYM22
• Address switch and baud rate setting for onboard system bus
MM220
CANopen

• Application and parameter storage

Motion control
• -
TopLevel MMI E94AYM33
• Address switch and baud rate setting for onboard system bus
4.3 MM330
CANopen

4.3 - 46 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Memory module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Memory module
• Application and parameter storage
Motion control • -
TopLevel • Address switch and baud rate setting for onboard system bus MMI E94AYM43
MM430 CANopen
• Real-time clock (battery-buffered)

Product key
E94AYM22 E94AYM33 E94AYM43
Mode
Memory module Motion control Motion control Motion control
HighLevel TopLevel TopLevel
MM220 MM330 MM430
Storage medium
Flash memory [MB] 2.00 4.00 8.00
Additional function
Real-time clock No Yes
System bus addressing Yes 4.3
switch (CAN)

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 47

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Safety modules

For virtually any application, the provision of extensive safety engin-

eering is one of the most important tasks of the plant constructor.
However, this issue can only be solved with the help of complicated
wiring. Thanks to the "Drive-based Safety" solution that can be integ-
rated in servo drives 9400, this can be implemented using axis mod-
ules. The safety engineering, which can be integrated as an option,
has a modular structure.
The range of functions begins with the "safe torque off" function
(formerly "safe standstill") and extends as far as integration in safety
bus systems. The modular approach of drive-based safety also provides
the option for expanding systems in future and, at the same time,
ensures flexibility.

The following modules are available with safety functions in accord- SM301 safety module
ance with IEC 61800-5-2:
• SM0 (necessary for the MSI slot if no safety functions are required)
• SM100
• SM301
• SM302

Mode
Safety module SM100 SM301 SM302
4.3 Function
Safe torque off (STO) ● ● ●
Safety sensor connection ● ● ●
Safe stop 1 (SS1) ● ●
Safe stop 2 (SS2) 1) ● ●
Safe operational stop (SOS) 1) ● ●
Safely limited speed (SLS) 1) ● ●
Safe maximum speed (SMS) 1) ● ●
Safe speed monitoring (SSM) 1) ● ●
Safe direction (SDI) 1) ● ●
Operation mode selector (OMS) with enable ● ●
switch (ES)
Safely limited increment (SLI) 1) ● ●
Cascading of the STO safety function ● ●
Safe limited position (SLP) 1) ●
Position-dependent safely limited speed (PDSS) ●
1)

Safe cam (SCA) 1) ●

Safety bus PROFIsafe PROFIBUS DP PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO (optionally via MXI1)
(optionally via MXI1)
Safety bus FSoE EtherCAT
(optionally via MXI1)
Operation with safety PLC Optional Optional
Transmission of position and speed data to safety PROFIsafe or FSoE
control
Certification according to IEC 61508 Cat 4 Cat 3 Cat 4
PL e / SIL 3 PL e / SIL 3 PL e / SIL 3
1) For speed-dependent safety functions, the motor-feedback system combina-
tions listed on the following page are available.

4.3 - 48 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Safety modules

Product key
E94AYAA E94AYAB E94AYAE E94AYAF
Mode
Safety module SM0 SM100 SM301 SM302
Certification
EN 954-1 Category 4 Category 3 Category 4
EN ISO 13849-1 PLe PLe PLe
Fail-safe state
Safe torque off Safe torque off Safe torque off
Safe inputs/outputs
Number of connectable active safety 1 4, choice between 4, choice between
sensors active or passive active or passive
Number of connectable passive safety 4, choice between 4, choice between
sensors active or passive active or passive
Monitor (1-channel output) 1
Diagnostics
Status display 2 LEDs 6 LEDs 6 LEDs
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0 24.0 24.0 4.3

Speed-dependent safety functions in connection with

the safety modules SM301 and SM 302

For the following speed-dependent safety functions, the motor- • Safe direction (SDI)
feedback system combinations listed in the following table are • Operation mode selector (OMS) with enable switch (ES)
available: • Safe speed monitor (SSM)
• Safe stop 1 (SS1) • Safely limited increment (SLI).
• Safe stop 2 (SS2) • Position-dependent safely limited speed (PDSS)
• Safe operational stop (SOS) • Safely limited position (SLP)
• Safely limited speed (SLS) • Safe cam (SCA)
• Safe maximum speed (SMS)

Encoder type Encoder type Product key Safe speed monitor-

ing
Single-turn AS1024-8V-K2
SinCos absolute value PL d/SIL 2
Synchronous servo Multi-turn AM1024-8V-K2
motors (MCS, MDXKS) Resolver RV03 PL e/SIL 3
2-encoder concept up to PL e / SIL 3

Encoder type Encoder type Product key Safe speed monitor-

ing
SinCos incremental Multi-turn IG1024-5V-V3
Asynchronous servo PL e/SIL 3
Resolver RV03
motors (MCA, MQA)
2-encoder concept up to PL e / SIL 3

Please refer to the servo motors catalogue for details on the concrete A "2-encoder concept" is a resolver as motor feedback unit and, at
assignments of the individual motor frame sizes and the correspond- the same time, an absolute value encoder (SinCos), and incremental
ing technical properties. encoder (TTL), an SSI encoder or bus encoder as position encoder at
the machine

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 49

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Extension module: digital frequency

Some applications require several axes to be operated in synchronism.

What was formerly implemented by means of the line shaft, can now
be achieved in the Servo Drives 9400 HighLine with the digital fre-
quency extension module.
The extension module provides a digital frequency input and output.
The signals of the different axes can thus be looped through and
simulated.

Extension module: digital frequency

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• Digital frequency 0 to 500 kHz
• Up to three slave drives connect-
MXI1
able E94AYFLF
MXI2
• Sub-D connection for LFin and
4.3 LFout

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYFLF
Mode
Communication module
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 50 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Extension module: digital frequency

Rated data

Product key
E94AYFLF
Mode
System cables Type: EYD
Digital frequency
Input f [kHz] 0 to 500 (TTL)
Output f [kHz] 0 to 500 (TTL)
Feedback
Incremental encoder type TTL encoder
Incremental encoder signal 2 signals of 5 V offset by 90°
Sequence connections
In parallel 3 drives
In series For 250 kHz 20 drives
For 500 kHz 10 drives
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 50
Rated voltage 4.3
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 51

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Communication module: CANopen

The Servo Drives 9400 HighLine and the regenerative power supply
modules have a CANopen interface on board as a standard feature.
It enables the axis modules to communicate with each other and
with other system bus components (e.g. I/O systems or HMIs).
If a second CANopen interface is necessary for system networking,
the CANopen communication module can be used for this purpose.
CANopen is a communication protocol based on CAN physics. Its
specifications are determined by the CiA user group (CAN in Automa-
tion). Compatibility with the Lenze system bus (CAN) can be estab-
lished by means of configuration.

Communication module: AS-Interface

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• CANopen profile DS301, V4.02
Lenze system bus
• Automatic baud rate detection
• 2 LEDs for communication status MXI1
CANopen E94AYCCA
4.3 display MXI2
• DIP switch for selecting baud rate
and address
• Sub-D connection

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCCA
Mode
Communication module CANopen
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 13.2 Hz ± 1 mm amplitude,
13.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 100 Hz:
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 52 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

Communication module: CANopen

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCCA
Communication
Medium DIN ISO 11898
Communication profile CANopen, DS301 V4.02
Lenze system bus
Baud rate
b [kBit/s] 10
20
50
125
250
500
800
1000
Node
Slave
Multi-master
Network topology 4.3
Line with terminating resistors (120 ohm) at both ends
Number of logical process data channels
4 (each with 1 - 8 bytes)
Number of logic parameter data channels
5
Number of bus nodes
127
Without repeaters: 110
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
per bus segment 1) lmax [m] 17 for 1000 kbps
40 for 800 kbps
110 for 500 kbps
290 for 250 kbps
630 for 125 kbps
1500 for 50 kbps
3900 for 20 kbps
8000 for 10 kbps
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0
1) Max.bus cable lengths also depend on the number of nodes and the cable
cross-section used.

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 53

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

DeviceNet communication module

The American automation specialist Allan Bradley developed the

DeviceNet fieldbus based on the CAN controller. This communication
profile is published by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association)
user organisation. A large number of sensors and actuators are
available. Similar to CANopen, a DeviceNet master is used to control
the DeviceNet.

DeviceNet communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• "Group 2 Only Server" functionality
(slave)
• DIP switch for selecting baud rate
and address MXI1
DeviceNet E94AYCDN
• 1 LED for communication status MXI2
4.3 display
• Push-on terminal strip with screw
connection, 5-pin

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCDN
Mode
Communication module DeviceNet
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 54 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

DeviceNet communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCDN
Communication
Medium DIN ISO 11898
Communication profile DeviceNet
Baud rate
b [kBit/s] 125
250
500
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line with terminating resistors (120 ohm) at both ends
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 32
Number of bus nodes
Max. 64
Max. cable length 4.3
per bus segment lmax [m] 100 for 500 kbps, Thick Cable
250 for 250 kbps, Thick Cable
500 for 125 kbps, Thick Cable
100 for 500 kbps, Thin Cable
100 for 250 kbps, Thin Cable
100 for 125 kbps, Thin Cable
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 55

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherCAT® communication module

Physically speaking, EtherCAT® is a ring system that uses a one-total-

frame protocol, where the device manipulates the data during the
cycle. It has two physical variants, the E-bus and Ethernet. E-bus is
only suitable for short distances within a device; only the Ethernet
version offers the benefits of an Ethernet system.

EtherCAT® communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• CANopen over EtherCAT (CoE)
• Distributed clock
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for
MXI1
EtherCAT link and activity E94AYCET
MXI2
• 2 LEDs for communication status
display
4.3 • External voltage supply possible

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCET
Mode
Communication module EtherCAT
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 56 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherCAT® communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCET
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT)
PROFIsafe in combination with SM302
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line (internal ring)
Number of logical process data channels
1
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 32
Number of bus nodes
4.3
Max. 65535
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 57

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherNet communication module

Initially the EtherNet network was reserved for the office, but today
this communication system is also often used for system paramet-
erisation. The Servo Drives 9400 can be expanded for this purpose
using an EtherNet module.
The EtherNet module can be integrated into general IT infrastructures
(e.g. control centres, production data acquisition) and is suitable for
remote maintenance applications. It is intended for parameter setting,
but not for real-time transmission of process data.

EtherNet communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• Automatic setting of baud rate and
transmission mode
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for
link and activity
• Automatic detection of wiring er-
MXI1
4.3 Ethernet rors and polarity reversal E94AYCEN
MXI2
• Integrated 2-port switch
• Electrical isolation from the bus
• Automatic switching between
transmit and receive paths (auto-
crossing)

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCEN
Mode
Communication module Ethernet
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 58 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherNet communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCEN
Communication
Medium Twisted Pair, CAT5e to IEEE802.3
Communication profile GCI, based on TCP/IP
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Signalling
Link
Activity
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
Network topology
Star
Use of hubs/switches
Transmission
Mode Half duplex/full duplex
Rated voltage 4.3
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 59

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherNet/IP communication module

The communication module serves to connect the Servo Drives 9400

to an Ethernet/IP network.
It can be both supplied internally by the standard device and externally
by a separate voltage source. The access to all Lenze parameters can
be configured via TCP/IP with the Engineer engineering tool. Further
advantages of the EtherNet/IP:
• Support of multicast messages,
• "IGMP snooping" (V2 according to RFC 2236),
• UCMM, ACD, BOOTP/DHCP and VLAN-Tagging/DSCP.

EtherNet/IP communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• EtherNet/IP adapter with "Level 2"
functionality
• Integrated 2-port switch
• Up to zu 3 TCP/IP socket connec-
tions for communication with the MXI1
EtherNet/IP E94AYCEO
4.3 Lenze »Engineer« Support of the "IP MXI2
Config Pending
• Support of the redundancy protocol
DLR (Device Level Ring) as "Beacon-
based Ring Node"

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCEO
Mode
Communication module EtherNet/IP
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 60 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

EtherNet/IP communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCEO
Communication
Medium S/FTP (Screened Foiled Twisted Pair), ISO/IEC 11801 or EN 50173, CAT 5e
Communication profile EtherNet/IP
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 10/100
Signalling
Link
Activity
CIP™ states
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
Network topology
Star
Use of hubs/switches
Transmission
Mode Half duplex/full duplex 4.3
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 61

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

PROFIBUS communication module

One of the most commonly used industrial communication channels

is PROFIBUS. The Servo Drives 9400 range offers the corresponding
interface module for this communication.
The PROFIBUS module is a slave connection module with the
PROFIBUS-DP communication profile. It is used for networking
between control and inverter at fast processing speeds. This allows
the inverter to be easily and conveniently integrated into the install-
ation's entire network.

PROFIBUS communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• Electrical isolation from the bus
• 2 LEDs for communication status
display MXI1
PROFIBUS E94AYCPM
• Address can be set via DIP switch MXI2
4.3 • Compatibility switch for communic-
ation module EMF2133 IB

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCPM
Mode
Communication module PROFIBUS
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 62 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

PROFIBUS communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCPM
Communication
Medium RS 485, shielded twisted pair
Communication profile PROFIBUS-DP-V1
PROFIBUS-DP-V0
PROFIsafe in combination with SM301
Device profile Lenze device control
Baud rate
b [kBit/s] 9.6 ... 12 000 (automatic detection)
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line
with repeater:
Line or tree
without repeater:
Process data words (PCD) 4.3
16 Bit 1 ... 32
DP user data length
Optional parameter channel (4 words) + process data words
Number of bus nodes
31 slaves + 1 master per bus segment
With repeaters: 125
Max. cable length
per bus segment lmax [m] 1200 (depending on the baud rate and the cable type used)
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 63

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

PROFINET communication module

The Ethernet-based PROFINET bus system, the successor to PROFIBUS,

is often used. There are currently various versions of PROFINET avail-
able, which differ with regard to deterministics and thereby also
possible cycle times. The most commonly used system is the RT version
of PROFINET I/O, which is suitable for networking between control
and inverter, although not for motion control applications.

PROFINET communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for
link and activity
• Integrated 2-port switch
• PROFINET I/O device MXI1
PROFINET E94AYCER
• Soft Real Time (RT) MXI2
4.3 • 2 LEDs for communication status
display
• External voltage supply possible

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E94AYCER
Mode
Communication module PROFINET
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Vibration resistance
Sinusoidal vibration
Amplitude/Acceleration
Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g acc. to Germanischer Lloyd
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
UAC [V] 50.0

4.3 - 64 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Interfaces

PROFINET communication module

Rated data

Product key
E94AYCER
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile PROFINET I/O (RT)
PROFIsafe in combination with SM301 and SM302
Baud rate
b [kBit/s] 100
Node
PROFINET I/O device
Network topology
Star
Use of switches
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 32
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
Rated voltage 4.3
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 65

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Installation backplane

Up to a rated current of 23.5 A, the Servo Drives 9400 consist of an

axis module and an installation backplane. The backplane can initially A
be mounted in the control cabinet without the axis module. This
mechanical structure is also used for power supply modules up to a
rated power of 17.5 kW and for regenerative power supply modules
for a supply power of up to 27 kW, which simplifies installation. This
also offers additional advantages in terms of reduced spare part in-
ventories and time savings in the event of drive replacements. Further
features of the installation backplane:
B
• A brake module for a 24 V DC, 2.5 A brake can be installed as an
option
• Shields for power and control cables can be connected C

Installation backplane for Single Drive:

A: mains connection
B: brake module (optional)
C: motor connection
Assignment of Single Drive axes and backplanes

Typical motor power Mains voltage Product key Mode

4.3 4-pole asynchronous Single Drive Installation backplane Installation backplane
motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
E94AZPS0034N Without brake module
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
E94AZPS0034H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0034N Without brake module
0.75 E94AS☐E0034
E94AZPS0034H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0074N Without brake module
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
E94AZPS0074H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0074N Without brake module
3.00 3 AC 340 … 528 E94AS☐E0074
E94AZPS0074H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0244N Without brake module
5.50 E94AS☐E0134
E94AZPS0244H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0244N Without brake module
7.50 E94AS☐E0174
E94AZPS0244H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPS0244N Without brake module
11.0 E94AS☐E0244
E94AZPS0244H☐0051 With brake module

DC busbar set for Single Drive installation backplane

Running the Single Drive axis module in a DC-bus connection (multi- Product key
axis application) requires retrofitting the DC busbar system and using
Installation backplane DC busbar mounting DC fuses
DC fuses.
set
Mechanical coupling is possible with the following components:
• Power supply module E94AZPS0034N
E94AZJA003 EFSAR0016ARHN
• DC input module E94AZPS0034H☐0051
• Single Drive axis modules
• Multi Drive axis modules E94AZPS0074N
E94AZJA007 EFSAR0040ARHN
For retrofitting the DC busbar system and the DC fuse have to be in- E94AZPS0074H☐0051
stalled in the axis module's installation backplane, which is provided E94AZPS0244N
with the appropriate fixtures. E94AZJA024 EFSAR0100ARZN
The DC fuse required is part of the DC busbar set. Spare fuses are not E94AZPS0244H☐0051
contained in the scope of supply.

4.3 - 66 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Installation backplane

Assignment of Multi Drive axes and backplanes

Typical motor power Mains voltage Product key Mode

4-pole asynchronous Multi Drive Installation backplane
motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
E94AZPM0044N Without brake module
0.37 E94AM☐E0024
E94AZPM0044H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0044N Without brake module
0.75 E94AM☐E0034
E94AZPM0044H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0044N Without brake module
1.50 E94AM☐E0044
E94AZPM0044H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0094N Without brake module
3.00 E94AM☐E0074
E94AZPM0094H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0094N Without brake module
4.00 3 AC 340 … 528 E94AM☐E0094
E94AZPM0094H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0244N Without brake module 4.3
5.50 E94AM☐E0134
E94AZPM0244H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0244N Without brake module
7.50 E94AM☐E0174
E94AZPM0244H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0244N Without brake module
11.0 E94AM☐E0244
E94AZPM0244H☐0051 With brake module
E94AZPM0324N Without brake module
15.0 E94AM☐E0324
E94AZPM0324H☐0051 With brake module

Assignment: power supply modules /regenerative power supply

modules and mounting backplane

Rated power Mains voltage Product key

With mains fil- Power supply module Supply- / regenerative module Installation backplane
ter/mains choke
PN UAC
[kW] [V]
4.90 E94APNE0104 E94AZPP0104
17.5 E94APNE0364
3 AC 340 … 528
15.0 E94ARNE0134 E94AZPP0364
27.0 E94ARNE0244

Replacement DC fuses for Multi Drive installation backplane

If you need to replace the DC fuse in the Multi Drive installation Product key
backplane, the available types are listed in the table below.
Installation backplane DC fuses
E94AZPM0044N
EFSAR0016ARHN
E94AZPM0044H☐0051
E94AZPM0094N
EFSAR0040ARHN
E94AZPM0094H☐0051
E94AZPM0244N
E94AZPM0244H☐0051
EFSAR0100ARZN
E94AZPM0324N
E94AZPM0324H☐0051

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 67

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Brake modules

Internal activation

An intelligent motor brake logic system is included as standard in the

axis modules' device software in the form of a function block.
The brake modules are available in numerous designs.
The optionally integrable brake modules enable a DC 24 V, DC 180 V
or DC 205 V brake to be easily connected and this logic to be used.
• For axis modules up to 23.5 A, the brake module is integrated into
the installation backplane.
• For axis modules above 32 A, the brake module is integrated into
the axis modules.

Brake module, can be integrated into installation backplane

Mode Features Product key
Brake module

• 24 V DC external supply voltage

• Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
24 V DC/0.3 - 2.5 A E94AZHX0051
• Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
4.3 • Can be integrated into the installation backplanes, up to 32 A

• 24 V DC external supply voltage

• Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
24 V DC/1.0 - 5.0 A E94AZHY0101
• Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Can be integrated into the axis modules, from 32 A

• 400 V AC external supply voltage

180 V DC/0.1 - 0.61 • Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
E94AZHY0026
A • Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Can be integrated into the axis modules, from 32 A

• External supply voltage 230 V AC

205 V DC/0.1 - 0.75 • Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
E94AZHY0025
A • Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Can be integrated into the axis modules, from 32 A

External activation

Due to their functional principle, the motor brake in Single Drives

cannot be released if there is no mains or DC-bus voltage. Brake
modules which can be activated externally are therefore provided
for a 24V brake.
Mode Features Product key
Brake module
• 24 V DC external supply voltage
• Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
24 V DC/0.3 - 2.5 A E94AZHA0051
• Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Can be integrated into the installation backplanes, up to 32 A
• 24 V DC external supply voltage
• Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
24 V DC/1.0 - 5.0 A E94AZHB0101
• Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Can be integrated into the axis modules, from 32 A

4.3 - 68 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Brake modules

External brake modules

The external brake modules are provided for DIN rail installation and
can be used if axis modules up to 23.5A require brake voltages of
180V DC and 205V DC.

Mode Features Product key

Brake module

• 400 V AC external supply voltage

180 V DC/0.1 - 0.75 • Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
E94AZHN0026
A • Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Preconfigured for DIN rail mounting

• External supply voltage 230 V AC

205 V DC/0.1 - 0.75 • Monitoring of power supply and brake cable for open circuit and short circuit
E94AZHN0025
A • Polarity reversal protection for supply voltage
• Preconfigured for DIN rail mounting

4.3

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 69

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Brake resistors

The assignment of brake resistors to the Single Drive axis modules is

shown in the table below.

Brake resistor 82 ohms

Typical mo- Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
tor power voltage ance power capacity
4-pole asyn- Single Drive Brake resistor
chronous
motor
P UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
4.3
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
ERBP082R200W 82.0
0.75 E94AS☐E0034 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
ERBP047R200W
1.50 E94AS☐E0044 ERBS047R400W 0.40 60.0 400 x 110 x 105 2.3
ERBS047R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
47.0
ERBP047R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 ERBS047R400W 0.40 60.0 400 x 110 x 105 2.3
ERBS047R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBP018R300W 0.30 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.4
7.50 3 AC 340 … E94AS☐E0174 ERBS018R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
528 1) ERBS018R02K8 2.80 420 1110 x 200 x 105 12.0
ERBP018R300W 0.30 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.4
11.0 E94AS☐E0244 ERBS018R01K2 18.0 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBS018R02K8 2.80 420 1110 x 200 x 105 12.0
ERBS018R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
15.0 E94AS☐E0324 ERBS018R01K4 1.40 210 1110 x 110 x 105 6.2
ERBG018R04K3 4.30 645 380 x 426 x 302 13.5
ERBS015R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
22.0 E94AS☐E0474 ERBS015R02K4 2.40 420 1020 x 200 x 105 10.0
ERBG015R06K2 6.20 883 380 x 526 x 302 17.0
15.0
ERBS015R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
30.0 E94AS☐E0594 ERBG015R03K3 3.30 480 486 x 326 x 302 12.6
ERBG015R10K0 10.0 1440 380 x 736 x 302 22.0
1) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

4.3 - 70 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Brake resistors

The assignment of brake resistors to Single Drive axis modules is

shown in the table below.

• Two resistors should be connected in parallel for the following

combinations:
E94BS☐E3664 and ERBG035D03K3
E94BS☐E4604 and ERBG028D04K1.

3.5 ohm brake resistor

Typical mo- Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
tor power voltage ance power capacity
4-pole asyn- Single Drive Brake resistor
chronous
motor
P UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
45.0 E94AS☐E0864
ERBG075D01K9 7.5 1.90 285 486 x 236 x 302 9.5
55.0 E94AS☐E1044
75.0 E94BS☐E1454 ERBG005R02K6 5.0 2.60 390 12.6
90.0 E94BS☐E1724 ERBG043D03K0 4.3 3.00 450 486 x 326 x 302 11.8 4.3
3 AC 340 …
105 E94BS☐E2024 ERBG035D03K3 3.5 3.30 495 12.6
528 1)
130 E94BS☐E2454 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4.10 615 12.8
486 x 426 x 302
150 E94BS☐E2924 ERBG023D05K6 2.3 5.60 840 15.9
190 E94BS☐E3664 ERBG035D03K3 3.5 3.30 495 486 x 326 x 302 12.6
240 E94BS☐E4604 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4.10 615 486 x 426 x 302 12.8
1) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 71

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Mains chokes

A mains choke is an inductive resistor which is connected in the mains

cable of the power supply module. The use of a mains choke provides
the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads

Mains chokes can be used without restrictions in conjunction with

RFI filters and/or sinusoidal filters.

Please note:
: The use of a mains choke slightly reduces the mains voltage at the Mains choke
input of the inverter - the typical voltage drop across the mains choke
at the rated values is around 4%.

Typical motor Mains Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Single Drive Mains choke
ous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
4.3 [kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024 EZAELN3002B153 2.00 56 x 77 x 100 0.5
0.75 E94AS☐E0034 EZAELN3004B742 4.00 60 x 95 x 115 1.3
1.50 E94AS☐E0044 EZAELN3006B492 6.00 69 x 95 x 120 1.5
3 AC 340 …
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 EZAELN3010B292 10.0 85 x 120 x 140 2.0
528
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 EZAELN3020B152 20.0 95 x 155 x 165 3.8
7.50 E94AS☐E0174 EZAELN3025B122 25.0 5.8
110 x 155 x 170
11.0 E94AS☐E0244 EZAELN3035B841 35.0 6.0

ƒ The mains choke is integrated in the Single Drives as of a 32 A

rated current.

4.3 - 72 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

RFI and mains filters

RFI filters

RFI filters are capacitive accessory components which can be connec-

ted directly upstream of the axis modules. This measure enables
compliance with the corresponding conducted noise emission require-
ments according to EN61800-3.

Typical Mains Product key Rated cur- Power loss Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
motor voltage rent
power
4-pole Single Drive RFI filter shielded shielded
asynchron- C1 with C2 with
ous motor external external
measures measures
P UAC IN PV lmax lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [kW] [m] [m] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
E94AZRS0044 3.50 0.004 522 x 60 x 60 1.8
0.75 E94AS☐E0034
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
E94AZRS0104 10.0 0.008 522 x 90 x 60 2.3 4.3
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 0 50
5.50 E94AS☐E0134
7.50 3 AC 340 … E94AS☐E0174 E94AZRS0294 29.0 0.022 522 x 120 x 60 3.6
11.0 528 E94AS☐E0244
15.0 E94AS☐E0324
22.0 E94AS☐E0474 E94AZRS0544 54.0 0.050 670 x 201 x 60 9.0
30.0 E94AS☐E0594 50 100
45.0 E94AS☐E0864
E94AZRS0954 95.0 0.070 780 x 261 x 60 13.0
55.0 E94AS☐E1044

Typical
motor
power
4-pole P [kW] 75.0 90.0 105 130 150 190 240
asynchron-
ous motor
Mains
voltage
UAC [V] 3 AC 340 … 528
Product
key
Single E94BS☐E1454 E94BS☐E1724 E94BS☐E2024 E94BS☐E2454 E94BS☐E2924 E94BS☐E3664 E94BS☐E4604
Drive
RFI filter E94AZRS1804 E94AZRS3004 E94AZRS4154
Rated cur-
rent
IN [A] 180 300 415
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.014 0.021 0.027
Max. cable
length
shielded lmax [m] 150
C2 with
external
measures
Dimen-
sions

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 73

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

hxbxt [mm] 264 x 135 x 265

Mass
m [kg] 7.9 12.0
ƒ Filter name for E94B:
Type: E94AZRS1804 - filter name: 3F480-180.290EM
Type: E94AZRS3004 - filter name: 3F480-300.290EM
Type: E94AZRS4154 - filter name: 3F480-415.290EM

4.3

4.3 - 74 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

RFI and mains filters

Mains filters

A mains filter is a combination of mains choke and RFI filter in a single

housing. It reduces line-bound noise emission into the mains, thus
ensuring that the line-bound interference voltage is reduced to a
permissible level according to EN61800-3.

Mains filter, can be mounted beside

or below the axis module

Typical Mains Product key Rated cur- Voltage Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
motor voltage rent drop
power
4.3 4-pole Single Drive Mains filter shielded shielded
asynchron- C1 with C2 with
ous motor external external
measures measures
P UAC IN U lmax lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [V] [m] [m] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024
E94AZMS0034 3.20 50 522 x 60 x 60 3.3
0.75 E94AS☐E0034
10.0
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
3 AC 340 … E94AZMS0094 9.00 522 x 90 x 60 3.9
3.00 E94AS☐E0074 25
528
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 100
E94AZMS0184 18.0 7.4 8.4
7.50 E94AS☐E0174 522 x 120 x 60
11.0 E94AS☐E0244 E94AZMS0314 31.0 7.3 8.8

4.3 - 74 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Sinusoidal filters

A sinusoidal filter in the motor cable limits the rate of voltage rise
and the capacitive charge/discharge currents that occur during invert-
er operation. In combination with the specified line filter, the EMC
requirements of the limit class C2 for conducted noise emissions are
still met, even if longer shielded or even unshielded motor cables are
used.
Application range:
• Only use a sinusoidal filter with standard 0 to 550 V asynchronous
motors
• Operation only with V/f or V/f22 characteristic control
• Set the switching frequency permanently to the specified value
• Limit the output frequency of the Servo Drives 9400 to the specified
value Sinusoidal filters

Typical mo- Mains Product key Rated induct- Switching fre- Mass
tor power voltage ance quency
4-pole asyn- Single Drive RFI filter Mains filter Sinusoidal filter
chronous
motor
P UAC LN fch m
[kW] [V] [mH] [kHz] [kg]
0.37 E94AS☐E0024 4.3
E94AZMS0034 EZS3-004A200 11.0 4.0
0.75 E94AS☐E0034
1.50 E94AS☐E0044
E94AZMS0094 EZS3-010A200 5.10 5.5
3.00 E94AS☐E0074
5.50 E94AS☐E0134 4
E94AZMS0184 EZS3-024A200 2.50 14.5
7.50 3 AC 340 … E94AS☐E0174 8
11.0 528 E94AS☐E0244 E94AZMS0314 EZS3-037A200 1.70 21.0
15.0 E94AS☐E0324 EZS3-048A200 1.20 25.5
22.0 E94AS☐E0474 E94AZRS0544 EZS3-061A200 1.00 33.5
30.0 E94AS☐E0594 EZS3-072A200 0.95 37.0
45.0 E94AS☐E0864 EZS3-115A200 0.70 2 66.0
E94AZRS0954
55.0 E94AS☐E1044 EZS3-150A200 0.50 4 69.0

Typical mo- Mains Product key Max. output fre- Rated inductance Switching fre- Mass
tor power voltage quency quency
4-pole asyn- Single Drive Sinusoidal filter
chronous
motor
P UAC fmax, 2 LN fch m
[kW] [V] [Hz] [mH] [kHz] [kg]
75.0 E94BS☐E1454 EZS3-180A200 2) 0.40 64.0
90.0 E94BS☐E1724
EZS3-250A200 2) 0.35
105 E94BS☐E2024 77.0
3 AC 340 … 2
130 E94BS☐E2454
528 EZS3-350A200 2) 0.21 4
150 E94BS☐E2924 80.0
190 E94BS☐E3664 EZS3-480A200 2) 0.14
189.0
240 E94BS☐E4604 1) EZS3-350A200 2) 0.21
1) Two sinusoidal filters must be connected in parallel
2) If
the parameters for devices over 75 kW/145 A are set for operation with
"increased rated output current" (code C01199), different assignments may
be necessary.

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 75

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Rated data for power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

Product key
Power supply module E94APNE0104 E94APNE0364 E94APNE1004 E94APNE2454
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 4.90 17.5 48.6 119
Without mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 3.60 13.0 36.2 88.6
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 8.0 29.0 82.0 200.0
Rated DC-bus current
4.3 IN, DC [A] 10.0 36.0 100.0 245.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. DC-bus current

Imax [A] 15.0 54.0 150.0 368.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 7.5 27.0 75.0 183.5
Overload time
tol [s] 120.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 60.0
Max. output power 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 7.4 26.3 72.9 179.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time DC-bus current

Imax [A] 40.0 108.0 200.0 368.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 7.5 27.0 75.0 183.5
Overload time
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time
tre [s] 4.5
Max. short-term output power 1)
Pmax, 2 [kW] 19.6 52.5 146.0 357.0
1) Mains filter required; if no mains filter is installed, the stated values for P
max
decrease

4.3 - 76 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Rated data for power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

Product key
Power supply module E94APNE0104 E94APNE0364 E94APNE1004 E94APNE2454
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 4.90 17.5 48.6 119
Without mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 3.60 13.0 36.2 88.6
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 10.0 36.0 100.0 245.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.055 0.110 0.230 0.550
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 383 4.3
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481 510
Width b [mm] 60 120 210 390
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 2.6 5.3 13.5 28.5

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 2.6 8.7 17.0 30.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 43.8 105.1 187.7
Running time
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 3.8 2.5 3.1
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 12.0 5.0 2.8

Lenze | 9HQB*% 4.3 - 77

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Rated data for regenerative power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

ƒ Mains filter required, please refer to the following pages

Product key
Supply- / regenerative module E94ARNE0134 E94ARNE0244
Operating mode
Feed Feedback Feed Feedback
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 15.0 7.50 27.0 13.5
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
4.3
IN, AC [A] 26.0 13.0 47.0 23.5
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 32.0 16.0 57.0 29.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. DC-bus current

Imax [A] 48.0 24.0 86.0 44.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 20.0 9.8 35.0 18.0
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0
Max. output power
Pmax, 1 [kW] 22.4 11.2 40.5 20.2

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time DC-bus current

Imax [A] 96.0 48.0 171.0 87.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 20.0 9.8 35.0 18.0
Max. short-term output power
Pmax, 2 [kW] 44.9 22.4 81.1 40.5
with brake chopper support Pmax, 2 [kW] 35.1 59.6

4.3 - 78 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Rated data for regenerative power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

ƒ Mains filter required, please refer to the following pages

Product key
Supply- / regenerative module E94ARNE0134 E94ARNE0244
Operating mode
Feed Feedback Feed Feedback
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 15.0 7.50 27.0 13.5
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 32.0 16.0 57.0 29.0
Power loss
4.3
PV [kW] 0.150 0.110 0.230 0.190
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 120
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 6.0

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 4.7 9.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 29.2
Running time
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 4.2 3.9
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 18.0

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 79

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Control connections

Mode
Power supply modules Regenerative power supply modules
Analog inputs
Number 2
Resolution 11 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
1 x switchable 20mA
Analog outputs
Number 2
Resolution 10 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
max. 2 mA
Digital inputs
Number 1 8
Permanently configured
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. input current 8mA
Digital outputs
4.3 Number 4 4
fest konfiguriert
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. output current 50mA per output
Load capacity >480 Ω at 24 V
External DC supply
Rated voltage 24 V in accordance with IEC 61131-2
Voltage range 19.2 … 28.8 V, max. residual ripple ± 5%
Current Approx. 1.4 A during operation, max. 4 Approx. 1.2 A during operation, max. 3
A starting current for 100 ms A starting current for 100 ms 1)
Interfaces
CANopen Integrated
Extensions Via slot MXI 2: extension 2
Via slot MXI 1: extension 1
State bus Integrated
Memory Slot MMI
Safety engineering Slot MSI
Drive interface
Resolver input Integrated (no function)
Mains synchronisation input Integrated
Sub-D, 15-pin
1) Thesupply to the control electronics comes from the mains voltage. Altern-
atively, it can be provided by a 24 V supply that is independent of the mains
(available as an option).

4.3 - 80 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Brake resistors of the regenerative power supply mod-

ules

Assignment of brake resistors to the supply and regenerative power

supply modules is shown in the tables below.

Brake resistor 27 ohms

Brake resistors for power supply modules

Rated power Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated power Thermalcapa- Dimensions Mass
voltage ance city
Without Power supply Brake resistor
mains fil- module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0 4.3
3.60 E94APNE0104 ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
3 AC 340 …
ERBG012R01K9 1.90 285 486 x 236 x 302 13.0
13.0 528 1) E94APNE0364 12.0
ERBG012R05K2 5.20 750 486 x 426 x 302 28.0
36.2 E94APNE1004 ERBG005R02K6 5.0 2.60 390 486 x 326 x 302 12.6
88.6 E94APNE2454 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4.10 615 486 x 426 x 302 12.8
1) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

Brake resistors for regenerative power supply modules

Rated Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
power voltage ance power capacity
With Supply- / regen- Brake resistor
mains fil- erative module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
15.0 E94ARNE0134 ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
3 AC 340 … ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
528 1) ERBP018R300W 0.30 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.4
27.0 E94ARNE0244 ERBS018R01K2 18.0 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBS018R02K8 2.80 420 1110 x 200 x 105 12.0
2) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 81

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Mains chokes of the power supply modules

A mains choke is an inductive resistor which is connected in the mains

cable of the power supply module. The use of a mains choke provides
the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads

Mains chokes can be used without restrictions in conjunction with

RFI filters and/or sinusoidal filters.

Please note:
: The use of a mains choke slightly reduces the mains voltage at the Mains choke
input of the inverter - the typical voltage drop across the mains choke
at the rated values is around 4%.

Rated power Mains Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass

voltage
With mains fil- Power supply module Mains choke
ter/mains choke
PN UAC IN hxbxt m
4.3 [kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
4.90 E94APNE0104 EZAELN3008B372 8.00 85 x 120 x 140 1.9
17.5 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 EZAELN3030B982 30.0 110 x 155 x 167 5.9
48.6 528 E94APNE1004 EZAELN3080B371 80.0 125 x 210 x 240 12.5
119 E94APNE2454 EZAELN3200B151 200 352 x 144 x 264 32.0

4.3 - 82 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

RFI filters and mains filters enable compliance with the interference
voltage categories of the European standard EN 61800-3. There a
distinction is drawn between category C1 and category C2.
Category C1 describes the use on public supply networks.
Category C2 describes the use of drives which are intended to be used
for industrial purposes in areas also comprising residential areas.
For Multi Drives external filters must be used to comply with the EMC
Directive.

RFI filter, can be mounted beside

the power supply module

RFI filters

RFI filters are primarily capacitive accessory components which can

be connected directly upstream from the power supply modules. This
measure enables compliance with the corresponding conducted noise 4.3
emission requirements according to EN 61800-3.

Rated power Mains Product key Rated cur- Power loss Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
voltage rent
Without Power supply RFI filter Reference group C2
mains fil- module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC IN PV lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [kW] [m] [mm] [kg]
3.60 E94APNE0104 E94AZRP0084 8.00 0.020 4.2
485 x 60 x 261
13.0 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 E94AZRP0294 29.0 0.050 4.5
6 axes of 10 m each
36.2 528 E94APNE1004 E94AZRP0824 82.0 0.080 18.5
490 x 209 x 272
88.6 E94APNE2454 E94AZRP2004 200 0.150 20.5

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.
n
20

15

10

10 20 30 40 50 60 70
 lmot [m]

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 83

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

Mains filters

A mains filter is a combination of mains choke and RFI filter in a single

housing. It reduces line-bound noise emission into the mains, thus
ensuring that the line-bound interference voltage is reduced to a
permissible level according to EN61800-3.

Mains filter, can be mounted beside the power supply modules (right) or the
regenerative power supply modules (left)
RFI filters

Rated power Mains Product key Rated cur- Voltage Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
voltage rent drop
With mains Power supply Mains filter Reference group C2
4.3 filter/mains module
choke
PN UAC IN U lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [V] [m] [mm] [kg]
4.90 E94APNE0104 E94AZMP0084 8.00 10.0 485 x 90 x 261 8.6
17.5 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 E94AZMP0294 29.0 7.3 485 x 120 x 261 16.5
10 axes of 50 m each
48.6 528 E94APNE1004 E94AZMP0824 1) 82.0 6.4 490 x 270 x 272 29.0
119 E94APNE2454 E94AZMP2004 1) 200 6.3 490 x 330 x 272 52.0
1) External24 V supply from a safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
required for integrated fan.

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.
n
20

15

10

100 200 300 400 500 600 700

 lmot [m]

4.3 - 84 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

Rated Mains Product key Rated cur- Voltage Max. cable length Dimen- Mass
power voltage rent drop sions
With Supply- / regen- Mains filter Reference group C2
mains fil- erative module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC IN U lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [V] [m] [mm] [kg]
E94AZMR0264SDB 1) 6 axes of 10 m each 485 x 149 25.0
15.0 E94ARNE0134 26.0 6.3
3 AC 340 … E94AZMR0264LDB 1) 10 axes of 50 m each x 272 26.0
528 E94AZMR0474SDB 1) 6 axes of 10 m each 485 x 209 36.0
27.0 E94ARNE0244 47.0 6.2
E94AZMR0474LDB 1) 10 axes of 50 m each x 272 37.0
1) External 24 V supply through safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
required for integrated mains voltage recording.

4.3

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 85

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

DC input module

Via a DC input module, an axis module interconnection can be sup-

plied with power from a central DC source (power supply module,
Single Drive axis modules, Multi Drive axis modules). This is required
for example if a drive system with a multi-level structure installed in
a control cabinet is to be supplied via a central DC power supply unit.
The rated current of the DC input module is defined to be 100 A (DC).
The DC input module can be connected at the top or bottom, offering
great flexibility with regard to integration into the system wiring.
This provides an ideal way of connecting multi-row axis modules in
particular.

DC input module
100 A

Mode Product key Dimensions Mass

Input module
hxbxt m
[mm] [kg]
4.3
DC input module 100 A E94AZEX100 422 x 60 x 95 0.9

Wiring example for multi-row mounting of axis modules

4.3 - 86 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

DC-bus connection

The Servo Drives 9400 HighLine can be operated in a DC-bus connec-

tion. The 400 V devices have a direct connection for this.
The components listed here are used to interconnect the individual
devices for operation with or without a regenerative power supply
module. With a DC-bus connection, energy can be exchanged between
the individual devices. This makes particular sense with cyclic opera-
tion of multiple devices.
The design of a DC-bus connection requires extremely precise dimen-
sioning of the devices' energy requirements among one another.
Lenze Sales is happy to advise you here to ensure the most energy-
efficient drive dimensioning. The components listed here form the
basis for this.

ƒ Two DC fuses are always required.

ƒ The fuse holders EFH10005 and EFH10004 are single-pole, while
the holders EFH20005 and EFH20007 are 2-pole.
ƒ The DC fuses are not UL-approved
ƒ Please consult Lenze Sales to ensure the right dimensioning.

Components for DC-bus connection

Product key Rated current Design Product key Rated current Design
DC fuses DC fuses 4.3
IN IN
[A] [A]
EFSGR0060AYHN 6.00 EFSGR0120AYIN 12.0
EFSGR0100AYHN 10.0 EFSGR0160AYIN 16.0
EFSGR0160AYHN 16.0 EFSGR0200AYIN 20.0
14x51 without indic-
EFSGR0200AYHN 20.0 EFSGR0250AYIN 25.0
ator
EFSGR0250AYHN 25.0 EFSGR0320AYIN 32.0 22x58 without indic-
EFSGR0320AYHN 32.0 EFSGR0400AYIN 40.0 ator
EFSGR0400AYHN 40.0 EFSGR0500AYIN 50.0
EFSGR0060AYHK 6.00 EFSGR0630AYIN 63.0
EFSGR0100AYHK 10.0 EFSGR0800AYIN 80.0
EFSGR0160AYHK 16.0 EFSGR1000AYIN 100
EFSGR0200AYHK 20.0 14x51 with indicator EFSGR0120AYIK 12.0
EFSGR0250AYHK 25.0 EFSGR0160AYIK 16.0
EFSGR0320AYHK 32.0 EFSGR0200AYIK 20.0
EFSGR0400AYHK 40.0 EFSGR0250AYIK 25.0
EFSGR1000ANVN 100 EFSGR0320AYIK 32.0
NH1 22x58 with indicator
EFSGR2000ANVN 200 EFSGR0400AYIK 40.0
EFSGR2500ANVN 250 EFSGR0500AYIK 50.0
EFSGR3500ANVN 350 EFSGR0630AYIK 63.0
NH2
EFSGR4000ANVN 400 EFSGR0800AYIK 80.0
EFSGR5000ANVN 500 EFSGR1000AYIK 100

Mode Features Product key

• Busbar system 14 x 51
EWZ0036
• DC busbar length 1m, cross-section 25 mm 2
DC busbar
• Busbar system 22 x 58
EWZ0037
• DC busbar length 1m, cross-section 25 mm 2
End cap • End caps for DC busbar (packaging unit 10 pcs) EWZ0038
Terminal • Single-pole terminal for internal supply EWZ0039

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 87

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

DC-bus connection

DC fuses size 14 x 51 mm

Typical motor Mains Product key

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Single Drive Multi Drive DC fuses
ous motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
E94AS☐E0024
0.37
E94AM☐E0024
EFSGR0200AYHN EFSGR0200AYHK
E94AS☐E0034
0.75
E94AM☐E0034
3 AC 340 …
E94AS☐E0044 EFSGR0320AYHN EFH20005 EFSGR0320AYHK EFH10005
1.50 528
E94AM☐E0044 EFSGR0200AYHN EFSGR0200AYHK
E94AS☐E0074
3.00
E94AM☐E0074 EFSGR0320AYHN EFSGR0320AYHK
4.00 E94AM☐E0094

4.3

DC fuses size 22 x 58 mm

Typical motor Mains Product key

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Single Drive Multi Drive DC fuses
ous motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
E94AS☐E0024
0.37
E94AM☐E0024
EFSGR0200AYIN EFSGR0200AYIK
E94AS☐E0034
0.75
E94AM☐E0034
E94AS☐E0044 EFSGR0320AYIN EFSGR0320AYIK
1.50
E94AM☐E0044 EFSGR0200AYIN EFSGR0200AYIK
E94AS☐E0074
3.00
E94AM☐E0074 EFSGR0320AYIN EFSGR0320AYIK
4.00 3 AC 340 … E94AM☐E0094
EFH20007 EFH10004
528 E94AS☐E0134
5.50
E94AM☐E0134
EFSGR0630AYIN EFSGR0630AYIK
E94AS☐E0174
7.50
E94AM☐E0174
E94AS☐E0244
11.0
E94AM☐E0244
E94AS☐E0324 EFSGR1000AYIN EFSGR1000AYIK
15.0
E94AM☐E0324
22.0 E94AS☐E0474

4.3 - 88 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

DC-bus connection

NH1 and NH2 DC fuses

Typical motor Mains Product key

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Single Drive Multi Drive DC fuses
ous motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
11.0 E94AS☐E0244
15.0 E94AS☐E0324 EFSGR1000ANVN
22.0 3 AC 340 … E94AS☐E0474
30.0 528 E94AS☐E0594
EFSGR2000ANVN
45.0 E94AS☐E0864
55.0 E94AS☐E1044 EFSGR2500ANVN

ƒ The inverters E94BS☐E1454, E94BS☐E1724, E94BS☐E2024,

E94BS☐E2454, E94BS☐E2924, E94BS☐E3664, E94BS☐E4604 come
with an integrated DC fuse.

4.3

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 89

 Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

24 V power supply unit

Multi-axis applications with Multi Drive axis modules require an ex-

ternal power supply unit to feed the control electronics. Depending
on the number of axis modules, power supply units with a rated
current of 5, 10 or 20 A can be selected with a voltage supply of 1 x
230 V AC or 3 x 400 V AC.
Single Drive axis modules generally do not require the use of the
power supply unit. If, however, separate power supplies are needed
for the control electronics and power section in a single-axis applica-
tion, the same power supply units can be used.

24 V power supply unit

Rated data

Product key
EZV1200-000 EZV2400-000 EZV4800-000 EZV1200-001 EZV2400-001 EZV4800-001
Rated voltage
UN, [V] 230 400
AC
4.3 Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 0.8 1.2 2.3 0.3 0.6 1.0
Output voltage
Uout [V] DC 22.5 ...28.5
Rated current
IN [A] 5.00 10.0 20.0 5.00 10.0 20.0
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 130
Width b [mm] 55 85 157 73 85 160
Depth t [mm] 125
Mass
m [kg] 0.8 1.2 2.5 1.0 1.1 1.9

CAN bus connector

The connector is used to connect the CAN to inverters which are

provided with a Sub-D connection for the CAN bus. An integrated
CAN terminating resistor can be switched on/off. Internal spring
terminals make the use of special mounting tools superfluous. The
switch setting can be read from two sides.

CAN bus connector

Mode Product key
CAN bus connector: Switch EWZ0046

4.3 - 90 Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021

Servo Drives 9400 HighLine
Accessories

USB diagnostic adapter

The operation, parameter setting and diagnostics of the Inverter

Drives 8400 and the Servo Drives 9400 via the L-force diagnostics is
made with the keypad X400 or a PC. The connection of a PC can be
made via a USB interface and the USB diagnostic adapter.

For connecting the USB diagnostic adapter with the L-force diagnostics
interface (DIAG) tat the inverter, three different connecting cables
are separately available in the lengths 2.5 m, 5 m and 10 m. The
connection can be established during operation. The engineering
tools EASY Starter or Engineer can be used to carry out the operation,
parameter setting or diagnostics of the inverters. Both tools have
simple intuitive surfaces. This enables a quick and easy commission-
ing.

Optionally to the USB diagnostic adapter, the PC system bus adapter

can be used. For this purpose, a CANopen interface must be available
at the inverter.

USB diagnostic adapter incl.

connecting cable to the PC

ƒ The engineering tools EASY Starter or Engineer are used for oper-
ation, parameter setting and diagnostics of the inverters.
4.3

Mode Features Product key

• Input-side voltage supply via USB connection on PC

• Output-side voltage supply via inverter's diagnostic
interface
USB diagnostic adapter E94AZCUS
• Diagnostic LEDs
• Electrical isolation of PC and inverter
• Hot-pluggable

Connecting cables for USB diagnostic adapter

Mode Features Product key

• Length: 2.5 m EWL0070
Connecting cable for USB diagnostic adapter • Length: 5 m EWL0071
• Length: 10 m EWL0072

Lenze | V06-en_GB-10/2021 4.3 - 91

Inverter

Inverter Drives 8400

TopLine
0.25 to 45 kW
Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Contents

General information Product key 4.4 - 4

Equipment 4.4 - 5
List of abbreviations 4.4 - 6
Inverter Drives 8400 4.4 - 7
Functions and features 4.4 - 8
Operating modes 4.4 - 9

Technical data Standards and operating conditions 4.4 - 11

Rated data 230 V 4.4 - 12
Rated data 400 V 4.4 - 18
"Cold plate" design 4.4 - 30
Push-through technique design 4.4 - 32

Interfaces Mains connection 4.4 - 35

Motor connection 4.4 - 37
Connection diagrams 4.4 - 41
Control connections 4.4 - 43
Memory module 4.4 - 45
Safety system (STO) 4.4 - 45
EtherCAT® communication module 4.4 - 46
EtherNet/IP communication module 4.4 - 48
POWERLINK communication module 4.4 - 50
PROFIBUS communication module 4.4 - 52
PROFINET communication module 4.4 - 54 4.4

Accessories Brake resistors 4.4 - 57

Mains chokes Operation at rated power 4.4 - 59
Operation with increased power output 4.4 - 60
Interference suppression Available RFI and mains filters 4.4 - 61
Operation at rated power 4.4 - 62
Operation with increased power output 4.4 - 64
Sinusoidal filters Operation at rated power 4.4 - 66
Operation with increased power output 4.4 - 67
Regenerative power supply modulesRated data for power supply modules 4.4 - 68
Rated data for regenerative power supply modules 4.4 - 70
Control connections 4.4 - 72
Brake resistors of the regenerative power supply modules 4.4 - 73
Mains chokes of the power supply modules 4.4 - 74
Interference suppression of the regenerative power supply 4.4 - 75
modules
' DC input module 4.4 - 78
DC-bus connection 4.4 - 79
24 V power supply unit 4.4 - 81
Brake switch 4.4 - 81
USB diagnostic adapter 4.4 - 82
X400 keypad 4.4 - 83
X400 diagnosis terminal 4.4 - 83
PC system bus adapter 4.4 - 84
Shield mounting 4.4 - 84
Terminal strips 4.4 - 85
Setpoint potentiometer 4.4 - 86
 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Product key

4.4

4.4 - 4 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Equipment

4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 5

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

List of abbreviations

b [mm] Dimensions ASM Asynchronous motor

Cth [KWs] Thermal capacity DIAG Slot for diagnostic adapter
fch [kHz] Switching frequency DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.
h [mm] Dimensions EN European standard
Hmax [m] Site altitude EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Imax [A] Max. DC-bus current code)
Imax, out [A] Max. output current EN 60721-3 Classification of environmental conditions; Part 3:
IN, AC [A] Rated mains current Classes of environmental parameters and their
limit values
IN, DC [A] Rated DC-bus current
EN 61800-3 Electrical variable speed drives Part 3: EMC require-
IN, out [A] Rated output current
ments including special test methods
lmax [m] Max. cable length
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
m [kg] Mass
IEC 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/program-
P [kW] Typical motor power mable electronic safety-related systems
Pmax, 1 [kW] Max. output power IM International Mounting Code
PV [kW] Power loss IP International Protection Code
PN [kW] Rated power MCI Slot for communication module (module commu-
Rmin [Ω] Min. brake resistance nication interface)
RN [Ω] Rated resistance NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
t [mm] Dimensions UL Underwriters Laboratory Listed Product
UAC [V] Mains voltage UR Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Product
UDC [V] DC supply VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association
4.4 UN, AC [V] Rated voltage of German Electrical Engineers)
Uout [V] Max. output voltage

4.4 - 6 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Inverter Drives 8400

Cost-efficiency, time savings and quality enhancement are the chal- 8400 TopLine - for servo applications
lenges of the future. Lenze is facing these challenges with its L-force 8400 TopLine – the inverter with servo qualities within the 8400
product portfolio – the holistic solution portfolio with precisely range. Equipped with everything needed for high dynamic perform-
matched interfaces and components. For faster configuration and ance and accuracy in complex applications. Alongside a resolver input,
commissioning, better performance and more flexibility in production. a multiple encoder input (which can be used at the same time) is also
provided which optimally supplements the range of feedback systems
As such, the four versions of Inverter Drives 8400 - BaseLine, StateLine, that can be used. Cross communication between multiple TopLine
HighLine and TopLine - have been designed for consistent process units requires minimum wiring (3-core), as it runs via the separate
optimisation – throughout your entire value-added chain. They reduce axis bus. Alongside asynchronous motors, TopLine also supports dy-
your costs, from component selection, through project planning, namic synchronous motors via feedback.
manufacturing and commissioning, all the way up to servicing. We
call this "rightsizing". Benefit from precisely tailored, cost-optimised Lenze drive units,
consisting of prepared system cables, motors and gearboxes, feedback,
Rightsized for versatile applications brakes, fans and of course the 8400 TopLine.
Are you looking to control a three-phase AC motor or perform posi- The 8400 TopLine is, for example, recommended for storage and re-
tioning with or without feedback? Then select exactly the inverter trieval units, synchronised line drives and pick-and-place applications.
you need from the scaled solution space of the Inverter Drives 8400
with units in the power range from 0.25 kW to 45 kW. You are sure
to find exactly what you are looking for here, as the modular 8400
range of inverters offers the right solution for a broad spectrum of
applications.

While the BaseLine is excellent for basic applications, the TopLine

offers servo qualities and thereby fulfils with the strict requirements
in terms of dynamics and accuracy. 4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 7

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Functions and features

Mode
8400 TopLine
Conrol types, motor control
Field-oriented servo control (SC) For synchronous servo motors, asynchronous servo motors and three-phase asynchronous
motors
Sensorless control (SLPSM) For synchronous servo motors
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) For three-phase asynchronous motors
V/f control (VFCplus) For three-phase AC motors and asynchronous servo motor (linear or square-law)
Energy saving function (VFC eco) For three-phase asynchronous motors
Basic functions
Freely assignable user menu
Free function block interconnection with extensive function library
Parameter change-over
DC brake function
Braking operation without brake resistor
Brake management for brake control with low rate of wear
Flying restart circuit
S-shaped ramps for smooth acceleration
PID controller
15 fixed frequencies
Masking frequencies
4.4 Inversion of motor phase sequence
Technology applications
Speed actuating drive
Switch-off positioning without feedback
Table positioning without feedback (with sequential positioning)
Advanced functions Function blocks for positioning sequence control
Function blocks for electrical shaft (speed and angular synchronism)
Function blocks for dancer control
Function blocks for mains failure control
Monitoring and protective measures
Short circuit
Earth fault
Overvoltage
Motor phase failure
Overcurrent
I² x t-Motor monitoring
Motor overtemperature
Mains phase failure
Protection against restart for cyclic mains switching
Motor stalling
Diagnostics
Data logger, logbook, oscilloscope functions
Status display 6 LEDs
Diagnostic interface Integrated
For USB diagnostic adapter or keypad (diagnosis terminal)
Braking operation
Brake chopper Integrated
Brake resistor External

4.4 - 8 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Operating modes

An inverter enables energy-efficient operation of a system in virtually

all application cases. The various operating modes, which can be
created by making just a few simple settings, facilitate this. The fol-
lowing characteristics and corresponding specifications listed on the
following pages can be used to calculate the optimum operating
mode during the project planning phase.

Standard setting

In its initial state when delivered, the inverter is set up for basic oper- V/f at 50 Hz
ation with a three-phase AC motor with V/f control. When operated
in this mode, the rated torque of the motor is available in a setting
range up to 50 Hz.

Extended setting range up to 87 Hz

4.4
If the V/f reference point on the inverter is set to 87 Hz, the rated V/f at 87 Hz
torque can be used across an extended setting range. Here, a
230/400V motor is for example used and operated in a delta layout
with a 400V inverter. The setting range is then increased by 40 %.
The inverter must be dimensioned for a rated motor current of 230 V.

Operation with inverter-optimised MF motors

Large setting ranges and optimum operation at the rated torque: V/f at 120 Hz
these are the strengths of the MF motor when used in combination
with an inverter. The motors are optimised for a setting range up to
120 Hz. Compared to conventional 50Hz operation, the setting range
increases by 250 %. It is quite simply not possible for a drive to be
operated any more efficiently in a machine.

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 9

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
General information

Operating modes

Square-law V/f characteristic control

The output voltage is increased quadratically to the output frequency. Square-law characteristic
In case of low output frequencies, the motor voltage can be increased
to ensure a minimum current for the breakaway torque. In the field
weakening range, the output voltage of the inverter is constant (mains
voltage) and the frequency can be further increased depending on
the load. The maximum torque of the motor is reduced quadratically
to the frequency increase, the maximum output power of the motor
being constant.

Application areas are for instance:

• Pumps
• Blowers
• Fans

VFCeco energy saving mode

The VFCeco mode has a special effect in the partial load operational VFCeco energy saving mode
4.4 range. Usually, three-phase AC motors are supplied there with a
higher magnetising current than required by the operating conditions.
The VFCeco mode reduces the losses in the partial load operational
range so that savings up to 30 % are possible.

Overcurrent operation

The inverters can be driven at higher amperages beyond the rated Overcurrent operation
current if the duration of this overcurrent operation is time limited.
Two utilisation cycles with a duration of 15 s and 180 s are defined.
Within these utilisation cycles, an overcurrent is possible for a certain
time if afterwards an accordingly long recovery phase takes place.
For both utilisation cycles, a moving average is determined separately.
The adjacent diagram shows both cycles: 15 s in red and 180 s in blue.
The overload times tol are 3 s (T1) and 60 s (T3) respectively, the cor-
responding recovery times tre are 12 s (T2) and 120 s (T4) respectively.
The following tables show the resulting maximum output currents.
Monitoring of the device utilisation (I x t) activates the set error re-
sponse (trip or warning if one of the two utilisation values exceeds
the limit of 100 %.

4.4 - 10 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Standards and operating conditions

Mode
Product 8400 TopLine
Conformity
CE Low-Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU [UKCA: S.I. 2016/1101]
EAC TP TC 004/2011 (TR CU 004/2011)
TP TC 020/2011 (TR CU 020/2011)
Approval
UL 508C for USA and Canada (requirements of the CSA 22.2 No. 14) 2)
Power Conversion Equipment (file no. E132659)
Degree of protection
EN 60529 3) IP20
NEMA 250 Type 1
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Current derating at over 45°C 2.5% / K
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000 4.4
Current derating at over 1000 m [%/1000 m] 5
Vibration resistance
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2M2
Operation (EN 61800-5-1) 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
57 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz: 1.0 g
Operation (Germanischer Lloyd) 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 13.2 Hz: ± 1 mm amplitude
13.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 100 Hz: 0.7 g

Mode
Product 8400 TopLine
Supply form
Systems with earthed star point (TN and TT systems)
Systems with high-resistance or isolated star point (IT systems)
Noise emission
EN 61800-3 Integrated RFI suppression: category C2 up to 25 m shielded motor
cable 1)
Insulation resistance
EN 61800-5-1 Overvoltage category III
Above 2000 m amsl overvoltage category II
Degree of pollution
EN 61800-5-1 2
Protective insulation of control circuits
EN 61800-5-1 Safe mains isolation: double/reinforced insulation
1) 37 - Please also refer to the Motor connection section

2) CSA when using an external mains choke or a module for reducing transients.
3) Mounted and ready-to-use

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 11

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at a mains Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
voltage 230 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and an ambient voltage 230 V, switching frequency 4 kHz and max. ambient temper-
temperature 45 0C (default setting). ature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with switching frequency
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐2512☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3712☐☐0
E84AVTC☐2512☐☐S E84AVTC☐3712☐☐S
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 1/N/PE AC 180 V-0 % ... 264 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 3.0 3.6 4.2 5.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 3.4 4.1 5.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.9
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.9
4 kHz Iout [A] 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.9
8 kHz Iout [A] 1.7 2.4
16 kHz Iout [A] 1.1 1.6

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 2.6 3.6
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 3.4 4.8
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 12 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.25 0.37 0.37 0.55
Product key
E84AVTC☐2512☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3712☐☐0
E84AVTC☐2512☐☐S E84AVTC☐3712☐☐S
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.045 0.050
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50

Brake chopper rated data

4.4
Rated power, Brake chopper
PN [kW] 0.6 0.6
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 0.8 0.8
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 180.0 180.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 215 215
Width b [mm] 70 70
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 2.0 2.0
1) Technicallypossible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 13

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at a mains Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
voltage 230 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and an ambient voltage 230 V, switching frequency 4 kHz and max. ambient temper-
temperature 45 0C (default setting). ature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with switching frequency
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.55 0.75 0.75 1.10 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐5512☐☐0 E84AVTC☐7512☐☐0
E84AVTC☐5512☐☐S E84AVTC☐7512☐☐S
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 1/N/PE AC 180 V-0 % ... 264 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.4
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 5.3 6.4 8.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.8
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.8
4 kHz Iout [A] 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.8
8 kHz Iout [A] 3.0 4.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 2.0 2.7

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 4.5 6.0
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 6.0 8.0
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 14 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.55 0.75 0.75 1.10
Product key
E84AVTC☐5512☐☐0 E84AVTC☐7512☐☐0
E84AVTC☐5512☐☐S E84AVTC☐7512☐☐S
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.060 0.075
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50

Brake chopper rated data

4.4
Rated power, Brake chopper
PN [kW] 1.1 1.1
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 1.4 1.4
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 100.0 100.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 215 215
Width b [mm] 70 70
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 2.0 2.0
1) Technicallypossible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 15

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at a mains Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
voltage 230 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and an ambient voltage 230 V, switching frequency 4 kHz and max. ambient temper-
temperature 45 0C (default setting). ature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with switching frequency
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 1) 2.20
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐1122☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1522☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2222☐☐0
E84AVTC☐1122☐☐S E84AVTC☐1522☐☐S E84AVTC☐2222☐☐S
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 1/N/PE AC 180 V-0 % ... 264 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 9.9 11.9 11.4 13.7 16.4
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 12.0 14.4 13.7 21.8
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 5.5 6.8 7.0 8.4 9.5
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 5.5 6.8 7.0 8.4 9.5
4 kHz Iout [A] 5.5 6.8 7.0 8.4 9.5
8 kHz Iout [A] 5.5 7.0 9.5
16 kHz Iout [A] 3.7 4.7 6.3

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 8.3 10.5 14.3
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 11.0 14.0 19.0
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 16 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 230 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 2.20
Product key
E84AVTC☐1122☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1522☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2222☐☐0
E84AVTC☐1122☐☐S E84AVTC☐1522☐☐S E84AVTC☐2222☐☐S
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.095 0.110 0.140
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50

Brake chopper rated data

4.4
Rated power, Brake chopper
PN [kW] 3.3 3.3 3.3
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 4.4 4.4 4.4
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 33.0 33.0 33.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 270 270 270
Width b [mm] 70 70 70
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 2.3 2.3 2.3
1) Technicallypossible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 17

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.55 0.55 0.75 0.75 1.10 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐3714☐☐0 E84AVTC☐5514☐☐0 E84AVTC☐7514☐☐0
E84AVTC☐3714☐☐S E84AVTC☐5514☐☐S E84AVTC☐7514☐☐S
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.6 3.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 1.8 2.2 2.5 3.2 3.6
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.9
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.9
4 kHz Iout [A] 1.3 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.4 2.9
8 kHz Iout [A] 1.3 1.8 2.4
16 kHz Iout [A] 0.9 1.2 1.6

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 2.0 2.7 3.6
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 2.6 3.6 4.8
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 18 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.37 0.55 0.55 0.75 0.75 1.10
Product key
E84AVTC☐3714☐☐0 E84AVTC☐5514☐☐0 E84AVTC☐7514☐☐0
E84AVTC☐3714☐☐S E84AVTC☐5514☐☐S E84AVTC☐7514☐☐S
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 2.2 3.3 4.4
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.050 0.065 0.080
Max. cable length 1)
4.4
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 1.3 1.3 1.3
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 1.3 1.3 1.3
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 390.0 390.0 390.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 215 215 215
Width b [mm] 70 70 70
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 2.0 2.0 2.0
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 19

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 2.20 3.00 1) 3.00 4.00 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐1124☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1524☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2224☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3024☐☐S
E84AVTC☐1124☐☐S E84AVTC☐1524☐☐S E84AVTC☐2224☐☐S
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 3.2 3.8 3.9 4.7 5.1 6.1 7.0 8.4
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 4.4 5.3 5.5 6.6 7.3 9.8 11.8
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 3.2 3.8 3.9 4.8 5.6 6.7 7.3 8.8
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 3.2 3.8 3.9 4.8 5.6 6.7 7.3 8.8
4 kHz Iout [A] 3.2 3.8 3.9 4.8 5.6 6.7 7.3 8.8
8 kHz Iout [A] 3.2 3.9 5.6 7.3
16 kHz Iout [A] 2.1 2.6 3.7 4.9

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 4.8 5.9 8.4 11.0
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 6.4 7.8 11.2 14.6
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 20 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 1.10 1.50 1.50 2.20 2.20 3.00 3.00 4.00
Product key
E84AVTC☐1124☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1524☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2224☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3024☐☐S
E84AVTC☐1124☐☐S E84AVTC☐1524☐☐S E84AVTC☐2224☐☐S
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 5.4 6.7 8.9 12.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.095 0.105 0.135 0.165
Max. cable length 1)
4.4
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 2.9 2.9 3.5 6.4
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 2.9 2.9 3.5 6.4
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 180.0 180.0 150.0 82.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 270 270 270 270
Width b [mm] 70 70 70 70
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 21

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 5.50 7.50 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐3024☐☐0 E84AVTC☐4024☐☐0 E84AVTC☐5524☐☐0
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 7.0 8.4 8.8 10.6 12.0 18.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 9.8 11.8 13.1 15.7 18.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 7.3 8.8 9.5 11.5 13.0 15.6
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 7.3 8.8 9.5 11.5 13.0 15.6
4 kHz Iout [A] 7.3 8.8 9.5 11.5 13.0 15.6
8 kHz Iout [A] 7.3 9.5 13.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 4.9 6.3 8.7

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 11.0 14.3 19.5
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 14.6 19.0 26.0
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 22 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 3.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 5.50 7.50
Product key
E84AVTC☐3024☐☐0 E84AVTC☐4024☐☐0 E84AVTC☐5524☐☐0
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 12.0 16.0 22.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.165 0.205 0.275
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50 4.4

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 6.4 9.4 9.4
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 6.4 11.2 11.2
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 82.0 47.0 47.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 270 270 270
Width b [mm] 140 140 140
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 4.6 4.6 4.6
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 23

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 7.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 1) 15.0 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐7524☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1134☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1534☐☐0
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 15.0 21.0 29.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 20.0 28.0 29.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 16.5 21.0 23.5 28.2 32.0
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 16.5 21.0 23.5 28.2 32.0
4 kHz Iout [A] 16.5 21.0 23.5 28.2 32.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 16.5 23.5 32.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 11.0 15.7 21.3

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 26.4 35.3 48.0
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 33.0 47.0 64.0
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 24 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 7.50 11.0 11.0 15.0 15.0
Product key
E84AVTC☐7524☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1134☐☐0 E84AVTC☐1534☐☐0
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 24.5 35.5
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.320 0.435 0.470
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 50 4.4

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 19.5 19.5 29.2
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 19.5 29.2
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 27.0 18.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 325 325 325
Width b [mm] 140 140 140
Depth 2) t [mm] 214 214 214
Mass
m [kg] 6.0 6.0 6.0
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 25

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 18.5 22.0 1) 22.0 1) 30.0 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐1834☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2234☐☐0
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 36.0 42.2 42.0 50.8
Without mains choke IN, AC [A] 50.4
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 40.0 46.8 47.0 56.4
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 40.0 46.8 47.0 56.4
4 kHz Iout [A] 40.0 46.8 47.0 56.4
8 kHz Iout [A] 40.0 47.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 27.0 31.3

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 60.0 70.5
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 78.0 89.3
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke or mains filter

4.4 - 26 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 18.5 22.0 22.0 30.0
Product key
E84AVTC☐1834☐☐0 E84AVTC☐2234☐☐0
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 44.1 51.4
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.540 0.640
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 100 4.4

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 35.0 35.0
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 35.0 35.0
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 15.0 15.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 350
Width b [mm] 205 205
Depth 2) t [mm] 265 265
Mass
m [kg] 12.2 12.2
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 27

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Data in left column per device Data in right column per device

Operation with rated data: rated output current IN,out at mains voltage Operation with increased power: rated output current IN,out at mains
400 V, switching frequency 8 kHz variable and max. ambient temper- voltage 400 V, switching frequency 4 kHz constant and max. ambient
ature 45 0C (default setting). temperature 40 0C.
Output currents Iout apply to: Output currents apply to:
Ambient temperature 45 0C operating with constant switching fre- Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz. quency 2 kHz or 4 kHz.
Ambient temperature 40 0C operating with constant switching fre-
quency 8 kHz or 16 kHz.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 30.0 1) 37.0 1) 37.0 1) 45.0 1) 45.0 1) 55.0 1)
Product key
4.4 E84AVTC☐3034☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3734☐☐0 E84AVTC☐4534☐☐0
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 320 V-0 % ... 550 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
With mains choke IN, AC [A] 55.0 66.0 68.0 81.6 80.0 96.0
Without mains choke IN, AC [A]
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 61.0 73.2 76.0 91.2 89.0 106.8
Output current
2 kHz Iout [A] 61.0 73.2 76.0 91.2 89.0 106.8
4 kHz Iout [A] 61.0 73.2 76.0 91.2 89.0 106.8
8 kHz Iout [A] 61.0 76.0 89.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 41.0 51.0 60.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. output current

Imax, out [A] 91.5 114.0 133.5
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0

Data for 3 s overload

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 112.1 136.8 169.1
Overload time
tol [s] 3.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 12.0
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke or mains filter

4.4 - 28 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Rated data 400 V

ƒ Unless otherwise specified, the data refers to the default setting.

Typical motor power

4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 30.0 37.0 37.0 45.0 45.0 55.0
Product key
E84AVTC☐3034☐☐0 E84AVTC☐3734☐☐0 E84AVTC☐4534☐☐0
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 455 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 67.4 83.3 98.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.840 0.980 1.300
Max. cable length 1)
Shielded motor cable lmax [m] 100 4.4

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 70.1 70.1 70.1
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 70.1 70.1 70.1
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 7.5 7.5 7.5

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 450 450 450
Width b [mm] 250 250 250
Depth 2) t [mm] 265 265 265
Mass
m [kg] 17.4 17.4 17.4
1) Technically possible cable lengths, irrespective of EMC requirements
2) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 29

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

"Cold plate" design

Inverters in cold-plate design dissipate some of their waste heat (heat Product key Power to be dissip- Thermal resistance
loss) via a cooler adapted to the application. For this purpose, the in- ated
verters are provided with a planed cooling plate which is connected PV Rth
to a separate cooler in a thermally conductive way. Using the cold
plate technology, the main part of the heat energy can be transferred [W] [K/W]
directly to the external cooling units. E84AVTCC2512☐☐S 15.0 ≤ 1.5

The use of cold-plate technology is advantageous for the following E84AVTCC3712☐☐S 20.0 ≤ 1.5
application cases: E84AVTCC5512☐☐S 30.0 ≤ 1.0
E84AVTCC7512☐☐S 40.0 ≤ 1.0
• Minimising the expense of cooling the control cabinet. Here, the
main part of the power loss is directly transferred to a cooling unit E84AVTCC1122☐☐S 60.0 ≤ 0.6
outside of the control cabinet, e.g. convection cooler or water E84AVTCC1522☐☐S 75.0 ≤ 0.5
cooler.
• Heavily polluted ambient air or control cabinets with a high degree E84AVTCC2222☐☐S 100 ≤ 0.4
of protection which do not allow for a use of a forced air cooling E84AVTCC3714☐☐S 25.0 ≤ 1.0
of the control cabinets. E84AVTCC5514☐☐S 35.0 ≤ 1.0
• Low mounting depth in the control cabinet.
E84AVTCC7514☐☐S 50.0 ≤ 1.0
E84AVTCC1124☐☐S 60.0 ≤ 0.6
E84AVTCC1524☐☐S 70.0 ≤ 0.5
E84AVTCC2224☐☐S 100 ≤ 0.4
E84AVTCC3024☐☐S 100 ≤ 0.4
4.4
E84AVTCC4024☐☐0 155 ≤ 0.25
E84AVTCC5524☐☐0 215 ≤ 0.18

Dimensions and weights

Product key
E84AVTCC2512☐☐S E84AVTCC3712☐☐S E84AVTCC5512☐☐S E84AVTCC7512☐☐S
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 236
Width, including fastening b [mm] 70
Depth t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 1.7

Product key
E84AVTCC1122☐☐S E84AVTCC1522☐☐S E84AVTCC2222☐☐S
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 295
Width, including fastening b [mm] 70
Depth t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 2.2

4.4 - 30 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

"Cold plate" design

Dimensions and weights

Product key
E84AVTCC3714☐☐S E84AVTCC5514☐☐S E84AVTCC7514☐☐S
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 236
Width, including fastening b [mm] 70
Depth 1) t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 1.7

Product key
E84AVTCC1124☐☐S E84AVTCC1524☐☐S E84AVTCC2224☐☐S
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 295
Width, including fastening b [mm] 70
Depth 1) t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 2.2 4.4

Product key
E84AVTCC3024☐☐S E84AVTCC4024☐☐0 E84AVTCC5524☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 295 318
Width, including fastening b [mm] 70 174
Depth 1) t [mm] 178 156
Mass
m [kg] 2.2 2.9
1) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 31

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Push-through technique design

The inverters in push-through design reduce the waste heat in the

control cabinet.
The inverter is mounted in the control cabinet such that the heatsink
of the inverter is outside the control cabinet. Thus, the entire waste
heat can be dissipated outside the control cabinet via convection or
forced air cooling for almost all device performances. For inverters
with a power below 2.2 kW, restrictions may occur.

Using the push-through technology is advantageous in the following

application cases:

• Minimising the expense for control cabinet cooling. For this pur-
pose, the main part of the power loss is directly transferred to the
ambience outside the control cabinet (e.g. convection cooling).
• In case of control cabinets with a high degree of protection > IP54
by using separate mounting and cooling areas.
• Low mounting depth in the control cabinet.

4.4

4.4 - 32 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

Push-through technique design

Dimensions and weights

Product key
E84AVTCD2512☐☐0 E84AVTCD3712☐☐0 E84AVTCD5512☐☐0 E84AVTCD7512☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 236
Width, including fastening b [mm] 102
Depth (in control cabinet) 1) t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 2.1

Product key
E84AVTCD1122☐☐0 E84AVTCD1522☐☐0 E84AVTCD2222☐☐0 E84AVTCD3714☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 295 236
Width, including fastening b [mm] 137 102
Depth (in control cabinet) 1) t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 3.7 2.1 4.4

Product key
E84AVTCD5514☐☐0 E84AVTCD7514☐☐0 E84AVTCD1124☐☐0 E84AVTCD1524☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 236 295
Width, including fastening b [mm] 102 137
Depth (in control cabinet) 1) t [mm] 178
Mass
m [kg] 2.1 3.7

Product key
E84AVTCD2224☐☐0 E84AVTCD3024☐☐0 E84AVTCD4024☐☐0 E84AVTCD5524☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 295 318
Width, including fastening b [mm] 137 174
Depth (in control cabinet) 1) t [mm] 178 156
Mass
m [kg] 3.7 5.1

Product key
E84AVTCD7524☐☐0 E84AVTCD1134☐☐0 E84AVTCD1534☐☐0
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 378
Width, including fastening b [mm] 174
Depth (in control cabinet) 1) t [mm] 156
Mass
m [kg] 6.4
1) With safety engineering plus 20 mm

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 33

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Technical data

4.4

4.4 - 34 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Mains connection

ƒ The mains fuse and cable cross-section specifications are for a

mains connection of 1 x 230V or 3 x 400V.
ƒ Class gG/gl fuses or class gRL semiconductor fuses.
ƒ The cable cross-sections apply to PVC-insulated copper cables.
ƒ Use for installation with UL-approved cables, fuses and brackets.

Operation with mains choke

Typical mo- Mains Product key Circuit breaker Fuse Mains connection
tor power voltage
4-pole asyn- Inverter EN 60204-1 UL Cross-section (with
chronous mains choke)
motor
P UAC I I I q
[kW] [V] [A] [A] [A] [mm2]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐ 6
C6 6 1.0
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
10
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... C10 10 1.5
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐ 15
264
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐ 20
C16 16 2.5
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ 25 4.4
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐ C20 20 30 4.0
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ 6
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ C6 6 1.0
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ 10
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
C10 10 1.5
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐ 15
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ C16 16 2.5
3 AC 320 ...
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ 20
550 C20 20 4.0
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ 30
C32 32 10.0
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐
40
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ C50 50 16.0
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ C63 63 50
25.0
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ C80 80 70
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ C100 100 80
50.0
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ C125 125 100

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 35

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Mains connection

Operation without mains choke

Typical mo- Mains Product key Circuit breaker Fuse Mains connection
tor power voltage
4-pole asyn- Inverter EN 60204-1 UL Cross-section
chronous (without mains
motor choke)
P UAC I I I q
[kW] [V] [A] [A] [A] [mm2]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐ 6
C6 6 1.0
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
10
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... C10 10 1.5
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐ 15
264
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐ C16 16 20 2.5
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ C20 20 25 4.0
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐ C25 25 30 6.0
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ C6 6 6 1.0
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
4.4 1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ C10 10 10 1.5
2.20 3 AC 320 ... E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3.00 550 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐ 15
C16 16 2.5
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
20
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ C25 25 4.0
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ 25
C32 32 10.0
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ 40
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ C80 80 60 25.0

4.4 - 36 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Motor connection

ƒ Keep motor cables as short as possible, as this has a positive effect

on the drive behaviour.
ƒ With group drives (multiple motors on one inverter), the resulting
cable length is the key factor. This can be calculated using the
hardware manual.
ƒ Electric strength of the motor cable: 1 kV as per VDE 250-1.
ƒ Capacitance per unit length
≤ 1.5 mm 2 / AWG 16: C core-core / C core-shield ≤ 75 / ≤150 pF/m
≥ 2.5 mm 2 / AWG 12: C core-core / C core-shield ≤ 100 / ≤ 150 pF/m.

Maximum shielded motor cable length without EMC limit values at

switching frequency

Rated mains Typical motor Product key 4 kHz (without limit value) 8 kHz (without 16 kHz (without
voltage power limit value) limit value)
4-pole asyn- Inverter 45 °C 40 °C 40 °C 40 °C
chronous mo-
tor
Uin P lmax lmax lmax lmax
[V] [kW] [m] [m] [m] [m]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
4.4
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
230 0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐ 50
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ 50 100 50
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐ 25
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
400 5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ 50
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 100 150 100 100
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
500 1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐ 50 100 25 15
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 37

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Motor connection

Maximum shielded motor cable length without EMC limit values at

switching frequency

Rated mains Typical motor Product key 4 kHz (without limit value) 8 kHz (without 16 kHz (without
voltage power limit value) limit value)
4-pole asyn- Inverter 45 °C 40 °C 40 °C 40 °C
chronous mo-
tor
Uin P lmax lmax lmax lmax
[V] [kW] [m] [m] [m] [m]
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ 50 100 50 50
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐
500
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 100 150 100 100
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐
4.4 45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐

Maximum shielded motor cable length acc. to category C2 (industry),

conducted

ƒ The values for Imax are valid for an ambient temperature of up

to 40°C.

Rated mains Typical motor Product key Integrated filter RFI filter SD RFI filter LD
voltage power
4-pole asyn- Inverter 4 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
chronous mo-
tor
Uin P lmax lmax lmax lmax lmax lmax
[V] [kW] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
230 0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ 25 25 50 50 100 50
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
400
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐

4.4 - 38 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Motor connection

Maximum shielded motor cable length acc. to category C2 (industry),

conducted

ƒ The values for Imax are valid for an ambient temperature of up

to 40°C.

Rated mains Typical motor Product key Integrated filter RFI filter SD RFI filter LD
voltage power
4-pole asyn- Inverter 4 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
chronous mo-
tor
Uin P lmax lmax lmax lmax lmax lmax
[V] [kW] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m]
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐
400 30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 100
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
4.4
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐ 25 25
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
25 25 50 100
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
500 5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ 50 50
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 100
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 39

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Motor connection

Operation with earth-leakage circuit breaker

If the inverter is connected via an earth-leakage circuit breaker, the

following cable lengths are permissible, although the table must also
be taken into account:

Earth-leakage circuit breaker 30 mA: Earth-leakage circuit breaker 300 mA:

• 0.25 ... 2.2 kW to 25 m shielded motor cable with integrated RFI • 0.25 to 45 kW up to 25 m shielded motor cable with integrated RFI
measures measures
• 0.25 ... 15 kW to 25 m shielded motor cable with RFI fiter SD. • 0.25 to 45 kW up to 50 m shielded motor cable with RFI filter LD.

ƒ When RFI filters SD are used, C1 can be complied with in a con-

ducted manner (a shielded motor cable up to 25 m).
ƒ In case of 0.25 ... 2.2 kW (230 V) with RFI filter LL, C1 and a fault
current <3.5 mA can be realised (a shielded motor cable of up to
5 m).

4.4

4.4 - 40 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Connection diagrams

Wiring example for connecting Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine to 1 x 230V

4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 41

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Connection diagrams

Verdrahtungsbeispiel Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine an 3 x 400 V

4.4

4.4 - 42 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Control connections

Mode
8400 TopLine
Analog inputs
Number 2
Optional: voltage or current input
Resolution 10 bits + sign
Value range 0 ... +/- 10V, 0/4 ... 20 mA
Analog outputs
Number 2
Optional: voltage or current output
Resolution 10 bits
Value range 0 ... 10V, 0/4 ... 20mA
Digital inputs
Number 8
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. input current 11mA
Function 4 inputs can optionally be used as frequency input (200 kHz, 2-track)
Digital outputs
Number 4
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2) 4.4

Max. output current 1 x 2.5A, (basic insulation, with spark suppressor, e.g. for 24 V service brake)
3 x 50mA
Relay
Number 1
Contact Changeover contact
AC connection 250V, 3A
DC connection 24V, 2A ... 240V, 0.16A
External DC supply
Rated voltage 1) 24 V
Interfaces
CANopen Integrated
functional insulated
Max. baud rate 1000 kbps
DIP switch for address, baud rate, bus termination
Extensions optional
communication module
Safety engineering Optional
Safe torque off (STO)
Drive interface
Axis bus for cross communication and synchronisation of several 8400 TopLine devices
Encoder input Sub-D, 15-pin
Multiple encoder input for: TTL incremental encoder, SinCos incremental or absolute value encoder,
SSI absolute value encoder
KTY temperature sensor evaluation
Via 4 digital inputs: HTL, 2/4-track, 200 kHz
Resolver input Sub-D, 9-pin
1) For mains-independent control electronics supply

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 43

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Control connections

Connection of analog inputs and outputs Connection of digital inputs and outputs

Resolver connection Encoder connection

4.4

Axis bus connection

4.4 - 44 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Memory module

All drive settings for the 8400 are stored on the memory module,
which is a pluggable memory chip. The memory module ensures that
drives can be replaced quickly and without errors being made.

Mode Features Product key

• For 8400 StateLine, HighLine, Topline and protec
Memory module E84AYM10S/M
• Packaging unit: 5 items

ƒ Each inverter is equipped with a memory module in the factory

Safety system (STO)

The 8400 StateLine, HighLine and TopLine models are optionally

available with "STO safe torque off" safety engineering. This helps
reduce control system costs, save space in the control cabinet and
keep wiring to a minimum. The safety engineering is certified to EN
ISO 13849-1 (Cat. 4, PL e), EN 61508/EN 62061 (SIL 3).

The inverters can optionally be ordered with integrated safety engin-

eering (STO). In this case, the product key of the inverter has a "B" as
the 14th character.
For example, a StateLine 230 V, 0.55 kW built-in unit with safety en- 4.4
gineering would be: E84AVSCE5512SB0

8400 StateLine with safety engineering

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 45

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

EtherCAT® communication module

A communication module is used to connect the 8400 StateLine,

HighLine or TopLine to a bus system.

EtherCAT® communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module

• Distributed clock
• 5 LEDs for status display
EtherCAT MCI E84AYCETV/S
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for link and activity
4.4 • Connection option for separate 24 V supply

ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-in EtherCAT®

communication module already installed. If you would like to
order the products in this complete form, please add the inverter
product key as follows when placing your order: E84AV to
X-ETXXX
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E84AYCETV/S
Mode
Communication module EtherCAT
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
EN 61800-5-1 UAC [V] 50.0

4.4 - 46 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

EtherCAT® communication module

Rated data

Product key
E84AYCETV/S
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT)
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line
Number of logical process data channels
1
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 16
Number of bus nodes
Max. 65535
Max. cable length
4.4
between two nodes lmax [m] 100

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 47

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

EtherNet/IP communication module

A communication module is used to connect the 8400 StateLine,

HighLine or TopLine to a bus system.

EtherNet/IP communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module
• 5 LEDs for status display
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for link and activity
• Address can be set via 2 rotary DIP switches
• TCP/IP channel
• ODVA certification (Open Device Vendor Association)
EtherNet/IP MCI E84AYCEOV/S
4.4 • Supported assembly object instances as per ODVA:
20, 21, 22, 23 and 70, 71, 72, 73
• Manufacturer-specific supported assembly object
instances (custom): 110 and 111
• Connection option for separate 24 V supply
ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-on PROFINET
communication module already installed. If you would like to
order the products in this complete form, please add the inverter
product key as follows when placing your order: E84AV to
X-EOXXX
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E84AYCEOV/S
Mode
Communication module EtherNet/IP
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
EN 61800-5-1 UAC [V] 50.0

4.4 - 48 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

EtherNet/IP communication module

Rated data

Product key
E84AYCEOV/S
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 / EN50173
Communication profile EtherNET/IP, AC Drive
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 10/100 (full duplex/half duplex)
Node
Slave (Adapter)
Network topology
Tree, star and line
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 16
Number of bus nodes
max. 254 im Subnetz
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 49

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Ethernet POWERLINK communication module

A communication module is used to connect the 8400 StateLine,

HighLine or TopLine to a bus system.

POWERLINK communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module

• Sync mode, Multiplex mode

• 5 LEDs for status display
Ethernet POWERLINK CN • 2 x RJ45 connections with LEDs for link and collision MCI E84AYCECV/S
• Address can be set via 2 rotary DIP switches
4.4 • Connection option for separate 24 V supply

ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-in POWER-

LINK communication module already installed. If you would like
to order the products in this complete form, please add the invert-
er product key as follows when placing your order: E84AV to
X-ECXXX
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E84AYCECV/S
Mode
Communication module Ethernet POWERLINK CN
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
EN 61800-5-1 UAC [V] 50.0

4.4 - 50 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

Ethernet POWERLINK communication module

Rated data

Product key
E84AYCECV/S
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile EPL2.0
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Node
Controlled node (CN)
Network topology
Tree, star and line
Number of logical process data channels
1
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 16
Number of bus nodes
max. 239
4.4
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 51

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

PROFIBUS communication module

A communication module is used to connect the 8400 StateLine,

HighLine or TopLine to a bus system.

PROFIBUS communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module

• 5 LEDs for status display

PROFIBUS • Sub-D connection MCI E84AYCPMV/S
• Address can be set via DIP switch
4.4

ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-in PROFIBUS

communication module already installed. If you would like to
order the products in this complete form, please add the inverter
product key as follows when placing your order: E84AV to
X-PMXXX
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E84AYCPMV/S
Mode
Communication module PROFIBUS
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
EN 61800-5-1 UAC [V] 50.0

4.4 - 52 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

PROFIBUS communication module

Rated data

Product key
E84AYCPMV/S
Communication
Medium RS 485
Communication profile PROFIBUS-DP-V1
PROFIBUS-DP-V0
Device profile PROFIDrive, version 3
Baud rate
b [kBit/s] 9.6 ... 12 000 (automatic detection)
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line
with repeater:
Line or tree
without repeater:
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 16
DP user data length 4.4
Optional parameter channel (4 words) + process data words
Number of bus nodes
31 slaves + 1 master per bus segment
With repeaters: 125
Max. cable length
per bus segment lmax [m] 1200 (depending on the baud rate and the cable type used)

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 53

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

PROFINET communication module

A communication module is used to connect the 8400 StateLine,

HighLine or TopLine to a bus system.

PROFINET communication module

Mode Features Slot Product key

Communication module

• 5 LEDs for status display

• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for link and activity
PROFINET MCI E84AYCERV/S
• TCP/IP channel
4.4 • Connection option for separate 24 V supply

ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-on PROFINET

communication module already installed. If you would like to
order the products in this complete form, please add the inverter
product key as follows when placing your order: E84AV to X-ER-
XXX
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

Standards and operating conditions

Product key
E84AYCERV/S
Mode
Communication module PROFINET
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
Insulation voltage to reference earth/PE
EN 61800-5-1 UAC [V] 50.0

4.4 - 54 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

PROFINET communication module

Rated data

Product key
E84AYCERV/S
Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile PROFINET RT Conf. Class B
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Node
Slave (Device)
Network topology
Line
Number of logical process data channels
1
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 16
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 55

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Interfaces

4.4

4.4 - 56 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Brake resistors

An external brake resistor is required to brake high moments of inertia

or in the event of prolonged operation in generator mode; this resistor
converts braking energy into heat.

The brake resistors recommended in the table below have been di-
mensioned for approx. 1.5 times the regenerative power, with a cycle
time of 15/135 s (brake/rest ratio). These brake resistors generally
meet the usual requirements of standard applications.

The brake resistors are fitted with a thermostat (potential-free NC ERBM…(IP50) brake resistor
contact).

Typical mo- Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
tor power voltage ance power capacity
4-pole Inverter Brake resistor
asynchron-
ous motor
P UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
ERBM180R050W 180.0 0.050 7.50 175 x 20.6 x 40 0.3
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... ERBM100R100W 100.0 0.10 15.0 240 x 80 x 95 0.5 4.4
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
264
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
ERBP033R200W 0.20 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.0
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ 33.0
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐ ERBP033R300W 0.30 45.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.4
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ ERBM390R100W 390.0 0.10 15.0 235 x 20.6 x 40 0.4
0.75 3 AC 320 ... E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.10 550 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
ERBP180R200W 0.20 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.0
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ 180.0
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐ ERBP180R300W 0.30 45.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 57

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Brake resistors

For standard applications, we recommend the following combinations:

E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0 and ERBP082R200W
E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐0 and ERBS047R400W
E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐0 and ERBS047R800W
E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐0 and ERBS027R01K2
E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐0 and ERBS027R01K2
E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐0 and ERBS018R01K4
E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐0 and ERBS015R02K4
E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐0 and ERBS015R02K4.

Other possible combinations:

ERBP…(IP21) and ERBS…(IP65) brake resistor

Typical mo- Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
tor power voltage ance power capacity
4-pole Inverter Brake resistor
asynchron-
ous motor
P UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP082R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
4.4 3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐ 82.0
ERBS082R780W 0.78 117 666 x 124 x 122 4.0
ERBS047R400W 0.40 60.0 400 x 110 x 105 2.3
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
ERBS047R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
47.0
ERBS047R400W 0.40 60.0 400 x 110 x 105 2.3
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
ERBS047R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ ERBS027R600W 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
27.0
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ ERBS027R600W 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
3 AC 320 ... ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
550 ERBS018R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐ ERBS018R01K4 18.0 1.40 210 1110 x 110 x 105 6.2
ERBS018R02K8 2.80 420 1110 x 200 x 105 12.0
ERBS015R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ ERBS015R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBS015R02K4 2.40 420 1020 x 200 x 105 10.0
15.0
ERBS015R800W 0.80 120 710 x 110 x 105 3.9
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ ERBS015R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBS015R02K4 2.40 420 1020 x 200 x 105 10.0
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ ERBG075D01K9 7.5 1.90 285 486 x 236 x 302 9.5
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐

4.4 - 58 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Mains chokes

A mains choke is an inductive resistor which is connected in the mains

cable of the power supply module. The use of a mains choke provides
the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads

Mains chokes can be used without restrictions in conjunction with

RFI filters and/or sinusoidal filters.

Please note:
: The use of a mains choke slightly reduces the mains voltage at the Mains choke
input of the inverter - the typical voltage drop across the mains choke
at the rated values is around 4%.

Operation at rated power

Typical motor Mains Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Inverter Mains choke
ous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m 4.4
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
ELN1-0900H005 5.00
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
75 x 66 x 82 1.1
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... ELN1-0500H009 9.00
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
264
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ ELN1-0250H018 18.0 96 x 96 x 90 2.1
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐ EZAELN3002B153 2.00 56 x 77 x 100 0.5
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ EZAELN3004B742 4.00 60 x 95 x 115 1.3
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
EZAELN3006B492 6.00 69 x 95 x 120 1.5
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐ EZAELN3008B372 8.00 1.9
85 x 120 x 140
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ EZAELN3010B292 10.0 2.0
3 AC 320 ...
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ EZAELN3016B182 16.0 95 x 120 x 140 2.7
550
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ EZAELN3020B152 20.0 95 x 155 x 165 3.8
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ EZAELN3025B122 25.0 5.8
110 x 155 x 170
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3035B841 35.0 6.0
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ EZAELN3045B651 45.0 112 x 185 x 200 8.3
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3050B591 50.0 112 x 185 x 210 8.4
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3063B471 63.0 122 x 185 x 210 9.7
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3080B371 80.0 125 x 210 x 240 12.5
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3090B331 90.0 115 x 267 x 205 11.5
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke
ƒ On some inverters, a mains filter (combination of RFI filter and
mains choke) can be used in place of a mains choke. Information
on this can be found in the "Interference suppression" section.

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 59

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Mains chokes

Operation with increased power output

Mains choke

Typical motor Mains Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Inverter Mains choke
ous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
4.4 0.37 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
ELN1-0900H005 5.00
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐ 1)
75 x 66 x 82 1.1
0.75 1 AC 180 ... E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
ELN1-0500H009 9.00
1.10 264 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐ 1)
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
ELN1-0250H018 18.0 96 x 96 x 90 2.1
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ 1)
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐ EZAELN3002B153 2.00 56 x 77 x 100 0.5
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3004B742 4.00 60 x 95 x 115 1.3
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ EZAELN3006B492 6.00 69 x 95 x 120 1.5
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3008B372 8.00 1.9
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐S 1) 85 x 120 x 140
4.00 EZAELN3010B292 10.0 2.0
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0
3 AC 320 ...
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ EZAELN3016B182 16.0 95 x 120 x 140 2.7
550
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3020B152 20.0 95 x 155 x 165 3.8
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ EZAELN3025B122 25.0 110 x 155 x 170 5.8
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3030B982 30.0 110 x 155 x 167 5.9
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3045B651 45.0 112 x 185 x 200 8.3
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3063B471 63.0 122 x 185 x 210 9.7
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3080B371 80.0 125 x 210 x 240 12.5
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3090B331 90.0 115 x 267 x 205 11.5
55.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ 1) EZAELN3100B301 100 139 x 267 x 205 16.5
1) Operation only permitted with mains choke

4.4 - 60 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression

RFI and mains filters are used to ensure compliance with the EMC
requirements of European Standard EN 61800-3. This standard defines
the EMC requirements for electrical drive system in various categories.
Category C1 applies to public networks (residential areas). Category
C1 corresponds to Class B with regard to the limit values of Class B
in line with EN 55011.
Category C2 is applicable in industrial premises; use in residential
areas is left to the user's discretion. With regard to limit values, Cat-
egory C2 corresponds to Class A according to EN 55011.

RFI filters
When working with stricter line-bound noise emission requirements,
which cannot be met using the radio interference suppression
measures integrated in the inverter (C2 up to 25 m shielded motor
cable), external filters can be used. The filters can be installed below
or next to the inverters.

Available RFI and mains filters

Mode
Filter RFI filter LL RFI filter SD RFI filter LD Mains filter LD
(Low Leakage) (Short Distance) (Long Distance) (Long Distance) 4.4
E84AZESR☐☐☐☐LL E84AZESR☐☐☐☐SD E84AZESR☐☐☐☐LD I0FAE☐☐☐F100D000☐S
Category C1
Up to 5 m shielded motor Up to 25 m shielded motor Up to 50 m shielded motor Up to 50 m shielded motor
cable 1) cable 1) cable 1) cable 1)
Category C2
Up to 50 m shielded motor Up to 100 m shielded mo- Up to 100 m shielded mo-
cable 1) tor cable 1) tor cable 1)
Power range
0.25 to 2.2 kW, 230 V 0.25 to 15 kW 0.25 to 18.5 kW 22 to 45 kW
Features
• For installation in mobile • Optimised for low leak- • 0,25 up to 15 kW: 50 - • Combination of mains
systems, leakage current age current. 100 m at max. 40 °C am- choke and RFI filter.
<3.5mA (up to 5 m bient temperature and
shielded motor cable) max. 4 kHz switching
frequency.
1) 37 - Details on maximum motor cable lengths.

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 61

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression

Operation at rated power

ƒ RFI filter LL (Low Leakage)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712LL 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
E84AZESR7512LL 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
0.75 1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ E84AZESR2222LL 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐

4.4 ƒ RFI filter SD (Short Distance)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712SD 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
E84AZESR7512SD 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
0.75 1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ E84AZESR2222SD 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ E84AZESR7514SD 3.30 262 x 70 x 60 1.1
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ E84AZESR2224SD 7.30 1.4
317 x 70 x 60
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3 AC 320 ... 550 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐S E84AZESR3024SD 9.80 1.5
3.00
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ E84AZESR5524SD 18.0 306 x 140 x 60 3.1
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ E84AZESR1534SD 29.0 361 x 140 x 60 4.4
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐

4.4 - 62 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression

Operation at rated power

ƒ RFI filter LD (Long Distance)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.25 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712LD 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
E84AZESR7512LD 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
0.75 1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ E84AZESR2222LD 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ E84AZESR7514LD 3.30 262 x 70 x 60 1.1
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ 4.4

1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ E84AZESR2224LD 7.30 1.2
317 x 70 x 60
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐S E84AZESR3024LD 9.80 1.3
3.00 3 AC 320 ... 550
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ E84AZESR5524LD 18.0 306 x 140 x 60 2.4
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ E84AZESR1534LD 29.0 361 x 140 x 60 3.3
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ I0FAE318F100D0000S 50.4 436 x 205 x 90 7.1

ƒ Mains filter LD (Long Distance)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter Mains filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ I0FAE322F100D0000S 43.0 436 x 205 x 90 14.0
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ I0FAE330F100D0000S 55.0 23.0
3 AC 320 ... 550 590 x 250 x 105
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ I0FAE337F100D0000S 69.0 25.0
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ I0FAE345F100D0001S 100 519 x 250 x 105 32.0

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 63

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression

Operation with increased power output

ƒ RFI filter LL (Low Leakage)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712LL 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AZESR7512LL 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
E84AZESR2222LL 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐

ƒ RFI filter SD (Short Distance)

4.4
Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712SD 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AZESR7512SD 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
E84AZESR2222SD 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ E84AZESR7514SD 3.30 262 x 70 x 60 1.1
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ E84AZESR2224SD 7.30 1.4
317 x 70 x 60
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3 AC 320 ... 550
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐S E84AZESR3024SD 9.80 1.5
4.00
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ E84AZESR5524SD 18.0 306 x 140 x 60 3.1
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
E84AZESR1534SD 29.0 361 x 140 x 60 4.4
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐

4.4 - 64 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression

Operation with increased power output

ƒ RFI filter LD (Long Distance)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter RFI filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AZESR3712LD 5.00 212 x 70 x 60 0.8
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐
1 AC 180 ... 264 E84AZESR7512LD 9.00 262 x 70 x 60 1.0
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐
E84AZESR2222LD 22.0 317 x 70 x 60 1.6
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ E84AZESR7514LD 3.30 262 x 70 x 60 1.1
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐ 4.4

2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ E84AZESR2224LD 7.30 1.2

317 x 70 x 60
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
3 AC 320 ... 550
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐S E84AZESR3024LD 9.80 1.3
4.00
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐0
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ E84AZESR5524LD 18.0 306 x 140 x 60 2.4
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
E84AZESR1534LD 29.0 361 x 140 x 60 3.3
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐

ƒ Mains filter LD (Long Distance)

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass
power
4-pole asyn- Inverter Mains filter
chronous motor
P UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ I0FAE322F100D0000S 43.0 436 x 205 x 90 14.0
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ I0FAE322F100D0001S 55.0 365 x 205 x 90 18.5
37.0 3 AC 320 ... 550 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ I0FAE337F100D0000S 69.0 590 x 250 x 105 25.0
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐
I0FAE345F100D0001S 100 519 x 250 x 105 32.0
55.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 65

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Sinusoidal filters

A sinusoidal filter in the motor cable limits the rate of voltage rise
and the capacitive charge/discharge currents that occur during invert-
er operation.

Application range:
• Only use a sinusoidal filter with standard asynchronous motors of
0 ... 550 V
• Operation only with V/f or V/f2 characteristic control
• Set the switching frequency permanently to the specified value
• Limit the output frequency of the Inverter Drives 8400 to the spe-
cified value

Sinusoidal filters

Operation at rated power

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated inductance Switching fre- Mass
power quency
4-pole asynchron- Inverter Sinusoidal filter
ous motor
P UAC LN fch m
[kW] [V] [mH] [kHz] [kg]
4.4 0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
EZS3-004A200 11.0 4.0
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐ EZS3-010A200 5.10 5.5
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ 4
EZS3-017A200 3.07 8.5
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ 8
3 AC 320 ... 550
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ EZS3-024A200 2.50 14.5
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ EZS3-032A200 2.00 19.0
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐ EZS3-037A200 1.70 21.0
18.5 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐ EZS3-048A200 1.20 25.5
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐ EZS3-061A200 1.00 33.5
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ EZS3-072A200 0.95 37.0
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ EZS3-090A200 0.80 53.0
2
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ EZS3-115A200 0.70 66.0
4

4.4 - 66 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Sinusoidal filters

Operation with increased power output

Typical motor Mains voltage Product key Rated inductance Switching fre- Mass
power quency
4-pole asynchron- Inverter Sinusoidal filter
ous motor
P UAC LN fch m
[kW] [V] [mH] [kHz] [kg]
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐
EZS3-010A200 5.10 5.5
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
2.20 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
3.00 E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
EZS3-017A200 3.07 4 8.5
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
8
7.50 3 AC 320 ... 550 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
EZS3-024A200 2.50 14.5
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ EZS3-037A200 1.70 21.0
4.4
22.0 E84AV☐☐☐1834☐☐☐
EZS3-061A200 1.00 33.5
30.0 E84AV☐☐☐2234☐☐☐
37.0 E84AV☐☐☐3034☐☐☐ EZS3-072A200 0.95 37.0
45.0 E84AV☐☐☐3734☐☐☐ EZS3-090A200 0.80 53.0
2
55.0 E84AV☐☐☐4534☐☐☐ EZS3-115A200 0.70 66.0
4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 67

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Rated data for power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

Product key
Power supply module E94APNE0104 E94APNE0364 E94APNE1004 E94APNE2454
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 4.90 17.5 48.6 119
Without mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 3.60 13.0 36.2 88.6
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 8.0 29.0 82.0 200.0
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 10.0 36.0 100.0 245.0
4.4
Data for 60 s overload

Max. DC-bus current

Imax [A] 15.0 54.0 150.0 368.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 7.5 27.0 75.0 183.5
Overload time
tol [s] 120.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 60.0
Max. output power 1)
Pmax, 1 [kW] 7.4 26.3 72.9 179.0

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time DC-bus current

Imax [A] 40.0 108.0 200.0 368.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 7.5 27.0 75.0 183.5
Overload time
tol [s] 0.5
Recovery time
tre [s] 4.5
Max. short-term output power 1)
Pmax, 2 [kW] 19.6 52.5 146.0 357.0
1) Mains filter required; if no mains filter is installed, the stated values for P
max
decrease

4.4 - 68 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Rated data for power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

Product key
Power supply module E94APNE0104 E94APNE0364 E94APNE1004 E94APNE2454
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 4.90 17.5 48.6 119
Without mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 3.60 13.0 36.2 88.6
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 10.0 36.0 100.0 245.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.055 0.110 0.230 0.550
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 383
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481 510 4.4
Width b [mm] 60 120 210 390
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 2.6 5.3 13.5 28.5

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 2.6 8.7 17.0 30.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 43.8 105.1 187.7
Running time
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 3.8 2.5 3.1
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 12.0 5.0 2.8

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 69

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Rated data for regenerative power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

ƒ Mains filter required, please refer to the following pages

Product key
Supply- / regenerative module E94ARNE0134 E94ARNE0244
Operating mode
Feed Feedback Feed Feedback
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 15.0 7.50 27.0 13.5
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 340 V-0% ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 26.0 13.0 47.0 23.5
4.4
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 32.0 16.0 57.0 29.0

Data for 60 s overload

Max. DC-bus current

Imax [A] 48.0 24.0 86.0 44.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 20.0 9.8 35.0 18.0
Overload time
tol [s] 60.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 120.0
Max. output power
Pmax, 1 [kW] 22.4 11.2 40.5 20.2

Data for 0.5 s overload

Max. short-time DC-bus current

Imax [A] 96.0 48.0 171.0 87.0
Reduced DC-bus current
Ired, DC [A] 20.0 9.8 35.0 18.0
Max. short-term output power
Pmax, 2 [kW] 44.9 22.4 81.1 40.5
with brake chopper support Pmax, 2 [kW] 35.1 59.6

4.4 - 70 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Rated data for regenerative power supply modules

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

ƒ Mains filter required, please refer to the following pages

Product key
Supply- / regenerative module E94ARNE0134 E94ARNE0244
Operating mode
Feed Feedback Feed Feedback
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 15.0 7.50 27.0 13.5
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 32.0 16.0 57.0 29.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.150 0.110 0.230 0.190
4.4
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 481
Width b [mm] 120
Depth t [mm] 288
Mass
m [kg] 6.0

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 4.7 9.3
Max. output power, Brake chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 19.5 29.2
Running time
ton [s] 1.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 4.2 3.9
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 27.0 18.0

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 71

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Control connections

Mode
Power supply modules Regenerative power supply modules
Analog inputs
Number 2
Resolution 11 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
1 x switchable 20mA
Analog outputs
Number 2
Resolution 10 bits + sign
Value range +/- 10V
max. 2 mA
Digital inputs
Number 1 8
Permanently configured
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. input current 8mA
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
fest konfiguriert
4.4
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. output current 50mA per output
Load capacity >480 Ω at 24 V
External DC supply
Rated voltage 24 V in accordance with IEC 61131-2
Voltage range 19.2 … 28.8 V, max. residual ripple ± 5%
Current Approx. 1.4 A during operation, max. 4 Approx. 1.2 A during operation, max. 3
A starting current for 100 ms A starting current for 100 ms 1)
Interfaces
CANopen Integrated
Extensions Via slot MXI 2: extension 2
Via slot MXI 1: extension 1
State bus Integrated
Memory Slot MMI
Safety engineering Slot MSI
Drive interface
Resolver input Integrated (no function)
Mains synchronisation input Integrated
Sub-D, 15-pin
1) Thesupply to the control electronics comes from the mains voltage. Altern-
atively, it can be provided by a 24 V supply that is independent of the mains
(available as an option).

4.4 - 72 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Brake resistors of the regenerative power supply mod-

ules

Assignment of brake resistors to the supply and regenerative power

supply modules is shown in the tables below.

Brake resistor 27 ohms

Brake resistors for power supply modules

Rated power Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated power Thermalcapa- Dimensions Mass
voltage ance city
Without Power supply Brake resistor
mains fil- module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
3.60 E94APNE0104 ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1 4.4
ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
3 AC 340 …
ERBG012R01K9 1.90 285 486 x 236 x 302 13.0
13.0 528 1) E94APNE0364 12.0
ERBG012R05K2 5.20 750 486 x 426 x 302 28.0
36.2 E94APNE1004 ERBG005R02K6 5.0 2.60 390 486 x 326 x 302 12.6
88.6 E94APNE2454 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4.10 615 486 x 426 x 302 12.8
1) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

Brake resistors for regenerative power supply modules

Rated Mains Product key Rated resist- Rated Thermal Dimensions Mass
power voltage ance power capacity
With Supply- / regen- Brake resistor
mains fil- erative module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
15.0 E94ARNE0134 ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
3 AC 340 … ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
528 1) ERBP018R300W 0.30 30.0 240 x 41 x 122 1.4
27.0 E94ARNE0244 ERBS018R01K2 18.0 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBS018R02K8 2.80 420 1110 x 200 x 105 12.0
2) For 230 V mains voltage a different brake resistor assignment applies.

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 73

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Mains chokes of the power supply modules

A mains choke is an inductive resistor which is connected in the mains

cable of the power supply module. The use of a mains choke provides
the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads

Mains chokes can be used without restrictions in conjunction with

RFI filters and/or sinusoidal filters.

Please note:
: The use of a mains choke slightly reduces the mains voltage at the Mains choke
input of the inverter - the typical voltage drop across the mains choke
at the rated values is around 4%.

Rated power Mains Product key Rated current Dimensions Mass

voltage
With mains fil- Power supply module Mains choke
ter/mains choke
PN UAC IN hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [mm] [kg]
4.4 4.90 E94APNE0104 EZAELN3008B372 8.00 85 x 120 x 140 1.9
17.5 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 EZAELN3030B982 30.0 110 x 155 x 167 5.9
48.6 528 E94APNE1004 EZAELN3080B371 80.0 125 x 210 x 240 12.5
119 E94APNE2454 EZAELN3200B151 200 352 x 144 x 264 32.0

4.4 - 74 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

RFI filters and mains filters enable compliance with the interference
voltage categories of the European standard EN 61800-3. There a
distinction is drawn between category C1 and category C2.
Category C1 describes the use on public supply networks.
Category C2 describes the use of drives which are intended to be used
for industrial purposes in areas also comprising residential areas.
For Multi Drives external filters must be used to comply with the EMC
Directive.

RFI filter, can be mounted beside

the power supply module

RFI filters

RFI filters are primarily capacitive accessory components which can

be connected directly upstream from the power supply modules. This
measure enables compliance with the corresponding conducted noise
emission requirements according to EN 61800-3. 4.4

Rated power Mains Product key Rated cur- Power loss Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
voltage rent
Without Power supply RFI filter Reference group C2
mains fil- module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC IN PV lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [kW] [m] [mm] [kg]
3.60 E94APNE0104 E94AZRP0084 8.00 0.020 4.2
485 x 60 x 261
13.0 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 E94AZRP0294 29.0 0.050 4.5
6 axes of 10 m each
36.2 528 E94APNE1004 E94AZRP0824 82.0 0.080 18.5
490 x 209 x 272
88.6 E94APNE2454 E94AZRP2004 200 0.150 20.5

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.
n
20

15

10

10 20 30 40 50 60 70
 lmot [m]

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 75

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

Mains filters

A mains filter is a combination of mains choke and RFI filter in a single

housing. It reduces line-bound noise emission into the mains, thus
ensuring that the line-bound interference voltage is reduced to a
permissible level according to EN61800-3.

Mains filter, can be mounted beside the power supply modules (right) or the
regenerative power supply modules (left)
RFI filters

Rated power Mains Product key Rated cur- Voltage Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
voltage rent drop
With mains Power supply Mains filter Reference group C2
filter/mains module
choke
4.4
PN UAC IN U lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [V] [m] [mm] [kg]
4.90 E94APNE0104 E94AZMP0084 8.00 10.0 485 x 90 x 261 8.6
17.5 3 AC 340 … E94APNE0364 E94AZMP0294 29.0 7.3 485 x 120 x 261 16.5
10 axes of 50 m each
48.6 528 E94APNE1004 E94AZMP0824 1) 82.0 6.4 490 x 270 x 272 29.0
119 E94APNE2454 E94AZMP2004 1) 200 6.3 490 x 330 x 272 52.0
1) External24 V supply from a safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
required for integrated fan.

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.
n
20

15

10

100 200 300 400 500 600 700

 lmot [m]

4.4 - 76 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Interference suppression of the regenerative power

supply modules

Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

Rated Mains Product key Rated cur- Voltage Max. cable length Dimen- Mass
power voltage rent drop sions
With Supply- / regen- Mains filter Reference group C2
mains fil- erative module
ter/mains
choke
PN UAC IN U lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [V] [A] [V] [m] [mm] [kg]
E94AZMR0264SDB 1) 6 axes of 10 m each 485 x 149 25.0
15.0 E94ARNE0134 26.0 6.3
3 AC 340 … E94AZMR0264LDB 1) 10 axes of 50 m each x 272 26.0
528 E94AZMR0474SDB 1) 6 axes of 10 m each 485 x 209 36.0
27.0 E94ARNE0244 47.0 6.2
E94AZMR0474LDB 1) 10 axes of 50 m each x 272 37.0
1) External 24 V supply through safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
required for integrated mains voltage recording.

4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 77

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

DC input module

Via a DC input module, an axis module interconnection can be sup-

plied with power from a central DC source (power supply module,
Single Drive axis modules, Multi Drive axis modules). This is required
for example if a drive system with a multi-level structure installed in
a control cabinet is to be supplied via a central DC power supply unit.
The rated current of the DC input module is defined to be 100 A (DC).
The DC input module can be connected at the top or bottom, offering
great flexibility with regard to integration into the system wiring.
This provides an ideal way of connecting multi-row axis modules in
particular.

DC input module
100 A

Mode Product key Dimensions Mass

Input module
hxbxt m
[mm] [kg]
DC input module 100 A E94AZEX100 422 x 60 x 95 0.9
4.4

Wiring example for multi-row mounting of axis modules

4.4 - 78 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

DC-bus connection

The Inverter Drives 8400 can be operated in a DC-bus connection. The

400 V devices have a direct connection for this.
The components listed here are used to interconnect the individual
devices for operation with or without a regenerative power supply
module. With a DC-bus connection, energy can be exchanged between
the individual devices. This makes particular sense with cyclic opera-
tion of multiple devices.
The design of a DC-bus connection requires extremely precise dimen-
sioning of the devices' energy requirements among one another.
Lenze Sales is happy to advise you here to ensure the most energy-
efficient drive dimensioning. The components listed here form the
basis for this.

ƒ Two DC fuses are always required.

ƒ The fuse holders EFH10005 and EFH10004 are single-pole, while
the holders EFH20005 and EFH20007 are 2-pole.
ƒ The fuses are not UL-approved for the DC operation.
ƒ Please consult Lenze Sales to ensure the right dimensioning.

Components for DC-bus connection

Product key Rated current Design Product key Rated current Design
DC fuses DC fuses
IN IN 4.4
[A] [A]
EFSGR0060AYHN 6.00 EFSGR0120AYIN 12.0
EFSGR0100AYHN 10.0 EFSGR0160AYIN 16.0
EFSGR0160AYHN 16.0 EFSGR0200AYIN 20.0
14x51 without indic-
EFSGR0200AYHN 20.0 EFSGR0250AYIN 25.0 22x58 without indic-
ator
EFSGR0250AYHN 25.0 EFSGR0320AYIN 32.0 ator
EFSGR0320AYHN 32.0 EFSGR0400AYIN 40.0
EFSGR0400AYHN 40.0 EFSGR0500AYIN 50.0
EFSGR0060AYHK 6.00 EFSGR0800AYIN 80.0
EFSGR0100AYHK 10.0 EFSGR0120AYIK 12.0
EFSGR0160AYHK 16.0 EFSGR0160AYIK 16.0
EFSGR0200AYHK 20.0 14x51 with indicator EFSGR0200AYIK 20.0
EFSGR0250AYHK 25.0 EFSGR0250AYIK 25.0
22x58 with indicator
EFSGR0320AYHK 32.0 EFSGR0320AYIK 32.0
EFSGR0400AYHK 40.0 EFSGR0400AYIK 40.0
EFSGR0500AYIK 50.0
EFSGR0800AYIK 80.0

Mode Features Product key

• Busbar system 14 x 51
EWZ0036
• DC busbar length 1m, cross-section 25 mm 2
DC busbar
• Busbar system 22 x 58
EWZ0037
• DC busbar length 1m, cross-section 25 mm 2
End cap • End caps for DC busbar (packaging unit 10 pcs) EWZ0038
Terminal • Single-pole terminal for internal supply EWZ0039

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 79

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

DC-bus connection

DC fuses size 14 x 51 mm

Typical motor Mains Product key

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Inverter DC fuses
ous motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ EFSGR0160AYHN EFSGR0160AYHK
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐ EFH20005 EFH10005
2.20 3 AC 320 ... E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
EFSGR0200AYHN EFSGR0200AYHK
3.00 550 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ EFSGR0320AYHN EFSGR0320AYHK
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ EFSGR0400AYHN EFSGR0400AYHK
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
4.4
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐

DC fuses size 22 x 58 mm

Typical motor Mains Product key

power voltage
4-pole asynchron- Inverter DC fuses
ous motor
P UAC
[kW] [V]
0.37 E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
0.55 E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐
0.75 E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ EFSGR0120AYIN EFSGR0120AYIK
1.10 E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐
1.50 E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
2.20 3 AC 320 ... E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐
EFSGR0200AYIN EFH20007 EFSGR0200AYIK EFH10004
3.00 550 E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐
4.00 E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐ EFSGR0320AYIN EFSGR0320AYIK
5.50 E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐ EFSGR0400AYIN EFSGR0400AYIK
7.50 E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐ EFSGR0500AYIN EFSGR0500AYIK
11.0 E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐
EFSGR0800AYIN EFSGR0800AYIK
15.0 E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐

4.4 - 80 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

24 V power supply unit

External power supply units are available for supplying the control
electronics of the 8400 StateLine, HighLine or TopLine. With an extern-
al supply, the inverters can be parameterised and diagnosed while
the mains input is deenergised.

24 V power supply unit

Rated data

Product key
EZV1200-000 EZV2400-000 EZV4800-000 EZV1200-001 EZV2400-001 EZV4800-001
Rated voltage
AC UN, AC [V] 230 400
Input voltage
Uin [V] AC 85 ... 264 AC 320 ... 575
DC 90 ...350 DC 450 ...800
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 0.8 1.2 2.3 0.3 0.6 1.0 4.4
Output voltage
Uout [V] DC 22.5 ...28.5
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 5.0 10.0 20.0 5.0 10.0 20.0
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 130
Width b [mm] 55 85 157 73 85 160
Depth t [mm] 125
Mass
m [kg] 0.8 1.2 2.5 1.0 1.1 1.9

Brake switch

The brake switch consists of a rectifier and an electronic circuit

breaker for the switching of an electromechanical brake switch. The
brake switch is mounted on the control cabinet plate by means of
two screws. Control is performed using a digital output on the inverter.

Brake switch

Mode Features Product key

• Input voltage: AC 320 … 550 V
• Output voltage: DC 180 V (at AC 400 V), DC 225 V (at AC 500 V)
Half-wave rectification E82ZWBRE
• Max. brake current: DC 0.61 A
• IP00 degree of protection
• Input voltage: AC 180 … 317 V
• Output voltage: DC 205 V (at AC 230 V)
Bridge rectification E82ZWBRB
• Max. brake current: DC 0.54 A
• IP00 degree of protection

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 81

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

USB diagnostic adapter

The operation, parameter setting and diagnostics of the Inverter

Drives 8400 and the Servo Drives 9400 via the L-force diagnostics is
made with the keypad X400 or a PC. The connection of a PC can be
made via a USB interface and the USB diagnostic adapter.

For connecting the USB diagnostic adapter with the L-force diagnostics
interface (DIAG) tat the inverter, three different connecting cables
are separately available in the lengths 2.5 m, 5 m and 10 m. The
connection can be established during operation. The engineering
tools EASY Starter or Engineer can be used to carry out the operation,
parameter setting or diagnostics of the inverters. Both tools have
simple intuitive surfaces. This enables a quick and easy commission-
ing.

Optionally to the USB diagnostic adapter, the PC system bus adapter

can be used. For this purpose, a CANopen interface must be available
at the inverter.

USB diagnostic adapter incl.

connecting cable to the PC

ƒ The engineering tools EASY Starter or Engineer are used for oper-
ation, parameter setting and diagnostics of the inverters.

4.4 Mode Features Product key

• Input-side voltage supply via USB connection on PC

• Output-side voltage supply via inverter's diagnostic
interface
USB diagnostic adapter E94AZCUS
• Diagnostic LEDs
• Electrical isolation of PC and inverter
• Hot-pluggable

Connecting cables for USB diagnostic adapter

Mode Features Product key

• Length: 2.5 m EWL0070
Connecting cable for USB diagnostic adapter • Length: 5 m EWL0071
• Length: 10 m EWL0072

4.4 - 82 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

X400 keypad

As an alternative to the PC, the X400 keypad can be used for local
operation, parameter setting or diagnostics.
The X400 keypad plugs into the L-force diagnostics interface (DIAG)
on the front of the inverter.

X400 keypad

Mode Features Slot Product key

• Menu navigation
• Graphics display with background lightning for clear
X400 keypad presentation of information DIAG EZAEBK1001
• 4 navigation keys, 2 context-sensitive keys
• Adjustable RUN/STOP function
ƒ The Inverter Drives 8400 can be ordered with a plug-in keypad
already installed. If you would like to order the products in this
complete form, please add the inverter product key as follows
when placing your order: E84AV to X-XXKXX 4.4
ƒ The product key with the supplement for the applied module is
provided in our sales documents. This information is not part of
the nameplate of the device.

X400 diagnosis terminal

Mode Features Slot Product key

• X400 keypad in a robust housing

• Also suitable for installation in the control cabinet door
X400 diagnosis terminal • incl. 2.5 m cable DIAG EZAEBK2001
• IP20 degree of protection, IP65 for control cabinet in-
stallation on front face

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 83

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

PC system bus adapter

The operation, parameterisation and diagnostics of the Inverter Drives

8400 using a PC can also be carried out via the CANopen interface
using a PC system bus adapter. This requires a PC system bus adapter
instead of a USB diagnostic adapter. This adapter is plugged into the
parallel interface or USB connection of the PC. The corresponding
drivers will be installed automatically. The voltage for the adapter is
supplied via the USB connection of the PC. The CANopen interface is
integrated or available with a variant (BaseLine C).

Advantage:
• Operation, parameterisation and diagnostics in parallel with the
keypad
• In interconnected systems, multiple inverters can be addressed
simultaneously from one point (remote parameterisation via
CANopen)

EMF2177IB adapter

4.4

Mode Features Product key

• Voltage supply via USB port on PC
PC system bus adapter EMF2177IB
• Electrical isolation from the bus

Shield mounting

A shield mounting is used to connect the motor cable shield on the

inverter's shield connection.

Mode Features Product key

• Cable diameter: 8…30 mm
Metal cable tie EZAMBKBM
• Packaging unit: 50 items
• Cable diameter: 4…10 mm
Fixing clip EZAMBHXM007/M
• Packaging unit: 20 items
• Cable diameter: 4…15 mm
EZAMBHXM006/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Cable diameter: 10…20 mm
EZAMBHXM003/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
Wire clamp
• Cable diameter: 15…28 mm
EZAMBHXM004/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Cable diameter: 20…37 mm
EZAMBHXM005/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items

4.4 - 84 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Terminal strips

All connections are equipped with pluggable connectors, with power

connections up to 15 kW. These pluggable connectors are available
separately for service purposes or if cable harnesses need to be
physically separated.

ƒ Power connections

Product key Terminal Features Product key Terminal Features Product key
strip strip
Inverter
E84AV☐☐☐2512☐☐☐
E84AV☐☐☐3712☐☐☐
E84AZEVS001X100/M
E84AV☐☐☐5512☐☐☐ • Connection:
mains
E84AV☐☐☐7512☐☐☐
• Packaging unit: 10
E84AV☐☐☐1122☐☐☐ items
E84AV☐☐☐1522☐☐☐ E84AZEVS002X100/M
E84AV☐☐☐2222☐☐☐
E84AZEVS010X105/M
E84AV☐☐☐3714☐☐☐
E84AV☐☐☐5514☐☐☐ • Connection: mo-
tor
E84AV☐☐☐7514☐☐☐ X100 X105
• Packaging unit: 5 4.4
E84AV☐☐☐1124☐☐☐ E84AZEVS003X100/M items
E84AV☐☐☐1524☐☐☐
• Connection:
E84AV☐☐☐2224☐☐☐ mains
E84AV☐☐☐3024☐☐☐ • Packaging unit: 5
items
E84AV☐☐☐4024☐☐☐
E84AZEVS004X100/M E84AZEVS011X105/M
E84AV☐☐☐5524☐☐☐
E84AV☐☐☐7524☐☐☐
E84AV☐☐☐1134☐☐☐ E84AZEVS005X100/M E84AZEVS012X105/M
E84AV☐☐☐1534☐☐☐

ƒ Control connections

Terminal Features Product key

strip
• Connection: CANopen
X1 E84AZEVS040X001/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: analog inputs and outputs
X3 E84AZEVS060X003/M
• Packaging unit: 5 items
• Connection: digital outputs
X4 E84AZEVS060X004/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: digital inputs
X5 E84AZEVS060X005/M
• Packaging unit: 5 items
• Connection: axis bus
X10 E84AZEVS060X010/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: safety engineering
X80 E84AZEVS070X080/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: relay
X101 E84AZEVS020X101/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: PTC
X106 E84AZEVS030X106/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items
• Connection: 2.5 A digital output
X107 E84AZEVS060X107/M
• Packaging unit: 10 items

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 85

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

Setpoint potentiometer

The setpoint selection (e.g. speed) can be made via an external poten-
tiometer.
The setpoint potentiometer is connected to the inverter's analog input
terminals. A scale and a rotary knob are also available.

Setpoint potentiometer with scale and rotary knob

Mode Product key

10 kOhm / 1 Watt potentiometer ERPD0010K0001W
Rotary knob,
ERZ0001
36 mm diameter
Scale 0 … 100%,
ERZ0002
62 mm diameter

4.4

4.4 - 86 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

4.4

Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021 4.4 - 87

 Inverter Drives 8400 TopLine
Accessories

4.4

4.4 - 88 Lenze | V10-en_GB-10/2021

Inverter

Servo-Inverter i700
5 to 64 A
Servo-Inverter i700
Contents

General information Product key 4.5 - 4

Equipment 4.5 - 7
List of abbreviations 4.5 - 8
Generation Easy for multi-axis applications 4.5 - 9
Functions and features 4.5 - 10
Operating modes 4.5 - 11
Dimensioning of a multi-axis system 4.5 - 12

Technical data Standards and operating conditions 4.5 - 15

Rated data for single axes 4.5 - 16
Rated data for double axes 4.5 - 18
Rated data for power supply modules 4.5 - 20
"Cold plate" design 4.5 - 22
Push-through technique design 4.5 - 24

Interfaces Mains connection 4.5 - 27

Motor connection 4.5 - 28
Connection diagrams 4.5 - 30
Control connections 4.5 - 32
Safety engineering 4.5 - 34
EtherCAT® communication 4.5 - 35

Accessories Power supply modules Brake resistors for power supply modules 4.5 - 37
Mains chokes for power supply modules 4.5 - 38
Interference suppression of power supply modules 4.5 - 39 4.5
' 24 V power supply unit 4.5 - 41
Installation sets for Servo-Inverter i700 4.5 - 41
Installation material for i700 servo inverter 4.5 - 42
 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Product key

4.5

4.5 - 4 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Product key

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 5

 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

4.5

4.5 - 6 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Equipment with Basic Safety STO

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 7

 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

List of abbreviations

b [mm] Dimensions ASM Asynchronous motor

Cth [KWs] Thermal capacity DIAG Slot for diagnostic adapter
fch [kHz] Switching frequency DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V.
h [mm] Dimensions EN European standard
Hmax [m] Site altitude EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Imax [A] Max. DC-bus current code)
Imax, out [A] Max. output current EN 60721-3 Classification of environmental conditions; Part 3:
IN, AC [A] Rated mains current Classes of environmental parameters and their
limit values
IN, DC [A] Rated DC-bus current
EN 61800-3 Electrical variable speed drives Part 3: EMC require-
IN, out [A] Rated output current
ments including special test methods
lmax [m] Max. cable length
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
m [kg] Mass
IEC 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/program-
P [kW] Typical motor power mable electronic safety-related systems
Pmax, 1 [kW] Max. output power IM International Mounting Code
PV [kW] Power loss IP International Protection Code
PN [kW] Rated power MCI Slot for communication module (module commu-
Rmin [Ω] Min. brake resistance nication interface)
RN [Ω] Rated resistance NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
t [mm] Dimensions UL Underwriters Laboratory Listed Product
UAC [V] Mains voltage UR Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Product
UDC [V] DC supply VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association
UN, AC [V] Rated voltage of German Electrical Engineers)
4.5 Uout [V] Max. output voltage

4.5 - 8 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Generation Easy for multi-axis applications

i700 – in use

The innovative Servo-Inverter i700 for central motion control is Powerful central motion control of demanding machine tasks is best
characterised by its compact and highly flexible design. Dual axes achieved with our Controller-based Automation. The Servo-Inverter
keep the drive size to a minimum, dynamic motor control makes it i700 for multiaxis application can drive all centrally controlled motors
suitable for use in a wide range of applications. Drive integration, in your machine module – from three-phase AC motor to servo motor.
commissioning and maintenance have been substantially simplified
thanks to its installation concept and easy engineering.

Highlights: i700 features:

• Easy to use: from installation to service • Multi-axis system
• Compact: both in size and connection system • Single and double axes
• Flexible: motor control for synchronous and asynchronous motors • Power supply modules
• High performance, e. g. with real-time EtherCAT® bus system • DC-bus connection via busbar system
• Pluggable connection system
• Automatic parameter/firmware download via the control
system
• Motor control:
-Servo with field weakening and torque pre-control
-V/f control for standard asynchronous motors without encoder

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 9

 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Functions and features

The Servo-Inverter i700 can be directly implemented into the Control- The speed and position control modes are directly executed in the
ler-based Automation applications via the integrated EtherCAT® in- servo inverter which ensures very short cycle times (0.25 ms). The
terface. The interaction of the different Lenze controllers provide for selection of the right control mode for the application is determined
a high number of sophisticated Lenze Motion applications. via the application in the Controller. The "Controller-based Automa-
tion" chapter summarises which controller optimally solves the indi-
vidual applications together with the i700.

Mode
Servo-Inverter i700
Conrol types, motor control
Field-oriented servo control (SC) For synchronous servo motors, asynchronous servo motors and three-phase
asynchronous motors
V/f control (VFCplus) For three-phase AC motors and asynchronous servo motor (linear or square-law)
Basic functions
Brake management for brake control with low rate of wear
PID controller
Operating modes to CiA 402 Velocity mode (VL) - non-cyclic velocity setpoint
Cyclic synchronous position (csp) - cyclic position setpoint
Cyclic synchronous velocity (csv) - cyclic velocity setpoint
Cyclic synchronous torque (cst) - cyclic torque setpoint
Overload behaviour
200% maximum current (with regard to 4kHz rated current)
Functions with FAST Application Software
4.5
Comprehensive library of function and technology modules e.g. for positioning,
cam functions, electrical shaft etc.
Monitoring and protective measures
Overload
Short circuit
Earth fault
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
DC-bus voltage
Motor phase failure
Overcurrent
I² x t-Motor monitoring
Overtemperature
Motor overtemperature
Brake chopper, brake resistance
Motor stalling
Diagnostics
Axis modules: Error codes to CiA 402
Power supply modules: Status message via 2 digital outputs
Oscilloscope functions
Status display 2 LEDs
Braking operation
Brake chopper Integrated in power supply module
Brake resistor External
Mounting conditions
Mounting type Installation
Cold plate technique (on request)
Push-through technique (on request)
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertical
Free spaces At the top: minimum 90 mm
Side−by−side mounting without any clearance
At the bottom: minimum 70 mm

4.5 - 10 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Operating modes

Overcurrent operation

Axis modules and power supply modules

Power supply modules and axis modules can be operated with higher Overcurrent operation
currents beyond the rated current if this overcurrent is only active for
a limited operating time. Within the efficiency cycles, the overcurrent
can flow for a certain period of time if afterwards an accordingly long
recovery phase takes place afterwards. Two efficiency cycles of 15 s [1]
in red and 180 s [2] in blue are defined.

• 15-s cycle
- 3 s (T1) load period with peak current [A] (200 %)
- 12 s (T2) recovery time with limited current [C] (75 %)
• 180-s cycle
- 60 s (T3) load period with peak current [B] (150 %)
- 120 s (T4) recovery time with limited current [C] (75 %)

A load period with peak current must be followed by a recovery time.

In the recovery time, the current must not exceed the given value.

ƒ From a maximum device current of 32 A, the following restriction

applies:
With field frequencies lower than 5 Hz, the cycle time of the short 4.5
time behaviour is reduced from 15 s to 3 s.

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 11

 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Dimensioning of a multi-axis system

Drive dimensioning of multi-axis systems with Servo-Inverters i700

can be easily carried out using the DSD (Drive Solution Designer) en-
gineering tool. This tool can be downloaded from the Lenze homepage
(http://www.lenze.com/download/software-downloads). It considers
various, frequently recurring applications, the ambient conditions
and the entire mechatronic system and their operating mode as for
instance coordinated or uncoordinated multi-axis operation with
energy exchange in the DC-bus system. It provides comprehensible
dimensioning protocols and an Energy Performance Certificate for
the axes and for the multi-axis system. The Energy Performance Cer-
tificate clearly displays the energy efficiency of all drive components
under the given operation modes and provides potential for energy
optimisations for entire plants.

Functions and features

Mode
Engineering Tool DSD
Applications
Comprehensive applications as for instance linear and rotating drives, positioning-, wheel, hoist and syn-
chronous drives, winders, pumps, fans, …
Components
Inverter
4.5 Motors (brake, feedback)
Geared motors
Power supply modules
Check of components and drive
system
Monitoring functions of the inverters
Maximum limits of the components
Product data in the applications
Consideration and check of the entire drive system
Limit loads (electrical/mechanical)
M-n characteristic fields and system checks
Possible combinations of the drive components
Losses and energy efficiency
Optimisation and evaluation
Energy consumption of the components and of the application
Energy exchange in multi-axis applications
Representation of working points, e.g. as characteristic
Presentation of the result
Evaluation of the dimensioning
Representation of energy consumption
Logging of dimensioning
Creating CAD data
Basic functions
Metric and imperial unit systems
Intuitive interfaces with simple dialogs
Comprehensive online help with physical basics and overviews
Fast and easy drive dimensioning and product configuration
Editor for the motion sequence
Creating alternative solutions with comparison operations

4.5 - 12 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
General information

Dimensioning of a multi-axis system

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 13

 Servo-Inverter i700
General information

4.5

4.5 - 14 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Standards and operating conditions

Mode
Product Servo-Inverter i700
Conformity
CE Low-Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU [UKCA: S.I. 2016/1101]
EAC TP TC 004/2011 (TR CU 004/2011)
TP TC 020/2011 (TR CU 020/2011)
Approval
UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment (file no. E132659)
CSA CSA 22.2 No. 14
Certification
RoHs
Degree of protection
EN 60529 IP20
NEMA 250 Type 1
Climatic conditions
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +60 °C)
Storage (EN 60721-3-1) > 6 months 1K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +40 °C)
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2K3 (temperature: -25 °C ... +70 °C)
Operation (EN 60721-3-3) 3K3 (temperature: -10°C ... +55 °C)
4.5
Current derating at over 40°C 2.5 % / K
Site altitude
Amsl Hmax [m] 4000
Current derating at over 1000 m [%/1000 m] 5
Vibration resistance
Transport (EN 60721-3-2) 2M2
Operation (EN 61800-5-1) 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 57 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude,
57 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz: 1.0 g
Operation (Germanischer Lloyd) 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 13.2 Hz: ± 1 mm amplitude
13.2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 100 Hz: 0.7 g

Mode
Product Servo-Inverter i700
Supply form
Systems with earthed star point (TN and TT systems)
Systems with high-resistance or isolated star point (IT systems)
Mains switching
Cyclic mains switching of 5 times in 5 minutes is permissible without
restrictions.
Noise emission
EN 61800-3 Cable-guided disturbance:
According to category C1 with special measures
According to category C2 with standard accessories
According to category C3 without additional measures
Insulation resistance
EN 61800-5-1 Overvoltage category III
Above 2000 m amsl overvoltage category II
Degree of pollution
EN 61800-5-1 2
Shock current
EN 61800-5-1 > 3.5 mA AC, > 10 mA DC
Protective insulation of control circuits
EN 61800-5-1 Safe mains isolation: double/reinforced insulation

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 15

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Rated data for single axes

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 5.0 10.0 20.0
Product key
E70ACM☐☐0054☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0104☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0204☐☐1ET☐
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 260 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Typical motor power
4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.75 1.50 4.00
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 2.5 5.0 10.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
4 kHz Iout [A] 2.5 5.0 10.0
4.5 8 kHz Iout [A] 2.5 5.0 10.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 1.5 3.0 6.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.050 0.080 0.130

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 2.7

4.5 - 16 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Rated data for single axes

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 32.0 48.0 64.0
Product key
E70ACM☐☐0324☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0484☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0644☐☐1ET☐
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 260 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Typical motor power
4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 7.50 11.0 15.0
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 16.0 24.0 32.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
4 kHz Iout [A] 16.0 24.0 32.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 12.8 19.2 25.6 4.5
16 kHz Iout [A] 9.6 14.4 19.2
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.210 0.290 0.390

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 100
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 5.2

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 17

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Rated data for double axes

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 5.0 10.0
Product key
E70ACM☐☐0054☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0104☐☐2ET☐
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 260 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Typical motor power
4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 0.75 1.50
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 2.5 5.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
4 kHz Iout [A] 2.5 5.0
4.5 8 kHz Iout [A] 2.5 5.0
16 kHz Iout [A] 1.5 3.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.090 0.140

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 2.9

4.5 - 18 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Rated data for double axes

Max. short-time output current

Imax, out [A] 20.0 32.0
Product key
E70ACM☐☐0204☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐☐0324☐☐2ET☐
DC supply
UDC [V] DC 260 V -0 % ... 775 V +0 %
Typical motor power
4-pole asynchronous motor P [kW] 4.00 7.50
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 10.0 16.0
Rated switching frequency
fch [kHz] 4
Output current
4 kHz Iout [A] 10.0 16.0
8 kHz Iout [A] 10.0 12.8 4.5
16 kHz Iout [A] 6.0 9.6
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.260 0.370

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350 350
Width b [mm] 100 100
Depth t [mm] 261 261
Mass
m [kg] 5.2 5.2

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 19

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Rated data for power supply modules

ƒ Operation at 3/PE AC 230/400 and 480 V possible.

ƒ The data is valid for operation at 3/PE AC 400 V.

Product key
Power supply module E70ACP☐☐0304☐ E70ACP☐☐0604☐
Rated power
With mains filter/mains choke PN [kW] 15.4 30.9
Without mains filter/mains PN [kW] 10.3 20.6
choke
Max. short-term output power
Pmax, 2 [kW] 20.6 41.2
Mains voltage range
UAC [V] 3/PE AC 180 V-0 % ... 528 V+0 %, 45 Hz-0 % ... 65 Hz+0 %
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 24.5 49.0
4.5
Rated DC-bus current
IN, DC [A] 30.0 60.0
Max. DC-bus current
Imax [A] 45.0 90.0
Power loss
PV [kW] 0.060 0.110

Brake chopper rated data

Rated power, Brake chopper

PN [kW] 5.0 10.1
Max. output power, Brake
chopper
Pmax, 1 [kW] 32.5 65.5
Running time
ton [s] 15.0
Recovery time
tre [s] 82.0
Min. brake resistance
Rmin [Ω] 18.0 9.0

Dimensions and weights

Standard installation design

Dimensions
Height h [mm] 350
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50 100
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 2.8 5.8

4.5 - 20 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 21

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

"Cold plate" design (on request)

Inverters in cold-plate design dissipate some of their waste heat (heat Requirements for the cooler
loss) via a cooler adapted to the application. For this purpose, the in-
verters are provided with a planed cooling plate which is connected When cold-plate technology is used, the following basic conditions
to a separate cooler in a thermally conductive way. Using the cold must be considered:
plate technology, the main part of the heat energy can be transferred
directly to the external cooling units. • Good thermal connection to the external cooling unit, i.e. the im-
plementation of the heat transfer resistance (Rth) according to the
The use of cold-plate technology is advantageous for the following power loss.
application cases: • The contact surface must at least be as big as the cooling plate of
the inverter.
• Minimising the expense of cooling the control cabinet. Here, the • The planarity of the contact surface must not exceed 0.05 mm.
main part of the power loss is directly transferred to a cooling unit • The contact surface of the external coolers and cooling plate must
outside of the control cabinet, e.g. convection cooler or water be connected by means of the intended screwed connection.
cooler. • The maximum temperature of the cooling plate of the inverter ((75
• Heavily polluted ambient air or control cabinets with a high degree °C) must not be exceeded.
of protection which do not allow for a use of a forced air cooling
of the control cabinets.
• Low mounting depth in the control cabinet.

Single axes

Product key Power to be dissipated Thermal resistance

PV Rth

4.5 [W] [K/W]

E70ACM☐C0054☐☐1ET☐ 25.0 ≤ 1.6
E70ACM☐C0104☐☐1ET☐ 50.0 ≤ 0.8
E70ACM☐C0204☐☐1ET☐ 95.0 ≤ 0.45
E70ACM☐C0324☐☐1ET☐ 140 ≤ 0.25
E70ACM☐C0484☐☐1ET☐ 215 ≤ 0.2
E70ACM☐C0644☐☐1ET☐ 290 ≤ 0.15

Double axes

Product key Power to be dissipated Thermal resistance

PV Rth
[W] [K/W]
E70ACM☐C0054☐☐2ET☐ 50.0 ≤ 0.8
E70ACM☐C0104☐☐2ET☐ 95.0 ≤ 0.45
E70ACM☐C0204☐☐2ET☐ 185 ≤ 0.2
E70ACM☐C0324☐☐2ET☐ 275 ≤ 0.15

Power supply modules

Product key Power to be dissipated Thermal resistance

PV Rth
[W] [K/W]
E70ACP☐C0304☐ 45.0 ≤ 0.95
E70ACP☐C0604☐ 85.0 ≤ 0.45

4.5 - 22 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

"Cold plate" design (on request)

Dimensions and weights

Single axes

Product key
E70ACM☐C0054☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐C0104☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐C0204☐☐1ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50
Depth t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 2.3

Product key
E70ACM☐C0324☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐C0484☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐C0644☐☐1ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 100
Depth t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 5.3 4.5

Double axes

Product key
E70ACM☐C0054☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐C0204☐☐2ET☐
E70ACM☐C0104☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐C0324☐☐2ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50 100
Depth t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 2.5 5.3

Power supply modules

Product key
E70ACP☐C0304☐ E70ACP☐C0604☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50 100
Depth t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 2.6 5.6

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 23

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Push-through technique design (on request)

The inverters in push-through design reduce the waste heat in the

control cabinet.
The inverter is mounted in the control cabinet so that the heatsink
on the inverter is outside the control cabinet. Thus, the entire waste
heat can be dissipated outside the control cabinet via convection or
forced air cooling for almost all device performances.

Using the push-through technology is advantageous in the following

application cases:

• Minimising the expense for control cabinet cooling. For this pur-
pose, the main part of the power loss is directly transferred to the
ambience outside the control cabinet,e.g. convection cooling.
• In case of control cabinets with a high degree of protection > IP54
by using separate mounting and cooling areas.
• Low mounting depth in the control cabinet.

Single axes

Product key Power to be dissipated

PV
[W]
E70ACM☐D0054☐☐1ET☐ 25.0
4.5
E70ACM☐D0104☐☐1ET☐ 50.0
E70ACM☐D0204☐☐1ET☐ 95.0
E70ACM☐D0324☐☐1ET☐ 140
E70ACM☐D0484☐☐1ET☐ 215
E70ACM☐D0644☐☐1ET☐ 290

Double axes

Product key Power to be dissipated

PV
[W]
E70ACM☐D0054☐☐2ET☐ 50.0
E70ACM☐D0104☐☐2ET☐ 95.0
E70ACM☐D0204☐☐2ET☐ 185
E70ACM☐D0324☐☐2ET☐ 275

Power supply modules

Product key Power to be dissipated

PV
[W]
E70ACP☐D0304☐ 45.0
E70ACP☐D0604☐ 85.0

4.5 - 24 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

Push-through technique design (on request)

Dimensions and weights

Single axes

Product key
E70ACM☐D0054☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐D0104☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐D0204☐☐1ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50
Depth (in control cabinet) t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 3.0

Product key
E70ACM☐D0324☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐D0484☐☐1ET☐ E70ACM☐D0644☐☐1ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 100
Depth (in control cabinet) t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 7.1 4.5

Double axes

Product key
E70ACM☐D0054☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐D0104☐☐2ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 3.2

Product key
E70ACM☐D0204☐☐2ET☐ E70ACM☐D0324☐☐2ET☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 100
Depth t [mm] 261
Mass
m [kg] 7.1

Power supply modules

Product key
E70ACP☐D0304☐ E70ACP☐D0604☐
Dimensions
Height, including fastening h [mm] 410
Width b [mm] 50 100
Depth (in control cabinet) t [mm] 221
Mass
m [kg] 2.8 5.8

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 25

 Servo-Inverter i700
Technical data

4.5

4.5 - 26 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Mains connection

Interference voltage categories according to the European standard With an upstream mains choke or mains filter, the maximum continu-
EN 61800-3 are divided into category C1, C2 and the category C3. ous power of the power supply modules can be used since the effect-
ive current will be reduced.
Category C1 If no filter or an RFI filter is used, the permissible continuous power
• Describes the use in public networks. (rated power) of the power supply module is reduced.
The mains choke and the RFI filter can also be combined without any
Category C2 restrictions.
• Describes the use of devices intended for industrial purposes in
areas also comprising residential areas.

Category C3
• Describes the use of devices intended for industrial purposes only.

28 - The interference voltage categories achievable due 38 - Mains chokes, RFI filters, Mains filters
to the filter measures are shown in conjunction with
the motor cables.

Mains fuses and cable cross-sections

ƒ The mains fuse and cable cross-section specifications apply to a

mains connection of 3AC 230/400/480 V.
ƒ Class gG/gl fuses or class gRL semiconductor fuses.
ƒ The cable cross-sections apply to PVC-insulated copper cables.
ƒ Use for installation with UL-approved cables, fuses and brackets.
4.5
Mains voltage Product key Circuit breaker Fuse Mains connection
Power supply module EN 60204-1 UL 1) Cross-section (with
mains choke)
UAC I I I q
[V] [A] [A] [A] [mm2]
E70ACP☐☐0304☐ C40 40 10.0
3 AC 180 ... 528
E70ACP☐☐0604☐ C63 63 16.0
1) In preparation.

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 27

 Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Motor connection

ƒ Electric strength of the motor cable: 1 kV as per VDE 250-1.

ƒ Keep motor cables as short as possible, as this has a positive effect
on the drive behaviour.
ƒ Maximum motor cable length 50 m per axis.
ƒ With group drives (multiple motors on one inverter), the resulting
cable length is the key factor. This can be calculated using the
hardware manual.

Motor cable lengths and interference voltage categories

When using the i700 system, use external filters to comply with the
EMC Directives.

Category C1
• With special measures; please contact your Lenze sales office.

Category C2
• With RFI filters, 6 axes with 50 m motor cable each
• With mains filters, 10 axes with 50 m motor cable each

Category C3
• Without external measures, 4 axes with 50 m motor cable each
• With mains choke, 10 axes with 50 m motor cable each

4.5 38 - Mains chokes, RFI filters, Mains filters

4.5 - 28 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Motor connection

The following diagrams show the possible number of axes and the
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category .

ƒ Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)

Category C2

With RFI filters With mains filters

n n
20 20

15 15

10 10

4.5
5 5

100 200 300 400 500 100 200 300 400 500
 lmot [m]  lmot [m]

Category C3

Without external measures With mains chokes

n n
20 20

15 15

10 10

5 5

100 200 300 400 500 100 200 300 400 500
 lmot [m]  lmot [m]

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 29

 Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Connection diagrams

Wiring example for i700 servo inverter, axis modules, Basic Safety STO

4.5

[2] 24 supply for control electronics

[3] 24 V supply for digital inputs
[4] 24 V supply for motor holding brake(s)

4.5 - 30 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Connection diagrams

Servo-Inverter i700 wiring example, power supply modules

4.5

[1] 24 V supply for digital inputs

[2] 24 V supply for control electronics

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 31

 Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Control connections

Mode
Servo-Inverter i700
Digital inputs
Number 2
Touch-probe-capable 2 with time and position stamp
Switching level PLC (IEC 61131-2)
Max. input current 8mA
External DC supply
Rated voltage 24 V in accordance with IEC 61131-2
Voltage range 19.2 … 28.8 V, max. residual ripple ± 5%
Interfaces
EtherCAT 2 (in/out)
Safety engineering Safe torque off (STO)
2 channel design
Drive interface
Resolver input Sub-D, 9-pin
Encoder input Sub-D, 15-pin
SinCos absolute value encoder single-turn (with zero pulse) or multi-turn (Hiper-
face®)
Motor brake 24V holding brake per axis can be directly controlled
4.5

Connection of digital inputs Connection of Basic Safety STO safety system

Motor brake connection

4.5 - 32 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Control connections

External 24 V supply

The control electronics of the Servo-Inverter i700 has to be supplied

with an external 24-V supply. For this purpose, Lenze provides power
supply units. The following table shows the corresponding current
consumptions of the devices.

41 - 24 V power supply unit

Single axes

Max. short-time output current Product key External DC supply

Current
Imax, out
[A]
5.0 E70ACM☐☐0054☐☐1ET☐
10.0 E70ACM☐☐0104☐☐1ET☐ 1.0 A
20.0 E70ACM☐☐0204☐☐1ET☐
32.0 E70ACM☐☐0324☐☐1ET☐
48.0 E70ACM☐☐0484☐☐1ET☐ 2.0 A
64.0 E70ACM☐☐0644☐☐1ET☐ 4.5

Double axes

Max. short-time output current Product key External DC supply

Current
Imax, out
[A]
5.0 E70ACM☐☐0054☐☐2ET☐
1.0 A
10.0 E70ACM☐☐0104☐☐2ET☐
20.0 E70ACM☐☐0204☐☐2ET☐
2.0 A
32.0 E70ACM☐☐0324☐☐2ET☐

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 33

 Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

Safety engineering

Safety engineering has been certified acc. to EN ISO 13849-1

(cat. 4, PL e), EN 61508/EN 62061 (SIL 3).

Basic Safety STO

By default, the i700 servo inverters are available with the "safe torque
off, STO“ safety function. This helps reduce the control system costs,
save space in the control cabinet and keep wiring to a minimum. A
"safe stop 1, SS1" can be implemented easily using a safety switching
device.

The product key of the inverter has an ""A"" as the 14th character.
For example, a servo inverter 5A, built-in unit with Basic Safety STO
safety engineering would be: E70ACMSE0054SA1ETR

Double axis with connection for "Basic Safety STO" safety system

4.5

4.5 - 34 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

EtherCAT® communication

EtherCAT enables the i700 servo inverter to be controlled with digital

control signals via the EtherCAT® bus system. It is integrated in the
i700 servo inverter. It can be seen in the product key at the positions
16 and 17: E70ACM☐☐☐☐4S☐☐ET☐.

The advantages of the system are:

• fast and very powerful bus system
• ideally suited for Controller-based Automation solutions
• easy system integration since a wide range of sensors and actuators
is available on the market.
• the basic features of a servo drive are available in the axes according
to the CiA402 device profile and can be easily used via the Ether-
CAT®.

Mode Features
Communication
• CANopen over EtherCAT (CoE)
EtherCAT 1) • Distributed clock
• 2 RJ45 connections with LEDs for link and activity
1) EtherCAT®
is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.

Technical data
4.5
Product key

Communication
Medium CAT5e S/FTP according to ISO/ICE11801 (2002)
Communication profile CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT)
Baud rate
b [MBit/s] 100
Node
Slave
Network topology
Line (internal ring)
Number of logical process data channels
1
Process data words (PCD)
16 Bit 1 ... 32
Number of bus nodes
Max. 65535
Max. cable length
between two nodes lmax [m] 100
Rated voltage
UN, DC [V] 24.0

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 35

 Servo-Inverter i700
Interfaces

4.5

4.5 - 36 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Brake resistors for power supply modules

The assignment of brake resistors to the power supply modules is

shown in the following tables.

Brake resistor 27 ohms

Product key Rated resistance Rated power Thermal capacity Dimensions Mass
Power supply mod- Brake resistor
ule
RN PN Cth hxbxt m
[Ω] [kW] [KWs] [mm] [kg]
ERBP027R200W 0.20 30.0 320 x 41 x 122 1.0
E70ACP☐☐0304☐ ERBS027R600W 27.0 0.60 90.0 550 x 110 x 105 3.1
ERBS027R01K2 1.20 180 1020 x 110 x 105 5.6
ERBG012R01K9 1.90 285 486 x 236 x 302 13.0
E70ACP☐☐0604☐ 12.0
ERBG012R05K2 5.20 750 486 x 426 x 302 28.0

4.5

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 37

 Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Mains chokes for power supply modules

A mains choke is an inductive resistor which is connected in the mains

cable of the power supply module. The use of a mains choke provides
the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads
• Current balancing of power supply modules connected in parallel

Mains chokes can be used without restrictions in conjunction with

RFI filters.

Please note: Mains choke

The use of a mains choke slightly reduces the mains voltage at the
input of the power supply module – the typical voltage drop across
the mains choke at the rated values is around 5%.
The selection of the correct mains chokes for the power supply mod-
ules depends on the number of connected axes. For this purpose,
different mains chokes are available. For the following efficiencies of
the power supply modules, we have dimensioned model mains
chokes:
• Power supply modules for 30 A operation with rated data
• Power supply modules for 60 A operation with rated data

4.5 Product key Output power Rated current Dimensions Mass

Power supply mod- Mains choke at 400 V
ule
Pout IN hxbxt m
[kW] [A] [mm] [kg]
E70ACP☐☐0304☐ EZAELN3025B122 15.4 25.0 110 x 155 x 170 5.8
E70ACP☐☐0604☐ EZAELN3050B591 30.9 50.0 112 x 185 x 210 8.4

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C3.

Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)

n
20

15

10

100 200 300 400 500

 lmot [m]

4.5 - 38 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Interference suppression of power supply modules

RFI filters

RFI filters are primarily capacitive accessory components which can

be connected directly upstream from the power supply modules. This
measure enables compliance with the corresponding conducted noise
emission requirements according to EN 61800-3.

RFI filter, can be mounted beside

the power supply module

Product key Output Rated current Power loss Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
power
Power supply mod- RFI filter at 400 V Reference group C2
ule
Pout IN PV lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [A] [kW] [m] [mm] [kg] 4.5

E94AZRP0084 3.60 8.00 0.020 4.2

E70ACP☐☐0304☐ 6 axes of 50 m 485 x 60 x 261
E94AZRP0294 10.3 29.0 0.050 4.5
each
E70ACP☐☐0604☐ E94AZRP0824 20.6 82.0 0.080 490 x 209 x 272 18.5

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.

Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)

n
20

15

10

100 200 300 400 500

 lmot [m]

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 39

 Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Interference suppression of power supply modules

Mains filters

A mains filter is a combination of mains choke and RFI filter in one

housing. It reduces the conducted interference emission into the
mains in order that the conducted interference voltage is reduced to
the area permissible according EN61800-3.
This results in the following advantages:
• Fewer effects on the mains:
The wave form of the mains current is a close approximation to a
sine wave.
• Reduction in the effective mains current:
Reduction of mains, cable and fuse loads
• Current balancing when power supply modules are connected in
parallel

Product key Output Rated current Voltage drop Max. cable length Dimensions Mass
power
Power supply mod- Mains filter at 400 V Reference group
ule C2
Pout IN U lmax hxbxt m
[kW] [A] [V] [m] [mm] [kg]
E94AZMP0084 4.90 8.00 10.0 485 x 90 x 261 8.6
E70ACP☐☐0304☐ 10 axes of 50 m
E94AZMP0294 15.4 29.0 7.3 485 x 120 x 261 16.5
each
4.5 E70ACP☐☐0604☐ E94AZMP0824 30.6 82.0 6.4 490 x 270 x 272 29.0

The following diagram shows the possible number of axes and the
possible sum of motor cable lengths to ensure compliance with inter-
ference suppression according to category C2.

Number of axes (n) / sum of the motor cable length (l)

n
20

15

10

100 200 300 400 500

 lmot [m]

4.5 - 40 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

24 V power supply unit

The control electronics of the axis and power supply modules must
be supplied by external 24-V power supply units. For this purpose,
various power supply units are available. The power supply units can
be supplied with AC voltage and DC voltage from the DC bus of the
drive system. This ensures a continuous supply of the electronics in
case of mains failure to ensure a controlled braking process.

Electrical isolation
The i700 components have a "save separation" between mains and
electronic potential according to IEC 61131−2. For maintaining this
feature, the successive power supply units can be used with SELV 24 V power supply unit
(Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELF (Protective Extra Low Voltage).

Product key
EZV1200-000 EZV2400-000 EZV4800-000 EZV1200-001 EZV2400-001 EZV4800-001
Rated voltage
AC UN, AC [V] 230 400
Input voltage
Uin [V] AC 85 ... 264 AC 320 ... 575
DC 90 ...350 DC 450 ...800
Rated mains current
IN, AC [A] 0.8 1.2 2.3 0.3 0.6 1.0
Output voltage
Uout [V] DC 22.5 ...28.5 4.5
Rated output current
IN, out [A] 5.0 10.0 20.0 5.0 10.0 20.0
Dimensions
Height h [mm] 130
Width b [mm] 55 85 157 73 85 160
Depth t [mm] 125
Mass
m [kg] 0.8 1.2 2.5 1.0 1.1 1.9

Installation sets for Servo-Inverter i700

The installation sets include:

• All plug-in terminals
• Shield sheets plus shield terminals
• EtherCAT® cable (100 mm) for connecting the next axis

Mode Features Product key

• For axes 5 to 20 A E70AZEVK001
Installation set for single axes
• For axes 32 to 64 A E70AZEVK003
• For axes 5 to 10 A E70AZEVK002
Installation set for double axes
• For axes 20 to 32 A E70AZEVK004
• For power supply module 30 A E70AZEVK005
Installation set for power supply modules • For power supply module 60 A E70AZEVK006
• For parallel connection E70AZEVK007
Infeed adapter i700 DC Terminal • For extending the DC-bus connection, energy exchange E70AZEVE001

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 41

 Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Installation material for i700 servo inverter

ƒ For customers who order large quantities.

Single axes 5 to 20 A

Mode Packaging Product key

VPE
[Stück]
STO terminal 50 EZAEVE001/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE002/M
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Brake terminal 50 EZAEVE004/M
Motor terminal 2.5 mm2 50 EZAEVE005/M
Shield plate BF1 25 EZAMBHXM008/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM006/M
EtherCAT® cable 100 mm (connection to the
10 EYC0000A0000X001/M
next axis)

Single axes 32 to 64 A

4.5
Mode Packaging Product key
VPE
[Stück]
STO terminal 50 EZAEVE001/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE002/M
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Brake terminal 50 EZAEVE004/M
Motor terminal 6.0 mm2 25 EZAEVE006/M
Shield plate BF2 25 EZAMBHXM009/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM003/M
EtherCAT® cable 100 mm (connection to the
10 EYC0000A0000X001/M
next axis)

Double axes 5 to 10 A

Mode Packaging Product key

VPE
[Stück]
STO terminal 50 EZAEVE001/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE002/M
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Brake terminal 50 EZAEVE004/M
Motor terminal 2.5 mm2 50 EZAEVE005/M
Shield plate BF1 25 EZAMBHXM008/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM006/M
EtherCAT® cable 100 mm (connection to the
10 EYC0000A0000X001/M
next axis)

4.5 - 42 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

Installation material for i700 servo inverter

ƒ For customers who order large quantities.

Double axes 20 to 32 A

Mode Packaging Product key

VPE
[Stück]
STO terminal 50 EZAEVE001/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE002/M
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Brake terminal 50 EZAEVE004/M
Motor terminal 2.5 mm2 50 EZAEVE005/M
Shield plate BF2 25 EZAMBHXM009/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM003/M
EtherCAT® cable 100 mm (connection to the
10 EYC0000A0000X001/M
next axis)

Power supply module 30 A

4.5
Mode Packaging Product key
VPE
[Stück]
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Mains terminal 50 EZAEVE008/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE009/M
DigOUT terminal 50 EZAEVE010/M
Brake resistor terminal 50 EZAEVE011/M
Shield plate BF1 25 EZAMBHXM008/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM006/M

Power supply module 60 A

Mode Packaging Product key

VPE
[Stück]
Terminal - external 24-V supply 50 EZAEVE003/M
Mains terminal 50 EZAEVE008/M
DigIN terminal 50 EZAEVE009/M
DigOUT terminal 50 EZAEVE010/M
Brake resistor terminal 50 EZAEVE011/M
Shield plate BF2 25 EZAMBHXM009/M
Fixing clip 20 EZAMBHXM007/M
Wire clamp 10 EZAMBHXM003/M

Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021 4.5 - 43

 Servo-Inverter i700
Accessories

4.5

4.5 - 44 Lenze | V07-en_GB-10/2021

Internet version

Lenze SE
Hans-Lenze-Straße 1
D-31855 Aerzen
Phone: +49 (0)5154 82-0
Telefax: +49 (0)5154 82 28 00

www.lenze.com
EDS94SPP101
.X*q
L−force Drives
Ä.X*qä
Hardware Manual

9400

E94A..., E94B..., E94C..., E94D...

Servo Drives 9400


0Fig. 0Tab. 0
 Contents i

1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1 The 9400 Servo Drives product range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.1 The system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.3 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2 About this Hardware Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.1 Information provided by the Hardware Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.2 Products to which the Hardware Manual applies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.4 Conventions used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.5 Notes used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.6 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7 Terms and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2 General safety and application notes for Lenze motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

3 Single−axis controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 Device features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2 Overview of the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3 General data and operating conditions ................................. 33
3.4 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.4.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.4.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.4.6 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.4.7 Current−time diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.5 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.5.1 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3.5.2 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.5.3 Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.5.4 Device 292 A (150 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3.5.5 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  3
i Contents

3.6 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3.6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3.6.2 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3.6.3 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.6.4 Devices in the range 145 ... 292 A (75 ... 150 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.6.5 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.7 Wiring .............................................................. 97
3.7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3.7.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . 99
3.7.3 Earthing of internal EMC filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
3.7.4 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.7.5 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.7.6 Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.7.7 Device 292 A (150 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
3.7.8 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3.8 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3.9 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.10 Preparing the commissioning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

4 Multi−axis controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

4.1 Device features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.2 Overview of the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4.3 General data and operating conditions ................................. 169
4.4 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.4.2 Operation in 230−V−AC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.4.3 Operation in 400−V−AC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
4.4.4 Operation in 480−V−AC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.4.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.4.6 Overcurrent operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.4.7 Current−time diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.5 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
4.5.1 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.5.2 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
4.6 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
4.6.2 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.6.3 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

4  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Contents i

4.7 Wiring .............................................................. 200

4.7.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
4.7.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.3 Earthing of internal EMC filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.7.4 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.7.5 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.8 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
4.9 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
4.10 Preparing the commissioning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

5 Power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

5.1 Device features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5.2 General data and operating conditions ................................. 242
5.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.3.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5.3.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.3.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.3.6 Mains filters for power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5.4 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
5.4.1 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.4.2 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
5.5 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5.5.2 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5.5.3 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5.6 Wiring .............................................................. 271
5.6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.6.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . 272
5.6.3 Design of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5.6.4 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.6.5 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.7 Control terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
5.8 Final works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

6 Regenerative power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

6.1 Device features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.2 General data and operating conditions ................................. 290

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  5
i Contents

6.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

6.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
6.3.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6.3.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6.3.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
6.3.5 Regenerative feedback with brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
6.3.6 Fuses and cable cross−sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
6.3.7 Current−time diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
6.3.8 Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
6.4 Device description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
6.5 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.5.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
6.5.2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
6.5.3 Arrangement of the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
6.5.4 Mounting steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
6.6 Wiring .............................................................. 319
6.6.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
6.6.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . 321
6.6.3 Connection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6.6.4 Earthing of internal EMC filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
6.6.5 Connecting busbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
6.6.6 Design of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6.6.7 How to connect the shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6.6.8 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6.6.9 Wiring of control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.7 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
6.8 Final works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.8.1 Initial commissioning on 400 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.8.2 Initial commissioning on 230 V or 480 V mains voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.8.3 Further settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

7 DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
7.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
7.1.2 Comparison single−axis controllers / multi−axis controllers . . . . . . . . . . 340
7.1.3 Advantages of a drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
7.1.4 General information on the accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
7.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
7.2.1 Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
7.2.2 Number of feeding points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
7.2.3 Other conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

6  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Contents i

7.3 DC−bus variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

7.3.1 Supply from a supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
7.3.2 Supply from controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
7.4 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7.4.1 General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7.4.2 DC−supply power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
7.4.3 DC−power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7.4.4 DC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7.5 Basic dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.5.2 Power distribution of controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.5.3 Motor efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.5.4 Power loss of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.5.5 Determining the power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.5.6 Determining the regenerative power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.5.7 Cable protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
7.5.8 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
7.5.9 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
7.6 Braking operation in a drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.6.1 Basic considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.7 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7.7.1 Example 1 − supply module with multi−axis controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7.7.2 Example 2 − single−axis controller with multi axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

8 Accessories (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

8.1 System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
8.2 Overview of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
8.3 Communication modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8.3.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8.3.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8.3.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
8.3.4 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
8.3.5 Possible device module combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
8.3.6 Ethernet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
8.3.7 DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
8.3.8 PROFIBUS® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
8.3.9 PROFINET® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
8.3.10 CANopen® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
8.3.11 INTERBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  7
i Contents

8.4 Function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

8.4.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
8.4.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
8.4.3 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
8.4.4 Digital frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
8.5 Memory modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
8.5.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
8.5.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
8.5.3 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
8.5.4 Setting CAN node address and baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
8.5.5 Memory module MM220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
8.5.6 Memory module MM330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
8.5.7 Memory module MM340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
8.5.8 Memory module MM430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
8.5.9 Memory module MM440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
8.6 Safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
8.6.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
8.6.2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
8.6.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
8.6.4 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
8.6.5 SM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
8.6.6 SM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
8.6.7 SM301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
8.6.8 SM302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8.7 Motor holding brake control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
8.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
8.7.2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
8.7.3 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . 453
8.7.4 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
8.7.5 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
8.7.6 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
8.7.7 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
8.7.8 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
8.7.9 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
8.7.10 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
8.7.11 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
8.8 Accessories for diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
8.8.1 USB diagnostic adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
8.8.2 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
8.8.3 Hand−held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

8  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Contents i

8.9 Components for operation in the DC−bus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

8.9.1 DC−feeding point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
8.9.2 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
8.9.3 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
8.9.4 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
8.10 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
8.10.1 Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A . . . . . . 542
8.10.2 Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A) . . . . 549
8.10.3 Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A) . . 556
8.10.4 Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)
564
8.10.5 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A) . . . . . . . . 571
8.10.6 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A) . . . . . . . 578
8.10.7 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415
A .......................................................... 585
8.10.8 RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A) . . . . . . . . 589
8.10.9 RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A) . . . . . . 596
8.10.10 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
8.10.11 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
8.10.12 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
8.11 General accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
8.11.1 Shield mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
8.11.2 Brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
8.11.3 Power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

9 Anhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
9.1 Ecodesign Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
9.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  9
1 Preface
The 9400 Servo Drives product range
The system

1 Preface

1.1 The 9400 Servo Drives product range

1.1.1 The system

9400 Servo Drives range is the product family with the components required for an
intelligent servo drive system in automation. The product range comprises
ƒ servo drive controllers
ƒ I/O components
ƒ software
ƒ accessories
ƒ motors
ƒ gearboxes
ƒ DC−supply modules

1.1.2 Features

The Servo Drives 9400 feature:

ƒ compact design
ƒ wide power range
ƒ innovative installation concept
ƒ intelligent technology functions
ƒ high control precision
ƒ scalable safety technology

1.1.3 System overview

The following figure shows the most important components for the implementation of a
drive system with the Servo Drives 9400 product range.
On the way from the mains connection to the motor, you can see the basic principle of a
drive system on the left path. On the right path, the basic principle of a single−axis drive is
described.
In accordance with the requirements of your drive solution, your drive system can be
equipped or extended with specially adapted components.

10  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
The 9400 Servo Drives product range
System overview

0
1
7 6 5 2
8
9

:
3
4
;
? > <

= =

@ . /
SSP94SYS01

 Mains voltage 3/PE AC 180 ... 528 V ±0 % or 3/PE AC 340 ... 528 V ±0 %
(depending on the device size/device power)
 Mains fusing (not contained in the delivery programme)
 Single Drives 9400  31
and corresponding installation backplanes
 Mains filter for Single Drives 9400  542
 RFI filter for Single Drives 9400  571
Multi Drives 9400  167
and corresponding installation backplanes

Power supply modules 9400
 241,  289
(for DC bus installations with Multi Drives 9400)
 Mains filter for power supply modules 9400  549
 RFI filter for power supply modules 9400  589

Equipment for all axis modules (device−dependent options):

Communication modules and extension modules  371
 Memory modules  419
 Safety modules  428
 Motor holding brake control modules  448
 Brake resistors  625
 Diagnostic adapters  507
 L−force Engineer (software)
 Servo motors (motor catalogue)
 Geared servo motors (")
 Standard geared motors (")
Motor cables/system cables
(manual "System cables")

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  11
1 Preface
About this Hardware Manual
Information provided by the Hardware Manual

1.2 About this Hardware Manual

1.2.1 Information provided by the Hardware Manual

Target group
This Hardware Manual is intended for all persons who install, commission, and adjust 9400
servo controllers.
Together with the catalog it forms the basis of project planning for the manufacturers of
machines and plants.

Contents
This Hardware Manual is meant as an addition to the Mounting Instructions included in
the scope of supply:
ƒ The features and functions are described in detail.
ƒ It provides detailed information on additional ranges of application.

How to find information

Each chapter forms a complete unit and informs you about an individual subject:
ƒ You therefore only have to read the chapter containing the information you need.
ƒ The Table of Contents and Index help you to find all information about a certain
topic.
ƒ Descriptions and data of other Lenze products (drive PLC, Lenze geared motors,
Lenze motors, ...) can be found in the corresponding catalogs, Operating Instructions
and Manuals. The required documentation can be ordered at your Lenze sales
partner or downloaded as PDF file from the Internet.

 Tip!
Information and tools concerning the Lenze products can be found in the
download area at
www.lenze.com

12  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
About this Hardware Manual
Products to which the Hardware Manual applies

1.2.2 Products to which the Hardware Manual applies

Power modules
123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

E94 x x x E xxx x x xx xx xx −

Type / product range

9400 Servo Drives

Version
A = 1. (max. 1999 Hz)
B = 2. (from 145 A/75 kW, max. 1999 Hz)
C = 2. (max. 599 Hz)
D = 3. (max. 599 Hz)

Version
S = single−axis controller (Single Drive)
M = multi−axis controller (Multi Drive)
P = power supply module
R = regenerative power supply module

Variant
H = HighLine
N = not relevant
P = PLC

Mechanical version
E = Installation

Rated current (rounded)

e.g. 007 = 7 A, 024 = 23.5 A

Voltage class
2 = 230 V ~ / 300 V =
4 = 400 V ~ / 540 V =

Safety module in MSI (place 7 of the extension modules)

A ... F

Memory module in MMI (places 7 and 8 of the extension modules)

22 ... 44

Extension module in MXI2 (places 7 and 8 of the extension modules)

xx

Extension module in MXI1 (places 7 and 8 of the extension modules)

xx

In the case of complete devices, the type code can contain a 5−place item of information regarding the configured
installation backplane, whereby this information appears at place 19 after the separator (see places 7 to 14,
power−related accessories). In addition, a 6−place item of information regarding an integrated motor holding brake
control module can be contained (see places 6 to 14, performance−related accessories. "N" means "Not relevant".
With the help of the type code, you can identify supplied products on the basis of the information on the nameplate.
In the product catalogue, you can find the possible configuration in order to order the product.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  13
1 Preface
About this Hardware Manual
Products to which the Hardware Manual applies

Extension modules
123 4 5 6 78

E94 x Y x xx

Type / product range

9400 Servo Drives
Version
A = 1.
N = not relevant
Identification
Y = module
Module group
C = communication
F = feedback
M = memory
A = safety
Module identification
communication
CA = CANopen®
DN = DeviceNet
EN = Ethernet 2 port
EO = EtherNet/IP
EP = POWERLINK
EC = POWERLINK CN
ET = EtherCAT®
PM = PROFIBUS®
ER = PROFINET®
IB = INTERBUS

Feedback
LF = digital frequency

Memory
22 = Memory module MM220 with MC HighLevel licence
33 = Memory module MM330 with MC TopLevel licence
34 = Memory module MM340 with PLC licence
43 = Memory module MMx20 with MC TopLevel licence
44 = Memory module MMx40 with PLC licence

Safety
A = SM0 safety module
B = SM100 safety module
E = SM301safety module
F = SM302 safety module

14  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
About this Hardware Manual
Products to which the Hardware Manual applies

Power−related accessories
123 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 14

E94 A Z x x xxx x

Type / product range

9400 Servo Drives

Version

Identification
Z = accessories

Component class 1
H = brake control
P = mounting backplane
M = mains filter
R = RFI filter

Component class 2
M = multiple axes
P = power supply module
R = regenerative module
S = single axis
X,Y = type
N = not specified

Rated current (rounded)

e.g.
008 = 8 A
024 = 23.5 A
...

Voltage class
1 = 24 V =
2 = 230 V ~ / 300 V =
4 = 400 V ~ / 540 V =

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  15
1 Preface
About this Hardware Manual
Products to which the Hardware Manual applies

Power−independent accessories
123 4 5 6 789

E94 A Z x xxx

Type / product range

9400 Servo Drives

Version

Identification
Z = accessories

Accessory group
J = mechanical components, other
S = software
K = keypad
N = not specified

Module identification

16  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
Document history

1.3 Document history

Material number Version Description

.X*q 11.1 02/2023 TD00 New version E94D...
Additions, corrections
13550980 11.0 06/2018 TD29 New version E94C...
13543133 10.2 02/2018 TD29 Corrected device features
13543133 10.1 01/2018 TD29 Data concerning UL fuses added
13543133 10.0 09/2017 TD29 General corrections and standardisation
13514043 9.0 11/2016 TD29 New devices inserted; old devices removed
New UL specifications in preparation
Corrections
13480643 8.0 09/2015 TD15 Additions: Conformity with EAC
Corrections
Document structure updated
13344991 7.1 07/2010 TD29 Additions, corrections
13344991 7.0 07/2010 TD29 Additions, corrections
13320181 6.0 11/2009 TD15 Additions, corrections
13280002 5.0 11/2008 TD15 Additions, corrections
13261288 4.2 07/2008 TD15 Additions, corrections
13256547 4.1 06/2008 TD15 Additions, corrections
13225695 4.0 04/2007 TD15 Additions, corrections
13192254 3.1 03/2007 TD15 Additions, corrections
13192254 3.0 02/2007 TD15 Additions, corrections
13095102 2.0 09/2006 TD15 Additions, corrections (field test)
13095102 1.0 12/2005 TD15 First edition (field test)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  17
1 Preface
Conventions used

1.4 Conventions used

This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between different

types of information:
Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator Point In general, the decimal point is used.
For instance: 1234.56
Warnings
UL warnings 
Given in English and French
UR warnings 
Text
Program name »« PC software
For example: »Engineer«, »Global Drive
Control« (GDC)
Icons
Page reference  Reference to another page with additional
information
For instance:  16 = see page 16
Documentation reference  Reference to another documentation with
additional information
For example:  EDKxxx = see
documentation EDKxxx

18  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
Notes used

1.5 Notes used

The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation to indicate
dangers and important information:

Safety instructions
Structure of safety instructions:

 Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous
situations)

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage.

 Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger.

 Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.


Danger of property damage.
Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Application notes
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

 Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

 Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

 Reference to another documentation

Special safety instructions and application notes

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

 Warnings! Safety note or application note for the operation according to

UL or CSA requirements.


The measures are required to meet the requirements according
Warnings! to UL or CSA.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  19
1 Preface
Legal regulations

1.6 Legal regulations

Labelling
Lenze drive controllers are clearly labelled and defined by the contents of the nameplate.

Manufacturer
Lenze SE, Postfach 10 13 52 · 31763 Hameln, Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 · 31855 Aerzen

CE conformity
Complies with the "Low voltage" EC Directive

Application as directed
The following applies to 9400 servo controllers and the accessories:
ƒ They must only be operated under the operating conditions described in this
Hardware Manual.
ƒ They are components for open and closed loop control of control variable speed
drives with asynchronous standard motors, asynchronous servo motors, PM
synchronous servo motors.
ƒ They are components for installation into a machine.
ƒ They are components used for assembly together with other components to form a
machine.
ƒ They comply with the protection requirements of the "Low Voltage" EC Directive.
ƒ They are not machines for the purposes of the "EC "Machinery" Directive.
ƒ They are not to be used as household appliances but for industrial purposes only.
The following applies to drives with 9400 servo controllers:
ƒ They comply with the EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" Directive if they are
installed according to the guidelines of CE−typical drive systems.
ƒ They can be used for operation at public and non−public mains.
ƒ They can be used in industrial premises as well as residential and commercial
premises.
ƒ The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC Directives.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!

20  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
Legal regulations

Liability
The information, data, and notes in this Hardware Manual met the state of the art at the
time of printing. Claims referring to drive systems which have already been supplied
cannot be derived from the information, illustrations, and descriptions given in this
Manual.
The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in this Hardware Manual are for
guidance only and must be adapted to your own application. Lenze does not take any
responsibility for the suitability of the process and circuit proposals.
The specifications in this Hardware Manual describe the product features without
guaranteeing them.
Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and failures caused by:
ƒ Disregarding the Hardware Manual
ƒ Unauthorised modifications to the controller
ƒ Operating errors
ƒ Improper working on and with the controller

Warranty
See Terms of sale and delivery.
Warranty claims must be made to your Lenze representative immediately after detecting
the deficiency or fault.
The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  21
1 Preface
Terms and abbreviations used

1.7 Terms and abbreviations used

Controller Any frequency inverter, servo inverter, or DC speed controller

Axis, drive Lenze controller combined with a motor or geared motor and other
Lenze drive components

Basic insulation Insulation for the basic protection against dangerous shock currents

Functional insulation Insulation for perfect operation

Double insulation Basic insulation and additional insulation

Reinforced insulation Standardised insulating system, equivalent protection to double

insulation

Cxxxxx/y Subcode y of code Cxxxx

(e.g. C0410/3 = subcode 3 of code C0410)

Xk/y Terminal y on terminal strip Xk (e.g. X3/28 = terminal 28 on terminal

strip X3)

 Cross−reference to a chapter with the corresponding page number

AC AC current or AC voltage

DC DC current or DC voltage

ULN [V] Rated mains voltage

UDC [V] DC voltage

UM [V] Output voltage/voltage across the motor terminals

ILN [A] Rated mains current

IaN [A] Rated output current

IaM [A] Maximum output current

IPE [mA] Discharge current

IDC [A] Direct current, r.m.s. value from direct current and harmonic currents,
for the dimensioning of DC−bus cables and DC−bus fuses

PN [kW] Rated motor power

PV [W] Inverter power loss

PDC [kW] Power on the DC voltage side

SN [kVA] Apparent output power of controller

MN [Nm] Rated torque

fmax [Hz] Maximum frequency

L [mH] Inductance

R [] Resistance

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung

22  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Preface 1
Terms and abbreviations used

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EN European standard

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IP International Protection Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

VDE Verband deutscher Elektrotechniker

CE Communauté Européene

UL Underwriters Laboratories

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  23
2 Safety instructions
General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

2 Safety instructions

2.1 General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

(in accordance with Low−Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU)

For your pesonal safety

Disregarding the following basic safety measures may lead to severe personal injury and
damage to material assets:
ƒ Only use the product as directed.
ƒ Never commission the product in the event of visible damage.
ƒ Never commission the product before assembly has been completed.
ƒ Do not carry out any technical changes on the product.
ƒ Only use the accessories approved for the product.
ƒ Only use original spare parts from Lenze.
ƒ Observe all regulations for the prevention of accidents, directives and laws
applicable on site.
ƒ Transport, installation, commissioning and maintenance work must only be carried
out by qualified personnel.
– IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC−Report 664 or
DIN VDE 0110 and national regulations for the prevention of accidents must be
observed.
– According to the basic safety information, qualified, skilled personnel are persons
who are familiar with the assembly, installation, commissioning, and operation of
the product and who have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
ƒ Observe all specifications in this documentation.
– This is the condition for safe and trouble−free operation and the achievement of
the specified product features.
– The procedural notes and circuit details described in this documentation are only
proposals. It’s up to the user to check whether they can be transferred to the
particular applications. Lenze SE does not accept any liability for the suitability of
the procedures and circuit proposals described.
ƒ According to their enclosure, Lenze controllers (frequency inverters, servo inverters,
DC speed controllers) and their components can carry a voltage, or parts of the
controllers can move or rotate during operation. Surfaces can be hot.
– Non−authorised removal of the required cover, inappropriate use, incorrect
installation or operation create the risk of severe injury to persons or damage to
material assets.
– For more information, please see the documentation.
ƒ There is a high amount of energy within the controller. Therefore always wear
personal protective equipment (body protection, headgear, eye protection, ear
protection, hand guard) when working on the controller when it is live.

24  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Safety instructions 2
General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

Intended use
Drive controllers are components designed for the installation in electrical systems or
machinery. They must not be used as household appliances. They are intended exclusively
professional and commercial purposes according to EN 61000−3−2.
When controllers are installed into machines, commissioning (i.e. starting of the operation
as directed) is prohibited until it is proven that the machine complies with the regulations
of the EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of the operation as directed) is only allowed when there is
compliance with the EMC Directive (2014/30/EU).
The inverters meet the requirements of the Low−Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU. The
harmonised standard EN 61800−5−1 applies to the inverters.
The technical data and supply conditions can be obtained from the nameplate and the
documentation. They must be strictly observed.
The actuation of the inverters in specific areas in compliance with EN61800−3 (EMC
categories) possibly requires the use of filters.
Warning: in residential environments, this product may cause high−frequency
interferences which may make the implementation of interference suppression measures
necessary.

Transport, storage
Please observe the notes on transport, storage, and appropriate handling.
Observe the climatic conditions according to the technical data.

Installation
The controllers must be installed and cooled according to the instructions given in the
corresponding documentation.
The ambient air must not exceed degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800−5−1.
Ensure proper handling and avoid mechanical stress. Do not bend any components and do
not change any insulation distances during transport or handling. Do not touch any
electronic components or contacts.
Controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components which can easily be damaged
by inappropriate handling. Do not damage or destroy any electrical component since doing
so might endanger your health!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  25
2 Safety instructions
General safety and application notes for Lenze controllers

Electrical connection
When working on live inverters, observe the applicable national regulations for the
prevention of accidents.
Carry out the electrical installation according to the relevant regulations (e. g. cable
cross−sections, fusing, connection to the PE conductor). Additional notes are included in
the documentation.
This documentation contains information on installation in compliance with EMC
(shielding, earthing, filter, and cables). These notes must also be observed for CE−marked
controllers. The manufacturer of the system is responsible for compliance with the limit
values demanded by EMC legislation. The controllers must be installed in housings (e.g.
control cabinets) to meet the limit values for radio interferences valid at the site of
installation. The housings must enable an EMC−compliant installation. Observe in
particular that e.g. the control cabinet doors have a circumferential metal connection to
the housing. Reduce housing openings and cutouts to a minimum.
Lenze controllers may cause a DC current in the PE conductor. If a residual current device
(RCD) is used for protection against direct or indirect contact for a controller with
three−phase supply, only a residual current device (RCD) of type B is permissible on the
supply side of the controller. If the controller has a single−phase supply, a residual current
device (RCD) of type A is also permissible. Apart from using a residual current device (RCD),
other protective measures can be taken as well, e.g. electrical isolation by double or
reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by means of a transformer.

Operation
If necessary, systems including controllers must be equipped with additional monitoring
and protection devices according to the valid safety regulations (e.g. law on technical
equipment, regulations for the prevention of accidents). You are allowed to adapt the
controllers to your application. Please observe the corresponding information given in the
documentation.
After the controller has been disconnected from the supply voltage, all live components
and power terminals must not be touched immediately because capacitors can still be
charged. Please observe the corresponding stickers on the controller.
Keep all protective covers and doors closed during operation.

Safety functions
Certain controller versions support safety functions (e.g. "Safe torque off", formerly "Safe
standstill") according to the requirements of the EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery
Directive). The notes on the integrated safety system provided in this documentation must
be observed.

Maintenance and servicing

The controllers do not require any maintenance if the prescribed conditions of operation
are observed.

Waste disposal
Recycle metal and plastic materials. Assembled PCBs must be disposed of professionally.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in these instructions must be
observed!

26  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Safety instructions 2
General safety and application notes for Lenze motors

2.2 General safety and application notes for Lenze motors

(according to Low−Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU)

General
Low−voltage machines have dangerous, live and rotating parts as well as possibly hot
surfaces.
Synchronous machines induce voltages at open terminals during operation.
All operations serving transport, connection, commissioning and maintenance are to be
carried out by skilled, responsible technical personnel (observe EN 50110−1 (VDE 0105−1)
and IEC 60364). Improper handling can cause severe injuries or damages.
Lowvoltage machines may only be operated under the conditions that are indicated in the
section "Application as directed".
The conditions at the place of installation must comply with the data given on the
nameplate and in the documentation.

Application as directed
Lowvoltage machines are intended for commercial installations. They comply with the
harmonised standards of the series IEC/EN60034 (VDE 0530). Their use in potentially
explosive atmospheres is prohibited unless they are expressly intended for such use
(follow additional instructions).
Lowvoltage machines are components for installation into machines as defined in the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. Commissioning is prohibited until the conformity of the
end product with this directive has been established (follow i. a. EN 60204−1).
Lowvoltage machines with IP23 protection or less are only intended for outdoor use when
applying special protective features.
The integrated brakes must not be used as safety brakes. It cannot be ruled out that factors
which cannot be influenced, such as oil ingress due to a defective Aside shaft seal, cause
a brake torque reduction.

Transport, storage
Damages must be reported immediately upon receipt to the forwarder; if required,
commissioning must be excluded. Tighten screwedin ring bolts before transport. They are
designed for the weight of the lowvoltage machines, do not apply extra loads. If necessary,
use suitable and adequately dimensioned means of transport (e. g. rope guides).
Remove transport locking devices before commissioning. Reuse them for further
transport. When storing low−voltage machines, ensure a dry, dustfree and low−vibration
(veff  0.2 mm/s) environment (bearing damage while being stored).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  27
2 Safety instructions
General safety and application notes for Lenze motors

Installation
Ensure an even surface, solid foot/flange mounting and exact alignment if a direct clutch
is connected. Avoid resonances with the rotational frequency and double mains frequency
which may be caused by the assembly. Turn rotor by hand, listen for unusual slipping
noises. Check the direction of rotation when the clutch is not active (observe section
"Electrical connection").
Use appropriate means to mount or remove belt pulleys and clutches (heating) and cover
them with a touch guard. Avoid impermissible belt tensions.
The machines are halfkey balanced. The clutch must be halfkey balanced, too. The visible
jutting out part of the key must be removed.
If required, provide pipe connections. Designs with shaft end at bottom must be protected
with a cover which prevents the ingress of foreign particles into the fan. Free circulation of
the cooling air must be ensured. The exhaust air also the exhaust air of other machines
next to the drive system must not be taken in immediately.

Electrical connection
All operations must only be carried out by qualified and skilled personnel on the
lowvoltage machine at standstill and deenergised and provided with a safe guard to
prevent an unintentional restart.This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e. g. brake, encoder,
blower).
Check safe isolation from supply!
If the tolerances specified in EN 600341; IEC 34 (VDE 05301) voltage ±5 %, frequency ±2 %,
waveform, symmetry are exceeded, more heat will be generated and the electromagnetic
compatibility will be affected.
Observe the data on the nameplate, operating notes, and the connection diagram in the
terminal box.
The connection must ensure a continuous and safe electrical supply (no loose wire ends);
use appropriate cable terminals. The connection to the PE conductor must be safe. The
plug−in connectors must be bolt tightly (tostop).
The clearances between blank, live parts and to earth must not fall below 8 mm at
Vrated  550 V, 10 mm at Vrated  725 V, 14 mm at Vrated  1000 V.
The terminal box must be free of foreign particles, dirt and moisture. All unused cable
entries and the box itself must be sealed against dust and water.

28  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Safety instructions 2
General safety and application notes for Lenze motors

Commissioning and operation

Before commissioning after longer storage periods, measure insulation resistance. In case
of values  1 k per volt of rated voltage, dry winding.
For trial run without output elements, lock the featherkey. Do not deactivate the
protective devices, not even in a trial run.
Check the correct operation of the brake before commissioning lowvoltage machines with
brakes.
Integrated thermal detectors do not provide full protection for the machine. If necessary,
limit the maximum current. Parameterise the controller so that the motor will be switched
off with I > Irated after a few seconds of operation, especially at the risk of blocking.
Vibrational severities veff  3.5 mm/s (Prated  15 kW) or 4.5 mm/s (Prated > 15 kW) are
acceptable if the clutch is activated.
If deviations from normal operation occur, e.g. increased temperatures, noises, vibrations,
find the cause and, if required, contact the manufacturer. In case of doubt, switch off the
lowvoltage machine.
If the machine is exposed to dirt, clean the air paths regularly.
Shaft sealing rings and roller bearings have a limited service life.
Regrease bearings with relubricating devices while the lowvoltage machine is running.
Only use the grease recommended by the manufacturer. If the grease drain holes are
sealed with a plug, (IP54 drive end; IP23 drive and nondrive end), remove plug before
commissioning. Seal bore holes with grease. Replace prelubricated bearings (2Z bearing)
after approx. 10,000 h 20,000 h, at the latest however after 3 4 years.
The product−specific safety and application notes given in these instructions must be
observed!!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  29
2 Safety instructions
Residual hazards

2.3 Residual hazards

Protection of persons
ƒ Before working on the controller, check if no voltage is applied to the power
terminals because
– because the power terminals U, V, W, +UG, −UG, Rb1 and Rb2 carry hazardous
voltages for up to 20 minutes after power−off depending on the device.
– the power terminals L1, L2, L3; U, V, W, +UG, −UG, Rb1 and Rb2 carry hazardous
voltages when the motor is stopped.

Device protection
ƒ Plug on or pull off all pluggable terminals only in deenergised condition!
ƒ Detach the controllers only in deenergised conditions from their installation
backplanes or the back panel of the control cabinet!
ƒ Cyclic switching on and off of the mains voltage can overload and destroy the input
current limitation of the controller:
– Cyclic mains switching of 5−times in 5 minutes is permissible without restrictions.

Motor protection
ƒ Depending on the controller settings, the connected motor can be overheated by:
– For instance, longer DC−braking operations.
– Longer operation of self−ventilated motors at low speed.

Protection of the machine/system

ƒ Drives can reach dangerous overspeeds (e.g. setting of high output frequencies in
connection with motors and machines unsuitable for such conditions):
– The controllers do not offer any protection against such operating conditions. Use
additional components for this purpose.

30  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device features

3 Single−axis controllers

3.1 Device features

ƒ Space−saving installation by compact design

ƒ Innovative installation concept
ƒ Power range: 370 W to 240 kW
ƒ Pluggable and same connection system for the control cables in the entire power
range
ƒ Direct AC mains connection for "Single Drive" design
ƒ DC link busbar (DC−bus) integrated or can be retrofitted
(devices up to 24 A/11 kW)
ƒ Integrated brake chopper
ƒ Direct connection of resolver or encoder feedback
– Easy connection via predesigned system cable (accessories)
ƒ Integrated phase controller for drift−free standstill
ƒ Field−oriented control for asynchronous and synchronous motors
ƒ Digital synchronisation system via bus system or
digital frequency (extension module required)
ƒ User configuration for control functions and input/output signals
– Comprehensive library with function blocks
– High flexibility with regard to the adaptation of the internal control structure to
the drive task
ƒ Extension interfaces for
– communication
– Controller functionality
– Safety system
ƒ System bus (CANopen)
– servo inverter connection
– for extending input and output terminals
– connecting keypad and display units (HMI)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  31
3 Single−axis controllers
Overview of the devices

3.2 Overview of the devices

 Note!
For reasons of clarity, device types in this manual are placed together in groups
with shared device characteristics. For example:
ƒ "Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)" (often from project planner’s
viewpoint) or
ƒ "Device sizes 1, 2 and 3" (often from installation point of view)

The following table gives you an overview of the different device characteristics:
Type Rated current (rounded) Motor power (typ.) Device size (DS)
E94xSxE0024 2A 0.37 kW
1
E94xSxE0034 3A 0.75 kW
E94xSxE0044 4A 1.5 kW
2
E94xSxE0074 7A 3.0 kW
E94xSxE0134 13 A 5.5 kW
E94xSxE0174 17 A 7.5 kW 3
E94xSxE0244 24 A 11 kW
E94xSxE0324 32 A 15 kW
E94xSxE0474 47 A 22 kW 6
E94xSxE0594 59 A 30 kW
E94xSxE0864 86 A 45 kW
7
E94xSxE1044 104 A 55 kW
E94xSxE1454 145 A 75 kW 81
E94xSxE1724 172 A 90 kW
E94xSxE2024 202 A 105 kW 82
E94xSxE2454 245 A 130 kW
E94xSxE2924 292 A 150 kW 83
E94xSxE3664 366 A 190 kW
91
E94xSxE4604 460 A 240 kW

32  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
General data and operating conditions

3.3 General data and operating conditions

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
E94xSxE0024 (0.37 kW) ... E94xSxE1044 (55 kW):
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada
E94xSxE1454 (75 kW) ... E94xSxE2924 (150 kW):
CULUS UL 508C Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  33
3 Single−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

Protection of persons and device protection

Type of protection EN 60529 IP 20
Outside the wire range of
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental the terminals on the
contact in accordance with type motor side
1
Insulation resistance EN 61800−5−1 Overvoltage category III
from 2000 m amsl: external measures for compliance with
the overvoltage category II are required, e.g.
 upstream connection of transformer
 upstream connection of overvoltage protection system
Control circuit isolation EN 61800−5−1 up to 2000 m amsl: Safe mains isolation by
double/reinforced insulation for mains with neutral earthing
with a rated voltage for the external conductor/star point up
to 300 V.
from 2000 m amsl: If an overvoltage protection system is
connected upstream to the device instead of an isolating
transformer, additional external measures are required for
maintaining the safe isolation.
Short−circuit strength EN 61800−5−1 Motor connection: with restrictions, error acknowledgement
required
Control terminals: full
Motor − protective  Short circuit
measures against  Earth fault
 Overvoltage
 motor stalling
 Motor overtemperature
(PTC or thermal contact, I2t monitoring)
Leakage current EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC, > 10 mA DC Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Cyclic mains switching Cyclic mains switching of 5 times in 5 minutes is permissible
without restrictions.

Design
Housing
Carrier housing Device sizes Glass−fiber reinforced plastic
1, 2 and 3
Carrier housing Device sizes Metal
as of 6
Dimensions see "Mechanical installation"
Weight see "Mechanical installation"

Mounting conditions
Mounting place in the control cabinet
Mounting position vertical
Clearance
above/beneath Comply with the device−relating mounting instructions.
at the side Can be installed in a row without any clearance

34  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
General data and operating conditions

Supply conditions "Single Drive"

AC mains operation Device size 1 ... 7: Direct connection
Device size 81 ... 91: Direct connection via terminals with
wire end ferrules; alternatively via ring cable lugs
DC−bus operation Device size 1 ... 7: Direct connection via terminals or busbar
system (retrofittable)
Device size 81 ... 91: Direct connection via terminals with
wire end ferrules; alternatively via ring cable lugs
For more information, please see the chapter DC−bus
operation.
Power systems
TT
Operation allowed without restrictions.
TN
IT Up to device size 83: additional measure necessary inside
device (see "Earthing of internal EMC filter",  109)
device size 91: Specify when ordering
Motors EN 60034 Only use motors that are suitable for inverter operation.
Insulation strength: max. û  1.5 kV, max. du/dt  5 kV/s

Operating conditions
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 Device size 1 ... 6: 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating at +45 ... +55 °C:
Device size 1 ... 7: 2.5 %/°C
Device size 81 ... 91: 1 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
Device size 1 ... 7 with 1000 ... 4000 m amsl: Current derating
5 %/1000 m
Device size 81 ... 91 with 1000 ... 4000 m amsl: Current
derating 10 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
(only tested for device EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
size 1 ... 7)
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
Device size 81 ... 83: Mounting must be executed with
vibration dampers by the customer. Please consult Lenze.
Device size 91: The control cabinet has to be
vibration−damped.
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  35
3 Single−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

Assignment of installation backplane ˘ standard device

Assignment Device size Accessories: busbar mounting set/spare fuse
Axis module Installation
backplane
E94xSxE0024
E94AZPS0034 1 E94AZJA003: 16 A, 700 V DC / EFSAR0016ARHN
E94xSxE0034
E94xSxE0044
E94AZPS0074 2 E94AZJA007: 40 A, 700 V DC / EFSAR0040ARHN
E94xSxE0074
E94xSxE0134
E94xSxE0174 E94AZPS0244 3 E94AZJA024: 100 A, 700 V DC / EFSAR0100ARZN
E94xSxE0244

Motor cable length

Requirements on the motor cable
Capacitance per unit length
 2.5 mm2/AWG 14 CCore/core/CCore/shield < 75/150 pF/m
 4 mm2/AWG 12 CCore/core/CCore/shield < 150/300 pF/m
Electric strength
VDE 0250−1 U0/U = 0.6/1.0 kV
(U0 = r.m.s. value external − conductor/PE,
U = r.m.s. value − external conductor/external conductor)
UL U  600 V
(U = r.m.s. value external conductor/external conductor)

Maximum motor and feedback cable lengths

(for shielded motor cable with rated mains voltage)
If EMC conditions must be met, the permissible cable lengths can be reduced.

Type Device size [m]

E94xSxE0024
1 50
E94xSxE0034
E94xSxE0044
2 100
E94xSxE0074
E94xSxE0134
E94xSxE0174 3 100
E94xSxE0244
E94xSxE0324
E94xSxE0474 6 100
E94xSxE0594
E94xSxE0864
7 100
E94xSxE1044
E94xSxE1454 81 150 (100 1))
E94xSxE1724
E94xSxE2024 82 150 (100 1))
E94xSxE2454
E94xSxE2924 83 150 (100 1))
E94xSxE3664
91 150 (100 1))
E94xSxE4604
Tab. 3−1
1) If safety functions with SM301/SM302, which require reliable speed and position detection, are used.

36  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
General data and operating conditions

Max. shielded motor cable lengths for compliance with the

conducted interference emission according to C1/C2
Type with RFI filter with mains filter without filter
E94xSxE0024 E94AZRS0044 1) E94AZMS0034 3)
E94xSxE0034 −/50 m 25 m/50 m −/10 m 4)
E94xSxE0044 E94AZRS0104 1) E94AZMS0094 3)
E94xSxE0074 −/50 m 25 m/100 m −/10 m 4)
E94xSxE0134 E94AZMS0184 3)
E94xSxE0174 E94AZRS0294 1) 25 m/100 m −/10 m 4)
E94xSxE0244 −/50 m E94AZMS0314 3)
25 m/100 m −/10 m 4)
E94xSxE0324
E94xSxE0474 E94AZRS0544 2)
−
E94xSxE0594 50 m/100 m −/50 m 4)

E94xSxE0864 E94AZRS0954 2)
−
E94xSxE1044 50 m/100 m −/50 m 4)
Tab. 3−2
EMC limit value class for conducted noise emission in TN/TT systems:
C2 to EN 61800−3 corresponds to class A to EN 55011
C1 to EN 61800−3 corresponds to class B to EN 55011
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker 30 mA
If several devices or cable lengths  50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
2) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker 300 mA
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
3) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, cable length  25 m: 30 mA, cable length > 25 m: 300 mA,
If several devices or cable lengths  50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
4) See chapter "Fuses and cable cross−sections", ( 61).

Max. shielded motor cable lengths for compliance with the

conducted interference emission according to C2
Type with RFI filter with mains filter without filter
E94xSxE1454 E94AZRS1804
− −
(3F480−180.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE1724 E94AZRS1804
− −
(3F480−180.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE2024 E94AZRS3004
− −
(3F480−300.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE2454 E94AZRS3004
− −
(3F480−300.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE2924 E94AZRS3004
− −
(3F480−300.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE3664 E94AZRS4154
− −
(3F480−415.290EM), 150 m
E94xSxE4604 E94AZRS4154
− −
(3F480−415.290EM), 150 m

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  37
3 Single−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

Max. shielded motor cable lengths for compliance with the

conducted interference emission according to C3
Type with RFI filter with mains filter without filter
E94xSxE1454 − − 150 m
E94xSxE1724 − − 150 m
E94xSxE2024 − − 150 m
E94xSxE2454 − − 150 m
E94xSxE2924 − − 150 m
E94xSxE3664 − − 150 m
E94xSxE4604 − − 150 m

Longer motor cables can be achieved when line filters are used in combination with
sinusoidal filters. Further conditions to be observed:
ƒ V/f control mode
ƒ Switching frequency is permanently set (C00018)
Max. motor cable lengths for compliance with the conducted interference emission according to C2 when
sinusoidal filters and line filters are used
RFI filter Mains filter Sine filter shielded Switching
Type unshielded frequency
E94xSxE0024
− E94AZMS0034 EZS3−004A200
E94xSxE0034
E94xSxE0044 − 4 kHz
E94AZMS0094 EZS3−010A200 100 m
E94xSxE0074 or
300 m
E94xSxE0134 8 kHz
− E94AZMS0184 EZS3−024A200
E94xSxE0174
E94xSxE0244 − E94AZMS0314 EZS3−037A200
E94xSxE0324 EZS3−048A200 4 kHz
E94xSxE0474 EZS3−061A200 150 m
E94AZRS0544 − or
300 m
E94xSxE0594 EZS3−072A200 8 kHz

E94xSxE0864 EZS3−115A200 2 kHz

150 m
E94AZRS0954 − or
E94xSxE1044 EZS3−150A200 300 m
4 kHz
E94AZRS1804
E94xSxE1454 − EZS3−180A200
3F480−180.290EM
E94AZRS1804
E94xSxE1724 − EZS3−250A200
3F480−180.290EM
E94AZRS3004
E94xSxE2024 − EZS3−250A200
3F480−300.290EM
2 kHz
E94AZRS3004 150 m
E94xSxE2454 − EZS3−350A200 or
3F480−300.290EM −m
4 kHz
E94AZRS3004
E94xSxE2924 − EZS3−350A200
3F480−300.290EM
E94AZRS4154
E94xSxE3664 − EZS3−480A200
3F480−415.290EM
E94AZRS4154 EZS3−350A200
E94xSxE4604 −
3F480−415.290EM (2 in parallel)
Tab. 3−3
EMC limit classes of the conducted interference emission in TN/TT systems:
C2 according to EN 61800−3, corresponds to class A according to EN 55011

38  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
General data and operating conditions

EMC
Operation on public supply EN 61800−3 The controllers are designed for use in an industrial
systems environment. Operation on public networks requires
measures to be taken for limiting the expected emission of
radio interferences.
Noise emission, in cables
Design EN 61800−3 see Tab. 3−2 EMC protection requirements
"Single Drive"
Design Depending on the filter at the central DC supply module.
"Multi Drive"
Noise immunity (to EN 61800−3)
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000−4−2 8 kV with air discharge,
(ESD) 4 kV with contact discharge against housing
Radio frequency
Cable−guided EN 61000−4−6 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10 V 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Interference (housing) EN 61000−4−3 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Burst
Power terminals and EN 61000−4−4 2 kV/5 kHz
interfaces
Signal interfaces EN 61000−4−4 1 kV/5 kHz
Control connections EN 61000−4−4 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge (surge voltage)
Power terminals EN 61000−4−5 1.2/50 s,
1 kV phase/phase, 2 kV phase/PE

Protective insulation

 Danger!
Dangerous electrical voltage
When one common voltage source is used for control voltages in separate
potential areas, the protective insulation between the separate potential areas
is deactivated.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The specified protective insulations are not complied with.
Protective measures:
ƒ Use independent voltage sources.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  39
3 Single−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

The available protective insulation within the controller of the "9400 Servo Drives" series
in accordance with EN61800−5−1 is implemented with a rated voltage for the external
conductor/star point of up to 300 V for mains with neutral earthing.
The following graphic representation
ƒ shows the arrangement of the terminal strips and the separate potential areas of
the controller.
ƒ serves to determine the relevant protective insulation between two terminals in
differently insulated separate potential areas.

X1 X2
X100
MXI1
X3 Bus Protective insulation acc. to
EN61800−5−1
(Definition of terms: see glossary)
Ext. DC
X4
MXI2 Functional insulation
X5
Basic insulation

X6 MMI Reinforced insulation

X7 MSI
X107 I/O

X106 X8 Ext. DC
X105
X104
X105
E94YCXX007

Terminal strip Connection Terminal strip Connection

Device size 1 ... 7 Device size 81 ... 91
X100 L1, L2, L3 (only single drive) L1, L2, L3 X1 CAN on board 9400
+UG, −UG
X2  State bus
X104 not available +UG/Rb1, −UG, Rb2  24 V (ext.)
X105 U, V, W U, V, W
Rb1, Rb2 (only single drive) X3 Analog input/output
X106 Motor PTC Motor PTC X4 Digital outputs
X107 Control of motor Control of motor X5 Digital inputs
holding brake holding brake X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolvers
X8 Encoder
MXI1, MXI2 Extension module
MMI Memory module
MSI Safety module

40  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
General data and operating conditions

Example
Which type of protective insulation is used between the bus terminal of the device module
in slot MXI1 or MXI2 and the mains terminal X100?
The separate potential area with the better protective insulation is decisive.
ƒ The separate potential area of the device module bus terminal is "functionally
insulated".
ƒ The separate potential area of the mains terminal has a "reinforced insulation".
Result: The insulation between the mains terminal X100 and the bus terminal is of the
"reinforced insulation" type.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  41
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data

3.4 Rated data

The devices in the power range of 0.37 ... 55 kW (GG 1 ... 7) can be used in the voltage range
of 180 ... 528 V AC.
The devices in the power range of 75 ... 240 kW (GG 81 ... 91) can be used in the voltage
range of 340 ... 528 V AC.

 Note!
To ensure a faultless operation of the devices the code C00173 must be set
according to the mains voltage connected.

Emergency operation

Operation of the E94xSxxxx4 devices with an emergency voltage supply at +UG, −UG, is
possible from UDC  260 V. The settings in C00173 and C00174 are to be adapted
accordingly.

42  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Overview

3.4.1 Overview

Input data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V AC] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
[V DC]
E94xSxE0024 230/400/480 50/60 2.1/2.1/1.8 1.6/1.6/1.4 3
325/565/675 − 2.6/2.6/2.3 1.9/1.9/1.7 −
E94xSxE0034 230/400/480 50/60 3.5/3.5/3.1 2.6/2.6/2.3 3
325/565/675 − 4.3/4.3/3.8 3.2/3.2/2.9 −
E94xSxE0044 230/400/480 50/60 5.5/5.5/4.8 4.1/4.1/3.6 3
325/565/675 − 6.7/6.7/5.9 5.0/5.0/4.4 −
E94xSxE0074 230/400/480 50/60 9.9/9.9/8.6 7.4/7.4/6.5 3
325/565/675 − 12.1/12.1/10.6 9.1/9.1/8.0 −
E94xSxE0134 230/400/480 50/60 16.8/16.8/14.7 12.6/12.6/11.0 3
325/565/675 − 20.6/20.6/18.0 15.5/15.5/13.5 −
E94xSxE0174 230/400/480 50/60 21.0/21.0/18.3 15.8/15.8/13.8 3
325/565/675 − 25.7/25.7/22.5 19.3/19.3/16.9 −
E94xSxE0244 230/400/480 50/60 29.0/29.0/25.4 21.8/21.8/19.1 3
325/565/675 − 35.5/35.5/31.1 26.6/26.6/23.3 −
E94xSxE0324 230/400/480 50/60 29.0/29.0/26.0 22.0/22.0/20.0 3
E94xSxE0474 230/400/480 50/60 43.0/43.0/39.0 32.0/32.0/29.0 3
325/565/675 − 71.0/71.0/62.0 53.3/53.3/46.5 −
E94xSxE0594 230/400/480 50/60 54.0/54.0/47.0 40.5/40.5/35.3 3
325/565/675 − 89.0/89.0/77.0 66.8/66.8/57.8 −
E94xSxE0864 230/400/480 50/60 79.0/79.0/70.0 59.0/59.0/52.0 3
E94xSxE1044 230/400/480 50/60 95.0/95.0/84.0 71.0/71.0/63.0 3
E94xSxE1454 400/480 50/60 138/138 124/124 3
E94xSxE1724 400/480 50/60 164/164 148/148 3
E94xSxE2024 400/480 50/60 192/192 173/173 3
E94xSxE2454 400/480 50/60 236/236 212/212 3
E94xSxE2924 400/480 50/60 285/285 257/257 3
E94xSxE3664 400/480 50/60 349/349 314/314 3
E94xSxE4604 400/480 50/60 436/436 392/392 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  43
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Overview

Output data
Voltage Current [A] Number of
phases
Type [V] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94xSxE0024 0 − 230/400/480 1.5/1.5/1.3 1.1/1.1/1.0 3
E94xSxE0034 0 − 230/400/480 2.5/2.5/2.2 1.9/1.9/1.7 3
E94xSxE0044 0 − 230/400/480 4.0/4.0/3.5 3.0/3.0/2.6 3
E94xSxE0074 0 − 230/400/480 7.0/7.0/6.1 5.3/5.3/4.6 3
E94xSxE0134 0 − 230/400/480 13.0/13.0/11.4 9.8/9.8/8.6 3
E94xSxE0174 0 − 230/400/480 16.5/16.5/14.4 12.4/12.4/10.8 3
E94xSxE0244 0 − 230/400/480 23.5/23.5/20.6 17.6/17.6/15.5 3
E94xSxE0324 0 − 230/400/480 32.0/32.0/28.0 24.0/24.0/21.0 3
E94xSxE0474 0 − 230/400/480 47.0/47.0/42.0 35.3/35.3/30.8 3
E94xSxE0594 0 − 230/400/480 59.0/59.0/52.0 44.3/44.3/38.7 3
E94xSxE0864 0 − 230/400/480 86.0/86.0/76.0 64.5/64.5/56.4 3
E94xSxE1044 0 − 230/400/480 104/104/92.0 78.0/78.0/68.3 3
E94xSxE1454 0 − 400/480 145/145 131/131 3
E94xSxE1724 0 − 400/480 172/172 155/155 3
E94xSxE2024 0 − 400/480 202/202 182/182 3
E94xSxE2454 0 − 400/480 245/245 221/221 3
E94xSxE2924 0 − 400/480 292/292 263/263 3
E94xSxE3664 0 − 400/480 366/366 329/329 3
E94xSxE4604 0 − 400/480 460/460 414/414 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

 Note!
The indicated output voltage will not be reached under certain operating
conditions.
ƒ Output power in the maximum range
ƒ High switching frequencies
ƒ Use of mains filters or mains chokes
ƒ Mains supply with high impedance (Uk > 5 %)

44  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Overview

Power losses
Power loss PV [W] at a switching frequency of 4 kHz
Type ULr = 230 V ULr = 400 V ULN = 480 V when controller is inhibited
E94xSxE0024 70 90 100
E94xSxE0034 85 105 120
E94xSxE0044 100 130 145
E94xSxE0074 125 160 180 40
E94xSxE0134 200 260 290
E94xSxE0174 240 300 340
E94xSxE0244 310 400 450
E94xSxE0324 750 750 750
E94xSxE0474 1050 1050 1050 75
E94xSxE0594 1100 1100 1100
E94xSxE0864 1500 1500 1500
100
E94xSxE1044 1800 1800 1800
E94xSxE1454 − 2100 2100 < 100
E94xSxE1724 − 2200 2200
E94xSxE2024 − 2600 2600 < 100
E94xSxE2454 − 3300 3300
E94xSxE2924 − 4100 4100 < 100
E94xSxE3664 − 4900 4900 < 100
E94xSxE4604 − 6200 6200 < 150

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  45
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

3.4.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Device size 1 ... 6

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
2/PE DC 325 260 − 0 % ... 370 + 0 % −

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0024 1.5 2.1 0.5 0.18 0.25
E94xSxE0034 2.5 3.5 0.9 0.37 0.5
E94xSxE0044 3.9 5.5 1.4 0.75 1
E94xSxE0074 7.0 9.9 2.5 1.5 2
E94xSxE0134 12.0 16.8 4.7 3 4
E94xSxE0174 15.0 21.0 5.9 4 5.5
E94xSxE0244 20.5 29.0 8.4 5.5 7.5
E94xSxE0324 − 29.0 11.5 7.5 10
E94xSxE0474 − 43.0 16.9 11 15
E94xSxE0594 − 54.0 21.2 15 20

Device size 7
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0864 − 79.0 30.8 22 29
E94xSxE1044 − 95.0 37.3 30 40

46  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Device size 1 ... 91

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xSxE0024 1.9 3) 6.0 1.9 3) 6.0 1.5 4.8 1.1
E94xSxE0034 3.1 3) 10.0 3.1 3) 10.0 2.5 8.0 1.9
E94xSxE0044 5.0 3) 16.0 5.0 3) 16.0 4.0 12.8 3.0
E94xSxE0074 8.8 3) 21.0 8.8 3) 21.0 7.0 16.8 5.3
E94xSxE0134 16.3 3) 39.0 16.3 3) 39.0 13.0 31.2 9.8
E94xSxE0174 20.6 3) 49.5 20.6 3) 49.5 16.5 39.6 12.4
E94xSxE0244 29.4 3) 58.8 29.4 3) 58.8 23.5 47.0 17.6
E94xSxE0324 38.4 76.8 38.4 76.8 32.0 64.0 16.8
E94xSxE0474 47.0 94.0 47.0 94.0 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xSxE0594 59.0 118 59.0 118 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xSxE0864 86.0 172 86.0 172 73.0 146 38.3
E94xSxE1044 104 208 104 208 78.0 156 40.9

IaN2 Rated value of permanent output current at a frequency of  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  0 Hz
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency of  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
 Can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
bold Nominal value IaN
3) Operation with permanent currents > IaN8 requires an external mains choke.
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  47
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94xSxE0024 47 8.3 3.2 3.7 0.64 150 15 15
E94xSxE0034 47 8.3 3.2 3.7 0.64 150 15 15
E94xSxE0044 27 14.4 5.6 5.9 0.95 150 15 15
E94xSxE0074 27 14.4 5.6 6.9 1.3 150 15 15
E94xSxE0134 18 21.7 8.5 10.6 2.0 150 15 15
E94xSxE0174 9 43.3 16.9 20.3 3.7 150 15 15
E94xSxE0244 9 43.3 16.9 24.5 5.4 150 15 15
E94xSxE0324 9 43.3 16.9 28.5 7.3 600 260 600
E94xSxE0474 7.5 52.0 20.3 37.9 10.8 600 320 600
E94xSxE0594 7.5 52.0 20.3 44.2 14.7 600 430 600
E94xSxE0864 3.8 102.6 40.0 75.5 21.6 600 320 600
E94xSxE1044 3.8 102.6 40.0 83.5 26.4 600 400 600

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

48  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

3.4.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Device size 1 ... 6

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
2/PE DC 565 455 − 0 % ... 620 + 0 % −

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0024 1.5 2.1 0.9 0.37 0.5
E94xSxE0034 2.5 3.5 1.6 0.75 1
E94xSxE0044 3.9 5.5 2.5 1.5 2
E94xSxE0074 7.0 9.9 4.4 3 4
E94xSxE0134 12.0 16.8 8.1 5.5 7.5
E94xSxE0174 15.0 21.0 10.3 7.5 11
E94xSxE0244 20.5 29.0 14.7 11 15
E94xSxE0324 − 29.0 20.0 15 20
E94xSxE0474 − 43.0 29.3 22 29
E94xSxE0594 − 54.0 36.8 30 40

Device size 7
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0864 − 79.0 53.6 45 60
E94xSxE1044 − 95.0 64.8 55 73

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  49
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Device size 81 ... 91

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 340 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 48 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE1454 − 138 90 75 100
E94xSxE1724 − 164 107 90 125
E94xSxE2024 − 192 126 105 140
E94xSxE2454 − 236 153 130 170
E94xSxE2924 − 285 182 150 205
E94xSxE3664 − 349 228 190 255
E94xSxE4604 − 436 287 240 320

50  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Device size 1 ... 91

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xSxE0024 1.9 3) 6.0 1.9 3) 6.0 1.5 4.8 1.1
E94xSxE0034 3.1 3) 10.0 3.1 3) 10.0 2.5 8.0 1.9
E94xSxE0044 5.0 3) 16.0 5.0 3) 16.0 4.0 12.8 3.0
E94xSxE0074 8.8 3) 21.0 8.8 3) 21.0 7.0 16.8 5.3
E94xSxE0134 16.3 3) 39.0 16.3 3) 39.0 13.0 31.2 9.8
E94xSxE0174 20.6 3) 49.5 20.6 3) 49.5 16.5 39.6 12.4
E94xSxE0244 29.4 3) 58.8 29.4 3) 58.8 23.5 47.0 17.6
E94xSxE0324 38.4 76.8 38.4 76.8 32.0 56.0 16.8
E94xSxE0474 47.0 94.0 47.0 94.0 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xSxE0594 59.0 118 59.0 118 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xSxE0864 86.0 172 86.0 172 73.0 146 38.3
E94xSxE1044 104 208 104 208 78.0 156 40.9
E94xSxE1454 145 261 145 261 102 184 −
E94xSxE1724 172 310 172 310 120 216 −
E94xSxE2024 202 364 202 364 131 236 −
E94xSxE2454 245 441 209 376 160 288 −
E94xSxE2924 292 526 250 450 191 344 −
E94xSxE3664 366 659 313 563 240 432 −
E94xSxE4604 460 828 368 662 260 468 −

IaN2 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at a frequency  0 Hz
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 50 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at a frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 50 s with
75% IaN2
bold Rated value IaN
3) Operation with permanent currents > IaN8 requires an external mains choke.
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  51
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Operation with increased continuous power

If required, an operation with increased continuous power can be activated for certain
inverters at a switching frequency of 2 kHz. This operating mode is only possible under the
following conditions:
ƒ Inverter pf E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604 type,
(device size 81 ... 91).
ƒ The mains voltage for "Mode 2" is  440 V.
ƒ The max. permissible ambient temperature in the control cabinet is  40 °C.
ƒ Reduce the maximum output current in C00022 according to the following data for
IaMhc.
ƒ Activate the operation with increased continuous power in C01199 with "Mode 1"
or "Mode 2".
– To activate it, disable the inverter.
For the currents differing from the standard, refer to the following tables.

 Note!
The "activated" setting in C01199 is reset automatically to "deactivated"
(without error message) if the previously mentioned conditions are not
fulfilled (anymore).
ƒ This, for example, also applies if the memory module is plugged into an
inverter of device size 1 ... 6 (device replacement).

For the "Mode 1 selection:

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz
Type IaN2 IaNhc IaMhc IaMre
E94xSxE1454 145 160 218 145
E94xSxE1724 172 195 258 180
E94xSxE2024 202 240 303 226
E94xSxE2454 245 302 368 275
E94xSxE2924 292 361 438 330
E94xSxE3664 366 443 549 415
E94xSxE4604 460 550 690 522

IaN2 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz

(Standard operation)
IaNhc increased continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz
IaMhc Maximum output current (overload current)
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaMhc and recovery time of 50 s with IaMre
IaMre Maximum output current during a recovery time of 50 s

52  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Sinusoidal filter assignments changed for this operating mode:

Max. motor cable lengths for compliance with the conducted interference emission according to C2 when
sinusoidal filters and line filters are used
Setting C01199 Sine filter shielded Switching
Type unshielded frequency
E94xSxE2924 "Mode 1" EZS3−480A200 150 m 2 kHz
−m or
4 kHz

For the "Mode 2 selection:

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz
Type IaN2 IaNhc IaMhc IaMre
E94xSxE1454 145 177 195 168
E94xSxE1724 172 212 233 201
E94xSxE2024 202 260 286 247
E94xSxE2454 245 315 347 299
E94xSxE2924 292 395 434 375
E94xSxE3664 366 480 528 456
E94xSxE4604 460 600 660 570

IaN2 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz

(Standard operation)
IaNhc Increased continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz
IaMhc Maximum output current (overload current)
 Periodic load change of 60 s with IaMhc and recovery time of 120 s with IaMre
IaMre Maximum output current during the recovery time

Sinusoidal filter assignments changed for this operating mode:

Max. motor cable lengths for compliance with the conducted interference emission according to C2 when
sinusoidal filters and line filters are used
Setting C01199 Sine filter shielded Switching
Type unshielded frequency
E94xSxE2024 EZS3−350A200
2 kHz
E94xSxE2924 EZS3−480A200 150 m
"Mode 2" or
E94xSxE4604 EZS3−480A200 −m
4 kHz
(2 in parallel)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  53
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94xSxE0024 82 8.8 6.4 3.9 1.3 150 15 15
E94xSxE0034 82 8.8 6.4 3.9 1.3 150 15 15
E94xSxE0044 47 15.4 11.2 6.3 1.9 150 15 15
E94xSxE0074 47 15.4 11.2 7.4 2.6 150 15 15
E94xSxE0134 27 26.9 19.5 13.2 4.7 150 15 15
E94xSxE0174 18 40.3 29.2 18.9 6.4 150 15 15
E94xSxE0244 18 40.3 29.2 22.8 9.3 150 15 15
E94xSxE0324 18 40.3 29.2 26.5 12.6 600 260 600
E94xSxE0474 15 48.3 35.0 35.2 18.6 600 320 600
E94xSxE0594 15 48.3 35.0 41.0 25.3 600 430 600
E94xSxE0864 7.5 96.7 70.1 71.1 37.9 600 320 600
E94xSxE1044 7.5 96.7 70.1 78.7 46.3 600 400 600
E94xSxE1454 4.4 165 119 90 35.9 600 300 360
E94xSxE1724 3.1 234 169 128 50.9 600 300 360
E94xSxE2024 3.1 234 169 128 50.9 600 300 360
E94xSxE2454 2.8 259 188 142 56.3 600 300 360
E94xSxE2924 2.3 315 229 173 68.6 600 300 360
E94xSxE3664 1.75 414 300 227 90.1 600 300 360
E94xSxE4604 1.4 518 375 266 99.0 600 300 360

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

54  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

3.4.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Device size 1 ... 6

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
2/PE DC 675 480 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % −

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0024 1.3 1.8 1.0 0.37 0.5
E94xSxE0034 2.2 3.1 1.6 0.75 1
E94xSxE0044 3.4 4.8 2.6 1.5 2
E94xSxE0074 6.1 8.6 4.6 3 4
E94xSxE0134 10.5 14.7 8.5 5.5 7.5
E94xSxE0174 13.1 18.4 10.8 7.5 10
E94xSxE0244 17.9 25.4 15.4 11 15
E94xSxE0324 − 26.0 21.0 15 20
E94xSxE0474 − 39.0 31.4 22 29
E94xSxE0594 − 47.0 38.9 30 40

Device size 7
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE0864 − 70.0 58.0 45 60
E94xSxE1044 − 84.0 70.0 55 73

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  55
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Device size 81 ... 91

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Mains current at IaN Output power  Motor power

(typical)
with external without external
mains choke mains choke
U, V, W 4 pol. ASM
Type ILN [A] ILN [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xSxE1454 − 138 108 95 130
E94xSxE1724 − 164 129 110 150
E94xSxE2024 − 192 151 130 180
E94xSxE2454 − 236 183 160 215
E94xSxE2924 − 285 218 190 255
E94xSxE3664 − 349 274 235 320
E94xSxE4604 − 436 344 300 405

56  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Device size 1 ... 91

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xSxE0024 1.9 3) 6.0 1.9 3) 6.0 1.3 4.2 1.0
E94xSxE0034 3.1 3) 10.0 3.1 3) 10.0 2.2 7.0 1.6
E94xSxE0044 5.0 3) 16.0 5.0 3) 16.0 3.5 11.2 2.6
E94xSxE0074 8.8 3) 21.0 8.8 3) 21.0 6.1 14.7 4.6
E94xSxE0134 16.3 3) 39.0 16.3 3) 39.0 11.4 27.3 8.5
E94xSxE0174 20.6 3) 49.5 20.6 3) 49.5 14.4 34.7 10.8
E94xSxE0244 29.4 3) 58.8 29.4 3) 58.8 20.6 41.1 15.4 5)
E94xSxE0324 38.4 76.8 33.6 67.2 28.0 64.0 16.8
E94xSxE0474 47.0 94.0 41.1 82.2 35.8 71.6 21.5
E94xSxE0594 59.0 118 51.6 103 35.9 71.8 21.5
E94xSxE0864 86.0 172 75.3 150 63.9 127 38.3
E94xSxE1044 104 208 91.0 182 68.3 136 40.9
E94xSxE1454 145 261 145 261 89 161 −
E94xSxE1724 172 310 172 310 105 189 −
E94xSxE2024 202 364 202 364 115 206 −
E94xSxE2454 245 441 209 376 140 252 −
E94xSxE2924 292 526 250 450 167 301 −
E94xSxE3664 366 659 313 563 210 378 −
E94xSxE4604 460 828 368 662 228 410 −

IaN2 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at a frequency  0 Hz
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 50 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at a frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 50 s with
75% IaN2
bold Rated value IaN
3) Operation with permanent currents > IaN8 requires an external mains choke.
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.
5) Temperature inside the control cabinet = +35 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/K current
derating

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  57
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Operation with increased continuous power

If required, operation with increased continuous power can be activated for specific
controllers at the switching frequency 2 kHz. This operating mode can only be performed
under the following conditions:
ƒ Inverters of the types E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604,
(device size 81 ... 91).
ƒ The maximum permissible ambient temperature inside the control cabinet is
 40 °C.
ƒ The maximum output current in C00022 is to be reduced according to the following
data for IaMhc.
ƒ Operation with increased continuous power has to be activated in C01199 with
"Mode 1".
– For activation controller inhibit has to be set.
The currents deviating from the standard can be gathered from the following tables.

 Note!
The "activated" setting in C01199 is reset to "deactivated" automatically
(without error message) if the above−mentioned conditions are not (no longer)
met.
ƒ This, for instance, is also the case if the memory module is plugged into a
controller of device size 1 ... 6 (device replacement).

For the selection "Mode 1:

Output currents [A] at switching frequency
2 kHz
Type IaN2 IaNhc IaMhc IaMre
E94xSxE1454 145 160 218 145
E94xSxE1724 172 195 258 180
E94xSxE2024 202 240 303 226
E94xSxE2454 245 302 368 275
E94xSxE2924 292 361 438 330
E94xSxE3664 366 443 549 415
E94xSxE4604 460 550 690 522

IaN2 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency of  0 Hz

(standard operation)
IaNhc Increased continuous output current at a frequency of  0 Hz
IaMhc Maximum output current (overload current)
 Periodic load change of 10 s with IaMhc and recovery time of 50 s with IaMre
IaMre Maximum output current during the recovery time of 50 s

58  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Sinusoidal filter assignments changed for this operating mode:

Max. motor cable lengths for compliance with the conducted interference emission according to C2 when
sinusoidal filters and line filters are used
Setting C01199 Sine filter shielded Switching
Type unshielded frequency
E94xSxE2924 "Mode 1" EZS3−480A200 150 m 2 kHz
−m or
4 kHz

The selection "Mode 2 is only permissible for mains voltages  440 V.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  59
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94xSxE0024 82 9.3 7.1 4.2 1.4 150 15 15
E94xSxE0034 82 9.3 7.1 4.2 1.4 150 15 15
E94xSxE0044 47 16.3 12.5 6.7 2.1 150 15 15
E94xSxE0074 47 16.3 12.5 7.8 2.9 150 15 15
E94xSxE0134 27 28.3 21.7 13.9 5.2 150 15 15
E94xSxE0174 18 42.5 32.5 19.9 7.2 150 15 15
E94xSxE0244 18 42.5 32.5 24.0 10.4 150 15 15
E94xSxE0324 18.0 42.5 32.5 28.0 14.1 600 260 600
E94xSxE0474 15.0 51.0 39.0 37.1 20.7 600 320 600
E94xSxE0594 15.0 51.0 39.0 43.3 28.2 600 430 600
E94xSxE0864 7.5 102.0 78.0 75.0 42.2 600 320 600
E94xSxE1044 7.5 102.0 78.0 83.0 51.6 600 400 600
E94xSxE1454 4.4 174 133 95 39.9 600 300 360
E94xSxE1724 3.1 247 188 135 56.6 600 300 360
E94xSxE2024 3.1 247 188 135 56.6 600 300 360
E94xSxE2454 2.8 273 209 150 61.7 600 300 360
E94xSxE2924 2.3 333 254 182 76.3 600 300 360
E94xSxE3664 1.75 437 334 239 100 600 300 360
E94xSxE4604 1.4 546 418 280 110 600 300 360

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

60  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

3.4.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections

The recommendations for the dimensioning of fuses and cable cross−sections apply to the
operation of devices with the assigned typical motor ratings and indicated installation
conditions.
In the case of other permissible operating modes, e.g. additional use of reserve power in
the interconnected system, the dimensioning of fuses and cables must be adapted to the
ratings and currents in accordance with the relevant technical standards.
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 ... 480 180 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 ... 65

Operation with external mains choke/mains filter, installation according to

EN 60204−1
The data are recommendations. Other dimensioning/laying systems are possible (e.g.
according VDE 0298−4).
The cable cross−sections apply under the following conditions:
ƒ Use of PVC−insulated copper cables
ƒ Conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 45°C
ƒ No bundling of cables or cores
ƒ Three loaded cores
Type   L1, L2, L3 − laying system FI 1)
B2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [mA]
E94xSxE0024 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0034 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0044 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0074 C16 − 2.5 2.5 −  300
E94xSxE0134 C20 − 6 2.5 −  300
E94xSxE0174 C25 − 6 4 −  300
E94xSxE0244 C40 − 10 10 −  300
 Circuit breaker
 Fuse of the utilisation category gG/gL or semiconductor fuses or the utilisation category gRL
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
Observe national and regional regulations!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  61
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

Operation with external mains choke/mains filter, installation according to UL

Only use UL−approved cables, fuses and fuse holders.
UL fuse: Voltage 600 V; CC, J or T class fuses
Type standard installation motor group installation FI 1)
 valeur  valeur
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
nominale (max.) nominale (max.)
[A] [AWG] [A] [AWG] [mA]
E94xSxE0024 8 14 15 14  300
E94xSxE0034 10 14 15 14  300
E94xSxE0044 15 14 20 12  300
E94xSxE0074 20 12 20 12  300
E94xSxE0134 45 8 60 6  300
E94xSxE0174 60 6 60 6  300
E94xSxE0244 60 6 60 6  300
 Fuse
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
Observe national and regional regulations!

62  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

Operation without external mains choke/mains filter, installation according to

EN 60204−1
The data are recommendations. Other dimensioning/laying systems are possible (e.g.
according VDE 0298−4).
The cable cross−sections apply under the following conditions:
ƒ Use of PVC−insulated copper cables
ƒ Conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 45°C
ƒ No bundling of cables or cores
ƒ Three loaded cores
Type   L1, L2, L3 − laying system FI 1)
B2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [mA]
E94xSxE0024 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0034 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0044 C10 − 1.5 1.5 −  300
E94xSxE0074 C16 − 2.5 2.5 −  300
E94xSxE0134 C20 − 6 2.5 −  300
E94xSxE0174 C25 − 6 4 −  300
E94xSxE0244 C40 − 10 10 −  300
E94xSxE0324 2) − 50 16 10 −  300
E94xSxE0474 2) − 63 25 16 −  300
E94xSxE0594 2) − 80 25 25 −  300
E94xSxE0864 2) − 100 − 35 −  300
E94xSxE1044 2) − 125 − 50 −  300
E94xSxE1454 2) − 200 − − 70  300
E94xSxE1724 2) − 250 − − 95  300
E94xSxE2024 2) − 315 − − 150  300
E94xSxE2454 2) − 350 − − 150  300
E94xSxE2924 2) − 400 − − 185  300
E94xSxE3664 2) − 450 − − 240  300
E94xSxE4604 2) − 500 − − 2 x 150  300
 Circuit breaker
 Fuse of the utilisation category gG/gL or semiconductor fuses or the utilisation category gRL
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
2) Device with integrated mains choke
Observe national and regional regulations!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  63
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

Operation without external mains choke/mains filter, installation according to UL

Only use UL−approved cables, fuses and fuse holders.
UL fuse: Voltage 600 V; CC, J or T class fuses
Type standard installation motor group installation FI 1)
 valeur  valeur
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
nominale (max.) nominale (max.)
[A] [AWG] [A] [AWG] [mA]
E94xSxE0024 8 14 15 14  300
E94xSxE0034 10 14 15 14  300
E94xSxE0044 15 14 20 12  300
E94xSxE0074 20 12 20 12  300
E94xSxE0134 45 8 60 6  300
E94xSxE0174 60 6 60 6  300
E94xSxE0244 60 6 60 6  300
E94xSxE0324 2) 50 6 125 0  300
E94xSxE0474 2) 60 4 125 0  300
E94xSxE0594 2) 60 4 125 0  300
E94xSxE0864 2) 2 x 2/0
100 1 300  300
500 mcm 3)
E94xSxE1044 2) 2 x 2/0
125 0 300  300
500 mcm 3)
E94xSxE1454 2) 175 4/0 − −  300
(only J class fuses)
E94xSxE1724 2) 200 300 mcm/ − −  300
(only J class fuses) 2x 1/0
E94xSxE2024 2) 250 600 mcm/ − −  300
(only J class fuses) 2 x 4/0
E94xSxE2454 2) − 600 mcm/ − −  300
(in preparation) 2 x 4/0
E94xSxE2924 2) − 700 mcm/ − −  300
(in preparation) 2 x 4/0
E94xSxE3664 2) − 2 x 300 mcm − −  300
 103
E94xSxE4604 2) − 2 x 300 mcm − −  300
 103
 Fuse
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
2) Device with integrated mains choke
3) The directive for a "group installation" according to UL508A or NEC, CEC must be considered.
Observe national and regional regulations!

64  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

3.4.6 Overcurrent operation

The controllers are designed for two overcurrent modes.

A load period must be followed by a recovery time. During the recovery time the current
must not exceed the value given.
The values given refer to the rated output current IaN8.

IaN8 [%]

‚
100

0 t
t1 t2 t3 t4
9400SSP008

Fig. 3−1 Overcurrent capacity at 45° C

E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044 E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604

E94xMxE0024 ... E94xMxE0594
 5 s cycle   1−min cycle 
– t1 = 0.5 s load time with peak current  – t1 = 10 s load time with peak current 
– t2 = 4.5 s recovery time with limited current  – t2 = 50 s recovery time with limited current 
 3−min cycle   3−min cycle 
– t3 = 60 s load time with peak current  – t3 = 60 s load time with peak current 
– t4 = 120 s recovery time with limited current  – t4 = 120 s recovery time with limited current 

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  65
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

230 V
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 65)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.8 1.1 − −
E94xSxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 8.0 1.9 − −
E94xSxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 12.8 3.0 − −
E94xSxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 16.8 5.3 − −
E94xSxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 31.2 9.8 − −
E94xSxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 39.6 12.4 − −
E94xSxE0244 58.8 22.0 58.8 22.0 47.0 17.6 − −
E94xSxE0324 76.8 28.8 76.8 28.8 64.0 24.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 81.8 30.6 − −
E94xSxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 82.0 30.7 − −
E94xSxE0864 172 64.5 172 64.5 146 55.0 − −
E94xSxE1044 208 78.0 208 78.0 156 58.2 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 65)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.3 1.1 − −
E94xSxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.8 1.9 − −
E94xSxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 6.0 3.0 − −
E94xSxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 10.5 5.3 − −
E94xSxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 19.5 9.8 − −
E94xSxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 24.8 12.4 − −
E94xSxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 35.3 17.6 − −
E94xSxE0324 57.6 28.8 57.6 28.8 48.0 24.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 61.6 30.6 − −
E94xSxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 61.4 30.7 − −
E94xSxE0864 129 64.5 129 64.5 109 55.0 − −
E94xSxE1044 156 78.0 156 78.0 118 58.2 − −

66  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

400 V
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 65)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.8 1.1 − −
E94xSxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 8.0 1.9 − −
E94xSxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 12.8 3.0 − −
E94xSxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 16.8 5.3 − −
E94xSxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 31.2 9.8 − −
E94xSxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 39.6 12.4 − −
E94xSxE0244 58.8 22.0 58.8 22.0 47.0 17.6 − −
E94xSxE0324 76.8 28.8 76.8 28.8 64.0 24.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 81.8 30.6 − −
E94xSxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 82.0 30.7 − −
E94xSxE0864 172 64.5 172 64.5 146 55.0 − −
E94xSxE1044 208 78.0 208 78.0 156 58.2 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 65)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.3 1.1 − −
E94xSxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.8 1.9 − −
E94xSxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 6.0 3.0 − −
E94xSxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 10.5 5.3 − −
E94xSxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 19.5 9.8 − −
E94xSxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 24.8 12.4 − −
E94xSxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 35.3 17.6 − −
E94xSxE0324 57.6 28.8 57.6 28.8 48.0 24.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 61.6 30.6 − −
E94xSxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 61.4 30.7 − −
E94xSxE0864 129 64.5 129 64.5 109 55.0 − −
E94xSxE1044 156 78.0 156 78.0 118 58.2 − −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  67
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:

Type I [A] in a cycle of 1 minute  ( 65)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE1454 261 109 261 109 196 81.2 − −
E94xSxE1724 310 129 310 129 232 96.3 − −
E94xSxE2024 364 152 364 152 273 113 − −
E94xSxE2454 441 184 377 157 289 120 − −
E94xSxE2924 526 219 450 187 345 143 − −
E94xSxE3664 659 275 564 234 432 179 − −
E94xSxE4604 828 345 662 276 469 193 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 65)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE1454 218 109 218 109 164 81.2 − −
E94xSxE1724 258 129 258 129 194 96.3 − −
E94xSxE2024 303 152 303 152 228 113 − −
E94xSxE2454 368 184 314 157 240 120 − −
E94xSxE2924 438 219 374 187 286 143 − −
E94xSxE3664 549 275 468 234 359 179 − −
E94xSxE4604 690 345 552 276 391 193 − −

68  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

480 V
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044:
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 65)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.2 1.0 − −
E94xSxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 7.0 1.6 − −
E94xSxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 11.2 2.6 − −
E94xSxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 14.7 4.6 − −
E94xSxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 27.3 8.5 − −
E94xSxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 34.7 10.8 − −
E94xSxE0244 58.8 22.0 58.8 22.0 41.1 15.4 − −
E94xSxE0324 76.8 28.8 76.8 28.8 56.0 21.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 71.6 26.7 − −
E94xSxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 71.8 26.8 − −
E94xSxE0864 172 64.5 172 64.5 128 48.2 − −
E94xSxE1044 208 78.0 208 78.0 137 51.0 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 65)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.0 1.0 − −
E94xSxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.3 1.6 − −
E94xSxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 5.3 2.6 − −
E94xSxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 9.2 4.6 − −
E94xSxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 17.1 8.5 − −
E94xSxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 21.7 10.8 − −
E94xSxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 30.8 15.4 − −
E94xSxE0324 57.6 28.8 57.6 28.8 42.0 21.0 − −
E94xSxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 53.9 26.7 − −
E94xSxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 53.7 26.8 − −
E94xSxE0864 129 64.5 129 64.5 96 48.2 − −
E94xSxE1044 156 78.0 156 78.0 103 51.0 − −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  69
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604:

Type I [A] in a cycle of 1 minute  ( 65)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE1454 261 109 261 109 196 81.2 − −
E94xSxE1724 310 129 310 129 232 96.3 − −
E94xSxE2024 364 152 364 152 273 113 − −
E94xSxE2454 441 184 377 157 289 120 − −
E94xSxE2924 526 219 450 187 345 143 − −
E94xSxE3664 659 275 564 234 432 179 − −
E94xSxE4604 828 345 662 276 469 193 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 65)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xSxE1454 218 109 218 109 164 81.2 − −
E94xSxE1724 258 129 258 129 194 96.3 − −
E94xSxE2024 303 152 303 152 228 113 − −
E94xSxE2454 368 184 314 157 240 120 − −
E94xSxE2924 438 219 374 187 286 143 − −
E94xSxE3664 549 275 468 234 359 179 − −
E94xSxE4604 690 345 552 276 391 193 − −

70  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

3.4.7 Current−time diagrams

In addition to the data for overcurrent operation, here you are provided with information
on the dimensioning of application−oriented cycles.
By means of the following information you determine permissible load periods with
overcurrents and required recovery times with limited currents. If the currents and times
determined are observed, the Ixt monitoring function for the protection of the devices will
not respond.

Characteristics
The following characteristics ("Current−time diagrams") describe the device utilisation via
amperage and the duration of current flow.
The left part of the diagram (negative time data) represents the overload phase, while the
right part of the diagram (positive time data) shows the relieving phase.
Devices with an identical Ixt behaviour are combined within a diagram. A second diagram
enlarges a cutout area to improve the clearness of display.

Requirements
ƒ Switching frequency
The curves shown always refer to the variable rated switching frequency (fchopp) at
which the rated device current is permissible permanently. As this rated switching
frequencies are different for the individual devices, they are specified with the
diagrams. This means that the switching frequency is reduced automatically during
the overload phase. During the recovery phase the switching frequency set is
maintained.
ƒ Mains voltage
In the diagrams a mains voltage of UN = 400 V was assumed. Where applicable, a
current derating depending on the mains voltage may be necessary for the devices,
depending on the switching frequency that is reached. This means that the currents are
weighted differently in the Ixt monitoring. The devices for which a derating is required
can be gathered from the "Rated values" section. The continuous currents specified
there then are the 100% values which are required for working with the diagrams.
ƒ Ambient temperature
The ambient temperature may be maximally TAmb < 45 °C. In the case of higher
ambient temperatures the reduced continuous currents have to be taken into
consideration.
ƒ Output frequency
In the diagrams an output frequency (= field frequency) fout > 5 Hz has been assumed.
In the case of smaller output frequencies (fout = 0  5 Hz), a different switching
frequency results in a different device utilisation due to a different continuous current.
When the diagrams were created, this device behaviour was not taken into
consideration.
If a fixed switching frequency f > 4 kHz is selected, the reduction of the permissible
continuous current has to be considered (100 % = reduced continuous current) for
smaller output frequencies (fout = 0  5 Hz).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  71
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

Application example
ƒ Drive task
– A current Iol = 4.0 A is required for a time tol = 3 s.
– During the recovery phase there is a current Ire = 1.0 A.
– During the overload phase a switching frequency of 4 kHz is accepted.
– The switching frequency during the recovery phase is to be 8 kHz.
– The mains voltage is 400 V.
– The times with output frequencies under 5 Hz are insignificant.
ƒ Problem
– How long does the recovery phase tre have to be when the E94AxxE0034 controller
is used?
ƒ The currents required are based on the rated device current:
– Iol = 4.0 A/2.5 A = 160 % − selected characteristic: 175 %
– Ire = 1.0A/2.5 A = 40 % − selected characteristic: 50 %
– Because of the short overcurrent time tol = 3 s, the cutout diagram of the
E94AxxE0034 device is taken into consideration.
– The switching frequency fchopp = 8 kHz, var does not have to be considered
separately.
ƒ Procedure within the diagram
–  Starting from the time axis at tol = 3 s, a perpendicular line is drawn to the
selected characteristic at 175 % (corresponds to the minimum required current Iol).
–  Draw a straight line from the point of intersection horizontally to the right to
the selected characteristic, the recovery phase, at 50 %.
–  Draw a perpendicular line from the point of intersection back to the time axis.
–  Read the minimum required duration of recovery on the time axis.

150 % ‚ 75 %

ƒ
60 %
175 %

50 %
25 %
200 % 0%
350 %
275 %
300 %
250 %

400 %

225 %


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s] „
SZD_E94A024_044 BSP

ƒ Result in the example

– The duration of recovery has to be at least tre = 5 s!

72  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

Guide
Type Diagram
E94xxxE0024
E94xxxE0034 Page  74
 Fig. 3−2/  Fig. 3−3
E94xxxE0044
E94xxxE0074
E94xxxE0134
E94xxxE0174 Page  75
 Fig. 3−4/  Fig. 3−5
E94xxxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xxxE0474 Page  77
E94xxxE0594  Fig. 3−8 /  Fig. 3−9

Guide
Type Diagram
E94xxxE0024
E94xxxE0034 Page  74
 Fig. 3−2/  Fig. 3−3
E94xxxE0044
E94xxxE0074
E94xxxE0134
E94xxxE0174 Page  75
 Fig. 3−4/  Fig. 3−5
E94xxxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xxxE0474 Page  77
E94xxxE0594  Fig. 3−8 /  Fig. 3−9
E94xSxE0864 Page  78
E94xSxE1044  Fig. 3−10/  Fig. 3−11
E94xSxE1454
E94xSxE1724
E94xSxE2024
E94xSxE2454 Page  79
 Fig. 3−12 /  Fig. 3−13
E94xSxE2924
E94xSxE3664
E94xSxE4604

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  73
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0024 ... E94xxxE0044

Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0024 1.5
E94xxxE0034 400 2.5 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0044 4.0
250 ... 400 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 225 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A024_044

Fig. 3−2 Diagram for E94xxxE0024 and E94xxxE0044

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %
150 %

60 %
175 %

50 %
25 %
200 % 0%
350 %
275 %
300 %
250 %

400 %

225 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A024_044L

Fig. 3−3 Area cutout for E94xxxE0024 and E94xxxE0044

74  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244 and E94xMxE0324

Type Vr 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0074 7.0 8 kHz var
E94xMxE0094 9.3 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0134 13.0
400
E94xxxE0174 16.5 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0244 23.5
E94xMxE0324 32.0 8 kHz var
250 ... 300 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 225 %

0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244

Fig. 3−4 Diagram for E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244, E94xMxE0324

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

150 %

60 %

50 %

25 %
275 %
300 %

175 % 200 % 225 % 250 % 0%

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244L

Fig. 3−5 Area cutout for E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244, E94xMxE0324

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  75
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0324
Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0324 400 32.0 4 kHz var

180 % 210 % 240 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A324

Fig. 3−6 Diagram for E94xxxE0324

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

180 % 210 % 240 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A324L

Fig. 3−7 Area cutout for E94xxxE0324

76  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0474 47.0
400 4 kHz var
E94xxxE0594 59.0

75 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A474_594

Fig. 3−8 Diagram for E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

60 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A474_594L

Fig. 3−9 Area cutout for E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  77
3 Single−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0864 and E94xxxE1044

Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0864 86.0
400 4 kHz var
E94xxxE1044 104

75 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A864_1044

Fig. 3−10 Diagram for E94xxxE0864 and E94xxxE1044

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

60 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A864_1044L

Fig. 3−11 Area cutout for E94xxxE0864 and E94xxxE1044

78  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE1454 ... E9xBxxE4604

Type Vr 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE1454 145
E94xxxE1724 400 172 4 kHz var
E94xxxE2024 202
E94xxxE2454 245
E94xxxE2924 292
400 2 kHz var
E94xxxE3664 366
E94xxxE4604 460

150 %
165 %
180 % 0 % 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A1454_6954

Fig. 3−12 Diagram for E94xxxE1454 ... E94xxxE4604

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

150 %
165 %
180 %
0% 25 % 50 % 60 %

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A1454_6954L

Fig. 3−13 Area section for E94xxxE1454 ... E94xxxE4604

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  79
3 Single−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

3.5 Device description

3.5.1 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

9400SSP012

80  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device description
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Standard device 
Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24 V supply and statebus
X3 Analog inputs and analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC clip
 Prominent warning label close to the device!

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

Installation backplane 
Pos. Description
X100 Mains / DC−bus voltage
X105 Motor / external brake resistor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring
X107 Control of motor holding brake
X109 DC busbar +
X110 DC busbar −

EMC wire clamp (for device sizes 2 + 3), replaces 1 x 

 EMC shield clamp

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  81
3 Single−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

3.5.2 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

SSP94GG612

82  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device description
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

Standard device 
Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24 V supply and statebus
X3 Analog inputs and analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC clip
 Prominent warning label close to the device!
X100 Mains / DC−bus voltage
X105 Motor / external brake resistor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring
X107 Control of motor holding brake

 EMC wire clamp

Device size 6:  10 ... 20 mm and  15 ... 28 mm
Device size 7:  15 ... 28 mm and  20 ... 37 mm
Internal thread for M6 eye bolt (not included in the scope of supply)
 Strain relief and lifting aid, removable

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  83
3 Single−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

3.5.3 Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

SSP94GG812

The control unit is firmly connected to the device. For a better presentation, it has been
removed.

84  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device description
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24−V supply / Statebus
X3 Analog inputs / analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics (with diagnostic adapter or keypad)
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC wire clamp
X100 Mains voltage
X104 DC−bus voltage/external brake resistor
X105 Motor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring (position depends on the device size)
X107 Control of motor holding brake
 EMC shield clamp
 Holes for transport and assembly guides
 Bridge for operation in TT/TN or IT systems

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  85
3 Single−axis controllers
Device description
Device 292 A (150 kW)

3.5.4 Device 292 A (150 kW)

SSP94GG814

The control unit is firmly connected to the device. For a better presentation, it has been
removed.

86  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device description
Device 292 A (150 kW)

Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24−V supply / Statebus
X3 Analog inputs / analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics (with diagnostic adapter or keypad)
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC wire clamp
X100 Mains voltage
X104 DC−bus voltage/external brake resistor
X105 Motor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring (position depends on the device size)
X107 Control of motor holding brake
 EMC shield clamp
 Holes for transport and assembly guides
 Bridge for operation in TT/TN or IT systems

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

 Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous voltages

for at least 20 minutes after mains disconnection!

 High discharge current: Fixed installation and PE connection to

EN 61800−5−1 required!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the

personnel must remove any electrostatic charges using suitable
measures!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  87
3 Single−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

3.5.5 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

SSP94GG813

The control unit is firmly connected to the device. For a better presentation, it has been
removed.

88  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Device description
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24−V supply / Statebus
X3 Analog inputs / analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics (with diagnostic adapter or keypad)
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC wire clamp
X100 Mains voltage
X104 DC−bus voltage/external brake resistor
X105 Motor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring
X107 Control of motor holding brake
 EMC shield clamp
 Holes for transport and assembly guides

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  89
3 Single−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Important notes

3.6 Mechanical installation

3.6.1 Important notes

 Note!
The devices must be installed in housings (e.g. control cabinets) to meet
applicable regulations.

ƒ The mounting location must always comply with the operating conditions specified
in the technical data (! 33). Take additional measures if necessary.
ƒ The mounting plate of the control cabinet must have the following properties:
– electrically conductive
– free of lacquer
ƒ The mechanical connections must always be ensured.
ƒ A free air circulation must be ensured for dissipating the heat.
ƒ The described EMC properties are provided if the following conditions are complied
with:
– The devices are mounted according to the arrangement concept described.
– The prepared cables are used and remain unchanged.

90  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

3.6.2 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Mounting grid
We recommend to provide the mounting plate with a grid pattern of M5 threaded holes
for attaching the devices. This preparation enables easy attachment of the devices, and the
device sizes 1, 2, ... n can thus be mounted directly adjacent to each other.

 Note!
ƒ Permissible are M5 screw and washer assemblies or hexagon socket screws
with washer.
ƒ Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm / 26 lb−in.
ƒ The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7
mm.

9400SSP0010

Fig. 3−14 Mounting grid for installation backplane and filter of device sizes 1 ... 3
 Installation backplane without footprint filter (mains or RFI filter)
 Installation backplane with footprint filter
 Grid hole pattern for installation backplane (M5 threaded holes)
 Grid hole pattern for footprint filter (M5 threaded holes)
 Cable duct
1 ... 3 Device size, mounting holes used

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  91
3 Single−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Standard device with installation backplane

SSP94GGmSo000

Fig. 3−15 Dimensions [mm]

Type Dimensions a Mass Device size

[mm] [kg]
E94xSxE0024
60 4.0 1
E94xSxE0034
E94xSxE0044
90 5.3 2
E94xSxE0074
E94xSxE0134
E94xSxE0174 120 8.1 3
E94xSxE0244

92  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Installation steps
Proceed as follows for installation:
1. Prepare M5 threaded holes on the mounting plate according to the mounting grid.
2. When footprint filters are used: Screw installation backplane and footprint filter
together.
– Use screw and washer assemblies M5 x 20 mm or hexagon socket screws
M5 x 20 mm with washer
– Starting torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in)
3. Screw the installation backplane or the footprint filter with installation backplane
onto the mounting plate. Do not tighten the screws yet.
– Use M5 screw and washer assemblies or M5 hexagon socket screws with washer.
– The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7 mm.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 with further installation backplanes to be installed.
5. Align all installation backplanes.
6. Tightly screw all installation backplanes/footprint filters onto the mounting plate.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  93
3 Single−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

3.6.3 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

SSP94Mas01

Fig. 3−16 Dimensions [mm]

Dimensions [mm] Weight Device

size
Type a b b1 b2 e c1 d g m [kg]
E94xSxE0324
E94xSxE0474 206 606 556 630 294 170 585 26.5 6
E94xSxE0594 6.5 12.5
E94xSxE0864
266 706 655 729 370 230 685 42 7
E94xSxE1044

94  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 145 ... 292 A (75 ... 150 kW)

3.6.4 Devices in the range 145 ... 292 A (75 ... 150 kW)

9 X
16

22.5 c1 c1

200
a

10
X

d
b

b1

15
b2

200

395
SSP94GG8x1

Fig. 3−17 Dimensions [mm]

Dimensions [mm] Mass Device size

Type a b b1 b2 c1 d [kg]
E94xSxE1454 285 950 923 − 120 925 64 81
E94xSxE1724
E94xSxE2024 345 950 923 − 150 925 77 82
E94xSxE2454
E94xSxE2924 345 1090 1063 160 150 1065 80 83

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  95
3 Single−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

3.6.5 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

11 X
17

500 55 195 195

200

24
X

1036

1000
952
1522

11

15
100

544

SSP94GG921

Fig. 3−18 Dimensions [mm]

Mass Device size

Type [kg]
E94xSxE3664
189 91
E94xSxE4604

96  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Important notes

3.7 Wiring

3.7.1 Important notes

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
The leakage current to earth (PE) is > 3.5 mA AC or > 10 mA DC.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the device in the event of an error.
Protective measures:
Implement the measures required in EN 61800−5−1. Especially:
ƒ Fixed installation
– Implement PE connection in compliance with standards.
– Connect PE conductor twice or PE conductor cross−section  10 mm2.
ƒ Connection with a connector for industrial applications according to
IEC 60309 (CEE):
– PE conductor cross−section  2.5 mm2 as part of a multi−core supply cable.
– Provide for suitable strain relief.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  97
3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Important notes

 Stop!
No device protection if the mains voltage is too high
The mains input is not internally fused.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Destruction of the device if the mains voltage is too high.
Protective measures:
ƒ Observe the maximally permissible mains voltage.
ƒ Fuse the device correctly on the supply side against mains fluctuations and
voltage peaks.

 Stop!
Overvoltage on components:
On IT systems an earth fault in the installation can cause impermissible
overvoltages.
Possible consequences:
Destruction of the device.
Protective measures:
If the devices are operated on IT systems, the internal connection of the filters
to the protective earth in the installation backplane has to be disconnected
(! 109).

 Note!
Switching operations on the motor side of the controller are permitted for
safety switch−off (emergency off).
Please observe:
ƒ When the controller is enabled, switching operations may lead to a response
of the controller monitoring functions.
ƒ The switching elements on the motor side must be rated for DC voltages
with UDCmax = 800 V.

98  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1
 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

3.7.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

 Note!
The fuse current given in the following is the maximum permissible value. This
prevents fire and electrical hazard in the event of an error of the device.
The fuse must be smaller or equal to the maximum permissible value, taking
the following into consideration:
ƒ The maximum possible cable cross−section
ƒ the laying system (e.g. tap installation)
ƒ the ambient temperature
ƒ the relevant regulations (e.g. UL508A, NEC70 and others).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  99
3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

Device size 1 ... 3

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when protected by CC, J or
T class fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when
protected by class CC, J or T class fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 000 rms amperes, when supplied by a rectified AC−power
supply of 480 V maximum, when protected by specified fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 50 000 rms amperes (30 000 rms Amperes with fuse type
202922...), when supplied by a rectified AC−power supply of 480/277 V
maximum, when protected by specified fuses.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table.
– Above Short Circuit ratings are only valid when the Assembly Bases are
used.
– Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.
ƒ The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication
that a fault current has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, current−carrying parts and other components of the
controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the
current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
ƒ For information on the protection level of the internal overload protection
for a motor load in percent of FLA, see the corresponding Application
Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ For information on rating and proper connection of the thermal protector
(only for connection to motors having integral thermal protection), see the
corresponding Application Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature is 45 °C.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature with derating is 55 °C.
ƒ Use 60/75 °C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.
ƒ These products are intended for use in overvoltage category III.

100  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Standard installation Motor group installation
Nominal value (max.) [A] Nominal value (max.) [A]
E94xSxE0024 8 15
E94xSxE0034 10 15
E94xSxE0044 15 20
E94xSxE0074 20 20
E94xSxE0134 45 60
E94xSxE0174 60 60
E94xSxE0244 60 60

Assignment of devices − DC−fuses

+UG/−UG (X100) Busbar (X109/X110)
Nominal value (max.) Type Nominal value (max.) Type
Type [A] [A]
Siba 5020106.16
16
E94xSxE0024 Siba 5020206.16
E94xSxE0034 Eaton 170M1754
63
Eaton 170M1734
Siba 5020106.40
40
E94xSxE0044 Siba 5020206.40 Eaton 170M1761
315
E94xSxE0074 Eaton 170M1757 Eaton 170M1741
125
Eaton 170M1737
Siba 2029220.100
E94xSxE0134 100
Siba 2029221.100
E94xSxE0174
E94xSxE0244 Eaton 170M1759
200
Eaton 170M1739

Recommended fuse holder for type 170M...: Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  101

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 6 and 7

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when protected by CC, J or
T class fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when protected
by class CC, J or T class fuses.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table.
– Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.
ƒ The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication
that a fault current has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, current−carrying parts and other components of the
controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the
current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
ƒ For information on the protection level of the internal overload protection
for a motor load in percent of FLA, see the corresponding Application
Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ For information on rating and proper connection of the thermal protector
(only for connection to motors having integral thermal protection), see the
corresponding Application Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature is 45 °C.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature with derating is 55 °C.
ƒ E94xSxE0324 ... E94xSxE0594: Use 60/75 °C copper wire only, except for
control circuits.
ƒ E94xSxE0864 ... E94xSxE1044: Use 75 °C copper wire only, except for control
circuits.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.
ƒ These products are intended for use in overvoltage category III.

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Standard installation Motor group installation
Nominal value (max.) [A] Nominal value (max.) [A]
E94xSxE0324 50 125
E94xSxE0474 60 125
E94xSxE0594 60 125
E94xSxE0864 100 300
E94xSxE1044 125 300

102  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 81 ... 91

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100000 rms symmetrical amperes, 500 V max.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table. Voltage of the fuses must at
least be suitable with the input voltage of the drive.
ƒ The integral solid state protection does not provide branch circuit protection
and that branch circuit protection has to be provided externally in
accordance with manufacturers instructions, the National Electrical Code
and any additional codes.
ƒ For information on the protection level of the internal overload protection
for a motor load in percent of FLA, see the corresponding Application
Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ For information on rating and proper connection of the thermal protector
(only for connection to motors having integral thermal protection), see the
corresponding Application Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 40 °C.
ƒ Use 75 °C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.

Branch circuit protection

Any class J fuse rated 600 Vac, limited to high−interrupting capacity 100 kA min.
Current limiting types below:
Type Nominal value (max.)
E94xSxE1454 175 A
E94xSxE1724 200 A
E94xSxE2024 250 A
E94xSxE2454 300 A
E94xSxE2924 350 A
E94xSxE3664 Supply input wire protection − The drive shall be protected by any UL Listed fuse in
accordance with the NEC.
E94xSxE4604 (Note: The discrete internal semiconductor fuses are considered branch circuit protection)
Tab. 3−4

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  103

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − French
Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 1 ... 3

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de
100 000 ampères symétriques eff., maximum 480 V, avec protection par
des fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères symétriques eff.,
maximum 480 V, avec protection par des fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères eff., lorsque
l’alimentation est fournie par une source de CA redressé de 480 V
maximum, et lorsque cette source est protégée par des fusibles
spécifiques.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 50 000 ampères eff. (30 000 ampères eff.
avec type de fusible 202922...), lorsque l’alimentation est fournie par une
source de CA redressé de 480/277 V maximum, et lorsque cette source est
protégée par des fusibles spécifiques.
– Utiliser les fusibles spécifiés comme indiqué dans le tableau.
– Les courants nominaux de court−circuit ci−dessus sont valables
uniquement en cas d’utilisation de plaques de montage.
– La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément au National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code, et
aux autres dispositions applicables au niveau local.
ƒ Le déclenchement du dispositif de protection du circuit de dérivation peut
être dû à une coupure qui résulte d’un courant de défaut. Pour limiter le
risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique, examiner les pièces porteuses de
courant et les autres éléments du contrôleur ; les remplacer s’ils sont
endommagés. Le relais de surcharge doit être remplacé en cas de grillage de
l’élément traversé par le courant.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur le niveau de protection offert par la
protection intégrée contre les surcharges du moteur (pourcentage de
l’intensité assignée à pleine charge), se reporter aux manuels d’application
ou aux systèmes d’aide logiciels.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur les caractéristiques assignées et sur le
câblage du dispositif de protection thermique (concerne uniquement le
raccordement aux moteurs dotés d’un dispositif de protection thermique
intégré), se reporter aux manuels d’application ou aux systèmes d’aide
logiciels.

104  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 45 °C

ƒ Température ambiante maximale avec réduction de puissance : 55 °C
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour la
partie commande.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.
ƒ Ces produits sont conçus pour une utilisation dans la catégorie de
surtension III.

Protection du circuit de dérivation / protection contre les courts−circuits par fusibles

conformément à UL248
Type Installation standard Installation au sein d´un groupe moteur
Valeur nominale (max.) [A] Valeur nominale (max.) [A]
E94xSxE0024 8 15
E94xSxE0034 10 15
E94xSxE0044 15 20
E94xSxE0074 20 20
E94xSxE0134 45 60
E94xSxE0174 60 60
E94xSxE0244 60 60

Combinaison entre les appareils et les fusibles CC

+UG/−UG (X100) Barre conductrice (X109/X110)
Valeur nominale Type Valeur nominale Type
(max.) (max.)
Type [A] [A]
Siba 5020106.16
16
E94xSxE0024 Siba 5020206.16
E94xSxE0034 Eaton 170M1754
63
Eaton 170M1734
Siba 5020106.40
40
E94xSxE0044 Siba 5020206.40 Eaton 170M1761
315
E94xSxE0074 Eaton 170M1757 Eaton 170M1741
125
Eaton 170M1737
Siba 2029220.100
E94xSxE0134 100
Siba 2029221.100
E94xSxE0174
E94xSxE0244 Eaton 170M1759
200
Eaton 170M1739

Porte−fusible recommandé pour Typ 170M... : Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  105

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 6 and 7

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100000 ampères
symétriques eff., maximum 480 V, avec protection par des fusibles de
calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères symétriques eff.,
maximum 480 V, avec protection par des fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Utiliser les fusibles spécifiés comme indiqué dans le tableau.
– La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément au National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code, et
aux autres dispositions applicables au niveau local.
ƒ Le déclenchement du dispositif de protection du circuit de dérivation peut
être dû à une coupure qui résulte d’un courant de défaut. Pour limiter le
risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique, examiner les pièces porteuses de
courant et les autres éléments du contrôleur ; les remplacer s’ils sont
endommagés. Le relais de surcharge doit être remplacé en cas de grillage de
l’élément traversé par le courant.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur le niveau de protection offert par la
protection intégrée contre les surcharges du moteur (pourcentage de
l’intensité assignée à pleine charge), se reporter aux manuels d’application
ou aux systèmes d’aide logiciels.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur les caractéristiques assignées et sur le
câblage du dispositif de protection thermique (concerne uniquement le
raccordement aux moteurs dotés d’un dispositif de protection thermique
intégré), se reporter aux manuels d’application ou aux systèmes d’aide
logiciels.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 45 °C
ƒ Température ambiante maximale avec réduction de puissance : 55 °C
ƒ E94xSxE0324 ... E94xSxE0594 : Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en
cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour les circuits de commande.
ƒ E94xSxE0864 ... E9xASxE1044 : Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en
cuivre 75 °C, sauf pour les circuits de commande.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.
ƒ Ces produits sont conçus pour une utilisation dans la catégorie de
surtension III.

106  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Protection du circuit de dérivation / protection contre les courts−circuits par fusibles

conformément à UL248
Type Installation standard Installation au sein d´un groupe moteur
Valeur nominale (max.) [A] Valeur nominale (max.) [A]
E94xSxE0324 50 125
E94xSxE0474 60 125
E94xSxE0594 60 125
E94xSxE0864 100 300
E94xSxE1044 125 300

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  107

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 81 ... 91

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100000 ampères
symétriques eff., maximum 500 V.
– Utiliser les fusibles indiqués dans le tableau. La tension des fusibles doit
être adaptée à la tension d’entrée de l’entraînement.
ƒ La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément aux indications du fabricant, au National Electrical Code et
aux autres dispositions applicables.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur le niveau de protection offert par la
protection intégrée contre les surcharges du moteur (pourcentage de
l’intensité assignée à pleine charge), se reporter aux manuels d’application
ou aux systèmes d’aide logiciels.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur les caractéristiques assignées et sur le
câblage du dispositif de protection thermique (concerne uniquement le
raccordement aux moteurs dotés d’un dispositif de protection thermique
intégré), se reporter aux manuels d’application ou aux systèmes d’aide
logiciels.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 40 °C.
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 75 °C, sauf pour la partie
commande.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.

Protection du circuit de dérivation

Tout fusible de classe J à tension assignée de 600 Vac, limité à une haute capacité de coupure de 100 kA mini.
Types de limitation actuels ci−dessous :
Type Valeur nominale (max.)
E94xSxE1454 175 A
E94xSxE1724 200 A
E94xSxE2024 250 A
E94xSxE2454 300 A
E94xSxE2924 350 A
E94xSxE3664 Fournir la protection de câble d’entrée − Le moteur peut être protégé par tout fusible certifié
UL conformément au NEC (National Electrical Code).
(Remarque : les fusibles internes et discrets pour semi−conducteurs sont considérés comme
E94xSxE4604 une protection de circuit de dérivation)

Tab. 3−5

108  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

3.7.3 Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device−internal EMC filters have been implemented to reduce interference emission.

These EMC filters are connected to protective earth to discharge interference currents.
Under certain conditions the EMC filters must be disconnected from:
ƒ Operation in an IT system
The devices are protected from damages or destruction due to incompatible
overvoltages in the case of an error (earth fault).

 Note!
Internal components have earth/ground potential
Possible consequence: The monitoring devices of the IT system will be
triggered.
ƒ Upstream an isolation transformer.
ƒ Before connection to an IT system be absolutely sure to follow the measures
described below.

ƒ DC−bus operation
ƒ Operation with power supply modules or regenerative power supply modules
ƒ Operating multiple devices with a common filter
The EMC properties can only be reached by carrying out the described measures.
The triggering behaviour of applicable earth−leakage circuit breakers remains
undisturbed.

Overview of the measures

The measures which are to be carried out once have been prepared in relation to the
devices and are each described together with installation and wiring.
Device (GG = device size) Measure in the case of operation ...
in the IT system in the interconnected
system, with power supply
modules or shared filters
Inverter
with installation backplane (GG1 ... GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
without installation backplane (GG6 ... GG7) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG81 ... GG83) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG91) Only factory−set measures are possible.
Please specify when ordering.
Power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG1 und GG3) No measure necessary
without installation backplane (GG4 ... GG5) No measure necessary
Regenerative power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
associated mains filter Change screwed connection No measure necessary

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  109

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device size 1 ... 3

Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:
1. Remove IT insulating cap from the parking position  in the installation backplane.
– For this apply a screwdriver on the right or left and lever off the insulating cap.
– Optionally the insulating cap can be carefully removed using an appropriate pliers.
2. Attach IT insulating cap to the earthing jumper  until it clicks into place.

SSP94IT001

Fig. 3−19 Plugging the IT insulating cap onto the earthing jumper

110  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device size 6 and 7

Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:

94GG67IT67

Fig. 3−20

1. There is a screw above the X100 (+UG/−UG) terminals in the position "TT−TN".
2. Unscrew the screw and screw it in again at position "IT".
– Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm (30 lb−in)

3. There is a metal lug on the left in the device.

4. Unbolt the screws to remove the metal strap.
5. Unbolt the screw at position "IT" and insert the metal strap.
6. Tighten all screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm (30 lb−in)
After this, the device is suitable for operation in IT systems.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  111

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device sizes 81 and 82

Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:
1. The bridge  that connects the filter with the protective earth can be found at the
indicated position.
2. Loosen both screws  (do not remove them).
3. Fold the bridge  downwards clockwise by 90°.
4. Tighten both screws .
– Starting torque: 3.4 Nm (30 lb−in)

94ITSW8001

112  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device size 83
Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:
1. The bridge  that connects the filter with the protective earth can be found at the
indicated position.
2. Loosen both screws  (do not remove them).
3. Fold bridge  90° clockwise.
4. Tighten both screws .
– Starting torque: 3.4 Nm (30 lb−in)

94ITSW8002

Device size 91
If devices of this size are to be used in IT systems, factory−set measures have to be taken.
Please consider this when ordering.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  113

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

3.7.4 Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Example circuit

SSP94PSP01

Fig. 3−21 Basic circuit diagram of the drive system

E94xSxExxxx 9400 Single Drive servo axis module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane
F1 ... F4 Fuses
Z1 Mains filter/RFI filter (optional)
" HF shield termination through large−surface connection to functional earth
EYF... System cable for resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
K1 Mains contactor
R Resolver
RB Brake resistor
Y Motor holding brake (connected to optional motor brake control)
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source for the motor holding brake
 24−V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2

 Tip!
Complete the wiring of the installation backplane before plugging in the
standard device. The upper terminals of the installation backplane cannot be
connected with a plugged−in standard device.

114  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
ƒ DC bus, cable length from 0.3 m
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

How to connect the shield

E94AZPS004

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  115

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Mains
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
(left part)
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3

SSP940X100
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

DC bus
Terminal X100 labelling Description
(right part)
+UG Alternative way of connecting the DC−bus voltage (compatible with
−UG the 9300 series).
Max. continuous current Idc:
Device size 1: 5.3 A
Device size 2: 15.2 A
Device size 3: 44.4 A
Device size 6: 66 A
SSP940X100 Device size 7: 116 A

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

116  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

External brake resistor

Terminal X105 Labelling Description
(left part)
Rb1 External brake resistor
Rb2

SSP94LX105
# Connection for the PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug.

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  117

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
(right part)
U Connection of the motor phases
V
W

" Functional earth

Connect the shields of the motor phases and of the optional motor
brake control separately and with a surface as large as possible to
the shield sheet. Use EMC wire clamp or EMC shield clamp for
fixing.

# Connection for the PE conductor on the motor side with M5 ring

cable lug

SSP940X105

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

a
0 1 b
U


 V

 W M5



 PE

 BD1/T1

BD2/T2
3 2 e
c d
SSP94MOTL1

Fig. 3−22 Stripping lengths of the motor cable

Dimensions [mm]
Type a b c d e
Device size 1 80 8 25 150 8
Device size 2 90 8 30 160 8
Device size 3 100 10 30 170 8

118  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

How to proceed:
1. Strip the motor cable  according to dimensions given.
2. Fold back the shield of the motor cable  over the cable sheath.
3. Stabilise the shield with self−adhesive conductive foil  (recommendation).
4. Fix the shield and conductive foil with heat−shrinkable tube  on the cable sheath.
5. Fasten cable lugs or wire end ferrules.
6. Connect the shields separately to the shield sheet using shield clamps (no strain
relief).

E94AZJS−013

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  119

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping
units) or thermostat (NC contact).

SSP940X106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Flexible
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
With wire end ferrule

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHX0051: 24 V DC, max. 2.5 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP940X107 Observe correct polarity!

120  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Flexible
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
With wire end ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

 Stop!
The motor brake control includes an electronic switch which can control a 24 V
motor holding brake.
The motor brake control may only be connected with motor holding brakes
which correspond to the permissible data mentioned in the technical data. (If
required, the holding brake without motor brake control must be controlled
via a digital output and a coupling relay).
If the permissible data mentioned in the technical data are not complied with:
ƒ the motor brake control can be destroyed.
ƒ a safe operation of the motor holding brake cannot be guaranteed.
Further notes in the documentation of the standard device must be observed!

 Stop!
Requirements concerning the brake cable (connection BD1/BD2):
ƒ The brake cables must be shielded if they are incorporated in the motor
cable.
– Operation with unshielded brake cables can destroy the motor brake
control.
– We recommend the use of Lenze system cables (motor cable with
separately shielded additional cores).
ƒ When using a permanent magnet holding brake, ensure the correct polarity
of the brake cable.
– If the terminals are reversed, the brake does not release. Since the motor
runs against the closed brake, the brake can be destroyed.
ƒ Connect the shield on both sides of PE.
Requirements concerning the supply voltage UDC (connection +/−):
ƒ The motor brake control must always be supplied with a separate 24 V
supply.
– A common supply of the motor brake control and the control card of the
controller is not permissible since otherwise the double insulation
between both components would be reduced.
ƒ Set UDC so that the operating voltage of the brake is within the admissible
range and the maximum supply voltage of the motor brake control will not
be exceeded.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  121

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)

Installation of the standard device

After the wiring of the installation backplane has been fully completed, install the
standard device. Then continue with the wiring of the control terminals.
How to proceed:
1. Insert the device into the installation backplane without twisting it until resistance
is felt.
2. Press the device into the installation backplane until it audibly snaps into place. The
locking clip moves downwards and back into the locking position.
3. The end position is reached when the locking clip can be pressed against the device.
Now the device is locked.

SSP94GG102

Fig. 3−23 Installation of the device

Proceed as follows to remove the device:

1. Disconnect already wired connectors at the device.
2. Push the locking clip downwards to release the device and disengage it from the
contacts.
3. Pull the device completely out of the installation backplane and remove it. The
locking clip moves back into the locking position.

122  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

3.7.5 Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

Example circuit

SSP94PSP67

Fig. 3−24 Basic circuit diagram of the drive system

E94xSxExxxx Servo axis module 9400 Single
F1 ... F4 Fuses
Z1 Toroidal core, effective in the high−frequency range 30 ... 60 MHz
" HF−shield termination through large−surface connection to functional earth
EYF... System cable − resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
K1 Mains contactor
R Resolver
RB Brake resistor
Y Motor holding brake (an optimum motor brake control)
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source for the motor holding brake
 24−V voltage source for digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 24−V voltage source for the control electronics

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  123

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

124  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

Mains
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
(left part)
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3

SSP94X6100 PE Connection for the PE conductor on the supply side

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule
Device size 7:
Hexagon
Flexible 95 000 14 124
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

DC bus
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
(right part)
+UG Alternative option for DC−bus voltage connection (compatible to
−UG 9300 series).

SSP94X6100

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule
Device size 7:
Hexagon
Flexible 95 000 14 124
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  125

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

External brake resistor

Terminal X105 Labelling Description
(left part)
Rb1 External brake resistor
Rb2

SSP94X6105 # Connection for the PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule
Device size 7:
Hexagon
Flexible 95 000 14 124
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
(right part)
U Motor phases
V
W

SSP94X6105 PE Connection for the motor−side PE conductor

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule
Device size 7:
Hexagon
Flexible 95 000 14 124
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

126  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 32 ... 104 A (15 ... 55 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping units)
or thermostat (NC contact).
SSP94X6106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  127

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

3.7.6 Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Example circuit
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F4 F1...F3

O
RFR
RB
ƒ „ 
+ - + -
K1 I
+

JR B
L1 L2 L3 -UG +UG Rb2
Rb1
+
K1 X100 X104
RFR GI SB 24E GE A1+ A1-

X5 X2 X3

E94xSxExxxx

X106 X105 X107 X7

T1 T2 U V W + BD1 BD2 + -

‚ EYF...

Y
M
7 2
+ 3~ R
J
SSP94PSP89

Fig. 3−25 Basic circuit diagram of the drive system

E94xSxExxxx 9400 Single Drive servo axis module
F1 ... F4 Fusing
" HF−shield termination through large−surface connection to PE
EYF... System cable for resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
K1 Mains contactor
R Resolvers
RB Brake resistor
Y Motor holding brake
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source of the brake
 24 V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 24 V voltage source for the control electronics

128  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  129

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Arrangement of the connections

SSP94KL08S

Fig. 3−26 Arrangement of the power connections

130  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Mains
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
B L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3.
L2 : Terminal (scope of supply); conductor connection with wire end
A
L3 ferrule
: Threaded bolt M10 (at the device)
: Ring cable lug for M10 (not included in the scope of supply)
D : Sleeve (scope of supply)

C C Wiring:
C Standard: With terminal  and wire end ferrule
Variant: With ring cable lug  for threaded bolt M10 
(remove terminal  first). In case of a double assignment, use the
sleeve  from the scope of supply.
SSP94KLB

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Terminal 
Device size 81 150 300 mcm 42 375 Inbus 8
Device size 82 240 500 mcm 56 500 Inbus 10
Threaded bolt  − − 25 221 SW17

Labelling Description
PE Connection for the PE conductor on the supply side

SSP94KL0X8

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Terminal PE 70 2/0 10 88 SW13

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  131

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

DC bus and external brake resistor

Terminal X104 Labelling Description
−UG Connection for DC−bus voltage and external brake resistor
A +UG/Rb1 : Terminal (scope of supply); conductor connection with wire end
Rb2 ferrule
: M8 threaded bolt (GG81)/M10 (GG82)
: Ring cable lug (not in the scope of supply)
B
: Sleeve (scope of supply)
D
M8 M10
Wiring:
Standard: With terminal and wire end ferrule
C C Variant 1: Single assignment(First, removal terminal )
GG81: With M8 ring cable lug and sleeve 
D GG82: With M10 ring cable lug (Sleeve not necessary)
Variant 2: Double assignment(First, remove terminal )
With two M10 ring cable lugs and sleeve 
C
C

SSP94KLB

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Terminal  120 250 mcm 42 375 Inbus 8
Threaded bolt  − − 42 375 SW13

132  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
U Connection of the motor phases U, V, W
B
V : Terminal (scope of supply); conductor connection with wire end
A W ferrule
: Threaded bolt M10 (at the device)
: Ring cable lug for M10 (not included in the scope of supply)
: Sleeve (scope of supply)
D
Wiring:
C C Standard: With terminal  and wire end ferrule
C Variant: With ring cable lug  for threaded bolt M10 
(remove terminal  first). In case of a double assignment, use the
sleeve  from the scope of supply.

SSP94KLB

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Terminal 
Device size 81 150 300 mcm 42 375 Inbus 8
Device size 82 240 500 mcm 56 500 Inbus 10
Threaded bolt  − − 25 221 SW17

Labelling Description
# Connection for the PE conductor on the motor side with wire end
ferrule

SSP94KL0X8

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Terminal PE 70 2/0 10 88 SW13

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  133

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping units)
or thermostat (NC contact).

T1 T2
SSP94KL0X8
" Shield connection

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

134  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 145 ... 245 A (75 ... 130 kW)

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  135

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

3.7.7 Device 292 A (150 kW)

Arrangement of the connections

SSP94KL191

Fig. 3−27 Arrangement of the power connections

136  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

Mains
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of phases L1, L2, L3 with ring cable lug for M10 ().
L2
L3

L1 L2 L3

A A A

SSP94KL191

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
L1, L2, L3, flexible 240 500 mcm 47 416 SW17

Labelling Description
# Connection for protective conductor (PE) with ring cable lug for M8
().

SSP94KL191

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
# − − 8 71 −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  137

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

DC bus and external brake resistor

Terminal X104 Labelling Description
−UG Connection for DC−bus voltage and external brake resistor with ring
+UG/Rb1 cable lug for M8 ().
Rb2

-UG +UG/Rb1 Rb2

A A A

SSP94KL191

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible 185 350 mcm 24 212 SW13

138  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
U Connection of phases U, V, W with ring cable lug for M10 ().
V
W

U V W

A A A

SSP94KL191

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
U, V, W, flexible 240 500 mcm 47 416 SW17

Labelling Description
# Connection for protective conductor (PE) with ring cable lug for M8
().

SSP94KL191

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
# − − 8 71 −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  139

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping units)
or thermostat (NC contact).

T1 T2
SSP94KL0X8
" Shield connection

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
The motor holding brake cannot be released without mains or DC−bus voltage.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

140  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Device 292 A (150 kW)

The motor brake control modules differ in the following features:

ƒ Rated voltage
ƒ Device size assignment
ƒ Mounting type
The table shows the module/controller assignments according to the features listed.
Single−axis controllers Rated voltage of motor holding brake (control module)
Type 24 V 205 V 180 V
E94AZHY0101 E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
E94xSxE1454 GG81      
... ...
E94xSxE4604 GG91 E94AZHB0101 E94AZHY0025 E94AZHY0026
     
Tab. 3−6 Motor holding brake/control module assignment
GGx Device size
 integrated in the installation backplane, already used or retrofittable
 integrated in the device, already applied or retrofittable
(recommended variant for the same rated voltage)
 integrated control module (automatic brake operation can be activated)
 external control (via digital output/digital input)
 external mounting (DIN rail or mounting plate)

Mounting of motor brake control module

B 1. Insert motor brake control module with both clips 
into the openings of the basic device and press
downwards until the two detents  engage audibly.
k

2. Check that the motor brake control module is

clic

securely connected.

E94AZH123

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  141

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

3.7.8 Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Example circuit
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F4 F1...F3

O
RFR
RB
ƒ „ 
+ - + -
K1 I
+

JR B
L1 L2 L3 -UG +UG Rb2
Rb1
-UG +UG Rb2
Rb1
+
K1 X100
X104.1 X104.2 RFR GI SB 24E GE A1+ A1-

X5 X2 X3

E94xSxExxxx

X106 X105 X107 X7

T1 T2 U V W + BD1 BD2 + -

‚ EYF...

Y
M
7 2
+ 3~ R
J
SSP94PSP91

Fig. 3−28 Basic circuit diagram of the drive system

E94xSxExxxx 9400 Single Drive servo axis module
F1 ... F4 Fusing
" HF−shield termination through large−surface connection to PE
EYF... System cable for resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
K1 Mains contactor
R Resolvers
RB Brake resistor
Y Motor holding brake
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source of the brake
 24 V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 24 V voltage source for the control electronics

 Note!
If you use the DC bus differently, please consult Lenze.

142  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  143

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Arrangement of the connections

X104.1

X104.2

X107

X106

X100 X105

SSP94KL191

Fig. 3−29 Arrangement of the power connections

144  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Mains
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the phases L1, L2, L3 with ring cable lug for M16 ().
L2
L3
# Connection for the PE conductor on the supply side with ring cable
lug for M10 ().

L1 L2 L3

A A A

SSP94KL0X9

 Note!
For mounting the cables, you need an extra large spanner socket.

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
U, V, W, flexible 300 600 mcm 35 315 SW24
# 150 300 mcm 20 180 SW17

DC bus and external brake resistor

Terminal X104.1/X104.2 Labelling Description
+UG/Rb1 Connection of DC−bus voltage and external brake resistor with ring
−UG cable lug M10 ().
Rb2 In case of double assignment, use sleeve from the scope of supply.

A A
A

SSP94KL8x

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Inbus 10 or
flexible 2 x 240 2 x 500 mcm 56 500
SW17

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  145

3 Single−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
U Connection of the phases U, V, W with ring cable lug for M16 ().
V
W
# Connection for the PE conductor on the motor side with ring cable
lug for M10 ().

U V W

A A A

SSP94KL0X9

 Note!
For mounting the cables, you need an extra large spanner socket.

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
U, V, W, flexible 300 600 mcm 35 315 SW24
# 150 300 mcm 20 180 SW17

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping units)
or thermostat (NC contact).

T1 T2
SSP94KL0X8
" Shield connection

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

146  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Wiring
Devices in the range 366 ... 460 A (190 ... 240 kW)

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  147

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

3.8 Control terminals

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Note!
Installation inside the control cabinet
ƒ Always install cables close to the mounting plate (reference potential), as
freely suspended cables act like antennas.
ƒ Use separated cable ducts for motor cables and control cables. Do not mix
up different cable types in one cable duct.
ƒ Before leaving the control cabinet, connect the shield of the fieldbus cable
to the mounting plate in accordance with EMC requirements.

 Tip!
Parameter setting and configuration can be carried out using the
L−force »Engineer«. For this purpose the Online Help and the Software Manual
for the standard device will guide you.

148  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Analog signals (inputs and outputs)
ƒ System bus CAN
ƒ Resolver
ƒ Encoder
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ 24 V supply
ƒ Digital signals (inputs and outputs)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  149

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

System bus CAN on board

The drive controller has an integrated CANopen system bus interface for the exchange of
process data and parameter values between different nodes and for the connection of
additional modules such as distributed terminals, operator and input devices ("HMIs") as
well as external control units. The software manual contains additional information in this
regard.
Overview of general data and conditions of use
Field Values
Communication profile CANopen (DS301, V4.02)
Communication medium CAN cable in accordance with ISO 11898−2
Network topology Line closed at both ends (e.g. closed with Lenze system connector
EWZ0046)
Node addresses that can be set 1 ... 127 (can be set by means of DIP switch or code)
Max. number of nodes 127
Transfer rates [kBit/s] 10 ... 1000 (can be set by means of DIP switch or code)
Conformity, approvals  CE
 UL
 EAC

The transfer rate limits the overall cable length.

Transfer rate [kBit] Maximum bus length [m]
10 8075
20 4012
50 1575
125 600
250 275
500 112
800 38
1000 12

The segment cable length is limited by the cable cross−section used and the number of
nodes. Repeaters divide the overall cable length into segments. Without repeaters, the
segment cable length is the same as the overall cable length.
Max. number of Segment length [m] in relation to cable cross−section (Interpolation is permissible)
nodes per segment
0.25 mm2 (AWG 24) 0.50 mm2 (AWG 21) 0.75 mm2 (AWG 19) 1.00 mm2 (AWG 18)
2 240 430 650 940
5 230 420 640 920
10 230 410 620 900
20 210 390 580 850
32 200 360 550 800
63 170 310 470 690
100 150 270 410 600

150  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

Terminal X1 Labelling Description

Pin 2 CAN−LOW
Pin 3 CAN−GND
Pin 7 CAN−HIGH
9400SSP000X1
(Housing) CAN−Shield

24 V supply
The supply voltage for the control electronics should be fed by a mains−independent 24 V
source. Thus, the control functions remain active even after power is removed.
As an option, the controller can generate the supply voltage for the control electronics
from the DC−bus voltage. Then, the control functions will not be active when power is
removed.

~ +
-
24 V =
F

X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
GE GE GE GE GE GE

24E 24E 24E 24E 24E 24E

SB SB SB SB SB SB

SB
1 2 ... n 1 2 ... n
max. max.
SSP94X2V24

Fig. 3−30 Wiring principle

g 24 V external supply (e.g. EZV...)
F Fuse
X2 Terminal for 24 V and state bus
GE/24E/SB Labelling on the terminal
SB State bus
1 ... n E94x... device number during loop−through connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  151

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X2 Labelling Description

GE GND external supply
24E 24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply
unit (SELV/PELV) (only required for mains−independent supply of the
control electronics)
9400SSP000X2
SB State bus in/out (reference GE)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Electrical data
24 V Rated voltage 24 V
According to IEC 61131−2
Voltage range 19.2 ... 28.8 V
Residual ripple max. ± 5 %
Current consumption Approx. 1.2 A during operation
Max. 3 A starting current for 100 ms
Fuse Circuit breaker with tripping
characteristic B or C,
Standard blade−type fuses
Looping through Max. 12 devices with 2.5 mm2
Fusing: 16/15 A
Max. 8 devices with 1.5 mm2
Fusing: 10/10 A
Connectable cross−cuttings See terminal data

152  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

State bus
The state bus is a bus system exclusively designed for Lenze controllers via which up to 20
controllers can be connected and which serves to simulate a "release cord" function. The
state is controlled via the system module SFBDigitalOutput.
ƒ The state bus knows the states "OK" and "fault".
ƒ The state bus is multi−master−compliant, i.e. each node connected to the state bus
can set the state bus to "fault" by changing to LOW level.
ƒ In the "fault" status, all nodes activate their programmed response, e.g.
synchronised braking of the drive system.

 Stop!
Do not connect an external voltage to the state bus, otherwise the function
will be disturbed.

Electrical data
State bus Rated voltage 24 V
According to IEC 61131−2
Switching level According to IEC 61131−2
LOW 0 V ... +5 V
HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Looping through Max. 20 devices
DC−bus operation with
9300 devices is possible.
Connectable cross−cuttings See terminal data

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  153

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Analog inputs, analog outputs

The controller features two analog inputs which are able to detect differential voltage
signals in the range ±10 V, e.g. an analog speed setpoint selection or the voltage signal of
an external sensor (temperature, pressure, etc.).
ƒ The analog signal 1 can also detect a current setpoint.
The controller features two analog outputs, which can output internal analog signals as
voltage signals, e.g. for the control of analog indicating instruments or as a setpoint for
slave drives.
Electrical data
Analog input 1 Level: −10 ... +10 V
Analog input 2 Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Scaling: ±10 V  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
Analog input 1 as current input Level: −20 ... +20 mA
(A1R and A1− bridged) Resolution: 10 bits + sign
Scaling: For C00034 = "1"
−20 ... −4 mA −230 ... 0
+4 ... +20 mA 0 ... +230
For C00034 = "2"
±20 mA  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
Open−circuit monitoring: Configurable
Analog output 1 Level: −10 ... +10 V
Analog output 2 (max. 2 mA)
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Scaling: ±10 V  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz

154  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

0 1 2 3 4
X3 X3 X3
U
Out GA GA GA
+ - +
GND AO1 AO1 AO1 =
PES AO2 AO2 PES AO2

A1+ A1+ A1+

A1- PES A1- A1-

PES A1- PES A1- PES A1- PES

A1R A1R A1R

PES A2+ A2+ A2+
PE A2- A2- A2-
SSP94X3AIO

Fig. 3−31 Wiring principle

 Wiring of an external analog signal
 Wiring with a slave drive
 Wiring with a measuring device
 Potentiometer supplied by analog output 1
 Potentiometer with external supply
Out Analog output signal, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential
X3 Terminal for the analog inputs and outputs
PES EMC shield connection
PE Protective earth
U Measuring device

E94x... X3 , C00034
GA

AO1

AO2
... 20 mA
A1+

A1-
"
250

A1-

A1R

A2+ "
A2-
PE

SSP94X3AAI

Fig. 3−32 Wiring principle of current input

Wiring of a current signal
X3 Terminal for the analog inputs and outputs
 Read information on the input configuration (software manual)
" Functional earth
PE Protective earth

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  155

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X3 Labelling Description

GA GND analog signals
AO1 Analog output 1
AO2 Analog output 2
A1+ Analog input 1 +
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1R Terminating resistor for ±20mA
A2+ Analog input 2 +
A2− Analog input 2 −
SSP94000X3 " Shield connection: Fix the shield with EMC wire clamp.

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

 Note!
If the control terminals are completely wired, we recommend to use a cable
cross−section of max. 0.75 mm2 to save space. The mechanical cover can then
be attached.

156  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

Digital outputs
The controller features four freely configurable digital outputs.
Electrical data
24O 24 V external voltage source, optional according to IEC 61131−2
GO SELV/PELV
Current consumption Max. 300 mA
DO1 Switching level according to IEC 61131−2
... LOW 0 V ... +5 V
DO4
GO HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Output current Max. 50 mA
Load > 480  at 24 V

 Note!
For stable digital output states, in particular during the starting phase of the
controller, you must use an external 24V supply for the digital outputs.

 Note!
Digital inputs and digital outputs have separated reference potentials (GI and
GO). If you interconnect inputs and outputs, the reference potentials are
connected as well by an external bridge.

~ +
-
24 V =
F

0 1
X4 X4
GO GND GO

24O In 24O

DO1 DO1

DO2 DO2

DO3 DO3

DO4 DO4

SSP94X4DO1

Fig. 3−33 Wiring principle

 Wiring with a digital input, e.g. a PLC
 Digital control (relay, valve, ...) with an external 24−V supply
X4 Terminal for the digital outputs
In Digital input, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential
F Fuse

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  157

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X4 Labelling Description

GO GND digital out
24O 24−V digital out
DO1 Digital output 1
DO2 Digital output 2
DO3 Digital output 3
9400SSP000X4
DO4 Digital output 4

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

158  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

Digital inputs
The controller is provided with freely configurable digital inputs which can be used for
touch probe measurement (edge−controlled event).
The control input RFR for controller enable is firmly connected with the device control. It
must be wired to enable the controller with a HIGH signal.
Electrical data
24O Rated voltage 24 V
(external voltage source, According to IEC 61131−2
optional) Current consumption Max. 50 mA
RFR Switching level According to IEC 61131−2
DI1 LOW 0 V ... +5 V
...
DI8 HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Input current Max. 8 mA

 Note!
Digital inputs and digital outputs have separated reference potentials (GI and
GO). If you interconnect inputs and outputs, the reference potentials are
connected as well by an external bridge.

X4
GO

24O

0 1 DO1

X5 X5 DO2

GND GI GI DO3

Out RFR RFR DO4

DI1 DI1

DI2 DI2

DI... DI...

DI8 DI8

SSP94X5DI1

Fig. 3−34 Wiring principle

 Wiring of an external digital signal, e.g. a PLC
 Wiring with a slave drive
X4 Terminal for the digital outputs
X5 Terminal for the digital inputs
Out digital output signal, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  159

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X5 Labelling Description

GI GND digital in
RFR Controller enable
DI1 Digital input 1
DI2 Digital input 2
DI3 Digital input 3
DI4 Digital input 4
DI5 Digital input 5
DI6 Digital input 6
DI7 Digital input 7
9400SSP000X5
DI8 Digital input 8

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Diagnostics/keypad
The following can be connected to this interface:
ƒ USB diagnostic adapter E94AZCUS
or
ƒ Keypad E94AZKAE.
The diagnostic adapter and a computer with the Lenze software »Engineer« serve to carry
out comprehensive settings, e.g. for initial commissioning.
The keypad enables experienced users to check or change individual settings.
Terminal X6 Labelling Description
Internal interface, RJ69 socket, for keypad or diagnostic adapter

9400SSP000X6

160  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

Resolver
Resolvers are connected to X7 (9−pole Sub−D socket).
The use of third−party resolvers is permissible. For this purpose the number of pole pairs of
the resolver in C00080 must be adapted to the resolver used. When the stator coils are
excited with 4 kHz, the apparent impedance of the connected resolver must not fall below
65 Ohm. When lower impedances are connected, the overload protection integrated in the
resolver output limits the output current and can falsify the resolver evaluation.
Resolvers are operated in reverse mode:
ƒ Supply to the sine and cosine track,
ƒ Both signals are controlled in a way that the current flow on the reference track is
reduced to zero.
Electrical data
General Cable length (system cable recommended) max. 150 m (100 m 1))
VCC, −KTY (GND) Supply voltage 5V
Maximum output current 110 mA
+REF, −REF Input frequency Max. 250 kHz
+COS, −COS Excitation voltage 10 VSS
+SIN, −SIN Carrier frequency 4 kHz, fix
+KTY, −KTY Type KTY 83−110
1) If safety functions with SM301 are used which require safe speed and position detection.

X7

+REF
1
-REF
2
VCC
3
+COS
4
-COS
5
+SIN
6
-SIN
7
+KTY
8
KTY ETS -KTY
9

SSP94RESX7

Fig. 3−35 Wiring principle

Terminal X7 Labelling Description

1 +REF
2 −REF
3 VCC
4 +COS
5 −COS
6 +SIN
7 −SIN
8 +KTY
9400SSP000X7
9 −KTY

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  161

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Encoder
Encoders are connected to X8 (15−pole Sub−D socket).
ƒ Absolute and incremental encoders are supported:
– TTL encoder 5 V (incremental)
– Sin/cos encoder 1 Vss (incremental)
– Sin/cos absolute value encoder 1 Vss with Hiperface protocol
– Sin/cos absolute value encoder 1 Vss with EnDat protocol (2.1)
– SSI load encoder with Stegmann protocol (as of 9400 with firmware 05.00)
ƒ Improved determination of low speeds with TTL encoders through additional time
measuring method.
ƒ SinCos absolute value encoders are serially read during initialisation (power−on).
After this, the sin/cos signals are evaluated.
ƒ Open−circuit monitoring:
– for sin/cos encoders by comparing the sin/cos signals with the sine shape (radius
monitoring)
– for TTL encoders by means of mean value and amplitude monitoring
– not with SSI encoders
ƒ The following encoders are not supported:
– HTL encoders
Electrical data
General Cable length (system cable recommended) max. 150 m (100 m 1))
Encoder types TTL
1 VSS
Protocols Hiperface
EnDat 2.1
SSI−Stegmann
Number of increments 1 ... 16384
Input frequency max. 500 kHz
VCC Supply voltage 5 V ... 12 V
(GND) Max. load capacity, 5 ... 9 V 330 mA
9 ... 12 V 3 W
at 12 V 250 mA
+Sense, −Sense Measuring lead for readjusting VCC
+KTY, −KTY Type KTY 83−110
1) If safety functions with SM301 are used which require safe speed and position detection.

162  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Control terminals

X8

1

9 SIN
2 RefSIN = 2.5 V
0.5V
10
3 COS

11 RefCOS
0.5 V
= 2.5 V

4
12
5
‚
13 A
6 A

14 B
B
7
KTY ETS
Z
15
Z
8

SSP94ENCX8

Fig. 3−36 Wiring principle

 Signals of a sin/cos encoder
 Signals with CW rotation

Terminal X8 Pin Description

Cable EYF001... EYF002...
TTL 1 VSS 1 VSS 1 VSS SSI
Hiperface EnDat 2.1
1 A Cos Cos Cos n. c.

2 GND GND GND GND GND

3 B Sin Sin SIN n. c.

4 VCC VCC VCC VCC US

5 Z Z +RS485 Data (Z) Data +
6 n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c.

7 −KTY −KTY −KTY −KTY −KTY

8 n. c. n. c. n. c. Clock Clock +
9 /A Ref Cos Ref Cos Ref Cos n. c.

10 n. c. n. c. n. c. −Sense n. c.

11 /B Ref SIN Ref SIN Ref SIN n. c.

12 n. c. n. c. n. c. +Sense n. c.

13 /Z /Z −RS485 /Data (/Z) Data −

14 +KTY +KTY +KTY +KTY +KTY
9400SSP000X8 n. c. n. c. n. c.
15 /Clock Clock −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  163

3 Single−axis controllers
Control terminals

Setting the supply voltage

The supply voltage of the encoder must be adapted to the cable length.
The voltage is adapted by means of the parameter "Encoder voltage", C00421.
Encoder Ur Voltage setting [V] in C00421 for cable length [m]
Product key [V] 0 − 10 10 − 30 30 − 50 50 − 70 70 − 90 90 − 100 100 −150
TTL
IG2048−5V−T
IG4096−5V−T 5 ±5% 5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3
IK2048−5V−T
Sin−cos
IG1024−5V−V
5 ±5% 5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3
IG2048−5V−S
Sin−cos (Hiperface)
8
AM1024−8V−H 8.0
(7 ... 12)
Sin−cos (Endat)
AM32−5V−E
AS2048−5V−E 5 ±5% 5.0
AM2048−5V−E
Tab. 3−7
Ur Rated encoder voltage

The values listed in Tab. 3−7 are valid for the use of Lenze system cables at typical ambient
temperatures.
Other cables, other cable cross−sections or extreme ambient temperatures can require
metrologically determined adaptations.
For a higher encoder supply power, e.g. for laser−based length measuring systems, an
external encoder supply must be provided.

164  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Single−axis controllers 3
Device modules

3.9 Device modules

Depending on the device version or the application, the device is equipped with device
modules. A nameplate attached to the side of the device serves to identify the already
equipped device modules .
The possible modules are briefly described in the Accessories chapter. Detailed
information can be found in the respective documentation.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  165

3 Single−axis controllers
Preparing the commissioning procedure

3.10 Preparing the commissioning procedure

You need the following for commissioning:

ƒ Keypad EZAEBK0001
or
ƒ Computer with Windows® operating system (XP or 2000)
ƒ Lenze PC software »Engineer«
ƒ Connection with the controller via an interface, e.g.
– Diagnostic interface X6 with USB diagnostic adapter
– System bus (CANopen)
– Communication module
ƒ Software manual for the technology application used
ƒ The communication manual for the network of the automation platform
ƒ Mains voltage or 24−V voltage supply for the control electronics of the controller
Follow the instructions of the software and/or read the documentation.

166  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Device features

4 Multi−axis controllers

4.1 Device features

ƒ Three options of direct supply of the DC−bus voltage:

– Power supply module or "Single Drive" axis module via the integrated DC−link
busbar (DC−bus)
– DC input point via the integrated DC−link busbar (DC−bus)
– Via terminals +UG and −UG
ƒ Space−saving installation by compact design
ƒ Innovative installation concept
ƒ Power range: 370 W to 30 kW
ƒ Pluggable and same connection system for the control cables in the entire power
range
ƒ Integrated DC busbar and DC fuse
ƒ Direct connection of resolver and/or encoder feedback
– Easy connection via predesigned system cables (accessories)
ƒ Integrated phase controller for drift−free standstill
ƒ Field−oriented control for asynchronous and synchronous motors
ƒ Digital synchronisation system via bus system or
digital frequency (extension module required)
ƒ User configuration for control functions and input/output signals
– Comprehensive library with function blocks
– High flexibility with regard to the adaptation of the internal control structure to
the drive task
ƒ Extension interfaces for
– communication
– Controller functionality
– Safety system
ƒ System bus (CANopen)
– servo inverter connection
– for extending input and output terminals
– connecting keypad and display units (HMI)
ƒ Emergency operation with reduced mains voltage possible
– Control of motor holding brake possible

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  167

4 Multi−axis controllers
Overview of the devices

4.2 Overview of the devices

 Note!
For reasons of clarity, device types in this manual are placed together in groups
with shared device characteristics. For example:
ƒ "Devices in the range 2 ... 24 A (0.37 ... 11 kW)" (often from project planner’s
viewpoint) or
ƒ "Device sizes 1, 2 and 3" (often from installation point of view)

The following table gives you an overview of the different device characteristics:
Type Rated current (rounded) Motor power (typ.) Device size (DS)
E94xMxE0024 2A 0.37 kW
E94xMxE0034 3A 0.75 kW 1
E94xMxE0044 4A 1.5 kW
E94xMxE0074 7A 3.0 kW
2
E94xMxE0094 9A 4.0 kW
E94xMxE0134 13 A 5.5 kW
E94xMxE0174 17 A 7.5 kW
3
E94xMxE0244 24 A 11 kW
E94xMxE0324 32 A 15 kW
E94xMxE0474 47 A 22 kW
6
E94xMxE0594 59 A 30 kW

168  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
General data and operating conditions

4.3 General data and operating conditions

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

Protection of persons and device protection

Type of protection EN 60529 IP 20
Outside the wire range of
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental the terminals on the
contact in accordance with type motor side
1
Insulation resistance EN 61800−5−1 Overvoltage category III
from 2000 m amsl: external measures for compliance with
the overvoltage category II are required, e.g.
 upstream connection of transformer
 upstream connection of overvoltage protection system
Control circuit isolation EN 61800−5−1 up to 2000 m amsl: Safe mains isolation by
double/reinforced insulation for mains with neutral earthing
with a rated voltage for the external conductor/star point up
to 300 V.
from 2000 m amsl: If an overvoltage protection system is
connected upstream to the device instead of an isolating
transformer, additional external measures are required for
maintaining the safe isolation.
Short−circuit strength EN 61800−5−1 Motor connection: with restrictions, error acknowledgement
required
Control terminals: full
Motor − protective  Short circuit
measures against  Earth fault
 Overvoltage
 motor stalling
 Motor overtemperature
(PTC or thermal contact, I2t monitoring)
Leakage current EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC, > 10 mA DC Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Cyclic mains switching Cyclic mains switching of 5 times in 5 minutes is permissible
without restrictions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  169

4 Multi−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

Design
Housing
Carrier housing Device sizes Glass−fiber reinforced plastic
1, 2 and 3
Carrier housing Device sizes Metal
as of 6
Dimensions see "Mechanical installation"
Weight see "Mechanical installation"

Mounting conditions
Mounting place in the control cabinet
Mounting position vertical
Clearance
above/beneath Comply with the device−relating mounting instructions.
at the side Can be installed in a row without any clearance

Supply conditions "Single Drive"

AC mains operation No direct connection, DC supply module or "Single Drive"
network required
DC−bus operation Direct connection via terminals or busbars
For more information, please see the chapter DC−bus
operation.
Power systems
TT
Operation allowed without restrictions.
TN
IT Additional device−internal measure required (see ("Earthing
of internal EMC filters",  207)
Motors EN 60034 Only use motors that are suitable for inverter operation.
Insulation strength: max. û  1.5 kV, max. du/dt  5 kV/s

Operating conditions
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

170  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
General data and operating conditions

General electrical data

Assignment Device size Accessories: busbar mounting set/spare fuse
Axis module Installation
backplane
E94xMxE0024
E94xMxE0034 E94AZPM0044 1 − / 16 A, 700 V DC, EFSAR0016ARHN
E94xMxE0044
E94xMxE0074
E94AZPM0094 2 − / 40 A, 700 V DC, EFSAR0040ARHN
E94xMxE0094
E94xMxE0134
E94xMxE0174 E94AZPM0244
E94xMxE0244 3 − / 100 A, 700 V DC, EFSAR0100ARZN
E94xMxE0324 E94AZPM0324

Requirements on the motor cable

Capacitance per unit length
 2.5 mm2/AWG 14 CCore/core/CCore/shield < 75/150 pF/m
 4 mm2/AWG 12 CCore/core/CCore/shield < 150/300 pF/m
Electric strength
VDE 0250−1 U0/U = 0.6/1.0 kV
(U0 = r.m.s. value external − conductor/PE,
U = r.m.s. value − external conductor/external conductor)
UL U  600 V
(U = r.m.s. value external conductor/external conductor)

Maximum motor and feedback cable lengths

(for shielded motor cable with rated mains voltage)

Type Device size [m]

E94xMxE0024
E94xMxE0034 1 50
E94xMxE0044
E94xMxE0074
2 100
E94xMxE0094
E94xMxE0134
E94xMxE0174
3 100
E94xMxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xMxE0474
6 100
E94xMxE0594
If EMC conditions must be met, the permissible cable lengths can be reduced.

Tab. 4−1

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  171

4 Multi−axis controllers
General data and operating conditions

EMC
Operation on public supply EN 61800−3 The controllers are designed for use in an industrial
systems environment. Operation on public networks requires
measures to be taken for limiting the expected emission of
radio interferences.
Noise emission, in cables
Design EN 61800−3 see Tab. 3−2 EMC protection requirements
"Single Drive"
Design Depending on the filter at the central DC supply module.
"Multi Drive"
Noise immunity (to EN 61800−3)
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000−4−2 8 kV with air discharge,
(ESD) 4 kV with contact discharge against housing
Radio frequency
Cable−guided EN 61000−4−6 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10 V 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Interference (housing) EN 61000−4−3 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1 kHz)
Burst
Power terminals and EN 61000−4−4 2 kV/5 kHz
interfaces
Signal interfaces EN 61000−4−4 1 kV/5 kHz
Control connections EN 61000−4−4 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge (surge voltage)
Power terminals EN 61000−4−5 1.2/50 s,
1 kV phase/phase, 2 kV phase/PE

Protective insulation

 Danger!
Dangerous electrical voltage
When one common voltage source is used for control voltages in separate
potential areas, the protective insulation between the separate potential areas
is deactivated.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The specified protective insulations are not complied with.
Protective measures:
ƒ Use independent voltage sources.

The available protective insulation within the controller of the "9400 Servo Drives" series
in accordance with EN61800−5−1 is implemented with a rated voltage for the external
conductor/star point of up to 300 V for mains with neutral earthing.
The following graphic representation
ƒ shows the arrangement of the terminal strips and the separate potential areas of
the controller.
ƒ serves to determine the relevant protective insulation between two terminals in
differently insulated separate potential areas.

172  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
General data and operating conditions

X1 X2
X100
MXI1
X3 Bus Protective insulation acc. to
EN61800−5−1
(Definition of terms: see glossary)
Ext. DC
X4
MXI2 Functional insulation
X5
Basic insulation

X6 MMI Reinforced insulation

X7 MSI
X107 I/O

X106 X8 Ext. DC
X105
X104
X105
E94YCXX007

Terminal strip Connection Terminal strip Connection

Device size 1 ... 6
X100 +UG, −UG X1 CAN on board 9400
X2  State bus
X104 not available
 24 V (ext.)
X105 U, V, W
X3 Analog input/output
X106 Motor PTC X4 Digital outputs
X107 Control of motor holding X5 Digital inputs
brake X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolvers
X8 Encoder
MXI1, MXI2 Extension module
MMI Memory module
MSI Safety module

Example
Which type of protective insulation is used between the bus terminal of the device module
in slot MXI1 or MXI2 and the mains terminal X100?
The separate potential area with the better protective insulation is decisive.
ƒ The separate potential area of the device module bus terminal is "functionally
insulated".
ƒ The separate potential area of the mains terminal has a "reinforced insulation".
Result: The insulation between the mains terminal X100 and the bus terminal is of the
"reinforced insulation" type.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  173

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Overview

4.4 Rated data

The E94xMxExxx4 devices can be used in the voltage range of 260 ... 746 V DC.

 Note!
To ensure a faultless operation of the devices the code C00173 must be set
according to the mains voltage connected.

Emergency operation

Operation of the E94xMxxxx4 devices with an emergency voltage supply at +UG, −UG, is
possible with VDC  260 V. The settings in C00173 and C00174 are to be adapted
accordingly. A 24−V supply at X2 is required.

4.4.1 Overview

Input data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94xMxE0024 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 2.6/2.6/2.3 2.0/2.0/1.7 −
E94xMxE0034 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 4.3/4.3/3.8 3.2/3.2/2.9 −
E94xMxE0044 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 6.7/6.7/5.9 5.0/5.0/4.4 −
E94xMxE0074 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 12.1/12.1/10.6 9.1/9.1/8.0 −
E94xMxE0094 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 15.4/15.4/13.5 11.6/11.6/10.1 −
E94xMxE0134 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 20.6/20.6/18.0 15.5/15.5/13.5 −
E94xMxE0174 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 25.7/25.7/22.5 19.3/19.3/16.9 −
E94xMxE0244 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 35.5/35.5/31.1 26.3/26.3/23.3 −
E94xMxE0324 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 48.0/48.0/38.9 36.0/36.0/29.1 −
E94xMxE0474 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 71.0/71.0/62.0 53.3/53.3/46.5 −
E94xMxE0594 325/565/675 0 ( DC) 89.0/89.0/77.0 66.8/66.8/57.8 −
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Output data
Voltage Current [A] Number of
phases
Type [V] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94xMxE0024 0 − 230/400/480 1.5/1.5/1.3 1.1/1.1/1.0 3
E94xMxE0034 0 − 230/400/480 2.5/2.5/2.2 1.9/1.9/1.7 3
E94xMxE0044 0 − 230/400/480 4/4/3.5 3/3/2.6 3
E94xMxE0074 0 − 230/400/480 7/7/6.1 5.3/5.3/4.6 3
E94xMxE0094 0 − 230/400/480 9.3/9.3/8.2 7.0/7.0/6.2 3
E94xMxE0134 0 − 230/400/480 13/13/11.4 9.8/9.8/8.6 3
E94xMxE0174 0 − 230/400/480 16.5/16.5/14.4 12.4/12.4/10.8 3
E94xMxE0244 0 − 230/400/480 23.5/23.5/20.6 17.6/17.6/15.5 3
E94xMxE0324 0 − 230/400/480 32.0/32.0/25.9 24.0/24.0/19.4 3
E94xMxE0474 0 − 230/400/480 47.0/47.0/42.0 35.3/35.3/30.8 3
E94xMxE0594 0 − 230/400/480 59.0/59.0/52.0 44.3/44.3/38.7 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

174  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Overview

Power losses
Power loss PV [W] at a switching frequency of 4 kHz
Type ULr = 230 V ULr = 400 V ULN = 480 V when controller is inhibited
E94xMxE0024 65 80 95
E94xMxE0034 75 95 110
E94xMxE0044 90 120 135
E94xMxE0074 105 145 165
E94xMxE0094 130 170 200 40
E94xMxE0134 160 215 245
E94xMxE0174 185 255 290
E94xMxE0244 235 320 375
E94xMxE0324 290 405 470
E94xMxE0474 960 960 960
75
E94xMxE0594 980 980 980

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  175

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation in 230−V−AC system

4.4.2 Operation in 230−V−AC system

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 325 260 − 0 % ... 370 + 0 % −

Input current at IaN8 Output power Motor power

(typical)
(without external mains U, V, W 4−pole ASM
choke)
Type IDC [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xMxE0024 2.6 0.5 0.18 0.25
E94xMxE0034 4.3 0.9 0.37 0.5
E94xMxE0044 6.7 1.4 0.75 1
E94xMxE0074 12.1 2.5 1.5 2
E94xMxE0094 15.4 3.3 2.2 3
E94xMxE0134 20.6 4.7 3 4
E94xMxE0174 25.7 5.9 4 5.5
E94xMxE0244 35.5 8.4 5 7.5
E94xMxE0324 48.0 11.5 7.5 10.2
E94xMxE0474 71.0 16.9 11 15
E94xMxE0594 89.0 21.2 15 20

Output currents [A] at switching frequency

2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xMxE0024 1.9 6.0 1.9 6.0 1.5 4.8 1.1
E94xMxE0034 3.1 10.0 3.1 10.0 2.5 8.0 1.9
E94xMxE0044 5.0 16.0 5.0 16.0 4.0 12.8 3.0
E94xMxE0074 8.8 21.0 8.8 21.0 7.0 16.8 5.3
E94xMxE0094 11.7 28.0 11.7 28.0 9.3 22.4 7.0
E94xMxE0134 16.3 39.0 16.3 39.0 13.0 31.2 9.8
E94xMxE0174 20.6 49.5 20.6 49.5 16.5 39.6 12.4
E94xMxE0244 29.4 70.5 29.4 70.5 23.5 56.4 17.6
E94xMxE0324 40.0 76.8 40.0 76.8 32.0 76.8 16.0
E94xMxE0474 47.0 94.0 47.0 94.0 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xMxE0594 59.0 118 59.0 118 41.0 82.0 21.5

IaN2 Rated value of permanent output current at a frequency of  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  0 Hz
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency of  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
 Can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
bold Nominal value IaN
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.

176  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Operation in 400−V−AC system

4.4.3 Operation in 400−V−AC system

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 565 455 − 0 % ... 620 + 0 % −

Input current at IaN8 Output power Motor power

(typical)
(without external mains U, V, W 4−pole ASM
choke)
Type IDC [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xMxE0024 2.6 0.9 0.37 0.5
E94xMxE0034 4.3 1.6 0.75 1.0
E94xMxE0044 6.7 2.5 1.5 2.0
E94xMxE0074 12.1 4.4 3.0 4.0
E94xMxE0094 15.4 5.8 4.0 5.0
E94xMxE0134 20.6 8.1 5.5 7.5
E94xMxE0174 25.7 10.3 7.5 11.0
E94xMxE0244 35.5 14.7 11.0 15.0
E94xMxE0324 48.0 20.0 15.0 20.4
E94xMxE0474 71.0 29.3 22 29
E94xMxE0594 89.0 36.8 30 40

Output currents [A] at switching frequency

2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xMxE0024 1.9 6.0 1.9 6.0 1.5 4.8 1.1
E94xMxE0034 3.1 10.0 3.1 10.0 2.5 8.0 1.9
E94xMxE0044 5.0 16.0 5.0 16.0 4.0 12.8 3.0
E94xMxE0074 8.8 21.0 8.8 21.0 7.0 16.8 5.3
E94xMxE0094 11.7 28.0 11.7 28.0 9.3 22.4 7.0
E94xMxE0134 16.3 39.0 16.3 39.0 13.0 31.2 9.8
E94xMxE0174 20.6 49.5 20.6 49.5 16.5 39.6 12.4
E94xMxE0244 29.4 70.5 29.4 70.5 23.5 56.4 17.6
E94xMxE0324 40.0 76.8 40.0 76.8 32.0 76.8 16.0
E94xMxE0474 47.0 94.0 47.0 94.0 41.0 82.0 21.5
E94xMxE0594 59.0 118 59.0 118 41.0 82.0 21.5

IaN2 Rated value of permanent output current at a frequency of  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  0 Hz
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency of  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
 Can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
bold Nominal value IaN
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  177

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Operation in 480−V−AC system

4.4.4 Operation in 480−V−AC system

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 675 540 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % −

Input current at IaN8 Output power Motor power

(typical)
(without external mains U, V, W 4−pole ASM
choke)
Type IDC [A] SaN [kVA] PaN [kW] PaN [hp]
E94xMxE0024 2.3 1.0 0.37 0.5
E94xMxE0034 3.8 1.6 0.75 1.0
E94xMxE0044 5.9 2.6 1.5 2.0
E94xMxE0074 10.6 4.6 3.0 4.0
E94xMxE0094 13.5 8.5 4.0 5.0
E94xMxE0134 18.0 10.8 5.5 7.5
E94xMxE0174 22.5 15.4 7.5 10.0
E94xMxE0244 31.1 19.4 11.0 15.0
E94xMxE0324 38.9 31.4 15.0 20.4
E94xMxE0474 62.0 38.1 22 29
E94xMxE0594 77.0 38.9 30 40

Output currents [A] at switching frequency

2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 16 kHz
IaN2 IaM2 IaN4 IaM4 IaN8 IaM8 IaN16
E94xMxE0024 1.9 6.0 1.9 6.0 1.3 4.2 1.0
E94xMxE0034 3.1 10.0 3.1 10.0 2.2 7.0 1.7
E94xMxE0044 5.0 16.0 5.0 16.0 3.5 11.2 2.6
E94xMxE0074 8.8 21.0 8.8 21.0 6.1 14.7 4.6
E94xMxE0094 11.7 28.0 11.7 28.0 8.2 19.6 6.1
E94xMxE0134 16.3 39.0 16.3 39.0 11.4 27.3 8.6
E94xMxE0174 20.6 49.5 20.6 49.5 14.4 34.7 10.9
E94xMxE0244 29.4 70.5 29.4 70.5 20.6 49.4 15.4
E94xMxE0324 40.0 76.8 40.0 76.8 25.9 62.1 13.0
E94xMxE0474 47.0 94.0 41.1 82.2 35.8 71.6 21.5
E94xMxE0594 59.0 118 51.6 103 35.9 71.8 21.5

IaN2 Rated value of permanent output current at a frequency of  0 Hz

IaM2 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  0 Hz
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaM2 and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaN2
IaN4, IaN8, IaN16 Rated value of continuous output current at a frequency of  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaNx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
IaM4, IaM8 Maximum output current (overload current) at frequency  5 Hz
(reduce to 0.66 * IaMx for 0 ... 5 Hz)
 Periodic load change of 0.5 s with IaMx and recovery time of 4.5 s with
75% IaNx
 Can be achieved using the setting "x kHz fixed" in C00018
bold Nominal value IaN
4) Depending on the heatsink temperature, the mains voltage and the motor
cable length, the switching frequency can be changed even at smaller currents.

178  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

4.4.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 325 ... 675 260 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % 0
(alternatively)

When the integrated DC busbar is used, wiring is not required. The mounting backplane
already includes an integrated fuse.
When terminals +UG/−UG are used, dimension the cables and fuses as described in the
chapter DC−bus operation.

4.4.6 Overcurrent operation

The controllers are designed for two overcurrent modes.

A load period must be followed by a recovery time. During the recovery time the current
must not exceed the value given.
The values given refer to the rated output current IaN8.

IaN8 [%]

‚
100

0 t
t1 t2 t3 t4
9400SSP008

Fig. 4−1 Overcurrent capacity at 45° C

E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE1044 E94xSxE1454 ... E94xSxE4604

E94xMxE0024 ... E94xMxE0594
 5 s cycle   1−min cycle 
– t1 = 0.5 s load time with peak current  – t1 = 10 s load time with peak current 
– t2 = 4.5 s recovery time with limited current  – t2 = 50 s recovery time with limited current 
 3−min cycle   3−min cycle 
– t3 = 60 s load time with peak current  – t3 = 60 s load time with peak current 
– t4 = 120 s recovery time with limited current  – t4 = 120 s recovery time with limited current 

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  179

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

230 V
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 179)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.8 1.1 − −
E94xMxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 8.0 1.9 − −
E94xMxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 12.8 3.0 − −
E94xMxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 16.8 5.3 − −
E94xMxE0094 27.9 8.7 27.9 8.7 22.3 7.0 − −
E94xMxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 31.2 9.8 − −
E94xMxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 39.6 12.4 − −
E94xMxE0244 70.5 22.0 70.5 22.0 47.0 17.6 − −
E94xMxE0324 76.8 30.0 76.8 30.0 76.8 24.0 − −
E94xMxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 81.8 30.6 − −
E94xMxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 82.0 30.7 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 179)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.3 1.1 − −
E94xMxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.8 1.9 − −
E94xMxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 6.0 3.0 − −
E94xMxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 10.5 5.3 − −
E94xMxE0094 17.5 8.7 17.5 8.7 14.0 7.0 − −
E94xMxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 19.5 9.8 − −
E94xMxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 24.8 12.4 − −
E94xMxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 35.3 17.6 − −
E94xMxE0324 60.0 30.0 60.0 30.0 48.0 24.0 − −
E94xMxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 61.6 30.6 − −
E94xMxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 61.4 30.7 − −

180  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

400 V
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 179)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.8 1.1 − −
E94xMxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 8.0 1.9 − −
E94xMxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 12.8 3.0 − −
E94xMxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 16.8 5.3 − −
E94xMxE0094 27.9 8.7 27.9 8.7 22.3 7.0 − −
E94xMxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 31.2 9.8 − −
E94xMxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 39.6 12.4 − −
E94xMxE0244 70.5 22.0 70.5 22.0 47.0 17.6 − −
E94xMxE0324 76.8 30.0 76.8 30.0 76.8 24.0 − −
E94xMxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 81.8 30.6 − −
E94xMxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 82.0 30.7 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 179)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.3 1.1 − −
E94xMxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.8 1.9 − −
E94xMxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 6.0 3.0 − −
E94xMxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 10.5 5.3 − −
E94xMxE0094 17.5 8.7 17.5 8.7 14.0 7.0 − −
E94xMxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 19.5 9.8 − −
E94xMxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 24.8 12.4 − −
E94xMxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 35.3 17.6 − −
E94xMxE0324 60.0 30.0 60.0 30.0 48.0 24.0 − −
E94xMxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 61.6 30.6 − −
E94xMxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 61.4 30.7 − −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  181

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Overcurrent operation

480 V
Type I [A] in a cycle of 5 seconds  ( 179)
f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 6.0 1.4 6.0 1.4 4.2 1.0 − −
E94xMxE0034 10.0 2.3 10.0 2.3 7.0 1.6 − −
E94xMxE0044 16.0 3.8 16.0 3.8 11.2 2.6 − −
E94xMxE0074 21.0 6.6 21.0 6.6 14.7 4.6 − −
E94xMxE0094 27.9 8.7 27.9 8.7 19.5 6.1 − −
E94xMxE0134 39.0 12.2 39.0 12.2 27.3 8.5 − −
E94xMxE0174 49.5 15.5 49.5 15.5 34.7 10.8 − −
E94xMxE0244 70.5 22.0 70.5 22.0 41.1 15.4 − −
E94xMxE0324 76.8 30.0 76.8 30.0 62.2 19.4 − −
E94xMxE0474 94.0 35.3 94.0 35.3 71.6 26.7 − −
E94xMxE0594 118 44.3 118 44.3 71.8 26.8 − −

Type I [A] in a cycle of 3 minute  ( 179)

f = 2 kHz f = 4 kHz f = 8 kHz f = 16 kHz
       
E94xMxE0024 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.4 2.0 1.0 − −
E94xMxE0034 4.7 2.4 4.7 2.4 3.3 1.6 − −
E94xMxE0044 7.5 3.8 7.5 3.8 5.3 2.6 − −
E94xMxE0074 13.2 6.6 13.2 6.6 9.2 4.6 − −
E94xMxE0094 17.5 8.7 17.5 8.7 12.2 6.1 − −
E94xMxE0134 24.4 12.2 24.4 12.2 17.1 8.5 − −
E94xMxE0174 31.0 15.5 31.0 15.5 21.7 10.8 − −
E94xMxE0244 44.2 22.1 44.2 22.1 30.8 15.4 − −
E94xMxE0324 60.0 30.0 60.0 30.0 38.9 19.4 − −
E94xMxE0474 70.5 35.3 70.5 35.3 53.9 26.7 − −
E94xMxE0594 88.5 44.3 88.5 44.3 53.7 26.8 − −

182  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

4.4.7 Current−time diagrams

In addition to the data for overcurrent operation, here you are provided with information
on the dimensioning of application−oriented cycles.
By means of the following information you determine permissible load periods with
overcurrents and required recovery times with limited currents. If the currents and times
determined are observed, the Ixt monitoring function for the protection of the devices will
not respond.

Characteristics
The following characteristics ("Current−time diagrams") describe the device utilisation via
amperage and the duration of current flow.
The left part of the diagram (negative time data) represents the overload phase, while the
right part of the diagram (positive time data) shows the relieving phase.
Devices with an identical Ixt behaviour are combined within a diagram. A second diagram
enlarges a cutout area to improve the clearness of display.

Requirements
ƒ Switching frequency
The curves shown always refer to the variable rated switching frequency (fchopp) at
which the rated device current is permissible permanently. As this rated switching
frequencies are different for the individual devices, they are specified with the
diagrams. This means that the switching frequency is reduced automatically during
the overload phase. During the recovery phase the switching frequency set is
maintained.
ƒ Mains voltage
In the diagrams a mains voltage of UN = 400 V was assumed. Where applicable, a
current derating depending on the mains voltage may be necessary for the devices,
depending on the switching frequency that is reached. This means that the currents are
weighted differently in the Ixt monitoring. The devices for which a derating is required
can be gathered from the "Rated values" section. The continuous currents specified
there then are the 100% values which are required for working with the diagrams.
ƒ Ambient temperature
The ambient temperature may be maximally TAmb < 45 °C. In the case of higher
ambient temperatures the reduced continuous currents have to be taken into
consideration.
ƒ Output frequency
In the diagrams an output frequency (= field frequency) fout > 5 Hz has been assumed.
In the case of smaller output frequencies (fout = 0  5 Hz), a different switching
frequency results in a different device utilisation due to a different continuous current.
When the diagrams were created, this device behaviour was not taken into
consideration.
If a fixed switching frequency f > 4 kHz is selected, the reduction of the permissible
continuous current has to be considered (100 % = reduced continuous current) for
smaller output frequencies (fout = 0  5 Hz).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  183

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

Application example
ƒ Drive task
– A current Iol = 4.0 A is required for a time tol = 3 s.
– During the recovery phase there is a current Ire = 1.0 A.
– During the overload phase a switching frequency of 4 kHz is accepted.
– The switching frequency during the recovery phase is to be 8 kHz.
– The mains voltage is 400 V.
– The times with output frequencies under 5 Hz are insignificant.
ƒ Problem
– How long does the recovery phase tre have to be when the E94AxxE0034 controller
is used?
ƒ The currents required are based on the rated device current:
– Iol = 4.0 A/2.5 A = 160 % − selected characteristic: 175 %
– Ire = 1.0A/2.5 A = 40 % − selected characteristic: 50 %
– Because of the short overcurrent time tol = 3 s, the cutout diagram of the
E94AxxE0034 device is taken into consideration.
– The switching frequency fchopp = 8 kHz, var does not have to be considered
separately.
ƒ Procedure within the diagram
–  Starting from the time axis at tol = 3 s, a perpendicular line is drawn to the
selected characteristic at 175 % (corresponds to the minimum required current Iol).
–  Draw a straight line from the point of intersection horizontally to the right to
the selected characteristic, the recovery phase, at 50 %.
–  Draw a perpendicular line from the point of intersection back to the time axis.
–  Read the minimum required duration of recovery on the time axis.

150 % ‚ 75 %

ƒ
60 %
175 %

50 %
25 %
200 % 0%
350 %
275 %
300 %
250 %

400 %

225 %


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s] „
SZD_E94A024_044 BSP

ƒ Result in the example

– The duration of recovery has to be at least tre = 5 s!

184  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

Guide
Type Diagram
E94xxxE0024
E94xxxE0034 Page  186
 Fig. 4−2/  Fig. 4−3
E94xxxE0044
E94xxxE0074
E94xxxE0134
E94xxxE0174 Page  187
 Fig. 4−4/  Fig. 4−5
E94xxxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xxxE0474 Page  188
E94xxxE0594  Fig. 4−6 /  Fig. 4−7

Guide
Type Diagram
E94xxxE0024
E94xxxE0034 Page  186
 Fig. 4−2/  Fig. 4−3
E94xxxE0044
E94xxxE0074
E94xxxE0134
E94xxxE0174 Page  187
 Fig. 4−4/  Fig. 4−5
E94xxxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xxxE0474 Page  188
E94xxxE0594  Fig. 4−6 /  Fig. 4−7

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  185

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0024 ... E94xxxE0044

Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0024 1.5
E94xxxE0034 400 2.5 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0044 4.0
250 ... 400 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 225 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A024_044

Fig. 4−2 Diagram for E94xxxE0024 and E94xxxE0044

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %
150 %

60 %
175 %

50 %
25 %
200 % 0%
350 %
275 %
300 %
250 %

400 %

225 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A024_044L

Fig. 4−3 Area cutout for E94xxxE0024 and E94xxxE0044

186  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244 and E94xMxE0324

Type Vr 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0074 7.0 8 kHz var
E94xMxE0094 9.3 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0134 13.0
400
E94xxxE0174 16.5 8 kHz var
E94xxxE0244 23.5
E94xMxE0324 32.0 8 kHz var
250 ... 300 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 225 %

0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244

Fig. 4−4 Diagram for E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244, E94xMxE0324

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

150 %

60 %

50 %

25 %
275 %
300 %

175 % 200 % 225 % 250 % 0%

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244L

Fig. 4−5 Area cutout for E94xxxE0074 ... E94xxxE0244, E94xMxE0324

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  187

4 Multi−axis controllers
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

Type Ur 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94xxxE0474 47.0
400 4 kHz var
E94xxxE0594 59.0

75 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 % 60 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A474_594

Fig. 4−6 Diagram for E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

60 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 0% 25 % 50 %

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A474_594L

Fig. 4−7 Area cutout for E94xxxE0474 and E94xxxE0594

188  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Device description

4.5 Device description

This page remains blank to give you a clearly arranged overview of the following subject
on the next double page.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  189

4 Multi−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

4.5.1 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

9400SSP022

190  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Device description
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Standard device 
Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24 V supply and statebus
X3 Analog inputs and analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC clip
 Prominent warning label close to the device!

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

Installation backplane 
Pos. Description
X100 DC−bus voltage (compatible to 9300 series)
X105 Motor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring
X107 Control of motor holding brake
X109 DC busbar +
X110 DC busbar −

EMC wire clamp (for device sizes 2 + 3), replaces 1 x 

 EMC shield clamp
 DC−bus fuse

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  191

4 Multi−axis controllers
Device description
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

4.5.2 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

SSP94GG652

192  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Device description
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

Standard device 
Pos. Description
MXI1 Module receptacle for extension 1, e.g. communication
MXI2 Module receptacle for extension 2, e.g. communication
MMI Module receptacle for memory modules
MSI Module receptacle for safety equipment
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24 V supply and statebus
X3 Analog inputs and analog outputs
X4 Digital outputs
X5 Digital inputs
X6 Diagnostics
X7 Resolver
X8 Encoder
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 EMC clip
X100 DC−bus voltage
X105 Motor
X106 Motor temperature monitoring
X107 Control of motor holding brake

 EMC wire clamp

Device size 6:  10 ... 20 mm and  15 ... 28 mm
Internal thread for M6 eye bolt (not included in the scope of supply)
 Strain relief and lifting aid, removable

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  193

4 Multi−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Important notes

4.6 Mechanical installation

4.6.1 Important notes

 Note!
The devices must be installed in housings (e.g. control cabinets) to meet
applicable regulations.

ƒ The mounting location must always comply with the operating conditions specified
in the technical data (! 169). Take additional measures if necessary.
ƒ The mounting plate of the control cabinet must have the following properties:
– electrically conductive
– free of lacquer
ƒ The mechanical connections must always be ensured.
ƒ A free air circulation must be ensured for dissipating the heat.
ƒ The described EMC properties are provided if the following conditions are complied
with:
– The devices are mounted according to the arrangement concept described.
– The prepared cables are used and remain unchanged.

194  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

4.6.2 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Mounting grid
We recommend to provide the mounting plate with a grid pattern of M5 threaded holes
for attaching the devices. This preparation enables easy attachment of the devices, and the
device sizes 1, 2, ... n can thus be mounted directly adjacent to each other.

 Note!
ƒ Permissible are M5 screw and washer assemblies or hexagon socket screws
with washer.
ƒ Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm / 26 lb−in.
ƒ The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7
mm.

SSP94PN010

Fig. 4−8 Mounting grid for device size 1 ... 3 installation backplanes
 Installation backplane
 Grid hole pattern for installation backplane (M5 threaded holes)
 Grid hole pattern for footprint filter (not relevant here)
 Cable duct
1 ... 3 Device size, mounting holes used

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  195

4 Multi−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Standard device with installation backplane

SSP94GGmSo000

Fig. 4−9 Dimensions [mm]

Abmessung a Masse
Typ [mm] [kg]
E94xMxE0024
E94xMxE0034 60 4.0
E94xMxE0044
E94xMxE0074
90 5.3
E94xMxE0094
E94xMxE0134
E94xMxE0174 120 8.1
E94xMxE0244
E94xMxE0324 120 8.5

196  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

 Note!
Axis modules E94xMxE0324 and installation backplane E94AZPM0324 can
only be connected directly to each other! A use with another device or
installation backplane of size 3 is not permissible and is prevented through a
plug protection.
Please consider this when planning drive systems where the devices are
mounted side by side.

Arrangement of the devices

SSP94PN200

Fig. 4−10 Arrangement concept

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  197

4 Multi−axis controllers
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Installation steps
Proceed as follows for installation:
1. Prepare M5 threaded holes on the mounting plate according to the mounting grid.
– Start on the left with the mounting backplane of the E94AZPNxxxx DC power
supply module or with the E94AZEX100 DC input module.
– Install the axis modules from the left to the right with decreasing rated power.
– Axis modules E94xMxE0324 and installation backplane E94AZPM0324 can only be
connected directly to each other! A use with another device or installation
backplane of size 3 is not permissible and is prevented through a plug protection.
2. Screw the mounting backplane onto the mounting plate. Do not yet tighten the
screws.
– Use M5 screw and washer assemblies or M5 hexagon socket screws with washers.
– The screw joint in the installation backplane must not jut out more than 7 mm.
3. Align all components.
4. When busbars are used: connect busbars.
5. Screw the components onto the mounting plate.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

198  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

4.6.3 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

SSP94Mas01

Fig. 4−11 Dimensions [mm]

Dimensions [mm] Weight Device

size
Type a b b1 b2 e c1 d g m [kg]
E94xMxE0474
206 606 556 630 294 170 585 6.5 12.5 20.0 6
E94xMxE0594

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  199

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Important notes

4.7 Wiring

4.7.1 Important notes

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
The leakage current to earth (PE) is > 3.5 mA AC or > 10 mA DC.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the device in the event of an error.
Protective measures:
Implement the measures required in EN 61800−5−1. Especially:
ƒ Fixed installation
– Implement PE connection in compliance with standards.
– Connect PE conductor twice or PE conductor cross−section  10 mm2.
ƒ Connection with a connector for industrial applications according to
IEC 60309 (CEE):
– PE conductor cross−section  2.5 mm2 as part of a multi−core supply cable.
– Provide for suitable strain relief.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

200  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Important notes

 Stop!
No device protection if the mains voltage is too high
The mains input is not internally fused.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Destruction of the device if the mains voltage is too high.
Protective measures:
ƒ Observe the maximally permissible mains voltage.
ƒ Fuse the device correctly on the supply side against mains fluctuations and
voltage peaks.

 Stop!
Overvoltage on components:
In case of an earth fault in IT systems, incompatible overvoltages may occur in
the plant.
Possible consequences:
Destruction of the device.
Protective measures:
When using the devices in IT systems, separate the internal connection of
filters to the protective earth. For this purpose carry out the device−specific
measure as described.

 Note!
Switching operations on the motor side of the controller are permitted for
safety switch−off (emergency off).
Please observe:
ƒ When the controller is enabled, switching operations may lead to a response
of the controller monitoring functions.
ƒ The switching elements on the motor side must be rated for DC voltages
with UDCmax = 800 V.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  201

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

4.7.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

 Note!
The fuse current given in the following is the maximum permissible value. This
prevents fire and electrical hazard in the event of an error of the device.
The fuse must be smaller or equal to the maximum permissible value, taking
the following into consideration:
ƒ The maximum possible cable cross−section
ƒ the laying system (e.g. tap installation)
ƒ the ambient temperature
ƒ the relevant regulations (e.g. UL508A, NEC70 and others).

202  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when supplied by a
rectified AC−supply as an UL listed Lenze unit, cat. no. E94A
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 000 rms amperes, when supplied by a rectified AC−power
supply of 480 V maximum, when protected by specified fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 50 000 rms amperes (30 000 rms Amperes with fuse type
202922...), when supplied by a rectified AC−power supply of 480/277 V
maximum, when protected by specified fuses.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table.
– Above Short Circuit ratings are only valid when the assembly bases are
used.
– Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.
ƒ The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication
that a fault current has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, current−carrying parts and other components of the
controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the
current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
ƒ For information on the protection level of the internal overload protection
for a motor load in percent of FLA, see the corresponding Application
Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ For information on rating and proper connection of the thermal protector
(only for connection to motors having integral thermal protection), see the
corresponding Application Manuals or Software Helps.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature is 45 °C.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature with derating is 55 °C.
ƒ Use 60/75 °C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.
ƒ These products are intended for use in overvoltage category III.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  203

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Assignment of devices − DC−fuses

+UG/−UG (X100) Busbar (X109/X110)
Nominal value (max.) Type Nominal value (max.) Type
Type [A] [A]
Siba 5020106.16
E94xMxE0024 16
Siba 5020206.16
E94xMxE0034
E94xMxE0044 Eaton 170M1754
63
Eaton 170M1734
Siba 5020106.40
40
E94xMxE0074 Siba 5020206.40 Eaton 170M1761
315
E94xMxE0094 Eaton 170M1757 Eaton 170M1741
125
Eaton 170M1737
E94xMxE0134 Siba 2029220.100
100
E94xMxE0174 Siba 2029221.100
E94xMxE0244 Eaton 170M1759
200
E94xMxE0324 Eaton 170M1739
E94xMxE0474 170M1761
315 − −
E94xMxE0594 170M1741
Recommended fuse holder for type 170M...: Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

204  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − French

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de
100 000 ampères symétriques eff., maxi. 480 V max., lorsque
l’alimentation est fournie par une source de CA redressé en tant qu’unité
Lenze certifié UL, n° de cat. E94A.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 50 000 ampères symétriques eff., lorsque
l’alimentation est fournie par une source de CA redressé de 480/277 V
maxi, et lorsque cette source est protégée par des fusibles fabriqués par
Bussmann (Eaton).
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères eff., lorsque
l’alimentation est fournie par une source de CA redressé de 480 V
maximum, et lorsque cette source est protégée par des fusibles
spécifiques.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 50 000 ampères eff. (30 000 ampères eff.
avec type de fusible 202922...), lorsque l’alimentation est fournie par une
source de CA redressé de 480/277 V maximum, et lorsque cette source est
protégée par des fusibles spécifiques.
– Utiliser les fusibles spécifiés comme indiqué dans le tableau.
– Les courants nominaux de court−circuit ci−dessus sont valables
uniquement en cas d’utilisation de plaques de montage.
– La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément au National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code, et
aux autres dispositions applicables au niveau local.
ƒ Le déclenchement du dispositif de protection du circuit de dérivation peut
être dû à une coupure qui résulte d’un courant de défaut. Pour limiter le
risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique, examiner les pièces porteuses de
courant et les autres éléments du contrôleur ; les remplacer s’ils sont
endommagés. Le relais de surcharge doit être remplacé en cas de grillage de
l’élément traversé par le courant.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur le niveau de protection offert par la
protection intégrée contre les surcharges du moteur (pourcentage de
l’intensité assignée à pleine charge), se reporter aux manuels d’application
ou aux systèmes d’aide logiciels.
ƒ Pour obtenir des informations sur les caractéristiques assignées et sur le
câblage du dispositif de protection thermique (concerne uniquement le
raccordement aux moteurs dotés d’un dispositif de protection thermique
intégré), se reporter aux manuels d’application ou aux systèmes d’aide
logiciels.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  205

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 45 °C

ƒ Température ambiante maximale avec réduction de puissance : 55 °C
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour les
circuits de commande.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.
ƒ Ces produits sont conçus pour une utilisation dans la catégorie de
surtension III.

Combinaison entre les appareils et les fusibles CC

+UG/−UG (X100) Barre conductrice (X109/X110)
Valeur nominale Type Valeur nominale Type
(max.) (max.)
Type [A] [A]
Siba 5020106.16
E94xMxE0024 16
Siba 5020206.16
E94xMxE0034
E94xMxE0044 Eaton 170M1754
63
Eaton 170M1734
Siba 5020106.40
40
E94xMxE0074 Siba 5020206.40 Eaton 170M1761
315
E94xMxE0094 Eaton 170M1757 Eaton 170M1741
125
Eaton 170M1737
E94xMxE0134 Siba 2029220.100
100
E94xMxE0174 Siba 2029221.100
E94xMxE0244 Eaton 170M1759
200
E94xMxE0324 Eaton 170M1739
E94xMxE0474 170M1761
315 − −
E94xMxE0594 170M1741
Porte−fusible recommandé pour Typ 170M... : Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

206  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

4.7.3 Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device−internal EMC filters have been implemented to reduce interference emission.

These EMC filters are connected to protective earth to discharge interference currents.
Under certain conditions the EMC filters must be disconnected from:
ƒ Operation in an IT system
The devices are protected from damages or destruction due to incompatible
overvoltages in the case of an error (earth fault).

ƒ DC−bus operation
ƒ Operation with power supply modules or regenerative power supply modules
ƒ Operating multiple devices with a common filter
The EMC properties can only be reached by carrying out the described measures.
The triggering behaviour of applicable earth−leakage circuit breakers remains
undisturbed.
Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Overview of the measures

The measures which are to be carried out once have been prepared in relation to the
devices and are each described together with installation and wiring.
Device (GG = device size) Measure in the case of operation ...
in the IT system in the interconnected
system, with power supply
modules or shared filters
Inverter
with installation backplane (GG1 ... GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
without installation backplane (GG6 ... GG7) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG81 ... GG83) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG91) Only factory−set measures are possible.
Please specify when ordering.
Power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG1 und GG3) No measure necessary
without installation backplane (GG4 ... GG5) No measure necessary
Regenerative power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
associated mains filter Change screwed connection No measure necessary

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  207

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Device size 1 ... 3

SSP94IT001

Fig. 4−12 Plugging the IT insulating cap onto the earthing jumper

Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:
1. Remove IT insulating cap from the parking position  in the installation backplane.
– For this apply a screwdriver on the right or left and lever off the insulating cap.
– Optionally the insulating cap can be carefully removed using an appropriate pliers.
2. Attach IT insulating cap to the earthing jumper  until it clicks into place.

Device size 6
Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:

94GG67IT67

Fig. 4−13

1. Find the metal strap on the left of the device.

2. Unbolt the screws to remove the metal strap.
3. Unbolt the screw at position "IT" and insert the metal strap.
4. Tighten all screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.4 Nm (30 lb−in)
After this, the device is suitable for operation in IT systems.

208  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

4.7.4 Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Example circuit

SSP94PSP31

Fig. 4−14 Basic circuit diagram of the drive system

E94xMxExxxx 9400 Multi Drive servo axis module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane
 DC power supply module or DC feeding point or axis module
 Next axis module
" HF shield termination through large−surface connection to functional earth
EYF... System cable for resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
R Resolver
Y Motor holding brake (connected to optional motor brake control)
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source for the motor holding brake
 24−V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 24−V voltage source for control electronics according to IEC 61131−2

 Tip!
Complete the wiring of the installation backplane before plugging in the
standard device. The upper terminals of the installation backplane cannot be
connected with a plugged−in standard device.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  209

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ DC bus, cable length from 0.3 m
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

How to connect the shield

E94AZPS004

210  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

DC bus
Use the integrated DC busbars (X109 and X110) to connect the DC bus. The mounting
backplane of the multi−axis controllers is already equipped with a fuse.
The busbar mounting set (accessories) can also be used to integrate single−axis controllers
into a drive network. The busbar mounting set for single−axis controllers also contains the
fuse required for the mounting backplane.
The DC bus is supplied via a DC supply module or a DC−feeding point which always have to
be located on the left−hand side.
Compatible with the 9300 series, the DC−bus voltage can also be supplied via terminals
+UG/−UG (X100, right part) for all devices.
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
(right part)
+UG Alternative option for DC−bus voltage connection (compatible to
−UG 9300 series).

SSP942X100

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  211

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

SSP94PN201

Fig. 4−15 Example: Connecting busbars

Proceed as follows to connect the busbars:

1. If devices of the interconnected system have already been in operation:
– If necessary, switch off the supply system and wait until the discharge time has
elapsed (depending on the device, this may take up to 20 minutes).
– Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.
2. Loosen the busbar screws (do not remove them completely).
3. Push the busbars as far as possible to the left towards the adjacent busbar.
– Ensure that there is good contact to the adjacent busbar.
4. Tighten the busbar screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.2 ... 3.5 Nm (28 ... 31 lb−in).
5. Screw the components onto the mounting plate, if necessary.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

212  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
(right part)
U Connection of the motor phases
V
W

" Functional earth

Connect the shields of the motor phases and of the optional motor
brake control separately and with a surface as large as possible to
the shield sheet. Use EMC wire clamp or EMC shield clamp for
fixing.

# Connection for the PE conductor on the motor side with M5 ring

cable lug
SSP940X105

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  213

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

a
0 1 b
U


 V

 W M5


 PE



 BD1/T1

BD2/T2
3 2 e
c d
SSP94MOTL1

Fig. 4−16 Stripping lengths of the motor cable

Dimensions [mm]
Type a b c d e
Device size 1 80 8 25 150 8
Device size 2 90 8 30 160 8
Device size 3 100 10 30 170 8

How to proceed:
1. Strip the motor cable  according to dimensions given.
2. Fold back the shield of the motor cable  over the cable sheath.
3. Stabilise the shield with self−adhesive conductive foil  (recommendation).
4. Fix the shield and conductive foil with heat−shrinkable tube  on the cable sheath.
5. Fasten cable lugs or wire end ferrules.
6. Connect the shields separately to the shield sheet using shield clamps (no strain
relief).

214  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping
units) or thermostat (NC contact).

SSP940X106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Flexible
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
With wire end ferrule

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHX0051: 24 V DC, max. 2.5 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP940X107 Observe correct polarity!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  215

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Flexible
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
With wire end ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

 Stop!
The motor brake control includes an electronic switch which can control a 24 V
motor holding brake.
The motor brake control may only be connected with motor holding brakes
which correspond to the permissible data mentioned in the technical data. (If
required, the holding brake without motor brake control must be controlled
via a digital output and a coupling relay).
If the permissible data mentioned in the technical data are not complied with:
ƒ the motor brake control can be destroyed.
ƒ a safe operation of the motor holding brake cannot be guaranteed.
Further notes in the documentation of the standard device must be observed!

 Stop!
Requirements concerning the brake cable (connection BD1/BD2):
ƒ The brake cables must be shielded if they are incorporated in the motor
cable.
– Operation with unshielded brake cables can destroy the motor brake
control.
– We recommend the use of Lenze system cables (motor cable with
separately shielded additional cores).
ƒ When using a permanent magnet holding brake, ensure the correct polarity
of the brake cable.
– If the terminals are reversed, the brake does not release. Since the motor
runs against the closed brake, the brake can be destroyed.
ƒ Connect the shield on both sides of PE.
Requirements concerning the supply voltage UDC (connection +/−):
ƒ The motor brake control must always be supplied with a separate 24 V
supply.
– A common supply of the motor brake control and the control card of the
controller is not permissible since otherwise the double insulation
between both components would be reduced.
ƒ Set UDC so that the operating voltage of the brake is within the admissible
range and the maximum supply voltage of the motor brake control will not
be exceeded.

216  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 2 ... 32 A (0.37 ... 15 kW)

Installation of the standard device

How to proceed:
1. Insert the device into the installation backplane without twisting it until resistance
is felt.
2. Press the device into the installation backplane until it audibly snaps into place. The
locking clip moves downwards and back into the locking position.
3. The end position is reached when the locking clip can be pressed against the device.
Now the device is locked.

SSP94GG102

Fig. 4−17 Installation of the device

Proceed as follows to remove the device:

1. Disconnect already wired connectors at the device.
2. Push the locking clip downwards to release the device and disengage it from the
contacts.
3. Pull the device completely out of the installation backplane and remove it. The
locking clip moves back into the locking position.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  217

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

4.7.5 Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

Example circuit

SSP94PSP6MD

E94xMxExxxx 9400 Multi Drive servo axis module

F1 ... F2 Fuses, UL−certified types: 170M1761 or 170M1741, max. 315 A
" HF−shield termination through large−surface connection to functional earth
EYF... System cable for resolver feedback
RFR Controller enable
R Resolver
Y Motor holding brake (connected to optional motor brake control)
 Speed setpoint selection via analog input 1 (−10 ... 0 ... +10 V)
 Voltage source for the motor holding brake
 24 V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 24 V voltage source for the control electronics

218  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Motor
ƒ Motor holding brake (shielding is required when being integrated into the motor
cable; connection to optional motor brake control)
ƒ Motor temperature monitoring
ƒ Analog signals (inputs and outputs)
ƒ System bus CAN
ƒ Resolver
ƒ Encoder
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ 24 V supply
ƒ Digital signals (inputs and outputs)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  219

4 Multi−axis controllers
Wiring
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

DC bus
Terminal X100 Labelling Description
+UG DC−bus voltage connection
−UG

SSP94X6100
PE Connection for the PE conductor on the supply side

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

Motor
Terminal X105 Labelling Description
U Motor phases
V
W

SSP94X6105 PE Connection for the motor−side PE conductor

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 6:
Hexagon
Flexible 50 0 10 88.5
socket 5
With wire end ferrule

220  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Wiring
Devices in the range 47 ... 59 A (22 ... 30 kW)

Motor temperature monitoring

Terminal X106 Labelling Description
T1 Motor temperature monitoring with PTC element (type−A sensor,
T2 switching performance according to EN 60947−8 for type−A tripping units)
or thermostat (NC contact).
SSP94X6106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

Motor brake control (optional)

 Note!
When the 24 V supply voltages (at X2) are applied and a motor holding brake
is available, the devices respond as follows:
ƒ Single Drive without mains or DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake
cannot be released.
ƒ Multi Drive without DC−bus voltage: The motor holding brake can be
released.

 Tip!
For detailed information on the motor holding brake control modules, please
see the chapter Accessories (! 141).
For information on the E94AZHX0051 motor holding brake control module
optionally contained in the installation backplane, please see the chapter
Accessories starting on page 456.

Terminal X107 Labelling Description

Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
flexible Slot
2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3
with wire end ferrule 0.6 x 3.5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  221

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

4.8 Control terminals

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Note!
Installation inside the control cabinet
ƒ Always install cables close to the mounting plate (reference potential), as
freely suspended cables act like antennas.
ƒ Use separated cable ducts for motor cables and control cables. Do not mix
up different cable types in one cable duct.
ƒ Before leaving the control cabinet, connect the shield of the fieldbus cable
to the mounting plate in accordance with EMC requirements.

 Tip!
Parameter setting and configuration can be carried out using the
L−force »Engineer«. For this purpose the Online Help and the Software Manual
for the standard device will guide you.

222  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ Analog signals (inputs and outputs)
ƒ System bus CAN
ƒ Resolver
ƒ Encoder
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ 24 V supply
ƒ Digital signals (inputs and outputs)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  223

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

System bus CAN on board

The drive controller has an integrated CANopen system bus interface for the exchange of
process data and parameter values between different nodes and for the connection of
additional modules such as distributed terminals, operator and input devices ("HMIs") as
well as external control units. The software manual contains additional information in this
regard.
Overview of general data and conditions of use
Field Values
Communication profile CANopen (DS301, V4.02)
Communication medium CAN cable in accordance with ISO 11898−2
Network topology Line closed at both ends (e.g. closed with Lenze system connector
EWZ0046)
Node addresses that can be set 1 ... 127 (can be set by means of DIP switch or code)
Max. number of nodes 127
Transfer rates [kBit/s] 10 ... 1000 (can be set by means of DIP switch or code)
Conformity, approvals  CE
 UL
 EAC

The transfer rate limits the overall cable length.

Transfer rate [kBit] Maximum bus length [m]
10 8075
20 4012
50 1575
125 600
250 275
500 112
800 38
1000 12

The segment cable length is limited by the cable cross−section used and the number of
nodes. Repeaters divide the overall cable length into segments. Without repeaters, the
segment cable length is the same as the overall cable length.
Max. number of Segment length [m] in relation to cable cross−section (Interpolation is permissible)
nodes per segment
0.25 mm2 (AWG 24) 0.50 mm2 (AWG 21) 0.75 mm2 (AWG 19) 1.00 mm2 (AWG 18)
2 240 430 650 940
5 230 420 640 920
10 230 410 620 900
20 210 390 580 850
32 200 360 550 800
63 170 310 470 690
100 150 270 410 600

224  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

Terminal X1 Labelling Description

Pin 2 CAN−LOW
Pin 3 CAN−GND
Pin 7 CAN−HIGH
9400SSP000X1
(Housing) CAN−Shield

24 V supply
The controller of the "Multi Drive" version requires a 24−V supply voltage for the control
electronics. This serves to maintain the control functions, even if the DC bus is not loaded.

~ +
-
24 V =
F

X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
GE GE GE GE GE GE

24E 24E 24E 24E 24E 24E

SB SB SB SB SB SB

SB
1 2 ... n 1 2 ... n
max. max.
SSP94X2V24

Fig. 4−18 Wiring principle

g 24 V external supply (e.g. EZV...)
F Fuse
X2 Terminal for 24 V and state bus
GE/24E/SB Labelling on the terminal
SB State bus
1 ... n E94x... device number during loop−through connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  225

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X2 Labelling Description

GE GND external supply
24E 24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
9400SSP000X2
SB State bus in/out (reference GE)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Electrical data
24 V Rated voltage 24 V
According to IEC 61131−2
Voltage range 19.2 ... 28.8 V
Residual ripple max. ± 5 %
Current consumption Continuous operation: 2.4 A
Switch−on: 4 A for 100 ms
Controller enable: 4 A for 300 ms
Fuse Circuit breaker with tripping
characteristic B or C,
Standard blade−type fuses
Looping through Max. 7 devices with 2.5 mm2
Fusing: 16/15 A
Max. 4 devices with 1.5 mm2
Fusing: 10/10 A
Connectable cross−cuttings See terminal data

 Warnings!
Up to hardware version 1x, take the following tino consideration:
In UL−approved systems the fuse of the 24 V supply must not exceed 4 A.

226  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

State bus
The state bus is a bus system exclusively designed for Lenze controllers via which up to 20
controllers can be connected and which serves to simulate a "release cord" function. The
state is controlled via the system module SFBDigitalOutput.
ƒ The state bus knows the states "OK" and "fault".
ƒ The state bus is multi−master−compliant, i.e. each node connected to the state bus
can set the state bus to "fault" by changing to LOW level.
ƒ In the "fault" status, all nodes activate their programmed response, e.g.
synchronised braking of the drive system.

 Stop!
Do not connect an external voltage to the state bus, otherwise the function
will be disturbed.

Electrical data
State bus Rated voltage 24 V
According to IEC 61131−2
Switching level According to IEC 61131−2
LOW 0 V ... +5 V
HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Looping through Max. 20 devices
DC−bus operation with
9300 devices is possible.
Connectable cross−cuttings See terminal data

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  227

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Analog inputs, analog outputs

The controller features two analog inputs which are able to detect differential voltage
signals in the range ±10 V, e.g. an analog speed setpoint selection or the voltage signal of
an external sensor (temperature, pressure, etc.).
ƒ The analog signal 1 can also detect a current setpoint.
The controller features two analog outputs, which can output internal analog signals as
voltage signals, e.g. for the control of analog indicating instruments or as a setpoint for
slave drives.
Electrical data
Analog input 1 Level: −10 ... +10 V
Analog input 2 Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Scaling: ±10 V  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
Analog input 1 as current input Level: −20 ... +20 mA
(A1R and A1− bridged) Resolution: 10 bits + sign
Scaling: For C00034 = "1"
−20 ... −4 mA −230 ... 0
+4 ... +20 mA 0 ... +230
For C00034 = "2"
±20 mA  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
Open−circuit monitoring: Configurable
Analog output 1 Level: −10 ... +10 V
Analog output 2 (max. 2 mA)
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Scaling: ±10 V  ±230
Conversion rate: 1 kHz

228  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

0 1 2 3 4
X3 X3 X3
U
Out GA GA GA
+ - +
GND AO1 AO1 AO1 =
PES AO2 AO2 PES AO2

A1+ A1+ A1+

A1- PES A1- A1-

PES A1- PES A1- PES A1- PES

A1R A1R A1R

PES A2+ A2+ A2+
PE A2- A2- A2-
SSP94X3AIO

Fig. 4−19 Wiring principle

 Wiring of an external analog signal
 Wiring with a slave drive
 Wiring with a measuring device
 Potentiometer supplied by analog output 1
 Potentiometer with external supply
Out Analog output signal, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential
X3 Terminal for the analog inputs and outputs
PES EMC shield connection
PE Protective earth
U Measuring device

E94x... X3 , C00034
GA

AO1

AO2
... 20 mA
A1+

A1-
"
250

A1-

A1R

A2+ "
A2-
PE

SSP94X3AAI

Fig. 4−20 Wiring principle of current input

Wiring of a current signal
X3 Terminal for the analog inputs and outputs
 Read information on the input configuration (software manual)
" Functional earth
PE Protective earth

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  229

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X3 Labelling Description

GA GND analog signals
AO1 Analog output 1
AO2 Analog output 2
A1+ Analog input 1 +
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1R Terminating resistor for ±20mA
A2+ Analog input 2 +
A2− Analog input 2 −
SSP94000X3 " Shield connection: Fix the shield with EMC wire clamp.

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

 Note!
If the control terminals are completely wired, we recommend to use a cable
cross−section of max. 0.75 mm2 to save space. The mechanical cover can then
be attached.

230  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

Digital outputs
The controller features four freely configurable digital outputs.
Electrical data
24O 24 V external voltage source, optional according to IEC 61131−2
GO SELV/PELV
Current consumption Max. 300 mA
DO1 Switching level according to IEC 61131−2
... LOW 0 V ... +5 V
DO4
GO HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Output current Max. 50 mA
Load > 480  at 24 V

 Note!
For stable digital output states, in particular during the starting phase of the
controller, you must use an external 24V supply for the digital outputs.

 Note!
Digital inputs and digital outputs have separated reference potentials (GI and
GO). If you interconnect inputs and outputs, the reference potentials are
connected as well by an external bridge.

~ +
-
24 V =
F

0 1
X4 X4
GO GND GO

24O In 24O

DO1 DO1

DO2 DO2

DO3 DO3

DO4 DO4

SSP94X4DO1

Fig. 4−21 Wiring principle

 Wiring with a digital input, e.g. a PLC
 Digital control (relay, valve, ...) with an external 24−V supply
X4 Terminal for the digital outputs
In Digital input, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential
F Fuse

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  231

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X4 Labelling Description

GO GND digital out
24O 24−V digital out
DO1 Digital output 1
DO2 Digital output 2
DO3 Digital output 3
9400SSP000X4
DO4 Digital output 4

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

232  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

Digital inputs
The controller is provided with freely configurable digital inputs which can be used for
touch probe measurement (edge−controlled event).
The control input RFR for controller enable is firmly connected with the device control. It
must be wired to enable the controller with a HIGH signal.
Electrical data
24O Rated voltage 24 V
(external voltage source, According to IEC 61131−2
optional) Current consumption Max. 50 mA
RFR Switching level According to IEC 61131−2
DI1 LOW 0 V ... +5 V
...
DI8 HIGH +15 V ... +30 V
Input current Max. 8 mA

 Note!
Digital inputs and digital outputs have separated reference potentials (GI and
GO). If you interconnect inputs and outputs, the reference potentials are
connected as well by an external bridge.

X4
GO

24O

0 1 DO1

X5 X5 DO2

GND GI GI DO3

Out RFR RFR DO4

DI1 DI1

DI2 DI2

DI... DI...

DI8 DI8

SSP94X5DI1

Fig. 4−22 Wiring principle

 Wiring of an external digital signal, e.g. a PLC
 Wiring with a slave drive
X4 Terminal for the digital outputs
X5 Terminal for the digital inputs
Out digital output signal, e.g. of a control
GND Earth reference potential

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  233

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Terminal X5 Labelling Description

GI GND digital in
RFR Controller enable
DI1 Digital input 1
DI2 Digital input 2
DI3 Digital input 3
DI4 Digital input 4
DI5 Digital input 5
DI6 Digital input 6
DI7 Digital input 7
9400SSP000X5
DI8 Digital input 8

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Diagnostics/keypad
The following can be connected to this interface:
ƒ USB diagnostic adapter E94AZCUS
or
ƒ Keypad E94AZKAE.
The diagnostic adapter and a computer with the Lenze software »Engineer« serve to carry
out comprehensive settings, e.g. for initial commissioning.
The keypad enables experienced users to check or change individual settings.
Terminal X6 Labelling Description
Internal interface, RJ69 socket, for keypad or diagnostic adapter

9400SSP000X6

234  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

Resolver
Resolvers are connected to X7 (9−pole Sub−D socket).
The use of third−party resolvers is permissible. For this purpose the number of pole pairs of
the resolver in C00080 must be adapted to the resolver used. When the stator coils are
excited with 4 kHz, the apparent impedance of the connected resolver must not fall below
65 Ohm. When lower impedances are connected, the overload protection integrated in the
resolver output limits the output current and can falsify the resolver evaluation.
Resolvers are operated in reverse mode:
ƒ Supply to the sine and cosine track,
ƒ Both signals are controlled in a way that the current flow on the reference track is
reduced to zero.
Electrical data
General Cable length (system cable recommended) max. 150 m (100 m 1))
VCC, −KTY (GND) Supply voltage 5V
Maximum output current 110 mA
+REF, −REF Input frequency Max. 250 kHz
+COS, −COS Excitation voltage 10 VSS
+SIN, −SIN Carrier frequency 4 kHz, fix
+KTY, −KTY Type KTY 83−110
1) If safety functions with SM301 are used which require safe speed and position detection.

X7

+REF
1
-REF
2
VCC
3
+COS
4
-COS
5
+SIN
6
-SIN
7
+KTY
8
KTY ETS -KTY
9

SSP94RESX7

Fig. 4−23 Wiring principle

Terminal X7 Labelling Description

1 +REF
2 −REF
3 VCC
4 +COS
5 −COS
6 +SIN
7 −SIN
8 +KTY
9400SSP000X7
9 −KTY

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  235

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Encoder
Encoders are connected to X8 (15−pole Sub−D socket).
ƒ Absolute and incremental encoders are supported:
– TTL encoder 5 V (incremental)
– Sin/cos encoder 1 Vss (incremental)
– Sin/cos absolute value encoder 1 Vss with Hiperface protocol
– Sin/cos absolute value encoder 1 Vss with EnDat protocol (2.1)
– SSI load encoder with Stegmann protocol (as of 9400 with firmware 05.00)
ƒ Improved determination of low speeds with TTL encoders through additional time
measuring method.
ƒ SinCos absolute value encoders are serially read during initialisation (power−on).
After this, the sin/cos signals are evaluated.
ƒ Open−circuit monitoring:
– for sin/cos encoders by comparing the sin/cos signals with the sine shape (radius
monitoring)
– for TTL encoders by means of mean value and amplitude monitoring
– not with SSI encoders
ƒ The following encoders are not supported:
– HTL encoders
Electrical data
General Cable length (system cable recommended) max. 150 m (100 m 1))
Encoder types TTL
1 VSS
Protocols Hiperface
EnDat 2.1
SSI−Stegmann
Number of increments 1 ... 16384
Input frequency max. 500 kHz
VCC Supply voltage 5 V ... 12 V
(GND) Max. load capacity, 5 ... 9 V 330 mA
9 ... 12 V 3 W
at 12 V 250 mA
+Sense, −Sense Measuring lead for readjusting VCC
+KTY, −KTY Type KTY 83−110
1) If safety functions with SM301 are used which require safe speed and position detection.

236  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Control terminals

X8

1

9 SIN
2 RefSIN = 2.5 V
0.5V
10
3 COS

11 RefCOS
0.5 V
= 2.5 V

4
12
5
‚
13 A
6 A

14 B
B
7
KTY ETS
Z
15
Z
8

SSP94ENCX8

Fig. 4−24 Wiring principle

 Signals of a sin/cos encoder
 Signals with CW rotation

Terminal X8 Pin Description

Cable EYF001... EYF002...
TTL 1 VSS 1 VSS 1 VSS SSI
Hiperface EnDat 2.1
1 A Cos Cos Cos n. c.

2 GND GND GND GND GND

3 B Sin Sin SIN n. c.

4 VCC VCC VCC VCC US

5 Z Z +RS485 Data (Z) Data +
6 n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c.

7 −KTY −KTY −KTY −KTY −KTY

8 n. c. n. c. n. c. Clock Clock +
9 /A Ref Cos Ref Cos Ref Cos n. c.

10 n. c. n. c. n. c. −Sense n. c.

11 /B Ref SIN Ref SIN Ref SIN n. c.

12 n. c. n. c. n. c. +Sense n. c.

13 /Z /Z −RS485 /Data (/Z) Data −

14 +KTY +KTY +KTY +KTY +KTY
9400SSP000X8 n. c. n. c. n. c.
15 /Clock Clock −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  237

4 Multi−axis controllers
Control terminals

Setting the supply voltage

The supply voltage of the encoder must be adapted to the cable length.
The voltage is adapted by means of the parameter "Encoder voltage", C00421.
Encoder Ur Voltage setting [V] in C00421 for cable length [m]
Product key [V] 0 − 10 10 − 30 30 − 50 50 − 70 70 − 90 90 − 100 100 −150
TTL
IG2048−5V−T
IG4096−5V−T 5 ±5% 5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3
IK2048−5V−T
Sin−cos
IG1024−5V−V
5 ±5% 5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3
IG2048−5V−S
Sin−cos (Hiperface)
8
AM1024−8V−H 8.0
(7 ... 12)
Sin−cos (Endat)
AM32−5V−E
AS2048−5V−E 5 ±5% 5.0
AM2048−5V−E
Tab. 4−2
Ur Rated encoder voltage

The values listed in Tab. 4−2 are valid for the use of Lenze system cables at typical ambient
temperatures.
Other cables, other cable cross−sections or extreme ambient temperatures can require
metrologically determined adaptations.
For a higher encoder supply power, e.g. for laser−based length measuring systems, an
external encoder supply must be provided.

238  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Multi−axis controllers 4
Device modules

4.9 Device modules

Depending on the device version or the application, the device is equipped with device
modules. A nameplate attached to the side of the device serves to identify the already
equipped device modules .
The possible modules are briefly described in the Accessories chapter. Detailed
information can be found in the respective documentation.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  239

4 Multi−axis controllers
Preparing the commissioning procedure

4.10 Preparing the commissioning procedure

For commissioning you require:

ƒ A computer with Windows® operating system (XP or 2000)
ƒ The Lenze PC software »Engineer«
ƒ A connection to the controller via an interface, e.g.:
– Diagnostic interface X6 with USB diagnostic adapter
– System bus CAN
– Communication modules in the extension slots MXI1/MXI2
ƒ The Software Manual for the technology application used
ƒ The Communication Manual for the automation platform network
ƒ 24−V voltage supply for control electronics of the controller
ƒ DC−bus voltage
Follow the software instructions and/or read the documentation.

240  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Device features

5 Power supply module

5.1 Device features

The most important device features at a glance:

ƒ Power supply modules supply the DC buses of several controllers of a drive system
with energy.
ƒ Power supply modules are the central AC mains connection in a DC−bus operation.
ƒ Power supply modules have an internal brake chopper and a terminal for a brake
resistor.
ƒ Power supply modules of the 9400 series have a busbar port for the easy connection
and side−by−side mounting of the 9400 controllers up to 100 A. Ports for higher
currents or compatible device series are available.
ƒ Power supply modules generally supply controllers of the "Multi Drive" version.
However, also controllers of the "Single Drive" version can be implemented in a
DC−bus operation if the data and notes in the "DC−bus operation" chapter are
observed.
ƒ Power supply modules are designed as multi−range voltage units (230/400/480 V).
ƒ Four types of power supply modules are available:
– E94APNE0104,
Rated current: 10 A,
Device size: 1,
Version: compact standard device with installation backplane
– E94APNE0364,
Rated current: 36 A,
Device size: 3,
Version: compact standard device with installation backplane
– E94APNE1004,
Rated current: 100 A,
Device size: 4,
Version: compact total device
– E94APNE2454,
Rated current: 245 A,
Device size: 5,
Version: compact total device
ƒ Power supply modules are assigned to specially designed mains filters and RFI filters.
ƒ Power supply modules and filters can be mounted in the mounting grid of the 9400
series.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  241

5 Power supply modules
General data and operating conditions

5.2 General data and operating conditions

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

Mains data
Mains types With earthed & Unrestricted use
point
IT systems Unrestricted use
Observe instructions about special measures concerning the
axis controllers connected!
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted: cannot be specified because dependent on the
conditions present in the interconnected system
Radiation: category C3
Noise immunity (in accordance with EN 61800−3)
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000−4−2 8 kV with air discharge,
(ESD) 4 kV with contact discharge to housing
High frequency
Cable−guided EN 61000−4−6 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1kHz)
Interference (housing) EN 61000−4−3 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10 V/m 80 % AM (1kHz)

242  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
General data and operating conditions

Protection of persons and devices

Enclosure EN 60529 IP 20
Not in the wire range of
NEMA 250 Protection against contact in the lower terminals
accordance with type 1
Insulation resistance EN 61800−5−1 Overvoltage category III
from 2000 m amsl: external measures for complying with
the overvoltage category II are required, e.g.
 connecting isolating transformer upstream
 connecting overvoltage protection system upstream
Insulation of control EN 61800−5−1 up to 2000 m amsl:
circuits Safe mains isolation by double/reinforced insulation for
mains with neutral earthing with a rated voltage for the
external conductor/star point up to 300 V.
from 2000 m amsl:
If an overvoltage protection system is connected upstream,
additional external separating measures are required for
maintaining the safe mains isolation.
Short−circuit strength EN 61800−5−1 DC−bus connection: Not short−circuit−proof
Brake resistor connection: without restrictions
Control connections: without restrictions
Discharge current EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Cyclic mains switching Cyclic mains switching of 5 times in 5 minutes is permissible
without restrictions.

Design
Housing
Carrier housing Device sizes Glass−fiber reinforced plastic
1 and 3
Carrier housing Device sizes Metal
4 and 5
Dimensions see "Mechanical installation"
Weight see "Mechanical installation"

Mounting conditions
Mounting place in the control cabinet
Mounting position vertical
Clearance
above/beneath Comply with the device−relating mounting instructions.
at the side Can be installed in a row without any clearance

Connection conditions for DC power supply module

AC mains operation Direct connection
DC−bus operation Direct connection of axis modules via terminals or busbar
system
More information can be found in the Hardware Manual,
chapter "DC−bus operation".

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  243

5 Power supply modules
General data and operating conditions

Operating conditions
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Operation with mains choke:
Current derating from +40 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Assignment of filters to standard devices

DC power supply module Mains filter RFI filter Mains choke
(corresponds to "long (corresponds to "short
distance") distance")
E94APNE0104 E94AZMP0084 E94AZRP0084 EZAELN3008B372
E94APNE0364 E94AZMP0294 E94AZRP0294 EZAELN3030B981
E94APNE1004 E94AZMP0824 E94AZRP0824 EZAELN3080B371
E94APNE2454 E94AZMP2004 E94AZRP2004 EZAELN3200B151

With RFI filters, EMC categories can be achieved.

With mains filters, EMC categories and a power increase PDC can be achieved.
With mains chokes, a power increase PDC is achieved (through reduction of the harmonic
content). For adherence to EMC categories, additional further measures are necessary.

General electrical data

Power loss PV [W]
Type Total (when operating with IaN) Constant (control electronics only)
E94APNE0104 55 5
E94APNE0364 110 5
E94APNE1004 230 7
E94APNE2454 550 7

244  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Overview

5.3 Rated data

5.3.1 Overview

Input data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94APNE0104 230/400/480 50/60 8/8/8 6/6/6 3
E94APNE0364 230/400/480 50/60 29/29/29 21.8/21.8/21.8 3
E94APNE1004 230/400/480 50/60 82/82/82 61/61/61 3
E94APNE2454 230/400/480 50/60 200/200/200 150/150/150 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Output data
Voltage Current [A] Number of
phases
Type [V] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94APNE0104 325/565/675 10/10/10 7.5/7.5/7.5 −
E94APNE0364 325/565/675 36/36/36 27/27/27 −
E94APNE1004 325/565/675 100/100/100 75/75/75 −
E94APNE2454 325/565/675 245/245/245 184/184/184 −
 Temperature in the control cabinet

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  245

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

5.3.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Input data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94APNE0104 230 3.2
E94APNE0364 230 11.5
E94APNE1004 230 32.6
E94APNE2454 230 79.6

Output data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 325 260 − 0 % ... 370 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94APNE0104 10 2.1 40 8.4 15 3.2
E94APNE0104
10 2.8 40 11.2 15 4.2
+ E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 36 7.5 108 22.5 54 11.3
E94APNE0364
36 10.1 108 30.3 54 15.5
+ E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 100 20.8 200 41.6 150 31.2
E94APNE1004
100 27.9 200 55.8 150 41.9
+ E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 245 51 368 76.5 368 76.5
E94APNE2454
245 68.5 368 103 368 103
+ E94AZMP2004

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

246  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94APNE0104 18.0 21.7 8.5 7.9 1.1 4.3 0.5 0.5
E94APNE0364 6.0 65.0 25.4 29.1 5.1 3.0 0.5 0.5
E94APNE1004 2.5 156 60.8 62.7 9.8 3.6 0.5 0.5
E94APNE2454 1.4 279 109 112 17.5 3.6 0.5 0.5

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by a
thermal contact.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  247

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

5.3.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Input data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94APNE0104 400 5.5
E94APNE0364 400 20.1
E94APNE1004 400 56.7
E94APNE2454 400 138

Output data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 565 455 − 0 % ... 620 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94APNE0104 10 3.6 40 14.4 15 5.4
E94APNE0104
10 4.9 40 19.6 15 7.4
+ E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 36 13.0 108 39.0 54 19.5
E94APNE0364
36 17.5 108 52.5 54 26.3
+ E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 100 36.2 200 72.4 150 54.3
E94APNE1004
100 48.6 200 97.2 150 72.9
+ E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 245 88.6 368 133 368 133
E94APNE2454
245 119 368 179 368 179
+ E94AZMP2004

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

248  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94APNE0104 27.0 26.9 19.5 9.7 2.6 4.3 0.5 0.5
E94APNE0364 12.0 60.4 43.8 27.0 8.7 3.0 0.5 0.5
E94APNE1004 5.0 145 105 58.2 17.0 3.6 0.5 0.5
E94APNE2454 2.8 259 188 104 30.3 3.6 0.5 0.5

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by a
thermal contact.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  249

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

5.3.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Input data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94APNE0104 480 6.6
E94APNE0364 480 24.1
E94APNE1004 480 68.1
E94APNE2454 480 166

Output data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 675 480 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94APNE0104 10 4.3 40 17.2 15 6.5
E94APNE0104
10 5.8 40 23.3 15 8.7
+ E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 36 15.6 108 48.8 54 23.4
E94APNE0364
36 21.0 108 63.0 54 31.5
+ E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 100 43.4 200 86.8 150 65.1
E94APNE100
100 58.3 200 117 150 87.5
+ E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 245 106 368 159 368 159
E94APNE2454
245 143 368 215 368 215
+ E94AZMP2004

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

250  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94APNE0104 27.0 28.3 21.7 10.3 2.8 4.3 0.5 0.5
E94APNE0364 12.0 63.8 48.8 28.5 9.7 3.0 0.5 0.5
E94APNE1004 5.0 153 117 61.4 18.9 3.6 0.5 0.5
E94APNE2454 2.8 273 209 110 33.7 3.6 0.5 0.5

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by a
thermal contact.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  251

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

5.3.5 Fuses and cable cross−sections

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 ... 480 180 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 ... 65

Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1

The data are recommendations. Other dimensioning/laying systems are possible (e.g.
according VDE 0298−4).
The cable cross−sections apply under the following conditions:
ƒ Use of PVC−insulated copper cables
ƒ Conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 45°C
ƒ No bundling of cables or cores
ƒ Three loaded cores
Type   L1, L2, L3 − laying system FI 1)
B2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [mA]
E94APNE0104 C16 − 2.5 2.5 −  300
E94APNE0364 C40 − 10.0 10.0 −  300
E94APNE1004 − 125 − 50 50  300
E94APNE2454 315 − 150
− −  300
(2 x 70)
 Circuit breaker
 Fuse of the utilisation category gG/gL or semiconductor fuses or the utilisation category gRL
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
2) Device with integrated mains choke
Observe national and regional regulations!

252  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

Installation to UL
Only use UL−approved cables, fuses and fuse holders.
UL fuse: Voltage 600 V; CC, J or T class fuses
Type standard installation motor group installation FI 1)
 valeur  valeur
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
nominale (max.) nominale (max.)
[A] [AWG] [A] [AWG] [mA]
E94APNE0104 15 14 15 14  300
E94APNE0364 60 6 60 6  300
E94APNE1004 125 1 125 1  300
E94APNE2454 300 mcm 300 mcm
300 300  300
2 x 1/0 2 x 1/0
 Fuse
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
2) Device with integrated mains choke
3) The directive for a "group installation" according to UL508A or NEC, CEC must be considered.
Observe national and regional regulations!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  253

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Mains filters for power supply modules

5.3.6 Mains filters for power supply modules

When using the mains filters assigned, conditions must be observed for compliance with
EMC class C2:
ƒ The measures for the use on IT systems must be applied to all axis modules in the
interconnection (separation of internal filter components from PE, (! 358)).
ƒ The maximum sum total of all motor cable lengths ( lmot) for the filter used must
be observed.

Motor cable lengths in the interconnection

The assigned filters are designed for lmot
(E94AZRPxxx4: 60 m (= 6 x 10 m), E94AZMPxxx4: 500 m (= 10 x 50 m)).
For a different number of axis modules, lmot can be determined from the following
diagrams.
Maximum total of motor cable lengths [m] for the achievement of EMC Category C2
Number of axes Power supply module with
RFI filter E94AZRPxxx4 Mains filter E94AZMPxxx4
(short distance) (long distance)
1 67.5 100
2 67.5 200
3 67.5 300
4 65 400
5 62.5 500
6 60 600
7 57.5 575
8 55 550
9 52.5 525
10 50 500
11 47.5 475
12 45 450
13 42.5 425
14 40 400
15 37.5 375
16 35 350
17 32.5 325
18 30 300
19 27.5 275
20 25 250

254  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Rated data
Mains filters for power supply modules

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Σl[m]
SSP94FF015 B

Fig. 5−1 Filter E94AZMP...SDB (short distance): total motor lengths according to number of axis modules

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
Σl[m]
SSP94FF015 A

Fig. 5−2 Filter E94AZMP...LDB (long distance): total motor lengths according to axis modules

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  255

5 Power supply modules
Rated data
Mains filters for power supply modules

With different motor cable lengths, per axis at least 25 % of the longest cable must be
considered when calculating the total motor cable length.
Example: 1 Motor cable length lmot [m]
Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 6 6
0.25 * 20 = 5
2 ... 4 3 * 10 3 * 10
5 20  20
Total 56 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 56
EMC class C2 will be complied with.

Example 2 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 4 4*5 0.25 * 40 = 10 4 * 10
5 40  40
Total 60 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 80
EMC class C2 will not be complied with.

Constellations with unfavourable or intensifying parasitic couplings

Compliance with EMC category C2 may also be interfered with by other circumstances:
ƒ Distribution of the axis modules over several control cabinets without efficient HF
equipotential bonding between the mounting plates
ƒ No use of Lenze system cables or cables with the same specifications
ƒ Poor connection of motor cable shields
ƒ Motor cable interruptions
ƒ Other interference sources (e.g. switched−mode power supplies)
ƒ Isochronous switching of the inverter output stages

256  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Device description

5.4 Device description

This page remains blank to give you a clearly arranged overview of the following subject
on the next double page.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  257

5 Power supply modules
Device description
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

5.4.1 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

SSP94PN012

258  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Device description
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Standard device 
Pos. Description
X11 24 V supply
X12 4 digital outputs
1 digital input
 Nameplate, retractable
 Setting of mains voltage/brake chopper threshold
 Upper cap

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED labelling Colour Description
− − −
OVERHEAT red Overtemperature
MAINS green without function
BRCHOP FAIL red Short circuit in brake chopper
24 V green 24 V supply voltage o.k.
SSP94LED21 BRCHOP ON yellow Brake chopper active

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

Installation backplane 
Pos. Description
X111 Mains (supply from above, e.g. from top filters)
DC−bus voltage (compatible with 9300 series)
X112 Mains (supply from below, e.g. from built−on filter)
External brake resistor
X109 DC−bus busbar + Direct connection of
9400 axis modules,
X110 DC busbar − device sizes 1 ... 3

EMC shield clamp

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  259

5 Power supply modules
Device description
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

5.4.2 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

S94PN10010

260  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Device description
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Pos. Description
X11 External 24 V supply
X12 4 digital outputs
1 digital input
 Nameplate, retractable
 Setting of mains voltage/brake chopper threshold
 Upper cap
Cable fixation for L1 ... L3, #, also serves as a lifting aid, at the top and bottom, can be removed
 Cable fixation for +UG/−UG, can be mounted at the top and bottom
 Module front with removable cable opening covers
 Cable connection +UG/−UG (also specified as part of X111 or X112)
 Nameplate 2

Pos. Description (connections)

X111 Mains (supply from above, e.g. through top−mounted filter) For cables being routed
DC−bus voltage (compatible to 9300 series) upwards
X112 Mains (supply from below, e.g. through side−mounted filter)
For cables being routed
External brake resistor
downwards
DC bus
X109 DC busbar + Direct connection of
9400 series axis
X110 DC busbar − modules,
device size 1 ... 3
The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.
LED labelling Colour Description
− − −
OVERHEAT red Overtemperature
MAINS green without function
BRCHOP FAIL red Short circuit in brake chopper
24 V green 24 V supply voltage o.k.
SSP94LED21 BRCHOP ON yellow Brake chopper active

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  261

5 Power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Important notes

5.5 Mechanical installation

5.5.1 Important notes

 Note!
The devices must be installed in housings (e.g. control cabinets) to meet
applicable regulations.

ƒ The mounting location must always comply with the operating conditions specified
in the technical data (! 242). Take additional measures if necessary.
ƒ The mounting plate of the control cabinet must have the following properties:
– electrically conductive
– free of lacquer
ƒ The mechanical connections must always be ensured.
ƒ A free air circulation must be ensured for dissipating the heat.
ƒ The described EMC properties are provided if the following conditions are complied
with:
– The devices are mounted according to the arrangement concept described.
– The prepared cables are used and remain unchanged.

262  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

5.5.2 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Mounting grid
We recommend to provide the mounting plate with a grid pattern of M5 threaded holes
for attaching the devices. This preparation enables easy attachment of the devices, and the
device sizes 1, 2, ... n can thus be mounted directly adjacent to each other.

 Note!
ƒ Permissible are M5 screw and washer assemblies or hexagon socket screws
with washer.
ƒ Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm / 26 lb−in.
ƒ The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7
mm.

SSP94PN010

 Mounting with backplane for attaching the power supply module

 Grid hole pattern for installation backplane
 Grid hole pattern for other device sizes or built−on/footprint filters (only Single Drive)
 Cable duct
1
... Device size, mounting holes used
3

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  263

5 Power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Standard device with installation backplane

SSP94PN001

Type Dimensions a Weight

Power supply Installation backplane [mm] [kg]
module
E94APNE0104 E94AZPP0104 60 2.6
E94APNE0364 E94AZPP0364 120 5.3

264  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Arrangement of the devices

0 1
L1
L2
L3
+

+UG
-UG
E94AZxPxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx
E94AZEX100
...

M M
3~ 3~

+UG
-UG

+UG
-UG
(E94AZPPxxxx)
E94APNExxxx
E94AZxPxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

...

M M
3~ 3~

SSP94FF003

Fig. 5−3 Arrangement concept

 Standard mounting: side mounting
 Mounting variant: top mounting
E94AZxPxxxx Filter
E94APNExxxx 9400 DC power supply module
(up to 36 A/18 kW with E94AZPPxxxx installation backplane)
E94AZEX100 DC input module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane for 9400 axis module

A DC−bus connection has to be planned and dimensioned taking the technical data into
account.
How to arrange the devices via the DC busbars for operation in the DC−bus connection:
ƒ Arrange the devices in a row from left to right.
ƒ Install the supplying device on the left:
– DC power supply module (in a first row),
– DC input module (in the following rows).
ƒ Install the multi drive axis controllers to the right from the highest to the lowest
power (recommendation).
ƒ For increasing the braking power also single drive axis controllers can be integrated.
For this purpose these axis controllers have to be equipped with the optional busbar
mounting set (E94AZJAxxx).

 Note!
If the first axis module is not connected to the DC busbar, the cable between
power supply module and axis module must not be longer than 5 m.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  265

5 Power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Installation steps
Proceed as follows for installation:
1. Prepare mounting plate with M5 threaded holes according to the mounting grid.
– Start on the left with the installation backplane of the DC power supply module
E94AZPNxxxx.
– Install the axis modules from the left to the right with decreasing rated power.
2. Screw the installation backplane onto the mounting plate. Do not tighten the
screws yet.
– Use M5 screw and washer assemblies or M5 hexagon socket screws with washer.
– The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7 mm.
3. Align all components.
4. When busbars are used: Connect busbars.
5. Tightly screw the components onto the mounting plate.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

266  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

5.5.3 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Mounting grid
We recommend to provide the mounting plate with a grid pattern of M5 threaded holes
for attaching the devices. This preparation enables easy attachment of the devices, and the
device sizes 1, 2, ... n can thus be mounted directly adjacent to each other.

 Note!
ƒ Permissible are M5 screw and washer assemblies or hexagon socket screws
with washer.
ƒ Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm / 26 lb−in.
ƒ The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7
mm.

S94PN10040

 Grid hole pattern for installation backplane

 Grid hole pattern for other device sizes or filters mounted below or beside the device (only for
Single Drive)
 Cable duct
1
... Device size, mounting holes used
5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  267

5 Power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Dimensions

S94PN10020

Type Dimension a Mass Device size

Power supply [mm] [kg]
module
E94APNE1004 210 13.5 4
E94APNE2454 390 28.5 5

268  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Arrangement of the devices

0 1
L1
L2
L3
+

+UG
-UG
E94AZxPxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx
E94AZEX100
...

M M
3~ 3~

+UG
-UG

+UG
-UG
(E94AZPPxxxx)
E94APNExxxx
E94AZxPxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

...

M M
3~ 3~

SSP94FF003

Fig. 5−4 Arrangement concept

 Standard mounting: side mounting
 Mounting variant: top mounting
E94AZxPxxxx Filter
E94APNExxxx 9400 DC power supply module
(up to 36 A/18 kW with E94AZPPxxxx installation backplane)
E94AZEX100 DC input module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane for 9400 axis module

A DC−bus connection has to be planned and dimensioned taking the technical data into
account.
How to arrange the devices via the DC busbars for operation in the DC−bus connection:
ƒ Arrange the devices in a row from left to right.
ƒ Install the supplying device on the left:
– DC power supply module (in a first row),
– DC input module (in the following rows).
ƒ Install the multi drive axis controllers to the right from the highest to the lowest
power (recommendation).
ƒ For increasing the braking power also single drive axis controllers can be integrated.
For this purpose these axis controllers have to be equipped with the optional busbar
mounting set (E94AZJAxxx).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  269

5 Power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Installation steps
Proceed as follows for installation:
1. Prepare M5 threaded holes on the mounting plate according to the mounting grid.
– Always use all specified fixing points.
2. Screw the device onto the mounting plate. Do not tighten the screws yet.
– Use M5 screw and washer assemblies or M5 hexagon socket screws with washer.
3. Repeat step 2 with installation backplanes that can be directly installed.
4. Align all devices and installation backplanes.
5. When busbars are used: Connect the busbars now.
6. Tightly screw all devices and installation backplanes onto the mounting plate.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

270  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Important notes

5.6 Wiring

5.6.1 Important notes

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
The leakage current to earth (PE) is > 3.5 mA AC or > 10 mA DC.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the device in the event of an error.
Protective measures:
Implement the measures required in EN 61800−5−1. Especially:
ƒ Fixed installation
– Implement PE connection in compliance with standards.
– Connect PE conductor twice or PE conductor cross−section  10 mm2.
ƒ Connection with a connector for industrial applications according to
IEC 60309 (CEE):
– PE conductor cross−section  2.5 mm2 as part of a multi−core supply cable.
– Provide for suitable strain relief.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  271

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

 Stop!
No device protection if the mains voltage is too high
The mains input is not internally fused.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Destruction of the device if the mains voltage is too high.
Protective measures:
ƒ Observe the maximally permissible mains voltage.
ƒ Fuse the device correctly on the supply side against mains fluctuations and
voltage peaks.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

5.6.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

 Note!
The fuse current given in the following is the maximum permissible value. This
prevents fire and electrical hazard in the event of an error of the device.
The fuse must be smaller or equal to the maximum permissible value, taking
the following into consideration:
ƒ The maximum possible cable cross−section
ƒ the laying system (e.g. tap installation)
ƒ the ambient temperature
ƒ the relevant regulations (e.g. UL508A, NEC70 and others).

272  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000
rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when protected by CC, J or T class
fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when
protected by class CC, J or T class fuses.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table.
– Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.
ƒ The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication
that a fault current has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, current−carrying parts and other components of the
controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the
current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature is 45 °C.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature with derating is 55 °C.
ƒ E94APNE0104 ... E94APNE01004: Use 60/75 °C copper wire only, except for
control circuits.
E94APNE2454: Use 75 °C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.
ƒ These products are intended for use in overvoltage category III.

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Standard installation Motor group installation
Nominal value (max.) [A] Nominal value (max.) [A]
E94APNE0104 15 15
E94APNE0364 60 60
E94APNE1004 125 125
E94APNE2454 300 300

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  273

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − French
Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100
000 ampères symétriques eff., maximum 480 V, avec protection par des
fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères symétriques eff.,
maximum 480 V, avec protection par des fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Utiliser les fusibles spécifiés comme indiqué dans le tableau.
– La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément au National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code, et
aux autres dispositions applicables au niveau local.
ƒ Le déclenchement du dispositif de protection du circuit de dérivation peut
être dû à une coupure qui résulte d’un courant de défaut. Pour limiter le
risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique, examiner les pièces porteuses de
courant et les autres éléments du contrôleur ; les remplacer s’ils sont
endommagés. Le relais de surcharge doit être remplacé en cas de grillage de
l’élément traversé par le courant.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 45 °C
ƒ Température ambiante maximale avec réduction de puissance : 55 °C
ƒ E94APNE0104 ... E94APNE01004 : utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en
cuivre 60/75 °C, circuits de commande exceptés.
E94APNE2454 : utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 75 °C,
circuits de commande exceptés.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.
ƒ Ces produits sont conçus pour une utilisation dans la catégorie de
surtension III.

Protection du circuit de dérivation / protection contre les courts−circuits par fusibles

conformément à UL248
Type Installation standard Installation au sein d´un groupe moteur
Valeur nominale (max.) [A] Valeur nominale (max.) [A]
E94APNE0104 15 15
E94APNE0364 60 60
E94APNE1004 125 125
E94APNE2454 300 300

274  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

5.6.3 Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
ƒ DC bus, cable length from 0.3 m
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  275

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

5.6.4 Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Example circuit

SSP94PSP21

Fig. 5−5 Example circuit for installation backplane and DC power supply module
E94APNExxx4 9400 DC power supply module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane
E94xxxExxxx 9400 axis module
E94AZEX100 DC input module
F1 ... Fx Fuses
Z1 Mains filter/RFI filter (optional)
K1 Mains contactor
RB Brake resistor
 Alternative: mains connection at the bottom
 24 V supply voltage for control electronics according to IEC 61131−2

 Tip!
Complete the wiring of the installation backplane before plugging in the
standard device. The upper terminals of the installation backplane cannot be
connected with a plugged−in standard device.

276  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

Connecting busbars

SSP94PN201

Fig. 5−6 Example: Connecting busbars

Proceed as follows to connect the busbars:

1. If devices of the interconnected system have already been in operation:
– If necessary, switch off the supply system and wait until the discharge time has
elapsed (depending on the device, this may take up to 20 minutes).
– Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.
2. Loosen the busbar screws (do not remove them completely).
3. Push the busbars as far as possible to the left towards the adjacent busbar.
– Ensure that there is good contact to the adjacent busbar.
4. Tighten the busbar screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.2 ... 3.5 Nm (28 ... 31 lb−in).
5. Screw the components onto the mounting plate, if necessary.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  277

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

 Tip!
Complete the wiring of the installation backplane before plugging in the
standard device. The upper terminals of the installation backplane cannot be
connected with a plugged−in standard device.

Mains
Terminal X111 Labelling Description
(left part)
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP940X111

Terminal X112 Labelling Description

(right part)
L1 Alternative connection at the bottom: mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP940X112

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

278  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Devices in the range 10 ... 36 A (4 ... 18 kW)

External brake resistor

Terminal X112 Labelling Description
(left part)
Rb1 External brake resistor
Rb2

SSP940X112

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

DC bus
Terminal X111 Labelling Description
(right part)
+UG Alternative option for DC−bus voltage connection (compatible to
−UG 9300 series)

E94ARNE0244: maximum current Idc = 50 A

SSP940X111

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device sizes 1 + 2:
flexible 2.5 12 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 PZ0
with wire end ferrule
Device size 3:
flexible
10/16 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
with/without wire end
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  279

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

5.6.5 Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Example circuit

S94PN10021

Fig. 5−7 Connection concept

E94APNExxx4 9400 DC power supply module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane
E94xxxExxxx 9400 axis module
E94AZEX100 DC input module
F1 ... Fx Fuses
Z1 Mains filter/RFI filter (optional)
K1 Mains contactor
RB Brake resistor
 Alternative: mains connection at the bottom
 24 V supply voltage for control electronics according to IEC 61131−2

280  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Connecting busbars

SSP94PN401

Fig. 5−8 Example: Connecting busbars

Proceed as follows to connect the busbars:

1. If devices of the interconnected system have already been in operation:
– If necessary, switch off the supply system and wait until the discharge time has
elapsed (depending on the device, this may take up to 20 minutes).
– Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.
2. Loosen the busbar screws (do not remove them completely).
3. Push the busbars as far as possible to the left towards the adjacent busbar.
– Ensure that there is good contact to the adjacent busbar.
4. Tighten the busbar screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.2 ... 3.5 Nm (28 ... 31 lb−in).
5. Screw the components onto the mounting plate, if necessary.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).
The wiring area of the power terminals is designed for the cables being routed upwards

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  281

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

and/or downwards. Usually the AC mains cables come from above. When filters are used,
the connection cables are fed from below (for filters mounted beside the module) or from
above (for filters mounted above the module). The protection against contact in the cover
can be removed accordingly.
To improve the cable handling, the cable cross−section can also be divided onto two cables.
The ring cable lugs used must not exceed the dimensions specified here.
ƒ E94APNE1004 (device size 4, connection M8): max. cable lug width 20 mm
ƒ E94APNE2454 (device size 5, connection M10): max. cable lug width 33 mm

S94PN10050

Fig. 5−9 Arrangement of the power connections

282  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Wiring
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

Mains
Terminal X111 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
 Fig. 5−9 L2
L3
# C
Connection
ti ffor th
the supply−side
l id PE conductor
d t

Terminal X112 Labelling Description

L1 Alternative connection at the bottom: mains phases L1, L2, L3
 Fig. 5−9 L2
L3
# C ti ffor th
Connection l id PE conductor
the supply−side d t

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 4:
50 1/0
Connection with ring 8 71 SW13
(2 x 25) −
cable lug M8
Device size 5:
120 4/0
Connection with ring 15 133 SW15
(2 x 50) (2 x 1/0)
cable lug M10

DC bus
Terminal X111 Labelling Description
+UG Connection of DC−bus voltage
 Fig. 5−9 −UG Cables routed upwards

Terminal X112 Labelling Description

+UG Connection of DC−bus voltage
 Fig. 5−9 −UG Cables routed downwards

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 4:
70 2/0
Connection with ring 8 71 SW13
(2 x 35) −
cable lug M8
Device size 5:
150 300 mcm
Connection with ring 15 133 SW15
(2 x 70) (2 x 2/0)
cable lug M10

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  283

5 Power supply modules
Wiring
Devices in the range 100 ... 245 A (48 ... 119 kW)

External brake resistor

Terminal X112 Labelling Description
Rb1 External brake resistor
 Fig. 5−9 Rb2

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 4:
flexible 16 4 2.5 ... 3.0 22.2 ... 26.6 6x2
with wire end ferrule
Device size 5:
flexible 35 1 3.2 ... 3.7 28.4 ... 32.8 6x2
with wire end ferrule

284  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Control terminals

5.7 Control terminals

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ 24 V supply
ƒ Digital signals (inputs and outputs)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  285

5 Power supply modules
Control terminals

24 V supply
The devices can only function correctly when the 24−V supply is switched on!

E94APNE0104 and E94APNE0364:

Terminal X11 Labelling Description
GE GND external supply

SSP9400X11 24E 24 V external supply through safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
IEC 61131−2, 19.2 ... 28.8 V, residual ripple max. ±5 %
Current during operation: 450 mA
Starting current: 4 A for 100 ms

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

E94APNE1004 and E94APNE2454:

Terminal X11 Labelling Description
GE GND external supply
24E 24 V external supply through safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
IEC 61131−2, 19.2 ... 28.8 V, residual ripple max. ±5 %
Current during operation: 1.4 A
Starting current: 4 A for 100 ms
9400SSP000X2
SB Reserved

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

State bus
Power supply modules are not designed as nodes on the state bus of the controller.

286  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Power supply modules 5
Control terminals

Digital inputs, digital outputs

Terminal X12 labelling Description
GOI GND digital out/in
DI1 External control of the brake chopper; its only purpose is to
synchronise the brake choppers if a second power supply module is
used.
DO1 without function
DO2 Brake chopper active: HIGH level
DO3 Short circuit of brake chopper,
active: LOW level (fail−safe) Reset by switching of
DO4 Overtemperature of heatsink, 24 V at X11.
SSP9400X12 active: LOW level (fail−safe)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

Synchronisation
The device−internal brake chopper operates automatically and independently even if the
control inputs are not wired.
Depending on the selected mains voltage, the brake resistor is connected if the DC−bus
voltage is exceeded (e.g. due to excessive braking energy).
If the brake choppers of power supply modules in a DC−bus connection need to be
synchronised, proceed as follows:
1. The 24−V supply of the control card (X11) must be independent of the mains voltage
at the mains connection and switched on.
2. All power supply modules of the DC−bus connection must have the same brake
chopper threshold (according to the mains).
3. The DO2 (X12) digital output of the master power supply module needs to be wired
to the DI1 (X12) digital input of every other power supply module of the DC−bus
connection. The GOI connections (X12) of all power supply modules of the DC−bus
connection must be interconnected.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  287

5 Power supply modules
Final works

5.8 Final works

How to proceed:
ƒ Adjust the setting for the mains voltage/brake chopper threshold to the mains
Setting of mains voltage/brake chopper threshold 2
Pos.  ULN [V] UBRmax [V] 1
OFF
500 V 500 790
480 V
OFF
ON

400 V ON
230 V 480 765
MAINS
OFF
1 2

OFF
400 725
ON
ON
230 390
94APNEDS01 ON

ƒ Switch on the 24 V supply

ƒ Check the operating status by means of the LED display
If you want to continue commissioning:
ƒ Switch on the mains

288  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Device features

6 Regenerative power supply modules

6.1 Device features

The most important device features at a glance:

ƒ Regenerative power supply modules supply the DC buses of several controllers of a
drive system with energy.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules feed braking energy back to the AC mains.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules with the assigned mains filter are the central
AC mains connection within DC−bus operation.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules have an internal brake chopper and a terminal
for a brake resistor.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules of the 9400 series are equipped with a busbar
connection (max. 100 A) for the simple connection and side−by−side mounting of the
9400 controllers.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules generally supply controllers of the "Multi Drive"
version. However, also controllers of the "Single Drive" version can be implemented
in a DC−bus operation if the data and notes in the "DC−bus operation" chapter are
observed.
– Required accessories (! 341)
– Set−up for operation on IT systems (! 358)
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules are designed as multi−range voltage units
(230/400/480 V).
ƒ There are two types of regenerative power supply modules:
– E94ARNE0134,
rated current: in motor mode 26 A, in generator mode 13 A,
device size: 3,
Design: compact basic device with installation backplane
– E94ARNE0244,
rated current: in motor mode 47 A, in generator mode 23.5 A,
device size: 3,
Design: compact basic device with installation backplane
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules are assigned to specifically designed mains
filters and can only be operated with them.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules and filters can be mounted in the mounting
grid of the 9400 series.
ƒ Regenerative power supply modules allow parallel supply. Your Lenze contact will be
pleased to help you with the dimensioning.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  289

6 Regenerative power supply modules
General data and operating conditions

6.2 General data and operating conditions

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

Mains data
Mains types With earthed & Unrestricted use The measures described for IT
point systems must be observed
and carried out in all systems
IT systems Unrestricted use (TN, TT and IT) and for all
interconnected modules
( 324)!
Noise emission EN 61800−3 With E94AZMR0xx4SDB mains filter: 6 x 10 m, C2
With E94AZMR0xx4LDB mains filter: 10 x 50 m, C2
Radiation: category C3
Noise immunity (according to requirements of EN 61800−3)
Electrostatic discharge EN 61000−4−2 8 kV for air discharge,
(ESD) 4 kV for contact discharge to housing
Radio frequency
Conducted EN 61000−4−6 150 kHz ... 80 MHz, 10 V/m 80% AM (1kHz)
Interference (housing) EN 61000−4−3 80 MHz ... 1000 MHz, 10 V/m 80% AM (1kHz)

290  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
General data and operating conditions

Protection of persons and devices

Enclosure EN 60529 IP 20
Not in the wire range of
NEMA 250 Protection against contact in the lower terminals
accordance with type 1
Insulation resistance EN 61800−5−1 Overvoltage category III
from 2000 m amsl: external measures for complying with
the overvoltage category II are required, e.g.
 connecting isolating transformer upstream
 connecting overvoltage protection system upstream
Insulation of control EN 61800−5−1 up to 2000 m amsl:
circuits Safe mains isolation by double/reinforced insulation for
mains with neutral earthing with a rated voltage for the
external conductor/star point up to 300 V.
from 2000 m amsl:
If an overvoltage protection system is connected upstream,
additional external separating measures are required for
maintaining the safe mains isolation.
Short−circuit strength EN 61800−5−1 DC−bus connection: Not short−circuit−proof
Brake resistor connection: without restrictions
Control connections: without restrictions
Discharge current EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA Observe regulations and
safety instructions!
Cyclic mains switching Cyclic mains switching of 5 times in 5 minutes is permissible
without restrictions.

Mounting conditions
Mounting place in the control cabinet
Mounting position vertical
Clearance
above/beneath Comply with the device−relating mounting instructions.
at the side Can be installed in a row without any clearance

Supply conditions for the regenerative power supply module

AC mains operation Connection at the assigned mains filter
DC−bus operation Direct connection of the axis modules via terminals or
busbar systems
See the chapter on DC−bus operation in the Hardware
Manual for further information.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  291

6 Regenerative power supply modules
General data and operating conditions

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Assignment of filters to standard devices

 Note!
The operation of the regenerative power supply modules is only permissible
with an assigned mains filter.

Mains filter Regenerative power supply module Device size

Standard device Installation
backplane
E94AZMR0264SDB
E94ARNE0134
E94AZMR0264LDB
E94AZPP0364 GG3
E94AZMR0474SDB
E94ARNE0244
E94AZMR0474LDB
E94AZMR0xxSDB −> "short distance" E94AZMR0xxLDB −> "long distance"

General electrical data

Power loss PV [W]
Type Total (when operating with IaN) Constant (control electronics only)
E94ARNE0134 150 40
E94ARNE0244 230 40

Power loss Inductance Regenerative Voltage drop

inductance
PV [W] L [mH] Lgen [mH] U [V]
E94AZMR0264SDB 65
0.77 10 % 0.84 10 % 6.3
E94AZMR0264LDB 72
E94AZMR0474SDB 85
0.42 10 % 1.54 10 % 6.2
E94AZMR0474LDB 101

292  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Overview

6.3 Rated data

6.3.1 Overview

Input data (on the supply side)

Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 230/400/480 50/60 26/26/26 19.5/19.5/19.5 3
In generator mode 230/400/480 50/60 13/13/13 9.8/9.8/9.8 3
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 230/400/480 50/60 47/47/47 35/35/35 3
In generator mode 230/400/480 50/60 23.5/23.5/23.5 17.6/17.6/17.6 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Output data (on the DC side)

Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 325/565/675 0 (DC) 32/32/32 24/24/24 −
In generator mode 345/586/699 0 (DC) 16/16/16 12/12/12 −
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 325/565/675 0 (DC) 57/57/57 43/43/43 −
In generator mode 325/565/699 0 (DC) 28.5/28.5/28.5 21.4/21.4/21.4 −
 Temperature in the control cabinet

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  293

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

6.3.2 Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Input data (on the supply side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 230 10.3
In generator mode 230 5.2
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 230 18.7
In generator mode 230 9.4

Output data (on the DC side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 325 260 − 0 % ... 370 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 32 8.6 96 25.8 48 12.9
In generator mode 16 4.3 48 12.9 24 6.4
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 57 15.6 171 46.6 86 23.3
In generator mode 28.5 7.8 87 23.3 44 11.6

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

294  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 230 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

Switching threshold UBRmax: 345 V
RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94ARNE0134 18.0 19.2 6.6 9.4 1.6 150 15 15
E94ARNE0244 9.0 38.3 13.2 21.7 4.2 150 15 15

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  295

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

6.3.3 Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Input data (on the supply side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 400 18.0
In generator mode 400 9.0
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 400 32.5
In generator mode 400 16.3

Output data (on the DC side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 565 455 − 0 % ... 620 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 32 15 96 44.9 48 22.4
In generator mode 16 7.5 48 22.4 24 11.2
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 57 27 171 81.1 86 40.5
In generator mode 28.5 13.5 87 40.5 44 20.2

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

296  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Operation at rated mains voltage 400 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

Switching threshold UBRmax: 586 V
RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94ARNE0134 27.0 21.7 12.7 10.6 3.0 150 15 15
E94ARNE0244 18.0 32.6 19.1 18.4 6.1 150 15 15

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  297

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

6.3.4 Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Input data (on the supply side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Continuous input power

Type [V] SL [kVA]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 480 21.6
In generator mode 480 10.8
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 480 39.0
In generator mode 480 19.5

Output data (on the DC side)

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 675 480 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % −

Output current and output power

100 % 5−s cycle 3−min cycle
Type IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW] IDC [A] PDC [kW]
E94ARNE0134
In motor mode 32 18.0 96 53.8 48 26.9
In generator mode 16 9.0 48 26.9 24 13.4
E94ARNE0244
In motor mode 57 32.4 171 97.3 86 48.7
In generator mode 28.5 16.2 87 48.6 44 24.3

100 % Permanent rated values

5−s cycle Cycle for the second−range
(0.5 s overload/4.5 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)
3−min cycle Cycle for the minute−range
(60 s overload/120 s recovery time with 75 % of the permanent rated value)

298  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Operation with rated mains voltage 480 V

Rated data for internal brake chopper

Switching threshold UBRmax: 727 V
RBmin IBRmax PBRmax IBRd PBd tZ ton tfp
[] [A] [kW] [A] [kW] [s] [s] [s]
Type
E94ARNE0134 27.0 25.9 18.1 12.7 4.3 150 15 15
E94ARNE0244 18.0 38.8 27.9 21.9 8.7 150 15 15

RBmin Minimum brake resistance, nominal value ±10 %

IBRmax Peak current
PBRmax Peak braking power
IBRd Continuous current RMS − important for the dimensioning of the cables
PBd Continuous braking power
tZ Cycle time, periodic load change with running time and recovery time
ton Running time
tZ − ton Recovery time
tfp Maximum running time without initial load and compliance with the recovery
time

Note on the brake chopper data

Due to thermal load, the resistance value changes and therefore the dependent rated data
as well.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power maximally for the specified time ton
within a cycle time tZ.
The brake chopper can output the peak braking power from unloaded states once for the
time tfp, e. g. after mains connection or after a recovery time of > 5 x tZ.
If the times are exceeded, the brake chopper is clocked so that only the continuous braking
power is output. This serves to the protection of the brake chopper, however, it does not
protect the brake resistor. The brake resistor connected can be protected separately by
parameterisation (C00129 ... C00133) or a thermal contact.
Further information can be found in the software manual.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  299

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Regenerative feedback with brake chopper

6.3.5 Regenerative feedback with brake chopper

Operation in motor mode

The regenerative power supply modules provide the energy for the DC bus from which the
axis controllers are supplied. If the peak voltage of the mains is higher than the peak
voltage of the DC bus, a current flows from the mains via the DC−bus into the DC−bus
connection.

Operation in generator mode

When drives are decelerated, the excessive energy is fed into the DC bus via the controllers.
The DC−bus voltage rises.

Regenerative feedback
If the DC−bus voltage exceeds the peak value of the mains voltage, the regenerative
feedback is activated.
Up to the maximum regenerative power PMmax, the controller can dissipate the energy
into the mains. If the regenerative energy and, accordingly, the DC−bus voltage continues
to rise, the "Clamp mode" device protection is activated. This leads to an overvoltage
switch−off.
In this way, the devices are protected, but the drives coast to standstill.

Regenerative feedback with brake chopper

It is possible to use the integrated brake chopper to avoid the "Clamp mode". For this,
connect the brake resistor recommended as additional component.
With regenerative powers of Pgen > PBron, the brake chopper starts to dissipate part of the
energy via the brake resistor. The following formula applies: Pgen = PMgen + PBr.
The following diagram shows how the regenerative power is divided between the mains
and the brake resistor.
P
PMmax + PBRmax

PMmax
PMgen
PBRon

PBRmax
PBR

Pgen
94SSPVR050 (R)

Fig. 6−1 Power regeneration − power characteristics for deceleration in the limit range (legend: Fig. 6−2)

300  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Regenerative feedback with brake chopper

Example: Deceleration with power recovery and brake chopper

The following diagram shows the time characteristics of the speed and the corresponding
power. Regenerative powers (into the DC bus connection) are shown as negative values.
This energy must be dissipated by the regenerative power supply module to the supply
system. In the example, the regenerative power is that high that a brake chopper is
required.

Pmot P

0
EMgen t
Pgen

PBRon
PMmax
EBR
PMmax + PBRmax

n 

t
94SSPVR050 (E)

Fig. 6−2 Power regeneration − energy characteristics for deceleration in the limit range
P Power (general)
t Time axis
n Speed
Pmot Power in motor mode
Pgen Regenerative power
PMgen Regenerative power into mains
PMmax max. regenerative power into mains (= cycle 1, PDC)
PBR Power loss via brake resistor
PBRmax max. power loss via brake resistor
PBron Switch−on position of brake chopper
EMgen Regenerative energy into mains
EBR Energy loss via brake resistor
 Braking

The hatched area EMgen shows the energy dissipated to the supply system. The hatched
area EBr shows the power loss in the brake resistor. With cyclic processes, the power loss
must be referred to the cycle time t (mean time between two deceleration processes) to
obtain the mean power loss (=continuous power) of the brake resistor: PBrAV = EBr / t. The
mean power loss is important for the dimensioning of the brake resistor. Mains voltage
tolerances and resistance value changes due to the tolerance and the temperature rise
must be considered.
Ur PDC (100 %) PMmax PBRmax PMmax + PBRmax PBron UBRmax
Type [V] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [V]
E94ARNE0134 4.3 12.9 6.6 19.5 9.9
230 345
E94ARNE0244 7.8 23.3 13.2 36.5 17.9
E94ARNE0134 7.5 22.4 12.7 35.1 17.2
400 586
E94ARNE0244 13.5 40.5 19.1 59.6 31.0
E94ARNE0134 9.0 26.9 18.1 45.0 18.8
480 699
E94ARNE0244 16.2 48.6 27.1 75.7 34.0

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  301

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Fuses and cable cross−sections

6.3.6 Fuses and cable cross−sections

Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range

ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 ... 480 180 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 ... 65

Installation in accordance with EN 60204−1

The data are recommendations. Other dimensioning/laying systems are possible (e.g.
according VDE 0298−4).
The cable cross−sections apply under the following conditions:
ƒ Use of PVC−insulated copper cables
ƒ Conductor temperature < 70 °C, ambient temperature < 45°C
ƒ No bundling of cables or cores
ƒ Three loaded cores
Type   L1, L2, L3 − laying system FI 1)
B2 C F
[A] [A] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [mA]
E94AZMR0264xD
B C32 − 10 6 −
E94ARNE0134
E94AZMR0474xD
B − 80 25 16 −
E94ARNE0244
 Circuit breaker
 Fuse of the utilisation category gG/gL or semiconductor fuses or the utilisation category gRL
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
Observe national and regional regulations!

Installation to UL
Only use UL−approved cables, fuses and fuse holders.
UL fuse: Voltage 600 V; CC, J or T class fuses
Type standard installation motor group installation FI 1)
 valeur  valeur
L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3
nominale (max.) nominale (max.)
[A] [AWG] [A] [AWG] [mA]
E94AZMR0264xD 45 6 70 3
B
E94ARNE0134
E94AZMR0474xD
B 70 3 70 3
E94ARNE0244
 Fuse
1) Universal−current−sensitive earth−leakage circuit breaker, RCD type B
If several devices or cable lengths > 50 m are used, it is possible that the circuit breaker will respond, depending on
the type of cable and the switching frequency.
Observe national and regional regulations!

302  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

6.3.7 Current−time diagrams

In addition to the data for overcurrent operation within the 5−s cycle or 3−min cycle, here
you are provided with information on the dimensioning of application−oriented cycles.
You can use the following information to find out permissible load periods with
overcurrents and necessary recovery times with limited mains currents. If the thus
determined mains currents and times are adhered to, the Ixt monitoring function for the
protection of devices will not respond.

Characteristics
The following characteristics ("Current−time diagrams") describe the device utilisation via
amperage and the duration of current flow.
The left part of the diagram (negative time data) represents the overload phase, while the
right part of the diagram (positive time data) shows the relieving phase.
Devices with an identical Ixt behaviour are combined within a diagram. A second diagram
enlarges a cutout area to improve the clearness of display.

Requirements
ƒ Mains voltage
In the diagrams, a mains voltage of UN = 400 V is assumed. Current derating depending
on the mains voltage is also necessary in the case of the devices. In other words, the
currents are weighted differently in the Ixt monitoring function. The continuous
currents indicated there are then the 100 % values that are needed for working with
the diagrams.
ƒ Ambient temperature
The ambient temperature may be maximally TAmb < 45 °C. In the case of higher
ambient temperatures the reduced continuous currents have to be taken into
consideration.
ƒ Regenerative mode/motoring mode
The application example relates to regenerative mode. In motoring mode, the
permissible mains currents are doubled (c.f. rated data).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  303

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

Application example
ƒ Drive task
– A mains current of Iol = 4.0 A is needed for a time of tol = 3 s.
– During the recovery phase, a mains current of Ire = 1.0 A flows.
ƒ Problem
– How long is the recovery phase tre when the E94ARNE0xx4 controller is used?
ƒ The currents required are based on the rated device current:
– Iol = 4.0 A/2.5 A = 160 % − selected characteristic: 175 %
– Ire = 1.0A/2.5 A = 40 % − selected characteristic: 50 %
– Due to the short overcurrent time of tol = 3 s, the diagram of part of the
E94ARNE0xx4 device is made use of.
ƒ Procedure within the diagram
–  Beginning from the time axis at tol = 3 s, draw a straight line to the selected
characteristic at 175 % (corresponds to the minimum required mains current Iol).
–  Draw a straight line from the point of intersection horizontally to the right to
the selected characteristic, the recovery phase, at 50 %.
–  Draw a perpendicular line from the point of intersection back to the time axis.
–  Read the minimum required duration of recovery on the time axis.

150 % ‚ 75 %

ƒ
60 %
175 %

50 %
25 %
200 % 0%
350 %
275 %
300 %
250 %

400 %

225 %


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s] „
SZD_E94A024_044 BSP

ƒ Result in the example

– The duration of recovery has to be at least tre = 5 s!

304  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Current−time diagrams

E94ARNE0134 and E94ARNE0244

Type Vr 100 % fchopp
[V] [A] [Setting]
E94ARNE0134 in motor mode: 26.0
in generator mode: 13.0
400/480 not relevant
E94ARNE0244 in motor mode: 47.0
in generator mode: 23.5
250 ... 300 %

150 % 175 % 200 % 225 %

0% 25 % 50 % 60 % 75 %

80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244

Fig. 6−3 Diagram for E94ARNE0134 and E94ARNE0244

tol Duration of the load phase
tre Duration of the recovery phase

75 %

150 %

60 %

50 %

25 %
275 %
300 %

175 % 200 % 225 % 250 % 0%

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
tol [s] tre [s]
SZD_E94A074_244L

Fig. 6−4 Area cutout for E94ARNE0134 and E94ARNE0244

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  305

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

6.3.8 Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

When using the mains filters assigned, conditions must be observed for compliance with
EMC class C2:
ƒ The measures for the use on IT systems must be applied to all axis modules in the
interconnection (separation of internal filter components from PE, (! 358)).
ƒ The maximum sum total of all motor cable lengths ( lmot) for the filter used must
be observed.

Motor cable lengths in the interconnection

The assigned filters are designed for lmot
(E94AZMR...SDB: 60 m (= 6 x 10 m), E94AZMR...LDB: 500 m (= 10 x 50 m)).
For a different number of axis modules, lmot can be determined from the following
diagrams.

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Σl[m]
SSP94FF015 B

Fig. 6−5 Filter E94AZMP...SDB (short distance): total motor lengths according to number of axis modules

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
Σl[m]
SSP94FF015 A

Fig. 6−6 Filter E94AZMP...LDB (long distance): total motor lengths according to axis modules

306  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Rated data
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

With different motor cable lengths, per axis at least 25 % of the longest cable must be
considered when calculating the total motor cable length.
Example: 1 Motor cable length lmot [m]
Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 6 6
0.25 * 20 = 5
2 ... 4 3 * 10 3 * 10
5 20  20
Total 56 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 56
EMC class C2 will be complied with.

Example 2 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 4 4*5 0.25 * 40 = 10 4 * 10
5 40  40
Total 60 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 80
EMC class C2 will not be complied with.

Example: 3 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 3 3 * 100  3 * 100
4 50 0.25 * 100 = 25 50
5 ... 10 6 * 15 6 * 25
Total 410 max. permissible for 10 axes:
< 500 500
EMC class C2 will be complied with.

Example: 4 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 4 4 * 100  4 * 100
5 ... 10 6 * 15 0.25 * 100 = 25 6 * 25
Total 490 max. permissible for 10 axes:
< 500 550
EMC class C2 will not be complied with.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  307

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Rated data
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

Constellations with unfavourable or intensifying parasitic couplings

Compliance with EMC category C2 may also be interfered with by other circumstances:
ƒ Distribution of the axis modules over several control cabinets without efficient HF
equipotential bonding between the mounting plates
ƒ No use of Lenze system cables or cables with the same specifications
ƒ Poor connection of motor cable shields
ƒ Motor cable interruptions
ƒ Other interference sources (e.g. switched−mode power supplies)
ƒ Isochronous switching of the inverter output stages

308  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Device description

6.4 Device description

This page remains blank to give you a clearly arranged overview of the following subject
on the next double page.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  309

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Device description

Standard device

SSP94RN012

310  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Device description

Standard device  Design

Pos. Description VR module
MXI1 Expansion slot 1, e.g. for communication
MXI2 Expansion slot 2, e.g. for communication
MMI Storage module slot
MSI Reserved 
X1 System bus (CAN), under the cover
X2 24 V supply and statebus
X3 Analog inputs and analog outputs 2/2
X4 Digital outputs 4
X5 Digital inputs 8
X6 Diagnostics
X7 Reserved (resolver) 
X8 Control signals for mains filter (encoder)
 Lower cover
 Retractable nameplate
 Upper cover
 Prominent warning label close to the device!

The LED display enables fast indication of several operating states.

LED Labelling Colour Description
CAN−RUN green CAN bus ok
CAN−ERR red CAN bus error
DRIVE READY green Standard device is ready for operation
DRIVE ERROR red Error in the standard device or application−induced
24 V green 24 V supply voltage ok
SSP94LED01 USER yellow Message parameterised by the application

Pos. Symbol Description

Long discharge time: All power terminals carry hazardous electrical voltages
 for a longer period of time after mains disconnection! Depending on the
device, this period of time may be up to 20 minutes.

 High discharge current: Carry out fixed installation and PE connection
according to EN 61800−5−1!

 Electrostatic sensitive devices: Before working on the device, the personnel

must be free of electrostatic charge!

Installation backplane  Design

Pos. Description VR module
X111 Mains supply via mains filter/DC−bus voltage
X112 Mains supply and mains power recovery via mains filter/external brake resistor
X109 DC busbar +
X110 DC busbar −

EMC shield clamp

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  311

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Device description

Mains filter

E94AZMR001

Pos. Description
 Mains filter
Mounting Instructions
Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Lifting aid
 Mounting aid for mounting base
 Parking position of the IT screw
# PE terminal
X320 Terminal L1 ... L3
X321 Connecting cable L1.1 ... L3.1
X322 Connecting cable L1.2 ... L3.2
X323 Terminal for 24−V supply voltage (use safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV), in accordance
with IEC 61131−2)
X324 Mains filter control signal

312  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Mechanical installation
Important notes

6.5 Mechanical installation

6.5.1 Important notes

 Note!
The devices must be installed in housings (e.g. control cabinets) to meet
applicable regulations.

 Stop!
Heavy device weight
The device is very heavy and must be lifted for the mounting.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Injury to persons, particularly backache when lifting and holding the device,
respectively
ƒ Injury to persons and damage to material assets due to the device falling
down
Protective measures:
ƒ The device must only be carried with a load bearing system such as an
indoor crane permitted for the device weight
ƒ Before the transport, the hoist, the load bearing system and lifting
accessories must be checked for sufficient payload and faultless status
ƒ Do not remove the hoist and the lifting accessories until the device lies safe
on a stable surface or is finally mounted.

ƒ The mounting location must always comply with the operating conditions specified
in the technical data (! 290). Take additional measures if necessary.
ƒ The mounting plate of the control cabinet must have the following properties:
– electrically conductive
– free of lacquer
ƒ The mechanical connections must always be ensured.
ƒ A free air circulation must be ensured for dissipating the heat.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  313

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

6.5.2 Dimensions

Mounting grid
We recommend to provide the mounting plate with a grid pattern of M5 threaded holes
for attaching the devices. This preparation enables easy attachment of the devices, and the
device sizes 1, 2, ... n can thus be mounted directly adjacent to each other.

 Note!
ƒ Permissible are M5 screw and washer assemblies or hexagon socket screws
with washer.
ƒ Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm / 26 lb−in.
ƒ The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7
mm.

SSP94PN010

 Mounting with backplane for attaching the power supply module

 Grid hole pattern for installation backplane
 Grid hole pattern for other device sizes or built−on/footprint filters (only Single Drive)
 Cable duct
1
... Device size, mounting holes used
3

314  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

Standard device with installation backplane

SSP94GGmSo000

Regenerative power supply module a

Standard device Installation backplane [mm] [kg]

E94ARNE0134
E94AZPP0364 120 8.1
E94ARNE0244

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  315

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Dimensions

Mains filter

E94AZMR002

a m b1 b2 b3

[mm] [kg]
E94AZRM0264SDB 25
149 60 240 5 260 5 100 5
E94AZRM0264LDB 26
E94AZRM0474SDB 36
209 90 250 5 270 5 110 5
E94AZRM0474LDB 37

316  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Mechanical installation
Arrangement of the devices

6.5.3 Arrangement of the devices

L1
L2
L3
+

+UG
-UG

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx
E94AZEX100
...

M M
3~ 3~

4
+UG
-UG
E94AZMR0xx4xDB

+UG
-UG
(E94AZPP0364)
E94ARNE0xx4

E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZPxxxxx

...

15 M M
4 3~ 3~

94ANGVR01

Fig. 6−7 Arrangement concept

E94AZMR0xx4xDB Mains filter
E94ARNE0xx4 Regenerative power supply module
(with E94AZPP0364 installation backplane)
E94AZEX100 DC−input module
E94AZPxxxxx installation backplane for 9400 axis module
+UG/−UG DC bus

A DC−bus connection with regenerative power supply module has to be planned and
dimensioned taking the technical data into account.
How to arrange the devices for operation in the DC−bus connection via the DC busbars:
ƒ Arrange the devices in a row from left to right.
ƒ Install the supplying device on the left:
– Regenerative power supply module with assigned mains filter (in a first row),
– Input module (in the following rows).
ƒ Install the multi drive axis controllers to the right from the highest to the lowest
power (recommendation).
ƒ For increasing the braking power also single drive axis controllers can be integrated.
For this purpose, these axis controllers have to be equipped with the optional busbar
mounting set (E94AZJAxxx). In order to carry out multi−supply applications, consult
Lenze.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  317

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Mechanical installation
Mounting steps

6.5.4 Mounting steps

Proceed as follows for installation:

1. Prepare mounting plate with M5 threaded holes according to the mounting grid.
– Start on the left with the installation backplane of the DC power supply module
E94AZPNxxxx.
– Install the axis modules from the left to the right with decreasing rated power.
2. Screw the installation backplane onto the mounting plate. Do not tighten the
screws yet.
– Use M5 screw and washer assemblies or M5 hexagon socket screws with washer.
– The screw joint in the installation backplane may jut out no more than 7 mm.
3. Align all components.
4. When busbars are used: Connect busbars.
5. Tightly screw the components onto the mounting plate.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

 Tip!
Before plugging the standard device into the installation backplane, read the
chapters "Disconnect internal PE connection" (! 324) and "Connecting
busbars" (! 327).

318  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Important notes

6.6 Wiring

6.6.1 Important notes

ƒ Installation must
– always be in accordance with the operating conditions specified in the Technical
data (! 290).
– be carried out to EN 60204−1.
ƒ Please observe the following when selecting the cable type:
– The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the application (e. g.
VDE, UL etc.).
– Fuses and cable cross−sections must be dimensioned in accordance with the
specifications in the documentation for the basic device.
ƒ The described EMC properties are provided if the following conditions are complied
with:
– The devices are mounted according to the arrangement concept described.
– The prepared cables are used and remain unchanged.

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  319

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Important notes

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
The leakage current to earth (PE) is > 3.5 mA AC or > 10 mA DC.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the device in the event of an error.
Protective measures:
Implement the measures required in EN 61800−5−1. Especially:
ƒ Fixed installation
– Implement PE connection in compliance with standards.
– Connect PE conductor twice or PE conductor cross−section  10 mm2.
ƒ Connection with a connector for industrial applications according to
IEC 60309 (CEE):
– PE conductor cross−section  2.5 mm2 as part of a multi−core supply cable.
– Provide for suitable strain relief.

 Stop!
No device protection if the mains voltage is too high
The mains input is not internally fused.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Destruction of the device if the mains voltage is too high.
Protective measures:
ƒ Observe the maximally permissible mains voltage.
ƒ Fuse the device correctly on the supply side against mains fluctuations and
voltage peaks.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Stop!
Overtemperature
The mains filter may become hot if permissible limit values are exceeded
during operation.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The device may be damaged or destroyed.
Protective measures:
ƒ Wire the overtemperature disconnection with the digital DO2 output
according to circuit proposal.

320  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

6.6.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
ƒ Branch circuit protection:
– Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when protected by CC, J or
T class fuses.
– Suitable for motor group installation on a circuit capable of delivering not
more than 100 000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V max., when
protected by class CC, J or T class fuses.
– Use specified fuses as shown in the table.
– Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit
protection. Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with
the National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code and any additional
local codes.
ƒ The opening of the branch circuit protective device may be an indication
that a fault current has been interrupted. To reduce the risk of fire or
electrical shock, current−carrying parts and other components of the
controller should be examined and replaced if damaged. If burnout of the
current element of an overload relay occurs, the complete overload relay
must be replaced.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature is 45 °C.
ƒ Max. surrounding air temperature with derating is 55 °C.
ƒ Use 60/75 °C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.
ƒ These products are intended for use in overvoltage category III.

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Standard installation Motor group installation
Nominal value (max.) [A] Nominal value (max.) [A]
E94ARNE0134 45 70
E94ARNE0244 70 70

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  321

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − French

 Avertissement !
ƒ Protection par disjoncteur :
– Convient aux circuits non susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100
000 ampères symétriques eff., maximum 480 V, avec protection par des
fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou R.
– Convient aux installations de groupe moteur sur des circuits non
susceptibles de délivrer plus de 100 000 ampères symétriques eff.,
maximum 480 V, avec protection par des fusibles de calibre CC, J, ou T.
– Utiliser les fusibles spécifiés comme indiqué dans le tableau.
– La protection statique intégrée n’offre pas la même protection qu’un
disjoncteur. Une protection par disjoncteur externe doit être fournie,
conformément au National Electrical Code / Canadian Electrical Code, et
aux autres dispositions applicables au niveau local.
ƒ Le déclenchement du dispositif de protection du circuit de dérivation peut
être dû à une coupure qui résulte d’un courant de défaut. Pour limiter le
risque d’incendie ou de choc électrique, examiner les pièces porteuses de
courant et les autres éléments du contrôleur ; les remplacer s’ils sont
endommagés. Le relais de surcharge doit être remplacé en cas de grillage de
l’élément traversé par le courant.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 45 °C
ƒ Température ambiante maximale avec réduction de puissance : 55 °C
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour les
circuits de commande.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.
ƒ Ces produits sont conçus pour une utilisation dans la catégorie de
surtension III.

Protection du circuit de dérivation / protection contre les courts−circuits par fusibles

conformément à UL248
Type Installation standard Installation au sein d´un groupe moteur
Valeur nominale (max.) [A] Valeur nominale (max.) [A]
E94ARNE0134 45 70
E94ARNE0244 70 70

322  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Wiring Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

6.6.3 Connection plan

K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F4 F1...F3
4

O
RFR
‚- ‚- ƒ-
+ + +
K1 I
L1.1
L2.1
L3.1
JR B
+ L1 L2 L3 1 2
GN
3 YE 24E GE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG +
K1 X320 X321 X323 X111
SB 24E GE RFR GI
K2
X2 X5

E94AZMR0xx4xDB E94ARNE0xx4
X109
...
X110
X4 X8
DO2 GO

E94AZPP0364
X322 X324 X106 X112
1 2
GN
3 YE T1 T2 Rb1 Rb2 L1 L2 L3 +
"
L2.2
L3.2

K2
L1.2

" 15
RB „

94PSPVR01

E94ARNE0xx4 Regenerative power supply module

E94AZPP0364 Installation backplane for the regenerative power supply module
E94AZMR0... Mains filter
F1 ... F4 Fuses
RFR Controller enable (only for regenerative feedback)
K1 Mains contactor
RB Brake resistor ( Mounting instructions brake resistor)
 24 V voltage source for the control electronics
(safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV) according to IEC 61131−2)
 24 V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 From FW 02.00: Overtemperature disconnection
DO2 load: max. 50 mA

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  323

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

6.6.4 Earthing of internal EMC filters

Device−internal EMC filters have been implemented to reduce interference emission.

These EMC filters are connected to protective earth to discharge interference currents.
Under certain conditions the EMC filters must be disconnected from:
ƒ Operation in an IT system
The devices are protected from damages or destruction due to incompatible
overvoltages in the case of an error (earth fault).

ƒ DC−bus operation
ƒ Operation with power supply modules or regenerative power supply modules
ƒ Operating multiple devices with a common filter
The EMC properties can only be reached by carrying out the described measures.
The triggering behaviour of applicable earth−leakage circuit breakers remains
undisturbed.

Overview of the measures

The measures which are to be carried out once have been prepared in relation to the
devices and are each described together with installation and wiring.
Device (GG = device size) Measure in the case of operation ...
in the IT system in the interconnected
system, with power supply
modules or shared filters
Inverter
with installation backplane (GG1 ... GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
without installation backplane (GG6 ... GG7) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG81 ... GG83) Change screwed connection
without installation backplane (GG91) Only factory−set measures are possible.
Please specify when ordering.
Power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG1 und GG3) No measure necessary
without installation backplane (GG4 ... GG5) No measure necessary
Regenerative power supply modules
with installation backplane (GG3) Insert plastic cap elsewhere
associated mains filter Change screwed connection No measure necessary

324  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

Implementing the measures

Proceed as follows to disconnect the internal connection between the filters and PE:
1. Remove IT insulating cap from the parking position  in the installation backplane.
– For this apply a screwdriver on the right or left and lever off the insulating cap.
– Optionally the insulating cap can be carefully removed using an appropriate pliers.
2. Attach IT insulating cap to the earthing jumper  until it clicks into place.

SSP94IT001

Fig. 6−8 Plugging the IT insulating cap onto the earthing jumper

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  325

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Earthing of internal EMC filters

The measure for the mains filter of the power supply/regenerative feedback modules
(only in the case of operation in the IT system)
Carry out the measure before installation and wiring.
How to proceed:
ƒ Undo 8 fixing screws of the housing cover
ƒ Remove housing cover
ƒ Unscrew and remove IT screw with spring washer 
ƒ Screw in IT screw with spring washer at the parking position 
ƒ Fit housing cover
ƒ Screw in and tighten 8 fixing screws of the housing cover

E94AZMR010

326  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Connecting busbars

6.6.5 Connecting busbars

SSP94PN201

Fig. 6−9 Example: Connecting busbars

Proceed as follows to connect the busbars:

1. If devices of the interconnected system have already been in operation:
– If necessary, switch off the supply system and wait until the discharge time has
elapsed (depending on the device, this may take up to 20 minutes).
– Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.
2. Loosen the busbar screws (do not remove them completely).
3. Push the busbars as far as possible to the left towards the adjacent busbar.
– Ensure that there is good contact to the adjacent busbar.
4. Tighten the busbar screws.
– Tightening torque: 3.2 ... 3.5 Nm (28 ... 31 lb−in).
5. Screw the components onto the mounting plate, if necessary.
– Tightening torque: 3.0 Nm (26 lb−in).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  327

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Design of the cables

6.6.6 Design of the cables

ƒ The cables used must comply with the approvals required for the location (e.g. UL).
ƒ The cross−section of the PE conductor must be dimensioned according to the
relevant national regulations.
ƒ The effectiveness of a shielded cable is reached by:
– Providing a good shield connection through large−surface shield contact.
– Using only braided shields with low shield resistance made of tin−plated or
nickel−plated copper braid.
– Using braided shields with an overlap rate > 70 % and an overlap angle of 90 °.
– Keeping unshielded cable ends as short as possible.
Use system cables or shielded cables for these connections:
ƒ External brake resistor ( Mounting Instructions of the brake resistor)
ƒ Analog signals (inputs and outputs)
ƒ CAN system bus
ƒ Resolver
ƒ System connection for synchronisation
ƒ DC bus, cable length from 0.3 m
The following connections need not be shielded:
ƒ Mains
ƒ DC bus, cable length up to 0.3 m
ƒ 24 V supply
ƒ Digital signals (inputs and outputs)

6.6.7 How to connect the shield

E94AZPS004

328  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Terminal assignment

6.6.8 Terminal assignment

 Tip!
Complete the wiring of the installation backplane before plugging in the
standard device. The upper terminals of the installation backplane cannot be
connected with a plugged−in standard device.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  329

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Terminal assignment

Mains
Terminal X320 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the L1, L2, L3 mains phases
L2
L3

# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

SSP94NF406

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMR0264xDB 10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 1.0 x 4.0
E94AZMR0474xDB 25 2 2.5 22.1 1.0 x 6.5

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMR0264xDB
M5 3 26.5 PH2
E94AZMR0474xDB

Terminal X111 Labelling Description

(left part)
L1 Connection of the mains phases
L2 E94APNE0xx4/E94AZxPxxx4: L1, L2, L3
L3 E94ARNE0xx4/E94AZMR0xx4xDB: L1.1, L2.1, L3.1
# Terminal for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP940X111

Terminal X112 Labelling Description

(right part)
L1 Connection of the mains phases
L2 E94APNE0xx4/E94AZxPxxx4:
L3 alternatively at the bottom L1, L2, L3
E94ARNE0xx4/E94AZMR0xx4xDB: L1.2, L2.2, L3.2
# Terminal for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP940X112

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 3:
Flexible 10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
With wire end ferrule

330  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Terminal assignment

DC bus
Terminal X111 Labelling Description
(right part)
+UG Alternative option for DC−bus voltage connection (compatible to
−UG 9300 series)

E94ARNE0244: maximum current Idc = 50 A

SSP940X111

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 3:
Flexible 10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
With wire end ferrule

External brake resistor

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
Device size 3:
Flexible 10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
With wire end ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  331

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Wiring of control connections

6.6.9 Wiring of control connections

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Tip!
Parameter setting and configuration can be carried out using the
L−force »Engineer«. For this purpose the Online Help and the Software Manual
for the standard device will guide you.

332  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Wiring of control connections

System bus CAN on board

Terminal X1 Labelling Description
Pin 2 CAN−LOW
Pin 3 CAN−GND
Pin 7 CAN−HIGH
9400SSP000X1
(Housing) CAN−Shield

24 V supply
Terminal X323 Labelling Description
GE GND external supply

SSP9400X11 24E 24 V external supply through safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
IEC 61131−2, 22.8 ... 28.8 V, residual ripple max. ±5 %
Current during operation: 450 mA
Starting current: max. 4 A for 100 ms

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

Terminal X2 Labelling Description

GE GND external supply
24E 24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
9400SSP000X2
SB State bus in/out (reference GE)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  333

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Wiring of control connections

Analog inputs, analog outputs

Terminal X3 Labelling Description
GA GND analog signals
AO1 Analog output 1
AO2 Analog output 2
A1+ Analog input 1 +
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1− Analog input 1 −
A1R Terminating resistor for ±20mA
A2+ Analog input 2 +
A2− Analog input 2 −
SSP94000X3 " Shield connection: Fix the shield with EMC wire clamp.

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

334  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Wiring
Wiring of control connections

Digital outputs
Terminal X4 Labelling Description
GO GND digital out
24O 24−V digital out
DO1 Digital output 1
DO2 Digital output 2
DO3 Digital output 3
9400SSP000X4
DO4 Digital output 4

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Digital inputs
Terminal X5 Labelling Description
GI GND digital in
RFR Controller enable
DI1 Digital input 1
DI2 Digital input 2
DI3 Digital input 3
DI4 Digital input 4
DI5 Digital input 5
DI6 Digital input 6
DI7 Digital input 7
9400SSP000X5
DI8 Digital input 8

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  335

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Wiring
Wiring of control connections

Diagnostics/keypad
Terminal X6 Labelling Description
Internal interface, RJ69 socket, for keypad or diagnostic adapter

9400SSP000X6

Resolver
(without function)
Terminal X7 Labelling Description
1 +REF
2 −REF
3 VCC
4 +COS
5 −COS
6 +SIN
7 −SIN
8 +KTY
9400SSP000X7
9 −KTY

System connection for synchronisation

X8terminal Labelling Description
1

Must only be used in conjunctionwith the E94AZMR0xx4xDB mains

... filter, X324

9400SSP000X8
15

336  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Regenerative power supply modules 6
Device modules

6.7 Device modules

Depending on the device version or the application, the device is equipped with device
modules. A nameplate attached to the side of the device serves to identify the already
equipped device modules .
The possible modules are briefly described in the Accessories chapter. Detailed
information can be found in the respective documentation.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  337

6 Regenerative power supply modules
Final works
Initial commissioning on 400 V mains voltage

6.8 Final works

6.8.1 Initial commissioning on 400 V mains voltage

After the installation has been carried out according to the Mounting Instructions, the
regenerative power supply module can be operated on a mains voltage of 400 V.
The regenerative feedback is activated via the digital input RFR.
How to proceed:
1. Switch on 24 V supply voltages:
– for the mains filter
– for the regenerative power supply module (optional)
2. Switch on 400 V mains voltage.
3. Activate/deactivate regenerative feedback via the digital input RFR.

6.8.2 Initial commissioning on 230 V or 480 V mains voltage

For operation on a mains voltage of 230 V or 480 V, first the mains voltage within the
regenerative power supply module has to be set. The setting is effected in C00173 and can
be carried out using a keypad or the Lenze PC software »Engineer«.
For commissioning you require:
ƒ An EZAEBKx00xkeypad,
or
ƒ A computer with Windows® operating system (XP or 2000)
ƒ The Lenze PC software »Engineer«
ƒ A connection to the regenerative power supply module via an interface, e. g.
– Diagnostic interface X6 with USB diagnostic adapter
– CAN system bus
– Communication modules in the expansion slots M1/M2
ƒ The software manual for the technology application used
ƒ The communication manual (KHB) for the network of the automation platform
ƒ Switch on 24 V supply voltages:
– for the mains filter
– for the regenerative power supply module
After the setting has been carried out according to the mains voltage available:
1. Switch on mains voltage.
2. Activate/deactivate regenerative feedback via the digital input RFR.

6.8.3 Further settings

Follow the instructions of the software and/or read the documentation for the
parameterisation of the regenerative power supply module.

338  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Introduction
Terminology and abbreviations used

7 DC−bus operation

7.1 Introduction

 Tip!
The information regarding DC−bus operation is based on standard
applications.
If you have any questions regarding other possible solutions for DC−bus
operation, get in touch with your Lenze contact person.

7.1.1 Terminology and abbreviations used

Term Description
DC bus The energy store in the controller or supply module from which the
controller modulates the AC voltage for the motor. The DC buses of
several controllers can be networked.
DC bus Electrical connection of the DC connections of several controllers via cable
or busbar.
DC−voltage level DC−voltage level in the DC bus
Power supply module Module with AC mains connection used to supply the DC bus of a drive
system with DC voltage.
Regenerative power supply module Power supply module with additional power regeneration into the AC
mains
Multi−axis controllers (Multi Drive) Controllers for connection to a DC bus. Multi−axis controllers have no AC
mains connection and no brake chopper.
Single−axis controllers (Single Drive) Controllers for connection to an AC mains or a DC bus. Single−axis
controllers have an integrated brake chopper.
Brake chopper Switching element in the controller used to dissipate excess energy in the
DC bus via a brake resistor.
Brake resistor High−performance resistor used to convert excess energy in the DC−bus
into heat.
Braking operation Motor operation in generator mode with energy feedback from the motor
to the controller.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  339

7 DC−bus operation
Introduction
Comparison single−axis controllers / multi−axis controllers

7.1.2 Comparison single−axis controllers / multi−axis controllers

As controllers of the 9400 Servo Drives series, the "Single Drive, E94xS…" are available in
the power range up to 460 A (240 kW) and "Multi Drive, E94xM…" are available up
to 59 A (30 kW).
The single−axis controllers ("Single Drive") are designed for connection to AC mains
(3/PE AC). They are equipped with mains rectifiers, mains filters and brake choppers.
The multi−axis controllers ("Multi Drive") are exclusively designed for connection to DC
mains (2/PE DC). They are equipped with DC busbars for easy assembly. In DC−bus
connections, power supply modules are used that contain mains rectifiers and brake
choppers. Mains filters must be specially dimensioned for each DC−bus.

E94xS... E94xM...
AC 3 DC 2
~ =

=~ =~
3 3
M M
AR principle AR principle

Fig. 7−1 Single Drive/Multi Drive

7.1.3 Advantages of a drive system

When several controllers are operated in a DC−bus connection (DC bus), this offers the
following advantages:
ƒ Energy exchange between controllers in generator−mode (braking) and motor−mode
operation.
ƒ The energy exchange reduces the supply power from the AC mains.
ƒ DC−supply modules or feeding single−axis controllers can be dimensioned with a
lower rated power.
ƒ The energy exchange reduces the braking losses in generator−mode operation.
Advantages for installation:
ƒ Only one AC−mains connection (e.g. at the DC−supply module).
ƒ Reduced wiring costs.

340  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Introduction
General information on the accessories

7.1.4 General information on the accessories

Fuses in the DC bus

For device protection, multi−axis controllers up to 11 kW are equipped with a fuse in the
installation backplane. The fuse is only integrated into the current path if the busbar
system (X109) is used.
When operated in a DC−bus connection, single−axis controllers can be retrofit with a fuse
in the installation backplane for device protection (see busbar mounting set).
When the alternative terminal connections are used for DC−bus wiring, external fuses
must be integrated into both current paths (+UG/−UG).
Busbar mounting set
With the busbar mounting set (E94AZJA0xx) you can connect a single−axis controller via a
busbar to a DC bus, e.g. to provide additional brake power. The busbar mounting set also
includes the corresponding fuse.
DC−feeding point
With the DC−input module (E94AZEX100) you can establish the electrical connection
between the DC cables and the busbar. Multi−row or distributed arrangements are
possible.
Filters
RFI filters and mains filters are available for the devices connected to the AC mains (supply
modules or single−axis controllers).
Depending on the application, additional filters may be required for compliance with the
EMC regulations. When dimensioning the filters, please consider:
ƒ Motor cable lengths
ƒ Number of axis controllers
ƒ Motor powers

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  341

7 DC−bus operation
Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation
Voltages

7.2 Conditions for trouble−free DC−bus operation

7.2.1 Voltages

The DC−bus operation of controllers is only possible if the rated values of the mains voltage
or DC−bus voltage are identical. The switching thresholds of all brake choppers in the
interconnected system have to be set identically and the control has to be synchronised by
master/slave interconnection.

7.2.2 Number of feeding points

The 9400 servo drives series has been designed for drive systems with a central AC mains
feeding point. For this you can use DC supply modules of different power categories.
Several AC mains feeding points are permissible in the interconnected system of two
single−axis drive controllers with the same power rating.

7.2.3 Other conditions

ƒ The entire DC power PDC must be provided by the feeding point (DC−supply module
or "Single Drive" controller).
ƒ The controllers in the DC bus may only start operation when the DC bus has been
completely loaded. I.e. controller enable may only be set after "State bus OK" (see
terminal X2).

 Stop!
The 24 V supply is not switched on for all inverters in the DC bus.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Charging relay or charging hybrid can be destroyed.
Protective measures:
ƒ Feed all inverters in the DC−bus connection via a common and stable 24 V
supply.
ƒ With split 24 V supply and fuse protection: If a fuse responds, shut down the
entire drive train if possible to avoid cyclical voltage strokes in the DC bus.
ƒ Up to a total current of 100 A, devices up to 24 A (device sizes 1 ... 3) can be operated
via the integrated DC busbar. Maximum busbar overload for 60 s: 150 % * Ir,
followed by a relief phase of 120 s: 75 % * Ir.
ƒ The DC bus must at no time be overloaded through the required maximum total
power. For this, a time/performance diagram has to be created and considered (see
Basic dimensioning).
ƒ The cable protection measures described for the DC−bus operation must be
observed.

342  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
DC−bus variants
Supply from a supply module

7.3 DC−bus variants

7.3.1 Supply from a supply module

L1 L2 L3

M M M

A DC supply module with direct AC mains connection supplies energy into the DC bus of
several controllers. The DC supply module is equipped with an integrated brake chopper
to which you can connect a brake resistor.
Possible combinations
Components to be used Components not to be used
For supply
Power supply modules
E94APNExxx4 (10 ... 245 A) −
Regenerative power supply modules
E94ARNE0xx4 + E94AZMR0xx4xDB (13 ... 24 A) −
As DC−bus component
Multi−axis controllers
E94xMxExxx4 (2 ... 59 A) −
Single−axis controllers
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE0594 E94xSxE0864 ... E94xSxE4604
(2 ... 59 A or device sizes 1 ... 6) (86 ... 460 A or device size 7 ... 91)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  343

7 DC−bus operation
DC−bus variants
Supply from controllers

7.3.2 Supply from controllers

L1 L2 L3

M M

A single−axis controller with direct AC mains connection supplies energy into the DC bus
of other controllers. The single−axis controller is equipped with an integrated brake
chopper to which you can connect a brake resistor.
Possible combinations
Components to be used Components not to be used
For supply
Single−axis controllers
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE0594 E94xSxE0864 ... E94xSxE4604
(2 ... 59 A or device sizes 1 ... 6) (86 ... 460 A or device size 7 ... 91)
 Possible to a certain degree when considering
Application Reports.
As DC−bus component
Multi−axis controllers
E94xMxExxx4 (2 ... 59 A) −
Single−axis controllers
E94xSxE0024 ... E94xSxE0594 E94xSxE0864 ... E94xSxE4604
(2 ... 59 A or device sizes 1 ... 6) (86 ... 460 A or device size 7 ... 91)

344  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Rated data
General data

7.4 Rated data

7.4.1 General data

The total current of the nominal input currents IDC to be provided by the power supply
module or one or several single−axis controllers must be determined. The DC cables must
be dimensioned in accordance with the total current.
The number of devices in a drive system can be limited by the DC−bus capacity and the
charging current (Icharging, permissible > (Icharging at Ur)).
Additional data
Input current DC−bus Charging Icharging
capacity resistor
at VLr permissible
IDC at Iar [F] [] 400 V 480 V
Type [A] [A] [A] [A]
Power supply modules
E94APNE0104 − − − − − 90
E94APNE0364 − − − − − 154
E94APNE1004 − − − − − 278
E94APNE2454 − − − − − 520
Regenerative power supply modules
E94ARNE0134 20.6 495 100 5.7 7.1 154
E94ARNE0244 35.5 990 50 11.3 14.1 154
Multi Drives
E94xMxE0024 2.6 165 100 5.7 7.1 −
E94xMxE0034 4.3 165 100 5.7 7.1 −
E94xMxE0044 6.7 330 100 5.7 7.1 −
E94xMxE0074 12.1 330 100 5.7 7.1 −
E94xMxE0094 15.4 495 50 11.3 14.1 −
E94xMxE0134 20.6 495 100 5.7 7.1 −
E94xMxE0174 25.7 825 50 11.3 14.1 −
E94xMxE0244 35.5 990 50 11.3 14.1 −
E94xMxE0324 48.0 1320 50 11.3 14.1 −
E94xMxE0474 52.6 2200 27 21.0 25.1 154
E94xMxE0594 66.1 2200 27 21.0 25.1 154

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  345

7 DC−bus operation
Rated data
General data

Additional data
Input current DC−bus Charging Icharging
capacity resistor
at VLr permissible
IDC at Iar [F] [] 400 V 480 V
Type [A] [A] [A] [A]
Single Drives
E94xSxE0024 2.6 165 100 5.7 6.8 20.4
E94xSxE0034 4.3 165 100 5.7 6.8 20.4
E94xSxE0044 6.7 330 100 5.7 6.8 49.0
E94xSxE0074 12.1 330 100 5.7 6.8 49.0
E94xSxE0134 20.6 495 100 5.7 6.8 154
E94xSxE0174 25.7 825 50 11.3 13,6 154
E94xSxE0244 35.5 990 50 11.3 13,6 154
E94xSxE0324 35.5 2200 27 21.0 25.1 154
E94xSxE0474 52.6 2200 27 21.0 25.1 154
E94xSxE0594 66.1 2200 27 21.0 25.1 154
Tab. 7−1
DCbus = DC bus
Icharging = charging current

The devices listed below are not permissible as direct DC−connection nodes on the DC link
level. Get in touch with your Lenze contact person to find out whether solutions and
measures have been worked out for your particular application.
Additional data
Input current DC−bus Charging Icharging
capacity resistor
at VLr permissible
IDC at Iar [F] [] 400 V 480 V
Type [A] [A] [A] [A]
E94xSxE0864 96.8 3300 68 8.3 10.0 358
E94xSxE1044 116 3300 68 8.3 10.0 358
E94xSxE1454 171 6000 − 1) 5.0 5.0 356
E94xSxE1724 203 8000 − 1) 6.7 6.7 423
E94xSxE2024 239 8000 − 1) 6.7 6.7 496
E94xSxE2454 290 8000 − 1) 6.7 6.7 603
E94xSxE2924 343 8000 − 1) 6.7 6.7 713
E94xSxE3664 434 16000 − 1) 13.4 13.4 901
E94xSxE4604 544 16000 − 1) 13.4 13.4 1130
Tab. 7−2
DCbus = DC bus
Icharging = charging current
1) Charge with constant current

346  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Rated data
DC−supply power

7.4.2 DC−supply power

The parameters relevant for the selection of a supply unit with a suitable supply power
(even in the overload range) are listed in the below table:
ULr Rated AC voltage
Cycle 1 Cycle for the second−range
Cycle 2 Cycle for the minute−range
PDC 100% Permanent power of DC−voltage level
Pol Power supply during overload time
tol Overload time
Pre Power supply during unloading time
tre Relief time

Any other cycles are calculated with the following formula:

Cycles other than the above cycles must not exceed the specified power and time values,
i.e. the values must be used as maximum values.
The values depend on the rated AC voltage VLr.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  347

7 DC−bus operation
Rated data
DC−supply power

230 V
Supply power VLr = 230 V Cycle 1 Cycle 2
PDC 100% Pol · tol Pre · tre Pol · tol Pre · tre
Type [kW] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s]
Supply modules (+filter)
E94APNE0104 2.1 8.4 · 0.5 1.6 · 4.5 3.2 · 60 1.6 · 120
E94APNE0104
2.8 11.2 · 0.5 2.1 · 4.5 4.2 · 60 2.1 · 120
+E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 7.5 22.5 · 0.5 5.6 · 4.5 11.3 · 60 5.6 · 120
E94APNE0364
10.1 30.3 · 0.5 7.6 · 4.5 15.5 · 60 7.6 · 120
+E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 20.8 41.6 · 0.5 18.5 · 4.5 31.2 · 60 15.6 · 120
E94APNE1004
27.9 55.8 · 0.5 24.8 · 4.5 41.9 · 60 20.9 · 120
+E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 51 76.5 · 0.5 48.2 · 4.5 76.5 · 60 38.3 · 120
E94APNE2454
68.5 103 · 0.5 64.7 · 4.5 103 · 60 51.3 · 120
+E94AZMP2004
Regenerative power supply modules +filters
E94ARNE0134
8.6 25.8 · 0.5 6.5 · 4.5 12.9 · 60 6.5 · 120
+ E94AZMR0264xDB
E94ARNE0244
15.6 46.6 · 0.5 11.7 · 4.5 23.3 · 60 11.7 · 120
+ E94AZMR0474xDB
Single Drives
E94xSxE0024 1.0 4.0 · 0.5 0.8 · 4.5 1.8 · 60 0.8 · 120
E94xSxE0034 1.0 4.0 · 0.5 0.8 · 4.5 1.8 · 60 0.8 · 120
E94xSxE0044 1.6 6.4 · 0.5 1.2 · 4.5 3.0 · 60 1.2 · 120
E94xSxE0074 2.7 10.8 · 0.5 2.0 · 4.5 4.1 · 60 2.0 · 120
E94xSxE0134 5.0 20.0 · 0.5 3.8 · 4.5 9.5 · 60 3.8 · 120
E94xSxE0174 6.3 25.2 · 0.5 4.7 · 4.5 9.5 · 60 4.7 · 120
E94xSxE0244 8.9 35.6 · 0.5 6.7 · 4.5 13.4 · 60 6.7 · 120
E94xSxE0324 15.8 63.2 · 0.5 11.9 · 4.5 23.7 · 60 11.9 · 120
E94xSxE0474 22.3 80.4 · 0.5 15.1 · 4.5 30.2 · 60 15.1 · 120
E94xSxE0594 22.3 80.4 · 0.5 15.1 · 4.5 30.2 · 60 15.1 · 120
E94xSxE0864 39.1 70.4 · 0.5 29.3 · 4.5 58.7 · 60 29.3 · 120
E94xSxE1044 39.1 70.4 · 0.5 29.3 · 4.5 58.7 · 60 29.3 · 120
Tab. 7−3

348  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Rated data
DC−supply power

400 V
Power supply VLr = 400 V Cycle 1 Cycle 2
PDC 100% Pol · tol Pre · tre Pol · tol Pre · tre
Type [kW] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s]
Supply modules (+ filter)
E94APNE0104 3.6 14.4 · 0.5 2.7 · 4.5 5.4 · 60 2.7 · 120
E94APNE0104
4.9 19.6 · 0.5 3.7 · 4.5 7.4 · 60 3.7 · 120
+E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 13.0 39.0 · 0.5 9.8 · 4.5 19.5 · 60 9.8 · 120
E94APNE0364
17.5 52.5 · 0.5 13.1 · 4.5 26.3 · 60 13.1 · 120
+E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 36.2 72.4 · 0.5 32.2 · 4.5 54.3 · 60 27.2 · 120
E94APNE1004
48.6 97.2 · 0.5 43.2 · 4.5 72.9 · 60 36.5 · 120
+E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 88.6 133 · 0.5 83.7 · 4.5 133 · 60 66.4 · 120
E94APNE2454
119 179 · 0.5 112 · 4.5 179 · 60 89.0 · 120
+E94AZMP2004
Regenerative power supply modules +filters
E94ARNE0134
15.0 44.9 · 0.5 11.3· 4.5 22.4 · 60 11.3 · 120
+ E94AZMR0264xDB
E94ARNE0244
27.0 81.1 · 0.5 20.3· 4.5 40.5 · 60 20.3 · 120
+ E94AZMR0474xDB
Single Drives
E94xSxE0024 2.0 8.0 · 0.5 1.3 · 4.5 3.0 · 60 1.5 · 120
E94xSxE0034 2.0 8.0 · 0.5 1.3 · 4.5 3.0 · 60 1.5 · 120
E94xSxE0044 3.2 12.8 · 0.5 2.1 · 4.5 4.8 · 60 2.4 · 120
E94xSxE0074 5.7 17.1 · 0.5 4.4 · 4.5 8.6 · 60 4.3 · 120
E94xSxE0134 10.5 31.5 · 0.5 8.2 · 4.5 15.8 · 60 7.9 · 120
E94xSxE0174 13.1 39.3 · 0.5 10.2 · 4.5 19.7 · 60 9.8 · 120
E94xSxE0244 18.7 46.8 · 0.5 15.6 · 4.5 28.1 · 60 14.0 · 120
E94xSxE0324 26.7 64.0 · 0.5 22.6 · 4.5 40.0 · 60 20.0 · 120
E94xSxE0474 37.9 75.8 · 0.5 33.7 · 4.5 57.0 · 60 28.4 · 120
E94xSxE0594 37.9 75.8 · 0.5 33.7 · 4.5 57.0 · 60 28.4 · 120
E94xSxE0864 66.6 133 · 0.5 59.2 · 4.5 100 · 60 50.0 · 120
E94xSxE1044 66.6 133 · 0.5 59.2 · 4.5 100 · 60 50.0 · 120
E94xSxE1454 92.0 166 · 10 69.0 · 30 138 · 60 69.0 · 120
E94xSxE1724 109 196 · 10 82.0 · 30 164 · 60 82.0 · 120
E94xSxE2024 129 232 · 10 97.0 · 30 194 · 60 97.0 · 120
E94xSxE2454 156 280 · 10 117 · 30 234 · 60 117 · 120
E94xSxE2924 186 334 · 10 139 · 30 279 · 60 139 · 120
E94xSxE3664 233 419 · 10 175 · 30 350 · 60 175 · 120
E94xSxE4604 293 527 · 10 220 · 30 440 · 60 220 · 120
Tab. 7−4

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  349

7 DC−bus operation
Rated data
DC−supply power

480 V
Power supply VLr = 480 V Cycle 1 Cycle 2
PDC 100% Pol · tol Pre · tre Pol · tol Pre · tre
Type [kW] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s] [kW] · [s]
Supply modules (+ filter)
E94APNE0104 4.5 18.0 · 0.5 3.4 · 4.5 6.8 · 60 3.4 · 120
E94APNE0104
6.1 24.4 · 0.5 4.6 · 4.5 9.2 · 60 4.6 · 120
+E94AZMP0084
E94APNE0364 16.3 48.9 · 0.5 12.2 · 4.5 24.5 · 60 12.2 · 120
E94APNE0364
21.9 65.7 · 0.5 16.4 · 4.5 32.9 · 60 16.4 · 120
+E94AZMP0294
E94APNE1004 45.2 90.4 · 0.5 40.2 · 4.5 67.8 · 60 33.9 · 120
E94APNE1004
60.8 122 · 0.5 54.0 · 4.5 91.2 · 60 45.6 · 120
+E94AZMP0824
E94APNE2454 111 167 · 0.5 105 · 4.5 167 · 60 83.0 · 120
E94APNE2454
149 224 · 0.5 141 · 4.5 224 · 60 112 · 120
+E94AZMP2004
Regenerative power supply modules +filters
E94ARNE0134
18.6 56.1 · 0.5 14.0 · 4.5 28.0 · 60 14.0 · 120
+ E94AZMR0264xDB
E94ARNE0244
33.8 101.4 · 0.5 25.4 · 4.5 50.7 · 60 25.4 · 120
+ E94AZMR0474xDB
Single Drive
E94xSxE0024 2.4 9.6 · 0.5 1.6 · 4.5 3.6 · 60 1.8 · 120
E94xSxE0034 2.4 9.6 · 0.5 1.6 · 4.5 3.6· 60 1.8 · 120
E94xSxE0044 3.8 15.2 · 0.5 2.5 · 4.5 5.7 · 60 2.9 · 120
E94xSxE0074 6.8 20.4 · 0.5 5.3 · 4.5 10.2 · 60 5.1 · 120
E94xSxE0134 12.5 37.5 · 0.5 9.7 · 4.5 18.8 · 60 9.4 · 120
E94xSxE0174 15.7 47.1 · 0.5 12.2 · 4.5 23.6 · 60 11.8 · 120
E94xSxE0244 22.5 56.3 · 0.5 18.7 · 4.5 33.8 · 60 16.9 · 120
E94xSxE0324 28.0 67.0 · 0.5 23.7 · 4.5 42.0 · 60 21.0 · 120
E94xSxE0474 45.2 108 · 0.5 38.2 · 4.5 67.8 · 60 33.9 · 120
E94xSxE0594 45.2 108 · 0.5 38.2 · 4.5 67.8 · 60 33.9 · 120
E94xSxE0864 79.6 159 · 0.5 70.8 · 4.5 119 · 60 59.7 · 120
E94xSxE1044 79.6 159 · 0.5 70.8 · 4.5 119 · 60 59.7 · 120
E94xSxE1454 92.0 166 · 10 69.0 · 30 138 · 60 69.0 · 120
E94xSxE1724 109 196 · 10 82.0 · 30 164 · 60 82.0 · 120
E94xSxE2024 129 232 · 10 97.0 · 30 194 · 60 97.0 · 120
E94xSxE2454 156 280 · 10 117 · 30 234 · 60 117 · 120
E94xSxE2924 186 334 · 10 139 · 30 279 · 60 139 · 120
E94xSxE3664 233 419 · 10 175 · 30 350 · 60 175 · 120
E94xSxE4604 293 527 · 10 220 · 30 440 · 60 220 · 120
Tab. 7−5

350  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Rated data
DC−power requirements

7.4.3 DC−power requirements

Use the below tables to determine the power requirements of the devices used in the DC
bus and the device−dependent power loss for the rated mains voltage ULr.
Use the below tables to determine the power requirements of the devices used in the DC
bus and the device−dependent power loss for the rated mains voltage ULr.
Power requirements Par [W] with rated current
Type ULr = 230 V ULr = 400 V ULN = 480 V
Multi Drives
E94xMxE0024 500 900 1000
E94xMxE0034 900 1600 1600
E94xMxE0044 1400 2500 2600
E94xMxE0074 2500 4400 4600
E94xMxE0094 3300 5800 6100
E94xMxE0134 4700 8100 8500
E94xMxE0174 5900 10300 10800
E94xMxE0244 8400 14700 15400
E94xMxE0324 11500 20000 19400
E94xMxE0474 16900 29300 30800
E94xMxE0594 19000 33100 38600
Single Drives
E94xSxE0024 500 900 1000
E94xSxE0034 900 1600 1600
E94xSxE0044 1400 2500 2600
E94xSxE0074 2500 4400 4600
E94xSxE0134 4700 8100 8500
E94xSxE0174 5900 10300 10800
E94xSxE0244 8400 14700 15400
E94xSxE0324 11500 20000 21000
E94xSxE0474 16900 29300 30800
E94xSxE0594 19000 33100 38600
E94xSxE0864 30800 53600 56300
E94xSxE1044 37300 64800 68100
E94xSxE1454 − 90000 100000
E94xSxE1724 − 107000 129000
E94xSxE2024 − 126000 151000
E94xSxE2454 − 153000 183000
E94xSxE2924 − 182000 218000
E94xSxE3664 − 228000 274000
E94xSxE4604 − 287000 344000
Tab. 7−6

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  351

7 DC−bus operation
Rated data
DC−power requirements

Power loss PV [W] at a switching frequency of 4 kHz

Type ULr = 230 V ULr = 400 V ULN = 480 V when controller is inhibited
Multi Drives
E94xMxE0024 65 80 95
E94xMxE0034 75 95 110
E94xMxE0044 90 120 135
E94xMxE0074 105 145 165
E94xMxE0094 130 170 200 40
E94xMxE0134 160 215 245
E94xMxE0174 185 255 290
E94xMxE0244 235 320 375
E94xMxE0324 290 405 470
Single Drives
E94xSxE0024 70 90 100
E94xSxE0034 85 105 120
E94xSxE0044 100 130 145
E94xSxE0074 125 160 180 40
E94xSxE0134 200 260 290
E94xSxE0174 240 300 340
E94xSxE0244 310 400 450
E94xSxE0324 750 750 750
E94xSxE0474 1050 1050 1050 75
E94xSxE0594 1100 1100 1100
E94xSxE0864 1500 1500 1500
100
E94xSxE1044 1800 1800 1800
E94xSxE1454 − 2100 2100 < 100
E94xSxE1724 − 2200 2200
E94xSxE2024 − 2600 2600 < 100
E94xSxE2454 − 3300 3300
E94xSxE2924 − 4100 4100 < 100
E94xSxE3664 − 4900 4900 < 100
E94xSxE4604 − 6200 6200 < 150

352  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Rated data
DC fuses

7.4.4 DC fuses

 Note!
The fuse current Imax specified in the table is the maximum permissible value
for the approved fuse types. This prevents fire and electrical hazard in the
event of an error of the device.
The fuse must be smaller or equal to the maximum permissible value, taking
the following into consideration:
ƒ the maximum possible cable cross−section
ƒ the laying system (e.g. tap installation)
ƒ the ambient temperature
ƒ the relevant regulations (e.g. UL508A, NEC70 and others).

Assignment devices − DC−fuses

+UG/−UG (X100)
Eaton Siba Mersen Siemens Littlefuse
Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type
Type [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
E94xSxE0024 170M1754 5020106.16
63 16 − − − − − −
E94xSxE0034 170M1734 5020206.16
E94xSxE0044 170M1757 5020106.40
125 40 − − − − − −
E94xSxE0074 170M1737 5020206.40
E94xSxE0134
170M1759 2029220.100
E94xSxE0174 200 100 − − − − − −
170M1739 2029221.100
E94xSxE0244
E94xMxE0024
170M1754 5020106.16
E94xMxE0034 63 16 − − − − − −
170M1734 5020206.16
E94xMxE0044
E94xMxE0074 170M1757 5020106.40
125 40 − − − − − −
E94xMxE0094 170M1737 5020206.40
E94xMxE0134
E94xMxE0174 170M1759 2029220.100
200 100 − − − − − −
E94xMxE0244 170M1739 2029221.100
E94xMxE0324
170M1761
315
170M1741
FWP−xxA14FA
FWP−xxxA22FA A70QSxx−14F 3NC1405 ...
FWP−xxB A70QSxx−14FI 3NC1450
5020106.xx
E94xMxE0474 FWP−xxA A70QSxxx−22F 3NC2220 ...
200 5020206.xx 200 200 200 L70QSxxx
E94xMxE0594 170M1308 ... A70QSxxx−22FI 3NC2200
200 2029220.xxx
170M1320 A70QSxxx−4 3NE8714−1 ...
170M1358 ... A70QSxxx−4K 3NE8725−1
170M1370
170M1408 ...
170M1420

Recommended fuse holder for type 170M...: Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  353

7 DC−bus operation
Rated data
DC fuses

Assignment devices − DC−fuses

DC busbar (X109/X110)
Eaton Siba Mersen Siemens Littlefuse
Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type Imax Type
Type [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
E94xSxE0024
E94xSxE0034
170M1761
E94xSxE0044 315
170M1741
E94xSxE0074
E94xSxE0134
E94xSxE0174 A70QSxx−14F 3NC1405 ...
FWP−xxA14FA A70QSxx−14FI 3NC1450
E94xSxE0244
FWP−xxxA22FA 5020106.xx
E94xMxE0024 A70QSxxx−22F 3NC2220 ...
FWP−xxB 200 5020206.xx 200 200 200 L70QSxxx
E94xMxE0034 A70QSxxx−22FI 3NC2200
E94xMxE0044 FWP−xxA 2029220.xxx
A70QSxxx−4 3NE8714−1 ...
E94xMxE0074 170M1308 ... A70QSxxx−4K 3NE8725−1
200
E94xMxE0094 170M1320
E94xMxE0134 170M1358 ...
E94xMxE0174 170M1370
E94xMxE0244 170M1408 ...
E94xMxE0324 170M1420
Recommended fuse holder for type 170M...: Eaton (Bussmann) 170H1007

354  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Basic dimensioning
General information

7.5 Basic dimensioning

7.5.1 General information

The Drive Solution Designer (DSD) PC software helps you to dimension your drive network.
For expert advice, you may also contact your Lenze sales representative when
dimensioning your application.

Time/performance diagram
For determining the performance of your drive network, create a time/performance
diagram for all axes for a complete machine cycle. The power requirements of the drive
network are calculated by adding the individual performances occurring at the same time.
Positive results show the AC requirements for the dimensioning of the power supply units.
Negative results show the brake power to be dissipated via brake choppers at the brake
resistor.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
P res

P res
0 t

P1

P2

P3

P4

0 t

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
T/P−diag001

Tab. 7−7 Example time/performance diagram

P1 ... P4 Individual performances of axes 1 ... 4
Ptotal Addition of the individual performances
Ptotal Average of the individual performances

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  355

7 DC−bus operation
Basic dimensioning
Power distribution of controllers

Use the time/performance diagram to optimise the DC−bus performance of all axes for a
complete machine cycle.
Utilisation factor
Please consider the utilisation factors when determining PDCtotal. Reduce the power
requirements if the rated power is not fully used.
Simultaneity factor
Please consider the simultaneity factor when determining PDCtotal. Reduce the power
requirements if the drives do not run simultaneously or in opposite direction (braking).
Braking
After determining the brake power PBRtotal, ensure that the brake power can be provided
by the brake choppers and brake resistors in the DC bus.
Other conditions
The power supply unit must be able to provide the required power (arithmetic mean).
The overload requirements must be within the permissible range:
(! 7.4.2)
ƒ 3−min cycle (1 min overload with 150 %/2 min recovery time with 75 %)
ƒ 5−s cycle (0.5 s overload and 4.5 s recovery time with 75 %)
For detailed information on the overload capacity, please see the Technical data.

7.5.2 Power distribution of controllers

In a DC−bus operation, the power from the AC mains is stored in the DC bus and consumed
by several controllers. Drive groups with non−synchronous power consumption, partial
load or excess energy from braking operations are suitable for establishing a DC−bus
connection.

L1, L2, L3
PLN
~ =
PDC1
PDC2
PV

= ~
PaN
U, V, W
Power distribution

L1, L2, L3 Mains connection (3/PE AC)

PLr Input mains power
PDC1 Total DC−bus power
PDC2 DC−bus power available for the DC bus
Ploss Power loss
Par Output power
U, V, W Motor connection

356  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Basic dimensioning
Motor efficiency

7.5.3 Motor efficiency

For determining the power requirements, you have to consider the shaft power Pshaft and
the motor efficiency. The motor efficiency can be found under the motor data.

7.5.4 Power loss of devices

When determining the power requirements, the power loss of the devices must be
considered (! Tab. 7−6).

7.5.5 Determining the power requirements

For determining the power requirements of the drive system you need to know the rated
power of the motors and their efficiency as well as the power losses of the controllers. The
power requirements are calculated with the following formula:

PDCtotal Total power required by the drive system

Pshaft Rated power of a connected motor
Ploss Power loss of a controller
 Motor efficiency
I Index variable for device identification
n Number of devices in the drive system

The supplying device must be able to supply the calculated power requirements.
For application examples, please see 7.7 .

7.5.6 Determining the regenerative power requirements

With the regenerative power supply modules of the "Servo Drives 9400" series, power
regeneration into the AC mains is possible. Use the determined regenerative power for the
dimensioning of the regenerative power supply module.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  357

7 DC−bus operation
Basic dimensioning
Cable protection

7.5.7 Cable protection

In case of interferences, the cables have to be adequately protected (7.4.4).

Please consider the following when dimensioning the DC bus for a plant or machine:
ƒ Mains fuses can be used to protect the DC cables if the wiring is designed for 122 %
of the rated fuse current. Otherwise, the cable protection for the DC cables must be
specially determined.
ƒ Select the fuses for the currents resulting from power PDC100%. Please observe the
standards and regulations applicable for the particular location and application.
ƒ Fuse the DC−supply modules according to the Technical data on the AC mains side.
ƒ The DC outputs of the supply modules need not be fused if all connected controllers
are fused in accordance with the specifications.
ƒ "Multi Drive" controllers are default equipped with a fuse in the installation
backplane. The fuse is only effective if the DC busbar is used. In this case, a single
pole fusing against short−circuit is sufficient.
ƒ "Single Drive" controllers can be retrofit with a fuse in the mounting backplane. The
fuse will only be effective if the DC busbar is used. In this case, a single−pole fusing
against short−circuit is sufficient.
For retrofitting, use the E94AZJA0xx busbar mounting set.
ƒ If the DC bus is wired via the terminals +UG/−UG, always select a 2−pole cable
protection.

7.5.8 Filters

The following filters can be used for the DC−supply modules.

Mains filter DC power supply module
Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZMP0084 2 E94APNE0104 1
E94AZMP0294 3 E94APNE0364 3
E94AZMP0824 4 E94APNE1004 4
E94AZMP2004 5 E94APNE2454 5

The mains filters are designed for the following conditions:

ƒ 10 interconnected devices,
ƒ each with a 50 m motor cable,
ƒ EMC category C2.

358  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Basic dimensioning
Filters

RFI filter DC power supply module

Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZRP0084 1 E94APNE0104 1
E94AZRP0294 1 E94APNE0364 3
E94AZRP0824 4 E94APNE1004 4
E94AZRP2004 4 E94APNE2454 5

The RFI filters are designed for the following conditions:

ƒ 6 interconnected devices,
ƒ each with a 10 m motor cable,
ƒ EMC category C2.
In applications with a different number of interconnected devices or different motor cable
lengths, the filters may have to be specially dimensioned.

 Note!
To observe EMC category C2, measures must be carried out on the
device−internal EMC filters of the drive components in the network system.
The measures for the individual devices are described in the chapter "Wiring",
section "Earthing of internal EMC filters".
When using the mains filters assigned, conditions must be observed for compliance with
EMC class C2:
ƒ The measures for the use on IT systems must be applied to all axis modules in the
interconnection (separation of internal filter components from PE).
ƒ The maximum sum total of all motor cable lengths ( lmot) for the filter used must
be observed.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  359

7 DC−bus operation
Basic dimensioning
Filters

Motor cable lengths in the interconnection

The assigned filters are designed for lmot for 6 axis modules
(E94AZRP...: 60 m (= 6 x 10 m), E94AZMP...: 600 m (= 6 x 100 m)).
For a different number of axis modules, lmot can be determined from the following
diagrams.

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

0
25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
l[m]

Fig. 7−2 Filter E94AZRP...: Sum total of motor cable lengths as a function of the number of axis modules

n
20

18

16

14

12

10

0
250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750
l[m]

Fig. 7−3 Filter E94AZMP...: Sum total of motor cable lengths as a function of the number of axis modules

360  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Basic dimensioning
Filters

Constellations with unfavourable or intensifying parasitic couplings

Compliance with EMC category C2 may also be interfered with by other circumstances:
ƒ Distribution of the axis modules over several control cabinets without efficient HF
equipotential bonding between the mounting plates
ƒ No use of Lenze system cables or cables with the same specifications
ƒ Poor connection of motor cable shields
ƒ Motor cable interruptions
ƒ Other interference sources (e.g. switched−mode power supplies)
ƒ Isochronous switching of the inverter output stages

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  361

7 DC−bus operation
Basic dimensioning
Cables

With different motor cable lengths, per axis at least 25 % of the longest cable must be
considered when calculating the total motor cable length.
Example: 1 Motor cable length lmot [m]
Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 6 6
0.25 * 20 = 5
2 ... 4 3 * 10 3 * 10
5 20  20
Total 56 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 56
EMC class C2 will be complied with.

Example 2 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 4 4*5 0.25 * 40 = 10 4 * 10
5 40  40
Total 60 max. permissible for 5 axes:
< 60 80
EMC class C2 will not be complied with.

Example: 3 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 3 3 * 100  3 * 100
4 50 0.25 * 100 = 25 50
5 ... 10 6 * 15 6 * 25
Total 410 max. permissible for 10 axes:
< 500 500
EMC class C2 will be complied with.

Example: 4 Motor cable length lmot [m]

Axis Actual min. 25 % of the longest cable To be considered
value
1 ... 4 4 * 100  4 * 100
5 ... 10 6 * 15 0.25 * 100 = 25 6 * 25
Total 490 max. permissible for 10 axes:
< 500 550
EMC class C2 will not be complied with.

7.5.9 Cables

Select the cable cross−sections for the currents resulting from power PDC100%. Please
observe the standards and regulations applicable for the particular location and
application.

362  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Braking operation in a drive system
Basic considerations

7.6 Braking operation in a drive system

7.6.1 Basic considerations

If the regenerative power of a drive exceeds the storage capacity of the DC bus, the
excessive energy must be consumed or dissipated. Target of the DC bus is to use the
excessive energy for other axes.
Check for all DC−bus operations if the brake power provided by the brake choppers is high
enough for the maximum regenerative power that may occur. If necessary, controllers
with an integrated brake chopper (single−axis controller instead of a multi−axis controller)
must be integrated into the drive system to increase the brake power.
If several brake choppers are used, the following conditions must be met:
ƒ The thresholds of the brake choppers must be the same for all controllers.
ƒ The brake choppers of several controllers are independent of each other. The brake
choppers are protected by changing the duty cycle or switching them off
temporarily. They are automatically switched on again.
ƒ The limiting monitorings must be considered when dimensioning the continuous
brake power for the DC bus:
– Brake chopper monitoring
– Brake resistor monitoring
ƒ The temperature monitoring of the brake resistors must lead to power−off,
otherwise the brake resistors or devices may be destroyed.
ƒ The peak brake power can be used for 0.5 s in 5−s cycles.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  363

7 DC−bus operation
Application examples
Example 1

7.7 Application examples

7.7.1 Example 1 − supply module with multi−axis controllers

Assumptions:
ƒ 400 V, 3 AC/PE
ƒ 7 axes in 2 power categories
ƒ no particular dynamic performance requirements
The following motors (Mx) are selected:
Motor type Rated power Efficiency Rated current
Index [kW] [A]
M1 ... M5 MCS14H15 2.5 0.92 6.6
M6 ... M7 MCS09F38 1.2 0.90 2.5

For the above motor data, the following controllers (Gx) are selected:
Controller Rated power Typical motor Power loss Pl Rated current
power
Index [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
G1 ... G5 E94xMxE0074 4.8 3.0 0.19 7.0
G6 ... G7 E94xMxE0034 1.7 0.75 0.12 2.5

The power required by the drive system is determined with the below formula (! 7.5.5):
PDCtotal = 5 * (2.5 kW / 0.92 + 0.19 kW) + 2 * (1.2 kW / 0.90 + 0.12 kW)
PDCtotal = 17.4 kW
The calculated power requirement is used to select the supply module:
Supply module (+ mains filter) Rated power (PDC100%)
Index [kW]
V1 E94APNE0364
17.5
+ E94AZMP0294
Note: Only the supply module with mains filter reaches the required power.

Checking the power efficiency:

With 17.5 kW > 17.4 kW, PDC100% > PDCtotal.
Select cables and fuses in accordance with the Technical data.
AC 3
L1 L2 L3

...

M M M M
V1 G1 Gx

Fig. 7−4 Basic circuit diagram

364  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 DC−bus operation 7
Application examples
Example 2

7.7.2 Example 2 − single−axis controller with multi axes

Assumptions:
ƒ 400 V, 3 AC/PE
ƒ 4 axes in 3 power categories
ƒ no particular dynamic performance requirements
The following motors (Mx) are selected:
Motor type Rated power Efficiency Rated current
Index [kW] [A]
M1 MCS19P30 10.0 0.93 19
M2 MCS14H15 2.5 0.92 6.6
M3 ... M4 MCS09F38 1.2 0.90 2.5

For the above motor data, the following controllers (Gx) are selected:
Controller Rated power Typical motor Power loss Pl Rated current
power
Index [kW] [kW] [kW] [A]
G1 E94xSxE0244 16.3 11.0 0.50 23.5
G2 E94xMxE0074 4.8 3.0 0.19 7.0
G3 ... G4 E94xMxE0034 1.7 0.75 0.12 2.5

The power required by the drive system is determined with the below formula (! 7.5.5):
PDCtotal = (10 kW / 0.93 + 0.50 kW) + (2.5 kW / 0.92 + 0.19 kW) + 2 * (1.2 kW / 0.90 + 0.12 kW)
PDCtotal = 17.1 kW
The calculated power requirement is used to select the single−axis controller with mains
choke:
Controller (+ mains choke) Rated power (PDC100%)
Index [kW]
(G1) E94xSxE0244
18.8
+ E94AZMS0314
Note: Only the controller with mains choke reaches the required power.

Checking the power efficiency:

With 18.8 kW > 17.1 kW, PDC100% > PDCtotal.
Select cables and fuses in accordance with the Technical data.
AC 3
L1 L2 L3

...

M M M M
G1 Gx

Fig. 7−5 Basic circuit diagram

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  365

8 Accessories (overview)
System overview

8 Accessories (overview)

 Note!
You can find additional information on the accessories in the catalogue to this
product series.

8.1 System overview

The following figure shows the most important components for the implementation of a
drive system with the Servo Drives 9400 product range.
On the way from the mains connection to the motor, you can see the basic principle of a
drive system on the left path. On the right path, the basic principle of a single−axis drive is
described.
In accordance with the requirements of your drive solution, your drive system can be
equipped or extended with specially adapted components.

366  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
System overview

0
1
7 6 5 2
8
9

:
3
4
;
? > <

= =

@ . /
SSP94SYS01

 Mains voltage 3/PE AC 180 ... 528 V ±0 % or 3/PE AC 340 ... 528 V ±0 %
(depending on the device size/device power)
 Mains fusing (not contained in the delivery programme)
 Single Drives 9400  31
and corresponding installation backplanes
 Mains filter for Single Drives 9400  542
 RFI filter for Single Drives 9400  571
Multi Drives 9400  167
and corresponding installation backplanes

Power supply modules 9400
 241,  289
(for DC bus installations with Multi Drives 9400)
 Mains filter for power supply modules 9400  549
 RFI filter for power supply modules 9400  589

Equipment for all axis modules (device−dependent options):

Communication modules and extension modules  371
 Memory modules  419
 Safety modules  428
 Motor holding brake control modules  448
 Brake resistors  625
 Diagnostic adapters  507
 L−force Engineer (software)
 Servo motors (motor catalogue)
 Geared servo motors (")
 Standard geared motors (")
Motor cables/system cables
(manual "System cables")

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  367

8 Accessories (overview)
Overview of accessories

8.2 Overview of accessories

With the accessories available, the standard devices of the controllers of the
Servo Drives 9400 series are directly equipped with functions, interfaces, etc. required for
specific drive solutions.
The following overview shows the accessories assigned to the controllers and power
supply modules.
1) Component from this range is absolutely necessary
+ Can be used without restrictions
o Can be used with restrictions
− Can be used, but check alternative
^ Already included
−−− No use

Accessories Single Drive Multi Drive Power supply VR

modules modules
Field GG (device size) GG GG GG
Designation 1 ... 3 6 ... 7 81 ... 91 1 ... 3 6 1&3 4&5 1&3 Page
Device modules
Communication modules from
CANopen® E94AYCCA + + + + + −−− −−− + 371

DeviceNet E94AYCDN + + + + + −−− −−− +

Ethernet 2 Port E94AYCEN + + + + + −−− −−− +
EtherNet/IP E94AYCEO + + + + + −−− −−− +
POWERLINK MN/CN + + + + + −−− −−− +
E94AYCEP
POWERLINK CN E94AYCEC + + + + + −−− −−− +
EtherCAT® E94AYCET + + + + + −−− −−− +
PROFIBUS® E94AYCPM + + + + + −−− −−− +
PROFINET® E94AYCER + + + + + −−− −−− +
INTERBUS E94AYCIB + + + + + −−− −−− +
Function modules from
Digital frequency + + + + + −−− −−− −−− 413
E94AYFLF
Cover module + + + + + −−− −−− +
Memory modules 1) from
MM220 E94AYM220 −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + 419

MM330 E94AYM330 + + + + + −−− −−− −−−

MM340 E94AYM340 + + + + + −−− −−− −−−
MM430 E94AYM430 + + + + + −−− −−− −−−
MM440 E94AYM440 + + + + + −−− −−− −−−
Safety modules 1) from
SM0 E94AYAA + + + + + −−− −−− + 428

SM100 E94AYAB + + + + + −−− −−− −−−

SM301 E94AYAE + + + + + −−− −−− −−−
SM302 E94AYAF + + + + + −−− −−− −−−
Motor holding brake control modules from
Voltage class 24 V 448

E94AZHX0051 + −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−−

E94AZHA0051

368  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Overview of accessories

Accessories Single Drive Multi Drive Power supply VR

modules modules
Field GG (device size) GG GG GG
Designation 1 ... 3 6 ... 7 81 ... 91 1 ... 3 6 1&3 4&5 1&3 Page
E94AZHY0101 −−− + + −−− + −−− −−− −−−
E94AZHB0101
Voltage class 205 V
E94AZHN0025 + − − + −−− −−− −−− −−−
E94AZHY0025 −−− + + + + −−− −−− −−−
E94AZHN0025
Voltage class 180 V
E94AZHN0026 + − − + −−− −−− −−− −−−
E94AZHY0026 −−− + + −−− + −−− −−− −−−
E94AZHN0026
Filters
Mains filter
E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 542
E94AZMSxxxx 180 ... −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 585
415 A
(3F480−xxx.290EM)
E94AZMPxxxx 8 ... 29 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 549
E94AZMPxxxx 82 ... 200 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 556
E94AZMRxxxx 26 ... 47 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + 564
RFI filter
E94AZRSxxxx 4 ... 29 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 571
E94AZRSxxxx 54 ... 95 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 578
E94AZMSxxxx 180 ... −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 585
415 A
(3F480−xxx.290EM)
E94AZRPxxxx 8 ... 29 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 589
E94AZRPxxxx 82 ... 200 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 596
Sine filter
EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 603
EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 611
150 A
EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 617
480 A
Installation accessories
EMC kit from
E94A... + + + + + + + + 622

Busbar mounting sets from

E94AZJA003 + −−− −−− ^ −−− −−− −−− −−− 531

E94AZJA007 + −−− −−− ^ −−− −−− −−− −−−

E94AZJA024 + −−− −−− ^ −−− −−− −−− −−−
Input module from
E94AZEX100 + o o + + + + + 521

Brake resistors from

ERBxxxxxRxxxW + + + −−− −−− + + + 625

Diagnostics from
PC connection 507

E94ACUS USB adapter + + + + + −−− −−− +

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  369

8 Accessories (overview)
Overview of accessories

Accessories Single Drive Multi Drive Power supply VR

modules modules
Field GG (device size) GG GG GG
Designation 1 ... 3 6 ... 7 81 ... 91 1 ... 3 6 1&3 4&5 1&3 Page
Keypad
E94AZKAE keypad + + + + + −−− −−− +
E94AZKHT hand−held + + + + + −−− −−− +
terminal
24 V DC power supply units from
EZV1200−000 + + + + + + + + 639

EZV2400−000 + + + + + + + +
EZV4800−000 + + + + + + + +
EZV1200−001 + + + + + + + +
EZV2400−001 + + + + + + + +
EZV4800−001 + + + + + + + +
DC fuses
EFSARxxxxARHN
+ −−− −−− + + −−− −−− −−−
EFSGRxxxxAYxz
EFSGRXXXXANVN −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−−
EFSGRXXXXANWN −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−−
System cables
see manual "System cables" + + + + + + + +

370  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Safety instructions

8.3 Communication modules

8.3.1 Safety instructions

 Danger!
Improper use of the module and the standard device may cause serious injury
and property damage.
Observe the chapters "Safety instructions" and "Residual hazards" contained
in the instructions for the standard device.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Stop!
Before mounting/dismounting, switch off the supply voltage to prevent
electronic modules from damage.

8.3.2 Important notes

 Communication manuals
Further information on the communication modules is provided in the
respective communication manuals.
The PDF files are provided on the Internet in the download area at
http://www. Lenze.com

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  371

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Mounting

8.3.3 Mounting

E94YCXX001G

8.3.4 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

372  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Possible device module combinations

8.3.5 Possible device module combinations

Communication and extension modules can be used to adapt the Servo Drives 9400 to the
machine requirements. For this, the HighLine version is equipped with module slots MXI1
and MXI2.
The following possible combinations are permissible:
MXI1
MXI2 E94AYFLF E94AYCCA E94AYCDN E94AYCET E94AYCEN E94AYCEP E94AYCEC E94AYCPM E94AYCER E94AYCEO E94AYCIB

E94AYFLF −
E94AYCCA −
E94AYCDN
E94AYCET
E94AYCEN −
E94AYCEP
E94AYCEC
E94AYCPM 1)
E94AYCER 1)
E94AYCEO
E94AYCIB

Permissible
− Not possible
1) PROFIsafe can only be used in MXI1

E94AYFLF Master frequency

E94AYCCA CANopen®
E94AYCDN DeviceNet
E94AYCET EtherCAT®
E94AYCEN Ethernet 2 Port
E94AYCEP POWERLINK MN/CN
E94AYCEC POWERLINK CN
E94AYCPM PROFIBUS®
E94AYCER PROFINET®
E94AYCEO EtherNet/IP
E94AYCIB INTERBUS

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  373

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6 Ethernet interface

Ethernet cable specifications

 Note!
Only use cables complying with the below specifications.

Ethernet cable specifications

Ethernet standard Standard Ethernet (according to IEEE 802.3), 100base TX (fast Ethernet)
Cable type S/FTP (Screened Foiled Twisted Pair), ISO/IEC 11801 or EN 50173, CAT 5e
Damping 23.2 dB (at 100 MHz and per 100 m)
Crosstalk damping 24 dB (at 100 MHz and per 100 m)
Return loss 10 dB (per 100 m)
Surge impedance 100 

Ethernet connection
RJ45 socket PIN Signal
1 Tx +
2 Tx −
3 Rx +
4 −
5 −
6 Rx −
7 −
E94AYCXX004C
8 −

 Note!
Plug/remove the Ethernet cable plug in a straight manner (at right angles)
into/from the socket to make sure that the RJ45 socket will not be damaged.

374  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6.1 Ethernet

Identification

Type
HW Ver.

MAC ID

E94YCEN008

 
Type code E94 A Y C EN Vx
Product series
Device generation
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
Ethernet
Hardware version

Elements

E94YCEN001A

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  375

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Connections
Pos. Description
X215 Ethernet connections
X216 Design: RJ45 socket to IEC 60603−7

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS green on The communication module is supplied with voltage.
DE red on The communication module is not accepted by the standard device (see
notes provided in the instructions for the standard device).
LEDs at connection X215/X216:
− yellow On / blinking Data is being exchanged via Ethernet.
− green on Ethernet connection is available.

376  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6.2 POWERLINK
Supported functionalities:
ƒ Managing node (with up to 50 nodes)
ƒ Controlled node

Identification

E94YCET005

  
E94 A Y C EP VA 0.50
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: communication module
POWERLINK MN/CN
Hardware version
Software version

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  377

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Elements

E94YCEP001A

Connections
Pos. Description
X210 Connection for the external supply of the communication module
Design: Plug connector with screw connection, 2−pole
X211 Connection for POWERLINK
X212 Design: RJ45 socket according to IEC 60603−7, with integrated LEDs

378  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS green blinking The communication module is supplied with voltage but has no connection to the standard
device (standard device is either switched off, in the initialisation phase, or not available).
on The communication module is being supplied with voltage and is connected to the standard
device.
ME red on A communication module error has occurred.
BS green The LED functions are controlled by the NMT state machine.
off The communication module is not active at the fieldbus.
Status:
NMT_GS_OFF, NMT_GS_INITIALISATION,
NMT_CS_NOT_ACTIVE / NMT_MS_NOT_ACTIVE
The POWERLINK network is in the initialisation phase.
(The LED flashed once per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_PREOPERATIONAL_1 / NMT_MS_PREOPERATIONAL_1
The POWERLINK network is in the initialisation phase with cyclic traffic.
(The LED flashed twice per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_PREOPERATIONAL_2 / NMT_MS_PREOPERATIONAL_2
The POWERLINK node waits for the start signal.
(The LED flashes three times per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_READY_TO_OPERATE / NMT_MS_READY_TO_OPERATE
The POWERLINK node has not found any managing node and is in the "BASIC−Ethernet"
operating mode.
(The LED is blinking with a frequency of 10 Hz.)
Status:
NMT_CS_BASIC_ETHERNET
The POWERLINK node is in the "Stopped" state; waiting for switch−off.
(The LED is blinking with a frequency of 2.5 Hz.)
Status:
NMT_CS_STOPPED
The POWERLINK node is in the operating phase.
(The LED is permanently lit.)
Status:
NMT_CS_OPERATIONAL / NMT_MS_OPERATIONAL
BE red on A fieldbus error has occurred.
DE red on The communication module is not accepted by the standard device.
See notes provided in the documentation for the standard device.
Signalling at the RJ45 sockets (X211, X212):
− red on A POWERLINK collision has occurred.
− green off No POWERLINK connection
on Die POWERLINK connection is available.
blinking Active data communication via POWERLINK

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  379

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

DIP switch

E94YCEP001D

Pos. Description
S233 Node addressing:
The node address results from the sum of all switches being set to "ON".
 Example: Switches 32, 8, 4 = ON ' address = 44
 E94AYCEP address as master: 240
 E94AYCEP address as slave:
1  100 with E94AYCEP as master
1  239 with another master

 Note!
The Lenze setting of all switches is OFF.
Observe the information on the setting of the node address in the POWERLINK
communication module.

External voltage supply

Supply the communication module via the connection X210 by means of a separate supply
voltage.
Designation Explanation
+ External voltage supply
U = 24VDC(20.4 V − 0%... 28.8 V +0%)
I = 140 mA
− Reference potential for external voltage supply

For greater distances between the control cabinets, use a power supply unit in each control
cabinet.

380  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Screw terminal data

Area Values
Electrical connection Plug connector with screw connection
Possible connections rigid:
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Tightening torque 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
Stripping length 6 mm

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  381

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6.3 POWERLINK CN

Identification

E94YCET005

  
E94 A Y C EC VC 1.0
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: communication module
POWERLINK CN
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94YCEC001A

382  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Connections
Pos. Description
X250 Connection for the external supply of the communication module
Design: Plug connector with screw connection, 2−pole
X251 Connection for POWERLINK
X252 Design: RJ45 socket according to IEC 60603−7, with integrated LEDs

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS green blinking The communication module is supplied with voltage but has no connection to the standard
device (standard device is either switched off, in the initialisation phase, or not available).
on The communication module is being supplied with voltage and is connected to the standard
device.
ME red on A communication module error has occurred.
BS green The LED functions are controlled by the NMT state machine.
off The communication module is not active at the fieldbus.
Status:
NMT_GS_OFF, NMT_GS_INITIALISATION,
NMT_CS_NOT_ACTIVE / NMT_MS_NOT_ACTIVE
The POWERLINK network is in the initialisation phase.
(The LED flashed once per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_PREOPERATIONAL_1 / NMT_MS_PREOPERATIONAL_1
The POWERLINK network is in the initialisation phase with cyclic traffic.
(The LED flashed twice per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_PREOPERATIONAL_2 / NMT_MS_PREOPERATIONAL_2
The POWERLINK node waits for the start signal.
(The LED flashes three times per second.)
Status:
NMT_CS_READY_TO_OPERATE / NMT_MS_READY_TO_OPERATE
The POWERLINK node has not found any managing node and is in the "BASIC−Ethernet"
operating mode.
(The LED is blinking with a frequency of 10 Hz.)
Status:
NMT_CS_BASIC_ETHERNET
The POWERLINK node is in the "Stopped" state; waiting for switch−off.
(The LED is blinking with a frequency of 2.5 Hz.)
Status:
NMT_CS_STOPPED
The POWERLINK node is in the operating phase.
(The LED is permanently lit.)
Status:
NMT_CS_OPERATIONAL / NMT_MS_OPERATIONAL
BE red on A fieldbus error has occurred.
DE red on The communication module is not accepted by the standard device.
See notes provided in the documentation for the standard device.
Signalling at the RJ45 sockets (X211, X212):
− red on A POWERLINK collision has occurred.
− green off No POWERLINK connection
on Die POWERLINK connection is available.
blinking Active data communication via POWERLINK

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  383

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

DIP switch

E94YCEP001D

Pos. Description
S233 Node addressing:
The node address results from the sum of all switches being set to "ON".
 Example: Switches 32, 8, 4 = ON ' address = 44
 Address area: 1 ... 100
1  100 with E94AYCEP as master
1  239 with another master

 Note!
The Lenze setting of all switches is OFF.
Observe the information on the setting of the node address in the POWERLINK
communication module.

External voltage supply

Supply the communication module via the connection X210 by means of a separate supply
voltage.
Designation Explanation
+ External voltage supply
U = 24VDC(20.4 V − 0%... 28.8 V +0%)
I = 140 mA
− Reference potential for external voltage supply

For greater distances between the control cabinets, use a power supply unit in each control
cabinet.

Screw terminal data

Area Values
Electrical connection Plug connector with screw connection
Possible connections rigid:
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Tightening torque 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
Stripping length 6 mm

384  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6.4 EtherCAT®

Identification

E94AYCET005

  
E94 A Y C ET VE 03.00
Product range
Version
Module ID: extension module
Module type: communication module
EtherCAT
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94AYCET001B

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  385

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Connections
Pos. Description
X245 Connection for the external supply of the communication module
Design: Plug connector with spring connection, 2−pole
X246 EtherCAT input (IN)
Design: RJ45 socket according to IEC 60603−7
X247 EtherCAT output (OUT)
Design: RJ45 socket according to IEC 60603−7

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS green on
The communication module is supplied with voltage and has a
connection to the standard device.
blinking 200 ms
200 ms

The communication module is supplied with voltage but has no

connection to the standard device (standard device is either switched off,
in the initialisation phase, or not available).
ME red on
An error in the communication module has occurred.
RUN green off The communication module is not active on the fieldbus or is in the "Init"
status.
blinking 200 ms
200 ms

"Pre−operational" status active:

 Access to parameters and objects possible.
 No process data exchange
blinking once 200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
1000 ms

(single flash)
"Safe−operational" status active:
 The data are not active in the standard device yet.
on
The communication module is in the "Operational" status.
ERR red off No error
blinking 200 ms
200 ms

The configuration is invalid/faulty.

blinking once 200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
1000 ms

(single flash)
 A state change that was not requested has occurred. (The slave
application has changed the EtherCAT status independently.)
 Synchronisation error (The EtherCAT node changes to the
"Safe−operational" status automatically.)
blinking twice 200 ms
200 ms
200 ms
1000 ms
200 ms
200 ms
200 ms

(double flash)
An "Application Watchdog Timeout" or a "Sync Manager Watchdog
Timeout" has occurred.
DE red on
The communication module is not accepted by the standard device, or
the standard device is not active. (See notes in the documentation for the
standard device.)
L/A green on
Physical EtherCAT connection is available.
flickering 50 ms

Data are exchanged via EtherCAT.

B red off This LED is not used.

386  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

External voltage supply

 Note!
In the case of an external voltage supply and for greater distances between
the control cabinets, always use a separate power supply unit (SELV/PELV) that
is safely separated in accordance with EN 61800−5−1 in each control cabinet.
The external voltage supply of the communication module is required if EtherCAT
communication is to remain intact in case the supply of the standard device fails.
Supply the communication module via the 2−pole plug connector (X245) with a separate
supply voltage.
Designation Description
+ External voltage supply
U = 24VDC(20.4 V − 0%... 28.8 V + 0%)
I = 130 mA
− Reference potential for external voltage supply

Terminal data
Field Values
Electrical connection 2−pin plug connector with spring connection
Possible connections rigid:
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Stripping length 9 mm

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  387

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

8.3.6.5 EtherNet/IP

Identification

E94YCET005

  
E94 A Y C EO VE 1.00
Product series
Device generation
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
EtherNet/IP
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94YCEO001B

388  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Pos. Description
X232 Connection for external voltage supply
 2−pole plug connector with spring connection
X233 EtherNet/IP connections
 RJ45 sockets
X234  With 2 LED status displays, respectively, for diagnostics
ST
ER
MS LED status displays for diagnostics
NS
DE

Module status displays

Module status displays are displayed by the LEDs ST, ER and DE.

E94YCEO001E

LED Colour Status Description

ST green on
The communication module is being supplied with voltage and is
connected to the standard device.
blinking 250 ms
250 ms

The communication module is supplied with voltage but has no connection

to the standard device (The standard device is either switched off, in the
initialisation phase, or not available).
ER red on
A communication module error has occurred.
DE red on
The communication module is not accepted by the standard device or the
standard device is not active. (See notes provided in the documentation for
the standard device.)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  389

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

CIP status displays

CIP status displays are indicated by the LEDs MS and NS.

E94YCEO001E

LED Colour / status Description

green red
MS off off CIP module status: "Nonexistent"
The communication module is not supplied with voltage.
off on
CIP module status: "Major Unrecoverable Fault"
The communication module has an unrecoverable fault.
The status is set if the pending, status determining device fault is
responded with a system fault.
off blinking 250 ms
250 ms

CIP module status: "Major Recoverable Fault"

The communication module has a recoverable fault.
The status is set if the pending, status determining device fault is
responded with a fault, trouble, quick stop .by trouble, warning locked or
warning.
on off
CIP module status: "Operational"
The communication module operates correctly.

390  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

LED Colour / status Description

green red
MS blinking off 250 ms
250 ms

CIP module status: "Standby"

The communication module has not been configured completely or the
configuration is faulty.
blinking blinking 250 ms

250 ms

CIP module status: "Device Self Testing"

The communication module is performing a self test.
NS off off CIP network status: "No IP Address"
The communication module is not supplied with voltage or has not received
an IP address yet.
off on
CIP network status: "Duplicate IP"
The communication module cannot access the fieldbus (IP address conflict).
off blinking 250 ms
250 ms

CIP network status: "Connection Timeout"

A time−out has occurred.
on off
CIP network status: "Connected"
The communication module operates correctly and is connected to the
scanner.
blinking off 250 ms
250 ms

CIP network status: "No Connections"

The communication module ...
 operates correctly;
 has been assigned with an IP address;
 has not been integrated yet into the network by the scanner.
blinking blinking 250 ms

250 ms

CIP network status: "Self−Test"

The communication module is performing a self test.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  391

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
Ethernet interface

Status displays at the RJ45 sockets (X233, X234)

The LEDs Link and Act at the RJ45 sockets display the Ethernet connection status.

E94YCEO001E

LED Colour Status Description

Link Green Off No Ethernet connection
On
Physical Ethernet connection is available.
Act yellow Off No Ethernet data transfer
On or
flickering
50 ms

Data is being exchanged via Ethernet.

392  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
DeviceNet

8.3.7 DeviceNet

Identification

E94YCDN005

  
E94 A Y C DN VA 1.00
Product range
Version
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
DeviceNet
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E894YCDN001B

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  393

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
DeviceNet

Connections

E94YCDN001C

Designation Cable colour Description

V+ red External voltage supply
 U = 24 V DC
 Imax = 170 mA
CAN_H white Data line / input for bus terminating resistor (120)
SHIELD Shielding
CAN_L blue Data line / input for bus terminating resistor (120)
V− black Reference potential for external voltage supply

394  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
DeviceNet

Displays
Pos. Colour / status Description
ST green is on The communication module is supplied with voltage and has a connection
to the standard device.
green is blinking The communication module is supplied with voltage but is not connected to
the standard device (standard device is switched off, being initialised, or not
available).
ER red is on An error has occurred on the communication module.
MS green red
off off The communication module is not supplied with voltage.
off on The communication module is defective and must be replaced.
off blinking The error in the communication module can be removed.
on off The communication module works properly.
blinking off The communication module has not been completely configured yet or
configuration is faulty.
blinking blinking The communication module is in self−test mode.
NS green red
off off The communication module is not supplied with voltage via DeviceNet or
the "Duplicate MAC ID" test has not been completed yet.
off on The communication module cannot access the bus (e.g. "Duplicate MAC ID",
bus off, invalid baud rate etc.).
off blinking The error in the communication module can be removed.
on off The communication module works properly and has established a
connection to the scanner.
blinking off The communication module ...
 works properly;
 has completed the "Duplicate MAC ID" test;
 has not yet been integrated by the scanner.
blinking blinking The communication module ...
 is in error status;
 has received and accepted a telegram for identifying the faulty devices
("Identify Communication Faulted Request").
DE red is on The communication module is not accepted by the standard device (see
notes given in the documentation of the standard device).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  395

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
DeviceNet

DIP switch

E94YCDN001D

Pos. Switch positions

Baud rate Node address (MAC ID)

2 1 kbps 32 16 8 4 2 1
S225 OFF OFF 125 The station address results from the sum of the binary
values of switches 1 ... 32.
OFF ON 250  Example: Station address 44
ON OFF 500 ' switches 32, 8, 4 = ON (32 + 8 + 4 = 44)
 Valid address range: 0  63
ON ON No function  The Lenze setting for all switches is OFF.

 Note!
Please observe the information about the setting of the DIP switches given in
the "Commissioning" and "Appendix" chapters of the E94AYCDN
communication manual (DeviceNet).

396  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
DeviceNet

Bus cable length

Depending on the baud rate and the cable type used (thick cable/thin cable), the following
bus cable lengths are possible:
Baud rate [kbps] Bus cable lengths [m]
Thick cable Thin cable
125 500
250 250 100
500 100

If both thick and thin cable types are used, the maximum cable lengths can be defined
according to the baud rates as follows:
Baud rate [kbps] Max. bus cable length
125 500 m = Lthick + 5 Lthin
250 250 m = Lthick + 2.5 Lthin
500 100 m = Lthick + Lthin
Lthick: thick cable length
Lthin : thin cable length

 Note!
Select a baud rate in dependency of the data volume, cycle time and number
of nodes just high enough to suit your application.

External supply
The communication module is externally supplied with voltage via the DeviceNet cable at
the 5−pole plug connector (X225).

 Note!
Use a safely separated power supply unit ("SELV"/"PELV") according to EN
61800−5−1.
ƒ The external voltage supply of the communication module is always required.
ƒ Communication with a standard device which is separated from the mains is not
possible.
Terminal Cable colour Description
V+ Red External voltage supply
 U = +24 V DC
 Imax = 170 mA
V− black Reference potential for external voltage supply

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  397

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
DeviceNet

Terminal data
Type Values
Electrical connection Plug connector with double screw connection
Possible connections rigid:
2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
2.5 mm2 (AWG 14)
Tightening torque 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
Stripping length 7 mm

398  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
PROFIBUS®

8.3.8 PROFIBUS®

Identification

E94YCPM005

  
E94 A Y C PM 1A 01.00
Product series
Version
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
PROFIBUS
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94YCPM001A

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  399

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
PROFIBUS®

Connections
Pos. Description
X200 External supply of the communication module
Design: Plug connector with screw connection, 2−pole
X201 Connection for PROFIBUS
Design: Sub−D socket, 9−pole

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS Green On The communication module is supplied with voltage and connected to
the standard device.
Blinking The communication module is supplied with voltage, but has no
connection to the standard device. (The standard device is switched off,
initialising, or not present.)
ME Red On An error in the communication module has occurred.
BS Green Blinking Communication via the communication module has been established.
PROFIBUS communication is active.
BE Red On Bus monitoring has been triggered.
DE Red On The communication module is not accepted by the standard device. (See
notes in the documentation for the standard device.)

400  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
PROFIBUS®

Assignment of the Sub−D socket

Connection of PROFIBUS to 9−pin Sub−D socket (X201):

View Pin Designation Explanation
1 free −
2 free −
3 RxD/TxD−P Data line B (received data/transmitted data plus)
1
6 4 RTS Request To Send (received data/transmitted data, no differential
2 signal)
3 7
8 5 M5V2 Data ground (ground to 5V)
4
9 6 P5V2 5 V DC / 30 mA (bus termination)
5
7 free −
8 RxD/TxD−N Data line A (received data/transmitted data minus)
9 free −

DIP switch

E94YCPM001D

Pos. Description
S200 Switches 1 ... 64: bus station addressing
The station address results from the sum of all switches in "ON" position.
 Example: switches 32, 8, 4 = ON ' address = 44
 Address range: 1 ... 126
Switch 2133: establishing compatibility with the communication module EMF2133IB

 Note!
The Lenze setting of all switches is OFF.
Please observe the information provided in the PROFIBUS Communication
Manual about the setting of the station address and the EMF2133IB
compatibility.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  401

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
PROFIBUS®

External voltage supply

 Note!
In the case of an external voltage supply and for greater distances between
the control cabinets, always use a separate power supply unit (SELV/PELV) that
is safely separated in accordance with EN 61800−5−1 in each control cabinet.
The external voltage supply of the communication module is required if communication
via the bus system is to continue in the event of a power supply failure of the standard
device.
ƒ The external voltage supply of the communication module is required if
communication is to continue when the power supply of the standard device fails.
ƒ Access to parameters of a standard device disconnected from the mains is not
possible.
ƒ The external voltage supply is effected via the 2−pole plug connector.

Assignment of the 2−pole plug connector (X200)

Designation Description
+ U = 24VDC(20.4 V − 0%... 28.8 V+ 0%)
I = 130 mA
− Reference potential for external voltage supply

Terminal data
Area Values
Electrical connection Plug connector with screw connection
Possible connections rigid:
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Tightening torque 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)
Stripping length 6 mm

402  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
PROFIBUS®

Specification of the transmission cable

 Note!
Only use cables complying with the listed specifications of the PROFIBUS user
organisation.

Field Values
Specific resistance 135 ... 165 /km, (f = 3 ... 20 MHz)
Capacitance per unit length  30 nF/km
Loop resistance < 110 /km
Core diameter > 0.64 mm
Core cross−section > 0.34 mm2
Cores Twisted double, insulated and shielded

Baud rate / length of bus cable

The length of the bus cable depends on the baud rate used:
Baud rate [kbps] Length [m]
9.6 ... 93.75 1200
187.5 1000
500 400
1500 200
3000 ... 12000 100

 Note!
The baud rate depending of the data volume, cycle time and number of nodes
should only be selected as high as required for the application.

 Tip!
For high baud rates we recommend to consider the application of optical
fibres.
Advantages of optical fibres:
ƒ Electromagnetic interferences on the transmission path remain ineffective.
ƒ Bus lengths of several kilometres are also possible with higher baud rates.
The bus length is
– independent of the baud rate.
– dependent on the optical fibre used.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  403

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
PROFINET®

8.3.9 PROFINET®

Identification

E94YCET005

  
E94 A Y C ER VE 1.20
Product series
Version
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
PROFINET
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94YCER001B

404  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
PROFINET®

Connections
Pos. Description
X240 Connection for the external supply of the communication module
Design: Plug connector with spring connection, 2−pole
X241 PROFINET connections
X242 Design: RJ45 socket according to IEC 60603−7

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS Green Blinking The communication module is supplied with voltage but has no
connection to the basic device (basic device is either switched off, in the
initialisation phase, or not available).
On The communication module is supplied with voltage and has a
connection to the basic device.
ME Red On There is an error in the area of the communication module.
BS Green Off The PROFINET module is not active at the fieldbus.
Blinking The PROFINET module is in the "Data_Exchange" state.
BE Red On Bus error/trouble is active, e.g. the Ethernet cable is unplugged. (The LED
is blinking in parallel to the BS LED.)
DE Red On The communication module is not accepted by the basic device (see
notes in the instructions for the basic device)or the standard device is not
active.
Signalling on the connection X241/X242:
− yellow on/blinking Data is exchanged via PROFINET.
− Green On PROFINET connection is available.

External voltage supply

 Note!
In the case of an external voltage supply and for greater distances between
the control cabinets, always use a separate power supply unit (SELV/PELV) that
is safely separated in accordance with EN 61800−5−1 in each control cabinet.
The external voltage supply of the communication module is required if PROFINET
communication is to remain intact in case the supply of the standard device fails.
If required, feed the communication module with a separate supply voltage via the 2−pin
plug connector (X240).
Designation Explanation
+ External voltage supply
U = 24VDC(20.4 ... 28.8 V)
I = 140 mA
− Reference potential for external voltage supply

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  405

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
PROFINET®

Terminal data
Field Values
Electrical connection 2−pin plug connector with spring connection
Possible connections rigid:
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
flexible:
without wire end ferrule
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
with wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
Stripping length 9 mm

Ethernet connection

E94AYCET004C

Pin Signal
1 Tx +
2 Tx −
3 Rx +
4 −
5 −
6 Rx −
7 −
8 −

 Note!
Plug/remove the Ethernet cable plug in a straight manner (at right angles)
into/from the socket to make sure that the RJ45 socket will not be damaged.

406  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
CANopen®

8.3.10 CANopen®

Identification

E94YCCA002

 
E94 A Y C CA VA
Product series
Device generation
Module identification: extension module
Module type: communication module
CANopen
Hardware version

Elements

E94YCCA001B

Connections
Pos. Description
X220 Connection for CAN
Design: Sub−D plug connector, 9−pin

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  407

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
CANopen®

Displays
Pos. Colour Status Description
MS Green On Communication module is supplied with voltage.
DE Red On The communication module is not accepted by the basic device
(see notes in the Instructions for the basic device)
BS Green see table  409;; CANopen status ("Z")
" g ll g
"Signalling
BE Red according
di tto CANopen error ("F")
DR303−3"

DIP switch
Pos. Description
 Addressing of the bus node

Assignment of the Sub−D plug connector

Connection of the CAN to the 9−pin Sub−D plug connector, pos. "X220":
View Pin Designation Explanation
1 −
2 CAN_L Signal core CAN
3 CAN_GND Ground CAN
1 4 −
6
2
7 5 −
3
8 6 −
4
9
5 7 CAN_H Signal core CAN
8 −
9 −
Housing CAN_Shield Shield (connected to the housing)

Specification of the transmission cable

We recommend the use of CAN cables in accordance with ISO 11898−2:
CAN cable in accordance with ISO 11898−2
Cable type Paired with shielding
Impedance 120  (95 ... 140 )
Cable resistance/cross−section
Cable length  300 m  70 m/m / 0.25  0.34 mm2 (AWG22)
Cable length 301  1000 m  40 m/m / 0.5 mm2 (AWG20)
Signal propagation delay  5 ns/m

408  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
CANopen®

Signalling
Status display (LED) Explanation
Connection status to the bus with the following signalling:
off No connection to the master
green CANopen status ("S")
red CANopen fault ("F")
Constant red F: bus off

Flickering Automatic detection of the baud rate is active

Green blinking every 0.2 s S: pre−operational, F: none

Green blinking every 0.2 s S: pre−operational, F: warning limit reached

Red blinking 1 x, 1 s OFF

Green blinking every 0.2 s S: pre−operational, F: node guard event

Red blinking 2 x, 1 s OFF

Constant green Z: operational, F: no errors

Constant green Z: operational, error: warning limit reached

Red blinking 1 x, 1 s OFF

Constant green Z: operational, F: node guarding event

Red blinking 2 x, 1 s OFF

Constant green Z: operational, F: sync message error

Red blinking 3 x, 1 s OFF

Green blinking every 1 s Z: stopped, F: no errors

Green blinking every 1 s S: stopped, F: warning limit reached

Red blinking 1 x, 1 s OFF

Green blinking every 1 s S: stopped, F: node guard event

Red blinking 2 x, 1 s OFF

Tab. 8−1 Signalling according to DR303−3

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  409

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
INTERBUS

8.3.11 INTERBUS

Identification

E94YCIB005

  
E94 A Y C IB PA 01.00
Product series
Version
Module code: extension module
Module type: communication module
INTERBUS
Hardware version
Software version

Elements

E94YCIB001B

410  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Communication modules
INTERBUS

Connections
The INTERBUS is connected to the communication module by means of X206 (input, 9−pin
Sub−D connector) and X207 (output, 9−pin Sub−D socket).

E94YCIB001C

Assignment of the 9−pin Sub−D connector X206 (IN)

Pin Designation Input/Output Description
1 DO1 Input RS485: DO1 not inverted
2 DI1 Output RS485: DI1 not inverted
3 GND Reference potential
4 free not assigned
5 Vcc5 Output 5 V DC
6 /DO1 Input RS485: DO1 inverted
7 /DI1 Output RS485: DI1 inverted
8 Vcc5 Output 5 V DC
9 free not assigned

Assignment of the 9−pin Sub−D socket X207 (OUT)

Pin Designation Input/Output Description
1 DO2 Output RS485: DO2 not inverted
2 DI2 Input RS485: DI2 not inverted
3 GND Reference potential
4 GND
5 Vcc5 Output 5 V DC
6 /DO2 Output RS485: DO2 inverted
7 /DI2 Input RS485: DI2 inverted
8 Vcc5 Output 5 V DC
9 RBST Signal input Connection to outgoing INTERBUS plugged in.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  411

8 Accessories (overview)
Communication modules
INTERBUS

Displays

E94YCIB001F

LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS green flashes The communication module is being supplied with voltage but is not
connected to the standard device. (The standard device has been
switched off in the initialisation phase or does not exist.)
MS green on The communication module is being supplied with voltage and is
connected to the standard device.
ME red on There is a fault in the area of the communication module.
BS green off The communication module is not active on the field bus. Data cycles are
not being executed.
flashes Communication via the communication module has been set up. The
INTERBUS is active. Data cycles are being executed.
BE red flashes Impermissible setting:
 Total number of data words (PD + PCP) > 10
 Total number of data words (PD + PCP) = 0
The communication module has been initialised and is working
internally with the following values:
 PD = 2 (words)
 PCP = 1 (word)
on INTERBUS communication interrupted. Data cycles are not being
executed.
DE red on The communication module is not accepted by the standard device (see
notes in the documentation for the standard device) or the standard
device is not active.

412  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Function modules
Safety instructions

8.4 Function modules

8.4.1 Safety instructions

 Danger!
Improper use of the module and the standard device may cause serious injury
and property damage.
Observe the chapters "Safety instructions" and "Residual hazards" contained
in the instructions for the standard device.

 Stop!
The device contains components that can be destroyed by electrostatic
discharge!
Before working on the device, the personnel must ensure that they are free of
electrostatic charge by using appropriate measures.

 Stop!
Before mounting/dismounting, switch off the supply voltage to prevent
electronic modules from damage.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  413

8 Accessories (overview)
Function modules
Mounting

8.4.2 Mounting

E94YCXX001G

8.4.3 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

414  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Function modules
Digital frequency

8.4.4 Digital frequency

Identification

L
Type

‚ƒ
E94YCEI003C E94AYXX001

   
E94 A Y F xx xx xx nn
Product series
Device generation
Module identification: extension module
Module type: feedback module
Design
LF = master frequency
Hardware version
−−−
−−−

Application range
This module may be used in conjunction with basic devices of the 9400 product series as
of nameplate designation
 Type E94AxxExxxx
 HW version VB
 SW version 04.01

 Stop!
Malfunctions
If E94xxHExxx4 standard devices, firmware (SW) up to and including
04.00.21.00, are used, the output signals of the digital frequency module can
be faulty.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Damage to machines through unexpected movements of slave drives.
Protective measures:
ƒ Only use digital frequency modules together with E94xxHExxx4 standard
devices of firmware (SW) 04.01.00.00 or higher. The firmware version is
indicated in parameter C00099 and on the nameplate.
Example: C00099 = 04.01.00.00 or SW nameplate data: 04.01

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  415

8 Accessories (overview)
Function modules
Digital frequency

Elements

E94AYFLF004

Connections
Pos. Description
X9 Input for digital frequency, 9−pole Sub−D plug
X10 Output for digital frequency, 9−pole Sub−D socket

Displays
Pos. Colour Condition Description
MS Green ON The module is supplied with voltage.
The module is not accepted by the standard device (see notes
DE Red ON
given in the documentation for the standard device).

 Note!
Only one module per basic device may be used, either in module receptacle
MXI1 or MXI2.

416  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Function modules
Digital frequency

Rated data
Logic level [V] Inputs Outputs
low high low high
TTL 5 V (standard) 0 ... 0.8 2.0 ... 5.0 0 ... 0.4 2.4 ... 5.0

Functions on X9
ƒ Input for encoder signals with TTL level
ƒ Voltage supply +5 V for encoder
ƒ Sensor lead (sense) at regulated voltage supply (Lenze setting)
– max. control range of the voltage drop on the cable: 4 V (corresponds to 5 ... 9 V
output voltage on X9/4)
ƒ Digital input signal (only with regard to unused or external voltage supply)
Functions on X10
ƒ Output for encoder signals with TTL level, directly or simulated
ƒ Voltage supply +5 V
ƒ Digital output signal

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  417

8 Accessories (overview)
Function modules
Digital frequency

Assignment of the Sub−D plug connector

 Stop!
The output voltages on X9/4 and on X10/4 may only be charged at a total of
max. 150 mA.
If the output voltage on X9/4 is used, no digital input signal may be applied to
X9/8. In this case, the cable serves as a sensor lead. In case of a connection
error, the components connected to X9 are damaged.

 Stop!
The output voltages on X9/4 and on X10/4 may not be interconnected. This
applies to both the wiring of several modules and to the wiring of one module
(e. g. for purposes of simulation).
Use system cables not connecting pin 4 for this applications only.

 Tip!
We recommend the use of Lenze system cables. For this purpose, please read
the documentation for the basic device.

X9 Pin Designation Explanation

1 B
5 9
2 A TTL input signal by encoder or encoder simulation
3 A
4 +5 V Regulated voltage supply for encoder
(pin 8 = sense must be used, max. control range 5 ... 9 V)
1 6 5 GND −
6 Z
TTL input signal by encoder or encoder simulation
7 Z
8 The function of this cable has to be set in the basic device:
 S  Sense (sensor lead for voltage regulation, Lenze setting)
 Lc  Lamp control
 E  Enable
SUBD09010 9 B TTL input signal by encoder or encoder simulation

X10 Pin Designation Explanation

1 B
1 6 TTL output signal from the encoder or encoder simulation
2 A
Maximum output current: 20 mA per channel
3 A
4 +5 V VCC ±6 %
5 GND −
5 9 6 Z TTL output signal from the encoder or encoder simulation
7 Z Maximum output current: 20 mA per channel
8 Enable Digital output signal
9 B TTL output signal from the encoder or encoder simulation
SUBD09010 Maximum output current: 20 mA per channel

418  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Memory modules
Safety instructions

8.5 Memory modules

Use these modules in slot  MXI1 MXI2 MMI MSI.

8.5.1 Safety instructions

 Stop!
The  symbol visible at the front indicates the presence of electronic
components which can be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Take appropriate measures to protect these components before touching the
module!

 Stop!
Before mounting/dismounting, switch off the supply voltage to prevent
electronic modules from damage.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  419

8 Accessories (overview)
Memory modules
Mounting

8.5.2 Mounting

E94_MM105

8.5.3 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

420  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Memory modules
Setting CAN node address and baud rate

8.5.4 Setting CAN node address and baud rate

SSP94M1001

Fig. 8−1 Memory module with DIP switch (as of order designation E94AYM22)

S220
O
N d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1

Baud CAN Address

9400CAN003

Fig. 8−2 Arrangement and labelling of the DIP switches

Via the DIP switches on the front, you can set:

ƒ the node address (labelling "1" ... "64") and
ƒ baud rate (labelling "a" ... "d")

 Note!
If DIP switches 1 ... 64 = OFF ("Lenze setting"): When the standard device is
switched on, the parameterisation of codes C00350 (node address) and
C00351 (baud rate) is activated.
Switch the voltage supply of the standard device off and then on again to
activate altered settings.

Setting the node address

The node address of the drive is calculated from the sum of all address switches in the "ON"
position.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  421

8 Accessories (overview)
Memory modules
Setting CAN node address and baud rate

Setting the baud rate

d c b a Baud rate
OFF ON ON OFF 10 kbps
OFF ON OFF ON 20 kbps
OFF OFF ON ON 50 kbps
OFF OFF ON OFF 125 kbps
OFF OFF OFF ON 250 kbps
OFF OFF OFF OFF 500 kbps
ON ON ON OFF 800 kbps
OFF ON OFF OFF 1000 kbps
OFF ON ON ON Automated recognition

422  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Memory modules
Memory module MM220

8.5.5 Memory module MM220

Identification

Hans-Lenze-Str. 1 31855 Aerzen

GERMANY Made in Germany

Type:
HW:

E94Y_MM1010

Designation : MM220  
E94 A Y M 22 VA
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: memory module
Design:
 2 MB flash
 Possible logbook entries: 7
 DIP switch
Licence: Motion Control HighLevel
Hardware version

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  423

8 Accessories (overview)
Memory modules
Memory module MM330

8.5.6 Memory module MM330

Identification

Type SW
HW Ver. SW Ver.

E94Y_MM1010

Designation : MM330  
E94 A Y M 33 VA
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: memory module
Design:
 4 MB flash
 Possible logbook entries: 439
 DIP switch
Licence: Motion Control TopLevel
Hardware version

424  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Memory modules
Memory module MM340

8.5.7 Memory module MM340

Identification

Type SW
HW Ver. SW Ver.

E94Y_MM1010

Designation : MM340  
E94 A Y M 34 VA
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: memory module
Design:
 4 MB flash
 Possible logbook entries: 439
 DIP switch
Licence: Motion Control PLC
Hardware version

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  425

8 Accessories (overview)
Memory modules
Memory module MM430

8.5.8 Memory module MM430

Identification

Type SW
HW Ver. SW Ver.

E94Y_MM1010

Designation : MM430  
E94 A Y M 43 VA
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: memory module
Design:
 8 MB flash
 Possible logbook entries: 439
 DIP switch
 Real−time clock
Licence: Motion Control TopLevel
Hardware version

426  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Memory modules
Memory module MM440

8.5.9 Memory module MM440

Identification

Type SW
HW Ver. SW Ver.

E94Y_MM1010

Designation : MM440  
E94 A Y M 44 VA
Product range
Version
Module description: extension module
Module type: memory module
Design:
 8 MB flash
 Possible logbook entries: 439
 DIP switch
 Real−time clock
Licence: Motion Control PLC
Hardware version

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  427

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
Safety instructions

8.6 Safety modules

8.6.1 Safety instructions

 Danger!
Improper use of the module and the standard device may cause serious injury
and property damage.
Observe the chapters "Safety instructions" and "Residual hazards" contained
in the instructions for the standard device.

 Stop!
Mounting/dismounting must be carried out when the supply voltage is
switched off to protect the electronic components against damage.
Only use safety modules in the module slot for safety modules (MSI).

 Note!
The entry in code C00214 must correspond to the type of the plugged−on
safety module. Otherwise, the controller will report the following error:
"Safety module: Incompatible to setting in C00214".

428  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
Identification

8.6.2 Identification

L
Type

‚ƒ
E94YCEI003C E94AYXX001

   
E94 A Y A x xx xx nn
Product series
Version
Module identification: Device module
Module type: Safety module
Design
A = SM0
B = SM100
E = SM301
F = SM302
Hardware version
Software version (SM30x only)
Serial number

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  429

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
Mounting

8.6.3 Mounting

E94AYAX001

8.6.4 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

430  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM0

8.6.5 SM0

Elements

SSP94SM011

Pos. Description
− There are no elements.

Function
ƒ Nosafety functions are available.
ƒ This module is necessary for operation of the drive controller without safety
functions.

 Note!
If safety functions are necessary, replace the SM0 module with a module with
safety functions (SM100, SM301 oder SM302).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  431

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM100

8.6.6 SM100

Elements

SSP94SM112

Connections
Pos. Description
X80 Pluggable terminal strip for input and output signals

Displays
Pos. Colour Condition Description
On Controller enabled
EN Yellow
Off Non−safe display "Safe pulse inhibit"
The module is not accepted by the standard device (see notes
DE Red On
given in the documentation for the standard device).

Application range
This accessory component may only be used in conjunction with
ƒ E94xxxExxxx axis module
as of nameplate data
HW SW
E94xxxExxxx VA 1.10

432  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM100

Safety instructions

 Danger!
If the request for the safety function is cancelled, the drive will restart
automatically.
You must provide external measures which ensure that the drive only restarts
after a confirmation (EN 60204).

 Danger!
Unexpected motor rotation possible
In the event of a short−circuit between two power transistors, a residual
movement of the motor of up to 180 °/number of pole pairs may occur!
(Example.: 4−pole motor  residual movement max. 180 °/2 = 90 °)
Possible consequences:
ƒ People may be injured by the machine movements (unexpected start−up).
Protective measures:
ƒ The residual movement must be considered in the risk analysis, e.g. safe
torque off for main spindle drives.

 Warnings!
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  433

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM100

Safety modules SM100

 Avertissement !
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C.

434  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM100

Safety modules SM100

Function
ƒ Safe torque off
(previously: safe standstill, protection against unexpected start−up)

Technical data

Rated data input (sensor)

Type Voltage UN Current Imax
[V] [A]
E94AYAB − 24 0.9
SM100

Rated data output (feedback)

Type Voltage UN Current Imax
[V] [A]
E94AYAB − 24 0.7
SM100

Block diagram

SM 100

-
SIA
~
-
SIB
-
GI
PWM

24O

DO1 μC
GO

SSP94S1010

SM100 Safety module

SIA, SIB, GI Two−channel sensor signal connections, supply through safely separated power
supply unit (SELV/PELV)
(old labelling up to HW version VB: SI1, SI2, GI)
24O, DO1, GO Non−safe feedback connections, supply through safely separated power supply
unit (SELV/PELV)
C Microcontroller
PWM Pulse width modulation

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  435

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM100

Connection data
X80 Marking Description Electrical data
SIA Input first shutdown path SIA: Ityp = 160 mA
GI GND potential for SIA/SIB LOW: −3 ... 5 V,
HIGH: 15 ... 30 V,
SIB Input second shutdown path SIB: Ityp = 28 mA

Supply through safely

separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
GO GND potential feedback 24 V, max. 0.7 A,
short−circuit−proof,
24O 24 V supply feedback LOW−active,
DO1 Non−safe signalling output: "Safe pulse Supply through safely
inhibit" separated power supply unit
SSP9400X80 (SELV/PELV)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Rigid 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12
Wire end ferrule,
0.2 ... 1.5 24 ... 16
insulated Spring terminal
Twin wire end
0.5 ... 1.0 20 ... 18
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

Information for the exchange of modules of different hardware versions

up to HW: VB from HW: VC Comment
SI1 SIA
GI GI
SI2 SIB The exchange of the spring terminal
GO GO is required!
24O 24O
DO1 DO1

436  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM301

8.6.7 SM301

Elements

SSP94SM321

Pos. Description
 Safety address switch (in the left part of the housing)
S82 Module switch for parameter set adoption from the memory module
X82.1
X82.2
Plug−in terminal strips for input and output signals
X82.3
X82.4

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  437

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM301

Displays
Pos. Colour State Description
On Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault.
Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault. Internal
Blinking
communication to the standard device is not possible.
MS Green Drive−based safety is in service status.
(Module State) Flashing
For exiting, parameterise the drive−based safety.
Drive−based safety is not initialised.
Off
Acknowledgement is not possible.
EN On Controller enabled
Yellow
(Enable) Off Non−safe display "STO"
On System error

ME Blinking Trouble
Red
(Module Error) Flashing Warning
Off Error−free operation
Request of an acknowledgement for the restart or the
On
parameter set adoption
AS Yellow Blinking SS1/STO active
(Acknowledge Stop)
Flashing SS2/SOS active
Off No stop function active
Safety bus error:
On  Communication is not possible.
BE  Acknowledgement is possible.
Red
(Bus Error)
Blinking Safety bus error: no valid configuration.
Off Safety bus: error−free operation.
Drive−based safety is not accepted by the standard device
On
DE (see notes in the instructions for the standard device).
Red
(Drive Error) Drive−based safety is correctly recognised by the standard
Off
device.
Blinking: on/off every 0.5 s Flashing: on/off every 0.1/0.9 s

Application range
The use of this module is permissible with standard devices of the 9400 product series from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94xxHExxxx VA 01.49
E94AxPExxxx 2A 02.xx

The use of this module is permissible with the PROFIBUS communication module from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AYCPM VB 01.10

438  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM301

Safety instructions

 Danger!
When the request for the safety function is deactivated, the drive can restart
automatically. The behaviour can be set via the parameter "Restart behaviour"
(C15300/1/2).
In the case of an automatic restart, you must provide external measures which
ensure that the drive only restarts after an acknowledgement (EN 60204).

 Danger!
Danger to life through improper installation
Improper installation of the safety engineering systems can cause
anuncontrolled starting action of the drives.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries
Protective measures:
Total cable length between X82 and its connected components (e.g. sensors,
devices, ...) > 3 m:
ƒ Up to HW version 1A, a shielded laying system must be used for the cable
between X82 and its connected components:
– The shield must at least cover the shield connection at the installation
backplane.
– The shield should also cover the connected component if possible.
ƒ From HW version 1A onwards, unshielded wiring is permissible.
Total cable length between X82 and its connected components (e.g. sensors,
devices, ...) < 3 m:
ƒ Unshielded wiring is permissible.

 Warnings!
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  439

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM301

Safety modules SM301

 Avertissement !
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C.

440  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM301

Safety modules SM301

Technical data
If safety functions with SM301, which require reliable speed and position detection, are
used, the cable length for motor and feedback must be restricted to 100 m. In addition, the
maximum permissible cable lengths in relation to the drive controllers must be adhered
to (c.f. respective chapter "General data").

The module and the safe output must be supplied with 24 V from safely separated power
supply units. If electrical isolation is required, separate voltage supply lines must be used.
Detailed features of the 24−V supply
Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
+, − Supply voltage of the module via a safely separated [V] 19,2 24 30
power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 350
24O, GO Supply voltage of the safe output via a safely [V] 18 24 30
separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 1100

If the voltage of the SELV/PELV power supply unit can exceed 30 V in the event of an error,
provide for an external fuse (! 8.7.3).

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  441

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM301

Functions from SM301 V1.0 onwards

ƒ Safe torque off (STO)
(formerly: safe standstill, protection against unexpected start−up)
ƒ Safe stop 1 (SS1)
ƒ Safe stop 2 (SS2) − see SOS
ƒ Safe stop emergency (SSE)
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS) − in accordance with EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with
speed monitoring
ƒ Safe maximum speed (SMS)
ƒ Safely limited speed 1 (SLS1)
ƒ Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
ƒ Safe enable switch (ES)
ƒ Safe speed monitor (SSM)
ƒ Safe monitor (output)
ƒ Connection of safety sensors
ƒ Safe parameterisation
ƒ Safety bus connection (PROFIsafe V1)

Additional functions as of SM301 V1.1

ƒ Safely limited speed 2 (SLS2)
ƒ Safely limited speed 3 (SLS3)
ƒ Safely limited speed 4 (SLS4)
ƒ Safe cascading (CAS) via SD−In4/SD−Out1
ƒ Safety bus connection (PROFIsafe V2)
Additional functions from SM301 V1.2
ƒ Parameterisable response time of encoder monitoring
Additional functions from SM301 V1.3
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS) − compliant with EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with
position monitoring
ƒ Safe direction (SDI)
ƒ Safe speed measurement and position detection with resolver using a motor
encoder and an additional position encoder (two−encoder−concept)

Additional functions as of SM301 V1.4

ƒ Safely limited increment (SLI)
ƒ Safely monitored brake ramp for SS1/SS2
ƒ Safe speed and position detection with resolver selected as the motor encoder

442  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM301

Addressing
The safety address serves to clearly assign the safety modules of the SM301 type in systems
with several drives. The address "0" is not permissible.

Address switch
The safety address can be set in the left part of the housing by means of the DIP switch .
For setting the switch, use an appropriately small tool, e. g. a probe. The switch can only be
set if the module is not connected to a standard device. Via the switch, addresses in the
range of 0 ... 1023 can be set. Alterations by the switch with regard to the address are only
activated when the 24−V supply is switched on. The address setting "0" requires the setting
by the address code.
DIP switch  Labelling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Value of the address bit 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512

 Note!
In the SM301 safety module as of version VA 1.xx, the address 0 is replaced as
follows:
ƒ With the address saved in the safety module in the parameter
"Safety address" (C15111).
ƒ If the address 0 canot be replaced, the module reports an error.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  443

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM301

Block diagram

SM301
E94AYAE
X82.1 X82.2
24 V ext.
-

GO

O1B GO

O1A 24O
‚
AIE

CLA

CLB

GCL GCL
S4
GI2 GI4

I2B I4B

I2A I4A

S2 GCL GCL
S3
GI1 GI3

I1B I3B

I1A I3A

S1 K AIS AIS

X82.3 X82.4
SSP94SM360

Fig. 8−3 Wiring example

E94AYAF SM302 safety module
S1
Passive sensor with channel A and B
S2
S3 higher−level safety control (active sensor)
S4 lightgrid (active sensor)
24 V ext. 24−V voltage supply of the module (SELV/PELV)
 24−V voltage supply of the output (SELV/PELV)
 safe output to higher−level safety control
K to AIS of the next module

444  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM301

Connection data

 Note!
Provide for a sufficient strain relief, so that the terminals are not pulled from
the plug connectors, in particular when you use rigid cables.

Cable cross−sections and tightening torques

Type [mm2] [Nm] AWG [lb−in]
Wire end ferrule,
0.25 ... 0.75 24 ... 18
insulated Spring terminal Spring terminal
Rigid 0.14 ... 1.5 26 ... 16
Stripping length or contact length: 9 mm

X82.1 Labelling Description

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

GO GND SD−Out1
O1B Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel B
O1A Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel A

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

X82.2 Labelling Description

− GND external supply
+ +24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
GIR
This part of the terminal strip is reserved.
RI1
GO GND 24O
24O +24 V external supply for the safe monitor SD−Out1 (SELV/PELV)
AIE Error acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Error")
CLA Clock output for passive sensors, channel A (Clock A)
CLB Clock output for passive sensors, channel B (Clock B)

X82.3 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI2 GND SD−In2
I2B Sensor input SD−In2, channel B
I2A Sensor input SD−In2, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI1 GND SD−In1
I1B Sensor input SD−In1, channel B
I1A Sensor input SD−In1, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.4/AIS)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  445

8 Accessories (overview)
Safety modules
SM301

X82.4 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI4 GND SD−In4
I4B Sensor input SD−In4, channel B
I4A Sensor input SD−In4, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI3 GND SD−In3
I3B Sensor input SD−In3, channel B
I3A Sensor input SD−In3, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.3/AIS)

446  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Safety modules
SM302

8.6.8 SM302

Available for delivery soon with extended functions compared to SM301.

 Warnings!
Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
Applicable if supplied by an external source.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.
ƒ External fuse for 24 Vdc supply voltage. Rated 4 A DC fuse UL248−14.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  447

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Overview

8.7 Motor holding brake control modules

8.7.1 Overview

The motor brake control modules differ in the following features:

ƒ Rated voltage
ƒ Device size assignment
ƒ Mounting type
The table shows the module/controller assignments according to the features listed.

448  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Overview

Single−axis controllers Rated voltage of motor holding brake (control module)

Type 24 V 205 V 180 V
E94AZHX0051
E94xSxE0024 GG1  
E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
... ...
E94AZHA0051    
E94xSxE0244 GG3
 
E94AZHY0101 E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
E94xSxE0324 GG6      
... ...
E94xSxE1044 GG7 E94AZHB0101 E94AZHY0025 E94AZHY0026
     
E94AZHY0101 E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
E94xSxE1454 GG81      
... ...
E94xSxE4604 GG91 E94AZHB0101 E94AZHY0025 E94AZHY0026
     
Multi−axis controllers Rated voltage of motor holding brake (control module)
Type 24 V 205 V 180 V
E94xMxE0024 GG1
E94AZHX0051 E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
... ...
     
E94xMxE0324 GG3
E94AZHY0101 E94AZHN0025 E94AZHN0026
E94xMxE0474      
... GG6
E94xMxE0594 E94AZHB0101 E94AZHY0025 E94AZHY0026
     
Tab. 8−2 Motor holding brake/control module assignment
GGx Device size
 integrated in the installation backplane, already used or retrofittable
 integrated in the device, already applied or retrofittable
(recommended variant for the same rated voltage)
 integrated control module (automatic brake operation can be activated)
 external control (via digital output/digital input)
 external mounting (DIN rail or mounting plate)

The information applicable to all modules is provided in advance.

The information applicable to the individual modules is provided afterwards:
ƒ E94AZHX0051 − (! 456)
ƒ E94AZHA0051 − (! 463)
ƒ E94AZHY0101 − (! 470)
ƒ E94AZHB0101 − (! 477)
ƒ E94AZHY0025 − (! 484)
ƒ E94AZHN0025 − (! 489)
ƒ E94AZHY0026 − (! 495)
ƒ E94AZHN0026 − (! 501)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  449

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Overview

Monitoring functions
Motor brake control module
Brake status Module−internal monitoring No monitoring
Brake is not controlled  Supply voltage of brake  Supply voltage
(brake is applied) – not available – too high
– not connected correctly – too low
Brake is controlled  Short circuits – e.g. 18 V instead of 24 V
(brake is released) – cable "+" or "−"  Brake current
– cable "BD1" or "BD2" – too high
 Open circuit – too low
– cable "+" or "−"  Brake cable not connected
– cable "BD1" or "BD2" correctly

ƒ Single Drive E94xS... devices: Monitoring active from VDC bus > 250 V
ƒ Multi Drive E94xM... devices: Monitoring active independent of VDC bus
VDC bus = DC−bus voltage

ƒ Errors can be evaluated under code C02609/8.

The externally controllable E94AZHN002x modules can be monitored via the digital
output (recommended).
Digital output DO
Status Description
HIGH No faults
LOW Fault
 Supply voltage for motor holding brake is missing
 Motor holding brake not connected to power supply
 Brake cable defective
– Open circuit
– Short circuit
 Supply voltage for motor brake control is missing

 Note!
The supply status can be reported to the standard device via the error channel.
For more information, please see the software manual or the online help (see
description of C02609/8).

Operating conditions
The operating conditions correspond to the operating conditions for the standard device
to which the DC−feeding point is connected.

450  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Overview

Electrical isolation / protection against accidental contact

Motor holding brake control modules

9400 controller

Control card
24 V

Double

insulation
Motor brake control

U V W BD1 BD2 + −

3~ motor Brake 24 V

Basic insulation in the

Lenze system cable

The principle of electrical isolation can be analogously transferred to the modules with
other voltages for motor holding brakes.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  451

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Safety instructions

8.7.2 Safety instructions

 During installation the notes given in the documentation for the standard
device must be observed!

 Danger!
Dangerous electrical voltage!
Dangerous electrical voltages may be applied to the connections of the brake
switch.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Disconnect the standard device and the brake switch from the mains before
carrying out any operations.
ƒ Check that all power terminals are deenergised.

 Stop!
The motor brake control includes an electronic switch which can control a
motor holding brake.
The motor brake control module may only be connected to holding brakes
which correspond to the permissible data specified in the technical data.
If the permissible values specified in the technical data are not complied with:
ƒ The motor brake control module can be destroyed.
ƒ A safe operation of the motor holding brake cannot be guaranteed.
Further notes in the documentation of the standard device must be observed!

 Stop!
Requirements on the brake cable (connection BD1/BD2):
ƒ If the brake cable is part of the motor cable, it must be shielded.
– An operation with unshielded brake cables can destroy the motor brake
control module.
– We recommend the use of Lenze system cables (motor cable with
separately shielded additional cores).
– Connect the shield to PE on both sides.
ƒ When using a permanent magnet holding brake, ensure the correct polarity
of the brake cable.
– If the terminals are reversed, the brake does not release. Since the motor
runs against the closed brake, the brake can be destroyed.

452  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

8.7.3 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

E94AZHX0051, E94AZHA0051

 Warnings!
ƒ Only for use with series E94.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ Load at "Brake Output" is provided for "dc pilot duty".
ƒ The voltage rating of the fuses must at least be suitable for the input
voltage of the device.
ƒ Use 60/75 °C wire, except for control circuits.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.

E94AZHY0101, E94AZHA0101, E94AZHY0025, E94AZHN0025, E94AZHY0026,

E94AZHN0026

 Warnings!
ƒ Only for use with series E94.
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ Load at "Brake Output" is provided for "dc pilot duty".
ƒ The voltage rating of the fuses must at least be suitable for the input
voltage of the device.
ƒ E94AZHx0101, E94AZHx0025:
– Use 105 °C wire only (min. wire size 20 AWG), except for control circuits.
ƒ E94AZHx0026:
– Use 60/75 °C wire only (min. wire size 20 AWG), except for control circuits.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.
ƒ These products are intended for use in a pollution degree 2 environment.

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Fuse [A]
E94AZHX0051 7.5
E94AZHA0051 7.5
E94AZHY0101 7.5
E94AZHB0101 7.5
E94AZHY0025 5
E94AZHN0025 5
E94AZHY0026 5
E94AZHN0026 5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  453

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − French
Motor holding brake control modules Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

E94AZHX0051, E94AZHA0051

 Avertissement !
ƒ Equipement destiné uniquement à être utilisé avec la série E94.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Charge côté "sortie du frein" fournie pour "cycle pilote CC".
ƒ La tension des fusibles doit être adaptée à la tension d’entrée de
l’équipement (exigence minimale).
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour les
circuits de commande.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.

E94AZHY0101, E94AZHA0101, E94AZHY0025, E94AZHN0025, E94AZHY0026,

E94AZHN0026

 Avertissement !
ƒ Equipement destiné uniquement à être utilisé avec la série E94.
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Charge côté "sortie du frein" fournie pour "cycle pilote CC".
ƒ La tension des fusibles doit être adaptée à la tension d’entrée de
l’équipement (exigence minimale).
ƒ E94AZHx0101, E94AZHx0025:
– Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs 105 °C (20 AWG minimum), sauf
pour la partie commande.
ƒ E94AZHx0026:
– Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs 60/75 °C (20 AWG minimum), sauf
pour la partie commande.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C.
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés à un environnement caractérisé par le degré de
pollution 2.

454  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Branch circuit/short circuit protection with fuses in accordance with UL248

Type Fuse [A]
E94AZHX0051 7.5
E94AZHA0051 7.5
E94AZHY0101 7.5
E94AZHB0101 7.5
E94AZHY0025 5
E94AZHN0025 5
E94AZHY0026 5
E94AZHN0026 5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  455

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Motor holding brake control modules Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

8.7.4 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

E94AZH001

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHX0051
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Connection of the installation backplane
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H x 005 1
Product series
Device generation
Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
005 = 2.5 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V

456  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on control cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s; control
cable − PE)

Rated data
Voltage Current Power Breaking energy
Type UDC [V] IDC [A] PDC [W] E [Ws]
E94AZHX0051 18 ... 30 0.3 ... 2.5 max. 55 max. 5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  457

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Field Values
Input voltage DC 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
Output voltage Corresponds to input voltage
Brake current 0.3 ... 2.5 A
Switching capacity Max. 55 W
Breaking energy Max. 5 Ws
Cable protection Recommendation: 7.5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Maximum cable length In the chapter "Electrical installation" the dependency of the cable length on
the brake current and the cable cross−section is described.
Operating frequency Max. 6/min
Operating times Can be ignored compared to the delay time of the brake.
See documentation of the brake.
Service life > 10 millions of cycles
Protection against
Overload No
Short circuit of the Yes
terminals
Polarity reversal at the Yes
input
Insulation 1) Double insulation (EN61800−5−1: Vrated = 300 V AC),
Separation (UL: Vrated = 500 V AC)
1) Brake connection against control card of the controller

458  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Cable length
h сϮϰs h сϮϴs

ϭϰϬ ϭϰϬ

ϭϮϬ ϭϮϬ

ϭϬϬ ϭϬϬ

>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁
>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁

ϴϬ ϴϬ

ϲϬ ϲϬ

ϰϬ ϰϬ

ϮϬ ϮϬ

Ϭ Ϭ
Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ
/ƌ ΀΁ /ƌ ΀΁

Ϭ͕ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ

t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ

Lmax Maximum brake cable length in [m]

IBR Brake current in [A]
UDC Supply voltage of the motor brake control

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  459

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Installation steps

E94AZH003

1. Plug the motor brake control onto the terminal  of the installation backplane.
2. Make sure that both clips  engage in the slots  of the motor brake control.

460  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Connection plan

E94AZH005

E94AZH006

F10 Secondary cable protection. Observe the standards of the cable protection when selecting
the fuse!
 Use twin wire end ferrules.
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  461

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHX0051

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHX0051: 24 V DC, max. 2.5 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP940X107 Observe correct polarity!

 Note!
The supply terminals (+/−) are protected against polarity reversal.
The supply status can be reported to the basic device via the error channel.
Further information can be obtained from the documentation of the basic
device.

Terminal data Conductor cross−section Tightening torque

[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Single core 0.25 ... 2.5 24 ... 12
0.5 ... 0.6 4.4 ... 5.3
2 conductors 1) 0.25 ... 1.5 24 ... 16
1) Two conductors of the same cross−section with a twin wire end ferrule

462  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

8.7.5 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

E94AZHA0051_01

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
E94AZHA0051 motor brake control
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Terminal for the installation backplane
X107 Terminal for supply and brake
X121 Terminal for external control and feedback

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H A 005 1
Product series
Version
Accessories
Type of motor brake control
Rated current
005 = 2.5 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  463

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Industrial Control Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on control cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s; control
cable − PE)

464  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Rated data
Field Values
Input voltage DC 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
Output voltage Corresponds to input voltage
Brake current 0.3 ... 2.5 A
Switching capacity Max. 55 W
Breaking energy Max. 5 Ws
Cable protection Recommendation: 7.5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"

Control input
Input voltage PLC input, IEC 61131−2, 24 V
Input current Typically 15 mA
Control output
Output voltage PLC output, IEC 61131−2, 24 V
Output current Typically 15 mA

Maximum cable length In the chapter "Electrical installation" the dependency of the cable length on
the brake current and the cable cross−section is described.
Operating frequency Max. 6/min
Operating times Can be ignored compared to the delay time of the brake.
See documentation of the brake.
Service life > 10 millions of cycles
Protection against
Overload No
Short circuit of the Yes
terminals
Polarity reversal at the Yes
input
Insulation 1) Double insulation (EN61800−5−1: Vrated = 300 V AC),
Separation (UL: Vrated = 500 V AC)
1) Brake connection against control card of the controller

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  465

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Cable length
h сϮϰs h сϮϴs

ϭϰϬ ϭϰϬ

ϭϮϬ ϭϮϬ

ϭϬϬ ϭϬϬ

>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁
>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁

ϴϬ ϴϬ

ϲϬ ϲϬ

ϰϬ ϰϬ

ϮϬ ϮϬ

Ϭ Ϭ
Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ
/ƌ ΀΁ /ƌ ΀΁

Ϭ͕ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͕ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ

t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ

Lmax Maximum brake cable length in [m]

IBR Brake current in [A]
UDC Supply voltage of the motor brake control

466  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Installation steps

E94AZH003

1. Plug the motor brake control onto the terminal  of the installation backplane.
2. Make sure that both clips  engage in the slots  of the motor brake control.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  467

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Connection plan

E94AZHAB056

E94AZHAB056

F10 Secondary cable protection. Observe the standards of the cable protection when selecting
the fuse!
 Use twin wire end ferrules.
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

468  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHA0051

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Terminal for the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0051: 24 V DC, max. 2.5 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP940X107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data Conductor cross−section Tightening torque

[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Single core 0.25 ... 2.5 24 ... 12
0.5 ... 0.6 4.4 ... 5.3
2 conductors 1) 0.25 ... 1.5 24 ... 16
1) Two conductors of the same cross−section with a twin wire end ferrule

Terminal X121 Labelling Description

DI Terminal for external control
in accordance with IEC 61131−2

GI Reference potential

DO Terminal for external feedback

SSP940X107 in accordance with IEC 61131−2

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible 0.2 ... 1.5 24 ... 16 Spring terminal
With wire end
0.25 ... 0.75 24 ... 18 Spring terminal
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  469

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

8.7.6 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

E94AZHY001

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHY0101
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Connection of standard device
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H Y xxx x
Product series
Version
Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
002 = 0.75 A
010 = 5.0 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V DC
5 = 205 V DC
6 = 180 V DC

470  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on mains cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on mains cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s;
phase − phase)
2 kV (1.2 s/50 s; phase − PE)

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHY0101 24 0 (DC) 0.3 ... 5 0.3 ... 5 2
 Temperature in the control cabinet

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  471

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Area Values
Input voltage DC 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
Output voltage Corresponds to input voltage
Brake current 0.3 ... 5 A
Switching capacity Max. 110 W
Breaking energy Max. 10 Ws
Cable protection Recommendation: 7.5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Control input
Control voltage
Control current Internal
Protective function
Maximum cable length In the chapter "Electrical installation" the dependency of the cable length on
the brake current and the cable cross−section is described.
Operating frequency Max. 6/min
Operating times Can be ignored compared to the delay time of the brake.
See documentation of the brake.
Service life > 10 millions of cycles
Protection against
Overload No
Short circuit of the Yes
terminals
Polarity reversal at the Yes
input
Insulation 1) Double insulation (EN61800−5−1: Vrated = 300 V AC),
Separation (UL: Vrated = 500 V AC)
1) Brake connection against control card of the controller

472  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Cable length
h сϮϰs h сϮϴs

ϭϰϬ ϭϰϬ

ϭϮϬ ϭϮϬ

ϭϬϬ ϭϬϬ

>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁
>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁

ϴϬ ϴϬ

ϲϬ ϲϬ

ϰϬ ϰϬ

ϮϬ ϮϬ

Ϭ Ϭ
Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ ϯ ϯ͕ϱ ϰ ϰ͕ϱ ϱ Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ ϯ ϯ͕ϱ ϰ ϰ͕ϱ ϱ
/ƌ ΀΁ /ƌ ΀΁
Ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ
t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ
ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϯ͘ϱŵŵϸ ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϯ͘ϱŵŵϸ
t'ϭϰ t'ϭϮ t'ϭϰ t'ϭϮ

E94AZHY007

Lmax Maximum brake cable length in [m]

IBR Brake current in [A]
UDC Supply voltage of the motor brake control

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  473

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Installation steps

E94AZHY003

1. Plug the motor brake control module onto the terminals  of the standard device.
– Ensure that both clips  snap into the slots  of the standard device!
2. Check that the motor brake control module is securely connected.

474  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Connection plan

E94AZH005

E94AZH006

F10 Secondary cable protection. Observe the standards of the cable protection when selecting
the fuse!
 Use twin wire end ferrules.
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  475

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0101

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

476  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

8.7.7 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

E94AZHB001 a

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
E94AZHB0101 motor brake control
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Terminal for standard device
X107 Terminal for supply and brake
X121 Terminal for external control and feedback

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H B xxx x
Product series
Version
Accessories
Type of motor brake control
Rated current
010 = 5.0 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V DC

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  477

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

478  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on control cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s; control
cable − PE)

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHB0101 24 0 (DC) 0.3 ... 5 0.3 ... 5 2
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Area Values
Input voltage DC 24 V (18 ... 30 V)
Output voltage Corresponds to input voltage
Brake current 0.3 ... 5 A
Switching capacity Max. 110 W
Breaking energy Max. 10 Ws
Cable protection Recommendation: 7.5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Maximum cable length In the chapter "Electrical installation" the dependency of the cable length on
the brake current and the cable cross−section is described.
Operating frequency Max. 6/min
Operating times Can be ignored compared to the delay time of the brake.
See documentation of the brake.
Service life > 10 millions of cycles
Protection against
Overload No
Short circuit of the Yes
terminals
Polarity reversal at the Yes
input
Insulation 1) Double insulation (EN61800−5−1: Vrated = 300 V AC),
Separation (UL: Vrated = 500 V AC)
1) Brake connection against control card of the controller

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  479

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

Cable length
h сϮϰs h сϮϴs

ϭϰϬ ϭϰϬ

ϭϮϬ ϭϮϬ

ϭϬϬ ϭϬϬ

>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁
>ŵĂdž ΀ŵ΁

ϴϬ ϴϬ

ϲϬ ϲϬ

ϰϬ ϰϬ

ϮϬ ϮϬ

Ϭ Ϭ
Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ ϯ ϯ͕ϱ ϰ ϰ͕ϱ ϱ Ϭ Ϭ͕ϱ ϭ ϭ͕ϱ Ϯ Ϯ͕ϱ ϯ ϯ͕ϱ ϰ ϰ͕ϱ ϱ
/ƌ ΀΁ /ƌ ΀΁
Ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϭ͘ϳϱŵŵϸ ϭŵŵϸ
t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ t'ϮϬ t'ϭϴ t'ϭϲ
ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϯ͘ϱŵŵϸ ϭ͘ϱŵŵϸ Ϯ͘ϱŵŵϸ
t'ϭϰ t'ϭϮ t'ϭϰ t'ϭϮ

Lmax Maximum brake cable length in [m]

IBR Brake current in [A]
UDC Supply voltage of the motor brake control

480  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

Installation steps

E94AZHY003

1. Plug the motor brake control module onto the terminals  of the standard device.
– Ensure that both clips  snap into the slots  of the standard device!
2. Check that the motor brake control module is securely connected.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  481

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

Connection plan

E94AZHAB056

E94AZHAB056

F10 Secondary cable protection. Observe the standards of the cable protection when selecting
the fuse!
 Use twin wire end ferrules.
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

482  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHB0101

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHx0101: 24 V DC, max. 5.0 A
Observe correct polarity!
+/− Supply voltage for the motor holding brake (18 ... 30 V DC)
SSP94X6107 Observe correct polarity!

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

Terminal X121 Labelling Description

DI Connection for external control
in accordance with IEC 61131−2
GI Reference potential
DO Connection for external feedback
SSP940X121 in accordance with IEC 61131−2

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  483

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

8.7.8 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

E94AZHY001

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHY0025
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Connection of standard device
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H Y xxx x
Product series
Version
Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
002 = 0.75 A
010 = 5.0 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V DC
5 = 205 V DC
6 = 180 V DC

484  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on mains cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on mains cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s;
phase − phase)
2 kV (1.2 s/50 s; phase − PE)

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHY0025 230/290 50/60 0.75/0.75 0.54/0.54 1
E94AZHY0025 205/260 0 (DC) 0.75/0.75 0.54/0.54 1
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Area Values
Input voltage AC 230 V (180 ... 317 V), 45 ... 65 Hz
Output voltage DC 205 V With mains voltage of AC 230 V
Brake current 0.1 ... 0.75 A
Cable protection Recommendation: 5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Control input
Control voltage
Control current Internal
Protective function
Max. connectable cable 2.5 mm2
cross−section AWG 12
Maximum cable length 150 m

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  485

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

Permissible operating frequencies

Recommended brake Power Coil: Voltage DC 205 V Permissible operating frequency
Type P [W] L [H] I [A] (20 °C) [1/min]
BFK457−06E
20 76 0.10 60
BFK458−06E
BFK457−08E
25 66 0.12 60
BFK458−08E
BFK457−10E
30 85 0.15 60
BFK458−10E
BFK457−12E
40 107 0.20 40
BFK458−12E
BFK457−14E
50 102 0.24 30
BFK458−14E
BFK457−16E
55 127 0.27 20
BFK458−16E
BFK457−18E
85 100 0.41 10
BFK458−18E
BFK457−20E
100 115 0.49 8
BFK458−20E
BFK457−25E
110 134 0.54 6
BFK458−25E

Installation steps

E94AZHY003

1. Plug the motor brake control module onto the terminals  of the standard device.
– Ensure that both clips  snap into the slots  of the standard device!
2. Check that the motor brake control module is securely connected.

486  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

Connection plan

E94AZH016

F10 Observe the cable protection standards for fuse dimensioning!

" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  487

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0025

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake:
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHY0025: 205 V DC, max. 0.75 A
Ensure correct polarity!
L1 Supply voltage of the motor holding brake
SSP94A6107 L2/N

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

488  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

8.7.9 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

E94AZHN0025_003

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHN0025
Mounting Instructions
 DIN rail adapter

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
X117 Control connection
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H N xxx x
Product series

Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
002 = 0.75 A
Voltage class
5 = 205 V DC
6 = 180 V DC

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  489

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on mains cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on mains cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s;
phase − phase)
2 kV (1.2 s/50 s; phase − PE)

490  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHN0025 230/290 50/60 0.75/0.75 0.54/0.54 1
E94AZHN0025 205/260 0 (DC) 0.75/0.75 0.54/0.54 1
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Area Values
Input voltage AC 230 V (180 ... 317 V), 45 ... 65 Hz
Output voltage DC 205 V With mains voltage of AC 230 V
Brake current 0.1 ... 0.75 A
Cable protection Recommendation: 5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Control input DI
Signalling output DO
Control voltage DC 24 V, PLC level
HIGH DC +15 ... 30 V
LOW DC 0 ... +3 V
Control current
Input 5 ... 10 mA
Output 5 ... 50 mA
Protective function Protected against polarity reversal up to DC 60 V
Max. connectable cable 2.5 mm2
cross−section AWG 12
Maximum cable length 150 m

Permissible operating frequencies

Recommended brake Power Coil: Voltage DC 205 V Permissible operating frequency
Type P [W] L [H] I [A] (20 °C) [1/min]
BFK457−06E
20 76 0.10 60
BFK458−06E
BFK457−08E
25 66 0.12 60
BFK458−08E
BFK457−10E
30 85 0.15 60
BFK458−10E
BFK457−12E
40 107 0.20 40
BFK458−12E
BFK457−14E
50 102 0.24 30
BFK458−14E
BFK457−16E
55 127 0.27 20
BFK458−16E
BFK457−18E
85 100 0.41 10
BFK458−18E
BFK457−20E
100 115 0.49 8
BFK458−20E
BFK457−25E
110 134 0.54 6
BFK458−25E

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  491

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

Dimensions

E94AZHN0025_005

All dimensions in millimetres.

Installation steps
1. Attach the motor brake control with the DIN rail adapter  to the bottom of the DIN
rail.
2. Engage the motor brake control against the spring pressure at the top of the DIN rail
edge.
3. Check motor brake control for tight fit.

492  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

Connection plan

E94AZH017

F10 Cable protection of the motor holding brake

Observe the cable protection standards for fuse dimensioning!
E94... Components of the 9400 series
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  493

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0025

Terminal data

Motor holding brake connection

Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake:
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHN0025: 205 V DC, max. 0.75 A
Ensure correct polarity!
L1 Supply voltage of the motor holding brake
SSP94A6107
L2/N

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

Control connection
Terminal X117 Labelling Description
DI Digital input
GI GND digital in
DO Signalling output
24V 24−V supply by safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
SSP94A6117
GND GND digital out

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

494  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

8.7.10 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

E94AZHY001

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHY0026
Mounting Instructions

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Connection of standard device
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H Y xxx x
Product series
Version
Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
002 = 0.75 A
010 = 5.0 A
Voltage class
1 = 24 V DC
5 = 205 V DC
6 = 180 V DC

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  495

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on mains cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on mains cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s;
phase − phase)
2 kV (1.2 s/50 s; phase − PE)

496  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHY0026 400/480 50/60 0.61/0.61 0.61/0.61 1
E94AZHY0026 180/216 0 (DC) 0.61/0.61 0.61/0.61 1
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Field Values
Input voltage AC 400 V (320 ... 528 V), 45 ... 65 Hz
Output voltage DC 180 V at a mains voltage of AC 400 V
Brake current 0.1 ... 0.61 A
Cable protection Recommendation: 5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Control input
Control voltage
Control current Internal
Protective function
Max. connectable cable 2.5 mm2
cross−section AWG 12
Maximum cable length 150 m

Permissible operating frequencies

Recommended brake Power Coil: Voltage DC 180 V Permissible operating frequency
Type P [W] L [H] I [A] (20 °C) [rpm]
BFK457−06E
20 60 0.11 60
BFK458−06E
BFK457−08E
25 50 0.14 60
BFK458−08E
BFK457−10E
30 69 0.17 60
BFK458−10E
BFK457−12E
40 81 0.22 40
BFK458−12E
BFK457−14E
50 78 0.28 30
BFK458−14E
BFK457−16E
55 102 0.31 20
BFK458−16E
BFK457−18E
85 77 0.47 10
BFK458−18E
BFK457−20E
100 92 0.56 8
BFK458−20E
BFK457−25E
110 102 0.61 6
BFK458−25E

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  497

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

Installation steps

E94AZHY003

1. Plug the motor brake control module onto the terminals  of the standard device.
– Ensure that both clips  snap into the slots  of the standard device!
2. Check that the motor brake control module is securely connected.

498  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

Connection plan

E94AZH016−2

F10 Observe the cable protection standards for fuse dimensioning!

" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  499

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHY0026

Terminal data
Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake:
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHY0026: 180 V DC, max. 0.61 A
Ensure correct polarity!
L1 Supply voltage of the motor holding brake
SSP94A6107 L2/N

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

500  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

8.7.11 Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

E94AZHN0025_003

Scope of supply
Pos. Description
Motor brake control E94AZHN0026
Mounting Instructions
 DIN rail adapter

Elements of the motor brake control

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
X117 Control connection
X107 Connection of supply and brake

Identification
Type code 
E94 A Z H N xxx x
Product series

Accessories
Motor brake control type
Rated current
002 = 0.75 A
Voltage class
5 = 205 V DC
6 = 180 V DC

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  501

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

General electrical data

EMC
Noise emission EN 61800−3 Conducted, category C2.
Noise immunity EN 61800−3 Burst on mains cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Burst on control cable: 2 kV/5 kHz
Surge on mains cable: 1 kV (1.2 s/50 s;
phase − phase)
2 kV (1.2 s/50 s; phase − PE)
Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Mounting clearances
Above/below  25 mm
To the sides Side−by−side mounting without clearance

502  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

Rated data
Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of
phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZHN0026 400/480 50/60 0.75/0.75 0.61/0.61 1
E94AZHN0026 180/216 0 (DC) 0.75/0.75 0.61/0.61 1
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Field Values
Input voltage AC 400 V (320 ... 528 V), 45 ... 65 Hz
Output voltage DC 180 V at a mains voltage of AC 400 V
Brake current 0.1 ... 0.61 A
Cable protection Recommendation: 5 A, tripping characteristic "B" or "C"
Control input DI
Signalling output DO
Control voltage DC 24 V, PLC level
HIGH DC +15 ... 30 V
LOW DC 0 ... +3 V
Control current
Input 5 ... 10 mA
Output 5 ... 50 mA
Protective function Protected against polarity reversal up to DC 60 V
Max. connectable cable 2.5 mm2
cross−section AWG 12
Maximum cable length 150 m

Permissible operating frequencies

Recommended brake Power Coil: Voltage DC 180 V Permissible operating frequency
Type P [W] L [H] I [A] (20 °C) [rpm]
BFK457−06E
20 60 0.11 60
BFK458−06E
BFK457−08E
25 50 0.14 60
BFK458−08E
BFK457−10E
30 69 0.17 60
BFK458−10E
BFK457−12E
40 81 0.22 40
BFK458−12E
BFK457−14E
50 78 0.28 30
BFK458−14E
BFK457−16E
55 102 0.31 20
BFK458−16E
BFK457−18E
85 77 0.47 10
BFK458−18E
BFK457−20E
100 92 0.56 8
BFK458−20E
BFK457−25E
110 102 0.61 6
BFK458−25E

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  503

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

Dimensions

E94AZHN0025_005

All dimensions in millimetres.

Installation steps
1. Attach the motor brake control with the DIN rail adapter  to the bottom of the DIN
rail.
2. Engage the motor brake control against the spring pressure at the top of the DIN rail
edge.
3. Check motor brake control for tight fit.

504  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

Connection plan

E94AZH017−B

F10 Cable protection of the motor holding brake

Observe the cable protection standards for fuse dimensioning!
E94... Components of the 9400 series
" HF shield termination through large−surface PE connection

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  505

8 Accessories (overview)
Motor holding brake control modules
Motor holding brake control module E94AZHN0026

Terminal data

Connection of the motor holding brake

Terminal X107 Labelling Description
Connection of the motor holding brake:
BD1 + (Lenze: WH)
BD2 − (Lenze: BN)
E94AZHN0026: 180 V DC, max. 0.75 A
Ensure correct polarity!
L1 Supply voltage of the motor holding brake
SSP94A6107
L2/N

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

Control connection
Terminal X117 Labelling Description
DI Digital input
GI GND digital in
DO Signalling output
24V 24−V supply by safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
SSP94A6117
GND GND digital out

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule
Stripping length or contact length: 8 mm

506  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
USB diagnostic adapter

8.8 Accessories for diagnostics

8.8.1 USB diagnostic adapter

Identification

E94ZCUS003

 
E94 A Z C US VA
Product range
Version
Module identification: accessories
Module type: communication module
USB diagnostic adapter
Hardware version

Scope of supply

E894ZCUS001BA

Pos. Description
USB diagnostic adapter E94AZCUS
USB cable
Mounting Instructions

Connections
Pos. Description
X61 USB connection
X6 Connection of the basic device (RJ69 socket)

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  507

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
USB diagnostic adapter

Displays
LED
Pos. Colour Condition Description
Power Green On Diagnostic adapter is supplied with voltage by the basic device.
Tx / Rx Yellow Blinking Basic device and PC communicate with each other via the diagnostic
adapter.
USB Green On Diagnostic adapter is connected to the PC and configured via USB.

Rated data
Field Details
USB connection Maximum current consumption: 100 mA
(X61)

Installation steps

E94ZCUS002

508  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

8.8.2 Keypad

Identification

‚ƒ
L

E94AZKAE036 E94AZKAE100

  
EZ AE B K xxxx xx xx
Product range: accessories
Design
AE = display unit
Version
Module type: keypad
100x = Keypad
200x = Diagnosis terminal
Hardware version
Software version

Scope of supply

E94AZKAE025/035

Elements on the front

Pos. Description
 LCD display
 Right function key
 Navigation keys ()*+
 , key
 - key
Left function key

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  509

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

Elements on the back side

Pos. Description

Lock hook
 Release button
X6 RJ69 connector, connection on diagnostic interface (X6) on the basic device

Application range
The use of this module is permissible with basic devices as of nameplate designation:
Inverter Keypad X400
Type HW SW Type HW SW
Servo Drives 9400 E94... VB 01.10 EZAEBK1001 VA 02.00
02.00
EZAEBK1001 VA 1)
Inverter Drives 8400 E84AV... VA 00.07
EZAEBK1001 VA 04.xx

Rated data
Field Values
Enclosure IP20 IP65 (EZAEBK200x with EZAMSHHT)
Ambient temperature In operation: −10 °C ... +55 °C
Transport: −25 °C ... +70 °C
Storage: −25 °C ... +55 °C
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 in accordance with EN 50178
(without condensation, average relative humidity 85 %)
Degree of pollution EN 61800−5−1, degree of pollution 2

Mounting

E94AZKAE055

510  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

Dismounting

E94AZKAE060

Commissioning steps
Commissioning step Comment
1. Connect keypad to the diagnostic interface. You can also connect or remove the keypad during
operation.
2. If the keypad is supplied with voltage, it carries out
a short self test.
3. The keypad is ready for operation if it displays the If you commission the keypad for the first time, you
main menu. are requested to select the dialog language.
4. You can now communicate with the basic device. How to navigate through the menus and how to
view and alter parameters can be learned here:
 514

↑
← →
↓

E94AZKAE003

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  511

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

Display Meaning Comment

 LCD display
A Headline
1
<MM Meaning of the menu In the menu level only
M>
<PPP> Meaning of the parameter In the parameter level only
A Triple−spaced display
2
<M1> List of the menus available In the menu level only
<M2>
<...>
<P1> List of the parameters available In the parameter level only
<P2>
<...>
<xxx> Setting of the selected parameter
A Status of the basic device
3
. The basic device is ready for operation.
/ The basic device is enabled.
0 Application in the basic device is stopped.
1 Quick stop active
2 The basic device is inhibited. The power outputs are inhibited.
3 The basic device is ready to start.
4 Speed controller 1 in the limitation The drive is torque−controlled.
5 Set current limit exceeded in motor or generator
mode
6 Pulse inhibit active The power outputs are inhibited.
7 System error active
8 Error active
9 Fault active
: Quick stop by trouble active
; Warning active
A Current function of the right function key
4
< Confirm and accept changes
= Call up help Is only displayed if a detailed help is available.
> Browse to the next page.
A Current function of the left function key
5
? Back to the main menu
@ Save parameter set in the drive non−volatilely.
A Alter parameter
B Cancel action without accepting the change.
C Browse to the previous page.
D Parameter can only be altered if the application
of the basic device is stopped.
E Parameter can only be altered if the basic device
is inhibited.

512  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

Key Function Comment

 F Carry out the function indicated in the field A4.
 , Deactivate the function of the - key.
The LED in the - key goes out.
 - Carry out the function selected in C00469 in the "Keypad" Lenze setting:
menu. activate quick stop.
The LED in the key is on.
F Carry out the function indicated in the field A5.

Key Function
Menu level Parameter level
Main menu Submenu Overview Detail Editing mode
(9400)
 () Select menu Select submenu Select parameter Alter selected
digit
+ To the submenu To the parameter To the detail view Cursor to the right
level
* Back to the main Back to the menu Back to the Cursor to the left
menu level overview

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  513

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

Operation
Menu level Parameter level
Main menu Submenu Overview
Detail Edit
(9400)

* *
<Menu 1> <Submenu 1> <Parameter 1> <Cxxxxx>

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
A
+ + * *+

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
< ()
() () () ()
+
B
<Parameter n> <Cxxxxx>
*

*
* <Submenu n> <Parameter 1> <Cxxxxx> A

ÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
+
+ * *+

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
< ()
() ()
+

ÑÑÑ *
<Parameter n> <Cxxxxx>
B

* *

ÑÑÑ
<...> <...> <...> <...> A

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
+ + * *+
< ()

ÑÑÑ
() () ()
+

ÑÑÑ
B
<...> <...>
*

ÑÑÑ *

ÑÑÑ
* <...> <...> <...> A
+

ÑÑÑÑÑÑ
ÑÑÑ
+ * *+
< ()
() ()

ÑÑÑ
+
B

ÑÑÑ
<...> <...>
*

514  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Keypad

In the main menu, you’ll find the self−explanatory "Keypad" menu.

In the "Keypad" menu, you’ll find parameters by means of which you can adapt the keypad
to your needs:
ƒ Settings for the LCD display:
– Duration and brightness of the background lighting
– Contrast
ƒ Starting values:
– Display after the initialisation
– Display of error messages
– Representation of integers
ƒ Function of the STOP key
In the "Keypad" menu, you can also call up status information on the keypad:
ƒ Manufacturing data
ƒ Hardware version and software version
ƒ Serial number

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  515

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Hand−held terminal

8.8.3 Hand−held terminal

Scope of supply

SSP94HH001

Connection

SSP94HH004

516  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Hand−held terminal

Dimensions

SSP94HH002

SSP94HH010

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  517

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Hand−held terminal

Installation steps

1
1

2 1

SSP94HH011

518  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Accessories for diagnostics
Hand−held terminal

SSP94HH020

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  519

8 Accessories (overview)
Accessories for diagnostics
Hand−held terminal

6 7

5 4
7 7

SSP94HH012

520  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for operation in the DC−bus connection
DC−feeding point

8.9 Components for operation in the DC−bus connection

8.9.1 DC−feeding point

Identification


L
0
ERBMXXX011

Type code 
E94 A Z E X 100

Product range

Device generation

Accessories

Type
E = input module
Rated current
100 = 100 A

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  521

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for operation in the DC−bus connection
DC−feeding point

Elements

E94AZEX001

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
X109 +UG busbar input
X110 −UG busbar input
X119 +UG cable input
X120 −UG cable input
X129 +UG cable output
X130 −UG cable output

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CULUS UL61800−5−1 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for USA
CSA C22.2 No. 274−13 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) for Canada

522  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for operation in the DC−bus connection
DC−feeding point

Operating conditions
Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Protection
Enclosure EN 60529 IP 20
NEMA 250 Protection against accidental contact acc. to type 1
Insulation resistance EN 61800−5−1 Overvoltage category III
Reduction from 2000 m: Overvoltage category II

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
UDC [V] UDC [V] f [Hz]
2/PE DC 325 260 − 0 % ... 370 + 0 % −
2/PE DC 565 455 − 0 % ... 620 + 0 % −
2/PE DC 675 480 − 0 % ... 746 + 0 % −

Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZEX100 325/565/675 0 (DC) 100/100/100 100/100/100 −
 Temperature in the control cabinet

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  523

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for operation in the DC−bus connection
DC−feeding point

Safety instructions

 Danger!
Hazardous electrical voltage
All power connections carry a hazardous electrical voltage for a longer time
after mains disconnection. Observe the information regarding the discharge
time on the device.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries when touching the power terminals.
Protective measures:
ƒ Before working on the power connections, wait at least until the discharge
time has passed (depending on the device, this may be up to 20 minutes).
ƒ Make sure that all power terminals are deenergised.
ƒ Implement active discharge, e.g. by:
– Connection of a discharge resistor when the mains contactor drops.

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C
ƒ Use 60/75°C copper wire only, except for control circuits.
ƒ Use appropriate listed (ZMVV) wire connectors and soldering lugs, suitable
for current and voltage.

524  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection DC input module

Original − French

 Avertissement !
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C
ƒ Utiliser exclusivement des conducteurs en cuivre 60/75 °C, sauf pour les
circuits de commande.
ƒ Utiliser les connecteurs de câble et les cosses à souder indiqués (ZMVV), à
sélectionner en fonction du courant et de la tension d’alimentation.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  525

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection DC input module

Dimensions

E94AZEX004

All dimensions in millimetres.

Type Weight [kg]
E94AZEX100 0.9

Arrangement of the devices

SSP94PN200

E94AZEX100 DC input module

E94AZPPxxxx Installation backplane − 9400 DC power supply module
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane − 9400 axis module

526  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Installation steps

 Note!
The place of installation and mounting material must ensure a permanent
mechanical connection.
We recommend to keep to the hole patterns of the axis modules when fixing
the DC input module. The hole spacing corresponds to device size I. For further
information, please see the Mounting Instructions for the axis module
installation backplane (EDK94ZPM113).

E94AZEX002

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  527

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Connection plan
+UG -UG

X119 X120

+ -
X109 +UG
X110 -UG
+ -
E94AZEX100

X129 X130

+UG -UG
E94AZEX006

528  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Electrical installation

E94AZEX003

E94AZEX005

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  529

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
DC input module

Terminal data
Terminal Labelling Description
X119/X120/X12
9/X130
*/− Threaded bolt for connecting the input and output cables (+UG, −UG) with
M8 ring cable lug

E94AZEX007

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZEX100 50 1 7 62 SW13

Terminal Labelling Description

X109/X110
*/− Busbar connection (+UG, −UG)

E94AZEX008

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZEX100 ˘ ˘ 3.2 ... 3.5 28 ... 31 PH2

530  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

8.9.2 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

Elements

E94AZJA−001

Application range

E94AZJA003 E94xSxE002x
E94xSxE003x

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
The busbar mounting set needs to be installed in accordance with the
Mounting Instructions of Lenze Power Conversion Equipment, E94 servo
system.
Risk of electrical shock − Disconnect power supply before you start working
with the busbar mounting set.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  531

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Le kit de montage de barres conductrices doit être utilisé conformément aux
instructions de montage des convertisseurs de puissance Lenze, système servo
E94.
Risque d’électrocution − Débrancher l’alimentation avant le début des travaux
de montage des barres conductrices.

532  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA003

Installation steps

E94AZJA−002

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  533

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

8.9.3 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

Elements

E94AZJA−011

Application range

E94AZJA007 E94xSxE004x
E94xSxE007x

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
The busbar mounting set needs to be installed in accordance with the
Mounting Instructions of Lenze Power Conversion Equipment, E94 servo
system.
Risk of electrical shock − Disconnect power supply before you start working
with the busbar mounting set.

534  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Le kit de montage de barres conductrices doit être utilisé conformément aux
instructions de montage des convertisseurs de puissance Lenze, système servo
E94.
Risque d’électrocution − Débrancher l’alimentation avant le début des travaux
de montage des barres conductrices.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  535

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA007

Installation steps

E94AZJA−012

536  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

8.9.4 Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

Elements

E94AZJA−021

Application range

E94AZJA024 E94xSxE013x
E94xSxE017x
E94xSxE024x

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
The busbar mounting set needs to be installed in accordance with the
Mounting Instructions of Lenze Power Conversion Equipment, E94 servo
system.
Risk of electrical shock − Disconnect power supply before you start working
with the busbar mounting set.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  537

8 Accessories (overview)
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Le kit de montage de barres conductrices doit être utilisé conformément aux
instructions de montage des convertisseurs de puissance Lenze, système servo
E94.
Risque d’électrocution − Débrancher l’alimentation avant le début des travaux
de montage des barres conductrices.

538  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection
Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

Components for the operation in the DC−bus connection Busbar mounting set E94AZJA024

Installation steps

E94AZJA−022

E94AZJA−029

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  539

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters

8.10 Filters

Advantages by the use of filters:

ƒ Compliance with EMC requirements
ƒ Reduction of the current load
ƒ Positive effects on the service life of the controllers possible
– Strong reliability
– Reduction of the failure rate
ƒ Operation on 30 mA residual−current circuit breakers for device sizes 1 ... 3 (up to
24 A/11 kW) is enabled.

Mains chokes:
Inductances for damping conducted harmonic interferences which may arise from
reloading the DC bus and the switching frequency of the inverter.
RFI filters:
RFI filters are capacitive accessories for compliance with the requirements acc. to
EN 61800−3 for conducted interference emission. RFI filters can be directly connected
upstream of the power supply modules. RFI filters are also called EMC filters.
Mains filters:
Mains filters reduce the conducted interference emission into the mains for compliance
with the requirements acc. to EN 61800−3. Mains filters are a combination of mains choke
and RFI filter in one housing.
A sinusoidal filter (LC filter) in the motor cable limits the rate of rise of voltage (du/dt
< 500 V/s) and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur during inverter
operation. This enables considerably larger shielded motor cables and the service life of the
motor is increased.

540  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters

Accessories Single Drive Multi Drive Power supply VR

modules modules
Field GG (device size) GG GG GG
Designation 1 ... 3 6 ... 7 81 ... 91 1 ... 3 6 1&3 4&5 1&3 Page
Filters
Mains filter
E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 542
E94AZMSxxxx 180 ... −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 585
415 A
(3F480−xxx.290EM)
E94AZMPxxxx 8 ... 29 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 549
E94AZMPxxxx 82 ... 200 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 556
E94AZMRxxxx 26 ... 47 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + 564
RFI filter
E94AZRSxxxx 4 ... 29 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 571
E94AZRSxxxx 54 ... 95 A + + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 578
E94AZMSxxxx 180 ... −−− −−− + −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− 585
415 A
(3F480−xxx.290EM)
E94AZRPxxxx 8 ... 29 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 589
E94AZRPxxxx 82 ... 200 A −−− −−− −−− −−− −−− + + −−− 596
Sine filter
EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 603
EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 611
150 A
EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... + + − − − −−− −−− −−− 617
480 A

1) Component from this range is absolutely necessary

+ Can be used without restrictions
o Can be used with restrictions
− Can be used, but check alternative
^ Already included
−−− No use

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  541

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

8.10.1 Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Assignment of filters to standard devices

Mains filter type Single−axis controller type Device size
E94xSxE002x
E94AZMS0034 1
E94xSxE003x
E94xSxE004x
E94AZMS0094 2
E94xSxE007x
E94xSxE013x
E94AZMS0184
E94xSxE017x 3
E94AZMS0314 E94xSxE024x

Elements on the filter

SSP94NF206

Pos. Description
 Mains filter E94AZMSxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
PE PE connection (for M5 ring or fork−type cable lug)
X301 Mains terminal L1 ... L3
X302 Connection cable to controller, 4−core
 Mounting aid for mounting base
 Guide pins for mounting base
 Mounting thread for mounting base
 Nameplate
Fastening at the bottom

Angle bracket for "side−by−side" mounting variant, device sizes 2 and 3

542  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z M S xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
Mains filter type
for 9400 Single Drive
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  543

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.
Mounting position
Standard Footprint mounting; standard device is screwed on the filter
Variant Side−by−side mounting; filter is directly screwed to the left of
the standard device (Mechanical installation)

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZMS0034 230/400/480 50/60 3.2/3.2/3.2 2.0/2.0/2.0 3
E94AZMS0094 230/400/480 50/60 9.0/9.0/9.0 5.6/5.6/5.6 3
E94AZMS0184 230/400/480 50/60 18/18/18 11/11/11 3
E94AZMS0314 230/400/480 50/60 31/31/31 19/19/19 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZMS0034 15 10 10
E94AZMS0094 23 3.5 10
E94AZMS0184 38 1.1 7.4
E94AZMS0314 48 0.75 7.3

544  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Dimensions

SSP94NF005

All dimensions in millimetres.

Mass
[kg]
E94AZMS0034 3.2
E94AZMS0094 5.2
E94AZMS0184 8.4
E94AZMS0314 8.8

Mechanical installation

 Note!
The filter can be mounted in two different variants. This results in differing
mounting dimensions.
ƒ Standard mounting
– The filter is mounted below the mounting base of the basic device. The
grid hole pattern of the L−force 9400 device series can be used.
ƒ Side−by−side mounting for small control cabinet depth
– Device size I: The filter is mounted left to the basic device. The grid hole
pattern of the L−force 9400 device series can be used.
– Device sizes II and III: The filter is turned by 90° and mounted left to the
basic device. The grid hole pattern of the L−force 9400 device series cannot
be used.

For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  545

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Electrical installation
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
1 (BK)
F1...F3 2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

L1 L2 L3 PE X302 L1 L2 L3 PE
X301 X100
E94AZxSxxxx E94AZPxxxxx
SSP94NF007

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3

# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

SSP94FF008

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMS0034 2.5 14
0.5 ... 0.6 4.4 ... 5.3
E94AZMS0094 4 12
PH1
E94AZMS0184
10 8 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3
E94AZMS0314

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMS0034
E94AZMS0094
M5 3.0 26.5 SW 8
E94AZMS0184
E94AZMS0314

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
1 Filter output conductor (lead with wire end ferrule, colour BK)
2
3
PE Output−side PE conductor (lead with M5 fork−type cable lug, colour
GN/YE)
SSP94FF007

546  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers E94AZMSxxxx 3 ... 31 A

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  547

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for single−axis controllers

Filters Mains filters for single−axis controllers

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

548  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Filters

8.10.2 Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

Mains filter DC power supply module
Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZMP0084 2 E94APNE0104 1
E94AZMP0294 3 E94APNE0364 3
E94AZMP0294 3 E70ACPSx0304x 1

Elements on the filter

SSP94NF101

Pos. Description
 Mains filter E94AZMPxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
# Connection of PE conductor
X301 Mains terminal L1 ... L3
X302 Connection cable to DC power supply module, four−core
T1/T2 Thermal contact terminal T1, T2
 Mounting aid for installation backplane
 Nameplate

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  549

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z M P xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
Mains filter type
for 9400 power supply
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

550  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZMP0084 230/400/480 50/60 8/8/8 6/6/6 3
E94AZMP0294 230/400/480 50/60 29/29/29 21.8/21.8/21.8 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZMP0084 50 3.9 9.8
E94AZMP0294 110 0.7 6.4

Thermal contact
Design max. switching voltage max. switching current
UTh [V AC] ITh [A]
E94AZMP0084
NC contact, 150 °C 250 2.5
E94AZMP0294

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  551

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Dimensions

SSP94NF102

All dimensions in millimetres.

a a1 b1 b2 Mass
[mm] [kg]
E94AZMP0084 90 60 360 5 350 5 8.6
E94AZMP0294 120 90 430 5 420 5 16.0

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

552  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Electrical installation
Standard mounting Mounting variant
K1 K1
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
PE PE

F1...F3 F1...F3

+ L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3
X301 X111 X301
E94AZPxxxxx
E94AZMPxxxx

E94AZMPxxxx
T1 T2 T1 T2
X112
X302 + L1 L2 L3 X302
1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)

1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

PE (GN/YE)
+ L1 L2 L3
X111

E94AZPxxxxx X112
+ L1 L2 L3
SSP94NF105 SSP94NF105

Fig. 8−4 Connection concept

E94AZMPxxxx Mains filter
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane for 9400 DC power supply module
F1 ... F3 Fuses
K1 Mains contactor

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP94NF106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0084
10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
E94AZxP0294

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0084
M5 3 26.5 SW 8
E94AZxP0294

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  553

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
1 Filter output conductor (lead with wire end ferrule, colour BK)
2
3
PE Output−side PE conductor (lead with M5 fork−type cable lug, colour
GN/YE)
SSP94FF007

Thermal contact
Terminal T1/T2 Labelling Description
T1 Thermal contact connection
T2

SSP94NF108

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMP0084
4 10 0.6 ... 0.8 5.3 ... 7.1 PZ1
E94AZMP0294

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

554  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules

Filters Mains filters for power supply modules

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  555

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Filters

8.10.3 Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

Mains filter DC power supply module
Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZMP0824 4 E94APNE1004 4
E94AZMP2004 5 E94APNE2454 5
E94AZMP0824 4 E70ACPSx0604x 2

Elements on the filter

SSP94NF301

Pos. Description
 Mains filter E94AZMPxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
X301 Mains connection for L1 ... L3 and PE
X302 Connection cables to DC power supply module L1’ ... L3’ and PE
X11 Voltage supply for internal fan (24 V DC)
T1/T2 Thermal contact terminals T1, T2
 Ring bolts
 Nameplate

556  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z M P xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
Mains filter type
for 9400 power supply
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  557

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZMP0824 230/400/480 50/60 82/82/82 61/61/61 3
E94AZMP2004 230/400/480 50/60 200/200/200 150/150/150 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZMP0824 200 0.25 6.4
E94AZMP2004 350 0.10 6.3

Thermal contact
Design max. switching voltage max. switching current
UTh [V AC] ITh [A]
E94AZMP0824
NC contact, 150 °C 250 2.5
E94AZMP2004

558  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Fan
Voltage Current
[V DC] [A]
E94AZMP0824
24 0.3
E94AZMP2004

Dimensions

SSP94NF302

All dimensions in millimetres.

Mass
[kg]
E94AZMP0824 29.0
E94AZMP2004 51.5

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  559

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Electrical installation
Standard mounting Mounting variant
K1 K1
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
PE PE

F1...F3 F1...F3

+ L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3
X301 X111 X301
E94APNExxxx

E94AZMPxxxx
E94AZMPxxxx

E94AZRPxxxx
E94AZRPxxxx

T1 T2 T1 T2

24V 0V 24V 0V

X11 X11
X112
X302 + L1 L2 L3 X302
1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

+ L1 L2 L3
X111
E94APNExxxx

SSP94NF305 SSP94NF305

Fig. 8−5 Connection concept

E94AZMPxxxx Mains filter
E94APNExxxx 9400 DC power supply module
F1 ... F3 Fuses
K1 Mains contactor

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP94NF106

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0824
70
Connection with M8 2/0 12 106 SW13
(2 x 70)
ring cable lug
E94AZxP2004
150
Connection with M10 250 mcm 20 177 SW15
(2 x 120)
ring cable lug

560  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
L1’ Filter output conductor (lead with ring cable lug, colour BK)
L2’
L3’

Output PE conductor (lead with ring cable lug, colour GN/YE)

SSP94NF307

Thermal contact
Terminal T1/T2 Labelling Description
T1 Thermal contact connection
T2

SSP94NF108

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0824
4.0 10 0.6 ... 0.8 5.3 ... 7.1 PZ1
E94AZxP2004

Fan
Terminal X11 Labelling Description
GE GND External supply

24E 24 V External supply through safely separated power supply unit

(SELV/PELV)
SSP94NF309

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
E94AZMP0824
0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 −
E94AZMP2004

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  561

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules E94AZMPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

562  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for power supply modules

Filters Mains filters for power supply modules

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  563

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Filters

8.10.4 Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

Mains filter Regenerative power supply module Device size
Standard device Installation
backplane
E94AZMR0264SDB
E94ARNE0134
E94AZMR0264LDB
E94AZPP0364 GG3
E94AZMR0474SDB
E94ARNE0244
E94AZMR0474LDB

Elements on the filter

E94AZMR001

Pos. Description
 Mains filter
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Lifting aid
 Mounting aid for mounting base
 Parking position of the IT screw
# PE terminal
X320 Terminal L1 ... L3
X321 Connecting cable L1.1 ... L3.1
X322 Connecting cable L1.2 ... L3.2
X323 Terminal for 24−V supply voltage (use safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV), in accordance
with IEC 61131−2)
X324 Mains filter control signal

564  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002

Type code 
E94 A Z MR xxx 4 xx B
Product range

Version

accessories

Type mains filter for

regenerative power supply
module

Rated current [A]

Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

Version
SD = short−distance motor cables
LD = long−distance motor cables

Operating mode
B = block mode

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
IT systems Request specific measures from Lenze

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  565

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZMR0264xD 230/400/480 50/60 26/26/26 19/19/19 3
B
E94AZMR0474xD 230/400/480 50/60 47/47/47 35/35/35 3
B
 Temperature in the control cabinet

566  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Power loss Inductance Regenerative Voltage drop

inductance
PV [W] L [mH] Lgen [mH] U [V]
E94AZMR0264SDB 65
0.77 10 % 0.84 10 % 6.3
E94AZMR0264LDB 72
E94AZMR0474SDB 85
0.42 10 % 1.54 10 % 6.2
E94AZMR0474LDB 101

Dimensions

E94AZMR002

All dimensions in millimetres.

a m b1 b2 b3

[mm] [kg]
E94AZRM0264SDB 25
149 60 240 5 260 5 100 5
E94AZRM0264LDB 26
E94AZRM0474SDB 36
209 90 250 5 270 5 110 5
E94AZRM0474LDB 37

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  567

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Electrical installation
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

F4 F1...F3
4

O
RFR
‚- ‚- ƒ-
+ + +
K1 I

L1.1
L2.1
L3.1
JR B
+ L1 L2 L3 1 2
GN
3 YE 24E GE L1 L2 L3 +UG -UG +
K1 X320 X321 X323 X111
SB 24E GE RFR GI
K2
X2 X5

E94AZMR0xx4xDB E94ARNE0xx4
X109
...
X110
X4 X8
DO2 GO

E94AZPP0364
X322 X324 X106 X112
1 2
GN
3 YE T1 T2 Rb1 Rb2 L1 L2 L3 +
"
L2.2
L3.2

K2
L1.2

" 15
RB „

94PSPVR01

E94ARNE0xx4 Regenerative power supply module

E94AZPP0364 Installation backplane for the regenerative power supply module
E94AZMR0... Mains filter
F1 ... F4 Fuses
RFR Controller enable (only for regenerative feedback)
K1 Mains contactor
RB Brake resistor ( Mounting instructions brake resistor)
 24 V voltage source for the control electronics
(safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV) according to IEC 61131−2)
 24 V voltage source for the digital inputs according to IEC 61131−2
 From FW 02.00: Overtemperature disconnection
DO2 load: max. 50 mA

Mains
Terminal X320 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the L1, L2, L3 mains phases
L2
L3

# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

SSP94NF406

568  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules E94AZMRxxxx (26 ... 47 A)

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMR0264xDB 10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 1.0 x 4.0
E94AZMR0474xDB 25 2 2.5 22.1 1.0 x 6.5

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZMR0264xDB
M5 3 26.5 PH2
E94AZMR0474xDB

24 V supply
Terminal X323 Labelling Description
GE GND external supply

SSP9400X11 24E 24 V external supply through safely separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
IEC 61131−2, 22.8 ... 28.8 V, residual ripple max. ±5 %
Current during operation: 450 mA
Starting current: max. 4 A for 100 ms

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Flexible
With wire end 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12 Spring terminal
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products are only intended to be used for Lenze Drives E94ARNE0134
and E94ARNE0244.
– All test results are only valid for this Lenze Drives.
ƒ The devices are only evaluated for factory wiring use.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  569

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

Filters Mains filters for regenerative power supply modules

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Ces produits sont destinés exclusivement à être utilisés avec les systèmes
d’entraînement Lenze E94ARNE0134 et E94ARNE0244.
– Tous les résultats des tests sont valables uniquement pour ces systèmes
d’entraînement Lenze.
ƒ Ces équipements sont évalués exclusivement pour un câblage en usine.

570  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Filters

8.10.5 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

RFI filter type Single−axis controller type Device size
E94xSxE002x
E94AZRS0044 1
E94xSxE003x
E94xSxE004x
E94AZRS0104 2
E94xSxE007x
E94xSxE013x
E94AZRS0294 E94xSxE017x 3
E94xSxE024x

Elements on the filter

SSP94NF206

Pos. Description
 RFI filter E94AZRSxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
PE PE connection (for M5 ring or fork−type cable lug)
X301 Mains terminal L1 ... L3
X302 Connection cable to controller, 4−core
 Mounting aid for mounting base
 Guide pins for mounting base
 Mounting thread for mounting base
 Nameplate
Fastening at the bottom

Angle bracket for "side−by−side" mounting variant, device sizes 2 and 3

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  571

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z R S xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
RFI filter type
for 9400 Single Drive
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

572  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZRS0044 230/400/480 50/60 3.5/3.5/3.5 2.2/2.2/2.2 3
E94AZRS0104 230/400/480 50/60 10/10/10 6.2/6.2/6.2 3
E94AZRS0294 230/400/480 50/60 29/29/29 18/18/18 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZRS0044 4 − −
E94AZRS0104 8 − −
E94AZRS0294 22 − −

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  573

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Dimensions

SSP94NF005

All dimensions in millimetres.

Mass
[kg]
E94AZRS0044 1.8
E94AZRS0104 2.3
E94AZRS0294 3.6

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

574  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Electrical installation
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
1 (BK)
F1...F3 2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

L1 L2 L3 PE X302 L1 L2 L3 PE
X301 X100
E94AZxSxxxx E94AZPxxxxx
SSP94NF007

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3

# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug

SSP94FF008

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZRS0044 2.5 14
0.5 ... 0.6 4.4 ... 5.3
E94AZRS0104 4 12 PH1
E94AZRS0294 10 8 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZRS0044
E94AZRS0104 M5 3.0 26.5 SW 8
E94AZRS0294

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
1 Filter output conductor (lead with wire end ferrule, colour BK)
2
3
PE Output−side PE conductor (lead with M5 fork−type cable lug, colour
GN/YE)
SSP94FF007

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  575

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (4 ... 29 A)

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

576  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers

Filters RFI filters for single−axis controllers

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  577

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Filters

8.10.6 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

RFI filter Single−axis controller
Type Device size Type Device size
E94xSxE032x
E94AZRS0544 6 E94xSxE047x 6
E94xSxE059x
E94xSxE086x
E94AZRS0954 7 7
E94xSxE104x

Elements on the filter

SSP94FF601

Pos. Description
 RFI filter E94AZRSxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
# PE connection (for ring or fork−type cable lug M8)
X301 Mains terminal L1 ... L3
X302 Connection cable to controller, four−core
 Fastening thread for standard device
 Nameplate
 Fixings for standard mounting (footprint mounting)
 Fixings for mounting variant (side−by−side mounting)

578  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z R S xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
RFI filter type
for 9400 Single Drive
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  579

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Frequency Rated current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz] up to +45 °C  up to +55 °C 
E94AZRS0544 230/400/480 50/60 54.0/54.0/54.0 40.5/40.5/40.5 3
E94AZRS0954 230/400/480 50/60 95.0/95.0/95.0 71.0/71.0/71.0 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZRS0544 50 ˘ ˘
E94AZRS0954 70 ˘ ˘

580  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Dimensions

SSP94FF602

All dimensions in millimetres.

a b b1 c d d1 d2 e1 f g h Mass
E94AZx
S [mm] [kg]
...0544 201 610 670 170 650 41 24 12 500 10 6.5 13.0 9
...0954 261 713 790 230 760 48 27 17 550 10 9.0 16.5 13
a b b1 c d d1 d2 e1 f g h Mass
E94AZx
S [mm] [kg]
...0544 201 610 670 170 650 41 24 12 500 10 6.5 13.0 9
...0954 261 713 790 230 760 48 27 17 550 10 9.0 16.5 13

Mass
[kg]
E94AZRS0044 1.8
E94AZRS0104 2.3
E94AZRS0294 3.6

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  581

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Mechanical installation

 Note!
The filter can be mounted in two ways. From this result different mounting
dimensions.
ƒ Standard mounting: The filter is mounted underneath the standard device.
ƒ Side−by−side mounting: In case of a low depth of the control cabinet, the
filter is rotated by 90° and mounted to the left side of the standard device.
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

Electrical installation
K1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
1 (BK)
F1...F3 2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

L1 L2 L3 + X302 L1 L2 L3 +
X301 X100
E94AZxSxxxx E94xSxExxxxx
SSP94FF610

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with ring cable lug M8
SSP94FF606

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxS0544 50 0 10 88.5 Hexagon
E94AZxS0954 95 000 14 124.0 socket 5

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxS0544
M8 12 106 SW 13
E94AZxS0954

582  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (54 ... 95 A)

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
1 Filter output conductor (lead with wire end ferrules, colour BK)
2
3
PE Output−side PE conductor (lead with wire end ferrule, colour GN/YE)
SSP94FF607

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.
ƒ Reactor model E94AZR0544 shall be installed with input wiring of 4 AWG
minimum. Reactor model E94AZR0954 shall be installed with input wiring
of 1/0 AWG minimum.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  583

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers

Filters RFI filters for single−axis controllers

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée au câblage à pied d’oeuvre.
Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur le câblage.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.
ƒ Il convient de prévoir un câblage d’entrée de 4 AWG minimum pour le
modèle E94AZR0544 et de 1/0 AWG minimum pour le modèle E94AZR0954.

584  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415 A

Filters

8.10.7 RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415 A

Assignment of filters to standard devices

RFI filter Single−axis controller
Type (Lenze) Type (see nameplate) Type Device size
E94AZRS1804 3F480−180.290EM E94xSHE1454 81
E94AZRS1804 3F480−180.290EM E94xSHE1724 82
E94AZRS3004 3F480−300.290EM E94xSHE2024 82
E94AZRS3004 3F480−300.290EM E94xSHE2454 82
E94AZRS3004 3F480−300.290EM E94xSHE2924 83
E94AZRS4154 3F480−415.290EM E94xSHE3664 91
E94AZRS4154 3F480−415.290EM E94xSHE4604 91

Elements on the filter

E94AZRS1804 E94AZRS3004, E94AZRS4154

L1', L2', L3' L1', L2', L3'

L1, L2, L3

L1, L2, L3
SSP94GG8xNF

Pos. Description
# PE conductor connection
L1, L2, L3 Mains terminals
L1’, L2’, L3’ Device terminals

General data
Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  585

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415 A

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 1 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place Mount the filters in the control cabinet close to the standard
device on the same mounting plate with a good electrical
connection.
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The filters can be directly side−mounted. In case of heat
sources that exceed the maximum ambient temperature of
the filter, a minimum distance of 20 mm must be observed.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZRS1804 400/480 50/60 180/180 162/162 3
E94AZRS3004 400/480 50/60 300/300 270/270 3
E94AZRS4154 400/480 50/60 415/415 374/374 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

586  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415 A

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZRS1804 14.2 − −
E94AZRS3004 21.5 − −
E94AZRS4154 27.0 − −

Dimensions
E94AZRS1804:
121

5
6.
132 98.5

M8

´300
´315
270

350

M8

M8
SSP94GG8xNF

All dimensions in millimetres.

Mass
[kg]
E94AZRS1804 7.9

E94AZRS3004, E94AZRS4154:
200 120

M10

M8
8.5

180
a1

M8

M10

180

SSP94GG8xNF

All dimensions in millimetres.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  587

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for single−axis controllers E94AZRSxxxx (3F480−xxx.290EM) 180 ... 415 A

a a1 Mass
[mm] mm] [kg]
E94AZRS3004 410 310 12
E94AZRS4154 450 350 13.5

Electrical installation

L1
L2
L3
PE

F1...F3

+ L1 L2 L3
E94AZRSxxxx

E94xSxExxxx

X110
+ L1' L2' L3' + L1 L2 L3

SSP94GG8xNF

Terminal data L1/L2/L3, L1’/L2’/L3’ and PE

Æ Tightening torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZRS1804 M8 9 80 WAF 13
E94AZRS3004
M10 25 ... 30 221 ... 266 SW 17
E94AZRS4154

588  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

8.10.8 RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

RFI filter DC power supply module
Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZRP0084 1 E94APNE0104 1
E94AZRP0294 1 E94APNE0364 3
E94AZRP0294 1 E70ACPSx0304x 1

Elements on the filter

SSP94FF001

Pos. Description
 RFI filter E94AZRPxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
# Connection of PE conductor
X301 Mains terminal L1 ... L3
X302 Connection cable to DC power supply module, four−core
 Mounting aid for installation backplane
 Nameplate

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  589

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z R P xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
RFI filter type
for 9400 power supply
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

590  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZRP0084 230/400/480 50/60 8/8/8 6/6/6 3
E94AZRP0294 230/400/480 50/60 29/29/29 21.8/21.8/21.8 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZRP0084 20 ˘ ˘
E94AZRP0294 50 ˘ ˘

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  591

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Dimensions

SSP94FF002

All dimensions in millimetres.

b1 b2 Mass
[mm] [kg]
E94AZRP0084 360 5 350 5 4.2
E94AZRP0294 430 5 420 5 4.5

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

592  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Electrical installation

Connection plan
Standard mounting Mounting variant
K1 K1
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
PE PE

F1...F3 F1...F3

+ L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3
X301 X111
E94AZRPxxxx

X301
E94AZPxxxxx

E94AZRPxxxx
X112
X302 + L1 L2 L3 X302
1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)
+ L1 L2 L3
X111

E94AZPxxxxx
X112
+ L1 L2 L3
SSP94FF005 SSP94FF005

Fig. 8−6 Connection concept

E94AZRPxxxx RFI filter
E94AZPxxxxx Installation backplane for 9400 DC power supply module
F1 ... F3 Fuses
K1 Mains contactor

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of the mains phases L1, L2, L3
L2
L3
# Connection for the supply−side PE conductor with M5 ring cable lug
SSP94FF006

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0084
10 6 1.2 ... 1.5 10.6 ... 13.3 PH1
E94AZxP0294

PE connection data
Æ Starting torque
[mm] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0084
M5 3 26.5 SW 8
E94AZxP0294

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  593

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (8 ... 29 A)

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
1 Filter output conductor (lead with wire end ferrule, colour BK)
2
3
PE Output−side PE conductor (lead with M5 fork−type cable lug, colour
GN/YE)
SSP94FF007

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

594  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules

Filters RFI filters for power supply modules

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  595

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Filters

8.10.9 RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Assignment of filters to standard devices

RFI filter DC power supply module
Type Device size Type Device size
E94AZRP0824 4 E94APNE1004 4
E94AZRP2004 5 E94APNE2454 5
E94AZRP0824 4 E70ACPSx0604x 2

Elements on the filter

SSP94FF201

Pos. Description
 RFI filter E94AZRPxxxx
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
X301 Mains connection for L1 ... L3 and PE
X302 Connection cables to DC power supply module L1’ ... L3’ and PE
 Nameplate

596  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Identification

L

Type:

SSP94NF002


Type code E94 A Z R P xxx x
Product range
Version
accessories
RFI filter type
for 9400 power supply
Rated current [A]
Voltage class
4 = 230 ... 400/480 V

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Mains data
Mains types
With grounded neutral (TT/TN systems) Operation permitted without restrictions
Other mains types Observe instructions for special measures in the
documentation for the basic device!

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20 Not in the wire range of the
NEMA 250 Protection against contact terminals
to type 1
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  597

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating from +45 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: current derating of 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)

Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2

EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 1 g

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertically
Free space The required free space results from the mounting position
and the specifications of the standard device.

Rated data
Mains Voltage Voltage range Frequency range
ULrated [V] ULrated [V] f [Hz]
3/PE AC 230 180 − 0 % ... 264 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 400 320 − 0 % ... 440 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %
3/PE AC 480 340 − 0 % ... 528 + 0 % 45 − 0 % ... 65 + 0 %

Voltage Freq. Current [A] Current [A] Number of

phases
[V] [Hz]  max. +45° C  max. +55° C
E94AZRP0824 230/400/480 50/60 82/82/82 61/61/61 3
E94AZRP2004 230/400/480 50/60 200/200/200 150/150/150 3
 Temperature in the control cabinet

Power loss Inductance Voltage drop

Ploss [W] L [mH] U [V]
E94AZRP0824 80 − −
E94AZRP2004 150 − −

598  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Dimensions

SSP94FF202

All dimensions in millimetres.

Dimension l Mass
[mm] [kg]
E94AZRP0824 500 10 18.5
E94AZRP2004 600 10 21.0

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  599

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Electrical installation

Connection plan
Standard mounting Mounting variant
K1
L1
K1 L2
L1 L3
L2 PE
L3
PE F1...F3

F1...F3
+ L1 L2 L3
X301

E94AZRPxxxx
+ L1 L2 L3 + L1 L2 L3
X301 X111
E94APNExxxx
E94AZRPxxxx

X302
X112

1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)
X302 + L1 L2 L3
1 (BK)
2 (BK)
3 (BK)
PE (GN/YE)

+ L1 L2 L3
X111
E94APNExxxx

SSP94NF305 SSP94NF305

Fig. 8−7 Connection concept

E94AZRPxxxx RFI filter
E94APNExxxx 9400 DC power supply module
F1 ... F3 Fuses
K1 Mains contactor

Mains
Terminal X301 Labelling Description
L1 Connection of mains phases L1, L2, L3 and PE conductor
L2
L3
PE

SSP94NF306

600  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules E94AZRPxxxx (82 ... 200 A)

Terminal data
Max. conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
$
E94AZxP0824
70
Connection with M8 2/0 12 106 SW13
(2 x 70)
ring cable lug
E94AZxP2004
150
Connection with M10 250 mcm 20 177 SW15
(2 x 120)
ring cable lug

Standard device
Cable X302 Labelling Description
L1’ Filter output conductor (lead with ring cable lug, colour BK)
L2’
L3’

Output PE conductor (lead with ring cable lug, colour GN/YE)

SSP94NF307

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Consideration shall be given to the field wiring leads. No strain relief test
was performed on the leads.
ƒ The devices in this report are only evaluated for factory wiring use.
ƒ Temperature tests were performed with hook mounted drive.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  601

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
RFI filters for power supply modules

Filters RFI filters for power supply modules

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Une attention particulière doit être apportée aux tresses de câblage à pied
d’oeuvre. Aucun test de décharge de traction n’a été réalisé sur ces
éléments.
ƒ Les équipements concernés par ce rapport sont évalués exclusivement pour
un câblage en usine.
ƒ Les tests de température ont été réalisés avec un entraînement à crochet.

602  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Filters

8.10.10 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Elements on the filter

SSP94SF001

Pos. Description
 Sinusoidal filter EZS3−xxxA200
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Terminals (input: 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 / output: 1U2, 1V2, 1W2)
 PE connection
 Shield connection
Fixing bracket

Terminal cover

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  603

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Identification

L 
SINUSFILTER
SINE-FILTER
FILTRE-SINUS

Type:

SSP94SF002


Type code e Z S 3 − xxxA xxx

Product series

Accessories

Filter type
S = sinusoidal filter

Phases
3 = 3 phases

Rated current [A] (rounded)

Variant

Operating conditions
A sinusoidal filter (LC filter) in the motor cable limits the rate of rise of voltage (du/dt
< 500 V/s) and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur during inverter
operation. This enables considerably larger shielded motor cables and the service life of the
motor is increased.
The following must be observed when using sinusoidal filters:

ƒ Use sinusoidal filters only together with standard asynchronous machines 0 ...
550 V.
ƒ The operation is only permissible using a V/f or V/f2 characteristic control.
ƒ The operation is only permissible using a switching frequency of 4 ... 8 kHz.
– The sinusoidal filter overheats when being operated with a switching frequency
< 4 kHz.
– Ensure that the automatic switching frequency reduction is deactivated (see
documentation of the basic device).
ƒ Limit the output frequency to maximally 150 Hz.
ƒ Please note, when dimensioning the controller, that the controller has an additional
load of 10 ... 15 %.

604  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

General data
Conformity and approval
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
UR UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20
NEMA 250 Protection against contact
to type 1
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating at +40 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: Current derating 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet, as close as possible to the controller
Mounting position Dependent on the payload of the control cabinet wall
Lightweight filters: suspended, fixing bracket to the sides
Heavy filters: vertical, fixing bracket below
Free space 100 mm to the side and above
Connecting cables
Controller  filter As short as possible, shielded
Filter  motor Max. 200 m shielded or max. 300 m unshielded

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  605

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Rated data
Voltage Output frequency Switching frequency Rate of rise of voltage
U [V AC] f [Hz] fch [kHz] du/dt [V/s]
EZS3−xxxA200 0 ... 550 0 ... 150 4 ... 8 < 500

Current Power loss Inductance

Ir [A] PV [W] L [mH]
EZS3−004A200 4.0 50 11.0
EZS3−010A200 10.0 80 5.1
EZS3−017A200 16.5 130 3.1
EZS3−024A200 23.5 160 2.5
EZS3−032A200 32.0 180 2.0
EZS3−037A200 37.0 190 1.7
EZS3−048A200 48.0 200 1.2
EZS3−061A200 61.0 230 1.0
EZS3−072A200 72.0 260 0.95
EZS3−090A200 90.0 300 0.8

Dimensions

SSP94SF003

Type a b1 b2 e M1 M2 M3 n1 n2 n3 p q

[mm] [kg]
EZS3−004A2 75 36 171 113 130 166 50 55 57 9 5
178 4.0
00
EZS3−010A2 90 36 171 113 130 166 65 70 72 9 5
178 5.5
00
EZS3−017A2 111 51 198 136 170 201 67 68 81 13 7
219 8.5
00

606  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

SSP94SF006

Type a b b1 b2 e m n

[mm] [kg]
EZS3−024A2 190 121 14 280 250 95
275 14.5
00
EZS3−032A2 200 131 14 280 250 105
275 19.0
00
EZS3−037A2 210 141 14 280 250 115
275 21.0
00
EZS3−048A2 245 151 14 290 250 125
275 25.5
00
EZS3−061A2 240 165 5 315 300 133
340 33.5
00
EZS3−072A2 265 176 5 325 300 145
340 37.0
00
EZS3−090A2 292 203 5 325 300 172
340 53.0
00

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  607

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Electrical installation

xxxx

U V W

1U1 1V1 1W1

EZS3-xxxA200
1U2 1V2 1W2

M
3~

SSP94SF005 SSP94SF004

SSP94SF009

SSP94SF011

xxxx

U V W

1U1 1V1 1W1

EZS3-xxxA200
1U2 1V2 1W2

M
3~

SSP94SF007 SSP94SF004

608  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 4 ... 90 A

Terminal data
Sinusoidal filter Terminal PE screw
Connection cross−sections Tightening torque  Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in] [Nm] [lb−in]
EZS3−004A200
0.2 ... 6 24 ... 10 0.6 5.3
EZS3−010A200 M4 2 17.7
EZS3−017A200 0.5 ... 16 20 ... 6 1.5 13.3
EZS3−024A200
EZS3−032A200 2.5 ... 25 10 ... 6 2 17.7
EZS3−037A200
EZS3−048A200 M5 3 26.5
2.5 ... 35 12 ... 2
EZS3−061A200
3 26.5
EZS3−072A200
16 ... 50 1/0 ... 6
EZS3−090A200

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Appropriate cooling measures shall be taken based on the power loss data
within the instructions available from the manufacturer.
ƒ External wiring material for models with bus bar screw connectors − R/C
(AVLV2), rated 105 °C min., suitable for applied voltage and current. If wiring
material with a lower temperature rating is used, an additional temperature
test at the wiring material has to be conducted in the end use.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  609

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters 4 ... 90 A

Filters Sinusoidal filters 4 ... 90 A

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Il convient de prendre des mesures de refroidissement appropriées en
fonction de la puissance dissipée, conformément aux instructions fournies
par le fabricant.
ƒ Les éléments de câblage externes des modèles avec connecteurs à vis pour
barres conductrices (R/C [AVLV2], mininum 105 °C) sont adaptés à la tension
et au courant appliqués. En cas d’utilisation d’éléments de câblage conçus
pour des températures inférieures, des essais de température
supplémentaires doivent être menés sur ces éléments dans les conditions
d’application.

610  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

Filters

8.10.11 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

Elements on the filter

SSP94SF101

Pos. Description
 Sinusoidal filter EZS3−xxxA200
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Terminals (input: 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 / output: 1U2, 1V2, 1W2)
 PE connection
 Shield connection
Fixing bracket

Terminal cover
 Ring bolts

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  611

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

Identification

L 
SINUSFILTER
SINE-FILTER
FILTRE-SINUS

Type:

SSP94SF002


Type code e Z S 3 − xxxA xxx

Product series

Accessories

Filter type
S = sinusoidal filter

Phases
3 = 3 phases

Rated current [A] (rounded)

Variant

Operating conditions
A sinusoidal filter (LC filter) in the motor cable limits the rate of rise of voltage (du/dt
< 500 V/s) and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur during inverter
operation. This enables considerably larger shielded motor cables and the service life of the
motor is increased.
The following must be observed when using sinusoidal filters:

ƒ Use sinusoidal filters only together with standard asynchronous machines 0 ...
550 V.
ƒ Operation is only permissible using a V/f or V/f2 characteristic control.
ƒ Operation is only permissible using a switching frequency of 2 ... 4 kHz.
– Ensure that the automatic switching frequency reduction is deactivated (see
documentation of the standard device).
ƒ Limit the output frequency to maximally 150 Hz.
ƒ Please note when dimensioning the controller that the controller has an additional
load of 10 ... 15 %.

612  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

General data
Conformity and approval
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union
Approval
UR UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No.14 (File−No. E219022) for USA and Canada

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP20
NEMA 250 Protection against contact
to type 1
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating at +40 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: Current derating 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet, as close as possible to the controller
Mounting position Dependent on the payload of the control cabinet wall
Lightweight filters: suspended, fixing bracket to the sides
Heavy filters: vertical, fixing bracket below
Free space 100 mm to the side and above
Connecting cables
Controller  filter As short as possible, shielded
Filter  motor Max. 200 m shielded or max. 300 m unshielded

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  613

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

Rated data
Voltage Output frequency Switching frequency Rate of rise of voltage
U [V AC] f [Hz] fch [kHz] du/dt [V/s]
EZS3−xxxA200 0 ... 550 0 ... 150 2 ... 4 < 500

Current Power loss Inductance

IN [A] PV [W] L [mH]
EZS3−115A200 115 360 0.7
EZS3−150A200 150 400 0.5

Dimensions

SSP94SF103

All dimensions in millimetres.

a b b1 b2 e m n

[mm] [mm] [kg]

EZS3−115A2 235 153 78.5 444 388 121
420 66
00
EZS3−150A2 235 168 63.5 444 388 136
420 69
00

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

614  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 115 ... 150 A

Electrical installation

xxxx

U V W

1U1 1V1 1W1

EZS3-xxxA200
1U2 1V2 1W2

M
3~

SSP94SF107 SSP94SF004

Terminal data
Sinusoidal filter Terminal PE screw
Connection cross−sections Tightening torque  Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in] [Nm] [lb−in]
EZS3−115A200
35 ... 95 4/0 ... 2 6 53.1 M8 18 159.3
EZS3−150A200

Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

 Warnings!
Conditions of Acceptability:
ƒ The products covered by this report are only intended for use with Power
Conversion Equipment (inverters).
ƒ Appropriate cooling measures shall be taken based on the power loss data
within the instructions available from the manufacturer.
ƒ External wiring material for models with bus bar screw connectors − R/C
(AVLV2), rated 105 °C min., suitable for applied voltage and current. If wiring
material with a lower temperature rating is used, an additional temperature
test at the wiring material has to be conducted in the end use.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  615

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters 115 ... 150 A

Filters Sinusoidal filters 115 ... 150 A

Original − French

 Avertissement !
Conditions d’acceptabilité :
ƒ Les produits concernés par ce rapport sont destinés exclusivement à être
utilisés avec des convertisseurs de puissance (variateurs ou power
conversion equipment).
ƒ Il convient de prendre des mesures de refroidissement appropriées en
fonction de la puissance dissipée, conformément aux instructions fournies
par le fabricant.
ƒ Les éléments de câblage externes des modèles avec connecteurs à vis pour
barres conductrices (R/C [AVLV2], mininum 105 °C) sont adaptés à la tension
et au courant appliqués. En cas d’utilisation d’éléments de câblage conçus
pour des températures inférieures, des essais de température
supplémentaires doivent être menés sur ces éléments dans les conditions
d’application.

616  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

Filters

8.10.12 Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

Elements on the filter

SSP94SF201

Pos. Description
 Sinusoidal filter EZS3−xxxA200
Mounting Instructions

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Connection 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 (inputs)
 Connection 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 (outputs)
 PE connection
Shield connection

Fixing bracket
 Blocking point for lifting system

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  617

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

Identification

L 
SINUSFILTER
SINE-FILTER
FILTRE-SINUS

Type:

SSP94SF002


Type code e Z S 3 − xxxA xxx

Product series

Accessories

Filter type
S = sinusoidal filter

Phases
3 = 3 phases

Rated current [A] (rounded)

Variant

Operating conditions
A sinusoidal filter (LC filter) in the motor cable limits the rate of rise of voltage (du/dt
< 500 V/s) and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur during inverter
operation. This enables considerably larger shielded motor cables and the service life of the
motor is increased.
The following must be observed when using sinusoidal filters:

ƒ Use sinusoidal filters only together with standard asynchronous machines 0 ...
550 V.
ƒ Operation is only permissible using a V/f or V/f2 characteristic control.
ƒ Operation is only permissible using a switching frequency of 2 ... 4 kHz.
– Ensure that the automatic switching frequency reduction is deactivated (see
documentation of the standard device).
ƒ Limit the output frequency to maximally 90 Hz.
ƒ Please note, when dimensioning the controller, that the controller has an additional
load of 10 ... 15 %.

618  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
EAC TPTC020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian conformity
(TPZU020/2011) compatibility of technical TR ZU: Technical regulation of
products the tariff union

Protection of persons and equipment

Degree of protection EN 60529 IP00
Earth leakage current IEC/EN 61800−5−1 > 3.5 mA AC Observe regulations and safety
> 10 mA DC instructions!
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 61800−5−1 < 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category III
> 2000 m site altitude: overvoltage category II

Environmental conditions
Climate
Storage IEC/EN 60721−3−1 1K3 (−25 ... +60 °C)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2K3 (−25 ... +70 °C)
Operation IEC/EN 60721−3−3 3K3 (−10 ... +55 °C)
Current derating at +40 ... +55 °C: 2.5 %/°C
Site altitude 0 ... 4000 m amsl
1000 ... 4000 m amsl: Current derating 5 %/1000 m
Pollution EN 61800−5−1 Degree of pollution 2
Vibration resistance (9.81 m/s2 = 1 g)
Transport IEC/EN 60721−3−2 2M2
EN 61800−2 2 ... 9 Hz: Amplitude 3.5 mm
10 ... 200 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2
200 ... 500 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 15 m/s2
Operation Germanischer Lloyd 5 ... 13.2 Hz: Amplitude ±1 mm
13.2 ... 100 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 0.7 g
IEC/EN 60068−2−6 10 ... 57 Hz: Amplitude 0.075 mm
57 ... 150 Hz: Acceleration resistant up to 10 m/s2

Mounting conditions
Mounting place In the control cabinet
Mounting position Vertical, fixing bracket below
Free space 100 mm to the side and above
Connecting cables
Controller  filter As short as possible, shielded
Filter  motor Max. 200 m shielded or max. 300 m unshielded

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  619

8 Accessories (overview)
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

Rated data
Voltage Output frequency Switching frequency Rate of rise of voltage
U [V AC] f [Hz] fch [kHz] du/dt [V/s]
EZS3−xxxA200 0 ... 550 0 ... 90 2 ... 4 < 500

Current Power loss Inductance

IN [A] PV [W] L [mH]
EZS3−180A200 180 580 0.40
EZS3−250A200 250 810 0.35
EZS3−350A200 350 1100 0.21
EZS3−480A200 480 1550 0.14

Dimensions

SSP94SF203

a b b1 b2 e m1 m2 m3 m4 n

[mm] [kg]
EZS3−180A200 600 270 235 21 324 117.5 130 160 194.5 97
102.5
EZS3−250A200 665 330 290 23 373 122.5 145 140 238.5 152
EZS3−350A200 320 268 431 216.5 172
730 26 110 125 165 160
EZS3−480A200 370 318 426 266.5 244

Mechanical installation
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

620  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
Filters
Sinusoidal filters EZS3−xxxA200 180 ... 480 A

Electrical installation

xxxx

U V W

1U1 1V1 1W1

EZS3-xxxA200
1U2 1V2 1W2

M
3~

SSP94SF004

Terminal data
1U1, 1V1, 1W1, 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 PE PES
  
EZS3−180A200 M10
EZS3−250A200 M13
M10 M8
EZS3−350A200
M16
EZS3−480A200

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  621

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Shield mounting

8.11 General accessories

For information about further accessories, please see the "Servo Drives 9400" catalogue.

8.11.1 Shield mounting

Shield mounting kits facilitate the conductive connection of cable shields with a surface as
large as possible. Good shield connections are an important part of wiring according to
EMC guidelines. The shield connections on the devices are designed for different
installations. If a recommended shield mounting cannot be implemented, e.g. because of
thick cables, you can always choose an alternative. The alternative also ensures a good
shield connection.
Always implement a strain relief in addition to the shield mounting, since strain relief is not
possible with a shield mounting.
Possible installations of the shield connection:
ƒ EMC clip (fixing clip)
– preferred for control cables or thin motor cables
ƒ EMC wire clamp
– preferred for motor cables, device−dependent sizes
ƒ Cable tie, metallic
– preferred for thick motor cables or several cables

E94AZJS090

622  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Shield mounting

Shield mounting and cable cross−section

Shield mountings contained in the scope of supply of the Servo Drives 9400:
Type EMC clip (fixing clip) EMC wire clamp
Axis module Installation EZA... (usability depends on
backplane (axis module/installation installation backplane)
backplane)
E94xSxE0024
E94AZPS0034
E94xSxE0034
E94xMxE0024 GG1 2/3 −
E94xMxE0034 E94AZPM0044
E94xMxE0044
E94xSxE0044
E94AZPS0074
E94xSxE0074
GG2 2/2 1 x EZAMBHXM003
E94xMxE0074
E94AZPM0094
E94xMxE0094
E94xSxE0134
E94xSxE0174 E94AZPS0244
E94xSxE0244
E94xMxE0134 GG3 2/2 1 x EZAMBHXM004
E94xMxE0174 E94AZPM0244
E94xMxE0244
E94xMxE0324 E94AZPM0324
E94xSxE0324
E94xSxE0474
E94xSxE0594 1 x EZAMBHXM003
− GG6 3/0
1 x EZAMBHXM004
E94xMxE0474
E94xMxE0594
E94xSxE0864 1 x EZAMBHXM004
− GG7 3/0
E94xSxE1044 1 x EZAMBHXM005
E94xSxE0864 1 x EZAMBHXM004
− GG7 3/0
E94xSxE1044 1 x EZAMBHXM005
E94xSxE1454 − GG81 2/0 −
E94xSxE1724
E94xSxE2024 − GG82 2/0
E94xSxB2454
2 x wire clamps, large
E94xSxE2924 − GG83 2/0 (type of C−rail)
E94xSxB3664
− GG91 2/0
E94xSxE4604
Tab. 8−3 Shield mountings contained in the scope of supply

Shield mountings available as accessories:

Type EMC clip EMC wire clamp Cable tie
Accessory set EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBKBM
07 06 03 04 05 (metallic)
(fixing clip) (C02) (C03) (C04) (C05)
EZAMBHXM007 20 − − − − −
EZAMBHXM006 − 10 − − − −
EZAMBHXM003 − − 10 − − −
EZAMBHXM004 − − − 10 − −
EZAMBHXM005 − − − − 10 −
EZAMBKBM − − − − − 50
Tab. 8−4 Shield mountings in the accessories − Assignment and VPE

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  623

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Shield mounting

Permissible cable cross−sections (without cable sheath) of the shield mountings:

EMC clip EMC wire clamp Cable tie
EZAMBHXM007 EZAMBHXM006 EZAMBHXM003 EZAMBHXM004 EZAMBHXM005 EZAMBKBM
(fixing clip) (C02) (C03) (C04) (C05) (metallic)
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
[in] [in] [in] [in] [in] [in]
2 ... 11.6 4 ... 15 10 ... 20 15 ... 28 20 ... 37 8 ... 30
0.079 ... 0.456 0.157 ... 0.59 0.394 ... 0.787 0.59 ... 1.1 0.79 ... 1.46 0.32 ... 1.18
Tab. 8−5 Clamping range of shield mountings

Select the shield mounting according to the cable characteristics.

Lenze system EMC clip EMC wire clamp Cable tie
cables
A d EZAMBHXM007 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBHXM0 EZAMBKBM
[mm2] [mm] (fixing clip) 06 03 04 05 (metallic)
(C02) (C03) (C04) (C04)
standard, shielded
1.0 10.3    − − 
1.5 11.6    − − 
2.5 13.2 −   − − 
4.0 14.5 −     
6.0 16.5 − −    
10 19.6 − −    
suitable for trailing
1.0 11.2    − − 
1.5 12.3 −   − − 
2.5 14.2 −   − − 
4.0 14.8 −     
6.0 17.5 − −    
10 20.5 − − −   
Tab. 8−6 Cable characteristics of Lenze system cables
A Single−core cross−sections of a Lenze system cable (motor)
Standard design or trailing cable
d Cross−section of Lenze system cable/cable shield

 Tip!
If a shield mounting cannot be used because of thicker cables, in many cases,
an alternative is possible.
For the EMC shield clamp, the EZAMBHXM006 EMC wire clamp or the metal
EZAMBKBM cable tie, for example, can be used.

624  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

8.11.2 Brake resistors

EMC−compliant wiring
When brake resistors are being wired, the associated installation instructions are to be
observed.
Generally applicable rules for wiring connecting cables:
ƒ Keep cable length as short as possible.
ƒ Use a twisted cable for cable lengths up to 0.5 m. A shielded cable is not necessary.
ƒ Use a shield cable for cable lengths from 0.5 m to a maximum of 5 m.
ƒ Always use a twisted cable for monitoring the brake resistor by means of a thermal
contact.
These rules should only be deviated from if such a deviation is expressly described for a
brake resistor or other application.

Version 1 (short cables)

RB

RB1 RB2 T1 T2

+
< 0.5 m

ERBG008

Twisted cables

Version 2 (long cables)

RB

RB1 RB2 T1 T2

"
<5m

"
ERBG007

" HF−shield termination by extensive PE connection

Twisted cables

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  625

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Assignment of external brake resistors

Rated mains voltage: ULr = 400/480 V
For ULr = 230 V rated voltage, different assignments are applicable.

 Note!
Max. permissible connecting cable length brake resistor  device:  5 m

Single Drive axis Brake resistor Resistance Continuous power Quantity of heat
module
R [] P [W] QB [kWs]
E94xSxE0024
ERBP082R200W 82 200 30
E94xSxE0034
ERBP047R200W 200 30
E94xSxE0044 ERBS047R400W 400 60
47
E94xSxE0074
ERBS047R800W 800 120
ERBP027R200W 200 30
E94xSxE0134 ERBS027R600W 27 600 90
ERBS027R01K2 1200 180
ERBP018R300W 300 30
E94xSxE0174 ERBS018R800W 18 800 120
ERBS018R02K8 2800 180
ERBP018R300W 300 30
E94xSxE0244 ERBS018R01K2 18 1200 180
ERBS018R02K8 2800 420
ERBS018R800W 800 120
E94xSxE0324 ERBS018R01K4 18 1400 210
ERBG018R04K3 4300 645
ERBS015R800W 800 1500
E94xSxE0474 ERBS015R02K4 15 2400 495
ERBG015R06K2 6200 930
ERBS015R01K2 1200 180
E94xSxE0594 ERBG015R03K3 15 3300 495
ERBG015R10K0 10000 1500
E94xSxE0864
ERBG075D01K9 7.5 1900 285
E94xSxE1044
E94xSxE1454 ERBG005R02K6 5 2600 390
E94xSxE1724 ERBG043D03K0 4.3 3000 450
E94xSxE2024 ERBG035D03K3 3.5 3300 495
E94xSxE2454 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4100 615
E94xSxE2924 ERBG023D05K6 2.3 5600 840
E94xSxE3664 ERBG035D03K3 2) 2 * 3.5 3300 495
E94xSxE4604 ERBG028D04K1 2) 2 * 2.8 4100 615
2) Zwei Widerstände parallel schalten.

626  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

Power supply Brake resistor Resistance Continuous power Quantity of heat

module
R [] P [W] QB [kWs]
ERBP027R200W 200 30
E94APNE0104 ERBS027R600W 27 600 90
ERBS027R01K2 1200 180
ERBG012R01K9 1900 285
E94APNE0364 12
ERBG012R05K2 5200 780
E94APNE1004 ERBG005R02K6 5 2600 390
E94APNE2454 ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4100 615

Regenerative Brake resistor Resistance Continuous power Quantity of heat

power supply
module R [] P [W] QB [kWs]
ERBP027R200W 200 30
E94ARNE0134 ERBS027R600W 27 600 90
ERBS027R01K2 1200 180
ERBP018R300W 300 30
E94ARNE0244 ERBS018R01K2 18 1200 180
ERBS018R02K8 2800 420

Operating conditions
Climatic Class 3K3 to EN 50178 Without condensation, average relative humidity
conditions 85 %
Ambient −10 °C ... +55 °C
temperature Above 45 °C the permanent power Pd is to be reduced by 2.5 %/°C
Installation 0 ... 4000 m amsl
height Above 1000 m the permanent power Pd is to be reduced by 5 %/1000 m
Mounting  The mounting location must comply with the device features mentioned in the chapter
location "General data".
 Flammable materials or substances must not be placed in the vicinity of the brake
resistor.
 The heat generated by the brake resistor must be dissipated freely.
Mounting
position
Standard Vertically suspended with connecting cables at the bottom.
Variant Horizontally standing with fixing bracket at the bottom.
The permanent power Pd is to be reduced by 30 %!
Free spaces
Standard at the top > 200 mm, to the sides > 25 mm, at the bottom > 100 mm
Variant at the top > 200 mm, to the sides > 45 mm, at the bottom > 45 mm
Design and  Mean value of regenerative power < permanent power Pd of brake resistor.
project planning  Regenerative power during braking time < heat quantity QB of brake resistor.
 Braking time < 10 % of cycle time (braking time + dead time).
 Always connect the thermal contact and integrate it in a way into the system monitoring
that the mains supply will be switched off when the basic device is overheated.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  627

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Scope of supply
ERBP... 0 1 2
T1

T2

RB1

5 4 3
RB2

6
ERBP001

Pos. Description
Brake resistor
Mounting Instructions

Brake resistor elements

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Thermal contact
 Connecting cable thermal contact
 Connecting cable brake resistor
 PE connection
Warning note

Fixing bracket

Identification


L
0
ERBMXXX011


Type code ERBx xxxx xxxx
Product series
Resistance RB []
e.g. 470R = 470 
075D = 7.5 
Permanent power
Pd [W]
e.g. 120W =
120 W
01k2 = 1.2
kW

628  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TPTC004/2011 Regarding the safety of Eurasian conformity
(TPZU004/2011) low−voltage equipment TR ZU: Technical regulation of
the tariff union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File−No. E232497) for USA and Canada

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP21
NEMA 250 Protection against contact to type 1
Thermal contact
Design NC contact, 180 °C
Switching capacity 250 V AC / 4 A

Rated data
Electrical data
RB Pd QB Umax
[] [W] [kWs] [VDC]
ERBP018R300W 18 300 30
ERBP027R200W 27 200 30
ERBP033R200W 200 30
33
ERBP033R300W 300 45
800
ERBP047R200W 47 200 30
ERBP082R200W 82 200 30
ERBP180R200W 200 30
180
ERBP180R300W 300 45

RB Resistance
Pd Permanent power
QB Heat quantity
Umax Max. operating voltage

Installation steps
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  629

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Scope of supply

ERBG001

Pos. Description
Brake resistor
Mounting Instructions

Brake resistor elements

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Cable gland for brake resistor cable
 Cable gland for thermal contact cable

Identification

Lenze 
Type

ERBG002


Type code ERBx xxxx xxxx
Product series
Resistance RB []
e.g. 470R = 470 
075D = 7.5 
Permanent power
Pd [W]
e.g. 120W =
120 W
01k2 = 1.2
kW

630  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
Approval
UR UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
(File−No. E221095) for USA and Canada
Enclosure EN 60529 IP20
NEMA 250 Protection against contact
to type 1
Thermal contact
Design NC contact, 100 °C
Switching capacity 250 V AC / 2.5 A
110 V AC / 1.6 A

Rated data
Electrical data
RB Pd QB Umax
[] [W] [kWs] [VDC]
ERBG023D05K6 2.3 5600 840
ERBG028D04K1 2.8 4100 615
ERBG035D03K3 3.5 3300 495
ERBG043D03K0 4.3 3000 450
ERBG005R02K6 5.0 2600 390
ERBG075D01K9 7.5
1900 285 1000
ERBG012R01K9
12.0
ERBG012R05K2 5200 780
ERBG015R03K3 3300 495
ERBG015R06K2 15.0 6200 930
ERBG015R10K0 10000 1500
ERBG018R04K3 18.0 4300 645

RB Resistance
Pd Permanent power
QB Heat quantity
Umax Max. operating voltage

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  631

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Dimensions

ERBG003

a b c d e g1
[mm] [kg]
ERBG023D05K6 15.9
400 426
ERBG028D04K1 12.8
ERBG035D03K3 12.6
ERBG043D03K0 300 326 11.8
ERBG005R02K6 11.0
ERBG075D01K9
486 302 380 210 236 6.3 9.5
ERBG012R01K9
ERBG012R05K2 400 426 15.1
ERBG015R03K3 300 326 12.6
ERBG015R06K2 500 526 17.0
ERBG015R10K0 710 736 22.0
ERBG018R04K3 400 426 13.5

632  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

Free spaces for standard mounting

ERBG005

All dimensions in millimetres.

Free spaces for mounting variant

ERBG006

All dimensions in millimetres.

Installation steps
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  633

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Scope of supply

ERBS101

Pos. Description
Brake resistor
Mounting Instructions

Brake resistor elements

Pos. Description
 Nameplate
 Terminal box
 Cable gland for thermal contact cable
 Cable gland for brake resistor cable
 Warning note
Fixing bracket

Identification

ERBS104


Type code ERBx xxxx xxxx
Product series
Resistance RB []
e.g. 470R = 470 
075D = 7.5 
Permanent power
Pd [W]
e.g. 120W =
120 W
01k2 = 1.2
kW

634  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

General data
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
Approval
CURUS UL508 Industrial Control Equipment, Underwriter Laboratories
CSA C22.2 No. 14 (File−No. E232497) for USA and Canada

Protection of persons and equipment

Enclosure EN 60529 IP65
NEMA 250 Protection against contact to type 4
Thermal contact
Design NC contact, 230 °C
Switching capacity 250 V AC / 5 A

Rated data
Electrical data
RB Pd QB Umax
[] [W] [kWs] [VDC]
ERBS015R800W 800 120
ERBS015R01K2 15 1200 180
ERBS015R02K4 2400 420
ERBS018R800W 800 120
ERBS018R01K2 1200 180
ERBS018R01K4 18 1400 210
ERBS018R01K9 1900 285 800
ERBS018R02K8 2800 420
ERBS027R600W 600 90
ERBS027R01K2 27 1200 180
ERBS027R01K4 1400 210
ERBS047R400W 400 60
47
ERBS047R800W 800 120

RB Resistance
Pd Permanent power
QB Heat quantity
Umax Max. operating voltage

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  635

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Dimensions

Design 1

ERBS102

All dimensions in millimetres.

a b c1 c3 c4 c5 d3 e e1 g1
[mm] [kg]
ERBS015R800W 710 531 4.0
ERBS015R01K2 1020 841 5.6
ERBS018R800W 710 531 4.0
ERBS018R01K2 1020 841 5.6
ERBS018R01K4 1110 931 6.3
105 155.5 48 45 90 114 110 6.2
ERBS027R600W 550 371 3.1
ERBS027R01K2 1020 841 5.6
ERBS027R01K4 1110 931 6.3
ERBS047R400W 400 221 2.3
ERBS047R800W 710 531 4.0

636  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Brake resistors

Design 2

ERBS107

All dimensions in millimetres.

a b c1 c3 c4 c5 d3 e e1 g1
[mm] [mm] [kg]
ERBS015R02K4 1020 841 10.0
ERBS018R01K9 825 105 155.5 48 646 45 180 204 200 6.2 8.7
ERBS018R02K8 1110 931 12.0

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  637

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Brake resistors

Free spaces for standard mounting

ERBS106

x Wiring clearance
y Cable bending radius
All dimensions in millimetres

Free spaces for mounting variant

ERBS105

x Wiring clearance
y Cable bending radius
All dimensions in millimetres

Installation steps
For information on this topic, please see the corresponding mounting instructions.

638  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Power supply unit

8.11.3 Power supply unit

EZV1200-000

e1
ss
tra
-S
nze en
Le erz
ns- 5 A
H a 185
D-3

13
14 D
OK C

L
+
+
--
13
14
O DC

DCutp g)
ok
+ tin
24 ut + ra
V
-
- De
/5 °F
A 40
/+1
°C
60
(>

3 L
C
0°
+7 F
4°
5 … +15
-2
Po 5 3…
-1
we -2
rS DC
up on
ply
24 24 S
V -2
8V AL RIA
L
DC OV ST L
PR DU RO T
AP IN NT MEN
COUIP s
EQKA on
In D
43 cti
pu
1A t LIS
TE
8 tru ins
1.9 C 1 23
52 ins ma
-0 00 e1 on to
.8 -2
A 40
/P V ll ati ting
ha ta c
ins nne

2
se
50
-6 ad co
0
Hz Refore
be

1
L
N

0
ezv1200_02

Elements
Pos. Description
 Input terminals (L, N, #)
 Potentiometer for setting the output voltage (24 ... 28 V)
 LED for function monitoring (DC on)
 Output terminals (+, −, DC o.k., 13, 14)

Overview
Power supply unit Mains voltage Output voltage Output current
VLN [V] VA [V] IA [A]
EZV1200−000 1/N AC 230
5
EZV1200−001 3 AC 400
EZV2400−000 1/N AC 230
DC 24 10
EZV2400−001 3 AC 400
EZV4800−000 1/N AC 230
20
EZV4800−001 3 AC 400

Connection plan
1
+
AC 85 L + DC 22.5
… 264 V N - … 28.5 V
PE -
DC OK
13
14

ezv1200_07

 Potentiometer

At DC OK: 24 V, max. 40 mA

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  639

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Power supply unit

2
+
L1 + DC 22.5
3 AC 320 … 28.5 V
L2 -
… 575 V
L3 -
PE DC OK
13
14

ezv4801_07

 Potentiometer

At DC OK: 24 V, max. 40 mA

Terminal data
Input terminals Output terminals
Rigid terminal 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2
(AWG 24 ... 12) (AWG 24 ... 12)
Flexible terminal with 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2 0.2 ... 2.5 mm2
wire end ferrule with (AWG 24 ... 12) (AWG 24 ... 12)
plastic collar
Stripping length 7 mm 7 mm
Tightening torque 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
(4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in) (4.4 ... 5.3 lb−in)

640  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Power supply unit

Function monitoring
The LED, the active "DC OK" switching output and a potential−free contact provide the
function monitoring.
LED "DC OK" switching Potential−free Output voltage Info
output contact
AN V = 24 V closed Voutput > 0.9 Uinput Device is in operation,
 the output voltage Voutput is
higher than 90 % of the set
voltage Vinput
 the output current is in the
permissible range
BLINKING U = 0 V open Voutput < 0.9 Vinput Device is in operation but
 error at the load
 current consumption is higher
than IBOOST
 output is short−circuited
OFF U=0V open Voutput = 0 Device is out of service because
 no mains voltage is applied
 the circuit−breaker is activated
 the device is defect

 Note!
The device is defective and needs to be replaced if the mains voltage is applied,
a short circuit can be excluded and an output voltage of Voutput = 0 V is
measured.

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  641

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Power supply unit

Standards
Conformity and approval
Conformity
CE 2014/35/EU Low−Voltage Directive
CE 2014/30/EU EMC Directive
UKCA S.I. 2016/1101 The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016
UKCA S.I. 2016/1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016
EAC TP TC 004/2011 On safety of low voltage Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 004/2011) equipment TR CU: Technical Regulation of
Customs Union
EAC TP TC 020/2011 Electromagnetic Eurasian Conformity
(TR CU 020/2011) compatibility of technical TR CU: Technical Regulation of
means Customs Union
Approval
CULUS UL508 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) für USA
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Power Conversion Equipment
(File No. E132659) für Canada

General data/conditions of use

Vibration resistance up to 30 g according tol IEC 68−2−27
Climatic conditions Class 3K3 according to EN 60 721
Degree of pollution 2 according to EN 50 178
Permissible temperature ranges
Storage −40 °C ... +85 °C
Operation −25 °C ... +70 °C Over +60 °C, reduce the output current by 2.5 %/°C
Humidity < 95 % At +25 °C, no condensation
Installation clearance > 50 mm above/below

General electrical data

Degree of protection IP 20
Class of protection I with PE connection
Leakage current to PE < 3.5 mA
MTBF > 500 000 h to IEC 1709 (SN 29 500)

642  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Power supply unit

Input data
Turn−on time < 1 s after applying the mains voltage
Transient surge varistor
voltage protection

Output data
Rated output DC 24 V / ± 1 %
voltage UN
Setting range of DC 22.5 ... 28.5 V
the output voltage
Start of unlimited yes
capacitive loads
Residual ripple / < 100 mVSS with rated values
switching peaks
(20 MHz)
Can be connected to increase redundancy and power
in parallel
Resistance to DC 35 V
return supply

Dimensioning
The control level of the Servo Drives 9400 series is supplied with 24 V DC. To meet the
requirements of typical applications, the 24−V supply has been implemented in a way
allowing internal or external supply. For some components, external supply is absolutely
necessary.
ƒ The additional current requirements for extensions and components added to the
modular structure must be considered.
ƒ A separate 24−V supply is implemented via the connection of the basic device to
operate the control section independently of the power section.
– Communication modules are internally supplied.
– Separate and external supply is absolutely necessary for: safety units.
ƒ The control section of Single Drive controllers can supply itself from the power
section. In this case, there is no external current required for the components and
their modules.
– E.g. for controllers for single drives without communication or without
requirements on their availability (special case)
ƒ Multi Drive controllers and power supply modules always require an external 24−V
supply.

Typical current requirement of the 24−V supply for basic devices and modules or
components (with example):

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  643

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Power supply unit

Current requirement of 24−V supply

I24V Quantity Total
Type GG Connection [mA] [mA]
Power supply modules
E94APNE0104 1 450 1 450
E94APNE0364 3 450
X11
E94APNE1004 4 1400
E94APNE2454 5 1400
Regenerative power supply modules
E94ARNE0134 1 620
X11
E94ARNE0244 3 620
Multi Drive
E94xMxE0024
E94xMxE0034 1 X2 1120 5 5600
E94xMxE0044
E94xMxE0074
2 X2 1220
E94xMxE0094
E94xMxE0134
E94xMxE0174
3 X2 1470
E94xMxE0244
E94xMxE0324
E94xMxE0474
6 X2 660
E94xMxE0594
Single Drive
E94xSxE0024
... 1 ... 3 X2 620
E94xSxE0244
E94xSxE0324
... 6 ... 7 X2 660
E94xSxE1044
E94xSxE1454
... 81 ... 91 X2 660
E94xSxE4604

644  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Accessories (overview) 8
General accessories
Power supply unit

Current requirement of 24−V supply

Type GG Connection [mA] [mA]
Connections
Keypad EZAEBK... X6 50 5 250
Digital outputs X4 70 6 420
Analog outputs X3 10
Memory modules (MMI)
MMxxx E94AYM... − 20 5 100
Feedback
Encoder X8 110
Resolvers X7 20 5 100
Communication (MXI1/MXI2)
CANopen® E94AYCCA X 30
DeviceNet E94AYCDN X225 130
Ethernet 2 port − 60
EtherNet/IP X232 130
POWERLINK E94AYCEP
X210/X250 140
POWERLINK CN E94AYCEC
EtherCAT® X245 130
PROFIBUS E94AYCPM X200 130 5 650
PROFINET E94AYCER X240 140
INTERBUS X205 180
Safety system (MSI)
SM0 E94AYAA − 0 2 0
SM100 E94AYAB 200 3 600
X80
− digital output max. 700 5 x 10 % 350
SM301 E94AYAD 350
X80.2
− clock output 50
− safe digital output X80.1 500
Example values in italics
Result: current requirement of 24−V supply
Sum total [mA]: 8520
Sum total [A]: 8.5

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  645

8 Accessories (overview)
General accessories
Power supply unit

Notes:
ƒ The current requirement refers to the nominal voltage of 24 V. With a lower voltage,
the current requirement increases linearly.
ƒ The values are maximum values. If the real currents are known, this can be
considered accordingly in the table.
ƒ The typical current consumption is approx. 10 ... 20 % lower.
ƒ When selecting the power supply unit, observe that there will flow a substantially
higher current for a short time when switching on the power supply unit. Select
power supply units that can supply this overcurrent and do not switch off.
ƒ The indicated current is a continuous current. If consumers are connected, more
current is required in the starting phase (e.g. device fans). Power supply units
therefore must have dynamic reserves.

 Note!
When several devices are switched on, a very high initial charging current is
required. Power supply units without current limitation can be overloaded
(fault).
Lenze power supply units are equipped with an internal starting current
limitation. When several devices are switched on, no faults will occur.

646  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

9 Anhang

9.1 Ecodesign Directive

REGULATION (EU) 2019/1781

+LJK/LQHVHUYRLQYHUWHU 3URGXFWLQIRUPDWLRQDFFWR5(*8/$7Ζ21(8$11(;Ζ6HFWLRQ

3RZHUORVVHV


 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
 IΖ            
6WDQGE\ORVVHV            
(ɝFLHQF\OHYHO Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ(
0DQXIDFWXUHU /HQ]H6(y+DQV/HQ]H6WUy$HU]HQy*(50$1<


&RPPHUFLDOUHJLVWUDWLRQQXPEHU +DQQRYHU+5%
3URGXFWȇVPRGHOLGHQWLȴHU (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ( (Ƒ6Ƒ(
$SSDUHQWRXWSXWSRZHU N9$           
ΖQGLFDWLYHPRWRUUDWHGSRZHURXWSXW N:           
5DWHGRXWSXWFXUUHQW $           
0D[LPXPRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUH r& 
5DWHGVXSSO\IUHTXHQF\ +] 
5DWHGVXSSO\YROWDJH 9 
6ZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\ N+]  
5DWHGDSSDUHQWRXWSXWSRZHU N9$           

3RZHUORVVHV
 IΖ         
 IΖ         
 IΖ         
 IΖ         

Ecodesign Directive
 IΖ         
 IΖ         
 IΖ         
 IΖ         

Appendix
6WDQGE\ORVVHV         
(ɝFLHQF\OHYHO Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ( Ζ(
0DQXIDFWXUHU /HQ]H6(y+DQV/HQ]H6WUy$HU]HQy*(50$1<
&RPPHUFLDOUHJLVWUDWLRQQXPEHU +DQQRYHU+5%
3URGXFWȇVPRGHOLGHQWLȴHU (Ƒ6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ( (%6Ƒ(
$SSDUHQWRXWSXWSRZHU N9$        
ΖQGLFDWLYHPRWRUUDWHGSRZHURXWSXW N:        
5DWHGRXWSXWFXUUHQW $        
0D[LPXPRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUH r& 
5DWHGVXSSO\IUHTXHQF\ +] 
5DWHGVXSSO\YROWDJH 9 
6ZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\ N+]  
5DWHGDSSDUHQWRXWSXWSRZHU N9$        

Ƒ 3ODFHKROGHUIRUSURGXFWYDULDQWV
2SHUDWLQJSRLQWIΖ I UHODWLYHPRWRUVWDWRUIUHTXHQF\Ζ UHODWLYHWRUTXHSURGXFLQJFXUUHQW
647

3RZHUORVVHV 3RZHUORVVHVDWRSHUDWLQJSRLQWVIΖDQGLQVWDQGE\PRGHUHODWHWRWKHUDWHGDSSDUHQWRXWSXWSRZHU

)RUSRZHUORVVHVIRUDX[LOLDU\HTXLSPHQWDQGRSWLRQVHJIRUGLDJQRVWLFVDVZHOODVIRUDFFHVVRULHVHJPDLQVFKRNHVSOHDVHUHIHUWRIXUWKHUGRFXPHQWVIRUSURMHFWSODQQLQJRQWKHSURGXFWZHESDJH

9
9 Appendix
Index

9.2 Index
9400 Controller
− Features, 10 − application as directed, 20
− System description, 10 − labelling, 20

A D
Accessories, 366 DC−bus connection, Braking in, 363
− Brake resistors, 625 DC−bus operation, 35, 170, 243, 291, 339
− General, 622 − accessories, 341
Address switch, 443 − Conditions, 342
Application, as directed, 20 − DC bus, 339
− DC−voltage level, 339
application as directed, 20
− Disconnecting the EMC filters from PE, 109, 207, 324
Application range, 415, 432, 438, 510, 531, 534, 537
− Multi−axis controllers, 339
Approval, 605, 613, 631 − Power supply module, 339
− Regenerative power supply module, 339
B − Several drives, 339
− Single−axis controllers, 339
Brake resistors, 625
Definition of notes used, 19
Braking operation, in a drive system, 363
Definitions, Terms, 22, 339
Bus cable length, 397
Device features, 31, 167, 241, 289
C Device protection, 30, 97, 148, 200, 222, 272, 285, 320,
332, 371, 413
Cable specification, 403, 408
DeviceNet, 393
Cable specifications, 374
Dimensions, 268, 314, 492, 504, 517, 526, 545, 552,
CAN bus 559, 567, 574, 581, 587, 592, 599, 606, 614, 620, 632,
− setting baud rate, 421 636
− setting node address, 421
CAN cable specification, 408 E
CANopen, 407 Electrical installation, wiring of control connections, 332
CE conformity, 20 Electrical isolation, 451
CIP status displays, 390 EMC filter, Isolate from PE, 109, 207, 324
Clearances, 34, 170, 243, 291 Emergency operation, 42, 174
Commissioning steps, 511 EN 61000−3−2, 39, 172
Communication module, connections, 401, 408 Ethernet, 375
Communication modules, 371 Ethernet cable specifications, 374
Conformity, 20 Ethernet interface, 374
Connection EtherNet/IP, 388
− communication module connections, 401
External voltage supply, 380, 384, 387, 402, 405
− Sub−D plug connector, 9−pin, 408
− Sub−D socket, 9−pin, 401
Connection plan, 323, 461, 468, 475, 482, 487, 493,
F
499, 505, 528, 593, 600, 639 Free space, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586, 591, 598
Connections, 376, 378, 383, 386, 394, 400, 405, 407, Function modules, 413
411, 416, 432, 507
Fuses, operation with rated power, 400 V (UL), 62, 64, 253,
Control terminals, 148, 222, 285 302

648  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Appendix 9
Index

G Motor cable
− capacitance per unit length, 36, 171
General accessories, 622
− requirements, 36, 171
General data, 33, 169, 242, 290, 543, 550, 557, 565,
572, 579, 585, 590, 597, 605, 613, 619, 629, 631, 635 Motor holding brakes, Control module
− E94AZHA0051, 463
− E94AZHB0101, 477
H
− E94AZHN0025, 489
Harmonic currents, limitation according to EN 61000−3−2, − E94AZHN0026, 501
39, 172
− E94AZHX0051, 456
− E94AZHY0025, 484
I − E94AZHY0026, 495
Identification, 375, 377, 382, 385, 388, 393, 399, 404, − E94AZHY0101, 470
407, 410, 415, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 429, 456, 463,
470, 477, 484, 489, 495, 501, 507, 509, 521, 543, 550, Motor power, typical, 46, 49, 50, 55, 56
557, 565, 572, 579, 590, 597, 604, 612, 618, 628, 630, Motor protection, 30
634
Motors, suitable, 20
Increased continuous power, 58
Mounting, 372, 414, 420, 430
increased continuous power, 52
Mounting conditions
Information on nameplate, 410
− Free space, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 591, 598
Installation − free space, 586, 605, 613, 619
− mechanical, 90, 194, 262, 313 − mounting clearances, 502
− mounting, 372, 414, 420, 430 − Mounting place, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 591, 598
− standard device, 217 − mounting place, 586, 605, 613, 619
INTERBUS, 410 − Mounting position, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586,
591, 598
IT system, Disconnecting the EMC filters from PE, 109, 207,
324 − mounting position, 502, 605, 613, 619
Mounting place, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586, 591,
598
L
Labelling, controller, 20 Mounting position, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586,
591, 598
Legal regulations, 20
Mounting positions, 34, 170, 243, 291
Liability, 21

N
M
Nameplate, 429
Mains current
Nameplate data, 375, 377, 382, 385, 388, 393, 399,
− with external mains choke, 46, 49, 50, 55, 56
404, 407, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 429, 456, 463, 470,
− with/without mains choke, 46, 49, 50, 55, 56 477, 484, 489, 495, 501, 507, 521, 543, 550, 557, 565,
Mains filter, 312, 316 572, 579, 590, 597, 604, 612, 618, 628, 630, 634

Manufacturer, 20 Nameplate information, 415, 509

Mechanical installation, 90, 194, 262, 313 Network of several drives, Basic dimensioning, 355
Memory modules, 419 Noise emission, 39, 172
Module status displays, 389 Noise immunity, 39, 172, 242, 290
Monitoring functions, 450 Notes, definition, 19

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  649

9 Appendix
Index

O Residual hazards, 30

Operating conditions, 35, 170, 244, 450, 523, 604, 612,

618, 627 S
− Mounting conditions Safety address, 443
Free space, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 591, 598
Mounting place, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 591, 598 Safety instructions, 24
Mounting position, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586, − definition, 19
591, 598
− layout, 19
− mounting conditions
free space, 586, 605, 613, 619 Safety modules, 428
mounting clearances, 502 Shield mounting, 622
mounting place, 586, 605, 613, 619
mounting position, 502, 605, 613, 619 − Alternative, 624

Operation with emergency voltage supply, 42, 174 Shield mountings

− Accessories, 623
Operation with filters, Disconnecting the EMC filters from
PE, 109, 207, 324 − Assignment, 623
− Clamping range, 624
Operation with increased continuous power, 52, 58
− Scope of supply, 623
Operation with power supply module, Disconnecting the
Signalling, 409
EMC filters from PE, 109, 207, 324
Specification of the transmission cable, 403, 408
Output power, 46, 49, 50, 55, 56
Standard device, installation, 217
output voltage, reduced, 44
Standards, 457, 464, 471, 478, 485, 490, 496, 502, 522,
output voltage , 44 642
Overspeeds, 30 Status displays (CIP), 390
Overview Status displays (module), 389
− Accessories, 366
Status displays at the RJ45 sockets, 392
− devices, 32, 168
Sub−D plug connector, connections, 408

P Sub−D socket, connections, 401

Possible device module combinations, 373 System description, 10

Power regeneration System overview, 10, 448

− Energy characteristics, 301
− Limit range, 300, 301 T
− Power characteristics, 300 Technical data
POWERLINK, 377 − features, 167
− General data, 33, 169, 242, 290, 543, 550, 557, 565,
POWERLINK Slave, 382
572, 579, 585, 590, 597, 605, 613, 619, 629, 631, 635
Product range, description, 10 − Operating conditions, 35, 170, 244, 450, 523, 604, 612,
618, 627
Protection against accidental contact, 451
− standards, 457, 464, 471, 478, 485, 490, 496, 502, 522,
Protection of persons, 30 642
− Electrical isolation, 451 Terminal data, 387, 398, 402, 406, 462, 469, 476, 483,
− Protection against accidental contact, 451 488, 494, 500, 506, 530, 609, 615, 621, 640
Protective insulation, 39, 172 Terms
− controller, 22
R − Definitions, 339
− definitions, 22
Rated data, 417, 457, 465, 471, 479, 485, 491, 497,
− drive, 22
503, 508, 510, 523, 544, 551, 558, 566, 573, 580, 586,
591, 598, 606, 614, 620, 629, 631, 635 Thermal contact, 629, 631, 635
Requirements, motor cable, 36, 171 Transmission cable, specification, 403, 408

650  EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1

 Appendix 9
Index

Type code, 375, 377, 382, 385, 388, 393, 399, 404, 407, W
410, 423, 424, 425, 426, 427, 429, 456, 463, 470, 477,
484, 489, 495, 501, 507, 509, 521, 543, 550, 557, 565, Warranty, 21
572, 579, 590, 597, 604, 612, 618, 628, 630, 634 Waste disposal, 26
Types codes, 415 Wiring of control connections, 332

V
Voltage supply: external, 380, 384, 387, 402, 405

EDS94SPP101 EN 11.1  651

 © 02/2023
F Lenze SE Service Lenze Service GmbH
Postfach 10 13 52 · 31763 Hameln Breslauer Straße 3 · 32699 Extertal
Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 · 31855 Aerzen
GERMANY GERMANY
Hannover HRB 204803
+495154 82−0 0080002446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +495154 82−2800 Ê +49515482−1112
š [email protected] š [email protected]
ü www.lenze.com
EDS94SPP101  .X*q  EN  11.1  TD00
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDS94AYAB
.;2G
L−force Drives
Ä.;2Gä
Translation Manual

9400

E94AYAB − SM100

Safety module

l
, Please read these instructions and the documentation of the standard device before you
start working!
Observe the safety instructions given therein!
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
 Contents i

1 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.4 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1.5 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.6 Hazard and risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.7 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.8 Overview of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2 Safety notes for the installation according to UL or UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3.1 Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.3 Safety module SM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.4 Safety module SM100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.4 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.4.2 Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.1 Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 3
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Introduction

1 Safety engineering

1.1 Basics

1.1.1 Introduction

With increasing automation, protection of persons against hazardous movements is

becoming more important. Functional safety describes the measures needed by means of
electrical or electronic equipment to reduce or remove danger caused by failures.
During normal operation, safety equipment prevents people accessing hazardous areas. In
certain operating modes, e.g. set−up mode, work needs to be carried out in hazardous
areas. In these situations the machine operator must be protected by integrated drive and
control measures.
Drive−based safety provides the conditions in the controls and drives to optimise the safety
functions. Planning and installation expenditure is reduced. In comparison to the use of
standard safety engineering, drive−based safety increases machine functionality and
availability.

1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400

The controllers of the L−force|9400 range can be equipped with a safety module. The
functional range of the safety module types varies in order to optimally implement
different applications.
"Drive−based safety" stands for applied safety functions, which can be used for the
protection of persons working on machines.
The motion functions are continued to be executed by the controller. The safety modules
monitor the safe compliance with the limit values and provide the safe inputs and outputs.
When the limit values are exceeded the safety modules start the control functions
according to EN 60204−1 directly in the controller.
The safety functions are suitable for applications according to IEC 61508 to SIL 3 and meet,
depending on the module, the requirements of Performance Level e (PL e) and control
category 4 according to EN ISO 13849−1.

4 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

Abbreviation Meaning
9400 Lenze servo controller
Cat. Category according to ISO 13849−1 (formerly EN 954−1)
OSSD Output Signal Switching Device, tested signal output
PS PROFIsafe
PWM Pulse width modulation
SD−In Safe input (Safe Digital Input)
SD−Out Safe output (Safe Digital Output)
SIL Safety Integrity Level according to IEC 61508
SM Safety Module
Opto supply Optocoupler supply for the driver control
PELV Protective extra low voltage

SELV Safety extra low voltage

OFF state Signal state of the safety sensor technology when it is released or responding
ON state Signal state of the safety sensor technology in normal operation
PM P/N switching signal paths
PP P/P switching signal paths
GSE File containing device−specific data to establish PROFIBUS communication
GSDML File containing device−specific data to establish PROFINET communication
S−Bus Safety bus

Abbreviation Safety function

SLS Safely limited speed
SOS Safe operating stop
SS1 Safe stop 1
SS2 Safe stop 2
SSM Safe speed monitor
STO Safe torque off
Formerly: safe standstill

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 5
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Important notes

1.1.4 Important notes

The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation to indicate
dangers and important information:

Safety instructions
Structure of safety instructions:

} Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous
situations)

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage.

{ Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger.

} Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.

(
Danger of property damage.
Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Application notes
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

) Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

I Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

, Reference to another documentation

Special safety instructions and application notes for UL and UR

Pictograph and signal word Meaning
Safety or application note for the operation of a UL−approved

J Warnings!
device in UL−approved systems.
Possibly the drive system is not operated in compliance with UL
if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Safety or application note for the operation of a UR−approved

O Warnings!
device in UL−approved systems.
Possibly the drive system is not operated in compliance with UL
if the corresponding measures are not taken.

6 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Safety instructions

1.1.5 Safety instructions

Application as directed
The safety modules SMx (E94AYAx) may only be used together with Lenze drive controllers
of the L−force | 9400 (E94A...) series.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!

Installation/commissioning

} Danger!
Danger to life through improper installation
Improper installation of the safety engineering systems can cause an
uncontrolled starting action of the drives.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries
Protective measures:
ƒ Safety engineering systems may only be installed and commissioned by
qualified and skilled personnel.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control cabinet
must comply with the requirements of ISO 13849−1 and ISO 138492. This
includes i.a.:
– Switches, relays in IP54 enclosure.
– Control cabinet in IP54 enclosure.
– Please refer to ISO 13849−1 and ISO 138492 for all further requirements.
ƒ It is essential to use insulated wire end ferrules for wiring.
ƒ All safety relevant cables outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by means of a cable duct:
– Ensure that there are no short circuits.
– For further measures see ISO 138492.
ƒ If an external force acts upon the drive axes, additional brakes are required.
Please observe that hanging loads are subject to the force of gravity!

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 7
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Safety instructions

} Danger!
If the request for the safety function is cancelled, the drive will restart
automatically.
You must provide external measures which ensure that the drive only restarts
after a confirmation (EN 60204).

} Danger!
When the "safe torque off" (STO) function is used, an "emergency
switching−off" according to EN 60204 is not possible without additional
measures. There is no electrical isolation, no service switch or repair switch
between motor and controller!
Emergency switching−off" requires an electrical isolation, e.g. by a central
mains contactor!

During operation
After the installation is completed, the operator must check the wiring of the safety
function.
The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals. The time intervals to be selected
depend on the application, the entire system and the corresponding risk analysis. The
inspection interval should not exceed one year.

Residual hazards
In case of a short−circuit of two power transistors a residual movement of the motor of up
to 180 °/number of pole pairs may occur! (Example: 4−pole motor Þ residual movement
max. 180 °/2 = 90 °)
This residual movement must be considered in the risk analysis, e.g. safe torque off for
main spindle drives.

8 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Hazard and risk analysis

1.1.6 Hazard and risk analysis

This documentation can only accentuate the need for a hazard analysis. The user of
drive−based safety must concentrate on dealing with the standards and legal position:
Before putting a machine into circulation, the manufacturer of the machinemust carry out
a hazard analysis according to 2006/42/EC: Machinery Directive [UKCA: S.I. 2008/1597 −
The Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008] to find out the hazards related to the
application of the machine. To achieve a level of safety as high as possible the Machinery
Directive contains three principles:
ƒ Removing or minimising the hazards by the construction itself.
ƒ Taking the protective measures required against hazards that cannot be removed.
ƒ Documentation of the existing residual risks and training of the user regarding
these risks.
The execution of the hazard analysis is specified in EN 1050, guidelines for risk assessment.
The result of the hazard analysis determines the categoryof safety−based control modes
according to EN ISO 13849−1 which thesafety−oriented parts of the machine control must
comply with.

1.1.7 Standards

Safety regulations are confirmed by laws and other governmental guidelines and
measures and the prevailing opinion among experts, e.g. by technical regulations.
The regulations and rules to be applied must be observed in accordance with the
application.

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 9
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Overview of sensors

1.1.8 Overview of sensors

Passive sensors
Passive sensors are two−channel switching elements with contacts. The connecting cables
and the sensor function must be monitored.
The contacts must switch simultaneously (equivalently). Nevertheless, safety functions
will be activated as soon as at least one channel is switched.
The switches must be wired according to the closed−circuit principle.
Examples of passive sensors:
ƒ Door contact switch
ƒ Emergency−off control units

Active sensors
Active sensors are units with two−channel semiconductor outputs (OSSD outputs).
Drive−based safety integrated in this device series allows for test pulses < 1 ms to monitor
the outputs and cables.
PN−switching sensors switch the positive and negative cable or signal and earth cable of
a sensor signal.
The outputs must switch simultaneously. Nevertheless, safety functions will be activated
as soon as at least one channel is switched.
Examples of active sensors:
ƒ Lightgrid
ƒ Laser scanner
ƒ Control

10 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Safety notes for the installation according to UL or UR

1.2 Safety notes for the installation according to UL or UR

Original − English

J Warnings!
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.
ƒ External fuse for 24 Vdc supply voltage. Rated 4 A DC fuse UL248−14.

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 11
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Slot

1.3 Device modules

1.3.1 Slot

The slot for the safety modules is marked in the documentation with M4. It is the lowest
slot in the controller (see overview in the documentation of the controller).

1.3.1.1 Mounting

E94AYAX001

1.3.1.2 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

1.3.1.3 Module exchange

Every module exchange is detected by the standard device and documented in a logbook.
When a module is replaced by the same type, no restrictions arise. Depending on the
module type it may be necessary to take further measures (e.g. address setting, safe
parameter setting, ...).
When the module is replaced by a different type, the drive is inhibited by the controller. The
inhibit can only be deactivated when the parameter setting of the required safety module
complies with the plugged safety module.

12 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Function mode of the safety modules

1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules

C00214
The code C00214 must comply with the plug−in safety module type so that the controller
is able to operate.

Disconnecting paths
The transmission of the pulse width modulation is safely (dis−)connected by the safety
module. Hence the drivers do not create a rotating field. The motor is safely switched to
torqueless operation (STO).

Xx
SMx

µC

3x
M

PWM
C P 3x

SSP94SM320

Fig. 1−1 Disconnecting paths of the safety modules

SMx Safety module
xx Input / output terminal
C Control section
mC Microcontroller
PWM Pulse width modulation
P Power section
M Motor

Safety status
When the controller is switched off by the safety module, the controller switches to the
"Safe torque off"device state.
ƒ "Controller in STO state" is entered into the logbook (0x00750003).
ƒ "Safe torque off active" is displayed in C00183.

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 13
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safety module SM0

1.3.3 Safety module SM0

1.3.3.1 Overview
The type designation of the module is E94AYAA.

Function
ƒ There are no safety functions available.
ƒ This module is required to operate the controller without safetyfunctions.

) Note!
If safety functions are required, replace the SM0 module by a module with
safety functions (e.g. SM100, SM301).

) Note!
After the module has been exchanged, the controller does not work if the
module type plugged−in does not comply with the stored type (C00214).

14 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safety module SM100

1.3.4 Safety module SM100

1.3.4.1 Overview
The type designation of the safety module is E94AYAB.

Function
ƒ Safe torque off
(up to now: Safe standstill, protection against unexpected start−up)

} Danger!
If the request for the safety function is cancelled, the drive will restart
automatically.
You must provide external measures which ensure that the drive only restarts
after a confirmation (EN 60204).

SM 100

-
SIA
~
-
SIB
-
GI
PWM

24O

DO1 µC
GO

SSP94S1010

Fig. 1−2 Function overview SM100

SM100 Safety module
SIA, SIB, GI Two−channel sensor signal connections, supply through safely separated power
supply unit (SELV/PELV)
(old labelling up to HW version VB: SI1, SI2, GI)
24O, DO1, GO Non−safe feedback connections, supply through safely separated power supply
unit (SELV/PELV)
mC Microcontroller
PWM Pulse width modulation

1.3.4.2 Safety category

The functions of the SM100 safety module for the Servo Drives 9400 controllers meet the
requirements of the following standards:
ƒ Category 4 and Performance Level e (PL e) according to ISO 13849−1 (formerly
EN 954−1)
– In order to comply with category 4/PL e, the external wiring and cable monitoring
must also meet the requirements of category 4/PL e.
– Ensure that short circuits cannot occur in the external wiring.
ƒ SIL 3 according to IEC 61508
– The SM100 safety module does not contribute to the probability of failure on
demand (PFD) and probability of failure per hour (PFH) of IEC 61508.

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 15
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safety module SM100

1.3.4.3 Elements of the module

SSP94SM112

Fig. 1−3 Module view

Displays
Pos. Colour Condition Description
On Controller enabled
EN Yellow
Off Non−safe display "Safe pulse inhibit"
The module is not accepted by the standard device (see notes
DE Red On
given in the documentation for the standard device).
Tab. 1−1 LED display SM 100

1.3.4.4 Technical data

24 V
The inputs and outputs are isolated and designed for a low−voltage supply through a safely
separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV) of 24 V DC. P/N switching input signals and test
pulses £ 1 ms are permissible.
Output signals of active sensors are directly wired to the X80 terminal.
Passive Sensors are wired to the X80 terminal via a switching device. The switching device
must comply with the required control category of the application.
There is no monitoring for short circuits.

16 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safety module SM100

Signals
X80 Marking Description Electrical data
SIA Input first shutdown path SIA: Ityp = 160 mA
GI GND potential for SIA/SIB LOW: −3 ... 5 V,
HIGH: 15 ... 30 V,
SIB Input second shutdown path SIB: Ityp = 28 mA

Supply through safely

separated power supply unit
(SELV/PELV)
GO GND potential feedback 24 V, max. 0.7 A,
short−circuit−proof,
24O 24 V supply feedback LOW−active,
DO1 Non−safe signalling output: "Safe pulse Supply through safely
inhibit" separated power supply unit
SSP9400X80 (SELV/PELV)

Terminal data
Conductor cross−section Tightening torque
[mm2] [AWG] [Nm] [lb−in]
Rigid 0.2 ... 2.5 24 ... 12
Wire end ferrule,
0.2 ... 1.5 24 ... 16
insulated Spring terminal
Twin wire end
0.5 ... 1.0 20 ... 18
ferrule

Stripping length / contact length: 10 mm

Information for the exchange of modules of different hardware versions

up to HW: VB from HW: VC Comment
SI1 SIA
GI GI
SI2 SIB The exchange of the spring terminal
GO GO is required!
24O 24O
DO1 DO1

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 17
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safety module SM100

Detail features of the inputs and outputs of the SM100

Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
SIA, SIB Low signal V −3 0 5
High signal V 15 24 30
Input capacitance at switch−off nF 4
Input delay (tolerated test pulse) ms 1
Switch−off time (depending on the standard device) ms 2.5 4
Running time ms 3
SIA Input current mA 160 170
Input capacitance at switch−on, reduced mF 20
SIB Input current mA 28 35
Input capacitance at switch−on, reduced mF 5
GI Ground for SIA/SIB
24O, GO Supply voltage through safely separated power supply
V 18 24 30
unit (SELV/PELV)
DO Low signal V 0 0.8
High signal V 17 24 29
24O, GO, DO Output current A 0.7

Truth table
Inputs Outputs Description Enable
SIA SIB DO1 through SM100
0 0 1 "Safe torque off" is activated 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 Drive is active 1
Tab. 1−2 Truth table SM100

1.3.4.5 Commissioning
ƒ Settings in or at the module are not required.
ƒ Required settings in the basic device:
– C00214, type of safety module
ƒ During commissioning and after the replacement of a module it is vital to check the
safety function.

18 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Safety engineering 1
Acceptance
Description

1.4 Acceptance

1.4.1 Description

The machine manufacturer must check and prove the operability of the safety functions
used.

Inspector
The machine manufacturer must authorise a person with expertise and knowledge of the
safety functions to carry out the test.

Protocol
The test result of every safety function must be documented and signed.

) Note!
If parameters of the safety function are changed, the test must be repeated
and recorded in the test report.

Scope
A complete test comprises the following:
ƒ Documentation of the plant including the safety functions.
– Plant description and overview map
– Description of the safety devices
– Safety functions used
ƒ Functional test of the safety functions used
ƒ Preparing the test report
– Documenting the functional test
– Controlling the parameters
– Signing
ƒ Preparing the appendix with test records
– Protocols from the plant
– External recording

1.4.2 Periodic inspections

The correct sequence of the safety−oriented functions must be checked in periodic

inspections. The risk analysis or applicable regulations determine the time distances
between the tests. The inspection interval should not exceed one year.

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 19
2 Appendix
Declarations of conformity

2 Appendix

2.1 Declarations of conformity

20 l EDS94AYAB EN 2.2
 Appendix 2
Declarations of conformity

EDS94AYAB EN 2.2 l 21
 © 04/2022
F Lenze SE Service Lenze Service GmbH
Postfach 10 13 52 · 31763 Hameln Breslauer Straße 3 · 32699 Extertal
Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 · 31855 Aerzen
GERMANY GERMANY
Hannover HRB 204803
( +495154 82−0 ( 0080002446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +495154 82−2800 Ê +49515482−1112
š [email protected] š [email protected]
ü www.lenze.com
EDS94AYAB § .;2G § EN § 2.2 § TD00
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDS94AYAE
.G)!
L−force Drives
Ä.G)!ä
Translation Manual

9400

E94AYAE − SM301

Safety module

l
, Please read these instructions and the documentation of the standard device before you
start working!
Observe the safety instructions given therein!
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
 Contents i

1 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1.4 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.5 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1.6 Hazard and risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.7 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.8 Overview of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL or UR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.1 Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.3 SM301 safety module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.4 Safe inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.5 Safe output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.3.6 Further inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.3.7 Safe speed measurement and position detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.4 Safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4.2 Integration into the application of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.4.3 Safe torque off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.4.4 Safe stop 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.4.5 Safe stop 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.4.6 Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.4.7 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.4.8 Safe maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.4.9 Safely limited speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.4.10 Safe direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1.4.11 Safe operation mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.4.12 Safe enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.4.13 Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1.5 Safety address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.6 Safe bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.6.1 PROFIsafe connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1.7 Safe parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.7.1 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.7.2 Parameter sets and axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 3
i Contents

1.8 Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

1.8.1 Error states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.8.2 Logbook function in the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.8.3 Logbook function in the SM301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
1.9 Response times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.9.1 Response times of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.9.2 Response time of the safe output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.9.3 Response times of the safety bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.9.4 Response time of encoder monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.10 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.10.2 Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.11 Module internal codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.12 Module error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.1 Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

4 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Introduction

1 Safety engineering

1.1 Basics

1.1.1 Introduction

With increasing automation, protection of persons against hazardous movements is

becoming more important. Functional safety describes the measures needed by means of
electrical or electronic equipment to reduce or remove danger caused by failures.
During normal operation, safety equipment prevents people accessing hazardous areas. In
certain operating modes, e.g. set−up mode, work needs to be carried out in hazardous
areas. In these situations the machine operator must be protected by integrated drive and
control measures.
Drive−based safety provides the conditions in the controls and drives to optimise the safety
functions. Planning and installation expenditure is reduced. In comparison to the use of
standard safety engineering, drive−based safety increases machine functionality and
availability.

1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400

The controllers of the L−force|9400 range can be equipped with a safety module. The
functional range of the safety module types varies in order to optimally implement
different applications.
"Drive−based safety" stands for applied safety functions, which can be used for the
protection of persons working on machines.
The motion functions are continued to be executed by the controller. The safety modules
monitor the safe compliance with the limit values and provide the safe inputs and outputs.
When the limit values are exceeded the safety modules start the control functions
according to EN 60204−1 directly in the controller.
The safety functions are suitable for applications according to IEC 61508 to SIL 3 and meet,
depending on the module, the requirements of Performance Level e (PL e) and control
category 4 according to EN ISO 13849−1.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 5
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

Abbreviation Meaning
9400 Lenze servo controller
Cat. Category according to EN ISO 13849−1 (formerly EN 954−1)
OSSD Output Signal Switching Device, tested signal output
PS PROFIsafe
PWM Pulse width modulation
SD−In Safe input (Safe Digital Input)
SD−Out Safe output (Safe Digital Output)
SIL Safety Integrity Level according to IEC 61508
SM Safety module
Optocoupler Optocoupler supply for the driver control
supply
PELV Protective extra low voltage
SELV Safety extra low voltage
OFF state Signal status of the safety sensor technology when it is released or responding
ON state Signal status of the safety sensor technology in normal operation
PM PN−switched signal paths
PP PP−switched signal paths
GSE File containing device−specific data to establish PROFIBUS communication
GSDML File containing device−specific data to establish PROFINET communication
S−Bus Safety bus

Abbreviation Safety function

SLS Safely limited speed
SLI Safely limited increment
SOS Safe operating stop
SS1 Safe stop 1
SS2 Safe stop 2
SSM Safe speed monitor
STO Safe torque off
Formerly: safe standstill
SMS Safe maximum speed
SDI Safe direction
SSE Safe stop emergency
ES Safe enable switch
OMS Operation mode selector
AIE Error acknowledgement (Acknowledge In Error)
AIS Restart acknowledgement (Acknowledge In Stop)

6 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Important notes

1.1.4 Important notes

The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation to indicate
dangers and important information:

Safety instructions
Structure of safety instructions:

} Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous
situations)

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage.

{ Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger.

} Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.

(
Danger of property damage.
Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Application notes
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

) Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

I Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

, Reference to another documentation

Special safety instructions and application notes

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

J Warnings! Safety note or application note for the operation according to

UL or CSA requirements.

O
The measures are required to meet the requirements according
Warnings! to UL or CSA.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 7
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Safety instructions

1.1.5 Safety instructions

Application as directed
The safety modules SMx (E94AYAx) may only be used together with Lenze drive controllers
of the L−force | 9400 (E94A...) series.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!

Installation/commissioning

} Danger!
Danger to life through improper installation
Improper installation of safety engineering systems can cause an uncontrolled
starting action of the drives.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries
Protective measures:
ƒ Safety engineering systems may only be installed and commissioned by
qualified and skilled personnel.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control
cabinetmust comply with the requirements of EN ISO 13849−1 and EN ISO
138492. Thisincludes i.a.:
– Switches, relays with at least IP54 enclosure.
– Control cabinet with at least IP54 enclosure.
– Please refer to EN ISO 13849−1 and EN ISO 138492 for all further
requirements.
ƒ It is essential to use insulated wire end ferrules for wiring.
ƒ All safety relevant cables outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by means of a cable duct:
– Ensure that no short circuits can occur.
– For further measures see EN ISO 138492.
ƒ If an external force acts upon the drive axes, additional brakes are required.
Please observe that hanging loads are subject to the force of gravity!

8 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Safety instructions

} Danger!
When the request for the safety function is deactivated, the drive can restart
automatically. The behaviour can be set via the parameter "Restart behaviour"
(C15300/1/2).
In the case of an automatic restart, you must provide external measures which
ensure that the drive only restarts after an acknowledgement (EN 60204).

} Danger!
When the "safe torque off" (STO) function is used, an "emergency
switching−off" according to EN 60204 is not possible without additional
measures. There is no electrical isolation, no service switch or repair switch
between motor and controller!
Emergency switching−off" requires an electrical isolation, e.g. by a central
mains contactor!

During operation
After the installation is completed, the operator must check the wiring of the safety
function.
The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals. The time intervals to be selected
depend on the application, the entire system and the corresponding risk analysis. The
inspection interval should not exceed one year.

Residual hazards
In case of a short−circuit of two power transistors a residual movement of the motor of up
to 180 °/number of pole pairs may occur! (Example: 4−pole motor Þ residual movement
max. 180 °/2 = 90 °)
This residual movement must be considered in the risk analysis, e.g. safe torque off for
main spindle drives.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 9
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Hazard and risk analysis

1.1.6 Hazard and risk analysis

This documentation can only accentuate the need for hazard analysis. The user of the
integrated safety system must read up on standards and the legal situation:
Before the launch of a machine, the manufacturer of the machine must conduct a hazard
analysis according to 2006/42/EC: Machinery Directive [UKCA: S.I. 2008/1597 − The Supply
of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008] to determine the hazards associated with the
application of the machine. The Machinery Directive refers to three basic principles for the
highest possible level of safety:
ƒ Hazard elimination / minimisation by the construction itself.
ƒ Required protective measures must be taken against hazards which cannot be
eliminated.
ƒ Existing residual hazards must be documented and the user must be informed of
them.
Detailed information on the hazard analysis procedure is provided in the
DIN EN ISO 12100:2013−08 − ""Safety of machinery − General principles for design, risk
assessment and risk reduction". The results of the hazard analysis determine the category
for safety−related control systems according to EN ISO 13849−1. Safety−oriented parts of
the machine control must be compliant.

1.1.7 Standards

Safety regulations are confirmed by laws and other governmental guidelines and
measures and the prevailing opinion among experts, e.g. by technical regulations.
The regulations and rules to be applied must be observed in accordance with the
application.

10 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Overview of sensors

1.1.8 Overview of sensors

Passive sensors
Passive sensors are two−channel switching elements with contacts. The connecting cables
and the sensor function must be monitored.
The contacts must switch simultaneously (equivalently). Nevertheless, safety functions
will be activated as soon as at least one channel is switched.
The switches must be wired according to the closed−circuit principle.
Examples of passive sensors:
ƒ Door contact switch
ƒ Emergency stop control units

Active sensors
Active sensors are units with 2−channel semiconductor outputs (OSSD outputs). With the
integrated safety system of this device series, test pulses < 1 ms for monitoring the
outputs and cables are permissible. The maximally permissible connection capacity of the
outputs is to be observed. Active sensors are wired directly to the terminals of the
integrated safety system. Monitoring for cross or short circuits must be carried out by the
active sensor.
P/M−switching sensors switch the positive and negative cable or the signal and ground
wire of a sensor signal.
The outputs must switch simultaneously (equivalently). Nevertheless, safety functions
will be activated as soon as at least one channel is switched. Active triggering of only one
channel indicates faulty sensors or impermissible wiring.
Examples of active sensors:
ƒ Lightgrid
ƒ Laser scanner
ƒ Control systems

Sensor inputs
For unused sensor inputs, "Input deactivated" must be parameterised.
Connected deactivated sensors can create the false impression of safety technology being
provided. For this reason, a deactivation of sensors by parameter setting only is not
permissible and not possible. It is monitored that no sensor signal is pending.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 11
1 Safety engineering
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL or UR

1.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL or UR

Original − English

J Warnings!
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.
ƒ External fuse for 24 Vdc supply voltage. Rated 4 A DC fuse UL248−14.

12 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Slot

1.3 Device modules

1.3.1 Slot

The slot for the safety modules is marked in the documentation with M4. It is the lowest
slot in the controller (see overview in the documentation of the controller).

1.3.1.1 Mounting

E94AYAX001

1.3.1.2 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 13
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Slot

1.3.1.3 Module exchange

( Stop!
Before mounting/dismounting, switch off the supply voltage to prevent
electronic modules from damage.
Every module exchange is detected by the standard device and documented in a logbook.
When a module is replaced by the same type, no restrictions arise. Depending on the
module type it may be necessary to take further measures (e.g. address setting, safe
parameter setting, ...).
When the module is replaced by a different type, the drive is inhibited by the controller. The
inhibit can only be deactivated when the parameter setting of the required safety module
complies with the plugged safety module.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C00214 Required safety module UNSIGNED_8 24361d = 5F29h

Setting of the expected safety module

l If a safety module deviating from this setting is detected, an error (fault) is caused. The error can only be
removed by mains switching.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
1 SM0
2 SM100
4 SM300
5 SM301
þ Read access þ Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer o COM o MOT

) Note!
In case you exchange the module, the address switch 0 must be set identically
to the module to be replaced. Only then the corresponding safe parameter set
can be transferred to the module.

14 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Function mode of the safety modules

1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules

C00214
The setting in C00214 must comply with the plug−in safety module type so that the
controller is able to operate.

Disconnecting paths
The transmission of the pulse width modulation is safely disconnected by the safety
module. Hence the drivers do not create a rotating field. The motor is safely switched to
torqueless operation (STO).

Xx
SMx

µC

3x
M

PWM
C P 3x

SSP94SM320

Fig. 1−1 Disconnecting paths of the safety modules

SMx Safety module
xx Input / output terminal
C Control section
mC Microcontroller
PWM Pulse width modulation
P Power section
M Motor

Safety status
When the controller is switched off by the safety module, the controller switches to the
"Safe torque off"device state.
ƒ "Controller in STO state" is entered into the logbook (0x00750003).
ƒ "Safe torque off active" is displayed in C00183.

Fail−safe status

) Note!
If internal errors of the safety modules are detected, the motor is safely
switched to torque−free operation (fail−safe status).

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 15
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3 SM301 safety module

Validity information
These instructions are valid for
SM301 safety module
Type HW SW
E94AYAE from VA from 01.00

Identification

L
Type

'

‚ƒ„

E94YCEI003C E94AYXX001

 ‚ ƒ „

E94 A Y A x xx xx nn

Product series

Version

Module identification: Device module

Module type: Safety module

Design
A = SM0
B = SM100
E = SM301

Hardware version

Software version (SM301 only)

Serial number

16 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

Application range
The use of this module is permissible with standard devices of the 9400 product series from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AxHExxxx VA 01.49
E94AxPExxxx 2A 02.xx

Safe position and speed detection with a resolver selected as the motor encoder and an
additional position encoder is permissible with SM301 V1.3 and standard devices of the
9400 product series from nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AxHExxxx xx 07.xx
E94AxPExxxx 2A 02.xx

Safe position and speed detection with a resolver selected as the motor encoder is
permissible with SM301 V1.4 and standard devices of the 9400 product series from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AxHExxxx xx 08.xx
E94AxPExxxx 2A 02.xx

The use of this module is permissible with the PROFIBUS communication module from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AYCPM VB 01.10

This module as of SM301 V1.1 may be used in conjunction with the PROFINET
communication module with the following nameplate data
Type HW SW
E94AYCER VC 00.70

) Note!
A safety bus system (PROFIsafe) can only be operated via the upper module
slot (MXI1) of the Servo Drive 9400.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 17
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3.1 Overview
Functions from SM301 V1.0 onwards
ƒ Safe torque off (STO)
(formerly: safe standstill, protection against unexpected start−up)
ƒ Safe stop 1 (SS1)
ƒ Safe stop 2 (SS2) − see SOS
ƒ Safe stop emergency (SSE)
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS) − in accordance with EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with
speed monitoring
ƒ Safe maximum speed (SMS)
ƒ Safely limited speed 1 (SLS1)
ƒ Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
ƒ Safe enable switch (ES)
ƒ Safe speed monitor (SSM)
ƒ Safe monitor (output)
ƒ Connection of safety sensors
ƒ Safe parameterisation
ƒ Safety bus connection (PROFIsafe V1)

Additional functions as of SM301 V1.1

ƒ Safely limited speed 2 (SLS2)
ƒ Safely limited speed 3 (SLS3)
ƒ Safely limited speed 4 (SLS4)
ƒ Safe cascading (CAS) via SD−In4/SD−Out1
ƒ Safety bus connection (PROFIsafe V2)
Additional functions from SM301 V1.2
ƒ Parameterisable response time of encoder monitoring
Additional functions from SM301 V1.3
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS) − compliant with EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with
position monitoring
ƒ Safe direction (SDI)
ƒ Safe speed measurement and position detection with resolver using a motor
encoder and an additional position encoder (two−encoder−concept)

Additional functions as of SM301 V1.4

ƒ Safely limited increment (SLI)
ƒ Safely monitored brake ramp for SS1/SS2
ƒ Safe speed and position detection with resolver selected as the motor encoder

18 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

Motor−encoder combinations
Drive systems with Servo Drives 9400 and safety module SM301 provide speed−dependent
safety functions for safe speed monitoring and/or safe relative−position monitoring.
Observe permissible motor−encoder combinations during configuration.
ƒ Possible speed−dependent safety functions with safety module SM301:
– Safe stop 1 (SS1)
– Safe operational stop (SOS)
– Safely limited speed (SLS)
– Safe maximum speed (SMS)
– Safe direction (SDI)
– Safe speed monitor (SSM)
– Safely limited increment (SLI)
ƒ Permissible motor−encoder combinations for these functions:
Synchronous Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM301
servo motors
Type Product key
Sin/cos absolute value, single−turn AS1024−8V−K2
Single−encoder PL d / SIL 2
MCS 06 ... 19 Sin/cos absolute value, multi−turn AM1024−8V−K2
concept
MDXKS 56 / 71 Resolver RV03 PL e / SIL 3
Two−encoder concept Up to PL e / SIL 3

Asynchronous Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM301

servo motors
Type Product key
Sin/cos incremental IG1024−5V−V3 Single−encoder
MCA 10 ... 26 PL e / SIL 3
Resolver RV03 concept
MQA 20 ... 26
Two−encoder concept Up to PL e / SIL 3

Three−phase Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM301

asynchronous
motors Type Product key
MDxMA063−xx ...
MDxMA225−xx IG2048−5V−V3 Single−encoder PL e / SIL 3
Sin/cos incremental
MHxMA080−xx ... concept
MHxMA225−xx IG2048−5V−V2 PL d / SIL 2
MFxMA063−xx ... Two−encoder
MFxMA132−xx Up to PL e / SIL 3
concept

A "two−encoder concept" includes e.g. a resolver as motor encoder and, at the same time,
an absolute value encoder (sin/cos), an incremental encoder (TTL), or digital encoder
(SSI/bus) as position encoder on the machine.
In the case of the "2−encoder concept", the achievable risk mitigation (PL/SIL) depends on
the suitability of the encoders used.

) Note!
If feedback systems for safety functions are used, the manufacturer’s
documentation must be observed!

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 19
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

Compatibility
Compatibility of SM301/SM300
The SM301 safety module is compatible with the SM300. The controller needs to be
adapted since the safe parameter set is required. Observe the following:
ƒ The GSE file can be used.
ƒ The PROFIsafe bits that are not used with SM300 must be suppressed in the SM301,
since unset bits would activate safety functions.
ƒ Speed−dependent functions cannot be used.

Compatibility of different SM301 versions

Replacement of an SM301 by an SM301 with a higher firmware version (SW):
ƒ Every SM301 can be used with a safe parameter set of an elder firmware version
without any changes.
ƒ The safe parameter set including CRC in the memory module of the drive is not
changed when the parameter set from the memory module is accepted.
ƒ The CE Declaration of Conformity remains valid.
ƒ The replacement of the safety module by an equivalent module is ensured. Thus,
there is no need for spare part stockage of SM301 safety modules with elder
firmware versions.
ƒ Safe parameter sets of the "SM301 safety module" component can be loaded into
an SM301 with a higher firmware version without any changes.
– Extended functionalities of the newer firmware version cannot be selected and
executed.
The safe parameter set of an SM301 with a newer firmware version cannot be loaded into
an SM301 with an elder firmware version.

1.3.3.2 Safety category

The implemented safety functions meet the requirements of the standards:
ƒ Control category 3 according to EN ISO 13849−1
In order to comply with category 3, the external wiring and cable monitoring must also
meet the requirements of category 3.
ƒ Performance Level (PL) "e" according to EN ISO 13849−1

20 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3.3 Elements of the module

SSP94SM321

Fig. 1−2 Module view

Pos. Description
0 Safety address switch (in the left part of the housing)
S82 Module switch for parameter set adoption from the memory module
X82.1
X82.2
Plug−in terminal strips for input and output signals
X82.3
X82.4

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 21
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

Displays
Pos. Colour State Description
On Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault.
Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault. Internal
Blinking
communication to the standard device is not possible.
MS Green Drive−based safety is in service status.
(Module State) Flashing
For exiting, parameterise the drive−based safety.
Drive−based safety is not initialised.
Off
Acknowledgement is not possible.
EN On Controller enabled
Yellow
(Enable) Off Non−safe display "STO"
On System error

ME Blinking Trouble
Red
(Module Error) Flashing Warning
Off Error−free operation
Request of an acknowledgement for the restart or the
On
parameter set adoption
AS Yellow Blinking SS1/STO active
(Acknowledge Stop)
Flashing SS2/SOS active
Off No stop function active
Safety bus error:
On l Communication is not possible.
BE l Acknowledgement is possible.
Red
(Bus Error)
Blinking Safety bus error: no valid configuration.
Off Safety bus: error−free operation.
Drive−based safety is not accepted by the standard device
On
DE (see notes in the instructions for the standard device).
Red
(Drive Error) Drive−based safety is correctly recognised by the standard
Off
device.
Blinking: on/off every 0.5 s Flashing: on/off every 0.1/0.9 s

22 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

Terminal assignment

} Danger!
Danger to life through improper installation
Improper installation of the safety engineering systems can cause
anuncontrolled starting action of the drives.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries
Protective measures:
Total cable length between X82 and its connected components (e.g. sensors,
devices, ...) > 3 m:
ƒ Up to HW version 1A, a shielded laying system must be used for the cable
between X82 and its connected components:
– The shield must at least cover the shield connection at the installation
backplane.
– The shield should also cover the connected component if possible.
ƒ From HW version 1A onwards, unshielded wiring is permissible.
Total cable length between X82 and its connected components (e.g. sensors,
devices, ...) < 3 m:
ƒ Unshielded wiring is permissible.

X82.1 Labelling Description

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

GO GND SD−Out1
O1B Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel B
O1A Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel A

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

X82.2 Labelling Description

− GND external supply
+ +24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
GIR
This part of the terminal strip is reserved.
RI1
GO GND 24O
24O +24 V external supply for the safe monitor SD−Out1 (SELV/PELV)
AIE Error acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Error")
CLA Clock output for passive sensors, channel A (Clock A)
CLB Clock output for passive sensors, channel B (Clock B)

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 23
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

X82.3 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI2 GND SD−In2
I2B Sensor input SD−In2, channel B
I2A Sensor input SD−In2, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI1 GND SD−In1
I1B Sensor input SD−In1, channel B
I1A Sensor input SD−In1, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.4/AIS)

X82.4 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI4 GND SD−In4
I4B Sensor input SD−In4, channel B
I4A Sensor input SD−In4, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI3 GND SD−In3
I3B Sensor input SD−In3, channel B
I3A Sensor input SD−In3, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.3/AIS)

Cable cross−sections and tightening torques

Type [mm2] [Nm] AWG [lb−in]
Wire end ferrule,
0.25 ... 0.75 24 ... 18
insulated Spring terminal Spring terminal
Rigid 0.14 ... 1.5 26 ... 16
Stripping length or contact length: 9 mm

Insulated wire end ferrules according to DIN 46228, part 4, 0.5 mm2 or 0.75 mm2 − length
L1 = 10 mm can be used.

) Note!
Provide for a sufficient strain relief, so that the terminals are not pulled from
the plug connectors, in particular when you use rigid cables.

24 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3.4 Technical data

24 V supply
The module and the safe output must be supplied with 24 V from safely separated power
supply units. If electrical isolation is required, separate voltage supply lines must be used.
Detailed features of the 24−V supply
Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
+, − Supply voltage of the module via a safely separated [V] 19,2 24 30
power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 350
24O, GO Supply voltage of the safe output via a safely [V] 18 24 30
separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 1100

If the voltage of the SELV/PELV power supply unit can exceed 30 V in the event of an error,
provide for an external fuse (¶ 1.2).

Inputs and output

The inputs and the output are isolated and designed for a low−voltage supply of 24 V DC.
The digital inputs are protected against polarity reversal.
Detailed features of the safe inputs and the safe output
Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
I1A, I1B PLC input, IEC−61131−2, 24 V, type 1
I2A, I2B Low signal input voltage V −3 0 5
I3A, I3B
I4A, I4B Input current at low signal mA 15
AIE, AIS High signal input voltage V 15 24 30
Input current at high signal mA 2 15
Input capacitance nF 3.5
Repetition rate of the test pulses ms 50
AIE, AIS Input delay (operating time) s 0.3 10
CLA, CLB PLC output, IEC−61131−2, 24 V DC, 50 mA
Low signal output voltage V 0 0.8
High signal output voltage V 17 24 30
Output current mA 60
Cable capacity nF 100
Cable resistance of a passive sensor W 200
O1A, O1B PLC output, IEC−61131−2, 24 V DC
Low signal output voltage V 0 0.8
High signal output voltage V 17 24 30
Output current mA 500
Cable capacity nF 100
Cable resistance W 200
Tab. 1−1 Technical data

The chapter "Response times" must be observed as well (¶ 1.9).

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 25
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3.5 Example circuit

SM301
E94AYAE
X82.1 X82.2
24 V ext.
-

GO

O1B GO

O1A 24O
‚
AIE

CLA

CLB

GCL GCL
S4
GI2 GI4

I2B I4B

I2A I4A

S2 GCL GCL
S3
GI1 GI3

I1B I3B

I1A I3A

S1 K AIS AIS

X82.3 X82.4
SSP94SM360

Fig. 1−3 Wiring example

E94AYAE SM301 safety module
S1
passive sensor with channel A and B
S2
S3 higher−level safety control (active sensor)
S4 lightgrid (active sensor)
24 V ext. 24−V voltage supply of the module (SELV/PELV)
 24−V voltage supply of the output (SELV/PELV)
‚ safe output to higher−level safety control
K to AIS of the next module

26 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM301 safety module

1.3.3.6 Commissioning
ƒ For commissioning and safe parameter setting, the Lenze »Engineer« PC
software from version 1.4 must be used.
If you select the safety module in the Project view, various tabs are available in the
Operating range via which the safety module can be parameterised. In all other
program parts the parameters of the safety module can only be read. Thus, the write
access of these parameters (codes) is marked with }.
ƒ Settings in or at the module:
– Safety address
– Safe parameter setting of the functions to be used
ƒ Required settings in the standard device:
– C00214, type of safety module
– Implementation of the SM301 into the drive application by evaluating the control
information and status information.
ƒ During commissioning and after the replacement of a module it is vital to check the
safety function. Additional information contains the "Acceptance" chapter. (¶ 108).

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 27
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.4 Safe inputs

1.3.4.1 General
The following applies to the sensors at the SM301 V1.0:
ƒ Sensor type and sensor function can be parameterised in C15030, C15031 and
C15032.
ƒ A local evaluation is executed if corresponding parameters are set.
ƒ If a safety bus is activated, the sensor signals are sent as status information to the
higher−level control.
ƒ Deactivated sensor inputs must not be connected. The status of a non−connected
input is in the OFF state.
ƒ If a signal is detected at deactivated sensor inputs during initialisation, the drive
remains inhibited (STO).
ƒ Faulty inputs are assessed as OFF state.
Additional conditions from SM301 V1.1 onwards:
ƒ With active cascading in C15035 the SD−In4 input cannot be used freely anymore.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15030 SD-In sensor type UNSIGNED_8 9545d = 2549h

Configuration of the sensor types which are connected to the safe inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Input deactivated
1 Passive sensor
2 Active sensor
Subcodes Information
C15030/1 SD-In1 sensor type
C15030/2 SD-In2 sensor type
C15030/3 SD-In3 sensor type
C15030/4 SD-In4 sensor type
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15031 SD-In sensor function UNSIGNED_8 9544d = 2548h

Function configuration of the safe inputs.

l The "operation mode selector" and "enable switch" functions may only be assigned to one of the four safe
inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 Free assignment Safety function set in C15032
1 Emergency stop Safe stop emergency function (SSE)
2 Operation mode selector Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
3 Enable switch Safe enable switch (ES)
Subcodes Information
C15031/1 SD-In1 sensor function
C15031/2 SD-In2 sensor function
C15031/3 SD-In3 sensor function
C15031/4 SD-In4 sensor function
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

28 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe inputs

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15032 SD-In free assignment UNSIGNED_8 9543d = 2547h

Assignment of a safety function to a safe input.

l Only possible if the "free assignment" sensor function is set for the safe input in C15031.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2 (from SM301 V1.1)
5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3 (from SM301 V1.1)
6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4 (from SM301 V1.1)
7 SDIpos Safe positive direction (from SM301 V1.3)
8 SDIneg Safe negative direction (from SM301 V1.3)
9 No function No (local) safety function assigned.
l Functional test and monitoring of the discrepancy
time are active.
l The input status is transferred to the control via the
safety bus (if parameterised).
Subcodes Information
C15032/1 Free assignment SD-In1
C15032/2 Free assignment SD-In2
C15032/3 Free assignment SD-In3
C15032/4 Free assignment SD-In4
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15205 SSE: Safe stop emergency function UNSIGNED_8 9370d = 249Ah

Selection of the stop function for emergency stop

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 29
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

Specification Sensor type

passive active
Discrepancy time parameterisable 0 ... 30000 ms (increment: 2 ms)
Input delay parameterisable 0 ... 100 ms (increment: 2 ms)
Input filter time for test pulses fixed 2 ms
Repetition rate of the test pulses is determined by the clock outputs
> 50 ms
CLA and CLB
Error response Sensor input is assessed as OFF state.
Acknowledgement via safety bus or AIE input
Tab. 1−2 Specification of sensor connections

Explanations
ƒ Discrepancy time
Maximum time in which both channels of a safe input may have non−equivalent states
without the safety engineering causing an error response.
ƒ Input delay
Time between the recognition of the signal change and the effective evaluation of an
input signal. As a result, multiple and short signal changes due to contact bounce of the
components are not taken into account.
ƒ Input filter time
Time in which the interference pulses and test pulses are not detected by e.g. active
sensors that are switched on.
The input delay time and the time of the input filters influence the response time. More
information can be found in the "Response times" chapter (¶ 105).

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15033 SD-In discrepancy time UNSIGNED_16 9542d = 2546h

Maximum time in which both channels of a safe input may have non−equivalent states without the safety
engineering causing an error response.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 10, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15033/1 SD-In1 discrepancy time
C15033/2 SD-In2 discrepancy time
C15033/3 SD-In3 discrepancy time
C15033/4 SD-In4 discrepancy time
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

30 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe inputs

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15034 SD-In input delay UNSIGNED_8 9541d = 2545h

Time between the recognition of the signal change and the effective evaluation of an input signal. As a result,
multiple and short signal changes due to contact bounce of the components are not taken into account.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 100 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15034/1 Input delay SD-In1
C15034/2 Input delay SD-In2
C15034/3 Input delay SD-In3
C15034/4 Input delay SD-In4
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

Contact function test

) Note!
Make sure that an internal contact function test is carried out at the safe
inputs:
Safe input in the ON state
ƒ A LOW level at one channel puts the input in the OFF state. The discrepancy
monitoring starts simultaneously.
ƒ A LOW level must be detected at both channels within the discrepancy time,
otherwise a discrepancy error will be reported.
ƒ To be able to acknowledge the discrepancy error, a LOW level must be
detected before at both channels.
Safe input in the OFF state
ƒ A HIGH level at one channel starts the discrepancy monitoring.
ƒ A HIGH level must be detected at both channels within the discrepancy
time, otherwise a discrepancy error will be reported.
ƒ To be able to acknowledge the discrepancy error, a HIGH level must be
detected before at both channels.

ON state

Value of safe input:

ON state

Switch both channels One channel in

to ON state OFF state

Discrepancy monitoring Discrepancy monitoring

Value of safe input: Value of safe input:

OFF state OFF state

One channel in Switch both channels

ON state to OFF state

OFF state

Value of safe input:

OFF state

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 31
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

SSP94SM355

Fig. 1−4 Status behaviour − contact function test

D

SSP94SM358_1

Fig. 1−5 Contact function test − error−free input signals

AIE
 ‚ ƒ „
SSP94SM358_2

Fig. 1−6 Contact function test − faulty input signals

A, B Safe input, channel A and channel B
C Internal valuation of the safe input
D Discrepancy monitoring
AIE Fault acknowledgement
 Discrepancy monitoring active
‚ Discrepancy monitoring − time−out
ƒ Fault acknowledgement impermissible
„ Fault acknowledgement permissible

32 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.4.2 Connection of passive sensors

The safe sensor inputs I1A ... I4B are suitable for equivalently switching passive sensors.
To monitor passive sensors according to EN ISO 13849−1, cat. 3, the clock outputs CLA and
CLB must be wired. Please observe the following:
ƒ The clock outputs are only suitable for monitoring the passive sensors.
ƒ Always connect ...
– ... CLA to IxA (channel A of the sensor input) via the sensor.
– ... CLA to IxB (channel B of the sensor input) via the sensor.
– ... GCL with GIx of the sensor input.
ƒ The sensor inputs are tested cyclically through short LOW operation.
– The A and B channels are tested at different times in cycles of approx. 2 s, with
test pulses of < 1 ms.
These errors are detected:
ƒ Short circuit to supply voltage.
ƒ Short circuit between the input signals when different clock outputs are used.
ƒ Non−equivalent input signals after the discrepancy time.
These errors are not detected:
ƒ Short circuit between the input signals when the same clock outputs are used.
Avoid unrecognisable errors by the installation, e.g. by separated cable routing.
VCC

CLA

CLB

GCL

GI2

I2B
SM30x
E94AYAx
I2A
S2

û GCL

û GI1

I1B

I1A
S1

SSP94SM351

Fig. 1−7 Ways to detect errors

û Unrecognisable errors

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 33
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.4.3 Connection of active sensors

The safe sensor inputs I1A ... I4B are suitable for active sensors.
PN−switched input signals are permissible.
The line monitoring must comply with the requirements of the category 3. Drive−based
safety does not provide for line monitoring.
These errors are detected:
ƒ Non−equivalent input signals after the discrepancy time.

1.3.4.4 Example circuits

IxA

IxB

GIx

S SM...
SSP94SM352

Fig. 1−8 Example circuit − active sensor

P
IxA

IxB

GIx
M

S SM...
SSP94SM352

Fig. 1−9 Functional example of PN−switching sensor

S Sensor
P Positive path
M Negative path

34 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe output

1.3.5 Safe output

1.3.5.1 General
Via the safe output O1A/O1B information can be output to a higher−level unit (e.g. safety
PLC) or external switching elements (actuators) can be controlled.
The feedback output is designed in a potential−free fashion. If electrical isolation is
required, a separate supply line must be used.
ƒ The status of the safe output is controlled via two ways:
– directly from the safety module (parameter setting required)
– via the PROFIsafe output data
ƒ The safe output is PP switching, i.e. two plus channels are switched.
ƒ The safe output in ON state is cyclically tested by quick LOW switching.
– The A and B channels are tested at different times in cycles of approx. 2 s, with
test pulses of < 1 ms.
– When selecting the downstream control elements, ensure that the test pulses will
not be detected as LOW signal.
These errors will be detected and set the output to OFF state:
ƒ Short circuit to supply voltage.
ƒ In the ON state: Short circuit between the output signals.
ƒ IN the OFF state: Missing 24−V supply voltage at the terminal 24O is detected as
"Stuck−at−Low" error.
These errors are not detected:
ƒ In the OFF state: short circuit between the output signals.
The output can be assigned multiple feedback information by parameter setting:
ƒ Status of the safety function
ƒ Information on error responses
The code C15060 contains information on the status of the feedback output.
Additional conditions for SM301 from version VB 1.1 onwards:
ƒ With active cascading in C15035 the SD−Out1 output cannot be used freely
anymore.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 35
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe output

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15051 SD-Out condition BITFIELD_32 9524d = 2534h

Bit coded selection of the conditions for switching the safe output.
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 STO active Safe torque off
Bit 1 STO active neg. logic
Bit 2 SS1 active Safe stop 1
Bit 3 SS1 active neg. logic
Bit 4 SS2 active Safe stop 2
Bit 5 SS2 active neg. logic
Bit 6 SLS1 active Safely limited speed 1
Bit 7 SLS1 active neg. logic
Bit 8 SLS2 active Safely limited speed 2 (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 9 SLS2 active neg. logic
Bit 10 SLS3 active Safely limited speed 3 (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 11 SLS3 active neg. logic
Bit 12 SLS4 active Safely limited speed 4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
Bit 13 SLS4 active neg. logic
Bit 14 SDIpos is active Safe direction, positive (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 15 SDIpos active neg. logic
Bit 16 SDIneg is active Safe direction, negative (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 17 SDIneg active neg. logic
Bit 18 ES active Safe enable switch
Bit 19 ES active neg. logic
Bit 20 SLI is active Safely limited increment (From SM301 V1.4)
Bit 21 SLI active neg. logic
Bit 22 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 23 OMS neg. logic
Bit 24 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
Subcodes Information
C15051/1 SD-Out1 switching condition
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

36 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe output

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15052 SD-Out condition BITFIELD_32 9523d = 2533h

Bit coded selection of the conditions for switching the safe output.
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 SOS monitored Safe operational stop is monitored.
Bit 1 SOS monitors neg. logic Safe operational stop is not monitored.
Bit 2 SLS1 monitored Safely limited speed 1 is monitored.
Bit 3 SLS1 monitored neg. logic Safely limited speed 1 is not monitored.
Bit 4 SLS2 monitored Safely limited speed 2 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 5 SLS2 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 2 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 6 SLS3 monitored Safely limited speed 3 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 7 SLS3 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 3 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 8 SLS4 monitored Safely limited speed 4 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 9 SLS4 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 4 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 10 SDIpos monitored Safe positive direction is monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 11 SDIpos monitors neg. logic Safe positive direction is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 12 SDIneg monitored Safe negative direction is monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 13 SDIneg monitors neg. logic Safe negative direction is not monitored.
(from SM301 V1.3)

Bit 14 SSE active Emergency stop function

Bit 15 SSE active neg. logic
Bit 16 SD−In1 active Safe inputs
Bit 17 SD−In1 active neg. logic
Bit 18 SD−In2 active
Bit 19 SD−In2 active neg. logic
Bit 20 SD−In2 active
Bit 21 SD−In2 active neg. logic
Bit 22 SD−In4 active
Bit 23 SD−In4 active neg. logic
Bit 24 Reserved
Bit 25 Reserved
Bit 26 OMS active Special operation is active (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 27 OMS active neg. logic Special operation is not active (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 28 Reserved
Bit 29 Reserved
Bit 30 Error active
Bit 31 Error active neg. logic
Subcodes Information
C15052/1 SD-Out1 switching condition
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15055 SD−Out logic function UNSIGNED_8 9520d = 2530h

Selection of the logic operation for the switching conditions to be evaluated

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 OR
1 AND
Subcodes Information
C15055/1 SD−Out1 logic function
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 37
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe output

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15060 Output image BITFIELD_16 9515d = 252Bh

Output image of the safety module feedback, shown in channels.

Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 SD-Out1 channel A
Safe output 1
Bit 1 SD-Out1 channel B
Bit 2 reserved
...
Bit 15 reserved
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.3.5.2 Example circuits

GO

O1B GO

O1A 24O
‚

SSP94SM360

24O, GO 24−V voltage supply for the safe output

O1A, O1B, GO Safe output SD−Out1, channel A and B with reference potential
 24−V voltage supply − safe output (SELV/PELV) acc. to IEC 61131−2
‚ Input of a higher−level unit (e.g. safety PLC)

38 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Further inputs

1.3.6 Further inputs

AIS input
The restart (when setting "acknowledged restart", (¶ 48)), after a stop function has been
executed, requires an acknowledgement at AIS input:
ƒ Positive signal pulse of 0.3 ... 10 s (terminal X82.3 or X82.4).
– Evaluation of the negative edge.
Other equivalent option:
ƒ Signal via the PROFIsafe bit PS_AIS
(if communication via safety bus is preferred)
– Evaluation of the positive edge.

AIE input
Errors require an acknowledgement at AIE input:
ƒ Positive signal pulse of 0.3 ... 10 s (terminal X82.2).
– Evaluation of the negative edge.
Other equivalent option:
ƒ Signal via the PROFIsafe bit PS_AIE
(if communication via safety bus is preferred)
– Evaluation of the positive edge.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 39
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

1.3.7 Safe speed measurement and position detection

For reliable speed and position detection, you must connect a safety−approved sin/cos
encoder to terminal X8 (Sub−D).
Alternatively, you can connect a 2−encoder system, consisting of motor encoder and
position encoder from SM301 V1.3. When selecting a 2−encoder system, you can also
select a resolver as motor encoder.
From SM301 V1.4 onwards, the resolver can be selected as motor encoder without needing
an additional position encoder. The response time of the encoder monitoring must be set
to 50 ms or 100 ms.
Safe speed measurement
Motor encoder Max. speed Synchronism Response time of Error response
system encoder monitoring
[rpm] [%] [ms]
Encoder 12
From SM301 V1.2:
±16000 1.5 12/50/100can be
parameterised
(^ 1.9.4)
Resolver ±10000 / no. of 1 parameterisable Error stop STO
resolver pole pairs SM301 V1.3:
12/50/100
From SM301 V1.4 onwards:
50/100
(^ 1.9.4)
Tab. 1−3 Detailed features

Explanations on the data:

ƒ Synchronism
Variation of the speed determined in comparison with the current speed value.
ƒ Response time of encoder monitoring
Time required to detect faults due to continuous signal errors at the encoder interface.

) Note!
If speed monitoring is active and the standard device detects the inverter error
characteristic (C00002=71) or determines the motor parameters (C00002=72),
the error message "Safe speed invalid" is displayed. Both functions cannot be
completed since the SM301 activates STO. These two states generally occur
only once during commissioning.
Therefore, these functions should be carried out before the speed monitoring
is activated in the SM301.
The speed determined by the standard device and the safety module is checked for
plausibility. Up to SM301 V1.2, the maximum deviation (after a filtering of approx. 2
seconds) is set as a fixed limit value of 20 rpm. The filter time of approx. 2 s is part of the
diagnostic function and is independent of the response time. From SM301 V1.3 onwards,
this tolerancelimit can be parameterised (C15411).

40 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

) Note!
As safe speed, the higher value which results from the comparison of the
dual−channel speed information is used.
The value "Tolerance − speed comparison" must be selected as low as possible.
If a speed/position information fails during operation, this must be detected
by the diagnostic function. It is thus required to exceed the value "Tolerance −
speed comparison" for at least more than two seconds during operation to
ensure the dual−channel redundancy of the encoder information. A too low
value can cause a restricted plant availability.
The speed−dependent and/or direction−of−rotation dependent functions require
information from safe speed measurement. These are the functions:
ƒ Safe stop 2 (SS2)
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS)
– Following EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with speed monitoring (up to SM301 V1.2)
– In compliance with EN 61800−5−2: SOS is designed with position monitoring (From
SM301 V1.3)

ƒ Safe maximum speed (SMS)

ƒ Safely limited speed (SLS)
ƒ Safe speed monitor (SSM)
ƒ Safe direction (SDI) (From SM301 V1.3)
ƒ Safely limited increment (SLI) (From SM301 V1.4)
The dependent functions must not be parameterised when "No encoder system" is set. The
plausibility check rejects such ambiguous settings until you have parameterised them
correctly.

I Tip!
The motor encoder position and, if required, position encoder position are
32−bit values in the safety module. The lower−order 16 bits contain the part of
a motor revolution and the higher−order 16 bits contain the multiple of a
motor revolution. Examples:
1/4 motor revolution 65536/4 16384 / 0x0000’4000
1/2 motor revolution 65536/2 32768 / 0x0000’8000
1 motor revolution 65536/1 65536 / 0x0001’0000
2 motor revolutions 2*65536 131072 / 0x0002’0000

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 41
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Parameter setting of standard device 9400 W Parameter setting of SM301

Motor mounting Position encoder mounting Motor mounting Position encoder mounting
direction direction direction direction
C02527/0 C02529/0 C15409/0 C15502/0
CW CW W CW "Like motor encoder"
CW CCW W CW "Inverted ..."
CCW CW W CCW "Inverted ..."
CCW CCW W CCW "Like motor encoder"
Tab. 1−4 Overview of dependency of the parameterisation from the mounting direction

( Stop!
Malfunctions due to slip, shaft fracture etc.
Slip, shaft fracture etc. between motor and encoder system disturb the safe
speed measurement.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The speed−dependent and/or direction−of−rotation dependent functions are
executed incorrectly.
Protective measures:
ƒ Prevent malfunctions by constructive measures.
ƒ Use the motors and encoder systems with guaranteed features. Your Lenze
contact partner helps you to find suitable systems.
ƒ In the event of service, this must also be observed for the motor or the
encoder system.

42 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Single−encoder concepts with resolvers

Please observe during the configuration of such systems:
If only one feedback system is used in connection with these safety applications, the
applicable safety standard, IEC 61800−5−2 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems, Part 5−2: Safety requirements − Functional), poses special requirements for the
connection between feedback system and motor shaft. This is due to the fact that
dual−channel safety systems are, as a matter of fact, mechanically designed as
single−channel systems at this point. If this mechanical linkage is extremely
overdimensioned, the standard allows for fault exclusion for the fault conditions "Shaft
breakage" and "Shaft slippage".
Hence, there are acceleration limit values for the individual drive solutions which must not
be exceeded:
Synchronous Encoder Max. permissible angular Min. time per 1000 r/min
servo motors acceleration speed lift
Type Product key [rad/s2] [ms]
MCS 06 56000 1.9
MCS 09 ... 19 Resolver RV03 19000 5.5
MDXKS 56 / 71 17000 6.2

Asynchronous Encoder Max. permissible angular Min. time per 1000 r/min
servo motors acceleration speed lift
Type Product key [rad/s2] [ms]
MCA 10 ... 19 22000 4.8
MCA 20 ... 26 Resolver RV03 22000 4.8
MQA 20 ... 26 22000 4.8

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 43
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15400 Motor encoder system UNSIGNED_8 9175d = 23D7h

Selection of the encoder system connected

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 No encoder system
1 Sin/cos encoder "Sin/cos encoder" is used instead of the entries
"sine/cosine encoder" and "absolute value encoder
(Hiperface)" of code C00422 of the 9400 standard
device.
2 Resolver
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15401 Motor encoder status UNSIGNED_8 9174d = 23D6h

Status of the encoder evaluation

Selection list (read only) Information
0 Valid Encoder data is valid
1 Fault Encoder data is invalid
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15402 Actual speed value n_safe INTEGER_16 9173d = 23D5h

Display of the current speed calculated from the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
-16000 rpm 16000 With invalid encoder data (C15401 = 1) 32767 is
displayed.
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15405 Internal actual speed value INTEGER_16 9170d = 23D2h

Internal actual speed values of SM301.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
−16000 rpm 16000 (As of SM301 V1.4)
With invalid encoder data (C15401 = 1) 32767 is
displayed.
Subcodes Information
C15405/1 − Internal actual speed value nSM detected from motor
position.
C15405/2 − Internal actual speed value nGG detected from position
data of the standard device.
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15409 Motor mounting direction UNSIGNED_8 9166d = 23CEh

Setting of the motor mounting direction.

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Motor rotating clockwise (From SM301 V1.4)

1 Motor rotating counter−clockwise

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15410 Response time of encoder monitoring UNSIGNED_8 9165d = 23CDh

Max. internal time after which encoder errors lead to a system response
Selection list Information
0 12 ms (As of SM301 V1.2)
(From SM301 V1.4: Resolver is sole encoder W 50 or 100 ms)
10 50 ms
20 100 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

44 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15411 Tolerance of speed comparison UNSIGNED_16 9164d = 23CCh

Tolerance of the speed comparison in the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 (From SM301 V1.3)

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15420 Number of increments − sin/cos encoder UNSIGNED_16 9155d = 23C3h

Number of increments of the sin/cos encoder used

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 16384 Lenze: 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15430 Number of pole pairs of resolver UNSIGNED_8 9145d = 23B9h

Number of pole pairs of the used resolver

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 10 Lenze: 1 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15500 Position encoder system UNSIGNED_8 9075d = 2373h

Setting of the connected position encoder system

Selection list (read only) Information
0 No position encoder (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Analog encoder (Sin−Cos/TTL)

2 Digital encoder (SSI/BUS)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15501 Position encoder − gearbox factor UNSIGNED_16 9074d = 2372h

Setting of the gearbox factor between motor and position encoder

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
20 % 50000 Lenze: 100 (From SM301 V1.3)
100 º i = 1.00
2543 º i = 25.43
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15502 Position encoder − mounting direction UNSIGNED_8 9073d = 2371h

Setting of the mounting direction of the position encoder regarding the motor encoder
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Like motor encoder (From SM301 V1.3)
If the mounting directions of the motor (C02527/0)
and position encoder (C02529/0) in the standard
1 Inverted to the motor encoder device are set in different directions of rotation, this
parameter must be set to "inverted to the motor
encoder".
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 45
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
General information

1.4 Safety functions

1.4.1 General information

1.4.1.1 Stop functions

The stop functions are distinguished according to the cause of release:
ƒ Standard stop (simple stop)
– Release by a safe input with the parameterised STO, SS1 or SS2 functions
– Release by activating the bits STO, SS1 or SS2 bits via the safety bus.
– In special operation the standard stop can be avoided by using the enable switch.
ƒ Emergency stop
– Release by a safe input with the parameterised "Safe stop emergency" (SSE)
function.
– Release by activating the SSE bit via the safety bus.
– STO or SS1 can be set as emergency stop function to be executed.
– In special operation, the emergency stop cannot be avoided.
ƒ Error stop
– Release as response to an error.
– In special operation, the error stop cannot be avoided.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15205 SSE: Safe stop emergency function UNSIGNED_8 9370d = 249Ah

Selection of the stop function for emergency stop

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.1.2 Priorisation
Stop functions with priority influence the sequence of subordinated functions already
started.
ƒ STO
The STO function has the highest priority over all other functions. Functions already
started (e.g. SS1 or SS2) are aborted and the drive is switched off.
ƒ SS1
The SS1 function has priority over SS2. Considering the set stopping time for SS1 and
SS2 (C15305) and the SS1 mode (C15306 as of SM301 V1.3), the drive is switched to
torque−free operation.
ƒ Monitoring functions
The monitoring functions have equivalent priorities. They can be executed at the same
time.

46 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
General information

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15305 SS1, SS2: Stopping time UNSIGNED_16 9270d = 2436h

Stopping time for the SS1 and SS2 safety functions

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15306 SS1 mode UNSIGNED_8 9269d = 2435h

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information

0 STO after stopping time (From SM301 V1.3)

1 STO at n = 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 47
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
General information

1.4.1.3 Restart
The restart behaviour of the drive can be parameterised (C15300).
ƒ The "acknowledged restart" setting requires an acknowledgement to the safety
module. The acknowledgement is made via:
– Signal at the AIS input (with a signal time of 0.3 ... 10 s)
– Signal via the "PS_AIS" time (PROFIsafe)
ƒ An error stop requires an acknowledgement (AIE), before the restart can be
acknowledged.
ƒ The "Automatic restart" setting requires an acknowledgement at the master
control.
ƒ With active cascading (C15035 as of SM301 V1.1) an "Automatic restart" after STO,
SS1 is not possible.

} Danger!
When the request for the safety function is deactivated, the drive can restart
automatically. The behaviour can be set via the parameter "Restart behaviour"
(C15300/1/2).
In the case of an automatic restart, you must provide external measures which
ensure that the drive only restarts after an acknowledgement (EN 60204).

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15300 Restart behaviour UNSIGNED_8 9275d = 243Bh

Behaviour for restart after functions have been cancelled

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Acknowledged restart
1 Automatic restart
Subcodes Information
C15300/1 Restart - STO, SS1
C15300/2 Restart - SS2, SOS
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

48 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Integration into the application of the controller

1.4.2 Integration into the application of the controller

For the use of the functions, certain settings in the controller are required. Here, the
Lenze PC software »Engineer« supports and guides you.
When a safety function is required, the safety technology activates the corresponding safe
monitoring function. However, the standstill function is only directly executed with the
"safe torque off" (STO) function. Other safety functions in which a controller action is
required will need to be safely monitored.
The action of the drive (e.g. braking, braking to standstill, keeping the standstill position)
must be implemented by the user application in the standard device.
Currently the application can be parameterised and/or configured via function block
editor of the Engineer depending on the runtime software licence. For this, the system
block LS_SafetyModuleInterface must be integrated into the application.
The safety module is implemented in the 9400 ServoPLC via the control configuration
(SMI_SafetyModuleInterface). The control and status data of the safety module can be
evaluated via the free programming and connected to further interface signals.
The connection to a user application serves to achieve the following:
1. Activation of the safety function in the safety module, e.g. SS1.
W The monitoring starts.
2. The safety module transmits the information to the basic device that the function
has been activated using the corresponding bit in the control word SMI_dwControl.
3. The application evaluates the control word and starts the motion sequence, e.g.
braking etc.

Internal communication
Safety module and standard device communicate via an internal interface.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 49
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Integration into the application of the controller

1.4.2.1 Control information

The safety module transfers information via requested or active safety functions with the
control word SMI_dwControl. The application in the standard device must evaluate the
control word and execute the corresponding action.
The following table shows the bit coding of the control word.
Control word − SMI_dwControl
Bit Name Meaning
1 SS1 active Safe stop 1 requested
2 SS2 active Safe stop 2 requested
3 SLS1 active Safely limited speed 1 requested
When the braking time Nlim1 parameterised has elapsed, bit 8 of the
SMI_dnState status signal (SLS1 monitored) is set additionally.
4 SLS2 active Safely limited speed 2 requested (as of SM301 V1.1)
When the braking time Nlim2 parameterised has elapsed, bit 9 of the
SMI_dnState status signal (SLS2 monitored) is set additionally.
5 SLS3 active Safely limited speed 3 requested (as of SM301 V1.1)
When the braking time Nlim3 parameterised has elapsed, bit 10 of the
SMI_dnState status signal (SLS3 monitored) is set additionally.
6 SLS4 active Safely limited speed 4 requested (as of SM301 V1.1)
When the braking time Nlim4 parameterised has elapsed, bit 11 of the
SMI_dnState status signal (SLS4 monitored) is set additionally.
7 SDIpos is active The safe positive direction of movement (SDIpos) function is active.(As of SM301
V1.3)
After the parameterised SDI deceleration time has expired, bit 12 of the status
signal SMI_dnState (SdIpos monitored) is set in addition.
8 SDIneg is active The safe negative direction of movement (SDIneg) function is active.(As of
SM301 V1.3)
After the parameterised SDI deceleration time has expired, bit 13 of the status
signal SMI_dnState (SdIneg monitored) is set in addition.
9 ES active Motion functions in special operation requested
10 SLI is active Safely limited increment is active.(As of SM301 V1.4)
11 OMS Operation mode selector (OMS) function for special operation has been
requested.
(0 = normal operation)
16 SOS is active Safe operational stop maintained
23 SSE active Emergency stop active (Safe Stop Emergency)
29 OMS active Special operation active (Operation Mode Selector) (from SM301 V1.1)

1.4.2.2 Status information

The safety module transfers information via the status of safety functions with the
SMI_dnState status word.
The SMI_dnIoState status word contains information on the status of the safe inputs and
the safe output. The application in the standard device can evaluate and use the status
words for additional tasks.
The following tables show the bit coding of the status words:

50 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Integration into the application of the controller

Status word SMI_dnState

Bit Name Meaning
0 STO Safe torque off is active.
3 EC_STO Error stop category 0 is active (Safe Torque Off).
4 EC_SS1 Error stop category 1 is active (Safe Stop 1).
5 EC_SS2 Error stop category 2 is active (Safe Stop 2).
8 SLS1 monitored Safely limited speed 1 is activated and maintained.
9 SLS2 monitored Safely limited speed 2 is activated and maintained. (from SM301 V1.1)
10 SLS3 monitored Safely limited speed 3 is activated and maintained. (from SM301 V1.1)
11 SLS4 monitored Safely limited speed 4 is activated and maintained. (from SM301 V1.1)
12 SDIpos monitored Safe positive direction (SDIpos) is activated and maintained. (from SM301 V1.3)
13 SDIneg monitored Safe negative direction (SDIneg) is activated and maintained. (from SM301 V1.3)
14 Error active SM301 safety module in error status (trouble or warning).
Unlisted bits are reserved for future extensions!

Status word SMI_dnIOState

Bit Name Meaning
0 SD−In1 Sensor input 1 in ON state.
1 SD−In2 Sensor input 2 in ON state.
2 SD−In3 Sensor input 3 in ON state.
3 SD−In4 Sensor input 4 in ON state.
5 AIS Restart acknowledgement via terminal in ON state.
6 AIE Error acknowledgement via terminal ON state.
8 PS_AIS Restart acknowledgement via safety bus.
9 PS_AIE Error acknowledgement via safety bus.
12 SD−Out1 Safe output 1 (feedback output) in ON state.
Unlisted bits are reserved for future extensions!

If communication to the standard device is interrupted, e.g. by switching off the standard
device, the safety module responds by means of the following actions:
ƒ Error stop with STO is activated
ƒ "Warning" error message is transmitted
ƒ The "ME" LED is blinking
The required fault acknowledgement (AIE) is possible via terminal or safety bus. For further
information read the "Error management" chapter.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 51
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe torque off

1.4.3 Safe torque off

1.4.3.1 Description
Safe Torque Off/STO
This function corresponds to a "Stop 0" according to EN 60204.
When this function is used, the power supply of the motor is immediately (t1) safely
interrupted. The motor cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements of the
drive can occur. Additional measures, e.g. mechanical brakes are needed against
movements caused by external force.

0
0 t

1
0 t
t1

2 I
STO
0 t
SM301DIA_STO

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

I ON state
O OFF state
1 Speed characteristic n of the motor
t Time axis
tx Action instant
2 Feedback(s)

The restart behaviour can be set (C15300/1). Function sequence and error response have
no adjustable parameters.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15300 Restart behaviour UNSIGNED_8 9275d = 243Bh

Behaviour for restart after functions have been cancelled

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Acknowledged restart
1 Automatic restart
Subcodes Information
C15300/1 Restart - STO, SS1
C15300/2 Restart - SS2, SOS
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

52 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe torque off

1.4.3.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.
ƒ As response to the error stop request.
ƒ As response to the emergency stop request if the function has been parameterised
as emergency stop function (C15205).

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 53
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe stop 1

1.4.4 Safe stop 1

1.4.4.1 Description
Safe Stop 1 / SS1
This function corresponds to a "Stop 1" according to EN 60204.
The function monitors the reaching of the speed n = 0 (C15310) within an adjustable
stopping time (C15305). The speed is calculated from the encoder data (safe speed
measurement). Without encoder the function evaluates the speed status n = 0 from the
standard device. For this, the monitored stopping time parameterised in the safety module
must be 0.5 s longer than the stopping time in the controller.
When the stopping time (t2) has expired, the motor power supply is safely interrupted
(STO) immediately. The motor cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements
of the drive. If standstill has not been achieved, an additional error message is triggered.
Depending on the SS1 mode (C15306), the drive can also be switched off safely (STO)
directly after the zero speed has been reached. This causes reduced cycle times. C15307 can
be used to parameterise an additional deceleration time, e.g. for the application of a
holding brake.
Additional measures, e.g. mechanical brakes are needed against movements caused by
external force. The time for a brake to be applied must be considered when defining the
stopping time.
Restart is only possible after the stopping time has completely elapsed (applies up to
SM301 V1.2 and from SM301 V1.3 onwards if C15306 SS1 mode = "STO after stopping
time"). If the parameter SS1 mode is "STO at n=0" (from SM301 V1.3 onwards), the restart
can be executed immediately after the transition to the STO state.
From SM301 V1.4 onwards, deceleration ramp monitoring can be parameterised.
Depending on the parameterised stopping time, a monitoring ramp is calculated. (¶ 62)

54 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe stop 1

0
0 t
tS

1
0 t
t1 t2

2 I
SS1
0 t

I 
STO
0 t
SM301DIA_SS1

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

I ON state
0 OFF state
1 Speed characteristic n of the motor
l Optional: Monitoring of the brake ramp as of SM301 V1.4
t Time axis
tx Action instant
tS Monitored stopping time
–– Normal operation
−−− Incorrect operation
2 Feedback(s)
 SS1 mode (C15306) influences the switching time and contains the
"SS1:Deceleration STO after n=0" (C15307)

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 55
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe stop 1

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15300 Restart behaviour UNSIGNED_8 9275d = 243Bh

Behaviour for restart after functions have been cancelled

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Acknowledged restart
1 Automatic restart
Subcodes Information
C15300/1 Restart - STO, SS1
C15300/2 Restart - SS2, SOS
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15305 SS1, SS2: Stopping time UNSIGNED_16 9270d = 2436h

Stopping time for the SS1 and SS2 safety functions

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15306 SS1 mode UNSIGNED_8 9269d = 2435h

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information

0 STO after stopping time (From SM301 V1.3)

1 STO at n = 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15307 SS1: Deceleration STO after n=0 UNSIGNED_16 9268d = 2434h

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information

0 ms 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15310 Tolerance window (n=0) INTEGER_16 9265d = 2431h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

56 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe stop 1

1.4.4.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.
ƒ As response to the error stop request.
ƒ As response to the emergency stop request if the function has been parameterised
as emergency stop function (C15205).

) Note!
During the safe cascading of a drive system, the SS1 mode (C15306) (from
V1.3) must be parameterised to "STO after stopping time". The first one of the
drives which is at standstill changes to the STO status, thereby triggering STO
for the entire drive system. Those drives which are not at standstill yet are
coasting in an uncontrolled way. Therefore, a fixed stopping time for all drives
makes sense here.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 57
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe stop 2

1.4.5 Safe stop 2

1.4.5.1 Description
Safe Stop 2 / SS2
This function corresponds to a "Stop 2" according to EN 60204.
This function serves to monitor the reaching of speed n = 0 within an adjustable stopping
time (C15305). The reached position must be kept active by the controller. The function SS2
changes to the safe operational stop (SOS) after the stopping time has expired. This
function is implemented in the SM301 up to version 1.2 as a monitoring function of a
speed band. Thus, the SOS function and accordingly the SS2 function is implemented
deviating from the EN 61800−5−2 standard which demands the monitoring of a position
windows in section 4.2.3.1. As of version 1.3, the function is implemented in compliance
with the standard, i.e. the monitoring is executed through a parameterisable position
window (C15311). Depending on the SS2 mode (C15308) the drive can also be switched
directly to the safe operational stop (SOS) after zero speed has been reached. This causes
reduced cycle times.
For speed n = 0, a tolerance window (C15310) can be parameterised. For the tolerance
window Delta p=0 (C15311), a relative position is defined by which the drive may move in
the SOS state.
From SM301 V1.3 onwards, the tolerance window for standstill detection (C15310) is used
to control the transition to the SOS state subject to the "SS2 mode" parameter (C15308).
C15308 serves to determine whether the SOS state is reached after the stopping time has
expired or after the reaching of n = 0. In the SOS state, the standstill monitoring based on
the position takes place. The respective limit value is set via the parameter "SOS: Tolerance
window (Delta p=0)" C15311.
The speed and the position are calculated from the encoder data (safe speed
measurement). Without an encoder, the function cannot be used.
If the monitored limits are exceeded, an error stop will be caused. The power supply of the
motor is immediately safely interrupted (STO). The motor cannot create a torque and thus
no dangerous movements of the drive can occur. Additional measures, e.g. mechanical
brakes are needed against movements caused by external force.
A restart is only possible after the stopping time has expired completely (up to V1.2 and
V1.3 with C15308 "SS2−mode = SOS after stopping time").
If the parameter SS2 mode = "SOS at n=0" (from V1.3), the restart can be executed after
the transition to the SOS state.
This does not apply to special operations.
From SM301 V1.3 onwards, the higher−prior stop function SS1/STO is executed when the
SS2 stop request and SS1/STO occur at the same time. After the SS1/STO request has been
cancelled and acknowledged accordingly (see restart behaviour), a direct STO transition to
the SS2/STO state can be achieved without cancelling the SS2 request. Up to SM301 V1.2,
the cancellation of all stop functions incl. SS2 before an acknowledgement was necessary
in order to reach the SOS state via an SS2 request.
From SM301 V1.4 onwards, deceleration ramp monitoring can be parameterised.
Depending on the parameterised stopping time, a monitoring ramp is calculated. (¶ 62)

58 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe stop 2

) Note!
The position of the motor is saved when the SOS state is entered. In the SOS
state, relative position changes are added and compared to the permissible
value in the parameter "Tolerance window Delta p=0". When the SOS state is
quit, the maximum relative position change is displayed in code C15312.
When the SOS state is requested again, the maximum value of the last
position changes is reset to zero.
Example: The states "SS2 active" and "SOS active" are interrupted by a STO
request. When the STO request is reset, an immediate transition to the SOS
state takes place. This causes a reset of the current position deviation to p=0.
After the safe operational stop is interrupted by the STO, the motor may have
a different position due to an external torque.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 59
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe stop 2

0
0 t
tS

1
0 t
t1 t2
2 I
SS2
0 t

I 
SOS
0 t
SM301DIA_SS2

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

I ON state
0 OFF state
1 Speed characteristic n of the motor
l Speed−monitored up to SM301 V1.2
l Position−monitored as of SM301 V1.3
l Optional: Monitoring of the brake ramp as of SM301 V1.4
t Time axis
tx Action instant
tS Monitored stopping time
2 Feedback(s)
 SS2 mode (C15308) influences the switching time

I Tip!
Adapt the deceleration time for quick stop (C00105) of the standard device to
the stopping time SS1, SS2 (C15305).
The drive must have reached standstill before the stopping time has elapsed.

60 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe stop 2

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15300 Restart behaviour UNSIGNED_8 9275d = 243Bh

Behaviour for restart after functions have been cancelled

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Acknowledged restart
1 Automatic restart
Subcodes Information
C15300/1 Restart - STO, SS1
C15300/2 Restart - SS2, SOS
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15305 SS1, SS2: Stopping time UNSIGNED_16 9270d = 2436h

Stopping time for the SS1 and SS2 safety functions

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15308 SS2 mode UNSIGNED_8 9267d = 2433h

Selection whether SS2 is to be executed already after reaching n=0 SOS or only after reaching the parameterised
stopping time.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 SOS after stopping time (As of SM301 V1.3)

1 SOS at n = 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15310 Tolerance window (n=0) INTEGER_16 9265d = 2431h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15311 SOS: Tolerance window (Delta p=0) UNSIGNED_32 9264d = 2430h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero position change

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 327680 Lenze: 0 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15312 SOS: Maximum change in position UNSIGNED_32 9263d = 242Fh

Amount of the maximum change in position while SOS was active

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.5.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.
ƒ As response to the error stop request.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 61
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

1.4.6 Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

1.4.6.1 Description
From SM301 V1.4 onwards, the deceleration ramp for the stop functions SS1 and SS2 can
be parameterised and monitored. If the parameterised ramp is not exceeded, the state
changes to the parameterised stop function STO or SOS.
The monitoring of the deceleration process serves to achieve a higher degree of safety.
Ramp monitoring becomes most critical when delay times are caused by high moments of
inertia
ƒ Braking the drive to standstill and holding the position must still be executed by the
application!
ƒ A safe speed evaluation is the precondition for a safe ramp monitoring, i.e. an
encoder system must be parameterised in the safety module.
ƒ When ramp monitoring is activated, the starting value of the ramp and the S−ramp
time must be defined in percent.
– The starting value refers to the current speed value at the time of the SS1/SS2
request.
– The starting time of the deceleration ramp is delayed via the S−ramp time in order
to consider a possible S−ramp smoothing.
If the current speed exceeds the parameterised deceleration ramp within the stopping
time or before reaching the tolerance window (n=0), an error message is caused and an
error stop is initiated.
ƒ The power supply of the motor is immediately safely interrupted (STO). The motor
cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements of the drive can occur.

62 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

I tS
0
0 t
n+ tV
n

1
0 t
t1 t2

2 I
SS1/
SS2 0
t

I
STO
0 t
SM301DIA RUESS2

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

I ON state
0 OFF state
1 Speed characteristic n of the motor
l Speed−monitored up to SM301 V1.2
l Position−monitored as of SM301 V1.3
l Optional: Monitoring of the brake ramp as of SM301 V1.4
n+ Start offset ramp
t Time axis
tx Action instant
tS Monitored stopping time
tV S−ramp time
–– Normal operation
−−− Incorrect operation
2 Feedback(s)
 If the speed exceeds the parameterised brake ramp, an error message is triggered and an error
stop is initiated.

Codes
C15305 SS1, SS2: Stopping time UNSIGNED_16 9270d = 2436h

Stopping time for the SS1 and SS2 safety functions

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15310 Tolerance window (n=0) INTEGER_16 9265d = 2431h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15315 SS1, SS2: ramp monitoring UNSIGNED_8 9260d = 242Ch

Selection whether the brake ramp is to be monitored when SS1 and SS2 are executed.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No ramp monitoring (From SM301 V1.4)

1 Ramp monitoring is activated

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 63
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

C15316 SS1, SS2: S−ramp time UNSIGNED_8 9259d = 242Bh

S−ramp time of deceleration ramp for SS1 and SS2 if a linear ramp is not used.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 % 100 0 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15317 SS1, SS2: Start offset ramp UNSIGNED_8 9258d = 242Ah

Speed offset at the start of the ramp monitoring.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 % 30 0 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.6.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ The ramp monitoring must be activated via the C15315 parameter.
ƒ When the stop functions SS1/SS2 are requested, a monitoring ramp is calculated
and applied to the current speed characteristic.

) Note!
ƒ The parameterisation of the monitoring ramp in the safety module must
consider the parameters of the deceleration ramp from within the
application.
ƒ Based on the actual speed, a parameterisable percentage (0 ... 30 %) is added
to the actual speed as a start offset and used as a constant starting value.
– In the Lenze setting of the start offset (C15317), the tolerance window
(n = 0) is considered as an offset.
ƒ The monitoring ramp only starts after an internal deceleration time has
expired which has been generated as a function of the parameters
"SS1, SS2: S−ramp time" and "SS1, SS2: Stopping time":
– The parameter "SS1, SS2: S−ramp time" is scaled linearly from 10 ... 30 % of
the stopping time:
0 % S−ramp time º 10 % deceleration
100 % S−ramp time º 30 % deceleration
– In the Lenze setting of the S−ramp time, the deceleration time is 10 % of
the set stopping time.

64 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Emergency stop

1.4.7 Emergency stop

1.4.7.1 Description
Safe Stop Emergency/SSE
The emergency stop function activates STO or SS1. The function to be executed can be set
(C15205). There is no way to avoid emergency stopping during special operation.
With active cascading (C15035 from SM301 V1.1) only "STO" is permissible as emergency
stop.

) Note!
Connect the emergency stop buttons which must not be overruled by a special
operation to the emergency stop function. For this purpose, parameterise the
safe input as "emergency stop" (C15031).
The emergency stop function can also be requested with SSE bit via the safety
bus.
The activation of the function is reported internally to the standard device and via the
safety bus of the higher−level control.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15205 SSE: Safe stop emergency function UNSIGNED_8 9370d = 249Ah

Selection of the stop function for emergency stop

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.7.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 65
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

1.4.8 Safe maximum speed

1.4.8.1 Description
Safe Maximum Speed / SMS
This function monitors the maximum motor speed. If a value > 0 is indicated (C15320), the
function is activated.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a error stop is caused. STO, SS1 or SS2 (C15321) can be
adjusted.

1
0 t

SM301DIA_SMS

1 Speed characteristic n of the motor

t Time axis

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15320 SMS: Max. speed Nmax INTEGER_16 9255d = 2427h

Selection of the maximum speed and activation of the SMS function

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 1, deactivate: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15321 SMS: Response (n>Nmax) UNSIGNED_8 9254d = 2426h

Response to the exceeding of the set maximum speed

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15350 SLS, SMS: Max. response time UNSIGNED_16 9225d = 2409h

Maximum time after an exceeded speed has been detected, after which the speed must be below the limit
again.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.8.2 Activation
The function is activated or deactivated via the parameter value. A value > 0 activates the
function, a value = 0 deactivates the function.

66 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

1.4.8.3 Fault analysis

This consideration applies to the SMS and SLS functions.
The evaluation and plausibility of the speed values is done in a cycle of 2 ms.
If the defined limit values are exceeded, the parameterised error response is activated
within a time slot of maximally one evaluation cycle. With the error response SS1 or SS2
the response time of the stop function depends on the evaluation in the standard device.
Moreover, the set stopping time must be added to the response time until the defined
operating status is reached.
In order that the response can be checked for an error as quickly as possible, a maximum
response time (C15350) can be parameterised. Before the maximum response time has
elapsed, the detected speed must comply with the permissible (monitored) speed. If the
permissible (monitored) speed is not complied with, STO is activated immediately.

n tS
tC
tR

t1 t2 t3 t
2 I
SLS‚
0 t

I
ƒ
0 t

I
STO
0 t
SM301DIA_F

T1 Occurrence of the error event

tC Cycle time 2 ms
T2 Determining the error event
tR Maximum permissible response time (parameterisable)
t3 Response instance to continuous exceedance
tS Stopping time
2 Feedback(s)
SLS‚ SLS monitored
ƒ According to the error response set: SS2, SS1 or STO
STO Response in case of an error after the max. response time has elapsed
–––– Normal operation
−−−−−− Incorrect operation

) Note!
If the STO function has been selected as the error response for SMS or SLS, the
internal response time is not considered because the motor is already coasting
after the speed threshold is exceeded for the first time.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 67
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

) Note!
In case of an error, the set limited speed will be exceeded.
To assess the risk for the plant, you have to calculate the height of the
maximum exceedance. Consider the following:
ƒ internal response time
ƒ application−specific response time
ƒ application−specific maximum acceleration

68 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safely limited speed

1.4.9 Safely limited speed

1.4.9.1 Description
Safely Limited Speed/SLS
Safe Speed Monitor/SSM
When the adjustable braking time (C15331/1 ... 4) has elapsed, the function monitors
compliance with the limited speed Nlim (C15330/1 ... 4).
ƒ From SM301 V1.,1 four different speeds can be monitored (SLS1 ... SLS4).
When operating within the limit values, the "SLSx monitored" status is set (C15000). The
status can be assigned to the safe output (C15052/1). The status can also be reported via
the safety bus. From V1.3, feedback is returned as soon as the speed falls below its
threshold. This results in reduced cycle times if the "SLSx monitored" feedback is used.
When the monitored speed is exceeded, a stop error is caused. STO, SS1 or SS2
(C15332/1...4) can be adjusted. If the speed is not within the limit values even after the
adjustable response time (C15350), the drive will be directly switched off (STO).
The monitoring of the limited speed can be combined with a monitoring of the direction
of rotation. For this purpose, the permissible direction of rotation for the corresponding
limited speed SLSx must be set in parameter SLS: Permissible direction of rotation
(C15333). This setting triggers two monitoring functions at the same time via one request
which is pending via SD−InX or the safety bus.

0
0 t
tS

1
0 t
t1 t2

2 I
SLS
0 t

I
SLS‚
0 t
SM301DIA_SLS

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

I ON state
0 OFF state
1 Speed characteristic n of the motor
t Time axis
tx Action instant
tS Monitored braking time
2 Feedback(s)
SLS SLS active
SLS‚ SLS monitored

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 69
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safely limited speed

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15330 SLS: Limited speed Nlim UNSIGNED_16 9245d = 241Dh

Setting of the limited speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
Subcodes Information
C15330/1 SLS1: Limited speed Nlim1
C15330/2 SLS2: Limited speed Nlim2
(As of SM301 V1.1)
C15330/3 SLS3: Limited speed Nlim3
(As of SM301 V1.1)
C15330/4 SLS4: Limited speed Nlim4
(As of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15331 SLS: Braking time Nlim UNSIGNED_16 9244d = 241Ch

Safely monitored time for braking the drive to the limited speed set in C15330.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15331/1 SLS1: Braking time Nlim1
C15331/2 SLS2: Braking time Nlim2 (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15331/3 SLS3: Braking time Nlim3 (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15331/4 SLS4: Braking time Nlim4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15332 SLS: Response (n>Nlim) UNSIGNED_8 9243d = 241Bh

Response in the safety module to the exceeding of the limited speed

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Subcodes Information
C15332/1 SLS1: Response (n>Nlim1)
C15332/2 SLS2: Response (n>Nlim2) (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15332/3 SLS3: Response (n>Nlim3) (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15332/4 SLS4: Response (n>Nlim4) (as of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

70 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safely limited speed

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15333 SLS: Permissible direction of movement UNSIGNED_8 9242d = 241Ah

Permissible direction of movement during SLS monitoring

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 Both directions enabled
1 Positive direction enabled
2 Negative direction enabled
Subcodes Information
C15333/1 SLS1: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301
V1.3)

C15333/2 SLS2: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)

C15333/3 SLS3: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)

C15333/4 SLS4: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15350 SLS, SMS: Max. response time UNSIGNED_16 9225d = 2409h

Maximum time after an exceeded speed has been detected, after which the speed must be below the limit
again.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.9.2 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.

1.4.9.3 Fault analysis

The fault analysis is described with the SMS function (¶ 67).

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 71
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe direction

1.4.10 Safe direction

1.4.10.1 Description
Safe Direction / SDI
This function monitors safe compliance with an adjustable direction of movement.
Monitoring also includes zero speed with a tolerance window.
If the valid direction of rotation is not complied with, optionally SS1, SS2, or STO can be
activated.
After the adjustable delay time has expired (C15341), the function monitors the
compliance with the positive/negative direction of movement.
When operating within the limit values (C15342), the "SDIxxx monitored" status is set
(C15000). The status can be assigned to the safe output (C15052/1). The status can also be
reported via the safety bus.
If deviations from the permissible direction of movement occur, an error stop will be
triggered. As an error response, STO, SS1, or SS2 can be set (C15343). In the event of an error
the maximum change in position is displayed (C15344).

0
0 t
tS

1
0 t
t1

 ‚
2 I
SDIpos
1 0
t

I
SDIpos
2 0
t
SMxDIASLS

0 Input signal of the request of a safety function

’1’ Logic signal level "1" / "TRUE"
1 Direction of movemtn of the motor
tx Action instant
t Time axis
ts Delay time
2 Feedbacks
SDIpos1 SDIpos active
SDIpos2 SDIpos monitored
 Error response − triggering motion range
‚ Adjustable SDI tolerance threshold

) Note!
If the SDI delay time (C15341) is parameterised greater than zero, either the
"SDIxxx monitored" feedback must be evaluated (safety bus or safe output) or
the risk analysis must show that the delay is not hazardous. This fact must e.g.
be considered in the calculation of the safety clearance.

72 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe direction

) Note!
If the monitoring of the direction of movement, SDIxxx, is combined with
function SLSx, the delay times must be coordinated. Then, braking time Nlim
will start at the same time as the SDI delay time.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 73
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe direction

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15340 SDI: Monitoring − normal operation UNSIGNED_8 9235d = 2413h

Setting of the monitoring of the direction of movement of the motor during normal operation
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Both directions enabled (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Positive direction enabled

2 Negative direction enabled
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15341 SDI: Deceleration time UNSIGNED_16 9234d = 2412h

Safely monitored time from activation to switching on the monitoring SDIpos/SDIneg

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 30000 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15342 SDI: Tolerance threshold UNSIGNED_32 9233d = 2411h

Setting of the tolerance threshold by how many increments the motor may move towards the direction
inhibited through SDI
Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 327680 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15343 SDI: Error response UNSIGNED_8 9232d = 2410h

Response to a violation of the permitted direction of movement of the motor

Selection list (read only) Information
0 STO (From SM301 V1.3)

1 SS1
2 SS2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15344 SDI: Maximum change in position UNSIGNED_32 9231d = 240Fh

Maximum change in position in inhibited direction if SDI is active

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647
Subcodes Information
C15344/1 SDIpos: Maximum change in position (from SM301 V1.3)
C15344/2 SDIneg: Maximum change in position (from SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.10.2 Activation
How to activate the "Safe direction" function:
ƒ Permanent monitoring of the direction of movement during normal operation
(C15340).
ƒ "OFF state" at a safe input, the function of which has been assigned by parameter
setting.
ƒ In conjunction with safely limited speed SLSx (C15333).
ƒ Via a safety bus data telegram with corresponding content.

74 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe direction

1.4.10.3 Fault analysis

This consideration is applies to function SDI.
The position values are evaluated and checked at a cycle of 2 ms. If the defined tolerance
window is exceeded, the parameterised error response is triggered immediately within a
time slot of max. one evaluation cycle. If a SS1 or SS2 error response is triggered, the
response time of the stop function depends on the evaluation in the standard device.
Furthermore, the set stopping time must be added to the response time until the defined
operating status is reached. In the Lenze setting, the error response is set to SS1.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 75
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

1.4.11 Safe operation mode selector

1.4.11.1 Description
Operation Mode Selector / OMS
The function provides a special operation of the drive. In the special operation the drive is
stopped (status 2). The drive can be traversed in the special operation via an enable switch
(status 3).
For the stop status in the special operation, the STO, SS1 or SS2 functions can be
parameterised.
For motion functions in the special operation, the SLS function (from V1.3 onwards
combinable with SDI) or free movement (from V1.4 onwards combinable with SLI
function) can be parameterised. The parameterised monitoring function will be
automatically activated with the transition to the special operation.
The special operation enables an override of the simple STO, SS1, and SS2 stop functions
by the enable switch.
Also in special operation, activated SMS, SDI and SLS monitoring functions are continued
to be executed. An error detected in the monitoring functions, also in special operation,
leads to the parameterised error stop function. Depending on the priority, the
parameterised stop function of the monitoring function or the stop function of the special
operation is executed without approval.
An active emergency stop function is also executed in special operation.
The special operation can also be selected via the safety bus by the F−PLC, unless a safe
input is parameterised as operation mode selector.
The return to normal operation is only possible in the stop status. Since the drive is stopped
in status 2, the AIS acknowledgement is required for restart. The parameters for the restart
STO/SS1 or SS2 are used.

) Note!
When returning to normal operation, the automatic restart is not permissible.
If "automatic restart" is parameterised, this can be prevented by special
measures, e.g. programming in the higher−level control.

) Note!
The "safe enable switch" function serves to directly cancel/complete the
stopping times assigned to the stop functions.

) Note!
Monitoring of the safely limited increment (from SM301 V1.4 onwards) in
special operation is active if a value > 0 has been selected for C15203.

76 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

) Note!
If an error (e.g. a discrepancy error) occurs at a safe input to which the OMS
function has been assigned, normal operation will be selected. This
corresponds to the OFF state. The "ME" LED is blinking and STO is not
activated. The special operation can only be selected again when the error has
been eliminated and acknowledged.
From SM301 V1.3 onwards, the switching level at the digital input which
determines special or normal operation can be set via the safe
parameterisation.

) Note!
When the OMS bit is received via the safety bus, the value 0 (normal
operation) is assumed in case of passivation. In special applications (e.g. safety
door, request of OMS, i.e. open safety door = special operation) this must not
cause a dangerous state by automatic restart.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 77
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

SM301OMS01

Operating mode Normal Special

Event Impact Impact
− State  −
Request − OMS special operation via ...
... safe input Change W State ‚
Stop function ...
l STO
l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
Activated monitoring functions
remain active.
... safety bus same response − only possible as an alternative to the safe input
Request − ES confirmation via ...
... safe input No function State ƒ
l Free movement
l SLS (as of V1.3 combinable with
SDI) possible as restriction
l SLI (as of V1.4)
... via safety bus same response − only possible as an alternative to the safe input
Stop request State „ is not executed
parameterised function ...
l STO
l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
Emergency stop State …
parameterised function ...
l STO
l SS1
... is executed
Monitoring responds: dependent on priority:
SMS parameterised error function ...
SLS l STO
SDI l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
or
parameterised stopping function of special operation

78 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

1.4.11.2 Conditions
A safe input must be parameterised and interconnected as an operation mode selector.
Select the operating mode for the LOW level (C15202) depending on the application. Only
one operation mode selector can be connected and parameterised. The OMS bit of the
safety bus must be deactivated (C15113).
Special operation can also be selected via the safety bus (C15113) with the OMS bit if no
safe input has been selected as an operation mode selector. In this case, at least one stop
function must be parameterised via the safety bus to ensure that the drive system is safely
switched−off if the bus should be interrupted. Furthermore, parameter C15202 must be set
to "Normal operation".
The plausibility check rejects ambiguous settings until they are parameterised correctly.

) Note!
The "free traversing" setting for the special operation (C15201) motion
function must be suitable for the application!

} Danger!
Dangerous situations may occur during automatic or special operation
Depending on the application, automatic or special operation may bring about
hazardous situations.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Injury to persons
ƒ Damage to material assets
Protective measures:
ƒ Must be observed in particular when setting the operating mode for the
LOW level at the SD−Inx.
ƒ Observe the notes provided in the attached application examples.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 79
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15200 OMS: Stop function UNSIGNED_8 9375d = 249Fh

Selection of the stop function in special operation

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15201 OMS: motion function UNSIGNED_8 9374d = 249Eh

Selection of the motion function in special operation

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Info
3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
(Lenze setting up to SM301 V1.3)
4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2 (From SM301 V1.1)
5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3 (From SM301 V1.1)
6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
11 Free traversing (Lenze setting from SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

I Tip!
If SLSx has been parameterised as the motion function during special
operation, a change to the acceptance operation is not possible until the
reduced speed is monitored and maintained (SLSx monitored).

C15202 OMS: Function at LOW level UNSIGNED_8 9373d = 249Dh

Function that is executed in case of LOW level at the safe input with OMS function.
Caution: According to the closed−circuit principle, the parameterisation must not cause any additional danger.
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Normal operation (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Special operation
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15203 SLI: Safely lim. increment UNSIGNED_32 9372d = 249Ch

Number of increments for safely limited increment

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 Lenze: 1, deactivate: 0
(From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15204 SLI: Amount of position change UNSIGNED_32 9371d = 249Bh

Maximum position change while SLI is active.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

80 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

1.4.11.3 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ Via a safe input which has been assigned to the function by parameterisation. In
addition, the requested operating mode depends on OMS: Function at LOW level
(C15202).
Example:
Normal operation at LOW level
Special operation is activated via a 2−pole key−operated switch. The "Special operation
with LOW level" function is not permissible for a key−operated switch which uses
special operation for purposes of short−circuiting. An open circuit in the cable of the
switch would activate special operation.
Special operation at LOW level
Special operation is active when the safe input detects the LOW level. This triggers
execution of the stop function parameterised.
Only if no safe input is used, the function can only be activated via the safety bus:
ƒ A data telegram with corresponding contents must be transmitted to the standard
device.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 81
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe enable switch

1.4.12 Safe enable switch

1.4.12.1 Description
Enable Switch / ES
The drive can be traversed in special operation using an enable switch (see operation mode
selector).

1.4.12.2 Conditions
A safe input must be parameterised and interconnected as enable switch. You can only
connect and parameterise one enable switch. The ES bit of the safety bus must be
deactivated (C15113).
The enable switch function can also be selected via the safety bus with the ES bit, unless
a safe input is parameterised as enable switch.
The special operation must be activated.
The plausibility check rejects ambiguous settings until they are parameterised correctly.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15031 SD-In sensor function UNSIGNED_8 9544d = 2548h

Function configuration of the safe inputs.

l The "operation mode selector" and "enable switch" functions may only be assigned to one of the four safe
inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 Free assignment Safety function set in C15032
1 Emergency stop Safe stop emergency function (SSE)
2 Operation mode selector Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
3 Enable switch Safe enable switch (ES)
Subcodes Information
C15031/1 SD-In1 sensor function
C15031/2 SD-In2 sensor function
C15031/3 SD-In3 sensor function
C15031/4 SD-In4 sensor function
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.12.3 Activation
How to activate the function:
ƒ Via a safe input which has been assigned to the function by parameterisation. With
the edge change 0−1 of the ES signal, the status changes to "Acceptance (ES)".
Only if no safe input is used, the function can only be activated via the safety bus:
ƒ A data telegram with corresponding contents must be transmitted to the standard
device (edge change 0−1 of the ES signal).

82 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Cascading

1.4.13 Cascading

1.4.13.1 Description
Cascading / CAS
This function enables a synchronised shutdown of an entire drive system.
ƒ The function can only be activated via parameter setting. For this purpose set the
"CAS: cascading" parameter to "Cascading with SD−In4".
ƒ With activated function:
– The SD−In4 safe input is used as cascading input and cannot be used as universal
input anymore.
– The SD−Out1 safe output is used as cascading output and cannot be parameterised
as universal feedback output anymore.
– A stop function (emergency stop, SSE) released by cascading cannot be overruled
in special operation through the enable switch.
ƒ The cascade trips with every STO, irrespective of which safety module adopts the
STO status and for which reason.
ƒ All safety modules of the cascade can only be enabled if all cascading inputs (SD−In4)
are in the OFF state (emergency stop has been enabled).
ƒ For the restart of the drive system, the AIS restart acknowledgement must be
executed simultaneously for all safety modules of the cascade.
ƒ The restart is executed with a delay of 100 ms after the acknowledgement has been
recognised.
ƒ Cascading is designed for max. 100 drives.
ƒ During special operation, the drives of the cascade can only change from the
SS2/SOS stop function to acceptance. An STO or SS1 as stop function would trigger
the entire drive system every time and thus impede acceptance.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 83
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Cascading

#1 #2 #n
SM301 SM301 SM301
E94AYAE E94AYAE E94AYAE
X82.1 X82.2 X82.1 X82.2 X82.1 X82.2
24 V ext. 24 V ext. 24 V ext.
- - -

+ + +

GO GO GO

O1B GO O1B GO O1B GO

  
O1A 24O O1A 24O O1A 24O

GI4 GI4 GI4

I4B I4B I4B

I4A I4A I4A

X82.3 X82.4 X82.3 X82.4 X82.3 X82.4

SSP94SM365

Fig. 1−10 Wiring example

E94AYAE Safety module SM301 as of V1.1
#1, #2, #n Number of the module
24 V ext. ‚ 24−V voltage supply of the module (SELV/PELV)
 24−V voltage supply of the output (SELV/PELV)

84 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Cascading

1.4.13.2 Conditions
ƒ This function is available from SM301 V1.1.
ƒ The SD−In4 input must be parameterised as active input for the "emergency stop"
function and the input delay for SD−In4 must be £ 10 ms.
ƒ The emergency stop function to be executed must be parameterised as STO via the
"SSE: emergency stop function" parameter.
ƒ The restart behaviour of the drive after the STO/SS1 stop function has been
executed must be parameterised to "Acknowledged restart".
ƒ The control of the SD−Out1 output via a possibly parameterised safety bus must be
inhibited.
ƒ The SS1 mode (C15306) must be set to "STO after stopping time".
ƒ The plausibility check rejects other settings until they are parameterised correctly.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15035 CAS: Cascading UNSIGNED_8 9540d = 2544h

Safe cascading
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No cascading (As of SM301 V1.1)

4 Cascading with SD−In4

þ Read access } Write access o CINH o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15036 CAS: Stop delay UNSIGNED_16 9539d = 2543h

Circulation time of safe cascading

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 65535 (As of SM301 V1.1)
l Display of the time that passes from switching the
SD−Out1 output to OFF state to the detection of the
OFF state at the SD−In4 input. This information may
be helpful for system commissioning/maintenance.
l If "0 ms" is displayed after a stop, another safety
module has activated the stop via the cascade.
l The time is displayed until the next system
acknowledgement.
þ Read access o Write access o CINH o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.4.13.3 Activation
The cascade trips with every STO, irrespective of which safety module adopts the STO
status and for which reason.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 85
1 Safety engineering
Safety address

1.5 Safety address

The safety address serves to clearly assign the safety modules of the SM301 type in systems
with several drives. The address "0" is not permissible.

Address switch
The safety address can be set in the left part of the housing by means of the DIP switch 0.
For setting the switch, use an appropriately small tool, e. g. a probe. The switch can only be
set if the module is not connected to a standard device. Via the switch, addresses in the
range of 0 ... 1023 can be set. Alterations by the switch with regard to the address are only
activated when the 24−V supply is switched on. The address setting "0" requires the setting
by the address code.
DIP switch 0 Labelling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Value of the address bit 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512
Tab. 1−5 Address setting

Address code
The safety address can also be set with the "Safety address" parameter (C15111) of the
safety module. For this, the address setting via the DIP switch 0 must be set with the "0"
setting. Via parameter, addresses can be set in a range of 0 ... 65534.

Effective safety address

The effective safety address is the result from the address switch or address parameter.
The effective safety address must comply with the module ID assigned in the safe
parameter set.
The effective safety address must also be used as target address by a master control with
safety bus (e.g. PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe target address).

Module ID
Before the safe parameter set is downloaded, the system checks if the
(As of SM301 V1.2)
module ID defined in the parameter set corresponds to the module ID saved in the safety
module. If the values are not the same, a corresponding message is displayed. This shall
ensure that the safety address is not changed by mistake during parameter setting. If the
user confirms the new value after checking it, the changed module ID will be saved
non−volatile in the SM301. Code C15017 contains the module ID saved during the last
parameter set transfer in the SM301.

) Note!
A general reset does not change the stored module ID.

86 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety address

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15017 Stored module ID UNSIGNED_16 9558d = 2556h

Module ID stored in the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 65535 (As of SM301 V1.2)
Default setting (invalid ID): 0
Stored ID defective: 65535
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15101 Display − DIP switch position UNSIGNED_16 9474d = 2502h

Display of the DIP switch position

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 1023
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15111 Safety address UNSIGNED_16 9464d = 24F8h

Safety address parameterised in the safety module

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 65534 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15112 Effective safety address UNSIGNED_16 9463d = 24F7h

Address used in safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 65534
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 87
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

1.6 Safe bus interfaces

In the safety module, parameterised interfaces are provided for standardised safety bus
systems. With the selection of the bus system, the corresponding parameters are made
available.
Currently supported communication types:
ƒ Operation without safety bus system
ƒ Operation with PROFIsafe protocol

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15100 S bus: Configuration UNSIGNED_8 9475d = 2503h

Configuration of the safety bus

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No safety bus
1 PROFIsafe / PROFIBUS
2 PROFIsafe / PROFINET (As of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

1.6.1 PROFIsafe connection

1.6.1.1 Conditions
The SM301 supports the transmission of safe information on the PROFIsafe protocol
according to the "PROFIsafe − Profile for Safety Technology" specification, version 1.30, of
the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation (PNO). The SM301 V1.1 also supports the PROFIsafe
protocol according to the "PROFIsafe − Profile for Safety Technology" specification, version
2.x. The standard device transmits the PROFIsafe information to the safety module for safe
evaluation.
PROFIsafe connection Required Setting
communication module "S BUS: Configuration" (C15100)
PROFIBUS E94AYCPM (PROFIBUS−DP) PROFIsafe / PROFIBUS
as of software version V1.00
PROFINET E94AYCER (PROFINET) PROFIsafe / PROFINET
(as of SM301 V1.1) as of software version V0.70

) Note!
A safety bus system (PROFIsafe) can only be operated via the upper module
slot (MXI1) of the Servo Drive 9400.

) Note!
The operation with PROFIsafe via PROFINET is only permissible according to
the "PROFIsafe − Profile for Safety Technology" specification, version 2.x.

88 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

1.6.1.2 Description

Addressing
In order that a data telegram reaches the correct node, an unambiguous PROFIsafe target
address is required. If PROFIsafe has been selected as safety bus, the safety address is
simultaneously accepted as PROFIsafe target address. This address must comply with the
corresponding configuration of the safety PLC.

PROFIsafe frame
The PROFIsafe message is sent in the first slot of a PROFIBUS data telegram or in the second
slot of a PROFINET data telegram.
This must be observed for the hardware configuration of the safety PLC!
PROFIBUS data telegram
Header PROFIsafe data Data Trailer
Slot 1 Slot 2

PROFINET data telegram (as of SM301 V1.1)

Header PROFIsafe data Data Trailer
Slot 2 Slot 1

PROFIsafe data
In the PROFIsafe data one bit each is used to control a certain safety function.
ƒ The structure of the PROFIsafe message is described in the PROFIsafe profile.
ƒ The length of the PROFIsafe message in the SM301 is eight bytes (fixed).
The PROFIsafe messages are structured according to the following system:
PROFIsafe message − V1 mode
Bit offset
Byte offset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1 PROFIsafe process data
2 PROFIsafe output data/PROFIsafe input data
3
4 Control byte or status byte
5 Consecutive number
6 CRC2
7 (Signature consists of PROFIsafe process data and PROFIsafe parameters)

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 89
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

PROFIsafe message − V2 mode (as of SM301 V1.1)

Bit offset
Byte offset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1 PROFIsafe process data
2 PROFIsafe output data/PROFIsafe input data
3
4 Control byte or status byte
5
CRC2
6 (Signature consists of PROFIsafe process data and PROFIsafe parameters and the
7 consecutive number)

Tab. 1−6 Structure of the PROFIsafe data

The meaning of the PROFIsafe process data is separately described for PROFIsafe output
data and PROFIsafe input data. All bits described are evaluated.
Unassigned bits are reserved for future functions and marked with "−". These bits must be
transmitted with "0".

PROFIsafe output data

The PROFIsafe output data is transmitted from the control to the safety module.
Control word PROFIsafe output data (safe user data)
Bit Name Value Description
0 STO 0 The STO function is activated.
1 SS1 0 The SS1 function is activated.
2 SS2 0 The SS2 function is activated.
3 SLS1 0 The SLS1 function is activated.
4 SLS2 0 The SLS2 function is activated. (from SM301 V1.1)
5 SLS3 0 The SLS3 function is activated. (from SM301 V1.1)
6 SLS4 0 The SLS4 function is activated. (from SM301 V1.1)
7 SDIpos 0 The SDIpos function is activated. (from SM301 V1.3)
8 SDIneg 0 The SDIneg function is activated. (from SM301 V1.3)
9 ES 1 Acceptance active:
In special operation −> motion functions are possible.
11 OMS 0 Normal operation
1 Special operation
16 PS_AIS 0W1 Activation of restart acknowledgement
The bit must be set for at least one PROFIsafe cycle.
17 PS_AIE 0W1 Activation of fault acknowledgement
The bit must be set for at least one PROFIsafe cycle.
23 SSE 0 The SSE function is activated.
24 SD−Out1 0 The SD−Out1 output is set to the OFF state.
− 0 Reserved for future extensions
Tab. 1−7 Detailed specification of the PROFIsafe output data

90 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

Control byte
For the PROFIsafe V1 mode only the indicated bits of the PROFIsafe control byte are
supported:
Assignment Bit
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4 − − − activate_FV − − − −
Tab. 1−8 Structure of the PROFIsafe control byte in V1 mode

Bit coding − control byte

Bit Name Value Description
4 activate_FV 1 The PROFIsafe output data is passivated.
− 0 Reserved for future extensions
Tab. 1−9 Detailed specification of the control byte in V1 mode

For the PROFIsafe V2 mode only the indicated bits of the PROFIsafe control byte are
supported:
Assignment Bit
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4 − − Toggle_h activate_FV − R_cons_nr − −
Tab. 1−10 Structure of the PROFIsafe control byte in V2 mode

Bit coding − control byte

Bit Name Value Description
2 R_cons_nr 1 Reset of the consecutive number.
4 activate_FV 1 The PROFIsafe output data is passivated.
5 Toggle_h 1/0 Change increases the consecutive number.
− 0 Reserved for future extensions
Tab. 1−11 Detailed specification of the control byte in V2 mode

Control data filter

Unused functions in the control data of the safety bus must be set to "Inhibit" via the
parameter "S−bus: Control data filter" (C15113). After this, the functions can no longer be
activated via the safety bus independently of the transferred control data. As of
SM301 V1.2, the filtered control data is indicated in "S−bus: Display of control data"
(C15115).

0 1 2
1 a 1
0 a 0
1 i 1
0 i 1
SSP94SM301

Fig. 1−11 Function example − filter

0 Control data, incoming (0 = active, 1 = inactive)
1 Control data filter
(Selection in the »Engineer«: a = "pass through", i = "inhibit")
2 Effective control data (0 = active, 1 = inactive)

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 91
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15113 S-Bus: Filter control data BITFIELD_32 9462d = 24F6h

Bit coded selection of the active bit positions in the safety bus control data
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 STO Safe torque off
Bit 1 SS1 Safe stop 1
Bit 2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Bit 3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
Bit 4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 7 SDIpos Safe positive direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 8 SDIneg Safe negative direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 9 ES Safe enable switch
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 12 Reserved
...
Bit 15 Reserved
Bit 16 PS_AIS Restart acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 17 PS_AIE Fault acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 18 Reserved
...
Bit 22 Reserved
Bit 23 SSE Emergency stop function
Bit 24 SD−Out1 Safe output
Bit 25 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

92 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15115 S-bus: Control data display BITFIELD_32 9460d = 24F4h

Display of safety bus control data after filtering via C15113

Value is bit coded: Information
(From SM301 V1.2)
Bit 0 STO Safe torque off
Bit 1 SS1 Safe stop 1
Bit 2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Bit 3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
Bit 4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2
Bit 5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3
Bit 6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4
Bit 7 SDIpos Safe positive direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 8 SDIneg Safe negative direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 9 ES Safe enable switch
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 12 Reserved
...
Bit 15 Reserved
Bit 16 PS_AIS Restart acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 17 PS_AIE Fault acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 18 Reserved
...
Bit 22 Reserved
Bit 23 SSE Emergency stop function
Bit 24 SD−Out1 Safe output
Bit 25 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 93
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

PROFIsafe input data

The safety module transmits the PROFIsafe input data to the controller. This can be
displayed via "Safety function status" (C15000).

94 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

Bit coding of PROFIsafe input data

Bit Name Description
0 STO active The STO function is active and the drive is safely switched to torque−free
operation.
This bit is also set at the end of the stopping time by SS1.
1 SS1 active The SS1 function is active.
At the end of the function the STO bit is set.
2 SS2 active The SS2 function is active.
At the end of the function the SOS bit is set.
3 SLS1 active The SLS1 function is active.
When the braking time has elapsed, the SLS1_monitored bit is set
additionally.
4 SLS2 active The SLS2 function is active.
When the braking time has elapsed, the SLS2_monitored bit is set
additionally. (From SM301 V1.1 onwards)
5 SLS3 active The SLS3 function is active.
When the braking time has elapsed, the SLS3_monitored bit is set
additionally. (From SM301 V1.1 onwards)
6 SLS4 active The SLS4 function is active.
When the braking time has elapsed, the SLS4_monitored bit is set
additionally. (From SM301 V1.1 onwards)
7 SDIpos is active The SDIpos function is active.
After the deceleration time has expired, bit 21 (SDIpos monitored) is set in
addition. (As of SM301 V1.3)
8 SDIneg is active The SDIneg function is active.
After the deceleration time has expired, bit 22 (SDIneg monitored) is set in
addition. (As of SM301 V1.3)
9 ES active 1: ES function in special operation is active: Motion function
0: ES function in special operation is not active: Stop function
10 SLI is active The safely limited increment (SLI) function is active. (As of SM301 V1.4)
11 OMS 1: special operation requested
0: normal operation
16 SOS monitored The SOS function is monitored.
17 SLS1 monitored The SLS1 function is monitored.
18 SLS2 monitored The SLS2 function is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
19 SLS3 monitored The SLS3 function is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
20 SLS4 monitored The SLS4 function is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
21 SDIpos is monitored The SDIpos function is active, the compliance with the direction of
movement is monitored. (As of SM301 V1.3)
22 SDIneg is monitored The SDIneg function is active, the compliance with the direction of
movement is monitored. (As of SM301 V1.3)
23 SSE active The SSE function is monitored.
When the stopping time has elapsed, the STO or SS1 bit is set according to
the emergency stop function parameterised.
24 SD−In1 Sensor at I1A and I1B Channels A and B are in the ON state
25 SD−In2 Sensor at I2A and I2B Channels A and B are in the ON state
26 SD−In3 Sensor at I3A and I3B Channels A and B are in the ON state
27 SD−In4 Sensor at I4A and I4B Channels A and B are in the ON state
29 OMS active Special operation is not active. (from SM301 V1.1)
31 Error active Error status (i.e trouble or warning) is active.
Tab. 1−12 Detailed specification of the PROFIsafe input data

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 95
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

Status byte
For the PROFIsafe V1 mode only the indicated bits of the PROFIsafe status byte are
supported:
Assignment Bit
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4 − − − FV_activated COM−Failure WD-Timeout COM−Failure CRC − −
Tab. 1−13 Structure of the PROFIsafe status byte in V1 mode

Bit coding − status byte

Bit Name Description
2 COM−Failure CRC Status after communication error is active.
3 COM−Failure Status after time−out is active.
WD-Timeout
4 FV_activated The PROFIsafe input data is deactivated.
− Reserved for future extensions
Tab. 1−14 Detailed specification of the status byte in V1 mode

For the PROFIsafe V2 mode only the indicated bits of the PROFIsafe status byte are
supported:
Assignment Bit
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4 − cons_nr_R Toggle_d FV_activated WD_timeout CE_CRC − −
Tab. 1−15 Structure of the PROFIsafe status byte in V2 mode

Bit coding − status byte

Bit Name Description
2 CE_CRC Status after communication error is active.
3 WD_timeout Status after time−out is active.
4 FV_activated The PROFIsafe input data is deactivated.
5 Toggle_d Change shows increase of the consecutive number.
6 cons_nr_R Consecutive number has been reset.
− Reserved for future extensions
Tab. 1−16 Detailed specification of the status byte in V2 mode

96 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

PROFIsafe parameters
These PROFIsafe parameters and contents are supported:
PROFIsafe parameters
Name Description Valid contents
F_Source_Add PROFIsafe source address of the safety PLC 0x01 ... 0xFFFE
F_Dest_Add PROFIsafe target address of the safety module
DIP switch: 0x01 ... 0x03FF
Code: 0x01 ... 0xFFFE
F_WD_Time PROFIsafe monitoring time of the safety module 110 ... 65535 ms
F_Check_SeqNo Check sequence no. in CRC
V1 mode: 0
V2 mode: not relevant
F_Check_iPar Check iparameters CRC3 in CRC 0
F_SIL Supported SIL (Safety Integrity Level)
SIL1: 0
SIL2: 1
SIL3: 2
F_CRC_Length Length of CRC
V1 mode/2−byte−CRC: 1
V2 mode/3−byte−CRC: 0
F_Block_ID Identification of the parameter type 0
F_Par_Version Version of the safety layer
V1 mode: 0
V2 mode: 1
F_Par_CRC Cyclic CRC Is calculated
Tab. 1−17 Supported PROFIsafe parameters

Diagnostic messages
Incorrect configurations of the PROFIsafe parameters are reported to the safety PLC by
means of a diagnostic telegram (¶ PROFIBUS or PROFINET Communication Manual).

Diagnostic information
Error number Description
64 The PROFIsafe target address set does not comply with the parameter F_Dest_Add.
65 The F_Dest_Add parameter has the invalid value 0x0000 or 0xFFFF.
66 The F_Source_Add parameter has the invalid value 0x0000 or 0xFFFF.
67 The F_WD_Time parameter has the invalid value 0 ms.
68 The F_SIL parameter does not have the valid value 0 ... 2.
69 The F_CRC_Length parameter does not have the valid value 1.
70 The version of the PROFIsafe parameter set is wrong.
71 CRC1 error
Tab. 1−18 Information contents of byte 11

More error messages are listed in the appendix.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 97
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

GSE file
The GSE file contains all information on the configuration of the PROFIBUS system. This
makes the integration easy and user−friendly.

I Tip!
You will find the current GSE file for this Lenze product in the Internet in the
"Downloads" area under
http://www.Lenze.com

GSDML file
The GSDML file contains all information on the configuration of the PROFINET system (As
of SM301 V1.1). This makes the integration easy and user−friendly.

I Tip!
You will find the current GSDML file for this Lenze product on the Internet in
the "Downloads" area under
http://www.Lenze.com

98 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe parameter setting
Parameter setting

1.7 Safe parameter setting

) Note!
During online communication via bus system, multiple users can access the
very same drive at the same time and edit the safe parameter set. After the
safe parameter set has been transmitted, please check if the checksums (CRC)
of the parameter set, memory module, and safety module in the "Safe
transfer" dialog are consistent.
The consistency of the safe parameters must be ensured by organisational
measures because there are no technical means to avoid multiple users
accessing parameter sets at the same time.
1.7.1 Parameter setting

Safety−relevant parameters can exclusively be transmitted to the safety module by safe

parameter setting. The parameter set is saved in the memory module and safety module
with a definite module ID which must comply with the effective safety address in the
safety module.
A safe parameter setting requires the service status. The service status means the
following:
ƒ The standard stop is active and the drive is safely switched to torqueless operation
(STO).
ƒ The communication via the safety bus is active but passivated.
About the service status:
ƒ It can be activated by the Lenze »Engineer« PC software.
ƒ It can be quit by reinitialising the module, i.e. the communication via the safety
module is interrupted.

) Note!
The service status also occurs if the parameter set in the memory module does
not comply with the parameter set in the safety module during initialisation.
Observe the information on compatibility of the SM301 firmware versions (¶ 20).

1.7.1.1 Parameter setting with the Lenze »Engineer« PC software

Safe parameter setting is supported by the Lenze PC software »Engineer« as of version 1.4.
The parameter setting is described in the Software Manual for the SM301 safety module.
Moreover, the software provides a comprehensive Online Help.

Password
For storing a safe parameter set, a password is required. The standard password is: "Lenze
SM301". The password can be changed and must have at least six characters.
Use "general reset" to delete the safe parameter set in the memory module and the safety
module. The safety module must be reparameterised.
The password is reset to the standard "Lenze SM301".

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 99
1 Safety engineering
Safe parameter setting
Parameter setting

1.7.1.2 Parameter set transfer from the memory module

The safe parameter set transfer is supported by a safe parameter set stored in the memory
module, e.g. in case of a module exchange.
ƒ A valid parameter set with a corresponding module ID must be stored.
ƒ The safety module must be in the service status.
The transfer of the parameter set from the memory module must be acknowledged at the
safety module.
ƒ The "MS" LED is flashing (safety module is in service status.)
ƒ "AS" LED is lit
ƒ Press module switch S82 and keep it pressed
ƒ "AS" LED starts blinking
ƒ When the "AS" LED goes off, release the S82 module switch immediately
ƒ The "AS" LED is lit again after a short time
ƒ Press again the S82 module switch and keep it pressed
ƒ "AS" LED starts blinking
ƒ When the "AS" LED goes off, release the S82 module switch immediately
ƒ The parameter set transfer is completed successfully.
If system−related response times (approx. 2.5 s) cannot be complied with, the parameter
transfer is cancelled. The process must be started again.
In case of success, the parameter transfer is recorded in the logbook of the standard device
and the service status is quit by a software restart.
If the parameter set is invalid, an error is indicated and the "ME" LED is blinking.

I
AS
0

I
S82
0 t
tmax tmax tmax
SM301DIA_P

Fig. 1−12 Acknowledgement procedure

AS AS light−emitting diode
S82 S82 module switch
t Time axis
tmax Maximum permissible response time

100 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Safe parameter setting
Parameter sets and axes

1.7.2 Parameter sets and axes

The individuality of an axis with safety functions in a drive system can be achieved by
means of the safety address. In the safe parameter set a module ID is stored. This module
ID is compared to the effective safety address (C15112) in the safety module.
When a safety module is initialised, i.e. when the parameter set is loaded, the compliance
of the safety address will be checked. If no compliance exists, an initialisation error is
reported.

) Note!
ƒ Clearly define the safety address in a drive system or plant.
ƒ Document the address in circuit diagrams and labels.
ƒ Ensure identical settings when replacing the module.

In drive systems with activated safety bus the safety address is also used as safety bus
target address. The clear assignment of the safety address must be configured in the safety
PLC.
In drive systems without activated safety bus, individuality and correct assignment of the
safety address must be checked. For this, use the Lenze »Engineer« PC software or an
E94AZK... keypad.

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15112 Effective safety address UNSIGNED_16 9463d = 24F7h

Address used in safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 65534
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 101

1 Safety engineering
Error management
Error states

1.8 Error management

1.8.1 Error states

Detected errors or maloperation of the drive are assigned to error statuses with definite
reactions. The reaction can be co−ordinated with the complete drive via the error statuses.
Features Error status
System error Trouble Warning
Event Fatal internal error Fault Monitoring function
LED "ME" On Blinking Flashing
Status of safety module Lockout (CPU stopped) Error status Normal operation
The control category ... has been abandoned ... has been abandoned ... has not been abandoned
according to
EN ISO 13849−1 ...
Response The motor immediately The motor is stopped via
switches to torque−free l STO or
operation via l SS1
l STO
Acknowledgement after l Connection and l Fault acknowledgement (AIE) via terminal X82.2
deactivated event disconnection of the (positive signal pulse with a signal time of
24−V supply at the 0.3 ... 10 s)
safety module l Fault acknowledgement (AIE) via the safety bus
(Bit "PS_AIE")
l Connection and disconnection of the 24−V supply at
the safety module
Tab. 1−19 Overview of error statuses

More error messages are listed in the appendix.

) Note!
If the system fault also occurs after switching the 24−V supply, please contact
the service.
When using PROFIsafe as safety bus:
ƒ If faults occur in the PROFIsafe communication, the data is passivated by the
PROFIsafe driver.
ƒ After the PROFIsafe communication is reinitialised, the drive is automatically
enabled again if no standstill function is selected.
ƒ Events which cause an error status are sent as diagnostic telegram via the safety
bus.

102 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Error management
Logbook function in the controller

1.8.2 Logbook function in the controller

Error states are saved in the logbook of the standard device. The following is entered:
ƒ Type of response (e.g. trouble, warning, or information) to the event
ƒ Date/time (in case of memory module with real−time clock)
ƒ Value of the power−on time meter
The available logbook entries can be displayed in the »Engineer« when an online
connection has been established.
The list of the error entries can be found in the appendix.

1.8.3 Logbook function in the SM301

For diagnostic purposes, a simple logbook with ten entries is implemented in the
SM301 V1.4. Here, changes regarding the request of safety functions in the SM301 are
logged. The basis for the logbook is the bit−coded log state generated in a 2−ms cycle. A
logbook is generated every time the log state changes.
ƒ The logbook function can be controlled via the "Log function" (C15891).
– The parameter can be written without using the safe parameter setting interface.
ƒ A logbook entry consists of the two corresponding subcodes of the parameters "Log
time" (C15892) and "Log state" (C15893).

) Note!
Before the display parameters of the logbook are read for diagnostic purposes,
the logbook function should be stopped in order to prevent inconsistency
(C15891 = 1).

Codes
Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15890 Current time UNSIGNED_32 8685d = 21EDh

Relative time for use in logbook.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 4294967295 (From SM301 V1.4)

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15891 Log function UNSIGNED_8 8684d = 21ECh

Setting of the logging behaviour (trigger condition). (From SM301 V1.4)

Selection list Information
0 Logging is active Logging is always active.
1 Logging is stopped Logging is switched off.
2 Stop logging in case of error Logging is stopped if an error occurs.
3 Stop logging in case of STO Logging is stopped if STO occurs.
4 Stop logging in case of SS1 Logging is stopped if SS1 occurs.
5 Stop logging in case of SS2 Logging is stopped if SS2 occurs.
þ Read access þ Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 103

1 Safety engineering
Error management
Logbook function in the SM301

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15892 Log time UNSIGNED_32 8683d = 21EBh

Time of log entry.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 4294967295 (From SM301 V1.4)

Subcodes Information
C15892/1 Log time n
C15892/2 Log time n−1
...
C15892/10 Log time n−9
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15893 Log state BITFIELD_64 8682d = 21EAh

Logged state
Display area Information
− − − (As of SM301 V1.4)

Value is bit−coded Information

Bit 0
... Bit−coded log states Detailed information can be found in the appendix
Bit 63
Subcodes Information
C15893/1 Log state n
C15893/2 Log state n−1
...
C15893/10 Log state n−9
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

104 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Response times

1.9 Response times

In order to detect the response time to a safety function the entire system must be
considered. The following is relevant:
ƒ Response time of the connected sensors.
ƒ Input delay of the safety inputs.
ƒ Internal processing time.
ƒ When using PROFIsafe as safety bus:
– Monitoring time for the cyclic service in the PROFIBUS/PROFINET.
– Monitoring time of the PROFIsafe in the safety PLC.
– Processing time in the safety PLC.
ƒ Delay times due to further components.

0
1
ti
S t1 t2
t3 μC t5 SF

t=0

3 tps

2
t4
μC

lcu12x_352

Fig. 1−13 Response times to the request of a safety function

0 Standard device
1 Safety module
2 Safety PLC
3 Safety bus
mC Microcontroller
S Safety sensor technology
SF Activated safety function

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 105

1 Safety engineering
Response times
Response times of the inputs

1.9.1 Response times of the inputs

Response time to an event in the sensors

Time interval (Fig. 1−13) [ms]
t1 Response time of the sensors according to manufacturer
information
t2 Input delay of the safe inputs
C15034: 0 ... 100
Input error: 2
ti Processing time in drive−based safety 4
Safety function starts after ... S
Tab. 1−20 Response time to an event in the sensors

1.9.2 Response time of the safe output

Response time of the safe output to a safety function

[ms]
Safe output SD−Out1 switches to ... 4
Tab. 1−21 Response time − safe output

1.9.3 Response times of the safety bus

PROFIsafe
Response time to an event in the safety sensors (PROFIsafe input data)
Time interval (Fig. 1−13) [ms]
t1 Response time of the sensors according to manufacturer
information
t2 Input delay of the safe inputs
C15034: 0 ... 100
Input error: 2
t3 Processing time in drive−based safety 24
PROFIsafe input data ready for transmission to ... S
tPs PROFIsafe cycle time according to manufacturer
information
PROFIsafe input data ready for processing in the safety PLC ... S
Tab. 1−22 Response time to an event in the sensors

106 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Response times
Response time of encoder monitoring

Response time to a PROFIsafe control word (PROFIsafe output data)

Time interval (Fig. 1−13) [ms]
t4 Processing time in the safety PLC must be calculated
tPs PROFIsafe cycle time according to manufacturer
information
t5 Processing time in drive−based safety 14
Safety function starts after ... S
Tab. 1−23 Response time in case of PROFIsafe request

Information on how to calculate the processing time and transmission time of the
PROFIsafe can be found in the documentation of the safety PLC used.

) Note!
When the PROFIsafe communication is disturbed, it is changed to the fail−safe
state after the PROFIsafe monitoring time (F_WD_Time) has elapsed
(¶ Tab. 1−17). The PROFIsafe communication is passivated.

Example
ƒ After an event has occurred at a safe input, the message is fed back to drive−based
safety via the safety PLC.
ƒ Drive−based safety activates a safety function.
ƒ Hence, the maximum response time to the event is calculated as follows:
tmax response = t1 + t2 + t3 + max {tWD; tPS + t4 + tPs + t5}
When calculating the maximum response time, include the times of the safety functions,
e.g. in case of SS1 the stopping time (C15305) until STO is active.

1.9.4 Response time of encoder monitoring

Response time of encoder monitoring

[ms]
Time required to detect 12
faults due to continuous (As of SM301 V1.2)
signal errors at the encoder can be parameterised under
interface. C15410 12/50/100

) Note!
The minimum response time must be individually determined for each system.
A longer response time leads to an increased system availability, if, for
instance, during machine set−up with safe operating stop process−related
speed jumps occur for a short time.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 107

1 Safety engineering
Acceptance
Description

1.10 Acceptance

1.10.1 Description

The machine manufacturer must check and prove the operability of the safety functions
used.

Inspector
The machine manufacturer must authorise a person with expertise and knowledge of the
safety functions to carry out the test.

Test report
The test result of every safety function must be documented and signed by the inspector.

) Note!
If parameters of the safety functions are changed, the inspector must repeat
the test and record the results in the test report.

Scope of test
A complete test comprises the following:
ƒ Documenting the plant including the safety functions:
– Creating an overview screen of the plant
– Describing the plant
– Describing the safety equipment
– Documenting the safety functions used
ƒ Checking the function of the safety functions used:
– "Safe torque off" function, STO
– "Safe stop 1" function, SS1
– "Safe stop 2" function, SS2
– "Safe operating stop" function, SOS
– "Safe maximum speed" function, SMS
– "Safely limited speed" function, SLS
– "Safe stop emergency" function, SSE
– "Safe direction" function, SDI
– "Safely limited increment" function, SLI
ƒ Preparing the test report:
– Documenting the functional test
– Checking the parameters
– Signing the test report
ƒ Preparing the appendix with test records:
– Protocols from the plant
– External recording

108 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Acceptance
Periodic inspections

1.10.2 Periodic inspections

The correct sequence of the safety−oriented functions must be checked in periodic

inspections. The risk analysis or applicable regulations determine the time distances
between the tests. The inspection interval should not exceed one year.

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 109

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

1.11 Module internal codes

This chapter contains all parameters of the SM301 safety module in numerically ascending
order.
ƒ Standard values are printed in bold type or with the "Lenze:" addition.
ƒ The write access is marked with } if the codes can only be set via the safe
parameter setting.

110 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15000 Status of safety functions BITFIELD_32 9575d = 2567h

Bit coded status word of the safety functions

Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 STO active Safe torque off
Bit 1 SS1 active Safe stop 1
Bit 2 SS2 active Safe stop 2
Bit 3 SLS1 active Safely limited speed 1
Bit 4 SLS2 active Safely limited speed 2
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 5 SLS3 active Safely limited speed 3
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 6 SLS4 active Safely limited speed 4
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 7 SDIpos is active Safe direction, positive
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 8 SDIneg is active Safe direction, negative
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 9 ES active Safe enable switch
Bit 10 SLI is active Safely limited increment
(From SM301 V1.4)
Bit 11 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 12 Reserved
...
Bit 15 Reserved
Bit 16 SOS monitored Safe operational stop is monitored.
Bit 17 SLS1 monitored Safely limited speed 1 is monitored.
Bit 18 SLS2 monitored Safely limited speed 2 is monitored. (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 19 SLS3 monitored Safely limited speed 3 is monitored. (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 20 SLS4 monitored Safely limited speed 4 is monitored. (as of SM301 V1.1)
Bit 21 SDIpos is monitored Safe positive direction is monitored. (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 22 SDIneg is monitored Safe negative direction is monitored. (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 23 SSE active Emergency stop function
Bit 24 SD−In1 active Safe input
Bit 25 SD−In2 active Safe input
Bit 26 SD-In3 active Safe input
Bit 27 SD−In4 active Safe input
Bit 28 Reserved
Bit 29 OMS active Special operation is active (as of SM301 V1.1)
Bit 30 Reserved
Bit 31 Error active
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 111

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15003 Command status UNSIGNED_16 9572d = 2564h

Status of the current command.

l In high byte the command is repeated.
l In low byte the status is displayed:
0x00: no command
0x01: command executed
0x02: password invalid
0x03: command in process
0x04: command unknown
0x05: command error
Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 2309
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15010 Parameter set status UNSIGNED_8 9565d = 255Dh

Status of the parameter set

Selection list (read only) Information
0 No parameter set
1 Parameter set valid
2 Read error − memory module
3 Parameter set dissimilar
4 CRC error
5 Version error
6 Format error
7 Plausibility error
8 Assignment error
9 Local read error
10 Communication error GG
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15011 Parameter CRC UNSIGNED_32 9564d = 255Ch

Parameter checksum (CRC = Cyclic Redundancy Code)

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 4294967295
Subcodes Information
C15011/1 CRC safety module
C15011/2 CRC memory module
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15013 Time for parameter set creation UNSIGNED_64 9562d = 255Ah

Time of parameter set creation

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 1844674407370
96E+19
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15014 Time − RTC parameter setting VISIBLE_STRING 9561d = 2559h

Time of parameter set transfer from the memory module as a value of the real−time clock (RTC).
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15015 Time sec. parameter setting UNSIGNED_32 9560d = 2558h

Time of parameter set transfer from the memory module as a value of the power−on time meter from the
controller.
Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 S 4294967295
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

112 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15016 Parameter set version UNSIGNED_8 9559d = 2557h

Display of the parameter set version in the safety module.

Selection list (read only) Information
0 No current parameter set
1 Parameter set V1.0 (From SM301 V1.1)
2 Parameter set V1.1
3 Parameter set V1.2 (From SM301 V1.2)

4 Parameter set V1.3 (From SM301 V1.3)

5 Parameter set V1.4 (From SM301 V1.4)

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15017 Stored module ID UNSIGNED_16 9558d = 2556h

Module ID stored in the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 65535 (As of SM301 V1.2)
Default setting (invalid ID): 0
Stored ID defective: 65535
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15030 SD-In sensor type UNSIGNED_8 9545d = 2549h

Configuration of the sensor types which are connected to the safe inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Input deactivated
1 Passive sensor
2 Active sensor
Subcodes Information
C15030/1 SD-In1 sensor type
C15030/2 SD-In2 sensor type
C15030/3 SD-In3 sensor type
C15030/4 SD-In4 sensor type
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15031 SD-In sensor function UNSIGNED_8 9544d = 2548h

Function configuration of the safe inputs.

l The "operation mode selector" and "enable switch" functions may only be assigned to one of the four safe
inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 Free assignment Safety function set in C15032
1 Emergency stop Safe stop emergency function (SSE)
2 Operation mode selector Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
3 Enable switch Safe enable switch (ES)
Subcodes Information
C15031/1 SD-In1 sensor function
C15031/2 SD-In2 sensor function
C15031/3 SD-In3 sensor function
C15031/4 SD-In4 sensor function
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 113

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15032 SD-In free assignment UNSIGNED_8 9543d = 2547h

Assignment of a safety function to a safe input.

l Only possible if the "free assignment" sensor function is set for the safe input in C15031.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2 (from SM301 V1.1)
5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3 (from SM301 V1.1)
6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4 (from SM301 V1.1)
7 SDIpos Safe positive direction (from SM301 V1.3)
8 SDIneg Safe negative direction (from SM301 V1.3)
9 No function No (local) safety function assigned.
l Functional test and monitoring of the discrepancy
time are active.
l The input status is transferred to the control via the
safety bus (if parameterised).
Subcodes Information
C15032/1 Free assignment SD-In1
C15032/2 Free assignment SD-In2
C15032/3 Free assignment SD-In3
C15032/4 Free assignment SD-In4
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15033 SD-In discrepancy time UNSIGNED_16 9542d = 2546h

Maximum time in which both channels of a safe input may have non−equivalent states without the safety
engineering causing an error response.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 10, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15033/1 SD-In1 discrepancy time
C15033/2 SD-In2 discrepancy time
C15033/3 SD-In3 discrepancy time
C15033/4 SD-In4 discrepancy time
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15034 SD-In input delay UNSIGNED_8 9541d = 2545h

Time between the recognition of the signal change and the effective evaluation of an input signal. As a result,
multiple and short signal changes due to contact bounce of the components are not taken into account.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 100 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15034/1 Input delay SD-In1
C15034/2 Input delay SD-In2
C15034/3 Input delay SD-In3
C15034/4 Input delay SD-In4
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

114 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15035 CAS: Cascading UNSIGNED_8 9540d = 2544h

Safe cascading
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No cascading (As of SM301 V1.1)

4 Cascading with SD−In4

þ Read access } Write access o CINH o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15036 CAS: Stop delay UNSIGNED_16 9539d = 2543h

Circulation time of safe cascading

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 65535 (As of SM301 V1.1)
l Display of the time that passes from switching the
SD−Out1 output to OFF state to the detection of the
OFF state at the SD−In4 input. This information may
be helpful for system commissioning/maintenance.
l If "0 ms" is displayed after a stop, another safety
module has activated the stop via the cascade.
l The time is displayed until the next system
acknowledgement.
þ Read access o Write access o CINH o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15040 Input image BITFIELD_32 9535d = 253Fh

Input image of the external module inputs of the safety module, shown in channels.
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 SD-In1 channel A
Safe input 1
Bit 1 SD-In1 channel B
Bit 2 SD-In2 channel A
Safe input 2
Bit 3 SD-In2 channel B
Bit 4 SD-In3 channel A
Safe input 3
Bit 5 SD-In3 channel B
Bit 6 SD-In4 channel A
Safe input 4
Bit 7 SD-In4 channel B
Bit 8 reserved
...
Bit 15 reserved
Bit 16 AIE AIE input (fault acknowledgement)
Bit 17 AIS AIS input (restart acknowledgement)
Bit 18 Module switch
Bit 19 reserved
...
Bit 31 reserved
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 115

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15051 SD-Out condition BITFIELD_32 9524d = 2534h

Bit coded selection of the conditions for switching the safe output.
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 STO active Safe torque off
Bit 1 STO active neg. logic
Bit 2 SS1 active Safe stop 1
Bit 3 SS1 active neg. logic
Bit 4 SS2 active Safe stop 2
Bit 5 SS2 active neg. logic
Bit 6 SLS1 active Safely limited speed 1
Bit 7 SLS1 active neg. logic
Bit 8 SLS2 active Safely limited speed 2 (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 9 SLS2 active neg. logic
Bit 10 SLS3 active Safely limited speed 3 (From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 11 SLS3 active neg. logic
Bit 12 SLS4 active Safely limited speed 4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
Bit 13 SLS4 active neg. logic
Bit 14 SDIpos is active Safe direction, positive (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 15 SDIpos active neg. logic
Bit 16 SDIneg is active Safe direction, negative (From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 17 SDIneg active neg. logic
Bit 18 ES active Safe enable switch
Bit 19 ES active neg. logic
Bit 20 SLI is active Safely limited increment (From SM301 V1.4)
Bit 21 SLI active neg. logic
Bit 22 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 23 OMS neg. logic
Bit 24 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
Subcodes Information
C15051/1 SD-Out1 switching condition
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

116 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15052 SD-Out condition BITFIELD_32 9523d = 2533h

Bit coded selection of the conditions for switching the safe output.
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 SOS monitored Safe operational stop is monitored.
Bit 1 SOS monitors neg. logic Safe operational stop is not monitored.
Bit 2 SLS1 monitored Safely limited speed 1 is monitored.
Bit 3 SLS1 monitored neg. logic Safely limited speed 1 is not monitored.
Bit 4 SLS2 monitored Safely limited speed 2 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 5 SLS2 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 2 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 6 SLS3 monitored Safely limited speed 3 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 7 SLS3 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 3 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 8 SLS4 monitored Safely limited speed 4 is monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 9 SLS4 monitors neg. logic Safely limited speed 4 is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 10 SDIpos monitored Safe positive direction is monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 11 SDIpos monitors neg. logic Safe positive direction is not monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 12 SDIneg monitored Safe negative direction is monitored. (from SM301 V1.3)
Bit 13 SDIneg monitors neg. logic Safe negative direction is not monitored.
(from SM301 V1.3)

Bit 14 SSE active Emergency stop function

Bit 15 SSE active neg. logic
Bit 16 SD−In1 active Safe inputs
Bit 17 SD−In1 active neg. logic
Bit 18 SD−In2 active
Bit 19 SD−In2 active neg. logic
Bit 20 SD−In2 active
Bit 21 SD−In2 active neg. logic
Bit 22 SD−In4 active
Bit 23 SD−In4 active neg. logic
Bit 24 Reserved
Bit 25 Reserved
Bit 26 OMS active Special operation is active (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 27 OMS active neg. logic Special operation is not active (from SM301 V1.1)
Bit 28 Reserved
Bit 29 Reserved
Bit 30 Error active
Bit 31 Error active neg. logic
Subcodes Information
C15052/1 SD-Out1 switching condition
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15055 SD−Out logic function UNSIGNED_8 9520d = 2530h

Selection of the logic operation for the switching conditions to be evaluated

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 OR
1 AND
Subcodes Information
C15055/1 SD−Out1 logic function
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 117

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15060 Output image BITFIELD_16 9515d = 252Bh

Output image of the safety module feedback, shown in channels.

Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 SD-Out1 channel A
Safe output 1
Bit 1 SD-Out1 channel B
Bit 2 reserved
...
Bit 15 reserved
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15100 S bus: Configuration UNSIGNED_8 9475d = 2503h

Configuration of the safety bus

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No safety bus
1 PROFIsafe / PROFIBUS
2 PROFIsafe / PROFINET (As of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15101 Display − DIP switch position UNSIGNED_16 9474d = 2502h

Display of the DIP switch position

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 1023
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15111 Safety address UNSIGNED_16 9464d = 24F8h

Safety address parameterised in the safety module

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 65534 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15112 Effective safety address UNSIGNED_16 9463d = 24F7h

Address used in safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 65534
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

118 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15113 S-Bus: Filter control data BITFIELD_32 9462d = 24F6h

Bit coded selection of the active bit positions in the safety bus control data
Value is bit coded: Information
Bit 0 STO Safe torque off
Bit 1 SS1 Safe stop 1
Bit 2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Bit 3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
Bit 4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4
(From SM301 V1.1)
Bit 7 SDIpos Safe positive direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 8 SDIneg Safe negative direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 9 ES Safe enable switch
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 12 Reserved
...
Bit 15 Reserved
Bit 16 PS_AIS Restart acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 17 PS_AIE Fault acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 18 Reserved
...
Bit 22 Reserved
Bit 23 SSE Emergency stop function
Bit 24 SD−Out1 Safe output
Bit 25 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 119

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15115 S-bus: Control data display BITFIELD_32 9460d = 24F4h

Display of safety bus control data after filtering via C15113

Value is bit coded: Information
(From SM301 V1.2)
Bit 0 STO Safe torque off
Bit 1 SS1 Safe stop 1
Bit 2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Bit 3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
Bit 4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2
Bit 5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3
Bit 6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4
Bit 7 SDIpos Safe positive direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 8 SDIneg Safe negative direction
(From SM301 V1.3)
Bit 9 ES Safe enable switch
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 OMS Safe operation mode selector
Bit 12 Reserved
...
Bit 15 Reserved
Bit 16 PS_AIS Restart acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 17 PS_AIE Fault acknowledgement via safety bus
Bit 18 Reserved
...
Bit 22 Reserved
Bit 23 SSE Emergency stop function
Bit 24 SD−Out1 Safe output
Bit 25 Reserved
...
Bit 31 Reserved
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15200 OMS: Stop function UNSIGNED_8 9375d = 249Fh

Selection of the stop function in special operation

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15201 OMS: motion function UNSIGNED_8 9374d = 249Eh

Selection of the motion function in special operation

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Info
3 SLS1 Safely limited speed 1
(Lenze setting up to SM301 V1.3)
4 SLS2 Safely limited speed 2 (From SM301 V1.1)
5 SLS3 Safely limited speed 3 (From SM301 V1.1)
6 SLS4 Safely limited speed 4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
11 Free traversing (Lenze setting from SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

120 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15202 OMS: Function at LOW level UNSIGNED_8 9373d = 249Dh

Function that is executed in case of LOW level at the safe input with OMS function.
Caution: According to the closed−circuit principle, the parameterisation must not cause any additional danger.
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Normal operation (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Special operation
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15203 SLI: Safely lim. increment UNSIGNED_32 9372d = 249Ch

Number of increments for safely limited increment

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 Lenze: 1, deactivate: 0
(From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15204 SLI: Amount of position change UNSIGNED_32 9371d = 249Bh

Maximum position change while SLI is active.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15205 SSE: Safe stop emergency function UNSIGNED_8 9370d = 249Ah

Selection of the stop function for emergency stop

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15300 Restart behaviour UNSIGNED_8 9275d = 243Bh

Behaviour for restart after functions have been cancelled

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Acknowledged restart
1 Automatic restart
Subcodes Information
C15300/1 Restart - STO, SS1
C15300/2 Restart - SS2, SOS
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15305 SS1, SS2: Stopping time UNSIGNED_16 9270d = 2436h

Stopping time for the SS1 and SS2 safety functions

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15306 SS1 mode UNSIGNED_8 9269d = 2435h

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information

0 STO after stopping time (From SM301 V1.3)

1 STO at n = 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15307 SS1: Deceleration STO after n=0 UNSIGNED_16 9268d = 2434h

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information

0 ms 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 121

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15308 SS2 mode UNSIGNED_8 9267d = 2433h

Selection whether SS2 is to be executed already after reaching n=0 SOS or only after reaching the parameterised
stopping time.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 SOS after stopping time (As of SM301 V1.3)

1 SOS at n = 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15310 Tolerance window (n=0) INTEGER_16 9265d = 2431h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15311 SOS: Tolerance window (Delta p=0) UNSIGNED_32 9264d = 2430h

Safely monitored tolerance window for zero position change

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 327680 Lenze: 0 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15312 SOS: Maximum change in position UNSIGNED_32 9263d = 242Fh

Amount of the maximum change in position while SOS was active

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15315 SS1, SS2: ramp monitoring UNSIGNED_8 9260d = 242Ch

Selection whether the brake ramp is to be monitored when SS1 and SS2 are executed.
Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 No ramp monitoring (From SM301 V1.4)

1 Ramp monitoring is activated

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15316 SS1, SS2: S−ramp time UNSIGNED_8 9259d = 242Bh

S−ramp time of deceleration ramp for SS1 and SS2 if a linear ramp is not used.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 % 100 0 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15317 SS1, SS2: Start offset ramp UNSIGNED_8 9258d = 242Ah

Speed offset at the start of the ramp monitoring.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 % 30 0 (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15320 SMS: Max. speed Nmax INTEGER_16 9255d = 2427h

Selection of the maximum speed and activation of the SMS function

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 1, deactivate: 0
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

122 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15321 SMS: Response (n>Nmax) UNSIGNED_8 9254d = 2426h

Response to the exceeding of the set maximum speed

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15330 SLS: Limited speed Nlim UNSIGNED_16 9245d = 241Dh

Setting of the limited speed

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 Lenze: 0
Subcodes Information
C15330/1 SLS1: Limited speed Nlim1
C15330/2 SLS2: Limited speed Nlim2
(As of SM301 V1.1)
C15330/3 SLS3: Limited speed Nlim3
(As of SM301 V1.1)
C15330/4 SLS4: Limited speed Nlim4
(As of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15331 SLS: Braking time Nlim UNSIGNED_16 9244d = 241Ch

Safely monitored time for braking the drive to the limited speed set in C15330.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
Subcodes Information
C15331/1 SLS1: Braking time Nlim1
C15331/2 SLS2: Braking time Nlim2 (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15331/3 SLS3: Braking time Nlim3 (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15331/4 SLS4: Braking time Nlim4 (as of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15332 SLS: Response (n>Nlim) UNSIGNED_8 9243d = 241Bh

Response in the safety module to the exceeding of the limited speed

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 STO Safe torque off
1 SS1 Safe stop 1
2 SS2 Safe stop 2
Subcodes Information
C15332/1 SLS1: Response (n>Nlim1)
C15332/2 SLS2: Response (n>Nlim2) (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15332/3 SLS3: Response (n>Nlim3) (as of SM301 V1.1)
C15332/4 SLS4: Response (n>Nlim4) (as of SM301 V1.1)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 123

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15333 SLS: Permissible direction of movement UNSIGNED_8 9242d = 241Ah

Permissible direction of movement during SLS monitoring

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 Both directions enabled
1 Positive direction enabled
2 Negative direction enabled
Subcodes Information
C15333/1 SLS1: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301
V1.3)

C15333/2 SLS2: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)

C15333/3 SLS3: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)

C15333/4 SLS4: Permissible direction of movement (from SM301

V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15340 SDI: Monitoring − normal operation UNSIGNED_8 9235d = 2413h

Setting of the monitoring of the direction of movement of the motor during normal operation
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Both directions enabled (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Positive direction enabled

2 Negative direction enabled
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15341 SDI: Deceleration time UNSIGNED_16 9234d = 2412h

Safely monitored time from activation to switching on the monitoring SDIpos/SDIneg

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 30000 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15342 SDI: Tolerance threshold UNSIGNED_32 9233d = 2411h

Setting of the tolerance threshold by how many increments the motor may move towards the direction
inhibited through SDI
Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 327680 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15343 SDI: Error response UNSIGNED_8 9232d = 2410h

Response to a violation of the permitted direction of movement of the motor

Selection list (read only) Information
0 STO (From SM301 V1.3)

1 SS1
2 SS2
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15344 SDI: Maximum change in position UNSIGNED_32 9231d = 240Fh

Maximum change in position in inhibited direction if SDI is active

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 Incr. 2147483647
Subcodes Information
C15344/1 SDIpos: Maximum change in position (from SM301 V1.3)
C15344/2 SDIneg: Maximum change in position (from SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

124 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15350 SLS, SMS: Max. response time UNSIGNED_16 9225d = 2409h

Maximum time after an exceeded speed has been detected, after which the speed must be below the limit
again.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 MS 30000 Lenze: 0, increment: 2 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15400 Motor encoder system UNSIGNED_8 9175d = 23D7h

Selection of the encoder system connected

Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Information
0 No encoder system
1 Sin/cos encoder "Sin/cos encoder" is used instead of the entries
"sine/cosine encoder" and "absolute value encoder
(Hiperface)" of code C00422 of the 9400 standard
device.
2 Resolver
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15401 Motor encoder status UNSIGNED_8 9174d = 23D6h

Status of the encoder evaluation

Selection list (read only) Information
0 Valid Encoder data is valid
1 Fault Encoder data is invalid
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15402 Actual speed value n_safe INTEGER_16 9173d = 23D5h

Display of the current speed calculated from the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
-16000 rpm 16000 With invalid encoder data (C15401 = 1) 32767 is
displayed.
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15405 Internal actual speed value INTEGER_16 9170d = 23D2h

Internal actual speed values of SM301.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
−16000 rpm 16000 (As of SM301 V1.4)
With invalid encoder data (C15401 = 1) 32767 is
displayed.
Subcodes Information
C15405/1 − Internal actual speed value nSM detected from motor
position.
C15405/2 − Internal actual speed value nGG detected from position
data of the standard device.
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15409 Motor mounting direction UNSIGNED_8 9166d = 23CEh

Setting of the motor mounting direction.

Selection list (Lenze setting bold) Information
0 Motor rotating clockwise (From SM301 V1.4)

1 Motor rotating counter−clockwise

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 125

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15410 Response time of encoder monitoring UNSIGNED_8 9165d = 23CDh

Max. internal time after which encoder errors lead to a system response
Selection list Information
0 12 ms (As of SM301 V1.2)
(From SM301 V1.4: Resolver is sole encoder W 50 or 100 ms)
10 50 ms
20 100 ms
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15411 Tolerance of speed comparison UNSIGNED_16 9164d = 23CCh

Tolerance of the speed comparison in the safety module

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 rpm 16000 (From SM301 V1.3)

þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15420 Number of increments − sin/cos encoder UNSIGNED_16 9155d = 23C3h

Number of increments of the sin/cos encoder used

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 16384 Lenze: 1
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15430 Number of pole pairs of resolver UNSIGNED_8 9145d = 23B9h

Number of pole pairs of the used resolver

Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
1 10 Lenze: 1 (From SM301 V1.3)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15500 Position encoder system UNSIGNED_8 9075d = 2373h

Setting of the connected position encoder system

Selection list (read only) Information
0 No position encoder (From SM301 V1.3)

1 Analog encoder (Sin−Cos/TTL)

2 Digital encoder (SSI/BUS)
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15501 Position encoder − gearbox factor UNSIGNED_16 9074d = 2372h

Setting of the gearbox factor between motor and position encoder

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
20 % 50000 Lenze: 100 (From SM301 V1.3)
100 º i = 1.00
2543 º i = 25.43
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15502 Position encoder − mounting direction UNSIGNED_8 9073d = 2371h

Setting of the mounting direction of the position encoder regarding the motor encoder
Selection list (read only) Information
0 Like motor encoder (From SM301 V1.3)
If the mounting directions of the motor (C02527/0)
and position encoder (C02529/0) in the standard
1 Inverted to the motor encoder device are set in different directions of rotation, this
parameter must be set to "inverted to the motor
encoder".
þ Read access } Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

126 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15800 Current error type UNSIGNED_8 8775d = 2247h

Type of the currently pending error

Selection list (read only) Information
0 No error
1 Warning
2 Trouble
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15801 Error history UNSIGNED_16 8774d = 2246h

for Lenze service

Selection list (read only) Information
− − − (As of SM301 V1.2)

Subcodes Information
C15801/1 − Error history 1
...
C15801/8 − Error history 8
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15805 Service code UNSIGNED_32 8770d = 2242h

for Lenze service

Selection list (read only) Information
− − − (From SM301 V1.2)

Subcodes Information
C15805/1 − −
C15805/2 − −
C15805/3 − −
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15810 Service code UNSIGNED_32 8765d = 223Dh

for Lenze service

Selection list (read only) Information
− − − (From SM301 V1.2)

Subcodes Information
C15810/1 − −
...
C15810/11 − −
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15815 Service code UNSIGNED_16 8760d = 2238h

for Lenze service

Selection list (read only) Information
− − − (From SM301 V1.3)

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15820 Internal actual position value INTEGER_32 8755d = 2233h

for Lenze service

Selection list (read only) Information
− − − (From SM301 V1.3)

Subcodes Information
C15820/1 − Internal actual position value pSM
C15820/2 − Internal actual position value pGG
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 127

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15821 Service code INTEGER_16 8754d = 2232h

for Lenze service: Currently monitored speed value of ramp monitoring.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
−16000 rpm 16000 Displayed value is only valid if SS1 or SS2 are active
with ramp monitoring. (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15822 Service code INTEGER_16 8753d = 2231h

for Lenze service: Minimum differences between actual speed value and monitored ramp.
Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
−16000 rpm 16000 The value is kept until the ramp monitoring is
restarted. (From SM301 V1.4)
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15890 Current time UNSIGNED_32 8685d = 21EDh

Relative time for use in logbook.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 4294967295 (From SM301 V1.4)

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15891 Log function UNSIGNED_8 8684d = 21ECh

Setting of the logging behaviour (trigger condition). (From SM301 V1.4)

Selection list Information
0 Logging is active Logging is always active.
1 Logging is stopped Logging is switched off.
2 Stop logging in case of error Logging is stopped if an error occurs.
3 Stop logging in case of STO Logging is stopped if STO occurs.
4 Stop logging in case of SS1 Logging is stopped if SS1 occurs.
5 Stop logging in case of SS2 Logging is stopped if SS2 occurs.
þ Read access þ Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15892 Log time UNSIGNED_32 8683d = 21EBh

Time of log entry.

Display area (min. value | unit | max. value) Information
0 ms 4294967295 (From SM301 V1.4)

Subcodes Information
C15892/1 Log time n
C15892/2 Log time n−1
...
C15892/10 Log time n−9
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15893 Log state BITFIELD_64 8682d = 21EAh

Logged state
Display area Information
− − − (From SM301 V1.4)

Value is bit−coded Information

Bit 0 STO via SD−In STO was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 1 STO via S−bus STO was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 2 STO through error STO was triggered through an error.
Bit 3 Reserved −

128 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15893 Log state BITFIELD_64 8682d = 21EAh

Bit 4 SS1 via SD−In SS1 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 5 SS1 via S−bus SS1 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 6 SS1 through error SS1 was triggered through an error.
Bit 7 Reserved −
Bit 8 SS2 via SD−In SS2 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 9 SS2 via S−bus SS2 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 10 SS2 through error SS2 was triggered through an error.
Bit 11 Reserved −
Bit 12 SLS1 via SD−In SLS1 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 13 SLS1 via S−bus SLS1 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 14 SLS1 via OMS SLS1 was triggered via the operating mode changeover.
Bit 15 Reserved −
Bit 16 SLS2 via SD−In SLS2 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 17 SLS2 via S−bus SLS2 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 18 SLS2 via OMS SLS2 was triggered via the operating mode changeover.
Bit 19 Reserved −
Bit 20 SLS3 via SD−In SLS3 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 21 SLS3 via S−bus SLS3 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 22 SLS3 via OMS SLS3 was triggered via the operating mode changeover.
Bit 23 Reserved −
Bit 24 SLS4 via SD−In SLS4 was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 25 SLS4 via S−bus SLS4 was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 26 SLS4 via OMS SLS5 was triggered via the operating mode changeover.
Bit 27 Reserved −
Bit 28 SDIpos via SD−In SDIpos was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 29 SDIpos via S−bus SDIpos was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 30 SDIpos via SLS SDIpos was triggered in combination with SLS.
Bit 31 SDIpos in normal operation SDIpos was triggered in normal operation.
Bit 32 SDIneg via SD−In SDIneg was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 33 SDIneg via S−bus SDIneg was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 34 SDIneg via SLS SDIneg was triggered in combination with SLS.
Bit 35 SDIneg in normal operation SDIneg was triggered in normal operation.
Bit 36 SLI is active SLI was triggered in special operation.
Bit 37 Reserved −
Bit 38 Reserved −
Bit 39 Reserved −
Bit 40 Special operation via SD−In Special operation was triggered vi a safe input.
Bit 41 Special operation via S−bus Special operation was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 42 Reserved −
Bit 43 Reserved −
Bit 44 ES via SD−In ES was triggered via a safe input.
Bit 45 ES via S−bus ES was triggered via the safety bus.
Bit 46 Reserved −
Bit 47 Reserved −

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 129

1 Safety engineering
Module internal codes

Parameter: Name: Data type: Index:

C15893 Log state BITFIELD_64 8682d = 21EAh

Bit 48 FailSafeValues via control word Safe replacement values on the safety bus were
activated via the control word.
Bit 49 FailSafeValues through error Safe replacement values on the safety bus were
activated through an error.
Bit 50 Reserved −
Bit 51 Reserved −
Bit 52 SD−In1 active The safe input SD−In1 has been switched on.
Bit 53 SD−In2 active The safe input SD−In2 has been switched on.
Bit 54 SD-In3 active The safe input SD−In3 has been switched on.
Bit 55 SD−In4 active The safe input SD−In4 has been switched on.
Bit 56 Reserved −
...
Bit 63 Reserved −
Subcodes Information
C15893/1 Log state n
C15893/2 Log state n−1
...
C15893/10 Log state n−9
þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15900 Firmware − product type VISIBLE_STRING 8675d = 21E3h

Display of the product type (E94AFAE)

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15901 Firmware − compilation date VISIBLE_STRING 8674d = 21E2h

Display of the compilation date

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

C15902 Firmware version VISIBLE_STRING 8673d = 21E1h

Software version of the firmware, e.g.: "V1.0"

þ Read access o Write access o Controller inhibit o PLC-STOP o No transfer

130 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module error messages

1.12 Module error messages

The Parameterisation & Configuration Software Manual provides information on

diagnostics & fault analysis and describes the structure of the operating system’s error
messages in the logbook.

Entries
Field Description Error type/response/
Note
Error number
Internal
1 0x01 Internal error, STO is active Replace safety module.
2 0x02 Internal error, SS1 is active Consultation with Lenze is
required.
3 0x03 Internal error, SS2 is active
Communication − standard device
16 0x10 Communication error − standard device Warning/STO
(communication between standard device and SM301 cancelled)
17 0x11 Synchronisation error − standard device No error status
Logbook entry/info
PROFIsafe
33 0x21 Safety address is invalid (0 or 0xFFFF)
34 0x22 PROFIsafe communication error
35 0x23 F_WD_Time exceeded PROFIsafe passivated/−
(PROFIsafe monitoring time activated) No error status
36 0x24 PROFIsafe deactivated No diagnostic telegram via
37 0x25 PROFIsafe has quit Data Exchange PROFIBUS
38 0x26 PROFIsafe invalid data
39 0x27 Error − F parameter PROFIsafe parameter
(Wrong parameter setting of the F PLC) setting/STO
No error status
40 0x28 Communication error in parameter phase
Inputs
49 0x31 Error − discrepancy or functional test SD−In1
50 0x32 Error − discrepancy or functional test SD−In2
51 0x33 Error − discrepancy or functional test SD−In3
Trouble/−
52 0x34 Error − discrepancy or functional test SD−In4 OFF state for the affected
53 0x35 Internal error AIS input
54 0x36 Internal error AIE
55 0x37 Internal error − module switch
57 0x39 Deactivated SD−In1 = high
(Initialisation error, input in ON state)
58 0x3A Deactivated SD−In2 = high Trouble/STO
59 0x3B Deactivated SD−In3 = high
60 0x3C Deactivated SD−In4 = high

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 131

1 Safety engineering
Module error messages

Field Description Error type/response/

Note
Error number
PROFIsafe
64 0x40 F_Dest_Add does not equal F address
65 0x41 F_Dest_Add = 0 or FFFFhex
66 0x42 F_Source_Add = 0 or FFFFhex
67 0x43 F_WD_Time is 0 msec PROFIsafe parameter
setting/STO
68 0x44 F_SIL exceeds technical SIL No error status
69 0x45 F_CRC_Length error
70 0x46 F parameter version incorrect
71 0x47 PROFIsafe CRC1 error
72 0x48 reserved (PROFIsafe standard) −
73 0x49 reserved (PROFIsafe standard) −
74 0x4A reserved (PROFIsafe standard) −
Test functions
81 0x51 Error SD−Inx/CLx
(internal short circuit in one of the inputs) Trouble/−
82 0x52 Error SD−Inx/CLx OFF state for all SD−In
(internal short circuit in one of the inputs)
89 0x59 Short circuit SD−Out

93 0x5D Error − internal disconnecting path Trouble/STO

(internal error of the safe switch−off logic) OFF state for all SD−In and
SD−Out
94 0x5E Test pulse error − internal switch−off path Trouble/STO
(internal error of the safe switch−off logic)

132 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Safety engineering 1
Module error messages

Field Description Error type/response/

Note
Error number
Safety functions
97 0x61 SS1/SS2: Stopping time exceeded Warning/STO
(The drive has not reached zero speed within the stopping time.)
98 0x62 SLS1: Nlim1 exceeded Warning/response can be
(The drive has exceeded the limited speed.) set
99 0x63 SLS2: Nlim2 exceeded Warning/response can be
(The drive has exceeded the limited speed.) set
100 0x64 SLS3: Nlim3 exceeded Warning/response can be
(The drive has exceeded the limited speed.) set
101 0x65 SLS4: Nlim4 exceeded Warning/response can be
(The drive has exceeded the limited speed.) set
102 0x66 SLS/SMS: Error stop not executed Warning/STO
(The drive has exceeded the limited speed or maximum speed and
has not stopped the drive safely. Following error to no. 0x62 or
0x69)
103 0x67 SDIpos: Wrong direction of movement Warning/response can be
104 0x68 SDIneg: Wrong direction of movement set

105 0x69 SMS: Nmax exceeded Warning/response can be

(The drive has exceeded the monitored maximum speed.) set
106 0x6A SOS: Tolerance limit exceeded Warning/STO
(The drive has exceeded a tolerance limit.)
107 0x6B No encoder system parameterised Warning/STO
(SMS, SLS1 or SS2 are tried to be executed without an encoder
being parameterised.)
108 0x6C CAS: Circulation time exceeded Warning/STO
Maximum time between release and feedback of the cascading
function has been exceeded.
109 0x6D CAS: Hardware or discrepancy error Warning/STO
The cascading output has not been switched off quickly enough
by the hardware or there is a discrepancy at the cascading input.
110 0x6E SS1/SS2: Speed ramp exceeded Warning/STO
Monitoring of the speed ramp is activated. When the stop
function SS1/SS2 is executed, the deceleration of the speed ramp
is monitored. When the monitoring limits are exceeded, an error is
reported.
111 0x6F SLI: Safely limited increment exceeded Warning/STO
The safely limited increment is monitored in the special operation
mode. The parameterised increment has been exceeded.
Test functions − output
128 0x80 Stuck at High SD−Out1, channel A
(Short circuit (High))
129 0x81 Stuck at Low SD−Out1, channel A Trouble/−
(Short circuit (Low)) SD−Out1: OFF state
130 0x82 Stuck at High SD−Out1, channel B
131 0x83 Stuck at Low SD−Out1, channel B

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 133

1 Safety engineering
Module error messages

Field Description Error type/response/

Note
Error number
Test functions − inputs
144 0x90 Stuck at High SD−In1, channel A
(Short circuit (High) Trouble/−
SD−In1: OFF state
145 0x91 Stuck at High SD−In1, channel B
146 0x92 Stuck at High SD−In2, channel A Trouble/−
147 0x93 Stuck at High SD−In2, channel B SD−In2: OFF state
148 0x94 Stuck at High SD−In3, channel A Trouble/−
149 0x95 Stuck at High SD−In3, channel B SD−In3: OFF state
150 0x96 Stuck at High SD−In4, channel A Trouble/−
151 0x97 Stuck at High SD−In4, channel B SD−In4: OFF state
154 0x9A CLA/CLB short circuit Trouble/−
Short circuit between the CLA and CLB clock outputs SD−In: OFF state
Safe parameterisation
160 0xA0 New parameter set deleted
(by the safe parameter setting in the Engineer)
−/−
161 0xA1 New safe parameter set loaded
Logbook entry: Info
(by the safe parameter setting in the Engineer or the procedure
with the module switch)
162 0xA2 Memory module parameter set − access error
(Error while accessing the parameter set of the memory module.)
163 0xA3 Different parameter sets
(in the memory module and SM301)
164 0xA4 No safe parameter set in the safety module
(SM301 has no parameter set.) Trouble/STO
165 0xA5 Defective parameter set OFF state for all SD−In and
(SM301 parameter set is defective.) SD−Out
166 0xA6 Parameter set in memory module − format error
(Format error in parameter set of memory module)
167 0xA7 Parameter set − plausibility error
168 0xA8 Parameter set − communication error
(Communication error when loading the parameter set)
169 0xA9 Module ID does not equal effective safety address Warning/STO
(Module ID in the parameter set does not equal the effective OFF state for all SD−In and
safety address) SD−Out
Test functions − internal module
192 0xC0 Reference voltage error

193 0xC1 6 V voltage error

Trouble/STO
OFF state for all SD−In and
194 0xC2 5 V voltage error SD−Out

195 0xC3 2.6 V voltage error

208 0xD0 Safe speed is invalid Trouble/STO

209 0xD1 SSM: Encoder error Trouble/STO
210 0xD2 SSM: Resolver error Trouble/STO
211 0xD3 SSM: Standard device data error
212 0xD4 SSM: Speed comparison error Trouble/STO
213 0xD5 SSM: Synchronisation error
214 0xD6 SSM: Wrong PDO version Trouble/STO
Tab. 1−24 Description of the numerical entries

134 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Appendix 2
Declarations of conformity

2 Appendix

2.1 Declarations of conformity

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 135

2 Appendix
Declarations of conformity

136 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Appendix 2
Index

2.2 Index

A Firmware
− date (C15902), 130
Address code, 86
− product type (C15900), 130
Address switch, 86 − version (C15902), 130
Application as directed, 8
Application range, 17 H
Application, as directed, 8 Hazard analysis, 10
Applications according to
− EN ISO 13849−1, 5 I
− IEC 61508, 5 Identification, 16
Input image (C15040), 115
B
Inputs, safe, 28
Braking time Nlim (C15331), 70, 123
Internal actual position value (C15810), 127
Bus interfaces, 88
Internal actual speed value (C15405), 44, 125

C
CAS: Cascading (C15035), 85, 115
L
Legal regulations, 8
CAS: Stop delay (C15036), 85, 115
Limited speed Nlim (C15330), 70, 123
Cascading, 83
Log function (C15890), 103, 128
Codes, Module internal, 110
Command status (C15003), 112 Log state (C15893), 104, 128

Compatibility, 20 Log time (C15892), 104, 128

Compatibility , 20 Logbook function

− in SM301, 103
Control category, 5
− in the controller, 103
Current time (C15890), 103, 128

M
D
Max. response time (C15350), 66, 71, 125
Definitions, terms, 6
Maximum speed Nmax (C15320), 66, 122
DIP switch, position display (C15101), 87, 118
Module ID, 86
Direction of movement, Safe ..., 72
Module internal codes, 110

E Motor encoder status (C15401), 44, 125

effective safety address (C15112), 87, 101, 118 Motor encoder system (C15400), 44, 125

Emergency stop, 65 Motor mounting direction (C15409), 44, 125

Error, current error type (C15800), 127 Motor−encoder combinations, 19

Error history (C15801), 127

Error states, 102
N
Nameplate data, 16
F Number of increments − sin/cos encoder (C15420), 45, 126
Fail−safe status, 15 Number of pole pairs of resolver (C15430), 45, 126

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 137

2 Appendix
Index

O Safe output, 35

Output, safe, 35 Safe parameter setting, 99

Output image (C15060), 38, 118 Safe position detection, 40

Safe speed measurement, 40
P Safe stop 1, 54
Parameter CRC (C15011), 112 Safe stop 2, 58
Parameter set status (C15010), 112 Safe stop emergency function (C15205), 29, 46, 65, 121
Parameter set version (C15016), 113 Safe torque off, 52
Parameter setting, safe, 99 Safely limited speed, 69
Password, length, reset, 99 Safety, safety engineering, 5
Performance Level, 5 Safety address, 86
Position detection, 40 Safety address (C15111), 87, 118
Position encoder − mounting direction (C15502), 45, 126 Safety bus
Position encoder system (C15500), 45, 126 − configuration (C15100), 88, 118
Priorisation, 46 − control data display (C15115), 93, 120
− Filter control data (C15113), 92, 119
PROFIsafe connection, 88
Safety category, 20

R Safety engineering, 5
− safety functions, 46
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2, 62
− with L−force | 9400, 5
Residual hazards, 9
Safety functions, 5, 46
Response (n>Nlim) (C15332), 70, 123 − safety instructions, during operation, 9
Response (n>Nmax) (C15321), 66, 123 Safety instructions, during operation, 9
Response time of encoder monitoring (C15410), 44, 126 SDI: Deceleration time (C15341), 74, 124
Response times, 105 SDI: Error response (C15343), 74, 124
− output, 106
SDI: Maximum change in position (C15344), 74, 124
Restart, 48
SDI: Monitoring − normal operation (C15340), 74, 124
Restart behaviour (C15300), 48, 52, 56, 61, 121
SDI:Tolerance threshold (C15342), 74, 124
Risk analysis, 10
Sensors, Overview ..., 11
Service code (C15805), 127
S
Service code (C15810), 127
S−DIn discrepancy time (C15033), 30, 114
S−DIn free assignment (C15032), 29, 114 Service code (C15821), 128

S−DIn input delay (C15034), 31, 114 Service code (C15822), 128

S−DIn sensor function (C15031), 28, 82, 113 SLI: Amount of position change (C15204), 80, 121

S−DIn sensor type (C15030), 28, 113 SLI: Safely lim. increment (C15203), 80, 121

S−DOut condition (C15051), 36, 116 SLS: Permissible direction of movement (C15333), 71, 124

S−DOut condition (C15052), 37, 117 SOS: Maximum change in position (C15312), 61, 122

Safe direction, 72 Special operation

− motion function (C15201), 80, 120
Safe enable switch, 82
− stop function (C15200), 80, 120
Safe inputs, 28
Speed
Safe maximum speed, 66 − Safe maximum ..., 66
Safe operation mode selector, 76 − safely limited ..., 69

138 l EDS94AYAE EN 7.1

 Appendix 2
Index

Speed measurement, Safe, 40 Stop functions, about ..., 46

Speed n_safe (C15402), 44, 125 Stopping time − SS1, SS2 (C15305), 47, 56, 61, 63, 121
Speed window (n=0) (C15310), 56, 61, 63, 122 Stored module ID (C15017), 87, 113
speed window (n=0) (C15310), 61, 122
SS1, SS2: Ramp monitoring (C15315), 63, 122 T
SS1, SS2: S−ramp time (C15316), 64, 122 Terms, definitions, 6
SS1, SS2: Start offset ramp (C15317), 64, 122 Time − RTC parameter setting (C15014), 112
SS1: Deceleration STO after n=0 (15307), 56, 121 Time − sec. parameter setting (C15015), 112
SS2 mode (C15308), 61, 122 Time for parameter set creation (C15013), 112
Stop 1 Tolerance of speed comparison (C15411), 45, 126
− ramp monitoring, 62
Torque, safe torque off, 52
− safe ..., 54
Stop 2
− ramp monitoring, 62 V
− safe ..., 58 Validity of the documentation, 16

EDS94AYAE EN 7.1 l 139

 © 04/2022
F Lenze SE Service Lenze Service GmbH
Postfach 10 13 52 · 31763 Hameln Breslauer Straße 3 · 32699 Extertal
Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 · 31855 Aerzen
GERMANY GERMANY
Hannover HRB 204803
( +495154 82−0 ( 0080002446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +495154 82−2800 Ê +49515482−1112
š [email protected] š [email protected]
ü www.lenze.com
EDS94AYAE § .G)! § EN § 7.1 § TD00
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EDS94AYAF
.UBo
L−force Drives
Ä.UBoä
Translation Manual

9400

E94AYAF − SM302

Safety module

l
, Please read these instructions and the documentation of the standard device before you
start working!
Observe the safety instructions given therein!
0Fig. 0Tab. 0
 Contents i

1 Safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1.5 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.1.6 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1.7 Hazard and risk analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.8 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.9 Overview of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Device modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.1 Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3.3 SM302 safety module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.3.4 Mission time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.5 Safe inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.6 Safe output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.7 Further inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.3.8 Safe speed measurement and position detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4 Safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.4.2 Integration into the application of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.4.3 Safe torque off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.4.4 Safe stop 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.4.5 Safe stop 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.4.6 Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.4.7 Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.4.8 Safe maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1.4.9 Safely limited speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.4.10 Safe direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1.4.11 Safely limited position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.4.12 Position−dependent safe speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.4.13 Safe cam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.4.14 Safe referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.4.15 Repair mode select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.4.16 Safe operation mode selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.4.17 Safe enable switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.4.18 Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.5 Safety address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 3
i Contents

1.6 Safe bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

1.6.1 PROFIsafe connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.6.2 FSoE connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.7 Safe parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.7.1 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.7.2 Parameter sets and axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.8 Error management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.8.1 Error states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.8.2 Logbook function in the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.8.3 Logbook function in the SM302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.9 Response times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.9.1 Response times of the inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.9.2 Response time of the safe output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.9.3 Response times of the safety bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.9.4 Response time of encoder monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.10 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.10.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.10.2 Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.11 Module error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.1 Declarations of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.2 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Introduction

1 Safety engineering

1.1 Basics

1.1.1 Introduction

With increasing automation, protection of persons against hazardous movements is

becoming more important. Functional safety describes the measures needed by means of
electrical or electronic equipment to reduce or remove danger caused by failures.
During normal operation, safety equipment prevents people accessing hazardous areas. In
certain operating modes, e.g. set−up mode, work needs to be carried out in hazardous
areas. In these situations the machine operator must be protected by integrated drive and
control measures.
Drive−based safety provides the conditions in the controls and drives to optimise the safety
functions. Planning and installation expenditure is reduced. In comparison to the use of
standard safety engineering, drive−based safety increases machine functionality and
availability.

1.1.2 Drive−based safety with L−force | 9400

The controllers of the L−force|9400 range can be equipped with a safety module. The
functional range of the safety module types varies in order to optimally implement
different applications.
"Drive−based safety" stands for applied safety functions, which can be used for the
protection of persons working on machines.
The motion functions are continued to be executed by the controller. The safety modules
monitor the safe compliance with the limit values and provide the safe inputs and outputs.
When the limit values are exceeded the safety modules start the control functions
according to EN 60204−1 directly in the controller.
The safety functions are suitable for applications according to IEC 61508 to SIL 3 or 4 and
meet, depending on the module, the requirements of Performance Level e (PL e) and
control category 4 according to EN ISO 13849−1.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 5
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

1.1.3 Terms and abbreviations of the safety engineering

Abbreviation Meaning
9400 Lenze servo controller
Cat. Category according to EN ISO 13849−1 (formerly EN 954−1)
OSSD Output Signal Switching Device, tested signal output
PS PROFIsafe
PWM Pulse width modulation
SD−In Safe input (Safe Digital Input)
SD−Out Safe output (Safe Digital Output)
SIL Safety Integrity Level according to IEC 61508
SM Safety module
Optocoupler Optocoupler supply for the driver control
supply
PELV Protective extra low voltage
SELV Safety extra low voltage
OFF state Signal status of the safety sensor technology when it is released or responding
ON state Signal status of the safety sensor technology in normal operation
PM PN−switched signal paths
PP PP−switched signal paths
GSE File containing device−specific data to establish PROFIBUS communication
GSDML File containing device−specific data to establish PROFINET communication
S−Bus Safety bus

Abbreviation Safety function

SLS Safely limited speed
SLI Safely limited increment
SOS Safe operating stop
SS1 Safe stop 1
SS2 Safe stop 2
STO Safe torque off
Formerly: safe standstill
SMS Safe maximum speed
SDI Safe direction
SSE Safe stop emergency
ES Safe enable switch
OMS Operation mode selector
AIE Error acknowledgement (Acknowledge In Error)
AIS Restart acknowledgement (Acknowledge In Stop)
SLP Safely Limited Position
SCA Safe Cam
PDSS Position−dependent Safe Speed
FSoE Fail Safe over EtherCAT
RMS Repair Mode Select

6 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Registered trademarks

1.1.4 Registered trademarks

Term / logo Information

PROFINET® (Process Field Network) is a real−time capable fieldbus system
based on Ethernet.
PROFINET® is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by the
PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI) user organisation.
The certified safety protocol for transmitting safety−oriented data via
PROFINET®.

EtherCAT® (Ethernet for Controller and Automation Technology) is an

Ethernet−based fieldbus system meeting the application profile for industrial
realtime systems.
EtherCAT® is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by
Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
Safety over EtherCAT® is a registered trademark and patented technology,
licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 7
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Important notes

1.1.5 Important notes

The following pictographs and signal words are used in this documentation to indicate
dangers and important information:

Safety instructions
Structure of safety instructions:

} Danger!
(characterises the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and gives information about how to prevent dangerous
situations)

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage.

{ Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.
Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger.

} Danger!
Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or
serious personal injury if the corresponding measures are not
taken.

(
Danger of property damage.
Stop! Reference to a possible danger that may result in property
damage if the corresponding measures are not taken.

Application notes
Pictograph and signal word Meaning

) Note! Important note to ensure troublefree operation

I Tip! Useful tip for simple handling

, Reference to another documentation

Special safety instructions and application notes

Pictograph and signal word Meaning

J Warnings! Safety note or application note for the operation according to

UL or CSA requirements.

O
The measures are required to meet the requirements according
Warnings! to UL or CSA.

8 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Safety instructions

1.1.6 Safety instructions

Application as directed
The safety modules SMx (E94AYAx) may only be used together with Lenze drive controllers
of the L−force | 9400 (E94A... / E94B...) series.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!

Installation/commissioning

} Danger!
Danger to life through improper installation
Improper installation of safety engineering systems can cause an uncontrolled
starting action of the drives.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Death or severe injuries
Protective measures:
ƒ Safety engineering systems may only be installed and commissioned by
qualified and skilled personnel.
ƒ All control components (switches, relays, PLC, ...) and the control
cabinetmust comply with the requirements of EN ISO 13849−1 and EN ISO
138492. Thisincludes i.a.:
– Switches, relays with at least IP54 enclosure.
– Control cabinet with at least IP54 enclosure.
– Please refer to EN ISO 13849−1 and EN ISO 138492 for all further
requirements.
ƒ It is essential to use insulated wire end ferrules for wiring.
ƒ All safety relevant cables outside the control cabinet must be protected, e.g.
by means of a cable duct:
– Ensure that no short circuits can occur.
– For further measures see EN ISO 138492.
ƒ If an external force acts upon the drive axes, additional brakes are required.
Please observe that hanging loads are subject to the force of gravity!

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 9
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Safety instructions

} Danger!
When the request for the safety function is deactivated, the drive can restart
automatically. The behaviour can be set via the parameter "Restart behaviour"
(C15300/1/2).
In the case of an automatic restart, you must provide external measures which
ensure that the drive only restarts after an acknowledgement (EN 60204).

} Danger!
When the "safe torque off" (STO) function is used, an "emergency
switching−off" according to EN 60204 is not possible without additional
measures. There is no electrical isolation, no service switch or repair switch
between motor and controller!
Emergency switching−off" requires an electrical isolation, e.g. by a central
mains contactor!

During operation
After the installation is completed, the operator must check the wiring of the safety
function.
The functional test must be repeated at regular intervals. The time intervals to be selected
depend on the application, the entire system and the corresponding risk analysis. The
inspection interval should not exceed one year.

Residual hazards
In case of a short−circuit of two power transistors a residual movement of the motor of up
to 180 °/number of pole pairs may occur! (Example: 4−pole motor Þ residual movement
max. 180 °/2 = 90 °)
This residual movement must be considered in the risk analysis, e.g. safe torque off for
main spindle drives.

10 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Basics
Hazard and risk analysis

1.1.7 Hazard and risk analysis

This documentation can only accentuate the need for hazard analysis. The user of the
integrated safety system must read up on standards and the legal situation:
Before the launch of a machine, the manufacturer of the machine must conduct a hazard
analysis according to 2006/42/EC: Machinery Directive [UKCA: S.I. 2008/1597 − The Supply
of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008] to determine the hazards associated with the
application of the machine. The Machinery Directive refers to three basic principles for the
highest possible level of safety:
ƒ Hazard elimination / minimisation by the construction itself.
ƒ Required protective measures must be taken against hazards which cannot be
eliminated.
ƒ Existing residual hazards must be documented and the user must be informed of
them.
Detailed information on the hazard analysis procedure is provided in the
DIN EN ISO 12100:2013−08 − ""Safety of machinery − General principles for design, risk
assessment and risk reduction". The results of the hazard analysis determine the category
for safety−related control systems according to EN ISO 13849−1. Safety−oriented parts of
the machine control must be compliant.

1.1.8 Standards

Safety regulations are confirmed by laws and other governmental guidelines and
measures and the prevailing opinion among experts, e.g. by technical regulations.
The regulations and rules to be applied must be observed in accordance with the
application.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 11
1 Safety engineering
Basics
Overview of sensors

1.1.9 Overview of sensors

Passive sensors
Passive sensors are two−channel switching elements with contacts. The connecting cables
and the sensor function must be monitored.
The contacts must switch simultaneously (equivalently). Nevertheless, safety functions
will be activated as soon as at least one channel is switched.
The switches must be wired according to the closed−circuit principle.
Examples of passive sensors:
ƒ Door contact switch
ƒ Emergency stop control units

Active sensors
Active sensors are units with 2−channel semiconductor outputs (OSSD outputs). With the
integrated safety system of this device series, test pulses < 1 ms for monitoring the
outputs and cables are permissible. The maximally permissible connection capacity of the
outputs is to be observed. Active sensors are wired directly to the terminals of the
integrated safety system. Monitoring for cross or short circuits must be carried out by the
active sensor.
P/M−switching sensors switch the positive and negative cable or the signal and ground
wire of a sensor signal.
The outputs must switch simultaneously (equivalently). Nevertheless, safety functions
will be activated as soon as at least one channel is switched. Active triggering of only one
channel indicates faulty sensors or impermissible wiring.
Examples of active sensors:
ƒ Lightgrid
ƒ Laser scanner
ƒ Control systems

Sensor inputs
For unused sensor inputs, "Input deactivated" must be parameterised.
Connected deactivated sensors can create the false impression of safety technology being
provided. For this reason, a deactivation of sensors by parameter setting only is not
permissible and not possible. It is monitored that no sensor signal is pending.

12 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

1.2 Safety instructions for the installation according to UL/CSA

Original − English

J Warnings!
ƒ Secondary circuit shall supplied from an external isolating source.
ƒ Maximum surrounding air temperature: 55 °C.

Original − French

J Avertissement !
ƒ Prévoir un circuit auxiliaire alimenté par une source de tension avec
isolation galvanique.
ƒ Température ambiante maximale : 55 °C.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 13
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Slot

1.3 Device modules

1.3.1 Slot

The slot for the safety modules is marked in the documentation with M4. It is the lowest
slot in the controller (see overview in the documentation of the controller).

1.3.1.1 Mounting

E94AYAX001

1.3.1.2 Dismounting

E94AYCXX001H

14 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Slot

1.3.1.3 Module exchange

( Stop!
Before mounting/dismounting, switch off the supply voltage to prevent
electronic modules from damage.
Every module exchange is detected by the standard device and documented in a logbook.
When a module is replaced by the same type, no restrictions arise. Depending on the
module type it may be necessary to take further measures (e.g. address setting, safe
parameter setting, ...).
When the module is replaced by a different type, the drive is inhibited by the controller. The
inhibit can only be deactivated when the parameter setting of the required safety module
complies with the plugged safety module.

) Note!
In case you exchange the module, the address switch 0 must be set identically
to the module to be replaced. Only then the corresponding safe parameter set
can be transferred to the module.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 15
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Function mode of the safety modules

1.3.2 Function mode of the safety modules

Disconnecting paths
The transmission of the pulse width modulation is safely disconnected by the safety
module. Hence the drivers do not create a rotating field. The motor is safely switched to
torqueless operation (STO).

Xx
SMx

µC

3x
M

PWM
C P 3x

SSP94SM320

Fig. 1−1 Disconnecting paths of the safety modules

SMx Safety module
xx Input / output terminal
C Control section
mC Microcontroller
PWM Pulse width modulation
P Power section
M Motor

Safety status
When the controller is switched off by the safety module, the controller switches to the
"Safe torque off"device state.
ƒ "Controller in STO state" is entered into the logbook (0x00750003).
ƒ "Safe torque off active" is displayed in C00183.

Fail−safe status

) Note!
If internal errors of the safety modules are detected, the motor is safely
switched to torque−free operation (fail−safe status).

16 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM302 safety module

1.3.3 SM302 safety module

Validity information
This documentation is valid for:
SM302 safety module
Type HW SW
E94AYAF from VA As of 1.0

Identification

L
Type

‚ƒ
E94YCEI003C E94AYXX001

 ‚ ƒ „
E94 A Y A x xx xx nn
Product series
Version
Module identification: Device module
Module type: Safety module
Design
A = SM0
B = SM100
E = SM301
F = SM302
Hardware version
Software version (SM30x only)
Serial number

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 17
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM302 safety module

Application range
The use of this module is permissible with standard devices of the 9400 product series from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AxHExxxx 2A 13.xx
E94BSHExxxx PA −
E94AxPExxxx 2A 07.xx
E94BSPExxxx PA −

The use of this module is permissible with the PROFINET® communication module from
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AYCER VF 03.xx

The use of this module is permissible with the EtherCAT® communication module from the
nameplate designation
Type HW SW
E94AYCET VF 04.xx

) Note!
A safety bus system can only be operated via the upper module slot (MXI1) of
the Servo Drive 9400.

18 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM302 safety module

1.3.3.1 Overview
Functions from SM302 V1.0 onwards
ƒ Safe torque off (STO)
(formerly: safe standstill, protection against unexpected start−up)
ƒ Safe stop 1 (SS1)
ƒ Safe stop 2 (SS2) − see SOS
ƒ Safe stop emergency (SSE)
ƒ Safe operational stop (SOS)
ƒ Safe maximum speed (SMS)
ƒ Safely limited speed 1 ... 4 (SLS1 ... SLS4)
ƒ Safe direction (SDI)
ƒ Safely limited increment (SLI)
ƒ Safely limited position (SLP)
ƒ Safe cam (SCA)
ƒ Safe referencing (SREF)
ƒ Safe speed and position monitoring
– with resolver and encoder as motor encoder
– or optionally with additional position encoder (2−encoder concept)
ƒ Position−dependent safe speed (PDSS)
ƒ Safe cascading (CAS) via SD−In4/SD−Out1
ƒ Safety bus connection (PROFIsafe V2)
ƒ Fail Safe over EtherCAT − Slave (FSoE))
ƒ Safe operation mode selector (OMS)
ƒ Repair mode select (RMS)
ƒ Safe enable switch (ES)
ƒ Safe monitor (safe output)
ƒ Connection of safety sensors (safe inputs)
ƒ Safe parameter setting
ƒ Parameterisable response time of encoder monitoring

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 19
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM302 safety module

Compatibility
Compatibility of different SM302 versions
Replacement of an SM302 by an SM302 with a higher firmware version (SW):
ƒ Every SM302 can be used with a safe parameter set of an elder firmware version
without any changes.
ƒ The safe parameter set including CRC in the memory module of the drive is not
changed by the SM302 when the parameter set from the memory module is
accepted.
ƒ The CE Declaration of Conformity remains valid.
ƒ Safe parameter sets of the "SM302 safety module" component can be loaded into
an SM302 with a higher firmware version without any changes.
– Extended functionalities of the newer firmware version cannot be selected and
executed.
The safe parameter set of an SM302 with a newer firmware version cannot be loaded into
an SM302 with an elder firmware version.

1.3.3.2 Elements of the module

SSP94SM321b

Fig. 1−2 Module view

Pos. Description
0 Safety address switch (in the left part of the housing)
S82 Module switch for parameter set adoption from the memory module
X82.1
X82.2
Plug−in terminal strips for input and output signals
X82.3
X82.4

20 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM302 safety module

Displays
Pos. Colour State Description
On Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault.
Drive−based safety has initialised without a fault. Internal
Blinking
communication to the standard device is not possible.
MS Green Drive−based safety is in service status.
(Module State) Flashing
For exiting, parameterise the drive−based safety.
Drive−based safety is not initialised.
Off
Acknowledgement is not possible.
EN On Controller enabled
Yellow
(Enable) Off Non−safe display "STO"
On System error

ME Blinking Trouble
Red
(Module Error) Flashing Warning
Off Error−free operation
Request of an acknowledgement for the restart or the
On
parameter set adoption
AS Yellow Blinking SS1/STO active
(Acknowledge Stop)
Flashing SS2/SOS active
Off No stop function active
Safety bus error:
On l Communication is not possible.
BE l Acknowledgement is possible.
Red
(Bus Error)
Blinking Safety bus error: no valid configuration.
Off Safety bus: error−free operation.
Drive−based safety is not accepted by the standard device
On
DE (see notes in the instructions for the standard device).
Red
(Drive Error) Drive−based safety is correctly recognised by the standard
Off
device.
Blinking: on/off every 0.5 s Flashing: on/off every 0.1/0.9 s

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 21
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM302 safety module

Terminal assignment
X82.1 Labelling Description

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

GO GND SD−Out1
O1B Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel B
O1A Safe monitor SD−Out1, channel A

This part of the terminal strip is not assigned.

X82.2 Labelling Description

− GND external supply
+ +24 V external supply via a safely separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
GIR
This part of the terminal strip is reserved.
RI1
GO GND 24O
24O +24 V external supply for the safe monitor SD−Out1 (SELV/PELV)
AIE Error acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Error")
CLA Clock output for passive sensors, channel A (Clock A)
CLB Clock output for passive sensors, channel B (Clock B)

22 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
SM302 safety module

X82.3 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI2 GND SD−In2
I2B Sensor input SD−In2, channel B
I2A Sensor input SD−In2, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI1 GND SD−In1
I1B Sensor input SD−In1, channel B
I1A Sensor input SD−In1, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.4/AIS)

X82.4 Labelling Description

GCL GND clock output
GI4 GND SD−In4
I4B Sensor input SD−In4, channel B
I4A Sensor input SD−In4, channel A
GCL GND clock output
GI3 GND SD−In3
I3B Sensor input SD−In3, channel B
I3A Sensor input SD−In3, channel A
AIS Restart acknowledgement input ("Acknowledge In Stop", 1−channel,
bridged to X82.3/AIS)

Cable cross−sections and tightening torques

Type [mm2] [Nm] AWG [lb−in]
Wire end ferrule,
0.25 ... 0.75 24 ... 18
insulated Spring terminal Spring terminal
Rigid 0.14 ... 1.5 26 ... 16
Stripping length or contact length: 9 mm

Insulated wire end ferrules according to DIN 46228, part 4, 0.5 mm2 or 0.75 mm2 − length
L1 = 10 mm can be used.

) Note!
Provide for a sufficient strain relief, so that the terminals are not pulled from
the plug connectors, in particular when you use rigid cables.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 23
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
SM302 safety module

1.3.3.3 Technical data

24 V supply
The module and the safe output must be supplied with 24 V from safely separated power
supply units. If electrical isolation is required, separate voltage supplies must be used.
Detailed features of the 24−V supply
Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
+, − Supply voltage of the module via a safely separated [V] 19.2 24 30
power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 350
24O, GO Supply voltage of the safe output via a safely [V] 18 24 30
separated power supply unit (SELV/PELV)
Input current [mA] 1100

Inputs and output

The inputs and the output are isolated and designed for a low−voltage supply of 24 V DC.
The digital inputs are protected against polarity reversal.
Detailed features of the safe inputs and the safe output
Terminal Specification [Unit] min. typ. max.
I1A, I1B PLC input, IEC−61131−2, 24 V, type 1
I2A, I2B Low signal input voltage V −3 0 5
I3A, I3B
I4A, I4B Input current at low signal mA 15
AIE, AIS High signal input voltage V 15 24 30
Input current at high signal mA 2 15
Input capacitance nF 3.5
Repetition rate of the test pulses ms 50
AIE, AIS Input delay (operating time) s 0.3 10
CLA, CLB PLC output, IEC−61131−2, 24 V DC, 50 mA
Low signal output voltage V 0 0.8
High signal output voltage V 17 24 30
Output current mA 60
Cable capacity nF 100
Cable resistance of a passive sensor W 200
O1A, O1B PLC output, IEC−61131−2, 24 V DC
Low signal output voltage V 0 0.8
High signal output voltage V 17 24 30
Output current mA 500
Cable capacity nF 100
Cable resistance W 200
Tab. 1−1 Technical data

The chapter "Response times" must be observed as well (¶ 1.9).

24 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Mission time

1.3.3.4 Safety−related characteristics

Safety−related characteristics SM302
Value Comment
Control category according to Cat. 4 Category
EN ISO 13849−1
Risk reduction according to PL E Performance Level
EN ISO 13849−1
Risk reduction according to EN 61508 and SIL 3 Safety Integrity Level
EN 62061
Probability of dangerous failure per hour PFH < E−9 1/h < 1 % of SIL 3
Probability of dangerous Failure per Hour
Probability of dangerous failure via the PFD < E−4 < 10 % of SIL 3
test interval Probability of dangerous Failure on Demand
Safe failure fraction SFF 99 % Safe Failure Fraction
Proof test interval/mission time t 20 years Proof Test Interval/Mission Time
Mean operating time to failure MTTF High 250 years
d Mean Time To Failure dangerous
Average diagnostic coverage DCav High ~ 95 %
Diagnostic Coverage

ƒ In order to comply with control category 4 according to EN ISO 13849−1, external

wiring and cable monitoring must meet the requirements of category 4 (see chapter
1.3.5 and 1.3.6).
1.3.4 Mission time

The mission time) of the used component must be observed and complied with.
The given mission time is counted from the manufacturing date. The manufacturing dates
can be read out using the Lenze »Engineer« PC software. These can be found in the
parameter list within the "Identification" column.

) Note!
After the mission time of a component has elapsed, the component must be
taken out of service or replaced. Any further operation is not permissible!

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 25
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Mission time

1.3.4.1 Example circuit

SM302
E94AYAF
X82.1 X82.2
24 V ext.
-

GO

O1B GO

O1A 24O
‚
AIE

CLA

CLB

GCL GCL
S4
GI2 GI4

I2B I4B

I2A I4A

S2 GCL GCL
S3
GI1 GI3

I1B I3B

I1A I3A

S1 K AIS AIS

X82.3 X82.4
SSP94SM360b

Fig. 1−3 Wiring example

E94AYAF SM302 safety module
S1
Passive sensor with channel A and B
S2
S3 higher−level safety control (active sensor)
S4 lightgrid (active sensor)
24 V ext. 24−V voltage supply of the module (SELV/PELV)
 24−V voltage supply of the output (SELV/PELV)
‚ safe output to higher−level safety control
K to AIS of the next module

26 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Mission time

1.3.4.2 Commissioning
ƒ For commissioning and safe parameter setting, the Lenze »Engineer« PC
software from version 02.23 must be used.
If you select the safety module in the Project view, various tabs are available in the
Operating rangevia which the safety module can be parameterised. In all other
program parts the parameters of the safety module can only be read. Thus, the write
access of these parameters (codes) is marked with }.
ƒ Settings in or at the module:
– Safety address
– Safe parameter setting of the functions to be used
ƒ Required settings in the basic device:
– C00214, type of safety module
– Implementation of the SM302 into the drive application by evaluating the control
information and status information.
ƒ During commissioning and after the replacement of a module it is vital to check the
safety function. Additional information contains the "Acceptance" chapter. (¶ 79).

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 27
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.5 Safe inputs

1.3.5.1 General
The following applies to the sensors on the SM302:
ƒ The sensor type and function can be parameterised.
ƒ A local evaluation is executed if corresponding parameters are set.
ƒ If a safety bus is activated, the sensor signals are sent as status information to the
higher−level control.
ƒ Deactivated sensor inputs must not be connected. The status of a non−connected
input is OFF.
ƒ If a signal is detected at deactivated sensor inputs during initialisation, the drive
remains inhibited (STO).
ƒ Faulty inputs are assessed as OFF state.

28 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe inputs

Specification Sensor type

passive active
Discrepancy time parameterisable 0 ... 30000 ms (increment: 2 ms)
Input delay parameterisable 0 ... 100 ms (increment: 2 ms)
Input filter time for test pulses fixed 2 ms
Repetition rate of the test pulses is determined by the clock outputs
> 50 ms
CLA and CLB
Error response Sensor input is assessed as OFF state.
Acknowledgement via safety bus or AIE input
Tab. 1−2 Specification of sensor connections

Explanations
ƒ Discrepancy time
Maximum time in which both channels of a safe input may have non−equivalent states
without the safety engineering causing an error response.
ƒ Input delay
Time between the recognition of the signal change and the effective evaluation of an
input signal. As a result, multiple and short signal changes due to contact bounce of the
components are not taken into account.
ƒ Input filter time
Time in which the interference pulses and test pulses are not detected by e.g. active
sensors that are switched on.
The input delay time and the time of the input filters influence the response time. More
information can be found in the "Response times" chapter (¶ 76).

Contact function test

) Note!
Make sure that an internal contact function test is carried out at the safe
inputs:
Safe input in the ON state
ƒ A LOW level at one channel puts the input in the OFF state. The discrepancy
monitoring starts simultaneously.
ƒ A LOW level must be detected at both channels within the discrepancy time,
otherwise a discrepancy error will be reported.
ƒ To be able to acknowledge the discrepancy error, a LOW level must be
detected before at both channels.
Safe input in the OFF state
ƒ A HIGH level at one channel starts the discrepancy monitoring.
ƒ A HIGH level must be detected at both channels within the discrepancy
time, otherwise a discrepancy error will be reported.
ƒ To be able to acknowledge the discrepancy error, a HIGH level must be
detected before at both channels.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 29
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

ON state

Value of safe input:

ON state

Switch both channels One channel in

to ON state OFF state

Discrepancy monitoring Discrepancy monitoring

Value of safe input: Value of safe input:

OFF state OFF state

One channel in Switch both channels

ON state to OFF state

OFF state

Value of safe input:

OFF state

SSP94SM355

Fig. 1−4 Status behaviour − contact function test

D

SSP94SM358_1

Fig. 1−5 Contact function test − error−free input signals

AIE
 ‚ ƒ „
SSP94SM358_2

Fig. 1−6 Contact function test − faulty input signals

A, B Safe input, channel A and channel B
C Internal valuation of the safe input
D Discrepancy monitoring
AIE Fault acknowledgement
 Discrepancy monitoring active
‚ Discrepancy monitoring − time−out
ƒ Fault acknowledgement impermissible
„ Fault acknowledgement permissible

30 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.5.2 Connection of passive sensors

The safe sensor inputs I1A ... I4B are suitable for equivalently switching passive sensors.
To monitor passive sensors according to EN ISO 13849−1, cat. 3 or cat. 4, the clock outputs
CLA and CLB must be wired. Please observe the following:
ƒ The clock outputs are only suitable for monitoring the passive sensors.
ƒ Always connect ...
– ... CLA to IxA (channel A of the sensor input) via the sensor.
– ... CLA to IxB (channel B of the sensor input) via the sensor.
– ... GCL with GIx of the sensor input.
ƒ The sensor inputs are tested cyclically through short LOW operation.
– The A and B channels are tested at different times in cycles of approx. 2 s, with
test pulses of < 1 ms.
These errors are detected:
ƒ Short circuit to supply voltage.
ƒ Short circuit between the input signals when different clock outputs are used.
ƒ Non−equivalent input signals after the discrepancy time.
These errors are not detected:
ƒ Short circuit between the input signals when the same clock outputs are used.

) Note!
Avoid unrecognisable errors by the installation, e.g. by separated cable routing.
VCC

CLA

CLB

GCL

GI2

I2B
SM30x
E94AYAx
I2A
S2

û GCL

û GI1

I1B

I1A
S1

SSP94SM351

Fig. 1−7 Ways to detect errors

û Unrecognisable errors

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 31
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe inputs

1.3.5.3 Connection of active sensors

The safe sensor inputs I1A ... I4B are suitable for active sensors.
PN−switched input signals are permissible.
The line monitoring must comply with the requirements of the category 3 or category 4.
Drive−based safety does not provide for line monitoring.
These errors are detected:
ƒ Non−equivalent input signals after the discrepancy time.

1.3.5.4 Example circuits

IxA

IxB

GIx

S SM...
SSP94SM352

Fig. 1−8 Example circuit − active sensor

P
IxA

IxB

GIx
M

S SM...
SSP94SM352

Fig. 1−9 Functional example of PN−switching sensor

S Sensor
P Positive path
M Negative path

32 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe output

1.3.6 Safe output

1.3.6.1 General
Via the safe output O1A/O1B information can be output to a higher−level unit (e.g. safety
PLC) or external switching elements (actuators) can be controlled.

) Note!
For an application according to cat. 3 or cat. 4, the use of both output channels
(O1A and O1B) is required.
The feedback output is designed in a potential−free fashion. If electrical isolation is
required, a separate supply line must be used.
ƒ The status of the safe output is controlled by two ways:
– directly from the safety module (parameter setting required)
– via a safety bus
ƒ The safe output is PP switching, i.e. two plus channels are switched.
ƒ The safe output in ON state is cyclically tested by quick LOW switching.
– The A and B channels are tested at different times in cycles of approx. 2 s, with
test pulses of < 1 ms.
– When selecting the downstream control elements, ensure that the test pulses will
not be detected as LOW signal.
These errors will be detected and set the output to OFF state:
ƒ Short circuit to supply voltage.
ƒ In the ON state: Short circuit between the output signals.
ƒ IN the OFF state: Missing 24−V supply voltage at the terminal 24O is detected as
"Stuck−at−Low" error.
These errors are not detected:
ƒ In the OFF state: short circuit between the output signals.
The output can be assigned multiple feedback information by parameter setting:
ƒ Status of the safety function
ƒ Information on error responses
The code C15060 contains information on the status of the feedback output.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 33
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe output

1.3.6.2 Example circuits

GO

O1B GO

O1A 24O
‚

SSP94SM360

24O, GO 24−V voltage supply for the safe output

O1A, O1B, GO Safe output SD−Out1, channel A and B with reference potential
 24−V voltage supply − safe output (SELV/PELV) acc. to IEC 61131−2
‚ Input of a higher−level unit (e.g. safety PLC)

34 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Further inputs

1.3.7 Further inputs

AIS input
The restart (when setting "acknowledged restart", (¶ 41)), after a stop function has been
executed, requires an acknowledgement at AIS input:
ƒ Positive signal pulse of 0.3 ... 10 s (terminal X82.3 or X82.4).
– Evaluation of the negative edge.
Other equivalent option:
ƒ "PS_AIS" signal via a safety bus
(if communication via safety bus is preferred)
– Evaluation of the positive edge.

AIE input
Errors require an acknowledgement at AIE input:
ƒ Positive signal pulse of 0.3 ... 10 s (terminal X82.2).
– Evaluation of the negative edge.
Other equivalent option:
ƒ "PS_AIE" signal via a safety bus bit
(if communication via safety bus is preferred)
– Evaluation of the positive edge.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 35
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

1.3.8 Safe speed measurement and position detection

For a safe speed and position detection, you must connect a safety−approved sin/cos
encoder to terminal X8 or a resolver to X7.
You can alternatively connect a two−encoder system consisting of a motor and a position
encoder.
Safe speed measurement
Motor encoder Max. speed Synchronism Response time of Error response
system encoder monitoring
[rpm] [%] [ms]
Encoder 12

±16000 1.5 12/50/100can be

parameterised
(^ 1.9.4) Error stop STO
Resolver ±10000 / no. of 1 parameterisable
resolver pole pairs 50/100
(^ 1.9.4)
Tab. 1−3 Detailed features

Explanations on the data:

ƒ Synchronism
Variation of the speed determined in comparison with the current speed value.
ƒ Response time of encoder monitoring
Time required to detect faults caused by continuous signal errors at the encoder
interface.

) Note!
If speed monitoring is active and the standard device detects the inverter error
characteristic (C00002=71) or determines the motor parameters (C00002=72),
the error message "Safe speed invalid" is displayed. Both functions cannot be
completed since the SM302 activates STO. These two states generally occur
only once during commissioning.
Therefore, these functions should be carried out before the speed monitoring
is activated in the SM302.
The functions depending on speed, direction of rotation or position must not be
parameterised if "No encoder" is set. The plausibility check rejects such implausible
settings until they have been parameterised correctly.

I Tip!
The motor encoder position and, if required, position encoder position are
32−bit values in the safety module. The lower−order 16 bits contain the part of
a motor revolution and the higher−order 16 bits contain the multiple of a
motor revolution. Examples:
1/4 motor revolution 65536/4 16384 / 0x0000’4000
1/2 motor revolution 65536/2 32768 / 0x0000’8000
1 motor revolution 65536/1 65536 / 0x0001’0000
2 motor revolutions 2*65536 131072 / 0x0002’0000

36 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Parameter setting of standard device 9400 W Parameter setting of M302

Motor mounting Position encoder mounting Motor mounting Position encoder mounting
direction direction direction direction
C02527/0 C02529/0 C15409/0 C15502/0
CW CW W CW "Like motor encoder"
CW CCW W CW "Inverted ..."
CCW CW W CCW "Inverted ..."
CCW CCW W CCW "Like motor encoder"
Tab. 1−4 Overview of dependency of the parameterisation from the mounting direction

( Stop!
Malfunctions due to slip, shaft fracture etc.
Slip, shaft fracture etc. between motor and encoder system disturb the safe
speed measurement.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The speed−dependent and/or direction−of−rotation dependent functions are
executed incorrectly.
Protective measures:
ƒ Prevent malfunctions by constructive measures.
ƒ Use the motors and encoder systems with guaranteed features. Your Lenze
contact partner helps you to find suitable systems.
ƒ In the event of service, this must also be observed for the motor or the
encoder system.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 37
1 Safety engineering
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Motor−encoder combinations
Drive systems with Servo Drives 9400 and safety module SM302 provide speed−dependent
safety functions for safe speed monitoring and/or safe position monitoring. Observe
permissible motor−encoder combinations during configuration.
ƒ Permissible motor−encoder combinations for these functions:
Synchronous Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM30x
servo motors
Type Product key
Sin/cos absolute value, single−turn AS1024−8V−K2
Single−encoder PL d / SIL 2
MCS 06 ... 19 Sin/cos absolute value, multi−turn AM1024−8V−K2
concept
MDXKS 56 / 71 Resolver RV03 PL e / SIL 3
Two−encoder concept Up to PL e / SIL 3

Asynchronous Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM30x

servo motors
Type Product key
Sin/cos incremental IG1024−5V−V3 Single−encoder
MCA 10 ... 26 PL e / SIL 3
Resolver RV03 concept
MQA 20 ... 26
Two−encoder concept Up to PL e / SIL 3

Three−phase Encoder Safe speed monitoring with SM30x

asynchronous
motors Type Product key
MDxMA063−xx ...
MDxMA225−xx IG2048−5V−V3 Single−encoder PL e / SIL 3
Sin/cos incremental
MHxMA080−xx ... concept
MHxMA225−xx IG2048−5V−V2 PL d / SIL 2
MFxMA063−xx ... Two−encoder
MFxMA132−xx Up to PL e / SIL 3
concept

A "two−encoder concept" includes e.g. a resolver as motor encoder and, at the same time,
an absolute value encoder (sin/cos), an incremental encoder (TTL), or digital encoder
(SSI/bus) as position encoder on the machine.
In the case of the "2−encoder concept", the achievable risk mitigation (PL/SIL) depends on
the suitability of the encoders used.

) Note!
If feedback systems for safety functions are used, the manufacturer’s
documentation must be observed!

38 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Device modules
Safe speed measurement and position detection

Single−encoder concepts with resolvers

Please observe during the configuration of such systems:
If only one feedback system is used in connection with these safety applications, the
applicable safety standard, IEC 61800−5−2 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems, Part 5−2: Safety requirements − Functional), poses special requirements for the
connection between feedback system and motor shaft. This is due to the fact that
dual−channel safety systems are, as a matter of fact, mechanically designed as
single−channel systems at this point. If this mechanical linkage is overdimensioned as
specified in EN 61800−5−2, the standard allows for fault exclusion for the fault conditions
"Shaft breakage" and "Shaft slippage".
Hence, there are acceleration limit values for the drive solutions with resolvers which must
not be exceeded:
Synchronous Encoder Max. permissible angular Min. time per 1000 r/min
servo motors acceleration speed lift
Type Product key [rad/s2] [ms]
MCS 06 56000 1.9
MCS 09 ... 19 Resolver RV03 19000 5.5
MDXKS 56 / 71 17000 6.2

Asynchronous Encoder Max. permissible angular Min. time per 1000 r/min
servo motors acceleration speed lift
Type Product key [rad/s2] [ms]
MCA 10 ... 19 22000 4.8
MCA 20 ... 26 Resolver RV03 22000 4.8
MQA 20 ... 26 22000 4.8

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 39
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
General information

1.4 Safety functions

Detailed information on the safety functions and parameterisation can be found in the
software manual and online help for the safety module.
The following information is intended for a basic orientation.
1.4.1 General information

1.4.1.1 Stop functions

The stop functions are distinguished according to the cause of release:
ƒ Standard stop (simple stop)
– Release by a safe input with the parameterised STO, SS1 or SS2 functions
– Release by activating the bits STO, SS1 or SS2 bits via the safety bus.
– In special operation the standard stop can be avoided by using the enable switch.
ƒ Emergency stop
– Release by a safe input with the parameterised "Safe stop emergency" (SSE)
function.
– Release by activating the SSE bit via the safety bus.
– STO or SS1 can be set as emergency stop function to be executed.
– In special operation, the emergency stop cannot be avoided.
ƒ Error stop
– Release as response to an error.
– In special operation, the error stop cannot be avoided.

1.4.1.2 Priorisation
Stop functions with priority influence the sequence of subordinated functions already
started.
ƒ STO
The STO function has the highest priority over all other functions. Functions already
started (e.g. SS1 or SS2) are aborted and the drive is switched off.
ƒ SS1
The SS1 function has priority over SS2. Considering the set stopping time for SS1 and
SS2 (C15305) and the SS1 mode (C15306), the drive is switched to torque−free
operation.
ƒ Monitoring functions
The monitoring functions have equivalent priorities. They can be executed at the same
time.

40 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
General information

1.4.1.3 Restart
The restart behaviour of the drive can be parameterised (C15300).
ƒ The "acknowledged restart" setting requires an acknowledgement to the safety
module. The acknowledgement is made via:
– Signal at the AIS input (with a signal time of 0.3 ... 10 s)
– Signal via the "PS_AIS" bit via the safety bus.
ƒ An error stop requires an acknowledgement (AIE), before the restart can be
acknowledged.
ƒ The "Automatic restart" setting requires an acknowledgement at the master
control.
ƒ With active cascading (C15035), an "automatic restart" after STO, SS1 is not
possible.

} Danger!
When the request for the safety function is deactivated, the drive can restart
automatically. The behaviour can be set via the parameter "Restart behaviour"
(C15300/1/2).
In the case of an automatic restart, you must provide external measures which
ensure that the drive only restarts after an acknowledgement (EN 60204).

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 41
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Integration into the application of the controller

1.4.2 Integration into the application of the controller

For the use of the functions, certain settings in the controller are required. Here, the
Lenze PC software »Engineer« supports and guides you.
When a safety function is required, the safety technology activates the corresponding safe
monitoring function. However, the standstill function is only directly executed with the
"safe torque off" (STO) function. Other safety functions in which a controller action is
required will need to be safely monitored.
The action of the drive (e.g. braking, braking to standstill, keeping the standstill position)
must be implemented by the user application in the standard device.
Currently the application can be parameterised and/or configured via function block
editor of the Engineer depending on the runtime software licence. For this, the system
block LS_SafetyModuleInterface must be integrated into the application.
The safety module is implemented in the 9400 ServoPLC via the control configuration
(SMI_SafetyModuleInterface). The control and status data of the safety module can be
evaluated via the free programming and connected to further interface signals.
The connection to a user application serves to achieve the following:
1. Activation of the safety function in the safety module, e.g. SS1.
W The monitoring starts.
2. The safety module transmits the information to the basic device that the function
has been activated using the corresponding bit in the control word SMI_dwControl.
3. The application evaluates the control word and starts the motion sequence, e.g.
braking etc.

Internal communication
Safety module and standard device communicate via an internal interface.
If communication to the standard device is interrupted, e.g. by switching off the standard
device, the safety module responds by means of the following actions:
ƒ Error stop with STO is activated
ƒ "Warning" error message is transmitted
ƒ The "ME" LED is blinking
The required fault acknowledgement (AIE) is possible via terminal or safety bus. For further
information read the "Error management" chapter.

42 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Integration into the application of the controller

1.4.2.1 Control information

The safety module transfers information via requested or active safety functions with the
control word SMI_dwControl. The application in the standard device must evaluate the
control word and execute the corresponding action.

1.4.2.2 Status information

The safety module transfers information via the status of safety functions with the
SMI_dnState status word.
The SMI_dnIoState status word contains information on the status of the safe inputs and
the safe output. The application in the standard device can evaluate and use the status
words for additional tasks.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 43
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe torque off

1.4.3 Safe torque off

Safe Torque Off/STO

This function corresponds to a "Stop 0" according to EN 60204.
When this function is used, the power supply of the motor is immediately safely
interrupted. The motor cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements of the
drive can occur. Additional measures, e.g. mechanical brakes are needed against
movements caused by external force.
The restart behaviour can be set. Function sequence and error response have no adjustable
parameters.

44 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe stop 1

1.4.4 Safe stop 1

Safe Stop 1 / SS1

This function corresponds to a "Stop 1" according to EN 60204.
The function monitors the reaching of the speed n = 0 within an adjustable stopping time.
The speed is calculated from the encoder data (safe speed measurement). Without
encoder the function evaluates the speed status n = 0 from the standard device. For this,
the monitored stopping time parameterised in the safety module must be 0.5 s longer
than the stopping time in the controller.
When the stopping time has elapsed, the power supply of the motor is immediately safely
interrupted (STO). The motor cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements
of the drive can occur.
Additional measures, e.g. mechanical brakes are needed against movements caused by
external force. The time for a brake to be applied must be considered when defining the
stopping time.
A restart is only possible after the stopping time has completely elapsed with "SS1 mode
= STO after stopping time". If the SS1 mode parameter is set to "STO at n=0", a restart can
be directly carried out after the transition to the STO status.
Deceleration ramp monitoring can be parameterised. Depending on the parameterised
stopping time, a monitoring ramp is calculated. (¶ 47)

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 45
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe stop 2

1.4.5 Safe stop 2

Safe Stop 2 / SS2

This function corresponds to a "Stop 2" according to EN 60204.
This function serves to monitor the reaching of speed n = 0 within an adjustable stopping
time (C15305). The reached position must be kept active by the controller.
For speed n = 0, a tolerance window (C15310) can be parameterised. For the tolerance
window Delta p=0 (C15311), a relative position is defined by which the drive may move in
the SOS state.
If the monitored limits are exceeded, an error stop will be caused. The power supply of the
motor is immediately safely interrupted (STO). The motor cannot create a torque and thus
no dangerous movements of the drive can occur. Additional measures, e.g. mechanical
brakes are needed against movements caused by external force.
The higher−prior stop function SS1/STO is executed when the SS2 stop request and
SS1/STO occur at the same time. After the SS1/STO request has been cancelled and
acknowledged accordingly (see restart behaviour), a direct STO transition to the SS2/STO
state can be achieved without cancelling the SS2 request.
Deceleration ramp monitoring can be parameterised. Depending on the parameterised
stopping time, a monitoring ramp is calculated. (¶ 47)

) Note!
The position of the motor is saved when the SOS state is entered. In the SOS
state, relative position changes are added and compared to the permissible
value in the parameter "Tolerance window Delta p=0". When the SOS state is
quit, the maximum relative position change is displayed in code C15312.
When the SOS state is requested again, the maximum value of the last
position changes is reset to zero.
Example: The states "SS2 active" and "SOS active" are interrupted by a STO
request. When the STO request is reset, an immediate transition to the SOS
state takes place. This causes a reset of the current position deviation to p=0.
After the safe operational stop is interrupted by the STO, the motor may have
a different position due to an external torque.

46 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

1.4.6 Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2

The deceleration ramp can be additionally parameterised and monitored for the stop
functions SS1 and SS2 . If the parameterised ramp is not exceeded, the state changes to the
parameterised stop function STO or SOS.
The monitoring of the deceleration process serves to achieve a higher degree of safety.
Ramp monitoring becomes most critical when delay times are caused by high moments of
inertia
ƒ The application must ensure that the drive is braked to a standstill and the position
is maintained!
ƒ A safe speed evaluation is the precondition for a safe ramp monitoring, i.e. an
encoder system must be parameterised in the safety module.
ƒ When ramp monitoring is activated, the starting value of the ramp and the S−ramp
time must be defined in percent.
– The starting value refers to the current speed value at the time of the SS1/SS2
request.
– The starting time of the deceleration ramp is delayed via the S−ramp time in order
to consider a possible S−ramp smoothing.
If the current speed exceeds the parameterised deceleration ramp within the stopping
time or before reaching the tolerance window (n=0), an error message is caused and an
error stop is initiated.
ƒ The power supply of the motor is immediately safely interrupted (STO). The motor
cannot create a torque and thus no dangerous movements of the drive can occur.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 47
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Emergency stop

1.4.7 Emergency stop

Safe Stop Emergency/SSE

The emergency stop function activates STO or SS1. The function to be executed can be set
(C15205). There is no way to avoid emergency stopping during special operation and in
repair mode select (RMS).
With active cascading (C15035), only "STO" is permissible as emergency stop.

) Note!
Connect the emergency stop buttons, which must not be overruled by special
operation or repair mode select, to the emergency stop function. For this
purpose, parameterise the safe input as "emergency stop" (C15031).
The emergency stop function can also be requested with SSE bit via the safety
bus.
The activation of the function is reported internally to the standard device and via the
safety bus of the higher−level control.

48 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

1.4.8 Safe maximum speed

1.4.8.1 Description
Safe Maximum Speed / SMS
This function monitors the maximum motor speed. If a value > 0 is indicated (C15320), the
function is activated.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a error stop is caused. STO, SS1 or SS2 (C15321) can be
adjusted.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 49
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

1.4.8.2 Fault analysis

This consideration applies to the SMS and SLS functions.
The evaluation and plausibility of the speed values is done in a cycle of 2 ms.
If the defined limit values are exceeded, the parameterised error response is activated
within a time slot of maximally one evaluation cycle. With the error response SS1 or SS2
the response time of the stop function depends on the evaluation in the standard device.
Moreover, the set stopping time must be added to the response time until the defined
operating status is reached.
In order that the response can be checked for an error as quickly as possible, a maximum
response time (C15350) can be parameterised. Before the maximum response time has
elapsed, the detected speed must comply with the permissible (monitored) speed. If the
permissible (monitored) speed is not complied with, STO is activated immediately.

n tS
tC
tR

t1 t2 t3 t
2 I
SLS‚
0 t

I
ƒ
0 t

I
STO
0 t
SM301DIA_F

T1 Occurrence of the error event

tC Cycle time 2 ms
T2 Determining the error event
tR Maximum permissible response time (parameterisable)
t3 Response instance to continuous exceedance
tS Stopping time
2 Feedback(s)
SLS‚ SLS monitored
ƒ According to the error response set: SS2, SS1 or STO
STO Response in case of an error after the max. response time has elapsed
–––– Normal operation
−−−−−− Incorrect operation

) Note!
If the STO function has been selected as the error response for SMS or SLS, the
internal response time is not considered because the motor is already coasting
after the speed threshold is exceeded for the first time.

50 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe maximum speed

) Note!
In case of an error, the set limited speed will be exceeded.
To assess the risk for the plant, you have to calculate the height of the
maximum exceedance. Consider the following:
ƒ internal response time
ƒ application−specific response time
ƒ application−specific maximum acceleration

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 51
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safely limited speed

1.4.9 Safely limited speed

1.4.9.1 Description
Safely Limited Speed/SLS
Safe Maximum Speed / SMS
After the speed has fallen below the threshold or the adjustable braking time has elapsed,
the function monitors the compliance with the limited speed Nlim.
ƒ Four different speeds can be monitored (SLS1 ... SLS4).
When operating within the limit values, the "SLSx monitored" status is set. The status can
be assigned to the safe output. The status can also be reported via the safety bus. A
feedback takes place as soon as it has been detected that the speed has fallen below the
threshold.
When the monitored speed is exceeded, a stop error is caused. STO, SS1 or SS2
(C15332/1...4) can be adjusted. If the speed is not within the limit values even after the
adjustable response time, the drive will be directly switched off (STO).

1.4.9.2 Fault analysis

The fault analysis is described with the SMS function (¶ 50).

52 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe direction

1.4.10 Safe direction

1.4.10.1 Description
Safe Direction / SDI
This function monitors safe compliance with an adjustable direction of movement.
Monitoring also includes zero speed with a tolerance window.
If the valid direction of rotation is not complied with, optionally SS1, SS2, or STO can be
activated.
After the adjustable delay time has expired (C15341), the function monitors the
compliance with the positive/negative direction of movement.
When operating within the limit values (C15342), the "SDIxxx monitored" status is set
(C15000). The status can be assigned to the safe output (C15052/1). The status can also be
reported via the safety bus.
If deviations from the permissible direction of movement occur, an error stop will be
triggered. As an error response, STO, SS1, or SS2 can be set (C15343). In the event of an error
the maximum change in position is displayed (C15344).

) Note!
If the SDI delay time (C15341) is parameterised greater than zero, either the
"SDIxxx monitored" feedback must be evaluated (safety bus or safe output) or
the risk analysis must show that the delay is not hazardous. This fact must e.g.
be considered in the calculation of the safety clearance.

) Note!
If the monitoring of the direction of movement, SDIxxx, is combined with
function SLSx, the delay times must be coordinated. Then, braking time Nlim
will start at the same time as the SDI delay time.

1.4.10.2 Fault analysis

This consideration is applies to function SDI.
The position values are evaluated and checked at a cycle of 2 ms. If the defined tolerance
window is exceeded, the parameterised error response is triggered immediately within a
time slot of max. one evaluation cycle. If a SS1 or SS2 error response is triggered, the
response time of the stop function depends on the evaluation in the standard device.
Furthermore, the set stopping time must be added to the response time until the defined
operating status is reached. In the Lenze setting, the error response is set to SS1.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 53
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safely limited position

1.4.11 Safely limited position

1.4.11.1 Description
Safely Limited Position / SLP
The safety module monitors the lower and upper position limit.
If the drives violates the upper or lower limit value in the course of limit value monitoring,
an error response is activated, providing the possibility that the position value monitored
is exceeded by the coast−down of the torqueless motor.
For monitoring an absolute position range, an upper and a lower position value must be
set via a safe parameter. Up to four absolute position limit value pairs can be
parameterised and monitored at the same time.
In order to execute this function, a home position assessed from a safety−related point of
view must be available in the system which is approached before the function is executed.
Otherwise the parameterised safe speed limitation (SLS1 − SLS4) is triggered when the SLP
function is activated, which can be executed during normal operation and special
operation.
The SLP function can be executed during normal operation and special operation (OMS).
If a safe reference is available, monitoring of the parameterised upper and lower position
limit values is carried out at the time of request.
This state is shown by the "SLPx monitored" status bit.

54 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Position−dependent safe speed

1.4.12 Position−dependent safe speed

1.4.12.1 Description
Position−Dependent Safe Speed / PDSS
The "position−dependent safe speed" ...
ƒ monitors the speed of a drive as a function of the absolute position along a motion
range.
ƒ enables the use of a physically limited motion range without the use of mechanical
buffers and limit switches.
ƒ It is possible to parameterise a creep speed at the travel way ends in order to
optimally use the entire travel way.
ƒ Depending on the direction of rotation, the monitoring envelope curve switches to
make it possible that the travel way end can be left with maximum speed.
The PDSS function can be executed during normal operation and special operation.
In order to execute this function, a home position assessed from a safety−related point of
view must be available in the system which is approached before the function is executed.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 55
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe cam

1.4.13 Safe cam

1.4.13.1 Description
Safe CAm / SCA
When this function is executed, the current absolute position is compared to the
parameterised position limits. This binary state is displayed via status bits which can be
provided via the safe output or the safety bus. The function is activated by entering a
parameter value (> 0). The status is transmitted to the safety and standard application.
Up to four pairs of position values can be parameterised and monitored. The four position
areas can be activated and monitored in parallel.
In order to execute this function, a home position assessed from a safety−related point of
view must be available in the system which is approached before the function is executed.

56 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe referencing

1.4.14 Safe referencing

1.4.14.1 Description
Safety Referencing / SREF
For an absolute position calculation and monitoring, the safety module requires an
absolute reference point. This function is required since the encoder systems described for
position evaluation do not provide any safe absolute position.
If absolute position−dependent functions are parameterised, the drive can only be moved
with a safely limited speed until homing is successfully completed. The SLS1−SLS4
assignment can be parameterised. When the home position is overtravelled, the
parameterised "Home Position" value is accepted as the current position value. A faulty
homing, e.g. by a missing signal edge or violation of the timing request triggers STO.
Parameterisation serves to set whether the switch−off of the voltage supply shall cause a
non−volatile storage of the current position. If the restart conditions after switching on the
voltage supply and a minimum motion (minimum homing) are complied with, a restart
can be made without a renewed homing.

} Danger!
The components for detecting the home position must be mechanically
mounted in such a way that the home position cannot change, e.g. by external
influences.
An unnoticed local change of the home position causes faulty values of the
absolute position.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 57
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Repair mode select

1.4.15 Repair mode select

1.4.15.1 Description
Repair Mode Select / RMS
This function moves the drive from a situation that is blocking it ("Deadlock").
In the safety concept, this state is accounted for as a special case for actuating an axis
connected, the encoders connected being evaluated in a non−safety−rated fashion.

) Note!
In repair mode, the safety functions are solely restricted to the
parameterisable stop functions STO and SS1 (without ramp monitoring) and
the effectiveness of the enable switch.

} Danger!
Uncontrolled motor rotation possible
The RMS operating mode may lead to unexpected motions with unexpected
speed.
Possible consequences:
ƒ The RMS operating mode may lead to a violation of the permissible motion
limits of the axis.
Protective measures:
ƒ The RMS function can only be used to free an axis from a "deadlock". If
possible, use the OMS function!
ƒ In the RMS operating mode, only the enable switch is effective. Use
additional safety measures to ensure that no person is endangered.

58 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

1.4.16 Safe operation mode selector

1.4.16.1 Description
Operation Mode Selector / OMS
The function provides a special operation of the drive. In the special operation the drive is
stopped (status 2). The drive can be traversed in the special operation via an enable switch
(status 3).
For the stop status in the special operation, the STO, SS1 or SS2 functions can be
parameterised.
For motion functions in the special operation, the SLS function (combinable with SDI) or
free movement (combinable with SLI function) can be parameterised. The parameterised
monitoring function will be automatically activated with the transition to the special
operation.
The special operation enables an override of the simple STO, SS1, and SS2 stop functions
by the enable switch.
Also in special operation, activated monitoring functions are continued to be executed. An
error detected in the monitoring functions, also in special operation, leads to the
parameterised error stop function. Depending on the priority, the parameterised stop
function of the monitoring function or the stop function of the special operation is
executed without approval.
An active emergency stop function is also executed in special operation.
The special operation can also be selected via the safety bus by the F−PLC, unless a safe
input is parameterised as operation mode selector.
The return to normal operation is only possible in the stop status. Since the drive is stopped
in status 2, the AIS acknowledgement is required for restart. The parameters for the restart
STO/SS1 or SS2 are used.

) Note!
When returning to normal operation, the automatic restart is not permissible.
If "automatic restart" is parameterised, this can be prevented by special
measures, e.g. programming in the higher−level control.

) Note!
The "safe enable switch" function serves to directly cancel/complete the
stopping times assigned to the stop functions.

) Note!
Monitoring of the safely limited increment during special operation is active if
a value > 0 has been selected for C15203.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 59
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

) Note!
If an error (e.g. a discrepancy error) occurs at a safe input to which the OMS
function has been assigned, normal operation will be selected. This
corresponds to the OFF state. The "ME" LED is blinking and STO is not
activated. The special operation can only be selected again when the error has
been eliminated and acknowledged.
The switching level at the digital input which determines special or normal
operation can be set via the safe parameterisation.

) Note!
When the OMS bit is received via the safety bus, the value 0 (normal
operation) is assumed in case of passivation. In special applications (e.g. safety
door, request of OMS, i.e. open safety door = special operation) this must not
cause a dangerous state by automatic restart.

60 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

SM301OMS01

Operating mode Normal Special

Event Impact Impact
− State  −
Request − OMS special operation via ...
... safe input Change W State ‚
Stop function ...
l STO
l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
Activated monitoring functions
remain active.
... safety bus same response − only possible as an alternative to the safe input
Request − ES confirmation via ...
... safe input No function State ƒ
l Free movement
l SLS (as of V1.3 combinable with
SDI) possible as restriction
l SLI (as of V1.4)
... via safety bus same response − only possible as an alternative to the safe input
Stop request State „ is not executed
parameterised function ...
l STO
l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
Emergency stop State …
parameterised function ...
l STO
l SS1
... is executed
Monitoring responds: dependent on priority:
SMS parameterised error function ...
SLS l STO
SDI l SS1
l SS2
... is executed
or
parameterised stopping function of special operation

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 61
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Safe operation mode selector

1.4.16.2 Conditions
A safe input must be parameterised and interconnected as an operation mode selector.
Select the operating mode for the LOW level (C15202) depending on the application. Only
one operation mode selector can be connected and parameterised. The OMS bit of the
safety bus must be deactivated (C15113).
Special operation can also be selected via the safety bus (C15113) with the OMS bit if no
safe input has been selected as an operation mode selector. In this case, at least one stop
function must be parameterised via the safety bus to ensure that the drive system is safely
switched−off if the bus should be interrupted. Furthermore, parameter C15202 must be set
to "Normal operation".
The plausibility check rejects ambiguous settings until they are parameterised correctly.

) Note!
The "free traversing" setting for the special operation (C15201) motion
function must be suitable for the application!

} Danger!
Dangerous situations may occur during automatic or special operation
Depending on the application, automatic or special operation may bring about
hazardous situations.
Possible consequences:
ƒ Injury to persons
ƒ Damage to material assets
Protective measures:
ƒ Must be observed in particular when setting the operating mode for the
LOW level at the SD−Inx.
ƒ Observe the notes provided in the attached application examples.

I Tip!
If SLSx has been parameterised as the motion function during special
operation, a change to the acceptance operation is not possible until the
reduced speed is monitored and maintained (SLSx monitored).

62 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Safe enable switch

1.4.17 Safe enable switch

1.4.17.1 Description
Enable Switch / ES
The drive can be traversed in special operation using an enable switch (see operation mode
selector).

1.4.17.2 Conditions
A safe input must be parameterised and interconnected as enable switch. You can only
connect and parameterise one enable switch. The ES bit of the safety bus must be
deactivated (C15113).
The enable switch function can also be selected via the safety bus with the ES bit, unless
a safe input is parameterised as enable switch.
The special operation must be activated.
The plausibility check rejects ambiguous settings until they are parameterised correctly.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 63
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Cascading

1.4.18 Cascading

1.4.18.1 Description
Cascading / CAS
This function enables a synchronised shutdown of an entire drive system.
ƒ The function can only be activated via parameter setting. For this purpose set the
"CAS: cascading" parameter to "Cascading with SD−In4".
ƒ With activated function:
– The SD−In4 safe input is used as cascading input and cannot be used as universal
input anymore.
– The SD−Out1 safe output is used as cascading output and cannot be parameterised
as universal feedback output anymore.
– A stop function (emergency stop, SSE) released by cascading cannot be overruled
in special operation through the enable switch.
ƒ The cascade trips with every STO, irrespective of which safety module adopts the
STO status and for which reason.
ƒ All safety modules of the cascade can only be enabled if all cascading inputs (SD−In4)
are in the OFF state (emergency stop has been enabled).
ƒ For the restart of the drive system, the AIS restart acknowledgement must be
executed simultaneously for all safety modules of the cascade.
ƒ The restart is executed with a delay of 100 ms after the acknowledgement has been
recognised.
ƒ Cascading is designed for max. 100 drives.
ƒ During special operation, the drives of the cascade can only change from the
SS2/SOS stop function to acceptance. An STO or SS1 as stop function would trigger
the entire drive system every time and thus impede acceptance.

64 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety functions
Cascading

#1 #2 #n
SM302 SM302 SM302
E94AYAF E94AYAF E94AYAF
X82.1 X82.2 X82.1 X82.2 X82.1 X82.2
24 V ext. 24 V ext. 24 V ext.
- - -

+ + +

GO GO GO

O1B GO O1B GO O1B GO

  
O1A 24O O1A 24O O1A 24O

GI4 GI4 GI4

I4B I4B I4B

I4A I4A I4A

X82.3 X82.4 X82.3 X82.4 X82.3 X82.4

SSP94SM365 302

Fig. 1−10 Wiring example

E94AYAF SM302 safety module
#1, #2, #n Number of the module
24 V ext. ‚ 24−V voltage supply of the module (SELV/PELV)
 24−V voltage supply of the output (SELV/PELV)

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 65
1 Safety engineering
Safety functions
Cascading

1.4.18.2 Conditions
ƒ The SD−In4 input must be parameterised as active input for the "emergency stop"
function and the input delay for SD−In4 must be £ 10 ms.
ƒ The emergency stop function to be executed must be parameterised as STO via the
"SSE: emergency stop function" parameter.
ƒ The restart behaviour of the drive after the STO/SS1 stop function has been
executed must be parameterised to "Acknowledged restart".
ƒ The control of the SD−Out1 output via a possibly parameterised safety bus must be
inhibited.
ƒ The SS1 mode (C15306) must be set to "STO after stopping time".
ƒ The plausibility check rejects other settings until they are parameterised correctly.

66 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safety address

1.5 Safety address

The safety address serves to the clear assignment of the safety modules of the SM302 type
in systems with several drives. The address "0" is not permissible.

Address switch
The safety address can be set in the left part of the housing by means of the DIP switch 0.
For setting the switch, use an appropriately small tool, e.g. a probe. The switch can only be
set if the module is not connected to a standard device. The switch serves to set addresses
in the range of 0 ... 1023. Alterations by the switch with regard to the address are only
activated when the 24−V supply is switched on.
ƒ The address setting "0" requires the setting by the address code.
ƒ The address settings 1 ... 1023 are used with priority. The setting by the address code
is not possible.
DIP switch 0 Labelling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Value of the address bit 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512
Tab. 1−5 Address setting

Address code
The safety address can also be set with the "Safety address" parameter (C15111) of the
safety module. For this, the address setting via the DIP switch 0 must be set with the "0"
setting. Via parameter, addresses can be set in a range of 0 ... 65534.

Effective safety address

The effective safety address is the result from the address switch or address parameter.
The effective safety address must comply with the module ID assigned in the safe
parameter set.
The effective safety address must also be used as target address by a master control with
safety bus (e.g. PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe target address).

Module ID
Before the safe parameter set is downloaded, the system checks if the module ID defined
in the parameter set corresponds to the module ID saved in the safety module. If the values
are not the same, a corresponding message is displayed. This shall ensure that the safety
address is not changed by mistake during parameter setting. If the user confirms the new
value after checking it, the changed module ID will be saved non−volatile in the SM302.
Code C15017 contains the module ID saved during the last parameter set transfer in the
SM302.

) Note!
A general reset does not change the stored module ID.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 67
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

1.6 Safe bus interfaces

In the safety module, parameterised interfaces are provided for standardised safety bus
systems. With the selection of the bus system, the corresponding parameters are made
available.
Currently supported communication types:
ƒ Operation without safety bus system
ƒ Operation with PROFIsafe protocol
ƒ Operation with FSoE via EtherCAT

1.6.1 PROFIsafe connection

1.6.1.1 Conditions
The SM302 supports the transmission of safe information on the PROFIsafe protocol
according to the specification "PROFIsafe − Profile for Safety Technology" from version 2.x
onwards of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation (PNO). The basic device transmits the
PROFIsafe information to the safety module for safe evaluation.

) Note!
A safety bus system can only be operated via the upper module slot (MXI1) of
the Servo Drive 9400.

) Note!
The operation with PROFIsafe via PROFINET is only permissible according to
the "PROFIsafe − Profile for Safety Technology" specification, version 2.x.

1.6.1.2 Description

Addressing
In order that a data telegram reaches the correct node, an unambiguous PROFIsafe target
address is required. If PROFIsafe has been selected as safety bus, the safety address is
simultaneously accepted as PROFIsafe target address. This address must comply with the
corresponding configuration of the safety PLC.

PROFIsafe frame
The PROFIsafe message is sent in the first slot of a PROFIBUS data telegram or in the second
slot of a PROFINET data telegram.
This must be observed for the hardware configuration of the safety PLC!
PROFINET data telegram
header PROFIsafe message Data Trailer
Slot 2 Slot 1

68 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe bus interfaces
PROFIsafe connection

GSDML file
The GSDML file contains all information on the configuration of the PROFINET system. This
makes the integration easy and user−friendly.

I Tip!
You will find the current GSDML file for this Lenze product on the Internet in
the "Downloads" area under
http://www.Lenze.com

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 69
1 Safety engineering
Safe bus interfaces
FSoE connection

1.6.2 FSoE connection

Fail Safe over EtherCAT / FSoE

1.6.2.1 Conditions
The SM302 supports the transmission of safe information via FSoE protocol in compliance
with the "ETG.5100 S" specification, version 1.2.0, of the EtherCAT user organisation (ETG).
The standard device forwards the FSoE information to the safety module for safe
evaluation.

) Note!
A safety bus system can only be operated via the upper module slot (MXI1) of
the Servo Drive 9400.

1.6.2.2 Description
Safe transmission via EtherCAT ("Fail−Safe−over−EtherCAT").

Addressing
In order that a data frame reaches the correct node, a unique FSoE target address is
required. If "FSoE" has been selected as safety bus, the safety address is at the same time
accepted as the FSoE target address. This address must match the corresponding
configuration of the safety PLC.

FSoE frame
The FSoE data are sent in the first slot of an EtherCAT data frame.
This must be observed for the hardware configuration of the safety PLC!
Range Values
Process data 1 ... 32 process data words for each direction
(max. 64 bytes, 16 bits)
Parameter data max. 128 bytes
(Mailbox size for CoE transfer)
FSoE data for the use of the SM302 Safety outputs: 11 bytes
safety module
(from SW version 04.00) Safety inputs: 19 bytes

ESI file
The ESI file contains all information on the configuration of the EtherCAT system. This
makes the integration easy and user−friendly.

I Tip!
You will find the current ESI file for this Lenze product on the Internet in the
"Downloads" area under
http://www.Lenze.com

70 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe parameter setting
Parameter setting

1.7 Safe parameter setting

) Note!
During online communication via bus system, multiple users can access the
very same drive at the same time and edit the safe parameter set. After the
safe parameter set has been transmitted, please check if the checksums (CRC)
of the parameter set, memory module, and safety module in the "Safe
transfer" dialog are consistent.
The consistency of the safe parameters must be ensured by organisational
measures because there are no technical means to avoid multiple users
accessing parameter sets at the same time.
1.7.1 Parameter setting

Safety−relevant parameters can exclusively be transmitted to the safety module by safe

parameter setting. The parameter set is saved in the memory module and safety module
with a definite module ID which must comply with the effective safety address in the
safety module.
A safe parameter setting requires the service status. The service status means the
following:
ƒ The standard stop is active and the drive is safely switched to torqueless operation
(STO).
ƒ The communication via the safety bus is active but passivated.
About the service status:
ƒ It can be activated by the Lenze »Engineer« PC software.
ƒ It can be quit by reinitialising the module, i.e. the communication via the safety
module is interrupted.

) Note!
The service status is also active if the parameter set in the memory module
does not correspond to the parameter set in the safety module during the
initialisation.
Observe the information on compatibility of the SM302 firmware versions (¶ 20).

1.7.1.1 Parameter setting with the Lenze »Engineer« PC software

Safe parameter setting is supported by the Lenze PC software »Engineer« as of
version 02.23.
The parameter setting is described in the Software Manual for the SM302 safety module.
Moreover, the software provides a comprehensive Online Help.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 71
1 Safety engineering
Safe parameter setting
Parameter setting

Password
For storing a safe parameter set, a password is required. The standard password is: "Lenze
SM302". The password can be changed and must have at least six characters.
Use "general reset" to delete the safe parameter set in the memory module and the safety
module. The safety module must be reparameterised.
The password is reset to the standard "Lenze SM302".

1.7.1.2 Parameter set transfer from the memory module

The safe parameter set transfer is supported by a safe parameter set stored in the memory
module, e.g. in case of a module exchange.
ƒ A valid parameter set with a corresponding module ID must be stored.
ƒ The safety module must be in the service status.
The transfer of the parameter set from the memory module must be acknowledged at the
safety module.
ƒ The "MS" LED is flashing (safety module is in service status.)
ƒ "AS" LED is lit
ƒ Press module switch S82 and keep it pressed
ƒ "AS" LED starts blinking
ƒ When the "AS" LED goes off, release the S82 module switch immediately
ƒ The "AS" LED is lit again after a short time
ƒ Press again the S82 module switch and keep it pressed
ƒ "AS" LED starts blinking
ƒ When the "AS" LED goes off, release the S82 module switch immediately
ƒ The parameter set transfer is completed successfully.
If system−related response times (approx. 2.5 s) cannot be complied with, the parameter
transfer is cancelled. The process must be started again.
In case of success, the parameter transfer is recorded in the logbook of the standard device
and the service status is quit by a software restart.
If the parameter set is invalid, an error is indicated and the "ME" LED is blinking.

I
AS
0

I
S82
0 t
tmax tmax tmax
SM301DIA_P

Fig. 1−11 Acknowledgement procedure

AS AS light−emitting diode
S82 S82 module switch
t Time axis
tmax Maximum permissible response time

72 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Safe parameter setting
Parameter sets and axes

1.7.2 Parameter sets and axes

The individuality of an axis with safety functions in a drive system can be achieved by
means of the safety address. In the safe parameter set a module ID is stored. This module
ID is compared to the effective safety address (C15112) in the safety module.
When a safety module is initialised, i.e. when the parameter set is loaded, the compliance
of the safety address will be checked. If no compliance exists, an initialisation error is
reported.

) Note!
ƒ Clearly define the safety address in a drive system or plant.
ƒ Document the address in circuit diagrams and labels.
ƒ Ensure identical settings when replacing the module.

In drive systems with activated safety bus the safety address is also used as safety bus
target address. The clear assignment of the safety address must be configured in the safety
PLC.
In drive systems without activated safety bus, individuality and correct assignment of the
safety address must be checked. For this, use the Lenze »Engineer« PC software or an
E94AZK... keypad.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 73
1 Safety engineering
Error management
Error states

1.8 Error management

1.8.1 Error states

Detected errors or maloperation of the drive are assigned to error statuses with definite
reactions. The reaction can be co−ordinated with the complete drive via the error statuses.
Features Error status
System error Trouble Warning
Event Fatal internal error Fault Monitoring function
LED "ME" On Blinking Flashing
Status of safety module Lockout (CPU stopped) Error status Normal operation
The control category ... has been abandoned ... has been abandoned ... has not been abandoned
according to
EN ISO 13849−1 ...
Response The motor immediately The motor is stopped via
switches to torque−free l STO or
operation via l SS1
l STO
Acknowledgement after l Connection and l Fault acknowledgement (AIE) via terminal X82.2
deactivated event disconnection of the (positive signal pulse with a signal time of
24−V supply at the 0.3 ... 10 s)
safety module l Fault acknowledgement (AIE) via the safety bus
(Bit "PS_AIE")
l Connection and disconnection of the 24−V supply at
the safety module
Tab. 1−6 Overview of error statuses

More error messages are listed in the appendix.

) Note!
If the system fault also occurs after switching the 24−V supply, please contact
the service.
When a safety bus is used:
ƒ If errors occur in the safe communication, the data is passivated by the safe
communication driver.
ƒ After the safe communication is reinitialised, the drive is automatically enabled
again if no standstill function is selected.
ƒ Events which cause an error status are sent as diagnostic telegram via the safety
bus.

74 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Error management
Logbook function in the controller

1.8.2 Logbook function in the controller

Error states are saved in the logbook of the standard device. The following is entered:
ƒ Type of response (e.g. trouble, warning, or information) to the event
ƒ Date/time (in case of memory module with real−time clock)
ƒ Value of the power−on time meter
The available logbook entries can be displayed in the »Engineer« when an online
connection has been established.
The list of the error entries can be found in the appendix.

1.8.3 Logbook function in the SM302

For purposes of diagnostics, a simple logbook with ten entries is implemented in the
SM302. Changes with regard to the request of safety functions in the SM302 are logged.
The bit coded log status created in a 2−ms cycle serves as a basis for the logbook. A logbook
entry is generated when the log status has changed.
ƒ The logbook function can be controlled via the "Log function" (C15891).
– The parameter can be written without using the safe parameter setting interface.
ƒ A logbook entry consists of the two corresponding subcodes of the parameters "Log
time" (C15892) and "Log state" (C15893).

) Note!
Before the display parameters of the logbook are read for diagnostic purposes,
the logbook function should be stopped in order to prevent inconsistency
(C15891 = 1).

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 75
1 Safety engineering
Response times

1.9 Response times

In order to detect the response time to a safety function the entire system must be
considered. The following is relevant:
ƒ Response time of the connected sensors.
ƒ Input delay of the safety inputs.
ƒ Internal processing time.
ƒ When a safety bus is used:
– Monitoring time for cyclic services.
– Monitoring time in the safety PLC.
– Processing time in the safety PLC.
ƒ Delay times due to further components.

0
1
ti
S t1 t2
t3 μC t5 SF

t=0

3 tps

2
t4
μC

lcu12x_352

Fig. 1−12 Response times to the request of a safety function

0 Standard device
1 Safety module
2 Safety PLC
3 Safety bus
mC Microcontroller
S Safety sensor technology
SF Activated safety function

76 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Response times
Response times of the inputs

1.9.1 Response times of the inputs

Response time to an event in the sensors

Time interval (Fig. 1−12) [ms]
t1 Response time of the sensors according to manufacturer
information
t2 Input delay of the safe inputs
C15034: 0 ... 100
Input error: 2
ti Processing time in drive−based safety 4
Safety function starts after ... S
Tab. 1−7 Response time to an event in the sensors

1.9.2 Response time of the safe output

Response time of the safe output to a safety function

[ms]
Safe output SD−Out1 switches to ... 4
Tab. 1−8 Response time − safe output

1.9.3 Response times of the safety bus

Response time to an event in the sensors (input data)

Time interval (Fig. 1−12) [ms]
t1 Response time of the sensors according to manufacturer
information
t2 Input delay of the safe inputs
C15034: 0 ... 100
Input error: 2
t3 Processing time in drive−based safety 24
Input data ready for transmission after ... S
tPs Cycle time according to manufacturer
information
Input data ready for processing in the safety PLC ... S
Tab. 1−9 Response time to an event in the sensors

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 77
1 Safety engineering
Response times
Response time of encoder monitoring

Response time to a control word (output data)

Time interval (Fig. 1−12) [ms]
t4 Processing time in the safety PLC must be calculated
tPs Cycle time according to manufacturer
information
t5 Processing time in drive−based safety 14
Safety function starts after ... S
Tab. 1−10 Response time in case of a safety bus request

Information on how to calculate the processing time and transmission time of the safety
bus can be found in the documentation of the safety PLC used.

) Note!
When the safety bus communication is disturbed, it is changed to the fail−safe
state after the safety bus monitoring time (F_WD_Time) has elapsed. The
safety bus communication is passivated.

Example
ƒ After an event has occurred at a safe input, the message is fed back to drive−based
safety via the safety PLC.
ƒ Drive−based safety activates a safety function.
ƒ Hence, the maximum response time to the event is calculated as follows:
tmax response = t1 + t2 + t3 + max {tWD; tPS + t4 + tPs + t5}
When calculating the maximum response time, include the times of the safety functions,
e.g. in case of SS1 the stopping time (C15305) until STO is active.

1.9.4 Response time of encoder monitoring

Response time of encoder monitoring

[ms]
Time required to detect 12
faults caused by continuous
signal errors at the encoder can be parameterised under
12/50/100
interface. C15410

) Note!
The minimum response time must be individually determined for each system.
A longer response time leads to an increased system availability, if, for
instance, during machine set−up with safe operating stop process−related
speed jumps occur for a short time.

78 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Acceptance
Description

1.10 Acceptance

1.10.1 Description

The machine manufacturer must check and prove the operability of the safety functions
used.

Inspector
The machine manufacturer must authorise a person with expertise and knowledge of the
safety functions to carry out the test.

Test report
The test result of every safety function must be documented and signed by the inspector.

) Note!
If parameters of the safety functions are changed, the inspector must repeat
the test and record the results in the test report.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 79
1 Safety engineering
Acceptance
Periodic inspections

Scope of test
A complete test comprises the following:
ƒ Documenting the plant including the safety functions:
– Creating an overview screen of the plant
– Describing the plant
– Describing the safety equipment
– Documenting the safety functions used
ƒ Checking the function of the safety functions used:
– "Safe torque off" function, STO
– "Safe stop 1" function, SS1
– "Safe stop 2" function, SS2
– "Safe operational stop" function, SOS
– "Safe maximum speed" function, SMS
– "Safely limited speed" function, SLS
– "Safe stop emergency" function, SSE
– "Safe direction" function, SDI
– "Safely limited increment" function, SLI
– "Safely limited absolute position" function, SLP
– "Position−dependent safe speed", PDSS
– "Safe cam" function, SCA
– "Safe referencing" function, SREF
– "Repair mode select", RMS
ƒ Preparing the test report:
– Documenting the functional test
– Checking the parameters
– Signing the test report
ƒ Preparing the appendix with test records:
– Protocols from the plant
– External recording

1.10.2 Periodic inspections

The correct sequence of the safety−oriented functions must be checked in periodic

inspections. The risk analysis or applicable regulations determine the time distances
between the tests. The inspection interval should not exceed one year.

80 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Safety engineering 1
Module error messages

1.11 Module error messages

The Parameterisation & Configuration Software Manual provides information on

diagnostics & fault analysis and describes the structure of the operating system’s error
messages in the logbook.

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 81
2 Appendix
Declarations of conformity

2 Appendix

2.1 Declarations of conformity

82 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Appendix 2
Declarations of conformity

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 83
2 Appendix
Index

2.2 Index

A Logbook function
− in the controller, 75
Address code, 67
− in the SM302, 75
Address switch, 67
Application as directed, 9 M
Application range, 18 Mission time, 25
Application, as directed, 9 Mission time, 25
Applications according to Module ID, 67
− EN ISO 13849−1, 5
Motor−encoder combinations, 38
− IEC 61508, 5

N
B
Nameplate data, 17
Bus interfaces, 68

O
C
Output, safe, 33
cam, safe, 56
Cascading, 64
P
Characteristics, safety−related, 25 Parameter setting, safe, 71
Compatibility, 20 Password, length, reset, 72
Control category, 5 Performance Level, 5
Position detection, 36
D
Position−dependent safe speed, position−dependent, 55
Definitions, terms, 6
Priorisation, 40
Direction of movement, Safe ..., 53
PROFIsafe connection, 68
Proof test interval, 25
E
Emergency stop, 48
R
Error states, 74
Ramp monitoring SS1/SS2, 47
Referencing, safe, 57
F
Fail−safe status, 16 repair mode, select, 58

FSoE, connection, 70 Repair mode select, 58

Residual hazards, 10
H Response times, 76
Hazard analysis, 11 − output, 77
Restart, 41
I Risk analysis, 11
Identification, 17
Inputs, safe, 28 S
Safe cam, 56
L Safe direction, 53
Legal regulations, 9 Safe enable switch, 63
limited position, safely, 54 Safe inputs, 28

84 l EDS94AYAF EN 1.1
 Appendix 2
Index

Safe maximum speed, 49 Sensors, Overview ..., 12

Safe operation mode selector, 59 Speed
Safe output, 33 − Safe maximum ..., 49
− safely limited ..., 52
Safe parameter setting, 71
speed, position−dependent, 55
Safe position detection, 36
Speed measurement, Safe, 36
Safe referencing , 57
Stop 1
Safe speed measurement, 36 − ramp monitoring, 47
Safe stop 1, 45 − safe ..., 45
Safe stop 2, 46 Stop 2
− ramp monitoring, 47
Safe torque off, 44
− safe ..., 46
Safely limited position, 54
Stop functions, about ..., 40
Safely limited speed, 52
Safety, safety engineering, 5 T
Safety address, 67 Technical data, 24
Safety engineering, 5 − safety−related characteristics, 25
− safety functions, 40 Terms, definitions, 6
− with L−force | 9400, 5 Torque, safe torque off, 44
Safety functions, 5, 40 Total index, 84
− safety instructions, during operation, 10
Safety instructions, during operation, 10 V
Safety−related characteristics, 25 Validity of the documentation, 17

EDS94AYAF EN 1.1 l 85
 © 04/2022
F Lenze SE Service Lenze Service GmbH
Postfach 10 13 52 · 31763 Hameln Breslauer Straße 3 · 32699 Extertal
Hans−Lenze−Str. 1 · 31855 Aerzen
GERMANY GERMANY
Hannover HRB 204803
( +495154 82−0 ( 0080002446877 (24 h helpline)
Ê +495154 82−2800 Ê +49515482−1112
š [email protected] š [email protected]
ü www.lenze.com
EDS94AYAF § .UBo § EN § 1.1 § TD00
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1